웹사이트를 운영하면서 검색 노출이 갑자기 줄어들거나 특정 페이지가 사라지는 현상을 경험하면 많은 사람들이 가장 먼저 원인을 확인하려고 한다. 이러한 상황은 일반적으로 웹사이트 검색누락으로 설명되며, 검색 엔진에서 페이지가 제대로 색인되지 않거나 제외되는 경우 발생한다. 이때 자연스럽게 떠오르는 질문이 바로 웹사이트 검색누락 이메일 통지 있나요? 라는 것이다. 즉, 검색 누락이 발생했을 때 운영자에게 별도의 알림이 오는지에 대한 궁금증이다.
일반적으로 웹사이트 검색누락이 발생한다고 해서 항상 이메일로 즉시 통지가 오는 것은 아니다. 대부분의 검색 엔진은 모든 색인 변화나 노출 변동을 자동으로 이메일로 알려주지는 않기 때문이다. 다만 일부 웹마스터 도구나 검색 콘솔에서는 중요한 문제, 예를 들어 크롤링 오류, 색인 제외, 서버 오류 등이 발생했을 때 제한적으로 알림을 제공하기도 한다. 하지만 이것이 모든 웹사이트 검색누락 상황을 포함하는 것은 아니다.
웹사이트 검색누락 이메일 통지 있나요? 라는 질문의 핵심은 “실시간으로 문제를 알 수 있는가”에 있다. 실제로 검색 엔진은 수십억 개의 페이지를 관리하기 때문에 모든 변화에 대해 개별 이메일을 보내는 구조는 아니다. 대신 운영자가 직접 관리 도구에 접속하여 색인 상태, 크롤링 상태, 오류 로그 등을 확인하도록 설계되어 있다. 따라서 검색 누락 여부는 대부분 수동 확인이 필요하다.
웹사이트 검색누락 발생했을 때 가장 먼저 확인해야 할 것은 색인 상태이다. 특정 페이지가 색인에서 제외되었는지, 아니면 단순히 크롤링되지 않았는지를 확인해야 한다. 만약 중요한 페이지가 색인에서 사라졌다면 이는 검색 노출과 트래픽에 직접적인 영향을 줄 수 있다. 하지만 이런 변화가 항상 이메일로 즉시 전달되지는 않기 때문에 정기적인 모니터링이 매우 중요하다.
웹사이트 검색누락 이메일 통지 있나요?
또한 일부 경우에는 제한적인 알림이 제공되기도 한다. 예를 들어 사이트 전체에 심각한 문제가 발생하거나 보안 이슈가 있을 경우에는 검색 엔진이 이메일을 통해 경고를 보내는 경우도 있다. 그러나 이러한 알림은 웹사이트 검색누락 전체를 설명하는 것이 아니라 특정 기술적 문제에 한정되는 경우가 많다. 따라서 이메일 알림만으로 모든 상태를 파악하는 것은 어렵다.
웹사이트 검색누락은 단순한 오류가 아니라 다양한 원인으로 발생할 수 있다. 콘텐츠 품질 문제, 중복 페이지, 서버 오류, 크롤링 차단 설정 등 여러 요소가 복합적으로 작용한다. 이러한 문제들은 대부분 즉시 이메일로 통보되지 않기 때문에 운영자가 직접 데이터를 확인해야 한다. 검색 콘솔이나 분석 도구를 통해 색인 상태와 크롤링 통계를 주기적으로 점검하는 것이 가장 효과적인 방법이다.
웹사이트 검색누락 이메일 통지 있나요? 라는 질문에 대한 현실적인 답은 “부분적으로만 있다”는 것이다. 일부 중요한 오류는 이메일로 알림이 오지만, 대부분의 검색 누락은 자동 통지 없이 발생한다. 따라서 이메일에 의존하기보다는 정기적인 모니터링 시스템을 구축하는 것이 중요하다. 특히 신규 콘텐츠를 자주 발행하는 사이트일수록 색인 상태를 자주 확인해야 한다.
또한 검색 엔진은 사용자 경험을 중심으로 사이트를 평가하기 때문에, 검색 누락이 발생하더라도 즉시 알림을 제공하기보다는 전체적인 패턴을 분석한 후 문제를 반영하는 경우가 많다. 이 때문에 운영자는 변화가 발생했을 때 빠르게 대응하기 위해 직접 데이터를 확인하는 습관이 필요하다.
결국 웹사이트 검색누락은 자동 알림만으로 관리하기 어려운 영역이다. 이메일 통지 여부와 관계없이 중요한 것은 지속적인 점검과 분석이다. 웹사이트 검색누락 이메일 통지 있나요? 라는 질문의 핵심은 알림의 유무가 아니라, 얼마나 빠르게 문제를 인지하고 대응할 수 있는가에 있다. 따라서 안정적인 검색 노출을 유지하기 위해서는 자동 알림에만 의존하지 않고 능동적인 관리가 필요하다.
In the business world, understanding how does trust play a role in B2B networking is essential for companies and professionals seeking long-term success. B2B networking is not simply about exchanging contacts or attending events; it is built on relationships that require credibility, reliability, and mutual respect. Trust acts as the foundation of these connections, influencing whether partnerships, collaborations, or deals can develop effectively. Without trust, even the most promising opportunities in B2B networking can fail to materialize, making it a critical factor for sustainable growth.
Trust in b2b networking begins with consistency and reliability. Professionals who consistently follow through on commitments, provide accurate information, and maintain ethical standards are more likely to be perceived as trustworthy by their peers. Understanding how does trust play a role in B2B networking emphasizes that repeated positive interactions strengthen relationships over time. When businesses demonstrate that they can be relied upon, they encourage other organizations to engage openly, share insights, and explore collaborative opportunities, creating a network built on mutual confidence.
Another aspect where trust is crucial in b2b networking is in knowledge sharing and collaboration. Professionals are more likely to exchange valuable information, insights, and strategies when they trust that their counterpart will respect confidentiality and act with integrity. Recognizing how does trust play a role in B2B networking highlights the importance of fostering an environment where information flows freely without fear of exploitation. Companies that cultivate trust through transparency and professionalism create stronger networks, which can lead to innovative solutions and shared successes.
How does trust play a role in B2B networking?
Trust also plays a role in decision-making during b2b networking interactions. When businesses engage with partners, clients, or suppliers, decisions often depend on the confidence they have in each other’s abilities and intentions. Understanding how does trust play a role in B2B networking shows that a lack of trust can slow down negotiations, prevent agreements, or result in missed opportunities. On the other hand, when trust is established, companies can make decisions more quickly, knowing that their partners will uphold commitments and act in good faith, which ultimately accelerates growth and efficiency.
In addition, trust enhances reputation and credibility within professional networks. Businesses known for their integrity and reliability attract more partners and clients, strengthening their influence in the industry. Recognizing how does trust play a role in B2B networking means acknowledging that word-of-mouth recommendations, referrals, and repeat collaborations are often built on the perception of trustworthiness. Companies that prioritize trust not only maintain strong relationships but also expand their reach and opportunities through positive endorsements from their network.
Finally, trust contributes to resilience in b2b networking relationships. In challenging situations, such as economic fluctuations or project setbacks, partnerships built on trust are more likely to endure and adapt. Understanding how does trust play a role in B2B networking includes appreciating that trust fosters loyalty, patience, and cooperation, which are invaluable when navigating obstacles. Strong, trust-based networks enable businesses to overcome challenges collaboratively rather than facing them in isolation.
In conclusion, trust is a fundamental element in b2b networking that affects relationships, collaboration, decision-making, reputation, and resilience. By cultivating trust through consistency, transparency, and integrity, businesses can build networks that support long-term growth and sustained success. Understanding how does trust play a role in B2B networking ensures that professional connections are not only established but also nurtured into reliable, productive partnerships.
Marketers have been sold a dream: Collect more data, and you’ll get better insights to make smarter decisions.
We all chased big data, embraced digital transformation, and invested in AI-powered analytics in the hopes that the elusive 360-degree view of each customer would finally materialize.
As it turns out, chasing that perfect customer view is a lot like chasing Bigfoot. Many folks swear they’ve seen it but fail to offer proof. Usually, the reality turns out to be blurry pictures that seem to have been taken by a potato.
Yet most marketers are drowning in numbers while starving for insight. Despite endless reports, dashboards, and attribution models, marketing teams struggle to answer fundamental questions, including:
What value does content marketing provide?
What drives conversions?
Which customers are about to churn?
Are we spending our budgets in the right places?
How do we implement a personalization strategy?
Instead of clarity, we got data silos, conflicting metrics, and an overwhelming flood of numbers that rarely add up to a meaningful picture.
More data didn’t solve marketing’s problems — it just made them bigger.
Watch the video above, read the rest of this article, or register to download this research paper to learn what will (and won’t) solve your data challenges.
More dashboards aren’t the answer
You’re probably collecting more data than ever. And you’re not alone. The average enterprise marketing team pulls insights from 10 or more different data sources — CRM systems, web analytics, marketing automation platforms, social media monitoring tools, and now AI-driven personalization engines.
The result? 67% of CMOs say they feel overwhelmed by the sheer volume of marketing data. And that’s because most teams aren’t equipped to make sense of it all.
The real problem has never been having enough data. The problem is the inability to unify, contextualize, and act on all that data.
For years, companies have tried to fix the data problem by throwing technology at it. They’ve tried:
Better dashboards — but having more graphs doesn’t mean having more clarity.
More AI-powered analytics — but even the best algorithms can’t fix disconnected, low-quality data.
New attribution models —but mapping customer behavior with flawed data leads to flawed insights.
What’s missing isn’t another analytics tool — it’s a strategic approach (i.e., a way to make marketing data actionable).
Enter a unified data strategy
The answer isn’t more data. It’s a better approach to data.
A unified data strategy (UDS) isn’t just another acronym or buzzword — it’s a rethinking of how marketing teams use data. A UDS prioritizes data cohesion over data collection, context over volume, and actionability over noise.
A UDS prioritizes:
Data integration to connect marketing, sales, and customer success data into a single, structured ecosystem that supports collaboration.
Data quality to ensure information is accurate, complete, and reliable (because bad data is worse than no data).
Governance to establish ownership and accessibility so teams stop working with their own conflicting versions of the truth.
Actionable insights to put the focus on what the data means instead of reporting what it says.
A properly executed UDS transforms how marketing teams operate. With a UDS in place, teams have the opportunity to:
Make smarter decisions. No more guessing or gut feelings — you’ll have reliable intelligence that all teams agree is accurate.
Deliver truly personalized experiences. A UDS lets you stop relying on generic segments and start tailoring interactions based on actual customer behavior.
Increase efficiency. You’ll spend less time fixing bad data, reconciling reports, and debating conflicting KPIs.
Ensure compliance. A structured, governed approach helps you keep up with GDPR, CCPA, and evolving privacy regulations.
The next step: Data alone won’t save you
It’s easy to think that a new software platform or a more sophisticated algorithm will magically solve your data problems. If buying better software were all it takes, every marketing leader would be a genius.
An effective UDS isn’t about more software, dashboards, or numbers. It’s about something more fundamental: team and process.
Too many marketing teams focus on the what (technology to collect and store data) but neglect the how and the who.
The challenge lies in addressing the organization’s approach to data, not just the tools. Solving it requires a shift in perspective, moving from a technology-centric view to a human-centric one.
An effective UDS requires all three elements:
The right technology: Yes, technology is essential. But it’s not just about having the latest and greatest. It’s about selecting tools that facilitate collaboration and streamline workflows. It’s about ensuring data is unified, accurate, actionable, and accessible to the entire team. Think of building a shared language, not just a data warehouse.
The right mindset: This is where the team truly comes into play. A data-hoarding mentality creates silos and hinders progress. But fostering a culture of data sharing and collaboration doesn’t require de-siloing. You can let those silos stand if you focus on creating collaborative communication between them and empowering everyone to contribute their insights. The goal is to create a shared understanding of the data’s value and how teams can use it to achieve common goals.
The right execution: Even the best insights are worthless if they don’t translate into action. You’ll need to define a process for turning data into actionable strategies. That means establishing workflows to enable teams to quickly respond to changing market conditions and customer needs. It also requires that insights are integrated into the day-to-day work of every team member.
How to build this human-centric unified data strategy
The solution lies in creating a cross-functional data team that brings together contributors from different departments — marketing, sales, product, and customer service.
This team will be responsible for:
Defining clear data governance policies by establishing guidelines for data collection, storage, and usage.
Developing standardized data definitions and metrics to make sure everyone speaks the same language.
Creating a data-driven decision-making framework that outlines the process for how data will inform strategic decisions.
Providing ongoing training and support to empower team members to use data effectively in their work.
I explored all these topics in more detail in a research paper (registration required) I created for Velir. If you’re interested, download it to see if this approach resonates with you.
One thing I know for sure: For a unified data strategy to be more than 2025’s version of the 360-degree customer view, you won’t need more data. But you will need more daring.
Dare to create processes that collaborate across silos. Dare to empower your team. Dare to see beyond the numbers to the human story they tell.
It’s your story. Tell it well.
Subscribe to workday or weekly CMI emails to get Rose-Colored Glasses in your inbox each week.
The Content Marketing Institute team byline indicates this article reflects the collective work of the CMI team. CMI is a global marketing education and training organization dedicated to advancing the practice of content marketing. We create and curate content experiences that teach marketers and creators from enterprise brands, small businesses, and agencies how to attract and retain customers through compelling, multichannel storytelling. Global brands turn to CMI for strategic consultation, research, and training and certification, and send teams to Content Marketing World, the largest content marketing-focused event, the Marketing Analytics & Data Science (MADS) conference, and CMI digital events every year. Follow @CMIContent on Facebook, LinkedIn, and Instagram, and use the hashtag #CMWorld.
Want a good book to advance your content skills, inspire creativity, or grow your business acumen?
Look no further. One of these 40 books recommended by the CMI community is sure to help (and not coincidentally, given this is Women’s History Month, they’re all authored or co-authored by women).
I’ve grouped the recommendations into the following categories: content marketing — strategy, planning, and writing; general marketing and business; public relations and communications; and psychology and persuasion.
Description: For a quarter century, more than one million readers — scribes and scribblers of all ages and abilities — have been inspired by Anne Lamott’s hilarious, big-hearted, homespun advice. The advice begins with the simple words of wisdom passed down from Anne’s father — also a writer — in the iconic passage that gives the book its title.
Recommended by Adam P. Newton, copywriter and content manager, NRG Energy: “A classic recommendation for writers, this book should be pored over by marketers looking to re-examine how and why they tell stories, especially when it comes to drafting, revisions, clarity, and purpose.”
Description: Using real-world and imagined examples, this practical guide supports you through the content design process one step at a time. This second edition includes updated case studies and a new chapter on journey mapping.
Recommended by Teresa Lee, content manager, Datos:“This is the bible of content creation. It’s relevant not just for content writers but for everyone who deals with content (which is pretty much everyone) and practices what it preaches: The book has a unique, clear, and user-friendly design.”
Description: The Content Formula answers the biggest question currently on marketers’ minds: What is the ROI of content marketing? This book provides a step-by-step guide for marketers and is divided into three parts: how to build the business case for content marketing, how to find the budget to establish a new content marketing program, and how to measure content marketing success in business terms.
Recommended by Aqsa Tabassam, CMO, EvolveDash: “Before delving into the content space of marketing, this book reveals the whys and hows of this field. It also describes the nature of expense you are expected to invest in content marketing. According to the authors, the measurement of ROI establishes whether your content marketing strategy is helpful for business or not.”
Description: Trained journalist and award-winning content marketer Melanie Deziel shows you how to maximize your creativity by systematizing it. This simple framework catalyzes the brainstorming process, making idea generation effortless and nearly automatic. No more writer’s block. No more asking, “What should I post?” No more waiting for that “big idea” to show up in its own time. This system allows storytellers from any industry to produce fresh story ideas on demand at any time.
Recommended by Adrien Lemaire, content manager, Narratempo: “Learn how to get more ideas for your content.”
Description: The content itself is one part of content marketing, but in many respects, it is not the most important. Before you start thinking about what types of content you need to create, you need to lay the groundwork. Think of this as the edge of the puzzle that holds the whole picture together.
Recommended by Robbie Schneider, director of U.S. communications, Health Tech Without Borders:“It’s an easy, actionable read.”
Description: Blogs, YouTube, Facebook, and other platforms are giving everyone a “voice,” including organizations and their customers. Content Rules equips you for online success as a one-stop source on the art and science of developing content that people care about. This coverage is interwoven with case studies.
Recommended by Erin Read, marketing communications director, Polaris MEP: “It’s not new, just fabulous. I have used it to train new content marketers and to help clients generate and evolve story ideas. Especially useful are their examples of effective content marketing for ‘non-sexy’ industries.”
Description: Armed with this book, you can confidently tackle difficult activities like telling your boss or client what’s wrong with their content, getting the budget to do content work, and aligning stakeholders on a common vision. It’s like having your own personal consulting firm on retainer with a complete array of tools and tips for every challenge you’ll face.
Recommended byClare Edwards, content design manager, Nationwide Building Society
Description: Even if content strategy isn’t your job, content’s probably your problem – and probably more than you think. So many ways, so much content … so where’s the problem? That is the problem. The solution is content strategy, and this book offers real-world examples and approaches you can adopt, no matter your role on the team.
Recommended byMarisa Peacock, founder and chief strategist, The Strategic Peacock
Description: Better content means better business. Your content is a mess; the website redesigns didn’t help, and the new CMS just made things worse. Or, maybe your content is full of potential: You know new revenue and cost-savings opportunities exist, but you’re not sure where to start. How can you realize the value of content while planning for its long-term success? For organizations all over the world, this is the go-to content strategy handbook.
Recommended by Kilian Drewel, product marketer, team.blue: “The book has aged well and still has some solid advice in it.”
Description: This book is for entrepreneurs and the leaders of B2B businesses who want to use content marketing to bring a predictable stream of qualified leads into their sales cycles and need a replicable system to make it happen. This book provides that system – a step-by-step process that can be executed in any business to generate qualified leads and more conversions with content marketing.
Description: DataStory teaches you the most effective ways to turn your data into narratives that blend the power of language, numbers, and graphics. This book is not about visualizing data. Instead, you’ll learn how to transform numbers into narratives to drive action.
Recommended by Penny Gralewski, strategic marketing executive and communication leader: “Whether you’re explaining data to a large customer base or a small leadership team, this book helps you develop a story that moves your audience. Agency contacts always hear me ask, ‘How can this be more Duarte-like?’”
Description: Content strategy is essential to success. But where did it come from? Why does it matter? And what does the content renaissance mean for you? This brief guide explores content strategy’s roots and quickly and expertly demonstrates not only how it’s done, but how you can do it well. A compelling read for both experienced content strategists and those making the transition from other fields.
Recommended byMarisa Peacock, founder and chief strategist, The Strategic Peacock
Description: A hands-on field guide to consistently creating page-turning content your audience loves (and that delivers real results). The updated edition of Everybody Writes delivers all the practical, how-to advice and insight you need for the process and strategy of content creation, production, and publishing.
Recommended by Michelle Garrett, founder, Garrett Public Relations: “I always recommend Ann Handley’s Everybody Writes, which is so helpful no matter where you find yourself in your business writing journey.”
Description: If its purpose is to convey facts, findings, or instructions, it needs to be read only once for its content to be clear. If its purpose is to entertain or to provoke thought, it makes readers want to come back for more. This guide covers four essential aspects of good writing: individual words, punctuation, syntax and structure, and style. Filled with self-test exercises and whimsical literary quotations, Grammatically Correct steers clear of academic stuffiness, focusing instead on practical strategies and intuitive explanations.
Recommended byTim Harnett, senior manager, content and research, Simpler Media Group: “It wasn’t written with content marketers in mind, but it’s the best book on the nuances of grammar and usage out there.”
Description: This book shows how to succeed by taking a simplified yet strategic approach to standing out and driving revenue impact. It covers time-proven strategies to create video, audio, social media, and longer-form content that audiences will actually want to consume and how to do so in a genuinely inclusive way.
Recommended by Dashnor Dosku, Realtor: “It explains the ins and outs of the marketing industry. It is an excellent book to read.”
Description: It lays the “hows” of content marketing and strategy out, in a step-by-step approach, book form. Each section has written exercises built to solidify what you’re reading and learning – you’ll be able to fill these out with a pen.
Description: You’ll learn every skill it takes to write great copy for the web, from the absolute fundamentals of using storytelling in great online content all the way to knowing how to write for both search engines and people, what it takes to craft different forms of content on the web, and much more. A bonus chapter reveals how to market yourself and make income as an online copywriter in a modern world.
Recommended byFemi Oyelola, freelance B2B SaaS writer: “So You Think You Can Write? is a must-read for anyone getting into content marketing. The book walks you through different content types in content marketing and how to tell one apart from the other.”
Description: You cannot connect meaningfully with your audience if you bore them … and most business marketing stinks because it is transactional, superficial, and not human. The good news: It doesn’t have to be that way because everyone is creative. Your inner kid is smart because it knows how to play. What if you could create engaging marketing content and storytelling and generate kick-ass, fun, and relevant ideas for stories, articles, branding, social media campaigns, sales presentations, and even new products? Well, there is a fun way to do exactly that: by applying key concepts from the world of improvisation … to your marketing, sales, branding, and products page – or business stage.
Recommended by Emily Phelps, speaker, marketer, and storyteller
Description: Packed with fun examples, this book shows you how to keep spellings straight, avoid comma splices and grocer’s apostrophes, pluralize last names, understand when to use fewer instead of less, know when – and when not to – capitalize mom and dad. These little lessons are amusing, memorable, and nothing like any English class you’ve ever attended. Before long, you’ll feel more confident in your writing and notice that you’re enjoying it more than ever.
Recommended bySarah Greesonbach, founder, B2B Writing Institute: “Sometimes when you’re up to your eyes in content all day, you need a reminder that language is fun, frisky, and full of quirky, intriguing rules. Writers are smitten with those rules, not intimidated by them. We want to read about them in a book like Sara’s.”
Description: This book helps you to understand your content maturity and how to increase it. It explains the different content roles, including the nuances between them and the overlaps. It’ll help you recruit the right content experts – explaining what to look for and how to interview them – who’ll take your digital journeys to the next level and beyond.
Recommended byClare Edwards, content design manager, Nationwide Building Society
Description: How do you build a brand in a time of information overload where the media are so fragmented that you can barely get the attention of your audience? And how do you ensure that everyone tells the same story on all those channels? Carlijn Postma takes you to the place where content is the product and where people know how to attract and retain an audience: Hollywood. Binge Marketing is not another stuffy marketing book but a refreshing look at marketing in the 21st century.
Recommended by Joakim Ditlev, chief commercial officer, Personpilot, and Ellen Kleinlangevelsloo, content strategist: “A refreshing approach on content marketing.”
Description: There is a new era of marketing upon us. The time of reach, frequency, and campaign-oriented approaches is over. And if businesses don’t evolve into this new era, they may find themselves on the wrong side of history. The authors synthesized five years of research with global brands into a set of “better practices” that weave together both the “why” and the “how” of navigating this new landscape.
Recommended by Fernando Labastida, founder, Organic AI Marketing: “One of my all-time favorites.”
Description: In this essential book, leading business growth strategist David Meerman Scott and fandom expert Reiko Scott explore the neuroscience of fandom and interview young entrepreneurs, veteran business owners, startup founders, nonprofits, and companies big and small to pinpoint which practices separate organizations that flourish from those stuck in stagnation. They lay out a road map for converting customers’ ardor into buying power, pulling one-of-a-kind examples from a wide range of organizations.
Description: This book takes a different approach to learning Excel – leading with curiosity rather than terror. It offers a practical way to tackle Excel learning and encourages you to develop a detective mindset as you go through it.
Recommended by Carrie Eddins, owner, The Blondepreneur Ltd.:“It’s funny (Anne is Irish and has a sharp wit) and uses stories to share how to find a way through the cells. It’s genius.”
Description: It is not the high customer satisfaction itself that is the problem. It is what those metrics (that data) might not tell you that’s the issue. Discover how understanding the distinction between customers and users can reshape your business strategies.
Recommended by Carrie Eddins, owner, The Blondepreneur Ltd.:“It shares perceptive and much-needed insights to help us all understand our customer journey on a whole other level. It’s so clever.”
Description: This book answers the question of how to tie individual competence with innovation techniques to direct corporate outcomes. It shows how to create a unified, idea-driven employee base that delivers more ideas in a shorter amount of time. Ultimately, this is the path that makes organizations genuinely nimble, passionate, innovative powerhouses that deliver extraordinary outcomes for sustained periods of time.
Recommended by Ann Gynn, editorial consultant, Content Marketing Institute: “I get tired of seeing or doing the same content marketing over and over. Going outside my typical arena and reading a book like Carla’s refreshes my brain. It inspires me to think differently about how I operate and how the systems I’m involved with could be done better.”
Description: This book provides digital marketers with a practical guide to managing their mental health and building resilience in the face of constant pressures and online negativity.
Recommended by Robbie Schneider, the book’s author and director of U.S. communications, Health Tech Without Borders: “Even if you don’t work in the social space full time, understanding the societal context we’re working in and taking steps to improve internal processes and communications is essential for marketing teams.”
Description: In a world where trust is scarce, and competition is rampant, this book emerges as the essential guide for expert business owners navigating the murky waters of the expertise economy. It offers not just hope but tangible strategies to transform your business from overlooked to overbooked.
Recommended by Carrie Eddins, owner, The Blondepreneur Ltd.: “It shares how to remain relevant and become a highly sought-after and trusted expert. And who doesn’t want that with what’s happening now?”
Description: A timeless classic about the magic of boundless love that’s been treasured for generations! “Once you are Real you can’t become unreal again. It lasts for always.”
Recommended by Bethany Shaffer, senior content lead, Verbatim: “I remembered (CMI chief strategy advisor) Robert Rose quoting this excerpt from this kids’ classic. The context was how it may temporarily cost (hurt) brands to be genuine.”
Description: This book is a succinct distillation of wisdom gained from over two decades of boots-on-the-ground work in public relations and marketing. Using her signature no-nonsense style, Michelle Garrett crafts her own experience and stories from experts in the field into down-to-earth takeaways you can apply instantly. By following her smart blueprints, you’ll be able to smoothly navigate frustrations working with reporters, ethical dilemmas, and budgetary constraints, all while rocketing toward success.
Recommended by Ann Gynn, editorial consultant, Content Marketing Institute: “B2B brands aren’t always as into PR as their B2C counterparts. And yet, it’s an invaluable tool, particularly for B2B content. This easy-to-read book walks you through the path from the why to the how and what now.”
Description: Kivi Leroux Miller reveals what she’s learned from coaching hundreds of nonprofit communications directors and teams. Effective nonprofit communication is about much more than list targeting, relevant messaging, email open rates, and social media scheduling. The most successful communications directors and teams are those who are CALM — collaborative, agile, logical, and methodical.
Recommended by Rhea Landholm, communications manager, Center for Rural Affairs: “Whenever I need to check myself, I pick this one up. Nonprofit marketers (and probably for-profit marketers) tend to work long hours and say ‘yes’ because they believe in the mission and want to drive it forward. When I find myself working at 10 p.m. or even telling people I’m too busy for this, too busy for that, I think of what Kivi says in this book: Don’t make yourself a martyr. Be CALM.”
Description: A singular and brilliant elucidation of literary strategies, this book also brings high spirits and wit to its original conclusions. It is a liberating manifesto that says, “Let’s leave the outdated modes behind and, in thinking of new modes, bring feeling back to experimentation.” It will appeal to serious readers and writers alike.
Recommended by Adam P. Newton, copywriter and content manager, NRG Energy: “This remarkable and clear-eyed book provides exquisite tips and fresh perspectives for authentic creative work. It’s an essential resource for marketers, whether you think of yourself as a writer or simply want to improve how you use language to improve your communication.”
Description: This practical guide combines the science and art of story to help you influence the change you need to see. It’s a proven framework that makes ideas sustainable, adaptable, and unforgettable.
Recommended by Carrie Eddins, owner, The Blondepreneur Ltd.: “It offers practical ways to make your ideas and you unforgettable; truly worth its weight in gold.”
Description: Leadership is not about titles, status, and wielding power. A leader is anyone who takes responsibility for recognizing the potential in people and ideas and has the courage to develop that potential. When we dare to lead, we don’t pretend to have the right answers; we stay curious and ask the right questions. We don’t see power as finite and hoard it; we know that power becomes infinite when we share it with others. We don’t avoid difficult conversations and situations; we lean into vulnerability when it’s necessary to do good work.
Recommended byAnnemaria Nicholson, senior manager AI and content ops, Salesforce: “How to be more vulnerable, open and courageous, even when it’s difficult.”
Description: The authors equip you with the same communication tools that great leaders like Steve Jobs, Howard Schultz, and Dr. Martin Luther King Jr. used to move people. They lay out a plan to help you lead people through the five stages of transformation using speeches, stories, ceremonies, and symbols. This visual and accessible communication guidebook will show you how Apple, Starbucks, IBM, charity: water, and others have mobilized people to embrace bold changes.
Recommended byJon Pettman-Tideswell, head of international sales and client services, Executive Interviews: “A brilliant book about the power of storytelling to deliver change.”
Description: Many experts have offered techniques on how to improve your own memory, but not how to influence other people’s memory – and impact their decisions. Drawing on the latest research in neuroscience and cognitive psychology, Carmen Simon, Ph.D., reveals how to avoid the hazards of random recall and deliver just the right amount of content. No more redundant meetings, rambling emails, or anemic presentations. In Impossible to Ignore, she shows you how to execute a proven three-step plan for persuasion.
Recommended byDennis Shiao, founder, Attention Retention: “In content marketing, we talk a lot about planning, creating, and distributing content. We talk less about what impact our content drove, including whether people even remember it. Dr. Simon details the neuroscience behind how to influence people’s memory. It’s something content marketers – in fact, all marketers – can benefit from. I think I need to reread it. The concept of the book is one reason I named my marketing consultancy Attention Retention.”
Description: Luvvie Ajayi Jones is known for her trademark wit, warmth, and perpetual truth-telling. But even she’s been challenged by the enemy of progress known as fear. She was once afraid to call herself a writer and nearly skipped out on doing a TED Talk that changed her life because of imposter syndrome. As she shares in Professional Troublemaker, she’s not alone.
Recommended by Stephanie Stahl, managing director, Content Marketing Institute: “Need help conquering fears of writing, presenting at a big event, pitching a radical new idea, challenging the status quo in your content marketing operations, speaking up when something isn’t right, writing a better bio that reveals your superpowers? Luvvie’s book will give you the courage to have a sharp tongue and a golden heart – the perfect combination for a professional troublemaker. This book isn’t about being a troll, a hater, or a contrarian. It’s about conquering fears and being honest and authentic. My advice – listen to the audible version because it’s more powerful hearing Luvvie read the book.”
Description: This book shows how to apply behavioral science principles in key areas of marketing, including marketing communications, email, direct mail, ad campaigns, social media marketing, and sales funnel conversion strategies. Highly practical and accessible, it includes case studies and examples from AT&T, Apple, Spotify, and The Wall Street Journal, showing how these approaches have been used in practice.
Recommended by Daniel Paulling, director of communications and publications, U.S. Masters Swimming: “The book is brilliant.”
Description: In this second edition of Webs of Influence, Nathalie Nahai brings together the latest insights from the world of psychology, neuroscience, and behavioral economics to explain the underlying dynamics and motivations behind consumer behavior. This book will show you how to apply specific principles to improve your marketing, products, and websites, enabling you to engage with your customers in a more meaningful way.
Recommended by Steve Linney, freelance marketer: “Penny-drop moment around website psychology.”
Description: Author and vibrant keynote speaker Annette Simmons teaches you how to narrate personal experiences as well as borrowed stories in a way that demonstrates authenticity, builds emotional connections, inspires perseverance, and stimulates the imagination. Whether you are leading a presentation, in a department meeting, or having lunch with a potential customer, you will learn how to relate a compelling story to the topic at hand and make an invaluable impact that could not be made otherwise.
Recommended by Emily Phelps, speaker, marketer, and storyteller
One more thing: Why you never saw ‘female’ until now
Our last recommendation is not a book but a lesson in inclusive writing. When I asked for book ideas on social media, I referenced “female authors.” I received thoughtful feedback on the use of female vs. women (thanks, Dennis Shiao!). So, I did some research.
Now, as a person in middle age who enjoys good grammar, I typically follow AP Style, using “female” as the adjective and “woman” as the noun. But I’ve learned more about how those words are interpreted.
This 2019 piece by Mary Norris in the New Yorker delves into a conversation that happened at a panel she attended at ACES: The Society for Editing (formerly American Copy Editors Society). TL;DR? Here’s the no. 1 reason to use “woman” instead of “female,” from a BuzzFeed article on the subject:
’Female’ is a scientific term that refers to the sex of a species that is capable of producing children. The term ‘woman’ refers specifically to human beings, while ‘female’ could refer to any species.
Now that our editorial team has expanded our understanding of the terms, we’ve updated our style guide to “woman” – adjective or noun.
Now, back to the books. Which books by women authors do you recommend to your fellow content marketers? Please share on social and tag #CMWorld.
How many times have you rolled your eyes or screamed (silently) about an unnecessary or misguided request crossing your content marketing desk?
You know what I’m talking about:
Sales asks for a new piece of collateral for a prospect meeting next week.
Your boss adds another project to your lengthy to-do list.
A top executive messages about launching a new social media channel.
A source demands content approval after the interview.
A fellow team member suggests that you assume responsibility for something they don’t want to do.
How do you mitigate the frustration?
Well, first, if you’re face to face with the requester, don’t roll your eyes or make a peep. Second, pause before you respond. From there, follow the general principles of good communication.
And to get specific, use one of these scripts tailored for common marketing scenarios. (Though they’re written as emails, the verbiage works for in-person conversations, too.)
Ground yourself in good communication
You’re a professional, so you know the value of effective communication. But let’s have Irfan ul Haq and Riffat Faizan remind us: “Effective communication … fosters strong business relationships, facilitating mutual trust and collaboration among business partners and/or organizations within an industry.”
Yes, you must have a trusting relationship with the people you work with because it affects every interaction you have with them. You also want to be seen as a team player, so a collaborative spirit is a must.
Though Irfan and Riffat wrote the article to help employers, the advice works for employees as well. Among their communication tips that will help in tough conversations:
Use active listening (persuade, don’t command).
Tailor your language.
Focus on the message/content, not the person.
One more piece of advice: “Before sending out any communication, take a moment to scrutinize and evaluate the message. Ensure clarity, identify the target audience, anticipate their perception, and align the message appropriately with the cultural environment.”
That advice on effective communication should sound familiar. After all, most of it is what you should do for effective content marketing, too.
Now, let’s get to those challenging scenarios:
Scenario 1: New request for already overloaded to-do list
Request:
Hi Devon,
I know you’re already busy, but we just found out the new blog must launch a month earlier than planned. So, I need you to start creating cover graphic images for each article this week. We’ll need five by next week to set up the site for launch and will keep at that pace for the next few months.
Tulula Marketing Boss
Response:
Hi Tulula,
Wow — that’s a big change. I can’t imagine how that’s affected your schedule, too. I have a few questions so I can better understand the parameters and timing.
When can I have the text to review for each article? I usually read through them for inspiration to create the image. If they’re not ready now, are the headlines available? That would expedite the process. And if that’s not an option, can you share the topics?
You mentioned needing the first five by next week. Is it possible to space out the deadline so I deliver by the end of each day? If not, what’s the hard deadline for the group of images?
Thanks for answering my questions. With this information, I can better understand the scope of work and timing, so I can readjust my workload. I may need to ask for your help in prioritizing what you want done in the next few weeks to ensure I’m delivering what’s expected within the time allowed.
Devon Graphic Designer
Why this response works:
Shows empathy for the sender making the request.
Gives the request the appropriate attention.
Indicates interest in executing the request without giving an immediate yes.
Suggests steps to help expedite requests.
Foreshadows that the worker may need to readjust priorities to accommodate the request.
Scenario 2: Big boss makes non-strategic ask of marketing
Request:
Hey Mary,
I was talking with my husband last night. He mentioned that he just got a Bluesky account because Twitter, or should I say X , is a mess and no one is using it.
It got me thinking. Our brand should get rid of its X account and create a new one on Bluesky.
Let me know when it’s ready, and I’ll update the social account handles in my signature.
Thanks,
Belinda CEO
Response:
Hi Belinda,
Thanks for sharing your thoughts on Bluesky and X. I know you’re always thinking ahead about what’s best for the brand and its public-facing presence.
I agree with your husband that X has turned into a challenging social media space. Though in its relative nascency, Bluesky is growing and certainly does present an opportunity.
However, after reviewing the brand’s social media strategy and our engagement data on X, deleting that account might not be the most strategic move at this time. Though growth is stagnant, we still have about 100K followers, and engagement rates are better than industry average benchmarks.
We have claimed the Bluesky account handles for our brand. I just asked Bob to make sure all the standard info for the account — images, descriptions, etc. — is in place. Everything is set.
Given the lack of activity on Bluesky for our industry at this time, I recommend investing a small amount of time in cross posting our content from X rather than putting all our eggs in the Bluesky basket. We’ll continue to monitor Bluesky’s growth and engagement as we plan future resource allocation, so when it’s worth building a new audience there, we’ll be ready.
I also have seen anecdotally that as interest in X has dropped, interest in our LinkedIn content has grown. So, we are working on how to devote more resources to that platform since we know our audience is already there and engaging.
I’d be happy to discuss this further and present a more detailed analysis of the potential risks and benefits. Would you like to get a meeting on the calendar?
Thanks,
Mary Social Media Manager
Why this response works:
Acknowledges the request.
Agrees with the person who suggested the idea.
Notes the request’s difference from the brand’s existing strategy.
Provides data to illustrate the recommended response.
Compromises by taking a small step to address the overall request.
Pivots to an adjacent topic that delivers what the requester ultimately wants.
Indicates a willingness to continue the discussion while foreshadowing that it will involve more data to prove the recommendation.
Scenario 3: Sales places order for content (and it’s not marketing’s job)
Request:
Hi Jovanna,
Good news — we have a big hot prospect meeting next week!
To show them how great it would be to work with us, we want to give them some customized sales collateral for their industry. Your team is so great at creating print materials, we need marketing to create it.
We need it by Monday. Let me know what you need from me to execute the project.
Thanks so much!
Samuel Sales Director
Response:
Dear Samuel,
That’s great news! It’s good to see all the positive activity happening in sales. Your idea of customized collateral is a good one, as everybody prefers to see how a prospective vendor can serve them specifically.
Though the marketing team isn’t equipped to deliver what you need in that timeframe, I can offer some alternatives. I would be happy to share the names of freelance writers with whom we work and who are already familiar with the brand. Or, if you opt to have someone in sales do it, I can provide links to some existing marketing materials that may help them.
While I know your request is for a single client meeting, if you envision a need for more sales collateral, I would be happy to offer guidance on how to set that up on your team since it’s outside marketing’s responsibility.
We certainly can brief your team on brand messaging and style, share potentially helpful marketing content files, and review any sales collateral to ensure it aligns with brand standards.
So, let me know if you need the freelancer names or potentially relevant marketing material for the meeting, and best of luck in landing the new client.
Jovanna Director of Marketing
Why this response works:
Praises the sales team and lets the sender know the idea is a good one.
Quickly declines the request but offers help for them to accomplish it.
Addresses the unsaid elephant in the room — sales thinks marketing takes content orders.
Outlines how marketing can help (be a team player) without doing the work requested.
Scenario 4: Subject matter expert asks for content approval after the interview
Request:
Hi Lawrence,
I enjoyed our interview yesterday. I always like an opportunity to share my expertise to help people. Can you send over the final version so I can approve it before publication?
Thanks,
Shawn Subject Matter Expert
Response:
Hi Shawn,
I’m glad you liked doing the interview. Your special insight into the topic will really be helpful to our readers.
I certainly can send over a draft of the article so you can review it to ensure its accuracy. I plan to have it complete by Monday and will need any factual corrections by Friday. If that timing is a problem, please let me know.
Lawrence Writer
Why this response works:
Compliments the sender’s contribution.
Details what the writer will actually do without declining the request.
Provides review timing to set expectations and gives the sender the opportunity to speak up now if that doesn’t work.
Scenario 5: Colleague wants to push work onto your plate
Request:
Hi Vickram,
I have 10 of the 100 bios needed for the website done. It’s been hard finding time to write them with all the new requests and emails bombarding my inbox.
Richard reminded me today that all the bios need to go to the proofreader in two weeks. I’m on vacation Wednesday, Thursday, and Friday so that only leaves me eight workdays, which isn’t enough time.
I need you to take on some of the writing. If you can do 20 in the next two weeks, I can get the rest done by the deadline.
Thanks in advance for your help.
John Content Team Member
Response:
Hi John,
I totally understand how difficult it is to get a big project like that done while still having to address those day-to-day activities. I also understand how tight that deadline is and the pressure a vacation adds to that.
Given my current workload with the daily blog updates and writing the slide decks for our big upcoming event, I unfortunately won’t be able to take on any of the bios. My priority has to remain with those projects already on my to-do list.
Of course, I’d also be happy to reach out to Richard to see if he wants to reprioritize my to-do list so I can help write the bios. If you’d like me to do that, just let me know.
Vickram Content Team Member
Why this response works:
Validates the requester’s challenges and shows empathy.
Clearly states, without apologizing, that the recipient won’t do the task.
Offers reasons why the recipient declines the request.
Presents an alternative solution (asking the boss) even though it’s not one the sender will likely accept.
Breathe, then reply
If you follow this advice when a scenario presents itself, your eyes won’t roll as much, and your silent screams will lessen. You may also receive fewer inane and unnecessary asks as the requesters will better understand marketing’s role and recognize you’re not someone who says yes to every request.
And what if you face a different scenario or circumstance? The reply principles remain the same:
Acknowledge the person and the request with empathy whenever possible.
Explain the reasoning behind your response.
Offer compromises or alternatives.
Even if the requester is disappointed in the response, your respectful and direct communication approach can go a long way in building trust that you’re doing what’s best for the brand and its marketing.
Want more content marketing tips, insights, and examples? Subscribe to workday or weekly emails from CMI.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
For all the announcements on LinkedIn celebrating the landing of a new job, I see as many (or more) marketers increasingly asking for help landing a new job.
Applying for marketing roles today feels like an open-world video game called Tears of the Resume. You collect skills, grind through endless side quests (application forms), and battle increasingly powerful bosses (interview panels).
But just when you think you’ve unlocked the final dungeon, the employer vanishes into the mist — leaving behind a cryptic, automated rejection email.
Yeah, it’s not easy.
But I have an idea that might help. If you’re considering a job move or are already trying to make one, consider both how you’re developing your career and marketing yourself as a candidate. Watch the video above or read in more detail below.
The paradox of modern marketing roles
In a paradoxical twist, the demands of modern marketing have become more specialized and expansive.
Marketing professionals are expected to have deep expertise in a niche area while maintaining a broad skill set across multiple disciplines. Employers want you to be a specialist, generalist, strategist, operator, data analyst, and, ideally, a mind reader.
Employers won’t settle for unicorns. They want multiclass unicorn-wizard-hacker-marketers.
I see many marketers on the job hunt falling into a trap. If the best way to describe this new unicorn is perhaps a T-shaped skill set (what recruiters and HR professionals call someone with deep expertise in one area — the vertical bar of the T — and broad knowledge across other disciplines — the horizontal bar), I still see many young and veteran marketers promoting themselves in these ways:
I-shaped marketers (too specialized, no breadth). These marketers know one thing very well (maybe they’re a killer copywriter) but lack broader positioning in strategy, analytics, or other disciplines.
Em dash-shaped marketers (know a bit about everything). I see this a lot with experienced marketers. They’ve done many things throughout their career (social media, content, branding, product, and even sales) but with no depth in any area.
Star-shaped marketers. These marketers try to position themselves as specialists in everything. Social media? Fifteen years. SEO? Knew Google before it was Google. Brand? I’m a storyteller. Video editing? Better than Scorsese.
Pressure comes from both above and below.
From below, more candidates than ever compete with the same single skill set attributes, making differentiation difficult.
From above, job descriptions now demand a mix of connected skills. Employers aren’t just looking for someone with multiple skills — they want someone who understands how those skills integrate into the business.
Unfortunately, AI adds an extra layer of complexity. Every day, new startups promise to rid companies of those pesky human marketing employees, trading them for AI agents that don’t ask for vacations, take sick days, or want to work from home.
Fearful marketers hear the bumper sticker advice that “AI won’t take your job, but someone using AI will” and rush out to try to become “good at AI” without knowing what “good at AI” means.
It’s all very frustrating and concerning.
Marketing yourself as the marketer you want to be
I wish I could offer “10 easy steps” or “10X your job opportunities” advice, but I can’t. Anyone who says they have the answer to what will happen with AI and automation and how it will affect the art and science of marketing is fooling themselves (or trying to fool you).
I often receive messages and emails from colleagues asking if they should start a freelance (or fractional) practice or how they might present themselves for employment at a new organization.
The advice I’ve been giving for the last 20 years hasn’t changed: Market where you’re going, not where you are.
Here’s what I mean. When marketing yourself — whether as a freelance consultant, fractional marketer, or employee — always position yourself where you want to be rather than where you are.
I’ll use myself as an example. When I started as a freelancer, I took any gig I could get (from SEO to writing email copy to website design). After all, I needed to make rent.
But if you read my content or looked at my website two decades ago, you wouldn’t have seen any of that. You would have seen “content marketing strategist.” I marketed myself as what I wanted to be in the future.
Eventually, with great difficulty, I convinced a company to hire me to fix its content governance, technology, and content marketing approach. That led to another project and another.
But here’s the critical point: I didn’t fake it till I made it. I studied, read, talked to, and learned from professionals in the field. I invested the time and energy it took to recognize what a “good” content strategist looks like.
Developing yourself is the product development side of deciding how to market yourself as a marketer. But how do you position yourself to beat competitors for the same gig?
A classic lesson on selling content and marketing services
For a marketing agency workshop about 10 years ago, I developed a version of the famous smiling curve for creative agencies.
The smiling curve is a way to illustrate how value is distributed across different stages of making and selling a product.
It shows that the highest value comes from the beginning and end of the process — design, research, and branding (before production) and marketing, sales, and customer experience (after production).
The middle stage (production) tends to add less value to the product because the process can be duplicated or outsourced easily, making it a commodity. On a graph, innovation gets the high value on the left side. The line then dips down at the middle stage (production) and rises again on the right as the value increases (marketing, sales, and customer experience).
The image below shows how I plotted agency services across a similar curve. The x-axis represents the continuum from one-off projects to long-term processes. The y-axis shows the span from low-value investments (near the intersection with the x-axis) to high-value investments.
Strategy and planning show up as high-value one-off projects on the top left end of the curve. Optimization and measurement appear at the top of the right end as high-value, long-term processes. Content creation as a service ended up at the bottom of the curve because it’s so easily replaceable.
My point to agency leaders was this: If clients hire you at the top of the smile, you’ll find it relatively easy to expand down the curve into other services. But if they hire you for bottom-of-the-smiling-curve services, you’ll find it almost impossible to climb up.
How agencies positioned themselves to win the initial engagement defined their potential for becoming a strategic partner.
I advised agency leaders to force clients who hired them for content creation to go through some kind of strategy or optimization engagement (even if they couldn’t charge for it). That would ensure the client viewed the agency as a strategic partner, not a replaceable service provider.
The smile curve for marketing yourself as a marketer
Today, it’s not enough to be T-, em dash-, or even star-shaped. Your differentiated value isn’t in having a mix of skills — it’s in how you connect them.
The question isn’t whether to position yourself as a specialist or a generalist; it’s how to position yourself as a fully integrated solution in which skills like copywriting, data, measurement, and storytelling are more than the sum of their parts.
Instead of listing skills as a menu of disconnected abilities, present a unified, strategic perspective that demonstrates how these skills work together to drive impact.
The real unicorns don’t just have multiple skills; they market themselves in ways that demonstrate how those skills combine into a bigger, smarter, and more effective approach.
With this in mind, I’ve adapted the smile curve for marketers who want to market themselves.
The image below balances a portfolio of skill attributes across the art (perspective) and science (performance) of marketing on the x-axis from lower to higher value (represented on the y-axis).
The top left end of the curve shows high-value perspective activities, with marketing leadership at the top, and brand strategy, creative direction, thought leadership and storytelling, governance and marketing ops, and campaign management on the descending slope.
High-value performance activities make up the right side of the curve, with measurement and data strategy at the top, and technology integration, performance marketing, A/B testing, personalization, and targeting inching down the slope.
At the center (bottom) of the curve are lower-value focus activities, including copywriting, editing, content and creative production, translation and localization, media buying, and SEO.
I hope you’ll use this smile curve graph to help you reposition or differentiate yourself based on where you’re going rather than where you are.
For example, if you’re a copywriter and want to present yourself as a creative strategist, start crafting your content, resume, portfolio, social posts, etc., to connect concepts such as campaign management, thought leadership, and creative direction.
Or, if you’d rather lean into the performance side, highlight SEO, personalization, and performance marketing concepts.
I want to make this clear: This framework doesn’t imply that being a writer or content production professional is somehow less than being a creative director or a performance marketing manager.
The chart merely reflects the current perception of replaceability and differentiation.
In other words, it’s just as important for a creative director to weave together campaign management, governance, and marketing ops skills as it is the other way around.
The smile chart will also help you map your learning and career development. In other words, it’s not just about changing your marketing — it’s about developing your skills.
Preparation and positioning are everything
As I said, it’s a rough time in marketing. There’s no guarantee that business leaders won’t make shortsighted decisions and prioritize AI as a replacement for humans. And there’s no telling which marketing activities AI and automation may replace.
Look at this framework as a way to prepare. If you’re hired for a single-skill position at the bottom of the smile, you’ll find it challenging to move up.
But if you can position yourself as an integrated solution — stitching together value up and down the curve — your perceived value moves higher while your replaceability goes lower.
Marketing yourself isn’t about listing skills on a menu. It’s about presenting a cohesive story of how your integrated skills connect to create a positive impact.
So, as you reposition yourself, don’t just update your resume — update the way you think about your value. Market where you’re going, not just where you are.
It’s your story. Tell it well.
Subscribe to workday or weekly CMI emails to get Rose-Colored Glasses in your inbox each week.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
If your brand treats video like an extra in the background of your marketing strategy, it’s time to make it the star. Discover why, learn the trends for 2025, and see examples of B2B and B2C brands that make video shine.
If you work in content marketing, you’ve experienced the “battle of the brains.”
Your creative brain gets excited to develop your next innovative, engaging, and impactful content effort. But your logical brain points to the blank screen and kills the buzz, saying: “OK, hotshot. Where do we start?”
When at a loss for actionable inspiration, exploring highly successful campaigns from other brands can push your brain in new directions. The valuable insight into what’s resonating with audiences like yours can fuel your creative and strategic minds.
To assist that journey of discovery, we’ve assembled an e-book: 20 Examples of Brands Leading Through Content (registration required). It features leading B2B, B2C, and nonprofit/government organizations that exceeded their audience expectations and achieved their marketing goals through novel content approaches and creative executions.
Here’s a peek at six of my favorite initiatives.
Lesson 1: Develop a strategy that showcases your unique strengths
Developing (and documenting) your content marketing strategy can do more than focus your team on content types and channels. It can guide the organization’s direction as you adapt to new marketplace opportunities, shifts in consumer behaviors, and emerging audience interests.
In their efforts to provide trustworthy, easily accessible information, regional tourism websites risk coming off as cookie-cutter content. To stand apart, marketers in this business sector must balance practical utility with uniquely desirable experiences in their strategy.
According to Travel Oregon’s director of global integrated marketing and publishing Mo Sherifdeen, the organization found its sweet spot by building content success on driving equitable economic impact across the state and welcoming all.
Its strategy emphasizes lesser-known tourist destinations and activities. It also prioritizes attracting diverse audiences by showcasing the region’s rich history — including stories about its first inhabitants.
This welcoming and inclusive approach is working. According to Travel Oregon’s Content Marketing Award submission, its website attracts 9 million page views and 4 million sessions a year. Its social content reached users’ feeds 41 million times in a year.
Yet, what nailed Travel Oregon’s 2024 win for Best Content Strategy is that its approach delivers significant bottom-line results: A 12-month analysis showed a $48.9 million economic impact from the 25,255 incremental trips made by out-of-state website visitors who hadn’t committed to traveling to Oregon until after they visited the site and a $6.2 million economic impact from 16,190 new visitor days — the time out-of-state website visitors extended their stay in Oregon.
Learn more: How Travel Oregon’s Content Strategy Drove $50+ Million in Economic Impact
Lesson 2: Enhance content resonance with customized relevance
Audiences gravitate toward brands they relate to — whether a shared business goal, a passion for a hobby or activity, or an affinity for a value or belief. The more the audience sees themselves in the content, the more likely they’ll engage and act on it.
Tailoring content to your customers’ needs can plant the seeds of deeper, more resonant connections — even when marketing a highly commoditized B2B product or service. Exhibit an understanding of a relevant concern, then show how your business considers it a priority. Ultimately, let consumers know you see them as people to increase their trust in your brand and satisfaction with their purchases.
Salesforce enjoyed tremendous success with its Trailblazer online community, which was built to enhance the value customers receive from its products. Yet, sales professionals — the primary users of the company’s Sales Cloud product — found that the community lacked the career-centric guidance they sought.
The company answered the call with Salesblazer — a centralized content hub for sales professionals. Like Trailblazer, it’s filled with free resources and opportunities to receive advice from industry experts. It also features educational demos, webinars, downloadable templates, worksheets, and reports.
What distinguishes Salesblazer isn’t just its niche audience target. It customizes the pathway to the visitor’s functional role in sales (e.g., representatives, operations, or leadership). All content helps these professionals grow more successful careers.
In its first year, Salesblazer hit over 5 million unique page views, fueled by ranking for thousands of keywords on search. However, the Trailblazer community format didn’t fully click with the audience, so the community was rebuilt as a Slack channel, helping Salesblazer grow at two times the pace of the original forum.
Learn more: How Salesforce Blazed Award-Winning Content Trail for Sales Pros
Lesson 3: Soothe pain points with a well-timed brand experience
What’s more powerful than understanding consumers’ future-focused challenges? Content solutions that meet them where they are right now.
Delivering educational insights and tactical advice is a staple of content marketing. But when you present that information so it’s easy to engage with and activate at the moment of need, your content becomes a living testimonial to your brand’s overarching value.
Case in point: Siemens Healthineers – Magnetic Stories(Click translate on site for English)
An MRI exam is essential when diagnosing serious pediatric health concerns like cancer. But try explaining that to a young child as they endure the noise and discomfort in the machine.
To help pediatric patients (and their caregivers) feel more at ease, MRI manufacturer Siemens Healthineers developed an imaginative solution: Magnetic Stories — a series of audiobooks children can listen to on their headphones during their scans.
According to AdAge, the campaign created cheerful narratives incorporating sound sequences from common pediatric MRI scans performed on Siemens Healthineers equipment. In one story (shown above), viewers see a young child wearing headphones as she undergoes a cranial bone scan. As she listens to the Magnetic Stories audiobook, the chugging clamor of the scan is whimsically reimagined as a “magical [flying] train called imagination leaving a trail known as inspiration,” putting her at ease.
By creating a more comfortable and satisfying patient experience, the brand extends the value its health care service providers receive from their equipment purchases. Siemens also achieved another benefit from this campaign: Magnetic Stories won the Pharma Grand Prix at the 2024 Cannes Lions International Festival of Creativity.
Learn more: Did Cannes Lions Awards Just Say Content Beats Advertising?
Lesson 4: Let influencers bring your brand into their world
Influencers are a hot commodity in the marketing world, with some personalities building lucrative careers by inserting partnering brands into their social conversations. Yet, a common critique remains: “How do we trust that the person behind the handle is truly familiar with the product they’re pitching?”
Asking influencers to co-create content with your brand is a great way to overcome those authenticity accusations. It also can help your content to stand out from other brands mentioned by influencer spokespeople and provide the flexibility to repurpose their assets for different purposes and platforms.
@mattymatheson I’M HERE AT YUMMY K’S WITH @KNORRCA AT 179 CRAWFORD STREET IN TORONTO AND WE’RE SERVING UP MY TASTE COMBOS! COME GET SOME BBQ CHOPPED CHICKEN SANDWICHES OR CHILLED CHILI SOBA THIS WEEKEND ONLY LET’S GO! #KNORRVSCOMBO#AD♬ original sound – MATTY MATHESON
Unilever’s Knorr is known for its flavoring packets used in tasty dips, sauces, and soups. However, as delivery services and meal prep kits began to dominate young consumers’ dinner tables, the brand struggled to have a place in their kitchen pantries.
Recognizing that 81% of Gen Z consumers say they made recipes they discovered on social media, Knorr seized an opportunity to blend some influential star power into its marketing mix.
First, the brand transformed a home in Canada into Yummy K’s — a first-of-its-kind takeout joint and delivery service. Then, it partnered with celebrity chef (and actor from Hulu’s The Bear) Matty Matheson to design a menu of simple, delicious dishes inspired by popular TikTok recipes. Knorr packaged each customer’s order in a branded box with its ingredient packet to encourage them to recreate the recipe.
Knorr also cooked up a tasty platter of promotional content to drive consumers to the pop-up, including outdoor ads and TikTok-style recipe videos. In the example above, Matty plays into his frenetic energy as a fast-talking food aficionado as he tours Yummy K’s pop-up location and describes the menu. As he receives his order, he opens the Knorr-branded packaging and excitedly digs into the barbecued chopped chicken sandwich and soba noodles combo.
With the help of Matty, Knorr put its creative spin on the latest mealtime trends. The effort earned the brand a seat at the popular kids’ table while strengthening awareness of its value as a home cooking staple.
Lesson 5: Activate the values you share with your customers
Cause marketing remains popular, as consumers (particularly younger generations) go out of the way to support brands that put their money where their mouths are. In fact, according to January 2024 Ipsos research, almost seven in 10 U.S. adults say they tend to buy from brands that reflect their personal values.
To compel your audience to use their wallets to vote in your favor, don’t just talk about the good your brand does, activate your intentions and empower your audience to benefit.
Most people consider travel a rewarding experience. However, not everyone has equitable access to its benefits, and some aspiring travelers — including people who live with autism — face challenges venturing out of their usual routines.
To minimize their travel-related discomfort and doubt, Visit Myrtle Beach produced Traveling the Spectrum. It’s an eye-opening six-part video series highlighting the region’s autism-friendly offerings, as seen through the eyes of three families visiting the first autism-friendly certified destination in the United States.
Like other travel-related video series, viewers preview the area’s beautiful beaches, amusements, and recreational activities. They also see the realities of vacationing with a family member on the autism spectrum, which includes the potential for meltdowns, extra planning, and memories of frustrations that often deterred them from traveling.
Yet, as the trailer above shows, the audience also witnesses the feelings of gratitude, connection, and joy these families experience because Myrtle Beach welcomes and accommodates their unique needs.
To reinforce Myrtle Beach’s reputation as a relaxing and inclusive tourism destination, the marketing team also created an autism-friendly travel guide filled with resources like sensory-friendly events and information on accessible accommodations.
By helping travelers with special needs plan their trips more confidently, Visit Myrtle Beach activates its inclusive mission: to prove that ‘The Beach’ is a place where everybody can belong.
Learn more: Groundbreaking Autism Travel Series Rockets Myrtle Beach Tourism
Lesson 6: Highlight the people behind your products
Behind-the-scenes videos are a great way to make your company more human-relatable. Highlight day-to-day operations, your offices, your manufacturing processes, or intriguing aspects of the business that audiences usually don’t see.
Profile employees, talk to your vendors, or film conversations with your best customers to lend more credibility to your video stories. They give consumers a clearer idea of how your company works, what’s unique about it, and who helps make it successful. If your videos are entertaining and informative, viewers are even more likely to share your brand story with others.
High demand for skilled technician labor makes industrial manufacturing an attractive field in which to start a career. However, employment trends make it difficult for companies like Grainger to find qualified candidates to fill the roles.
To help close this gap, Grainger developed Everyday Heroes, a series of videos to motivate more people to pursue trade careers.
The subject matter might be highly technical, but Everyday Heroes approaches it in a human-centric way. In each episode, a Grainger technician shares a personal story about their passion for the job and describes what makes the trade an exciting and fulfilling career option.
For example, in the video (above), wind turbine technician Jenna Stokes details the technical aspects of her craft, such as the repairs her team handles and the skill and knowledge required. She walks viewers through a typical workday, which includes a debrief on the team’s plan for the day and the potential hazards, such as climbing towers up to 328 feet.
That’s a personal challenge for Jenna, who fears heights. So, how — and why — does she do it? Jenna says she relies on her safety equipment and draws strength from her team of skilled technicians. She notes that the energy she feels when she accomplishes the work keeps her going.
Insights + inspiration = exemplary performance
Want more creative ideas and helpful tips to inspire your content program? Download 20 Examples of Brands Leading Through Content. Get a glimpse of successful efforts from companies like Marriott Bonvoy, Intuit, Honda, The Gates Foundation, and others. Not only has this work earned the attention of their audiences, but many have earned the admiration of their fellow marketers — and have the Content Marketing Awards to prove it.
Want more content marketing tips, insights, and examples? Subscribe to workday or weekly emails from CMI.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
These days, brands championing a social cause or initiative must treat it as a serious commitment.
Of course, it was never a good idea to take an ad hoc approach to cause marketing — adding a rainbow frame to the brand’s social media profile for a month or using a climate-change hashtag in an Arbor Day blog article.
But now, the very act of advocating for or supporting a hot topic involves so many elements and can spark more responses from stakeholders (and non-stakeholders) that it demands a detailed strategy.
What if the content marketing team could lead in developing that strategy and be at the helm of the brand’s ongoing effort around that important topic?
You’ll elevate content marketing’s role within the organization (and maybe even get that much-coveted seat at the top leadership table).
But how do you do it with a healthy, sustainable approach? Follow this three-step plan for a cause-related content marketing strategy.
1. Start at the top
Many brands say they’re committed to a cause but struggle with demonstrating that commitment.
Why? The cause conversation never hits on what needs to happen to ensure the organization keeps its public face focused on those topics.
A documented content marketing strategy around a cause commitment enables all the teams creating content to operate from the same page. Its development can also serve as a jumping-off point for other departments or the whole organization to develop a long-term strategy around the brand’s cause-related mission.
Your strategy preparation starts not with content marketing but with the organization’s business operations:
That first step will likely take the most time — it involves a lot of elements you likely don’t have control over. But do this research. Interviewing key stakeholders will inform everything you do next. Your investigation will help people across the organization realize the depth of the brand’s commitment and better understand the goals for its cause commitment.
Your actions also communicate to leadership that your priority is to ensure content marketing aligns with business objectives.
With this research finished, you’ll likely find yourself with one of two conclusions:
Clear cause-specific business goals and metrics or
A fuzzy picture of what leadership would like to happen (though they haven’t fully formulated a plan or set goals)
No matter which outcome you reach, you can still progress to the next step. It just might be harder if you’re in the fuzzy picture crowd.
2. Bring in the audience
Now that you’ve thought about the business, it’s time to consider your audience.
In most cause-related initiatives, marketers forget they have a target audience and simply decide to create content related to the cause. That’s a positive step, but it’s only the beginning.
Ask audience-specific questions, such as:
Who in the target audience is most interested in this content?
Why?
What do they want from this content?
With this information, you can likely narrow down your larger target audience or renew your commitment to an existing persona or niche. This is the group to target with your cause content marketing strategy.
3. Align cause objective with business and audience
Knowing your business goals and audience, you’re ready to figure out the content marketing objectives.
What content marketing goals align with both business goals and audience interests? Are they concrete and measurable?
For example, with an inclusive content marketing strategy, benchmarks for imagery, accessible content, voice representation in content, etc., are important. However, they focus on tactics and don’t properly incorporate the audience.
What do you want from your readers, viewers, and listeners? Your answer will likely fall into these three broad objectives:
The three goals function together as stages or a funnel. Brand awareness leads an audience to act, and that action ultimately contributes to brand loyalty.
An election-season analogy might help:
A voter learns about a candidate (awareness).
The voter decides to support the candidate (action).
The voter puts the candidate’s sign in their yard (loyalty).
In cause-oriented content, most marketers do the brand awareness stage well. You might change the social profile image to represent the designated month. You publish an article from the CEO explaining the brand’s commitment to the cause and review metrics around social media engagement, increased traffic, or time on page.
However, you also should work to move the audience to the second stage — action. You might invite readers to subscribe to a series of articles around your brand’s cause commitment and activities. You could ask them to register for a webinar to learn more. Success metrics would include sign-ups.
Keep pushing the audience to get to the third goal in the sequence — loyalty. Publish regular and authentic content around the cause’s mission. You’ll convince the audience that your brand walks the talk.
They’ll continue to consume your content. They might buy your products. And they might tell others about why they like your brand (whether they buy from you or not). Success metrics might include returning visitors, number of pages visited, purchase activity, and brand mentions.
TIP: As you determine your initiative-specific content marketing goals, you need to discuss the content plans, too. What formats will you use? How frequently will you publish? Those two factors allow you to set relevant and realistic goals.
Follow through on your cause commitment
Supporting or promoting a social cause or initiative requires a serious commitment. Rather than celebrating a single day or month, adopt a long-term content marketing strategy around the cause. Your audience will realize that your brand isn’t jumping on the bandwagon — it’s truly committed. That differentiation will lead them to get more involved with your content and ultimately develop a stronger bond with your brand.
And that’s a great way to elevate your content team’s role in meeting business objectives.
Updated from an October 2022 article.
Want more content marketing tips, insights, and examples? Subscribe to workday or weekly emails from CMI.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
I see one mistake derailing marketing strategy again and again: Setting up marketing teams as internal agencies that serve cross-functional “customers” in other departments.
That’s a problem because it typically leads to reactive, disconnected efforts — even in the era of sophisticated AI, automation, data, and marketing analytics.
Sometimes, marketing teams try to incorporate strategic priority planning. However, those meetings tend to be derailed by internal stakeholders who want to dictate which themes or assets to prioritize.
As a result, the marketing calendar becomes a chaotic, siloed set of to-do lists fueled by ad hoc requests from multiple teams.
The marketing team turns into a production shop — pumping out assets like a high-speed printer — without a clear strategic direction.
The result? People burn out, ROI remains unclear, and businesses wonder why their marketing isn’t moving the needle.
So, when the inevitable marketing strategy reboot comes (and it always comes), how can you align the new approach with internal stakeholders’ expectations?
The answer is simple: Stop thinking of these folks as customers. I explain a better approach in the video above and in more detail in the article below.
Internal teams aren’t customers
Marketers often consider internal teams (sales, product marketing, PR, IT, executive leadership, etc.) as stakeholders. But ask anyone on your marketing team if they consider themselves stakeholders in sales, technology, or corporate communications, and you’ll likely hear, “Oh no, they’re our customers.”
That thinking is the root of the problem because it positions marketing teams as service providers rather than strategic partners.
I once worked with a global enterprise technology company whose marketing team existed solely to fulfill product marketing’s requests for thought leadership, sales collateral, and web copy.
But product marketing saw thought leadership as product one-sheets and case studies, not insight-driven narratives that would educate and inspire buyers.
Executives saw sales collateral as better pitch decks and case studies. All stakeholders thought of web copy as words that explain everything the company does in excruciating technical detail.
The result? The marketing team dutifully performed. Internal stakeholders loved the content. Actual customers? Not so much.
How to shift from service provider to strategic leader
Marketing teams succeed when they shift (or are enabled to shift) from being on-demand creators to strategic orchestrators of the brand’s voice.
This change often requires a complete adjustment in the company’s mindset. People stop thinking of marketing in terms of execution and start thinking about how it can lead to growth alongside other business functions.
Internal teams – stakeholders — are investors, not customers. They provide critical insight, direction, and assistance, but they shouldn’t dictate the marketing agenda. The most successful businesses treat the marketing team as an asset to be nurtured, managed, optimized, and leveraged for business growth.
Modern marketing requires specialized expertise, including a deep command of data analytics, behavioral psychology, technology, storytelling, revenue strategy, and real-time decision making.
Yet, too many organizations treat marketing teams like reactive service providers rather than strategic architects. So, what’s missing?
These essential elements set sophisticated marketing teams apart in 2025:
Investing in marketing operations (the missing strategic layer)
A key shift in 2025 is the rise (or perhaps the rebirth) of a more integrated role for marketing operations, a structured discipline that optimizes marketing creation, production, measurement, and distribution.
For the last decade, many marketing teams have tried to graft Agile development processes onto their marketing ops, hoping to replicate the success seen in software development.
Spoiler: It hasn’t worked all that well.
Marketing’s iterative loops rarely deliver a simple right-or-wrong outcome. Unlike coding, which either compiles or crashes, marketing success unfolds over time. Agile gets reduced to moving faster — prioritizing speed over strategy and iteration over creative insight. Teams break more things but don’t take the time to learn or adapt in ways that make breaking things worthwhile.
I see more successful teams embracing a structured but not rigid approach. They’re reviving marketing operations with intentional workflows, integrated tools, marketing analytics platforms, and generative AI-management systems to ensure smooth processes and unambiguous attribution of efforts to business outcomes.
Blending AI-driven insights with human wisdom
AI and automation are now central to marketing, providing data-driven insights that predict audience interests and identify high-value opportunities.
But here’s the thing — your organization isn’t the only one using AI. Thinking that AI gives you a competitive advantage today is like assuming your team was the only one with personal computers in the 1990s.
AI is a tool — not a differentiator or a replacement for the humans who use it.
The savviest marketing teams blend machine intelligence with human judgment. They leverage AI’s speed and scale while relying on human emotional intelligence and creativity to craft authentic, resonant stories. In other words, they use AI to shift their focus from routine execution to high-value strategic work.
Embracing emerging channels and media
In 2025, marketers aren’t just brand stewards — they’re futurists, mathematicians, and mad scientists rolled into one. They have to predict where audiences will be before they get there, analyze data patterns like Wall Street traders, and experiment with new formats like chemists in a lab. Successful content and marketing teams don’t just react to change; they anticipate and architect it.
That means proactively embracing emerging channels, such as custom AI learning models, immersive experiences, voice search optimization, short-form video, interactive micro-content, and even augmented reality.
This level of adaptability requires more than agility — it demands strategic investment in team expertise, talent retention, and a designed framework that allows for rapid experimentation while ensuring consistency across platforms.
These high-skill capabilities define modern marketing teams. But they don’t explain how to elevate marketing beyond being “the service department” (or, as one marketing director I know wryly puts it, “The Department of Words and Pictures”).
Align stakeholder investors in the marketing strategy
One of the biggest reasons marketing teams struggle for influence is that they’re seen as the doers, not the thinkers. C-suite execs take on the big strategic thinking or outsource it to an agency.
Few businesses give their marketing teams the space to develop strategic and creative muscles. Then, they wonder why marketing isn’t more strategic or creative. Execs put the marketing team in a box, then wonder why marketing can’t think outside it.
This isn’t only a perception problem — it’s also a structural one. If executive leadership won’t consider how marketing is positioned within the business, every effort to change it is just theater.
Even if the willingness to change exists, the shift from perceiving marketing as order takers to strategic leaders doesn’t happen passively. It requires a fundamental reset in how marketing teams engage with internal stakeholders.
Instead of treating them as customers to satisfy, marketing leaders must position those stakeholders as investors — partners with a real stake in marketing’s success.
Here’s how.
Segment your stakeholder-investors
Not all stakeholders carry the same weight or motivations. Understanding the key players in your organization lets you tailor your approach, build alliances, and anticipate resistance before it slows you down.
Influencers hold the political capital or control the budget, but they may not be directly involved in marketing. They can make or break your initiatives, so winning them over is critical — even if they don’t care about marketing itself.
Champions are your internal advocates — those who already believe in marketing’s strategic value. They’re often early adopters of new approaches and can help evangelize your vision across the company.
Detractors resist change either because they see nothing in it for them or because they fear losing control. Some will be vocal, while others will simply disengage. The key is to understand their underlying concerns and address them head-on.
Decision makers are the executives or department heads who approve major marketing initiatives. They need to see a direct connection between marketing initiatives and business outcomes.
Participants are actively involved in execution — whether in product marketing, sales enablement, or content creation. They’re the people who will live with the day-to-day impact of your strategy, so their buy-in is crucial.
Recognizing where each stakeholder fits helps you customize your messaging, anticipate objections, and build strategic alignment.
Design discussions, not interviews
Too many marketing teams approach stakeholder (investor) engagement as a checklist item, conducting interviews to gather input as if they’re waiters taking orders. The problem? This approach reinforces the idea that internal stakeholders are customers, which is the dynamic you’re trying to change.
Instead, think of these conversations as co-creation discussions structured by the type of investor they are. The goal isn’t just to gather information — it’s to uncover motivations, identify roadblocks, and shift perspectives. Ask questions that go beyond surface-level feedback, such as:
What does success look like for your team, and where does marketing fit into that?
What are the biggest challenges you’re facing that marketing could help solve?
What has and hasn’t worked in past marketing efforts?
Leading the conversation toward business outcomes shifts these discussions from transactional Q&A sessions into opportunities to reposition marketing as a strategic partner.
Remember, marketing leadership is a process, not a project
One of the biggest myths in corporate environments is that getting stakeholder buy-in is a one-time event. The reality? It’s an ongoing process. Even the most successful marketing leaders face continuous pressure to justify budgets, demonstrate impact, and evolve strategies to stay aligned with shifting business priorities.
To sustain marketing’s position as a strategic function, you need to:
Regularly communicate marketing’s impact in terms that matter to stakeholders — business growth, revenue contribution, efficiency gains.
Keep stakeholders engaged beyond the initial buy-in, involving them in ongoing discussions and strategy adjustments.
Be prepared to resell marketing’s value when leadership changes or business priorities shift.
Marketing isn’t a department that serves the business — it’s a function that drives it. But that only becomes true when marketing leaders take control of their positioning inside the organization.
Not all stakeholders are customers, but all customers are stakeholders
Customers are the most critical stakeholders in your marketing strategy, so don’t conflate them with internal teams that request marketing support.
As the strategist and author Eli Goldratt wrote, “Tell me how you measure me, and I will tell you how I will behave.” If your marketing team is measured by how well they serve internal requests, don’t be surprised when they behave like a service department.
The best marketing teams don’t serve stakeholders. They lead them. That’s how marketing drives sustained business impact in 2025 and beyond.
Your marketing strategy should evolve constantly — because your customers do.
It’s your story. Tell it well.
Updated from a September 2022 story.
Robert Rose consults and hosts workshops on helping marketing teams align their marketing processes to all kinds of technologies – including generative AI. Contact him to learn about those programs.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
The Content Marketing Institute team byline indicates this article reflects the collective work of the CMI team. CMI is a global marketing education and training organization dedicated to advancing the practice of content marketing. We create and curate content experiences that teach marketers and creators from enterprise brands, small businesses, and agencies how to attract and retain customers through compelling, multichannel storytelling. Global brands turn to CMI for strategic consultation, research, and training and certification, and send teams to Content Marketing World, the largest content marketing-focused event, the Marketing Analytics & Data Science (MADS) conference, and CMI digital events every year. Follow @CMIContent on Facebook, LinkedIn, and Instagram, and use the hashtag #CMWorld.
Marketing goals often use soft, fuzzy language like “brand awareness,” “credibility,” and “education.”
They’re nice things for the business, but they aren’t easy to measure, and worse, they don’t speak to what’s important to the business.
For marketing to get the recognition (and budget) it deserves, set goals that incorporate the language of your executives and sales colleagues. Use verbs like generate, grow, reduce, and retain. Not only will you set marketing on a different level in your organization, but you’ll also set your brand’s marketing apart from the rest.
Brand awareness has been (and likely will remain) the most common goal of content marketers. In the most recent CMI research, brand awareness ranks at the top, with 87% of marketers naming it as a goal of their program.
On the opposite end, less than half of marketers (49%) say generating sales/revenue is a goal.
Yet, scrutinizing what the most successful marketers say, their goals are more likely to contain those verbs loved by executives and sales teams:
Generate demand/leads (89% most successful vs. 49% least successful)
Nurture subscribers/audiences/leads (77% vs. 36%)
Generate sales/revenue (65% vs. 26%)
To change the conversation and gain the respect and budget marketing deserves, focus on these four goals:
1. Grow subscribers
Unlike a customer database, a subscriber database contains customers, prospects, referrals, and potential referrals. These people see your content as valuable enough to provide their contact information. In doing so, they also give you permission to subtly market to them.
When it makes sense
If you regularly publish content, such as a newsletter, podcast, video channel, etc., subscribers are essential. It lets you contact them without an intermediary gatekeeper like social media or pay-per-click advertising.
More specifically, adopt subscriber goals when your business wants to penetrate a new market, compete with a high-profile market leader, or begin the content marketing journey.
Profitable actions to track
Measure progress by the number of subscribers to an owned channel (email newsletter, blog alerts, magazine, podcast, etc.)
Compare the subscriber sales conversion rate with the general audience conversion rate. You can also compare those two groups in terms of total sales value and lifetime sales value.
Go deeper into the subscribed audience as a goal:
2. Generate leads
Great content can encourage consumers to convert into prospects by signing up for a demo, registering for an event, or requesting access to a resource center. Unlike subscribers, these leads provide more than an email address. They trade more information about themselves because they see value in the content offered.
For example, they may share their role in the company to get content tailored for their position or complete a quiz to get answers specific to their interests.
When it makes sense
To help the sales team identify or qualify new prospects, this type of content is a must. It can also help nurture leads through the sales funnel.
Profitable actions to track
Measure content’s impact with form completion, downloads, and landing page conversion rates.
Assess conversion rates through the sales funnel. Measure the percentage of marketing- and sales-qualified leads.
To go deeper on tracking lead generation, check out:
CAVEAT: Some leads aren’t really leads. People provide more detailed information to get the piece of content but aren’t interested in your product or service now. Consider converting these not-really leads into opt-in subscribers who may become more valuable over time.
3. Generate sales through support and enablement
Supporting sales with content typically involves creating pieces that offer proof points to help customers decideuroblems.
When it makes sense
Goals around growing sales or adding new revenue streams benefit from this content. (So, it always makes sense to create it.)
Profitable actions to track
Measure your sales support through lead-to-customer conversion rates, effect on time to close new customers, and revenue generated.
Go deeper on aligning content with sales:
4. Retain clients (and reduce customer support costs)
Though many treat content marketing as a top-of-the-funnel play, content can also work to reinforce the customer’s decision post-sale. How-to and activation content ensures the customer gets value from the purchase — and is likely to buy again (or make a referral).
When it makes sense
To reduce costs (i.e., high volume of support calls), customer support and loyalty content works well.
If the business model involves repeat business or prioritizes upselling or add-ons, this content can help achieve those goals.
Profitable actions to track
Measure the impact by the percentage of existing customers who consume content, the reduction in the number of support calls, the number of repeat customers, revenue from upselling, customer retention rate, and changes in churn rate.
Speak up about marketing’s goals
Once you’ve crafted goals that speak the language of sales and executives, don’t forget to verbalize them to the marketing team, the sales team, and other adjacent teams, as well as the C-suite.
No matter which goal-setting framework you use, incorporate the elements of the FAST framework outlined by Donald and Charles Sull in this MIT Sloan article — frequently discussed, ambitious, specific, and transparent.
And with that, you’ve established an innovative content marketing program tied to business outcomes that will net outcomes any colleague will appreciate.
Updated from a May 2022 article.
Like what you read here? Get yourself a subscription to daily or weekly updates. It’s free – and you can change your preferences or unsubscribe anytime.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
You stop writing after the intro to ponder what details to include.
You need facts to support the solutions recommended in the content, but you don’t have them.
You’ve written and written and written, but you’re not sure it makes sense, let alone if it’s good.
Your fingers are posed to write another piece of content on the same topic you’ve written about 25 times in the past two years, and you must make it different enough.
You wrote a good first draft, but you’ve been immersed in the text so long you’ve lost the ability to polish it for a reader who’s never seen it.
What can you do to overcome these challenges?
Grab your AI buddy (or buddies) to help you out. Follow these five prompts (and prompt revisions) to get your creativity flowing and your content consumable and credible. I used Gemini, ChatGPT, and Perplexity AI as my helpers, but these prompts should work well with similar AI tools, too.
1. Generate ideas you haven’t thought of
You know the topic well. After all, you write about it frequently. But you’re not sure how to make it fresh or different from everything your brand has already published. Try this.
AI prompt: “I am writing an article for (target audience) to help them tackle (challenge). Share 10 unexpected things they could do.”
Example prompt: “I am writing an article for marketers about how to get out of a creative rut when creating content. Share 10 unexpected things they could do.”
Gemini’s response includes such things as:
Visit a museum or art gallery (virtual or in-person).
People-watch or eavesdrop (ethically).
Cook or bake something new.
Explore a different genre of music.
Go walk in nature (without your phone).
The other six suggestions include:
Try freewriting or stream-of-consciousness writing.
Change your physical environment.
Read something completely unrelated to your industry.
Brainstorm with someone outside your field.
Revisit your old work (with fresh eyes).
Gemini also explains how to execute each suggestion and why it is beneficial. For example, the people-watch and eavesdrop tip explains:
“Go to a coffee shop, park, or other public space and observe people. Listen to snippets of conversations (without being creepy, of course!). Real-life interactions can provide insights into current trends, concerns, and language that resonates with your target audience. This helps you tap into authentic human experiences.”
OK, that’s a good answer, but many of the unexpected ideas go beyond what the audience likely could do within their work parameters. If that’s the case, add a follow-up prompt to get more helpful answers.
Follow-up AI prompt: “What could they do to address that challenge with (describe environment or available means)?”
Example follow-up prompt: Since marketers in a creative rut probably can’t leave their desk to hit a museum, walk in nature, or eavesdrop, the follow-up prompt is, “What could they do while sitting at their desk?”
Gemini responds with even more practical and specific answers — only one of which overlaps with the previous answer:
Change your font.
Use a random word generator.
Explore visual content.
Listen to ambient sounds.
Try a mind-mapping tool.
Take a micro-break.
Use a writing prompt generator.
Read quotes from inspiring figures.
Use a thesaurus.
Freewrite for five minutes.
2. Ask for research assistance
Third-party research can bring fresh perspectives and credibility to your content, so turn your AI tool into a research assistant. I find this usually requires a little more prompt finesse when you get into the specifics, but here’s a good starting point.
AI prompt: “Share quality research about effective solutions for (topic).”
Example prompt: “Can you share quality research about effective solutions for creative ruts?”
Perplexity AI gave me some possibly helpful answers, citing an Elsevier study about establishing a routine and quoting psychologist Graham Wallas about a theory that involves taking strategic breaks in the creative process.
But, the sources identified in the right column aren’t clearly research articles. They seem to talk about answers that are generically backed by research. The last source in the image, “Cultivating Creative Problem-Solving Through Limitations and …” may be the most helpful, stating “This action research explores how setting limitations on a creative process is used across disciplines …”
However, after looking through the sources, I’d like more authoritative options, so I revised the prompt to add the word “academic.”
Follow-up AI prompt: “Share quality academic research about (topic).”
Example prompt: “Can you share quality academic research on solutions to creative ruts?”
The answer cites research from the universities of Michigan, Limerick, and Iowa State, as well as the Elsevier study.
The sources include a couple of fresh options, including one with an interview with a neurology professor and another that explores neurological, psychological, and environmental factors.
3. Unravel your messy text
You’ve pulled together a lot of notes and compiled them into a really long article. You’ve read it so many times, you’ve lost sight of whether it flows well for your targeted reader.
Your AI assistant stands ready to help and detail the path to see if you’re sending readers in the right direction.
Prompt: “Write subheads for this text: (Add the text without any headlines or section labels.)”
Example prompt: “Please write subheads for this article: (I included the text from a CMI article about asking for a raise and removed all the headers.)”
Among the first subheads created by ChatGPT:
Why Job-Hopping May Be the Fastest Route to a 20% Raise
How to Research Your Worth in the Marketing Industry
Using Salary Benchmark Reports to Strengthen Your Case
As I read through the subhead suggestions, it’s clear the article flows logically. (Whew, given this piece was already published, that’s a good thing.)
But what if I changed the polished text to a messier version? Here’s what Gemini suggests for subheads:
Research the marketplace before you negotiate.
Leverage pay transparency laws to your advantage.
Three key strategies to boost your compensation.
Use job postings to gauge market compensation.
Consult salary benchmark reports for additional insights.
Frame your raise request around business value.
Make it easy for decision-makers to approve your raise.
When I read through the seven subheads, I can easily see the original draft would benefit from a reorder. After all, it makes sense to group the external research ideas [pay transparency laws (no. 2), job postings (no. 4), and salary benchmark reports (no. 5)] into the same section.
TIP: I find the AI tools usually default to listing subheads for every point in the article. While that’s helpful for understanding if the content flows logically, it can be problematic in crafting the actual subheads. So, use this follow-up prompt, “Use fewer subheads for the article,” and you’ll likely get a usable response.
4. Mix up the format
You’re sick and tired of doing (and seeing) your content the same way every time — headline, intro, subhead, text, subhead, text, subhead, text, etc. Reinvigorate your content by asking your AI buddy (I used Gemini) for fresh format ideas.
AI prompt: What other content formats would work well for this text?
Example prompt: Using the CMI salary article, I posed the question about other formats and received this answer:
“This content about asking for a raise could be effectively repurposed into several other formats, each catering to different learning styles and consumption habits. Here are a few ideas:
Infographic: A visually appealing infographic could break down the key steps into digestible chunks, using icons and charts to illustrate key points like salary research, achievement tracking, and negotiation tactics. This format is ideal for quick comprehension and sharing on social media.
Video: A short, engaging video could feature a career coach or expert walking through the steps, perhaps using real-life scenarios or role-playing to demonstrate effective communication techniques. Video is highly engaging and allows for a more personal connection with the audience.
Podcast Episode: A podcast episode could delve deeper into each step, featuring interviews with successful marketers who have negotiated raises. The audio format is perfect for listening on the go and allows for more in-depth discussion and storytelling.
Checklist/Worksheet: A downloadable checklist or worksheet could provide a practical, actionable tool for readers to follow along and track their progress. This format encourages active participation and helps readers personalize the advice to their own situations.
SlideShare Presentation: A visually driven presentation on SlideShare could condense the key takeaways into a concise and shareable format, suitable for presentations or quick reviews.
Social Media Thread: A series of tweets or LinkedIn posts could break down the content into bite-sized pieces, each focusing on a specific tip or strategy. This format is ideal for engaging with a wider audience and sparking conversation.
Email Newsletter Series: A multi-part email series could deliver the content gradually, allowing readers to digest the information over time and prompting them to take action at each stage. This format fosters engagement and builds a relationship with the audience.
Interactive Quiz: An online quiz could test readers’ knowledge and understanding of the key concepts, providing personalized feedback and reinforcing the most important takeaways. This gamified approach can make learning more fun and engaging.
Blog Post with Embedded Resources: The current blog post format is already good, but it could be enhanced with embedded resources like salary calculators, template emails for requesting a raise, or links to relevant articles and job boards. This adds value and provides practical tools for the reader.
By diversifying the content format, you can reach a wider audience and cater to different preferences, maximizing the impact of your message.”
OK, some of those format ideas might be an immediate no given the parameters around the content. For example, since I’m writing an article for the blog, a podcast wouldn’t be an option. But the checklist or article with embedded resources might be.
If you use the prompt and get a list that isn’t helpful, revise the prompt and describe your limitations or parameters to get more doable suggestions.
5. Take a listen
If you’re bad at editing the content you create, your AI assistant stands ready to help. Ask it to read the content aloud. You can use the immersive reader or read-aloud feature in a Microsoft document, use the built-in features in Google Docs, or add a tool like Speechify.
Close your eyes and listen as the AI assistant reads your content. Hit pause when you hear phrasing that makes you cringe, such as a verb that could be stronger or a run-on sentence that causes the AI tool to take a virtual breath. Then, rework that section and hit play again.
TIP: You can use the text-to-voice tools for proofreading, too. Just don’t do both at the same time. Otherwise, you’ll likely default to hearing the grammatical mistakes and not the overall editing opportunities.
Get better with an AI assist
Make friends with generative AI tools to make your content creation life better. By using these prompts, you can alleviate the ennui and frustration that comes from writing the same thing over and over. Even better, you can more easily deliver content that your bosses and audiences will want to consume.
All tools mentioned in this article were suggested by the author. If you’d like to suggest a tool, share the article on social media with a comment.
Want more content marketing tips, insights, and examples? Subscribe to workday or weekly emails from CMI.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
I meet regularly with a group of seasoned professionals to explore big ideas, emerging trends, and how we might anticipate what’s coming next in the business world.
The insights and learning from these meetings are invaluable. But the real magic isn’t in the ideas. It’s in the shared stories, the deep relationships, and the friendships that have grown over the years.
Our facilitator likes to say, “It’s not networking; it’s community-ing.” And, honestly, that’s what makes these discussions different. They’re not just about tossing around theories — they’re about challenging each other, sharpening perspectives, and realizing that the future might be much weirder than we thought.
Recently, we tackled a big question that led to some fascinating discussions: “How will AI reshape leadership?”
We explored this from every angle: political leadership, corporate leadership, and even leadership within small groups and communities.
But as the conversation unfolded, it became clear that this question extends beyond traditional leadership roles. It also touches on a topic that’s top of mind in marketing: thought leadership content.
AI is transforming how people influence, inspire, and communicate. I share insights from the discussion about how this shift affects the nature of leadership and thought leadership content in the video and in even more detail below.
What happens when everyone knows everything?
For centuries, leadership was built on two key advantages:
An asymmetry of information
The ability to craft and express a visionary narrative — a compelling story that inspires people to follow
Those who led in business, politics, or warfare did so, in part, because they had access to knowledge that others didn’t. Better intelligence (sharper insights and exclusive information) created opportunities for power.
Leadership relied on knowing more than anyone else and telling a compelling story about it.
Thought leadership, in particular, involved leveraging that asymmetric access to information — taking what few knew, shaping it into an approachable, persuasive argument, and using it to educate, engage, and rally people toward a shared goal (which, if we’re honest, was usually the sale of some product or service).
However, the asymmetric knowledge advantage is fading fast as AI levels the playing field.
When artificial intelligence can instantly gather, analyze, and synthesize more data than any human mind could ever process, knowledge is no longer exclusive nor difficult to obtain.
That means access to information and insights is no longer a differentiator. The edge that once separated leaders from followers — the ability to see what others miss — is disappearing.
When anyone can access the same insights, when every decision can be optimized and stress-tested by algorithms, and when the execution can be handled by autonomous systems, the question becomes, “What’s left?”
Universal access to AI-driven knowledge seems to suggest two competing outcomes:
Greater consensus. If everyone sees the same reliable information, people might converge on shared truths, allowing reason and evidence to guide decisions. This outcome requires a critical-minded society that can separate credible data from unreliable sources.
Post-truth polarization. Conversely, if the volume of “facts” becomes overwhelming, leaders (and their followers) can cherry-pick data that support preconceived beliefs. This outcome fosters a post-truth environment in which factual consensus becomes nearly impossible. When each faction claims to espouse the “real facts,” truth becomes contested — and the loudest or most persuasive voice may win.
Early results point toward the latter outcome. Today, the loudest person in the room isn’t necessarily the one with the best information — just the one with the biggest megaphone, the hottest take, or the most unhinged presentation.
The paradox of AI-driven leadership
AI won’t just change how decisions are made — it will alter what leadership requires. Leadership was never just about access to information. It also depended on persuasion, storytelling, and charisma — qualities that aligned people toward a shared vision.
But what happens when AI reduces the need for people to execute tasks?
We’re already seeing workforce reductions in information-based roles, with AI increasingly positioned as the replacement. If future AI agents churn out thought leadership content and carry out executive decisions without question or pushback from humans, does leadership shift from inspiring and mobilizing people to merely making wise decisions?
Whether hitting publish on AI-generated thought leadership or making high-stakes business decisions, a lack of human challenge increases the risk from a single point of failure. Without pushback, scrutiny, or debate, even the best-intentioned decisions go untested — opening the door to blind spots and systemic failures.
This creates an intriguing leadership paradox:
The rise of low-ego, highly analytical leaders. As AI takes over execution, leadership may become less about charisma, emotion, and persuasion and more about wisdom, ethics, and discernment (precision decision-making). These leaders will succeed not because they can captivate a room or rally a team but because they consistently make sound, well-reasoned choices.
A greater need for deeply human, charismatic leaders. As AI renders decisions increasingly cold and clinical, people may crave the opposite — leaders who make them feel something. In a world drowning in data, trust in a leader’s judgment and integrity may become more important than their knowledge or abilities. People might ask, “Do I believe you are using this information in my best interest?” rather than “What information do you have that I don’t?”
Think about it: On one end, you get hyper-logical, Vulcan-like leaders who are efficient and precise but detached from human emotion. On the other, you get magnetic, larger-than-life personalities who captivate and inspire but prioritize charisma over substance.
Maybe the real challenge is finding something that blends the best of both without falling into either trap.
The future of thought leadership: What can we do?
AI has further democratized information. So, the future of thought leadership can’t simply be about unique insights. It has to involve unique perspectives that foster trust and build deeper relationships.
To stay relevant, thought leaders should consider shifting their focus in three crucial ways.
Stop delivering merely facts and start shaping meaning. AI can generate endless information, but leadership won’t be about producing more information – it will be about guiding interpretation. The true value of thought leadership will lie in helping different groups contextualize and synthesize insights in ways that create shared understanding and deeper meaning. It’s not just about presenting data; it’s about framing it in a way that fosters trust, alignment, and action.
Trust in the storyteller is the foundation of belief in the story. John Maxwell once wrote, “People buy into the leader before they buy into the vision … leaders cannot take their people to places they haven’t yet traveled to themselves!” In other words, the story creates value and builds trust, but if an audience doesn’t believe in the storyteller, the message loses its impact.Elevating trusted voices within your brand and helping them grow into the thought leaders of tomorrow is one of the most crucial content tasks. Thought leadership is no longer just about great content — it’s about the credibility, integrity, and authenticity of the people behind it.
Create more interactive and community-driven content. The new thought leadership objective isn’t just attention — it’s engagement. Interactivity over traffic. Loyalty over transactions. Depth over virality. Instead of simply broadcasting insights, thought leaders must foster conversations, cultivate communities, and create collaborative spaces where ideas don’t just spread but also evolve.
The asymmetry of relationships: The new leadership advantage
If AI reduces friction in execution, it also strips away the moments where leaders prove their worth through debate, persuasion, and the art of overcoming resistance.
Without these natural checks, leadership shifts from the person who is the sole strategist to the one who is the ethical anchor (the connective force that holds an organization or community together).
If this turns out to be true, then the future of sustained leadership won’t rest on an asymmetry of information — because information is now universally accessible. Nor will it rely solely on charisma or broad influence.
Instead, leadership will hinge on the ability to create an asymmetry of relationships in which leaders not only broadcast insights but also imbue them with deeper meaning, context, and trust and find ways to co-create within varied and specific communities. It’s not about having exclusive knowledge and making it widely available; it’s about shaping understanding in a way that resonates, builds credibility, and fosters genuine connection in very specific contexts.
Leadership in this new era won’t involve commanding authority. It will require leaders to earn it one community at a time. The ones who thrive won’t be those who control but those who connect.
Leadership isn’t about seeing the path anymore. It’s about making the journey matter.
It’s your story. Tell it well.
Subscribe to workday or weekly CMI emails to get Rose-Colored Glasses in your inbox each week.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
Don’t launch a new agency or any brand before listening to advice from someone who’s done it and even written a book about building brands that break barriers.
Models walk down runways showcasing what the brand is selling. It’s a common-sense tactic.
Yet, this marketing play doesn’t have to be common, as Boot Barn illustrates with its recent Boot Barn X Wonderwest Fashion Show. The western lifestyle brand did something that can inspire any B2C or B2B company that does marketing-related events.
Its avant-garde show blended a fashion film into a live fashion show in Nashville that debuted on the Boot Barn website. Then, it repackaged the show and the behind-the-scenes efforts into video streaming on Hulu.
Let’s look at what worked and what could have been done better in the strategy. Just one note before we do: These takeaways do not relate to the artistic concept of the fashion show — debating what’s good art isn’t that helpful or productive for marketers.
1. Tell more of the story
Boot Barn’s fashion show’s website page includes a section, “Behind the Scenes — The Making of the Fashion Show.” It notes that it took more than 100 hours of filming over five shoot days in two countries. It included 75 runway looks, 36 models, and eight dancers.
In the show’s streaming version on Hulu, it uses over half of the 38-minute video to take viewers behind the scenes, explaining the show concept and production and profiling the three charities supported by the show’s celebrity partners.
What works
Giving your audience a look at what they couldn’t see otherwise gives a feeling of exclusivity. There’s a reason backstage passes are prized — the holders get to see what happens to make the event possible and see the performers in their non-stage persona.
In the streaming video, viewers learn about the unconventional concept, hear from people involved in the production, and see what it took to get to the public performance.
On the website, Boot Barn uses numbers to give a glimpse into what it took to produce the fashion, positioning the show as a big production. In the streaming video, the clips begin with an unseen voice at one of the shoots, “Are you guys ready? And action!” and show shots that make the viewer realize this fashion show won’t be as simple as models walking down a runway.
What could work better
Boot Barn should have created more content for the website. It took five days to shoot the 47-minute show. While that story is told more in the video, the website just highlights a few numbers. The website’s behind-the-scenes content seems like an afterthought. Yet, the website is an ideal place to tell even more of the story.
What did those five days (and all the planning days before that) look like? How many crew members were involved? Where did they shoot? How did they choose the models or the creative formats? What were the funny outtakes or impressive moments that didn’t make the final version?
Boot Barn had all the material to tell more and better-developed behind-the-scenes stories. Its audience likely would have loved that kind of backstage pass.
2. Connect the story to the mission
On the fashion show’s page, below the header, Meet the Models — an Army of Femme Fatale Vixens, it reads: “More than a fashion show, this project is about empowerment, strength in numbers, and creating a space to share the stories of the unseen and the unheard. Meet the army of women who helped bring this creation to life.”
Photos of four models (Mia, Syndney, Rainey, and Kyla) are shown, accompanied by a quote related to confidence. As Mia says, “My confidence comes from not caring what other people think and just living life by my own rules.”
What works
Models often work as voiceless mannequins — they’re paid to showcase the clothes, not speak, let alone express an opinion. It plays well to the Boot Barn show’s theme of the “voiceless.”
What could work better
The meet part of the meet-the-model feature wasn’t executed well. First, it includes only four of the 36 models. And frankly, the viewer barely “meets” them — a single phrase about the origin of their confidence does not make a good “meet.” Nor does it reinforce the label of “femme fatale vixen.”
The bigger issue with this feature is that Boot Barn promised too much. It tells the viewer that the project is about empowerment and sharing the stories of the unseen and the unheard. Yet, it doesn’t do that here.
3. Partner for purpose and reach
Boot Barn partnered with three singers and their charities for the event — Miranda Lambert and her MuttNation and Lucky Break Rescue charities, Jelly Roll and the Mustangs of America Foundation, and Riley Green and his Heroes and Horses charity for veterans.
Each charity, along with its singer, is profiled in the streaming video. On the website, Boot Barn briefly discusses each singer and charity and links to each nonprofit’s site.
What works
Having a mission that goes beyond “sell things” always resonates with audiences. By partnering with high-profile singers who specialize in country music, Boot Barn strengthened its credibility among the target audience and reached a wider audience.
The vignettes in the video are masterful storytelling that fit the tone and mood of the entire Boot Barn event.
What could work better
Nothing. They did well at making the most of the celebrity and charitable partnerships.
4. Think ahead
What works
Countdowns create a sense of urgency (act now or lose the opportunity) or excitement (the event is coming soon). Think of New Year’s Eve celebrations. Boot Barn went for excitement in this Facebook Reel captioned, “We’re in the final days leading up to the Boot Barn X Wonderwest Fashion Show. Watch the show at 11.18.24 at 6PM CT on Boot Barn.com.”
As a side note to the actual post, the caption explains Boot Barn would host the live show on its website rather than send viewers to YouTube or Hulu (where it now streams). Directing audiences to your website — where they may more easily explore your other content — is almost always a good choice.
What could work better
The countdown could be more specific. “Coming soon” is good. “Two days until it starts” is better. “Exact time until it starts” is the best. Live countdown clocks are abundantly available to be added to a website or social media post.
Going beyond the event
Boot Barn invested a lot into its fashion event and the final product — the video streaming on Hulu — is an intriguing and entertaining watch. However, if its content team and the event team had worked together more closely, the brand could have had an even bigger hit across all its channels.
It’s a great lesson on the many content-focused opportunities that lie untapped around your events. It’s also a kick-in-the-pants to get a meeting between the content and events teams on your calendar ASAP.
Want more content marketing tips, insights, and examples? Subscribe to workday or weekly emails from CMI.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
When someone lives with a health condition such as asthma, psoriasis, or bacterial infections, they’re not the only ones who are affected.
Their family members — parents, spouses, siblings, children, or other relatives — often step up to provide care at home.
Global biopharma company GSK recognized this patient-adjacent audience in its content and marketing program. It’s a big group. In the United States alone, an estimated 44.6 million family caregivers assist their family members, according to Columbia University’s Mailman School of Public Health.
That prompted GSK to create an initiative — Carerhood — to help caretakers find credible information and peer support. Its success led to its selection as the Best Content Marketing Program in Health Care for the Content Marketing Awards. And, for her work on the program, Debbie Hsu, then the global patient digital platform and content strategy lead, was recognized as a 2024 finalist for B2C Content Marketer of the Year.
Caregivers deserve their own content
“The knowledge needed to care for their loved ones goes beyond just dispensing medication,” GSK explains in its awards application. “Carers must research on their own, combing through many different sources, to find credible information to help their loved ones manage their conditions.”
These caregivers sacrifice and face increased stress as they help their family members navigate confusing paths. Doctors, nurses, and other health care professionals are already overwhelmed and not always available to answer questions.
GSK created Carerhood to solve or at least help address that problem. The mobile-responsive platform connected carers to the right information and actionable advice from expert carer communities.
It personalized the experience, too. On the homepage, visitors were immediately met with a quiz to understand their caregiving style (and a sign-up for updates so GSK captures email addresses).
The quiz helped GSK understand the loved one’s conditions as well as the carer’s needs and capabilities. It then recommended relevant content and opened the door to its carer communities on social media, including Facebook (116,000 followers), Instagram (almost 1,800 followers), and YouTube (3,870 subscribers).
Much of the content available through Carerhood was derived from experts in caregiving — people who have helped family members through their health challenges.
Its Instagram page illustrates the array of available content, from posts about offerings on the Carerhood site to self-care tips and advice on specific illnesses, such as benign prostatic enlargement.
In this Instagram Reel published on International Epilepsy Day, for example, a mom named Emma shares what it’s like caring for her son, Oscar, who was diagnosed with the disease when he was 6:
YouTube served as a home base for its videos, including ones featuring carer advocate Elizabeth Miller giving tips to help relieve caregiver stress.
The Carerhood team made the experiences easy to navigate. For example, a four-minute video providing stress-relief tips was broken into clearly labeled chapters in the description. It also linked to the speaker’s Instagram account so viewers could follow her and learn more about caregiving.
On the Carerhood website, a video library gave caregivers access to relevant videos as well as suggested related videos:
It also displayed the site’s tagging system on the homepage so people could easily select the topic they’re most interested in and discover relevant content.
Delivering healthy results
In the first year after launch, Carerhood attracted more than 50,000 website visits from 50 countries. Over half (25,000) completed the questionnaire and saw their personalized content. About nine months after beginning, GSK expanded the site to add more health conditions and collaborated further with expert carers to spotlight the vital role played by caregivers.
Is your work award-worthy? You’ll never know unless you enter. Visit the Content Marketing Awards website to review the rules, study past winners, and see the latest categories and deadlines.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
We’re living in an era obsessed with overachievement.
Tech billionaires tout themselves as the sole architects of progress, preaching the virtues of moving fast and breaking things. Eager to emulate this mindset, companies chase disruption at all costs.
But here’s the irony: Marketing teams have spent the last decade moving fast and breaking things, only to find themselves stuck in an endless cycle of fixing. Fixing broken analytics. Fixing disconnected martech stacks. Fixing fractured messaging. Nothing is ever complete enough to set a new standard.
Somewhere along the way, teams have lost the value of the humble process of setting a process.
Comedian David Mitchell once offered this funny observation on the British game show Would I Lie To You?:
“One of the codes I live my life by is that my appearance should be in no way noteworthy. But then again, not so unnoteworthy as to be in itself noteworthy.”
David explained his code with the example of a person who wears a gray tie that’s so colorless, so unnoteworthy, that it actually becomes noteworthy in itself.
I thought of David’s “code” when someone sent me an Inc. article from a couple of years ago that pitted content (and the disruptive iconoclasts who go against the grain of conventional processes to create it) against predictable processes (and the people who follow them).
I’ll explain how I think it ties to Mitchell’s life code. But first, a bit of a rant. (You can watch it in the video below or read it — with even more detail — right here.)
Content vs. process
The Inc. article warns organizations not to overlook “hyper-performers.” OK, you might say, who would argue differently?
But what prompted my rant is the mischaracterization of hyper-performers based on a quote the article mentions from a mid-1990s interview with Steve Jobs:
“I found that the best people are the ones that really understand the content. (By “content,” think what truly drives results in your business.) And they’re a pain in the butt to manage. But you put up with it because they’re so great at the content. And that’s what makes great products. It’s not process. It’s content.”
Can you think of anyone getting attention for how seemingly good they are at disrupting the status quo and creating value but who is also a pain to manage?
In the interview, Jobs recounted how Apple’s engineering team told him they’d need five years to develop the mouse, and each one would cost $300 to build. So, he hired an outside firm that developed one in 90 days that would cost $15 to make.
A remarkable achievement. But later in the interview, Jobs implies that process always gets in the way of innovation:
“Companies get confused. They want to replicate initial success, and a lot of them think somehow there’s some magic in the process. So, they try to institutionalize processes, and before long, people get confused that the process is the content.”
That’s wrong.
Process and content must be in balance for either one to achieve remarkable results. All remarkable content — including the content of a product and the experiential content that marketers create — is built on standardized, repeatable processes.
Jobs recognized the need for an innovative way to develop the mouse because Apple’s standard, well-understood processes informed its engineers that the kind of mouse Jobs wanted would take five years and cost $300. But having that well-understood process in place allowed him to recognize that need.
Finding a firm to design an inexpensive mouse in 90 days was just Step 1. Success came because Apple developed that mouse quickly and then improved its existing, repeatable process to set a new standard for producing mice.
The creative solution and the repeatable process made it work.
Jobs could only know that developing an inexpensive mouse in 90 days was innovative because Apple’s engineers had already set a standard.
Why content and marketing need both
Most organizations have at least a few hyper-performers in content — creative or subject matter expert stars who bust their butts to craft remarkable things.
In some organizations, these creators have no content standards or processes to follow. In others, the hyper-performers get excused from the established process to avoid disrupting their disruptiveness.
Without a standard operating process to establish what “remarkable” looks like, organizations struggle to spot the value these star employees generate.
Let’s say you’re a new content leader at a company where the product marketing, brand, and PR teams all produce thought leadership without visibility into each other’s plans. As a result, the content often conflicts.
You might conclude that there’s no hope for changing the way these iconoclastic content-focused hyper-performers work — so why create a process at all?
That’s a mistake.
Without a standard way of doing things (a process), the business can’t determine which content should be prioritized or eliminated from contention. Everybody gets to decide what “remarkable content” looks like from an individual or team lens. When someone says, “That sucks,” and someone else says, “That’s awesome,” they’re both right — because no standard exists.
Some might say, “Let the performance data decide.” But with no standard process, the data isn’t enough.
For example, you can’t determine whether the content performed well or poorly unless each piece followed an established distribution and promotion process. You won’t know if the success or failure had more to do with the content itself or the promotion of it. Did it fail because it wasn’t promoted effectively, or did it succeed only because of an extensive promotional campaign?
AI as disruptive hyper-performer?
The promotion of generative AI as the “hyper-performer” in the proverbial content room illustrates my point.
For example, OpenAI has advised people to prompt its new reasoning models in a particular way. But as Marketing AI Institute’s Mike Kaput notes in a recent LinkedIn post, many say doing the opposite of what OpenAI advises produces superior results.
Who’s right? Everyone.
Only humans can assign meaning to ChatGPT or any generative AI output. And people use their own learned experience to determine “superior” results.
If you don’t have an established process for assessing the output, whatever output you believe to be superior is superior. It’s like asking whether one movie is better than another. You might hold one view while someone else holds another. Everyone is right.
Standard processes show where to innovate
Taiichi Ohno, who pioneered the Toyota Production System, once said, “With no standard, there can be no improvement.”
That’s why the push for remarkable content in modern marketing must strike a balance with a collaborative process. Some of the most hyper-performing professionals I’ve met are managers who created a company-wide method for developing creative endeavors.
It is the process, the standard, and the business-as-usual approach that lets them see the possibility for innovation. Yes, it slows things down. It does so purposely.
It’s easy to see the value in the innovative superstar who doesn’t want to conform to the process but frequently creates incredibly valuable things.
However, you only see how remarkable the results are by comparing them to the results from content created consistently and at scale.
Process and content must work together symbiotically.
Welcome process disruptions
I’d bet money that the Apple engineers weren’t a bunch of dullards who didn’t get it. They were probably extraordinarily competent people who looked at the situation and said, “This is what it currently takes.”
Would they have been open to investigating ways to improve and innovate the process? Jobs doesn’t say.
If they weren’t, then Jobs makes a good point about moving the innovation to someone who might innovate the process to an extreme. A process is only as strong as its ability to evolve and improve.
Your process should be in no way noteworthy but not so unnoteworthy as to be in itself noteworthy.
A great content process is like excellent plumbing: invisible and adaptable. It should foster improvisation and innovation by allowing for the integration of remarkable exceptions.
And that brings me to my ultimate defense of the process person vs. content person. An innovative process is (or can be) content itself (i.e., the contents of a great strategy).
Remarkable, standardized processes need the unique, out-of-the-box thinking, design, and execution associated with great products. And the teams responsible for the process are no less valuable or innovative than those who think up the things that process will produce.
Your team members won’t create remarkable content every day. But on the days they do, your process will help you recognize, repeat, and improve on it.
It’s your story. Tell it well.
Updated from a March 2023 story.
Subscribe to workday or weekly CMI emails to get Rose-Colored Glasses in your inbox each week.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
The Content Marketing Institute team byline indicates this article reflects the collective work of the CMI team. CMI is a global marketing education and training organization dedicated to advancing the practice of content marketing. We create and curate content experiences that teach marketers and creators from enterprise brands, small businesses, and agencies how to attract and retain customers through compelling, multichannel storytelling. Global brands turn to CMI for strategic consultation, research, and training and certification, and send teams to Content Marketing World, the largest content marketing-focused event, the Marketing Analytics & Data Science (MADS) conference, and CMI digital events every year. Follow @CMIContent on Facebook, LinkedIn, and Instagram, and use the hashtag #CMWorld.
Is it time to expand the definition of content marketing?
In 2020, I posed that question. My argument was simple: Content marketing isn’t just about creating content for marketing — it’s also about marketing the content.
Four years later, this expanded definition is even more relevant. Great content without its own marketing strategy is like a product sitting on a warehouse shelf with no packaging, no sales strategy, and no audience to buy it.
Brands winning today market their content strategically to ensure that it gets seen, shared, and acted on. They actively target content delivery channels beyond websites and social media. They embrace concepts in the evolution of marketing, such as generative engine optimization (GEO) and artificial intelligence optimization.
So, should you revisit the definition of content marketing? Let’s explore how the notion of content marketing has changed and why marketing the content itself is just as important as creating it.
Content marketing isn’t just content creation
Content marketing has evolved into a full-fledged skill set. Marketers who assume their job is done once the content is published are falling behind.
Winning at content marketing today requires:
Content distribution — getting content in front of the right audience
Audience targeting — using data, AI, and personalization to attract ideal consumers
Content repurposing — turning long-form content into multiple formats
Performance tracking — measuring how content drives actual business outcomes
If content is the product, marketing the content is how it generates demand and drives action.
Market your content like a product
Previously, I suggested applying the classic four Ps of marketing — product, price, place, and promotion — to content strategy. However, since then, content and how organizations perceive it are taking a front seat. It requires businesses to adopt a more modern approach to marketing.
That’s why in my book CASH: The 4 Keys to Better Sales, Smarter Marketing, and a Supercharged Revenue Machine, I introduce Lee’s Ps — presence, perception, price, and profitability. These factors apply just as much to content marketing as they do to business strategy. Presence and perception are leading factors in content success, so let’s dig a little deeper into those two.
Presence in content marketing
Having content about your product or service is not enough. It must be present in conversations, social feeds, and communities to cultivate the desire for the product. Many great products have failed simply because the content about them wasn’t sufficiently present in consumers’ minds to foster sales growth. Despite the need for quality content, quantity is still important. Your content must be present.
Supporting this notion, countless products have grown in demand and sales, sometimes before they even existed. The mental and social presence of content pointing to the product is more important than the product’s availability.
In 2020, Nathan Apodaca uploaded a video to TikTok of himself skateboarding on the street while drinking Ocean Spray cran-raspberry juice from a big bottle. It caught the attention of other TikTok viewers, including Jimmy Fallon, who did similar tribute videos. The video went viral, and juice sales increased — all without an Ocean Spray-initiated promotion tactic.
Brands must ensure that their content (or content about their brands and products) is present across multiple platforms, conversations, and formats to stay top of mind.
To build a content presence, you should:
Be where your audience is: Distribute content across multiple platforms.
Use multiple formats: Turn blogs into long-form videos, short-form videos, and posts.
Leverage organic and paid reach: A combination of paid ads and social sharing ensures maximum presence.
Perception in content marketing
The perception of a product can rocket it into viral success or immediately cancel it. Perception rules buyer behavior, and content is what drives — or corrects — that perception. Every brand must shape, control, and amplify perception before someone else does it for them.
To shape content perception, you should:
Position your content as authoritative and valuable.
Leverage influencers and social proof to boost credibility.
Use storytelling to create an emotional connection with your audience.
Content marketing is about how people feel when they engage with the content and that is more than just words or visuals.
Implementing the successful definition of content marketing
With that overview of amplifying your presence and perception, let’s drill down to some specific things you can do to implement a modern definition of content marketing.
How do you create all that content?
The days of relying solely on long-form content are gone. Speed and frequency matter. While crafting that high-quality 2,000-word article or polished video, don’t overlook the opportunity to repurpose it into smaller content pieces to keep your audience engaged. For example:
A blog post can become a LinkedIn thread.
A podcast episode can become short video clips.
A white paper can become a string of carousel posts on social media.
AI-powered tools make remixing easier than ever, but strategy still matters. The best marketers think of content as a modular asset that can be reshaped and redistributed for maximum impact.
Consistency is key. Content that shows up often wins.
How do you get people engaged?
If-you-build-it-they-will-come does not work for content. Every piece of content needs a marketing strategy beyond distribution. To keep content alive long after it’s published, successful brands use:
SEO and AI-driven optimization to ensure that content surfaces in search engines and personalized feeds
Dark social, also known as private sharing (Slack, WhatsApp, direct messages), which plays a huge role in content visibility
Interactive content, such as polls and quizzes, to drive more engagement than static content
What about organic and paid promotion?
Getting content in front of your target audiences requires a mix of organic and paid promotion. Successful brands allocate budgets specifically for content distribution, not just ad campaigns.
Establishing awareness organically includes unpaid avenues, such as search engine optimization, artificial intelligence optimization, social sharing, and public relations. Paid channels allow you to better target your reach using tools such as ads on LinkedIn and Facebook and influencer collaborations.
Should you gate the content?
Free content drives brand awareness and trust. Gated content must be worth enough for the recipients to be willing to exchange their contact details or pay for the information.
Instead of locking everything, many brands now use a hybrid model — providing valuable free content while offering exclusive premium insights behind a paywall or subscription.
Advancing the actions of content marketing
Content marketing works as both a noun and a verb:
Noun: A strategic marketing approach focused on creating and distributing valuable, relevant, and consistent content to attract and retain a clearly defined audience — and, ultimately, to drive profitable customer action
Verb: Applying marketing skills and techniques to written, video, audio, or social content to provide the greatest possible reach, longevity, and effectiveness of that content
To make content marketing successful, you must embrace it as an expansive verb. Websites and social were just the start. Market your content to AI platforms, searches, and generative summaries. Recognize that your efforts need to encompass all the places your content should appear in order to create the proper presence.
And do it in a way that establishes positive perceptions for your content and brand.
That’s how you live the modern definition of content marketing.
Updated from a July 2020 post.
Want more content marketing tips, insights, and examples? Subscribe to workday or weekly emails from CMI.
HANDPICKED RELATEDCONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
Did you hear the canary chirping in the marketing coal mine?
It got a little louder in the past month after Ahrefs released a report showing a 32% month-over-month drop in search traffic at HubSpot.com, the website home of the popular customer relationship management software. (January 2025 had 5.7 million visits, and December 2024 saw 8.7 million visits.)
Marketers did a lot of squawking, sharing the stats with surface-level responses and proclaiming the findings as an indicator that SEO is dead.
Why should you care about what’s happening with HubSpot’s website? You shouldn’t. After all, you’re probably not in the CRM industry, nor do you know in detail exactly what the company’s marketing strategy is.
But you shouldn’t ignore the potential implications. Content Technologist’s Deborah Carver writes: “In favor of rapidly pushing out content for a zero-click reader, [prominent SEO influencers and their content marketing acolytes have] forgotten that other fields, tactics, and ideas exist outside of the internet.”
See the recent search hullabaloo for what it really is — an early warning sign that marketers are in tumult about the rapid evolution of how consumers find a company and its content, products, and services.
It’s time to stop your (likely) longstanding traditional SEO approach. Here are five questions to answer to prepare your brand for the future:
1. Does your audience behave the same as it did?
Before diving into how your audience members use search, explore all their interactions with your company. A lot has happened in recent years, from changes in where people work (remote vs. company office) to how they learn (online and in person) and how they get answers (generative AI tools vs. traditional search engines). Add in the legal and social challenges around social media, from the TikTok ban to the platform owners, and you can see that your audience is going through a lot.
Has all that change affected how it engages with your company? An audit of your audience’s behavior can answer that. Examine data points from 2023, 2024, and today for your marketing tactics. What’s increased? What’s decreased? What’s stayed the same? Do the numbers indicate any big behavior changes worth noting (and responding to)?
With this big-picture view, you can now dig deeper into the specifics, and in this process, that’s referral traffic to your website.
2. Does your referral traffic really deliver?
Go below the surface of website traffic numbers to understand which visitors truly matter to your organization.
Does search referral traffic lead visitors to take the actions you want them to?
If not, maybe you should adjust your SEO investment and put some (or all) of it into your marketing strategy components that do deliver results.
If referral traffic is helpful, drill down to understand which visitor segments really deliver. What are the intents of those coveted searchers? Is it informational, commercial, or transactional?
What are the most effective keywords? After all, just because your site ranks highly for some keywords doesn’t mean it’s helpful for the business.
Szymon Slowik illustrates this in his in-depth analysis of the HubSpot news on Surfer SEO. He points out how HubSpot lost its No. 1 rankings for “marketing strategy template” as well as “quotes” and notes that one is likely more important than the other to HubSpot’s business.
With this new analysis, reprioritize your keyword list to emphasize the ones with the biggest impact and delete those that are irrelevant.
That leads to the next step.
3. Do your metrics really measure success?
Metrics for SEO success typically center on keywords and rankings. Bosses get impressed by how many top three rankings appear on a seemingly endless list of words in the quarterly report. Of course, none of that matters if the high rankings don’t serve the business.
That’s why you should revise the measurement plan to ensure that it counts what contributes to the company’s marketing goals. Of course, you can’t just unilaterally revise the metrics on your own. Talk to company executives to get their input, explain your recommended new reporting system, and get their OK before implementing the more helpful report.
4. What about your content competition?
With a better understanding of your audience’s behavior and your newly prioritized keyword list, you’re ready to explore wider search behavior.
Input each keyword to learn what sites’ content already ranks well for it. What does that search results page look like? Is there an AI overview at the top? If so, does it include a single or multiple source links? Visit those sources and any of the top rankings not cited in the AIO. Analyze the content itself (including embedded links, images, videos, and headers), along with the available metadata, to find opportunities for your brand to improve or create new content.
TIP: Don’t forget to do an audio search for your keywords to understand what turns up in your audience’s ears.
5. What’s in the SEO name?
Your company has likely codified SEO and SEM into the marketing structure. Employee titles may include the acronyms. You may contract with SEO agencies or SEM specialists.
It’s a good time to start the conversation about updating the title, recognizing that SEO and SEM are not siloed activities. But don’t just implement a title change. Ask these employees to describe their work without using “SEO” or “SEM.” Do the same with any external partners, too. Evaluate those descriptions, add your own modifications, and collaborate to arrive at a role name that more accurately reflects what they do or accomplish.
TIP: If the conversation about a new name reveals that they only do traditional SEO work, it’s time to update the job description or find a new agency.
Sing a modern marketing song
You don’t need to worry about HubSpot’s big traffic drop. That’s for the CRM provider to do (or not). However, you can hear all the hullabaloo as a warning call.
It’s time to better understand how your audience behavior is evolving and how your brand’s marketing should respond. Then, you can sing a tune that will be met with applause from your audience and your executives.
Need more guidance to hone your content marketing skills? Enroll in CMI University and get 12-month on-demand access to an extensive curriculum designed to help you do your job more effectively.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
We were all riding the Old Town Road with Lil Nas X while watching the slow-burn soap opera that was Brexit unfold across the pond.
That was just six years ago, but everything from that era feels like it belongs in a museum.
Back then, our hottest debate was whether pineapple belongs on pizza. Simpler times, right?
I digress.
At Content Marketing World that year, my friend Joe Pulizzi presented 7 Laws for Content Marketing Success over the next decade: the 2020s.
Halfway through that period, so much has changed. It’s time to update those laws for the new reality.
Marketing is at another inflection point. Generative AI cranks out content at warp speed, trust in media is hanging by a thread, third-party data and cookies are (as Miracle Max might say) “mostly dead,” and audiences are more skeptical than ever.
Over the next five years, those of us who love and practice content marketing will have to be more creative, more ruthless about priorities, and more strategic than ever before.
These new content marketing laws will help you survive 2025 and dominate through 2030. Watch the video for the quick take, then keep reading for the deep dive.
Law 1: Always be orchestrating (internal buy-in is for amateurs)
The greatest threat to content marketing isn’t a lack of great ideas. It’s the inability to prove to fearful executives how valuable content marketing can be.
In 2025, it’s not enough to sell content marketing internally. If they haven’t gotten it by now, no amount of successful case studies packaged into a PowerPoint presentation will change business leaders’ minds. Today, you need to force the integration of valuable content programs across teams.
Marketing has become content marketing. Lean into that fact, and don’t try to sell content marketing as a distinct function. Assume you have permission to do marketing — and start creating great content as a function within it.
Here’s what I mean: Instead of spending time trying to make a case for that separate publication, event, community, newsletter, podcast, or resource center, just make any one of those things a core piece of the overall marketing plan.
The new way: Figure out the strategic impact of whatever you want to build, integrate it into a content intelligence dashboard, and put that in front of executives. Include revenue attribution, retention insights, customer experience impact, and anything that shows impact.
Make your owned media (content marketing) strategy impossible to ignore. Make it part of marketing.
Law 2: Build a content business, not a marketing hobby
The second law is to escalate your owned media efforts with multiple goals and objectives.
The most successful brands treat their owned media operations like a business within the business, not a fluffy afterthought.
AI-fueled content spam will soon be everywhere. Trust in advertising just isn’t there. Audiences are starving for real, differentiating, and uplifting experiences.
Successful companies aren’t using their owned media platforms to sell products — they’re monetizing them in multiple ways. They’re building their content marketing properties to provide multiple lines of value to the business.
For example, a small credit union I worked with rebooted its corporate blog last year. The blog, built to inspire trust in the credit union’s brand and create engagement, provided a fine brand experience and plenty of traffic and engagement.
But the business saw it as a side hustle compared with the “real marketing” happening elsewhere.
Today, the rebooted blog is considered a “marketing multiplier.” The content team runs it like a media business, with in-house ads targeted by topic to attract high-level leads. Polls and surveys on the site provide market research insight and first-party data that the marketing team uses for targeted advertising.
The company expanded what was known as “the blog” into a content brand — branching into a podcast and physical events – and a platform for the brand to provide value to its community. It’s now every bit as strategic as the company’s financial products and services.
The new way: In 2025, build your content marketing strategy profit and loss (P&L) statement. Make sure your owned media platforms are considered corporate assets capable of generating more value than they cost.
Law 3: Buy, steal, or partner (just don’t start from scratch)
Launching a brand-new strategic content initiative from zero is playing on hard mode.
Consider partnering, collaborating, or buying an audience before you commit to the long haul of building it. Why spend two years growing an email list when you can acquire an existing one overnight?
An established content or media brand may not just boast a sizable, subscribed audience — it may also carry a high level of brand trust that can instantly amplify your efforts.
For example, last year, country music stars Morgan Wallen and Eric Church teamed up to purchase the iconic brand Field & Stream. They plan to expand the renowned print magazine into outdoor music festivals, an apparel line, and a digital publication.
The new way: Before you decide to green-light your company’s first (or ninth) blog, podcast, or video series, see whether someone out there already has the audience you want. Then, do a buy-versus-build analysis.
Some company (or some person) may already have an audience and still struggle to grow it alone. Shortcut the grind and take what’s already working.
Law 4: Build a content supply chain (not a dumpster fire)
AI-generated content is flooding the market. Over the next five years, the winners won’t be the ones producing the most but the ones designing content operations that scale intelligently and creatively.
Content marketing isn’t just producing more and more digital assets. It should function like a precision-engineered machine. If your content operation isn’t built for prioritization and content reuse, you’re already falling behind.
Follow these steps — ideate, create, produce, merchandise, activate, and measure — to align content operations with business goals. This structured workflow transforms content from an ad hoc effort into a strategic business asset.
The new way: Stop treating content like a never-ending to-do list. Build a structured, scalable content supply chain that operates like a precision factory.
Law 5: End the content free-for-all (structure, tag, and track everything)
If you’re still publishing content without structured metadata, you’re losing a considerable amount of value. Unstructured, one-off content might as well be going to the digital landfill — good luck finding value in all that mess.
One of the most valuable use cases for generative AI is its ability to handle structured metadata, keywords, and pattern recognition — transforming your content library into a highly valuable, organized knowledge base for your company.
Consider two recent projects.
In one, a tech company tried to integrate a chatbot for customer support, training it using the company’s existing help documents. Because the content was unstructured and outdated, the company faced a massive challenge — sifting through obsolete information and ensuring that the system “unlearned” incorrect material.
Conversely, one B2B manufacturer spent a great deal of time building a well-organized taxonomy and structured framework for its thought leadership and how-to content. When it needed an automated filtering system, it simply leveraged its existing metadata and tags. That upfront work let the company implement an effective solution quickly and seamlessly.
The new way: Invest in semantic tagging, structured content models, and modular assets. Your content should be findable, measurable, and dynamically repurposable. If you’re not treating content like a structured data asset, you’re leaving money on the table.
Law 6: Your owned audience is your last competitive advantage
Despite Google backing away from demolishing the third-party cookie, first-party data remains the best way for brands to benefit from personalized and targeted experiences.
The one thing that will matter for sure in 2030 is having an audience you can address on your terms — and that wants to hear from you.
Interactive content (configurators, pricing tools, polls, surveys, and games) is changing how brands interact with potential customers.
But the real value doesn’t derive from the momentary engagement with that customer. It comes from leveraging the first-party data gleaned from those applications, which you can use to make the customer’s entire experience more relevant, targeted, and valuable than anything they can get elsewhere.
The new way: Don’t surrender to the renewed pressure to move everything to social media or chase AI search results. Build the home of your empire on your turf. Email newsletters. Private communities. Exclusive memberships.
Brands that control their audience pipeline will be the last ones standing.
Law 7: Say ‘no’ more often (mediocre content kills brands)
Content marketing failures don’t come from bad ideas. They come from doing too much mediocre content instead of focusing on producing a few brilliant things.
Every marketing team thinks it can run a blog, a podcast, a YouTube channel, a TikTok, a LinkedIn newsletter, and a research arm. But most can’t. And those that try suck at some of them.
The new way: Start a stopping list. Be ruthless. Focus on one or two genuinely exceptional content experiences your brand can own, sustain, and dominate. Depth wins. Half-assed doesn’t.
Into the future
When you follow these seven laws, you’re not just doing content marketing — you’re building an unstoppable content business:
Law 1. Always be orchestrating. Stop asking for buy-in. Demand alignment.
Law 2. Build a content business, not a marketing hobby. Content should pay for itself.
Law 3: Buy, steal, or partner. Don’t waste time starting from zero.
Law 4: Build a content supply chain, not a dumpster fire. Structure wins.
Law 5: End the content free-for-all. Every asset should be trackable and reusable.
Law 6: Your owned audience is your competitive advantage. If you don’t own the audience, you don’t own your future.
Law 7: Say no more often. Cut the mediocre. Focus on the exceptional.
Content marketing in 2030 will be unrecognizable. The only brands left standing will be the ones that treat content like a business, not just a marketing tactic.
It’s your story. Tell it well — loud, bold, and without apology.
You can learn so much more from the voices of experience in content marketing. To subscribe to the daily or weekly updates, visit www.News.ContentInstitute.com/Subscriptions or click the orange subscribe button at the top of any page.
Robert Rose consults and hosts workshops on helping marketing teams align their marketing processes to all kinds of technologies – including generative AI. Contact him to learn about those programs.
Handpicked Related Content:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
SEO isn’t dead. It just needs a fresher approach. In this video presentation, experts from TopRank Marketing reveal why traditional SEO still has a role and how marketers should embrace a wider view of getting content found.
Recently, she participated in a Live With CMI interview about responsible marketing. Watch the highlights below or read on for some takeaways from her book (a must-read) and the discussion.
What is responsible marketing?
Lola says she used the words “responsible marketing” to take the pressure off marketers. She explains why by starting with the well-known outdoor apparel brand Patagonia. The brand has a reputation for its commitment to the environment. It even pledges 1% of sales to environmental causes. And yet, it doesn’t use the word “sustainable” in describing its brand mission.
Vincent Stanley, director of philosophy at Patagonia, explained that deliberate decision in an interview with Yale Insights, which Lola references in her book:
“Sustainable is the popular term for companies that have environmental and social ambitions. We don’t think there’s very much that we do at Patagonia that’s truly sustainable. That’s why we use the phrase ‘responsible company.’ We’re honing our practices so that we’re creating the least amount of pollution and using the least amount of resources to create a product. That’s reducing harm.”
Lola says Patagonia founder Yvon Chouinard explains it like this, “With what I have right now, with the conditions that we’re in right now, all I can do is try to be as responsible as possible.”
But it’s more than that. Lola advocates for responsible marketing because it simplifies the conversation (and in getting buy-in and other support) — something that is needed now more than ever.
It allows marketers to roll up purpose marketing, inclusive marketing, cause marketing, conscious marketing, multicultural marketing, social impact marketing, ethical marketing, diversity marketing, sustainable marketing, and culture marketing, she explains.
Responsible marketing works for the bottom-line business side, too. “When done right, responsible marketing drives sustainable business growth. It’s a powerful reminder that doing good and doing well are not mutually exclusive but rather beautifully interconnected,” Lola writes.
“By optimizing for relevance, intention, and precision, responsible marketing invites us to say ‘R.I.P.’ to unnecessary confusion that slows us down, holds us back, and leaves world-changing work vulnerable to detractors both well-meaning and otherwise.”
Don’t start with demands
Responsible marketing doesn’t start with ultimatums about what should be done or complaints about what isn’t being done correctly, Lola says.
She recounts a recent conversation at her book launch event. A man in his early to mid-20s asked her when he should have his say and share his ideas about all the wrong things the company was doing. Recognizing his frustration (and how he reminded her of herself at that age,) she shared some advice that may surprise you.
“You don’t do it that way,” she told him. “You control what you can control. You stay in your lane.
“Start getting to know people, ask them questions, get them to see you as an inquisitive young man. And then I guarantee you, before long, you’ll be invited to the table and asked for your opinion.”
But once you’re at the table, you still don’t make demands, Lola says. You advocate and implement a responsible marketing strategy.
Lola devotes the first part of her book to distilling a framework for responsible marketing, which is reflected in the chapter titles:
Make it authentic: Brand-relevant social impact
Make it known: Reputation impact
Make it count: Commercial impact
Each building block leads to the next. A brand with social relevancy gains a reputation for good that then converts into a financial result.
Lola calls it the Triple Top-Line Flywheel. Each block has five key performance indicators. When one or more of the KPIs is achieved, the next framework block is unlocked — creating an ongoing cycle of regenerative impact.
Social impact KPIs include:
Fostering diversity
Enabling inclusion
Advancing equity
Cultivating belonging
Supporting sustainability
Reputation impact KPIs encompass:
Amplifying brand identity
Delivering positive earned media
Increasing share of voice
Generating word of mouth (net promoter score)
Improving brand health/sentiment scores
Commercial impact KPIs include:
Driving sales
Acquiring new customers/users
Retaining customers/users
Maximizing wallet share/frequency
Attracting investors
It’s worth emphasizing that you need only achieve one KPI in a category to propel your brand to the next stage. So, for example, if your brand marketing cultivates an online community where members feel they belong (social impact), it can increase its share of voice (reputation impact) and then retain customers (commercial impact). With the flywheel fully engaged now, you can see ongoing contributions and benefits across all categories of impact.
Lola writes, “Triple top-line thinking comes together because, when you solve a problem, you create brand preference, and that is what makes the reputational impact turn into commercial impact.”
Use your superpowers
“Nobody has more power to show people what’s really going on,” Lola says. “What win-wins are you going to find where you’re not only creating financial value for your business, but you’re actually doubling down on that because you did the ultimate thing that every marketer knows is the cheat code to outside success … emotional connection.”
To help in your process, Lola offers books and authors (I’ve linked to their books and individual LinkedIn pages) who have helped in her development as a marketer and her thinking as a responsible marketing advocate:
“Let’s stand up, especially those of us who have these really fun jobs where we have so much control over what people see, consume, and hear. If we’re going to shape culture, let’s shape it in a way that includes all of us,” Lola says.
And that’s how to use your responsible marketing power for the good of your company and the world.
Want more content marketing tips, insights, and examples? Subscribe to workday or weekly emails from CMI.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
What was your favorite ad from the Super Bowl LIX?
I couldn’t pick just one. As is true every year, I love how creative they all are.
But OpenAI’s ad has stayed with me. With a new CMO at the helm, the company finally seems to have captured a message that doesn’t feel out of step with the zeitgeist.
The black-and-white ad showed hundreds of dots swirling and recombining into images celebrating human inventiveness and creativity. The company claims the ad was crafted entirely by humans with some AI-driven prototyping and storyboarding.
The commercial’s only scripted moment truly resonated, asking: “What do you want to create next?”
It’s a simple yet profound prompt for marketers navigating content creation in 2025. (And, no, the “prompting” irony isn’t lost on me.)
I touch on why in the video below and go into more detail in the rest of this article.
Constructed vs. created content
Marketing teams face an existential question today: What happens when AI can create content faster than humans?
As you know, faster doesn’t correlate to better. But slow doesn’t always correlate to great, either.
It’s comforting to rationalize that “faster than humans” isn’t enough to put most creators out of their jobs anytime soon. But that rationalization feels like the door that Kate Winslet and Leo DiCaprio’s characters clung to in Titanic. It looks big enough to save us both, but for some reason, it just isn’t.
You might find a better answer by understanding the difference between constructed and created content.
G.K. Chesterton articulated this distinction beautifully in his analysis of Charles Dickens’ The Pickwick Papers. He wrote:
“The whole difference between construction and creation is exactly this: that a thing constructed can only be loved after it is constructed; but a thing created is loved before it exists.”
Created content is the poem that forms in your mind before the pen ever touches paper.
It’s the painting vividly imagined before the first brushstroke meets the canvas.
It’s the article that takes shape in a carefully crafted outline, deepens through research, and finally gets refined into just the right expression.
Constructed content, by contrast, gains value only after it’s fully realized. Think of a technical manual, a street sign, the concise summary of a novel, or the abstract of a thought-provoking lecture. Useful and efficient but only recognized for their worth after completion.
Put simply, no one anticipates these things with excitement, but people can appreciate them once they start serving their purpose.
Content output by prompting a generative AI tool is, by nature, constructed content. It’s assembled, optimized, and fine-tuned based on algorithms, data sets, and prompts.
It can be helpful, efficient, engaging, and even loved. But it will always lack something essential: the human spark — the origin of an idea that we nurture, wrestle with, and fall in love with before it’s ever expressed.
Writing is writing, isn’t it?
I recently spoke with a young writer at a B2B technology company with a fascinating career trajectory. She started at an agency, crafting brilliant blog posts and articles. Later, she moved into an in-house content role, where she thrived on writing about industry trends and conducting in-depth interviews.
But, after a few organizational shifts, she eventually found herself editing technical specifications and product documentation instead of creating original pieces.
Three months into this role, she asked her manager if she could take on more varied writing assignments. The response? “Writers are writers. And writing is writing.”
The first statement is true. The second is not.
The young writer couldn’t figure out why that comment bugged her so much. She could see the danger of her editing role being replaced by generative AI. But it was how she felt about the writing itself that was so unfortunate. Her knack for storytelling had been quashed by dry reporting.
Some types of content can (and probably should) be purely constructed, like product descriptions, compliance documents, and technical specifications. These are useful and necessary, but they don’t exactly tap into the joy of creation.
Other kinds — thought leadership, brand storytelling, and emotionally compelling content — are created. They’re loved before they exist, and they evoke something powerful in the writer and the reader (or listener or viewer).
This distinction matters now more than ever. AI can construct content, but it doesn’t create in the way people do.
It can’t feel the deep satisfaction of discovering an idea and shaping it into a compelling narrative. It can’t infuse a piece with the lived experience, cultural nuances, and emotional resonance that make content memorable to both the author and the audience.
The power of friction in creativity
Here’s an essential point in the difference between constructed and created content. Created content isn’t better than constructed content. Constructed content may be just as effective, engaging, and appreciated.
The true value of created content lies in what it does for the creator. When people create, they don’t just express an idea. They live with it, refine it, struggle with it, and ultimately fall in love with it. That journey transforms us, sharpening our minds and deepening our perspectives.
The pushback to that manager isn’t to agree that “writing is writing.” Nor is it that the young writer can create content better than AI.
It’s that working on created content makes her a better investment for the company. She’s more valuable to the company when she falls in love with the ideas she has to wrestle into created existence.
Now, I get it. Your inner CEO might say, “I don’t care about her feelings. If the content can be just as loved, why not automate it?”
But here’s what you (and your inner CEO) should care about: the bottom line.
Wiser, more creative employees aren’t just happier — they’re also more profitable. Why?
Because a button-pushing robot follows instructions every time. Wise creative team members find better instructions over time. They start solving problems before they happen. They’re more likely to generate new ideas that push the company forward.
When creators are engaged — wrestling with ideas — they’re not just completing tasks. They’re inventing better ways to do them. That’s not just valuable, it’s irreplaceable.
This is why valuable friction is so important in marketing and creative content. Struggling with ideas, iterating, refining, and expressing something new leads to real growth.
Created content is the byproduct of that struggle, an artifact of human thought, insight, and artistry. And it’s the only thing that makes humans more valuable over time.
Balancing AI and human creativity
Both constructed and created content have their place. Generative AI can efficiently handle some aspects of high-volume, data-driven constructed content tasks like:
Automating SEO-focused content
Summarizing data and reports
Generating initial drafts for refinement
Creating product descriptions or FAQs
AI also has the potential for working together with humans on iterative editing sessions, idea generation, or turns of phrases that express the idea the human loves and is struggling to put into words.
But only a human can fall in love with an idea before it’s expressed. That makes humans not only irreplaceable but also the most valuable part of the AI investment.
The best investment in generative AI is the investment it makes in us. When you use AI to augment rather than replace human creativity, you don’t just create better content — you create better creators. The best marketing strategies will embrace this balance.
As the OpenAI ad prompts: “What do you want to create today?”
It’s your story. Create it well.
Subscribe to workday or weekly CMI emails to get Rose-Colored Glasses in your inbox each week.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
The Content Marketing Institute team byline indicates this article reflects the collective work of the CMI team. CMI is a global marketing education and training organization dedicated to advancing the practice of content marketing. We create and curate content experiences that teach marketers and creators from enterprise brands, small businesses, and agencies how to attract and retain customers through compelling, multichannel storytelling. Global brands turn to CMI for strategic consultation, research, and training and certification, and send teams to Content Marketing World, the largest content marketing-focused event, the Marketing Analytics & Data Science (MADS) conference, and CMI digital events every year. Follow @CMIContent on Facebook, LinkedIn, and Instagram, and use the hashtag #CMWorld.
Diversity, equity, and inclusion (DEI) programs are being cancelled by public institutions and private companies. But the end of formal DEI initiatives shouldn’t signal that your content and marketing should stop representing the many voices of your brand’s customers.
After all, that’s just bad business.
As Michael P. Krone explains in his classic and often cited article, Diversity Marketing & Cultural Awareness, “If your customers are different than you and they feel unrecognized, you will begin to lose them.”
That makes sense.
Now, consider non-white people make up over 40% of the U.S. population, according to a 2023 U.S. Census report. And the percentage of Black, multiracial, Hispanic, and Asian populations is only expected to grow in the coming years.
And those numbers speak only of racial identity. They don’t address gender, age, disability status, religion, sexual orientation, veteran status, gender identity, or national origin. Also, add to the big picture that your company likely sells to customers outside the United States. A global view is not only welcome but necessary.
Think about the 2019 consumer survey by Google and The Female Quotient, in which 64% of respondents took some action after seeing an ad they considered to be diverse or inclusive. However, some segments experienced even higher engagement: millennials (77%), Blacks (79%), Latinos (85%), and the LGBTQ community (85%). (Google’s original link to the survey has been redirected to Think With Google’s content hub about marketing in the era of AI.)
Carlos Santiago, co-founder of Alliance for Inclusive and Multicultural Marketing, said in the report, “We found that highly relevant ads go beyond winking and recognizing diversity and inclusion … These ads enhance brand perception, increase brand effectiveness, and significantly lift purchase intent and loyalty.”
So, even if your organization’s climate isn’t receptive to advocating for diversity, equity, and inclusion, you should still embrace the general principles. Perhaps, though, you address it by opting for an implementation strategy adapted from a good writing tip: Show, don’t tell. Show you value all types of consumers without announcing to everybody that you’re doing it.
See the big picture
Does this scenario sound familiar?
A marketer searches for a stock image to accompany a blog post titled, The Top 10 Business Lessons Every Young Professional in Our Industry Should Know.
The first result for “business” appears:
Knowing the importance of diversity, the marketer scans the image.
Women? Check.
Men? Yes.
Black people? Yes/probably.
White people? Yes/probably.
Other minorities? Maybe.
Young people? Yes.
Middle-age or seniors? No.
Office workers? Yes.
Industrial workers? No.
Satisfied with the racial and gender mix and OK with the lack of age and worker-type diversity given the topic, the marketer includes the image with the article and checks off “diverse content” on their list.
Unfortunately, that checkmark isn’t deserved. Representing your audience can’t be done in a single image. Your audience wants to know that you see them — physically, geographically, psychologically, etc. They want to make sure you get their needs, their pain points, and their thoughts.
To accomplish all that, your content must resonate consciously and subconsciously. It requires far more than an image. It requires thinking more deeply, from your audience research to your team structure, from your style guide to your user experience.
Understand diversity and inclusion aren’t the same thing
When adopting that holistic strategy, it can be helpful to start by understanding the meanings of diversity and inclusion.
I like how Rita Mitjans, former ADP’s chief diversity and social responsibility officer, explains it: “Diversity is the ‘what’; inclusion is the ‘how’.”
She continues: “Diversity focuses on the makeup … demographics such as gender, race/ethnicity, age, sexual orientation, veteran status, just to name a few … Inclusion requires that everyone’s contributions be valued.”
Does your content demonstrate that your brand sees the importance of the many differences of your audience members AND values everyone’s contribution?
“(T)ruly inclusive marketing can elevate the stories and voices of people that have been typically marginalized or underrepresented, deepen connections with customers, and even influence positive social change.”
Imagine what a differentiator it would be if your content incorporated voices from people who haven’t experienced being represented or heard in your industry.
You need only look at Unilever’s Dove Real Beauty Pledge, which began in 2004 and was recommitted to in 2024. Over 20 years, the campaign to appreciate women of all ages, races, sizes, etc., has evolved into a brand differentiator, one from which the company still garners positive media attention and customer praise.
How to demonstrate your brand welcomes many
Committing to connecting with many segments of your buying audience is an ongoing effort. You can start (and continue) with these areas of work:
Dig into your audience
While you should respect everybody, you don’t have to address groups with no relevance or interest in your company’s products or services. For example, women would not be the primary audience for a beard-care product company. And college students would not be the primary audience for AARP.
However, you can’t fully understand your audience and its many nuances until you do the research. Look at the available data to understand representation that can be documented such as gender, income level, geography, race, etc. Then, go deeper. Ask front-line team members, go to industry events, and conduct focus groups in part to better understand those characteristics that are not easily tracked, such as physical ability or a point of view.
Develop or update audience personas to ensure that they reflect the characteristics important to your audience and/or your business. Most importantly, don’t operate from a single, homogeneous persona.
Look at your team
How well does your content marketing team reflect your audiences? If it doesn’t, how can you change that? I’m not suggesting you fire someone. But when you hire your next team member, first think about what characteristics and qualities are missing from your team. For example, if you’re hiring a new content creator, think about who can deliver a fresh voice or unrepresented perspective that will resonate with your audience.
Of course, you don’t have to wait for the next vacancy on your team. When you hire freelancers or contract with agencies, think about what voices they can provide that your team doesn’t have. Or create and listen to a more representative editorial advisory board (internal or external members) who can share ideas, react to your team’s plans, and inspire you to think differently.
It’s a good business move as Del Johnson, a principal at Backstage Capital, explained in the Google research report: “The more distance there is culturally between your team and the market, the less ability you will have to execute. We all fall into particular biases. That’s why you need to have culturally competent people in the room who have the power to affect decisions.”
One needs only to look to Gucci in 2019. Shortly after apologizing that its balaclava-style top resembled blackface (the black turtleneck was designed to be pulled up on a person’s face and had red fabric around the mouth), it had to atone for another cultural mistake — turning Sikh-like turbans into a fashion statement. The garment adorned their runway models and was sold as “Indy Full Turban.”
Gucci deeply apologizes for the offense caused by the wool balaclava jumper. We consider diversity to be a fundamental value to be fully upheld, respected, and at the forefront of every decision we make. Full statement below. pic.twitter.com/P2iXL9uOhs
Perhaps if its team had included people of color and/or the Sikh faith who knew their input would be welcomed, these scenarios would have turned out differently. At a minimum, a team should be sensitized and trained to ask tough questions and encouraged to consult with those communities where a possible problem or misunderstanding could arise.
Edit for all
Ensuring that your text reflects inclusion requires writers and editors to avoid assumptions and instead question what they know. And that often requires a major shift in thinking.
Prime your writers and editors to think critically when they write and to regularly use their style guides when in doubt about phrasing. Most professional style guides address diversity-related topics. The 58th edition of the Associated Press Style Guide included many updated entries for race, gender, and disabilities that would be helpful for content marketers.
The National Center on Disability and Journalism guide “covers general terms and words on physical disabilities, hearing and visual impairments, mental and cognitive disabilities, and seizure disorders.” The guide is also helpful because it details the background of the topic, its recommendations, and what the AP Style Guide says about it.
The important thing is to ensure that your brand’s style guide addresses the language components used most frequently and that your team members proactively ask questions so they can make the most helpful and relevant edits.
Incorporate into end marketing product
But don’t stop at the text. Think about elements such as navigation for people who don’t see or hear as well as others in your audience. For example, use alt-text for every digital image published. Don’t distinguish options by color only. Use captions for all videos. Include transcripts for audio or video interviews.
The Conscious Style Guide is designed as a “helpful resource for better understanding and knowing what to say, how to phrase something, be sensitive to, etc.” It was created by Karen Yin as a resource for inclusive, empowering, and respectful language.
Through articles and links to resources (including topical style guides), it covers:
While you should bookmark the Conscious Style Guide as a reference document, it’s also extremely helpful in educating your team members about topics they don’t know around diversity and inclusion.
Expand your audience to increase customer engagements
Letting your audience recognize themselves in your content marketing doesn’t require a formal DEI program at your company. It can’t be accomplished in a single image or checklist. It requires thinking differently to welcome all of your target customers. Fortunately, it’s a never-ending opportunity to do good for your audience and your business.
Updated from a June 2020 article.
Want more content marketing tips, insights, and examples? Subscribe to workday or weekly emails from CMI.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
Just when it seemed like the generative AI landscape was beginning to settle, DeepSeek stepped in and said, “Hold my beer.”
Wall Street seems convinced that China’s generative AI entry will change the game. Still, remember, popular doesn’t mean differentiated.
Yet businesses push their marketing teams to chase trends at breakneck speed. They use generative AI to quickly create content to flood channels with articles and videos optimized for popularity with algorithms instead of audiences.
And that creates an ocean of the most probable content. Note the “most probable” descriptor. Generative AI tools don’t produce “average” content (meaning they don’t return the average of everything they know about a query). They predict the most probable words.
Why does the distinction matter?
Because instead of turning out brilliant new ideas, generative AI tools mostly deliver slightly repackaged versions of ideas that have already been expressed.
The result? Unique takes struggle to stand out in the resulting ocean of probable content, while popular takes flood the market.
Welcome to the contest for differentiation.
Brands must constantly choose whether to compete in a crowded idea space by creating content that’s already popular in search and social or offer something radically different – ideas no one is talking about yet. I talk about it in this video or keep reading for even more detail.
Red and blue markets
A decade ago, the book Blue Ocean Strategy made waves (pun intended) by distinguishing between red oceans — crowded, hyper-competitive markets — and blue oceans — untapped, competition-free opportunities.
Most marketing strategies swim in red oceans, competing for attention with minor variations on the same well-worn ideas. Industries like martech, streaming media, airlines, and automotive are classic examples of this hyper-saturated competition.
The book suggests that companies stuck competing in red oceans should seek to pivot toward a blue ocean by pioneering new spaces and creating markets where none previously existed.
HubSpot did this in 2007 by carving a new category (inbound marketing) out of the fiercely competitive marketing automation space. More recently, Savannah Bananas owner Jesse Cole left the red ocean of minor league baseball and invented an entirely new market (baseball-as-entertainment) with the Banana Ball league.
But now that technology democratizes access and enables rapid replication, blue oceans don’t stay blue for long. New ideas are quickly copied and commoditized at scale. Ridesharing, for instance, was once a groundbreaking concept — until it became a contest among Uber, Lyft, and a wave of imitators.
But what if there’s a third way?
How to craft a purple ocean content strategy
A purple ocean strategy blends differentiated ideas with market demand. It involves crafting content to pull people away from crowded spaces by offering them new ways to look at (perhaps) familiar ideas before they even realize they need them.
A classic example of a purple ocean business strategy is Apple’s iPhone launch. In a crowded market, Apple introduced an entirely new way to think about the benefits of a cellular phone.
But in a content strategy, you’re rarely talking about a fundamental product shift. Instead, you’re creating content to market an existing product or service. T. Rowe Price’s Next Wave of Advice program is a great example of a purple ocean content strategy. Rather than competing in the crowded space of industry research and thought leadership, they shifted focus to teaching financial advisors how to build deeper client connections by integrating coaching into their practices.
In this generative AI-obsessed era, content may be infinite — but well-thought-out ideas are finite. Differentiation can’t just be about speed, volume, or keyword optimization. It must be about depth, originality, and value. And that’s where purple oceans come in.
So, how do you create a purple ocean strategy to rise above the sea of rapidly commoditizing content?
Here are three key principles:
1. Introduce valuable friction
The red ocean approach is all about removing as much friction as possible: Make content as fast, seamless, and optimized as possible.
But sometimes, added friction can be valuable. It forces slower engagement and deeper thought and gives buyers time to think and discover.
Instead of trying to remove every barrier, try slowing down the customer journey at key points to enhance understanding and trust. You can introduce meaningful friction by:
Challenging conventional wisdom
Asking bold questions that force engagement
Creating interactive experiences that require participation
Purple ocean strategies aren’t about efficiency — they’re about depth, distinction, and differentiation.
2. Target the pre-audience
Marketers face tremendous business pressure to focus on demand identification (i.e., on people who are ready to buy today). So, they obsess over who’s searching now, which leads to a red ocean approach.
Few think about who will be searching next.
A purple ocean strategy targets audiences before they enter the market (think Savannah Bananas) or teaches them to think differently about a space (think about how HubSpot markets itself currently).
To target the pre-audience, try one of these approaches:
Identify emerging trends before they become mainstream
Educate future buyers before they even recognize they have a problem
Create content for the customers of tomorrow, not just today
For example, if I were marketing a modern marketing AI tool, instead of optimizing content for “best AI marketing tools to scale your content in 2025” (a red ocean topic), I would focus on content such as “how emerging AI reshapes brand differentiation in 2025.” This approach shifts the conversation into something that may not have people talking just yet but differentiates your brand and positions it as a trusted advisor.
3. Build an owned audience, not just a rented one
One of the biggest risks in content marketing in 2025 is relying too much on rented platforms.
SEO? Algorithm changes can tank your traffic overnight. Social media? You don’t own the audience — Facebook, LinkedIn, and TikTok do. Paid ads? As soon as you stop spending, the leads disappear.
A purple ocean strategy focuses on building a direct, engaged audience that wants to follow you into clearer waters. By offering the “best next” thing for them to want to follow, you develop a renewed relationship with them.
Take the lead on innovation and creation with your brand’s content and marketing. Learn how to get the buy-in and budget for innovative ideas with this advice from one marketing baddie (SAS’s Amanda Wise) to another (you).
Trendy content marketing formats and platforms can come and go. Today’s TikTok campaign is tomorrow’s “Remember when …?” But one format has stood the test of time — email newsletters.
Newsletters offer plenty of marketing appeal, helping brands build a subscribed audience of consumers who want to hear from your business. They’re also relatively easy and cost effective to produce, especially for teams using AI and other marketing automation tools.
Those advantages may be why 71% of marketers distribute digital newsletters, according to CMI’s latest B2B Benchmarks, Budgets, and Trends research.
To enhance your ability to deliver a satisfying newsletter experience that drives your marketing goals, we’ve gathered examples and best practices. Each is a winner or finalist for Best Digital Newsletter at the 2024 Content Marketing Awards.
(Though the CMI staff and community admire many creator-driven newsletters, I’ve focused on examples from brands, nonprofits, and agencies in this article.)
If you want your subscribers to look forward to opening and reading your newsletter, optimize your content for these five elements:
1. Readability
Time-constrained audiences scan newsletters for exciting ideas and relevant information rather than reading from start to end. To make that easier, use short sentences and paragraphs to get your message across. Use brief, catchy headlines and descriptive subheadings to highlight critical insights and recommended actions. Videos and images can also break up lengthy sections of copy and contextualize your messages.
Example: BDH Solutions
BDH Solutions provides business services for real estate principals, including landlords, property managers, and investors. Transactions between vendors and buyers in this space can be highly complex, which is all the more reason for BDH to communicate with the utmost clarity and simplicity.
You won’t find fancy bells and whistles in the company’s bimonthly newsletter. That’s by design.
Each issue is limited to an opening image (such as the waterfront property in the image below), two property listings, and a brief summary of and links to two industry-relevant news articles (not shown). In this version, a personalized intro to the recipient Camille includes some thoughts from CEO Ross Hedditch about his outlook for the coming year.
Image provided by The Brilliant Content Agency in its CMA entry materials.
Subheadings appear on a green-colored banner (shown in the “Top Listings” header above), visually separating each section of concise, easy-to-read content.
In the Top Listings example, an image of the property’s charming location in the northern suburbs of Melbourne, Australia, does most of the talking. The accompanying copy focuses on top-line details, such as the unique opportunity to purchase or rent, the number of residential (364) and commercial (14) units in the parcel, and a characterization of the current tenancy (“Established agency located in a commercial hub with premium offices and a marketing catchment area of approximately 20,000 residents”). A hyperlinked call to action for more information facilitates a direct conversation with Ross.
The newsletter may be simple, but the thinking behind the development of this Content Marketing Award finalist was anything but. BDH’s agency partner, The Brilliant Content Agency, applied psychology principles such as the priming effect during copywriting (note how the CEO introduction uses word association to define “a disconnect in expectations”) to optimize engagement, enhance reader comprehension and recall, and elicit the desired action.
2. Storytelling value
While brevity works for some, deep-dive storytelling might help your brand newsletter stand out from the pack — especially if you let the action unfold within the body of the newsletter instead of requiring a click to read more.
Long-form newsletters work best when they carry readers beyond the headlines, immersing them in a relatable story that sparks empathy. Storifying your content also creates a richer, more engagement-worthy experience that subscribers can anticipate and enjoy.
Example: Aksha Dialogues
Aksha Dialogues is a monthly newsletter created to share knowledge and technical expertise from Aksha, a health and development initiative in India from the Bill & Melinda Gates Foundation. Its marketing goal has always been to share the foundation’s ideas, innovations, and solutions. Yet, its content lacked the ability to advance crucial conversations around its efforts.
Marketing agency Gutenberg helped address that shortcoming by revitalizing Aksha Dialogues from a text-based publication to one that features impactful images and video links that reflect a diversity of voices and convey the richness of the foundation’s subject matter expertise.
Evidence of this is shown below. The newsletter title in a banner is set against a striking image of sanitation workers in India wearing protective masks and hard hats. The thumbnail image attracts readers to view the accompanying video by representing residents who have benefitted from the Swachh Bharat Mission featured in the newsletter.
Among the newsletter’s distinguishing features is a full-length article (a portion is shown above), contrasting the typical newsletter approach of posting a brief teaser and a CTA to read more. Further, the content emphasizes first-person accounts from the foundation’s partners and collaborators. It contextualizes technical aspects of the foundation’s work and its positive impact on the health and well-being of people in India.
Its real-world storytelling enhances the content’s emotional resonance and potential to drive deeper engagement. For example, one section of the story (image below) discusses a community ownership initiative (as indicated in the subheading) aimed at ensuring dignified livelihoods for sanitation workers and benefits for their families in the India city of Pune.
As the newsletter feature explains, old buses are being repurposed as mobile toilet integration centers, giving women from lower-income households more reliable access to affordable and safe sanitation and hygiene services. More than 200,000 women and girls in Pune, Hyderabad, and the Andaman Islands (some shown in the photograph) have benefitted from these centers.
3. Reader focus
Successful newsletters deliver the information and answers your audience wants — not your brand’s messages and self-promotional gimmicks.
To clearly focus on what readers want, the content should be relatable, conversational, and personally relevant. It should be organized to enable readers to explore and engage with topics they’re most interested in.
However, a 2023 internal communication strategy review revealed the need for a refreshed approach to improve the content’s usability, audience value, and engagement potential. Additional insights uncovered through staff meetings and surveys led the content team to implement two significant changes that sharpen the newsletter’s focus on reader needs and foster a more dynamic connection to campus life.
First, it increased the distribution frequency from biweekly to weekly. Second, it redesigned the newsletter to give it a cleaner, more uniform aesthetic that better serves the informational needs of its audience.
Newsletter content is organized under easily identifiable categories — such as “Your Well-being” and “Teaching and Learning.” The added transparent navigation helps readers quickly find relevant news, digest it at a glance, and act on its recommendations.
Image provided by UBCO in its CMA entry materials.
The screenshot above shows one section — Our People — that highlights a broadly relatable story about the campus security team’s actions to guard the campus during a wildfire threat (with a linked CTA to read the full story).
The Exchange also serves more specialized reader interests. For example, staff members seeking a new role at the university can consume the section with current job postings linked to the full descriptions.
4. Clear calls to action
While your newsletter content should be engaging, it must also serve a business purpose. For that to happen, be direct about your brand’s valuable offerings.
Include compelling calls to action to guide subscribers toward the next steps your business wants them to take, such as contacting your sales team for a demo, signing up for a webinar, participating in your social media community, or supporting internal initiatives.
Make sure to design CTAs so they’re easy to spot. Keep the copy brief and to the point. You want readers to understand what they’ll receive when they click and how they stand to benefit.
Example: Loglines
If you think managing an enterprise content marketing engine is intimidating, consider the sheer scale and volume of information that a media brand like Paramount is charged with distributing externally and internally.
Keeping an estimated 30,000 staff members informed on the company’s latest strategic priorities, content successes, press events, and internal initiatives is no easy feat. With Loglines, Paramount aggregates all those data points into one weekly employee newsletter without diminishing the information’s utility or reader impact.
Like the BDH Solutions newsletter, Loglines eschews fancy layouts and multimedia features in favor of clear, direct communication. Given the sheer volume of initiatives, it has to.
Image provided by Paramount in its CMA entry materials.
But what the newsletter lacks in design sophistication, it more than makes up for in sound information architecture. Readers can easily learn about — and act on — required company procedures, as well as take advantage of benefits and special opportunities.
At the top of each issue, recipients find a timely greeting (here, it marks the first day of spring for those who live in the Northern Hemisphere) atop a simple list that notes the week’s featured story about Bob Bakish, along with current screenings (Diarra From Detroit and the CMT Music Awards), a featured event (Paramount @ SXSW), and other happenings (George Cheeks’ appearance about CBS’s future and the company’s mention on the Adweek Hot List). Rather than requiring readers to scroll through pages upon pages of content, anchored links provide direct access to any section.
The information in those sections drives further awareness of happenings and enables Paramount’s internal audience to fulfill relevant responsibilities.
Image provided by Paramount in its CMA entry materials.
For example, employees can navigate to the Good Housekeeping section (shown above) for a clear overview of the week’s critical business-related requirements, such as setting annual goals. To help activate that task, Paramount includes a link to a helpful resource.
Paramount also benefits by empowering staff members to support its shows (attending a taping of The Daily Show), events hosted by its departments (Black History Month events hosted by its BEAT-ERG team), and corporate initiatives (the student-focused ArtsMatter forum). It also pursues that goal by including clear CTAs for each initiative with links for additional information and instructions.
5. Attractive, user-friendly design
Don’t frustrate readers by delivering great content in an ugly, cluttered, or difficult-to-navigate package. Follow SEO and design trends to draw audience attention, but don’t forget the fundamentals of a good — and accessible — user experience.
For example, use appealing, readable fonts and colors. Include images and subheadings to break up dense sections of text. Organize your information so that it’s easy to scan.
Example: The Edit
Like many companies in the energy sector, Sweden-based global electric services company Vattenfall recognizes the importance of reducing global reliance on fossil fuels. The Edit newsletter is among the ways the company communicates its commitment to that goal — and enlists the assistance of engaged community members.
The Edit team curates a mix of article summaries, quick news flashes, and industry insights to inspire and inform Vattenfall’s community. To enhance trust and engagement, the company pays attention to how the newsletter communicates visually.
Image provided by Vattenfall in its CMA entry materials.
For example, the large, sans-serif type in the newsletter title and subtitle (“Your monthly briefing on the journey to fossil freedom”) and a simple, soothing color palette give the content a clean look. Within the brief copy for each article, helpful subheadings point out key insights (“What to know” and “Why it matters”), making the content easy to grasp in a quick scan.
Further, each newsletter opens with a friendly “Hello!” and feel-good message related to the month’s topic. For example, an issue focused on biodiversity (shown above) celebrates good news on the topic: “The flight paths of thousands of birds were tracked by radar and cameras at offshore wind turbines for two years — and not a single bird collided with a blade.” Relevant, eye-catching visual imagery (birds photographed in mid-flight) complements each story, though the layout leaves plenty of white space to minimize eye fatigue.
The combination of valuable content and an attractive layout helped The Edit earn audience trust and the 2024 Content Marketing Award for Best Digital Newsletter.
More tips to make readers’ experiences seamless and satisfying
Implementing those five essential elements will give your newsletter a strong foundation. But they aren’t the only best practices to consider. Keep an eye on these:
Make a good first impression: People build trusted relationships with people, not faceless corporate entities. Put a familiar name in the “from” line to make your messages warm and welcoming. Similarly, use your subject and preview line copy to pose a timely question or share a relatable point of view that compels readers to open up and explore your content.
Offer flexible subscriptions: Give subscribers a way to select the content they want (or don’t want) to receive. For example, offer a weekly digest as an alternative to daily alerts. But always make it simple if a subscriber decides to opt out entirely.
Be transparent: Outline what your readers will receive when they sign up, especially if you have multiple newsletter offerings and subscription options. Even better: Provide a sample newsletter for preview so potential subscribers can see the value for themselves.
Stay on readers’ minds: Send newsletters consistently, ideally on a day and time proven effective in your industry or tested with your audience. For example, 49 North Digital founder Sally Howard says her newsletter testing has shown B2B enterprises should avoid mailing on Mondays and Fridays because business audiences are more likely to be distracted. Small retailers should send on Friday evenings to entice weekend shoppers.
Make it mobile-friendly: People read newsletters on their phones (maybe even more than on desktops). Check how your newsletter looks on mobile devices to ensure optimal viewing across screens.
Use personalization: If consumers share personal data on your subscription form, put it to good use by customizing what they receive. Even something as simple as addressing them by name in a warm, friendly tone can help your content feel more like a personal conversation than an email blast.
Create reliable connections the ‘old-fashioned’ way
Newsletters may not be as sexy as 30-second videos that go viral on YouTube. But these compelling examples should more than convince you of the value of keeping newsletters at the top of your marketing mix.
Got an example of an email newsletter you love? Drop me a line — I’d love to hear about it.
Updated from a January 2023 article.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
Many brands line up with statements of “thoughts and prayers” after natural and human-made devastation, such as the recent California wildfires and hurricane flooding in western North Carolina.
Interestingly, though, that expression emphasizes their silent response.
However, brands that truly want to help the people who suffered tragedy know they must activate a response plan. But how and why?
Marketers should be on the frontline of the brand response. By working with others in your organization and external partners, you can turn those thoughts and prayers into helpful actions. Here are eight brands doing just that.
1. Assist with relevant products and services: Meade Tractor
Take a brief but important pause to reflect on what your brand does. This may seem like an unnecessary step, but when a disaster strikes, well-intentioned people in your organization may want to throw business to the side and put everything into a humanitarian response.
You can lead the conversation to emphasize that your company can do both — fulfill its business mission and lend a helping hand. That dual purpose also creates a relevancy that enables the business to tell the stories for months (and years) to come through its marketing channels.
In some situations, it’s easy to see how to do both. For example, Meade Tractor sells farm and construction equipment — the kind of products needed when the floods hit western North Carolina and southwest Virginia, where it has stores.
Its crisis response included loaning agricultural and compact construction equipment to individual farmers. “By supporting our farmers in times of need, we reaffirm our dedication to making a positive impact when it matters most,” the company wrote on the rental equipment application page.
So, if your business’ products and services can help, do it and tell that story.
2. Repurpose your charitable work: Lush
What if your brand doesn’t sell products or services that can help in the crisis, like Lush, a U.K.-based bath and beauty product company?
Last November, Lush launched a fire-truck-shaped soap in the United Kingdom and Europe to raise money for Indigenous and community volunteer fire brigades in the Amazon. When the Los Angeles wildfires happened, Lush sold the soap product in the United States and designated 75% of U.S. sales to emergency aid for people and animals affected by the fires.
What charitable activities does your company already do? If you don’t sell a product for charity or raise money for a designated nonprofit, is there a local organization where your employees volunteer? Consider reconfiguring or complementing those efforts for the most recent disaster response.
3. Help your social audience: Josie Maran
If donating products or profits isn’t feasible, turn to something that marketing has built — your brand’s audiences on social media.
In an immediate response to the southern California wildfires, entrepreneur and beauty brand Josie Maran replaced its normally product-focused Instagram posts with this carousel post sharing community resources to help those affected:
Posting this type of information is also likely to motivate your audience to share with their audiences and spark comments from people offering additional resources.
4. Craft a useful resource: Morgan Stanley
Morgan Stanley provides a wealth of resources for its philanthropic clients and communities. It publishes guides for causes ranging from the humanitarian crisis in Ukraine and military aid organizations to children’s mental health and scholarships for students.
When the Los Angeles wildfires broke out, the financial services firm created the 12-page Giving Resource Guide: Southern California Wildfire Relief. As Morgan Stanley does with its other guides, this version outlines 14 relevant organizations, detailing their missions, responses to the crisis, and donation-related links in the PDF.
Guides or resource lists work well when distributed to relevant segments of your email lists. Publishing them on your website can also lead people using search engines to discover the resources (that’s how I found out about Morgan Stanley’s work). You also can promote and link to them from your social media channels.
5. Tell a relevant story and partner on the CTA: ESPN
ESPN expanded its content lineup to tell sports stories related to the wildfires, including this video interviewing the National Football League’s Los Angeles Rams. The players saw the smoke from their practice facility and employees of the organization had homes in the scorched neighborhoods.
ESPN devoted the text on the video’s YouTube page with CTAs for the American Red Cross, featuring a donate button and a tally of the total amount raised.
You can probably get this type of response approved most easily because the storytelling fits the brand’s mission and does not require the company itself to make a financial donation.
6. Tell employee stories: John Deere
If your brand operates or sells in a disaster area, chances are your employees are affected by it, too. Tell their stories (with permission, of course).
The post noted how employees covered for colleagues directly affected by the flood. It also shared links to a local charitable organization for people who wanted to donate.
7. Form a coalition: Los Angeles: Beauty Together
When the fires hit southern California, Josie Maran did more than post helpful resources on the brand’s Instagram channel. She got over 30 brands to form a charitable fund — Los Angeles: Beauty Together — with the mission “to provide relief to those who have lost everything to the tragic events in Los Angeles.”
While that’s the immediate purpose, Josie also knows the effort can’t be short term. Phase two will encompass sustained support to victims and charitable service providers over the rebuilding process. “This is a long healing road,” Josie tells People magazine.
“The only way you can (help) correctly is to be there and see it and say, ‘OK, where are things doing pretty good and where are things lacking and how do we look three months, six months, a year ahead and put a plan together?’”
Though you may not know yet what your brand’s long-term support will look like, you can take steps now to plan for the follow up. For example, add entries to your content calendar and fill in the specific angles or topics later.
Lead the charitable response
Turning thoughts and prayers into action is a strategy made for marketers. You have already worked hard to build goodwill and trust with your audience so they’ll ultimately take a profitable action with your business. Now, you can take that one step further and help your brand and audience to take an action that will be profitable to those affected by disasters.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
McConaughey shared three things he needs every day: Something to look up to, something to look forward to, and a hero to chase.
Who he chases might surprise you. At 15, he chased himself at 25. When he turned 25, his hero became Matthew at 35. Now that he’s 55, he’s (presumably) chasing Matthew at 65.
The point? He’ll never catch his future self. But he works every day to become someone worth chasing.
That lesson isn’t only about personal growth and setting high standards for yourself. It’s also one hell of a mindset for marketing and content creation. I talk about it in this video, or keep reading for even more detail.
Why playing it safe isn’t worth it
People have explained content marketing as “brands operating like a media company.” That’s no longer a clever way to describe just one part of marketing.
It’s the lifeblood of modern marketing itself.
But, if your content doesn’t give your audience someone — or something — to chase, you’re not lighting a spark. And if you don’t light that spark of inspiration, you’ll lose people in the endless noise of competitors clawing for their attention. They’ll never care enough to stick around.
Unfortunately, most marketing content today is boring. Safe. Vanilla.
Many content teams churn out how-to and FAQ content to game the search algorithm. Others focus on hot takes designed to “go viral” for five minutes.
Teams are so pressed for popular content that they fail to focus on meaningful work.
Playing it safe is also a fast track to losing your edge. Consider the content about generative AI coming from the biggest technology companies. It should build excitement and spark inspiration, right?
The titles grab attention (10 Ways AI Will Revolutionize Your Marketing Today, How to Use Strategic AI for Quick Wins in Marketing, etc.).
But then you click through, only to find 500 words of throat-clearing before the article finally gets to the meat — which turns out to be the same 10 tips you’ve already read in four other articles.
Sure, some of the advice might be useful. But does any of it make you pause and think, “Wow, this company helps me understand where the world is heading, and I’m inspired to explore where I fit in?”
Probably not.
I’m not saying how-to content, foundational industry insights, or helpful advice shouldn’t be part of your strategy. This content has its place.
But spending all your time answering frequently asked questions prevents you from imagining answers to the questions no one has asked yet.
And that’s a mistake — because vision (not repetition) inspires audiences to ask new questions.
A practical approach to expanding your visionary content
So why do businesses struggle with true thought leadership, visionary, or even out-of-the-box content ideas?
Many businesses just see it as too risky. It’s easier to write about what’s already popular. You know it’ll get clicks, likes, and even a few conversions.
But when you only create content for the here and now, you lock yourself into a short-term mindset, and your audience sees you as a commentator, not a guide.
They might follow your advice, but they won’t follow your brand. You risk becoming irrelevant as the conversation moves on.
Here’s the good news: You don’t have to choose between practical and inspiring content. You can do both.
Creating visionary content doesn’t mean abandoning practical content. You simply need to strike a balance between the two.
In doing so, your brand becomes the guide who says, “Here’s what you can do today — and here’s where we can go together tomorrow.”
Try these suggestions for incorporating more visionary work in your content plans:
Think in horizons
Divide your content strategy into three horizons:
1: Now (60%): Practical, actionable “how-to” content that solves immediate problems
2:Next (20%): Forward-looking insights on trends emerging in the next few years
3: Beyond (20%): Big, bold visions of what the future could look like in 5 to 10 years
Visionary content shines in Horizon 3 (Beyond) and strengthens Horizon 2 (Next) by setting the stage for near-term trends.
When these horizons work together, your strategy becomes more cohesive — meeting your audience where they are today while showing them where they could go next.
Make it about your audience
Visionary content shouldn’t be about your company’s goals — it should be about your audience’s dreams.
Ask yourself:
What does our audience want to achieve in 10 years?
What’s holding them back today?
How can we help close the gap?
If you can align your vision with their aspirations, you’re not just creating content — you’re building trust.
Bridge big ideas with action
Creating visionary content doesn’t mean you can’t offer steps your audience can take right now. Vision without action is just daydreaming. Give them clear, tangible actions they can take today.
For example, if you’re writing about the future of remote work, recommend tools or habits they can adopt now to prepare for the shift. If you’re describing a world transformed by sustainable energy, offer tips for how they can start reducing their carbon footprint today.
Connecting the future to the present makes your vision feel real and within their grasp.
Back it up with progress
This one is my favorite tip. Great visionary content doesn’t exist in a vacuum. It’s not so abstract that nothing exists to support the vision.
Pair your big ideas with stories of real progress — whether it’s your company’s successes, industry breakthroughs, or inspiring examples from other companies or markets. Show your audience that the future you’re describing isn’t just possible — it’s already happening.
For example, I worked with a small B2B software company in the well-trodden marketing analytics industry not long ago.
At first, the team felt everything that could be said about marketing measurement had been said. And when they started thinking about some visionary application of analytics, the ideas sounded like the promise of flying cars: daring, futuristic concepts with little detail on how they’d work.
So, the team changed gears. Instead of leaning into buzzwords like “real-time intelligence,” “AI,” or “predictive analytics,” they set a new vision. They imagined a future in which traditional analytics — dashboards, visualizations, and data sets as we know them — simply didn’t exist.
In this vision, the technology works quietly in the background, transforming raw data into actionable insights without human intervention or interpretation. No dashboards, no charts — just pure intelligence delivered when and where it’s needed.
You’ll be their (idealized) mirror
Great visionary content reflects your audience’s inspired, idealized future back to them. That’s the heart of giving your audience someone or something to chase.
Because your brand created that reflection, you’re not just part of the noise — you’re their partner on the journey.
If you do it right, you’ll never fully catch the future you’re chasing — and neither will your audience. But that’s not the point.
The point is to keep reaching, keep building, and keep inspiring things worth striving for.
It’s your story. Tell it well.
Subscribe to workday or weekly CMI emails to get Rose-Colored Glasses in your inbox each week.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
The Content Marketing Institute team byline indicates this article reflects the collective work of the CMI team. CMI is a global marketing education and training organization dedicated to advancing the practice of content marketing. We create and curate content experiences that teach marketers and creators from enterprise brands, small businesses, and agencies how to attract and retain customers through compelling, multichannel storytelling. Global brands turn to CMI for strategic consultation, research, and training and certification, and send teams to Content Marketing World, the largest content marketing-focused event, the Marketing Analytics & Data Science (MADS) conference, and CMI digital events every year. Follow @CMIContent on Facebook, LinkedIn, and Instagram, and use the hashtag #CMWorld.
You have too many marketing tasks and responsibilities to do them the hard way. Your work is too critical to business success to let best practices slide and details fall through the cracks.
Since you can’t always trust AI tools to do the job right the first time, trust the wisdom of your industry peers who have found ways to make content and marketing more manageable.
I’ve gathered some of their best tips, templates, and cheat sheets to break complex tasks into simpler steps and avoid frustrating bottlenecks. And, if you’re in between jobs or looking to advance your role, knowing these tips can help you secure a position to put these approaches to good use.
Align strategic goals with audience needs
Brands often default to their stated mission or purpose when determining their strategic approach to content. But what your business wants to share doesn’t always align with what your audience wants to hear. It can also result in vague platitudes that fail to distinguish your brand’s unique content advantages.
To avoid those pitfalls, work through the five-whys exercise to pinpoint where (or if) your brand’s goals intersect with what your customers care about.
The 5 whys
CMI’s Robert Rose explains the first step is to generate a list of content marketing ideas. For example, your brand may want to educate prospects on using your products or curate industry news to position your business as a thought leader.
Next, write down why the first idea is important. Then, ask why that importance is important. Ask why about that answer. Ask why about the preceding explanation two more times. (Repeat this process for each idea.)
To illustrate how it works, I’ve filled in this template with a sample idea Robert offered in his article:
Because developments in our industry are changing quickly, our customers need a trusted partner to keep them up to date.
Why 1
Answer
Why is curating news to position us as thought leaders important to our customers?
Because our customers will see that we have our finger on the pulse of the business and a point of view on the industry.
Why 2
Answer
Why is it important that customers see that we have our finger on the pulse and a viewpoint on the industry?
Because our customers and prospects will have more trust in what we say.
Why 3
Answer
Why is it important to our customers and prospects to have more trust in what we say?
Because developments in our industry are changing quickly, and our customers need a trusted partner to keep them up to date.
Why 4
Answer
Why do customers need a trusted partner to keep them up to date with what’s going on in the industry?
Because they are busy trying to succeed, a trusted partner can help them be informed.
Why 5
Answer
Why is it important for our customers’ success to be informed?
If our customers are properly informed about the industry, they will be more competitive and successful.
The final answer should reveal a motivation for the idea that aligns with your audience’s purpose and clarifies how it fits into the brand’s overarching story.
Streamline your content operations
Your strategy dictates what you want to achieve through content. Thorough operational planning enables you to achieve it consistently. Think of it as the work to do, so everything else you do works.
Build and activate a content plan
With the matter of why settled, focus on the next big questions — what content will you create? How do you make that happen? A content plan will help determine the best answers.
A content plan comprises the policies, practices, resources, and task-related decisions to execute the strategy. This invaluable tool lets the team orchestrate operational workflows, implement efficient processes, and enable the transformation of creative ideas into high-value marketing assets.
To build your content plan, you need to consider these four components:
Governance and guidelines: standards, practices, and guiding principles that define and distinguish your content’s unique value
Processes and systems: tasks, workflows, techniques, and technologies to manage your content marketing operations
Team resources: roles and skills required to perform the work and plans to fill gaps as they emerge
Content creation and delivery: topics, generation process and prioritization of creative ideas, content types, formats, and platforms
Decision-making in each area can take time — and a lot of effort. But fear not: The tips in this content planning checklist below will help ease the burden. (You can get more details and resources to assist you in CMI’s 4-Part Guide To Crafting a Winning Content Plan.)
Content Planning Checklist
Focal Areas
Actions to Take
Tips to Get Started
Establish content guidelines and governance
Define the unique value your content will deliver
Outline the qualities and characteristics that will make your content recognizable and distinct, including your brand’s signature voice and style.
Establish editorial quality and value standards
Outline the details of how your content will deliver against the five most critical benchmarks for audience value: Findability, readability, understandability, actionability, and shareability.
Build your systems, processes, and support mechanisms
Define the workflow and build critical processes
Build your workflow by identifying the tasks required to produce a content asset. Then, set those tasks sequentially and build agile processes that can be adapted to maintain optimal efficiency.
Promote smooth collaboration and communication
Create a detailed editorial calendar so all team members can see where assets are in the production process, what tasks still need to be done, and how to move them to completion.
Determine how projects will be managed and prioritized
Implement transparent criteria, such as a scoring process, for ranking and prioritizing existing projects and new requests by their potential to perform.
Build in quality assurance
Follow quality assurance best practices to keep typos, grammatical mistakes, and factual inaccuracies out of your published content and your brand’s reputation above reproach.
Select and implement appropriate technologies
Ensure you have the tools to manage your content ecosystem and maintain optimal productivity. Consider where and how (or if) you’ll benefit from using AI tools in your operations.
Structure your team and skill sets
Determine essential roles
Aim to cover the most critical content roles and consider whether your best option is to expand your resources or rebalance current responsibilities to fill any gaps.
Evaluate team skill sets and determine how to fill gaps
Ensure your team has competency in the most critical content marketing skills, and explore available resources for outsourcing, augmenting, or upskilling in areas where they are lacking.
Make sound creative and distribution decisions
Identify critical topics
Explore marketplace, audience, and industry trends to identify topics and issues of emerging importance. Consider developing a content council or editorial board to help surface relevant areas where your content may offer the most value.
Plan big ideas to develop into assets
Focus on generating big ideas that are likely to activate your audience or can be repackaged for use on multiple platforms and channels. Creative brainstorming is a viable technique for initial ideation.
Determine optimal story packaging and distribution options
Look for efficient, cost-effective ways to distribute content across multiple platforms. Consider content mapping techniques to determine which distribution formats and channels to use.
Map your standard workflow (and common variations)
To ensure high-quality assets are developed consistently, content teams need a system to track and manage the production and distribution tasks.
This five-step process can help you map the workflow for each content format (and variations). From there, you can build the processes to operationalize those workflows.
You can find the details in this guide, but this abbreviated description, along with the example templates, show what the information should look like at each step:
Step 1: Conduct a content audit. This high-level view of content deliverables and distribution is organized into four columns:
Content format: Create a row for each format your team regularly produces.
Primary delivery platform: Note where each format is published or shared first.
Additional distribution targets: List additional channels and platforms where this content format may be used.
Special circumstances and variations: Note any variations that require extra steps or a distinct production process.
Content Format
Primary Distribution Platform
Additional Distribution Platforms
Special Circumstances and Variations
Editorial article
Website (blog)
· Newsletters · LinkedIn profile pages/groups · Social media
· Website blog · Event microsite · Website video page
· Sponsored webinars
Social media posts
LinkedIn
· Facebook · LinkedIn · Instagram
· Paid promotions · Co-created with influencers
Live presentations
In-person events
· Virtual events platforms · LinkedIn Live
· Video snippets on social media · Distribution partner sites
Step 2: List all tasks required for each format. Don’t worry about putting the tasks in order yet.
Step 3: Organize tasks by production stage. Group each format’s tasks sequentially based on pre-production, production, or post-production timing.
Stage of Content Format (editorial article)
Required Tasks
Pre-production stage
Determine the topic.
Brainstorm angle.
Identify sources/subject matter experts.
Request sales/marketing feedback on the topic and approach.
Assign a writer.
Facilitate governance requirements.
Create/gather author bio info/assets.
Production stage
Receive author submission.
Edit/revise copy for style and substance.
Design/develop visuals.
Send a final copy to the author and stakeholders for revisions/approval.
Load/format copy and visuals for layout.
Set metadata details for SEO.
Proof and approve the final layout.
Post-production stage
Schedule publication in the editorial calendar.
Publish content (including metadata) to its primary platform.
Send content to [contact] for email alert/newsletter inclusion.
Share links/assets with content partners for additional promotion, repurposing, and distribution efforts per the content plan.
Collect metrics data and generate reports.
Share performance data with stakeholders to inform potential adjustments or future content plans.
Step 4: Add a column for each task’s roles and responsibilities. Map how production flows from one role to the next.
Stage of Content Format (editorial article)
Task To Do
Roles
Pre-production stage
Determine the topic.
· Team leader
Brainstorm angle.
· Team leader · Managing editor
Identify sources/subject matter experts.
· Managing editor · Story editor · Staff writers
Request sales/marketing feedback on the topic and approach.
· Managing editor
Assign a writer.
· Managing editor
Facilitate governance requirements.
· Managing editor
Create/gather author bio info/assets.
· Copy editor
Step 5: Operationalize and iterate. Create a mechanism to track tasks as they’re completed and notify the next party in the chain when the asset is ready for them. If you don’t have dedicated software tools for this, a simple spreadsheet can work.
Systematize content requests and assignments
Requests to create content for other organizational teams is a common pain point for marketing creatives. These unexpected tasks can tax schedules and disrupt productivity; at worst, they conflict with your brand’s strategic purpose and distinct content mission.
You may not have the power to refuse, but you can systematize these requests so everyone stays focused on content with the best potential impact.
Requiring requesters to submit a content brief is a great place to start. Documenting the necessary information and instructions gets everyone on the same page, minimizing time spent on rewrites and edits. A brief also helps when outsourcing creation to freelance writers, guest authors, and other external collaborators.
Dan Hatch says a good content brief establishes clear expectations. It covers details like the working title, project deadline, and what the story is about. It should also outline why the story is valuable, the key messages, the intended audience, and how your brand typically communicates with them.
You can start with this content brief template I use when assigning stories and customize it by adding fields for relevant contextual details, such as the target format or platform, desired responses, links to reference materials, or subject matter experts for source interviews.
Content Brief Template
Working Title
Word Count
Deadline
Insight or problem (Why it matters)
What is it about? (Brief overview of the idea)
What to include (Key messages; potential support points)
Conclusion (Key takeaways)
Desired response (Next steps or calls to action)
Source materials (Links to reference materials, research data, SME contact info, etc.)
Intended audience/ target persona
Copy notes (Tone, style, language, etc.)
Rehabilitate bad content ideas
What if you receive a brief that’s way off track or too challenging to execute? Guide the requester in a more manageable direction with this step-by-step approach suggested by Cloudflare’s Amy Higgins and Nextiva’s Monica Norton.
In their post, Bad Content Ideas: What To Do When You Can’t Say No, they share all the details and explanations. To start, use this checklist to prepare for the tough conversations to determine the best way forward:
How To Rehab Bad Content Ideas
Prepare an informed response to the idea
Purpose
Actions To Take
Step 1: Understand the ask.
Determine what success looks like to the requester.
Ask: Why is this idea top of mind? How did this idea originate? What do you like most about the idea? Have you done it or seen another company do it?
Step 2: Determine the intent behind the request.
Find the disconnect between the requester’s view of success and your team’s KPIs.
How does its objective align with existing goals? Where are they off? Why?
Step 3: Focus on the actual audience.
Discover opportunities to realign the requester’s idea against known customer needs.
Use the “yes and” method to clarify the value for your audience. Example: “Yes. I love your idea of a blog post about the product features. And let’s start by explaining how they help our customers solve their pain points.”
Step 4: Identify where the idea fits in the content journey.
Determine if content gaps along the journey could be filled with this idea or if existing assets can be optimized to meet this request.
Audit your published content to understand what content ideas resonate. Apply that data to provide a rationale for moving to a more impactful idea.
Step 5: Look at your resources.
Assess team needs so you can facilitate a conversation about what to do next.
Do you need more budget or resources? Do you have the right tools to measure the impact of the request? Do you have the time to do it correctly?
Craft resonant, accessible stories
Aligning topics, ideas, and formats sets your creative team up for success. However, working with a proven storytelling structure can ensure the resulting content resonates with the audience.
Base stories on familiar archetypes
Seven classic archetypes work for memorable storytelling. You’ll find detailed explanations and examples in my post on storytelling archetypes. Here’s a handy rundown for writers to use the next time they’re stuck staring at a blank page:
Storytelling Archetypes
Archetype
Classic Definition
Ideal for
The Quest
A protagonist must overcome a series of obstacles to acquire an important object or reach a desired destination.
Educating and assisting consumers about approaches that enable them to achieve critical goals
Overcoming the Monster
An unlikely hero is challenged by a formidable foe and gradually gains the courage, knowledge, or strength to defeat it.
Casting your brand — and your customers — as conquering heroes
Rags to Riches
A protagonist from humble beginnings acquires great power, knowledge, or riches and becomes changed for the better after initial struggles.
Illustrating how your thought leaders and team members have overcome relatable challenges
Rebirth
An adversarial person or event drives a flawed main character to reflect on their actions and compels them to achieve a more positive outcome by embracing redemptive change.
Resetting expectations around your business by speaking out about known issues and the steps you’re taking to combat them
Voyage and Return
A protagonist travels to a strange land and encounters unexpected oppositional forces. Upon returning home, the protagonist has been changed for the better by the experience.
Highlighting the transformational effects of your product and service offerings
Comedy
Thrust into surreal or unlikely scenarios, a protagonist triumphs over adversity by going to absurdly extreme lengths.
Helping small or newer brands draw attention, bringing legacy brands back into the consideration mix, and fanning the flames of passion-driven loyalty
Tragedy
A flawed hero makes a choice or takes an action that ultimately leads to their undoing.
Sharing vital information, such as guidance that helps protect consumers from harm
Write to be read and understood
Even the most powerful ideas won’t help your brand gain traction if the audience struggles to engage, and the writing is unclear.
You’ll find dozens of tips for writing concisely in Ann Gynn’s post, 31 Great Content Writing Examples, Tips, and Tools. Quickly conveying your point is among them. For example, Ann suggests a few replacements for wordy phrases:
“Show,” not “indicate”
“Use,” not “utilize”
“To,” not “in order to”
“Help,” not “facilitate”
“Get,” not “obtain”
To help express your ideas more succinctly, work with a tool like Web FX’s Readability Test.
Make content easy for everyone to access
No matter how well written, your content won’t influence anyone who can’t access it. That includes consumers who use voice commands and screen readers to navigate websites or prefer reading transcripts to engaging with videos and audio stories.
Refer to the World Wide Web Consortium’s (W3C) Web Content Accessibility Guidelines to ensure your content is fully accessible. This checklist covers the basics in Irina Weber’s eight practical accessibility tips:
Content Accessibility
Action
Why
Tips
Optimize title tags and headings.
Helps users quickly find the information they need.
Use clear and unique page titles and headings. Use only one H1 tag. Keep your subheadings in sequential order. Precisely describe the content.
Create accessible tables.
Tables inside text can be difficult for screen readers to interpret.
Build tables using cascading style sheets.
Use descriptive anchor text for links.
Users want to know what they can expect to find when clicking the link.
Avoid generic phrases. Consider using a target keyword. Be concise.
Include descriptive alt text for images.
Enables search engines and the visually impaired to interpret visual content accurately and may boost Google’s visibility and rankings.
Write alt text for every image and video. Add captions for content on sites that do not have an alt-text option.
Add a public sitemap.
Allows visitors to find what they need quickly and helps search engines index pages.
Ensure that your site includes both an XML and an HTML sitemap.
Make social media content accessible.
Social media can affect buying choices, particularly for younger consumers like Gen-Z.
Add captions and transcripts for video and alt text to images. Have a sign language interpreter for videos and at events. Capitalize each word in hashtags. Avoid overuse of emojis.
Use accessible language.
Exacting language and a well-structured format make content easy to understand.
Use clear and simple language or provide a simplified version. Explain uncommon words, idioms, phrases, and abbreviations. Use bullet points for emphasis. Indicate the content’s language with the “lang” attribute in HTML.
Create accessible calls to action.
Encourages and enables consumers to take the next step.
Write descriptive and action-oriented text. Use this contrast checker to determine whether the CTA button meets accessibility guidelines. Place the primary CTA above the fold so users can see it without scrolling down the page. Adjust the size and placement of the CTA in mobile versions to ensure its effectiveness.
Plan for impactful distribution
Your marketing team doesn’t have bandwidth to spare. Don’t squander precious resources on channels and platforms unlikely to drive the right impact. With some extra legwork, you can make more informed decisions about where to share and promote the content.
Evaluate your social platform options
Like the content plan that guides your team’s creative and operational efforts, a robust distribution plan takes effort. Each media platform offers a unique experience with its pros and cons. You need to weigh them carefully.
Though that task can get complicated with social media platforms, the planning process boils down to four steps:
Investigate your options
Audit existing assets
Identify top opportunities
Establish procedures and guidelines
I outline details for each step in How To Build a Winning Content Plan for Social Media, but this checklist will help you know what information to gather and what questions to ask:
Evaluate Social Media Distribution Options
Who uses this channel, and how do they use it?
What content topics and formats get the most traction?
How do brands engage and market here?
Can we gain a competitive advantage?
Is it an essential channel for the target personas? How much time, on average, do users spend here? What are conversations and interactions like?
Do we already produce these types of conversations? Do we have enough assets/resources to maintain a consistent presence? Does the platform offer integrated creative tools to scale production?
Do brands have different profile page options than other users? Is there a verification system? What options exist for boosting organic reach? How does the platform treat backlinks and referral traffic? What metrics does the platform provide?
Are our competitors active in this space? What kinds of content/conversations do they share here?
Measure and compare content performance
Thorough planning can increase the chances of success, but you also must consistently measure the content’s performance to prove the plan works correctly (or that it doesn’t.)
A content scorecard can help you understand the effectiveness of your content and the corrective actions to optimize its impact. In How To Set Up a Content Scoring Process for Better Decisions, Tendo Communications vice president Lindy Roux outlines a process for quantitative and qualitative assessment. Though each analysis uses different criteria, both rate content performance on a one-to-five-point scale.
In Lindy’s approach, quantitative scores gauge asset performance against the content’s goals, such as:
Exposure: views, impressions, backlinks
Engagement: time on page, clicks, ratings, comments
Conversion: purchases, registrations for gated content, return visits, clicks
Redistribution: shares, pins
Qualitative scores gauge the relative value of the asset regardless of its performance analytics. Lindy shares some of the criteria she’s used in her scorecards:
Consistency: Is the content consistent with the brand voice and style?
Clarity and accuracy: Is the content understandable, accurate, and current?
Discoverability: Does the layout of the information support key information flows?
Engagement: Does the content use the appropriate techniques to influence or engage visitors?
Relevance: Does the content meet the needs of all intended user types?
Authenticity: Is the content authentic and original?
In her article, Lindy explains how to set benchmarks and make your calculations. Then, you can create a scorecard like this one:
Qualitative Scores
Content A
Content B
Content C
Content D
Content E
Consistency
5
1
2
3
1
Clarity and accuracy
4
2
3
2
2
Discoverability
3
3
3
3
3
Engagement
4
2
4
2
2
Relevance
3
3
5
3
3
Average Qualitative Score
3.8
2.2
3.4
2.6
2.2
Quantitative Scores
Exposure
3.2
1.2
3.0
3.2
2.8
Engagement
1.8
2.2
2.0
2.5
2.0
Conversion
2.2
3.2
2.8
1.5
3.0
Average Quantitative Score
2.4
2.2
2.6
2.4
2.6
Average Qualitative Score
3.8
2.2
3.4
2.6
2.2
Recommended Action
Review and improve
Remove and avoid
Reconsider distribution plan
Reconsider distribution plan
Review and improve
By comparing each asset’s scores side-by-side, you can more easily determine the best course of action to take. For example:
Quantitative scores higher than qualitative: Review the content, looking for ways to optimize it and enhance performance.
Qualitative scores higher than quantitative: Consider alternative ways to distribute the asset for better performance.
Low performers: Remove them from your content platforms and avoid creating similar types of content.
High performers: Promote and reuse these assets regularly. Update your content plan to create more of this type of content.
Get the help you need to get the job done
As you head into a year bound to bring new changes and challenges, use this guidance and tools to enhance your productivity, uphold the quality and value of your content, and enjoy greater success in your content marketing career.
All tools mentioned in this article were suggested by the author. If you’d like to suggest a tool, share the article on social media with a comment.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
Just before sitting down to write this article, I was working on a social calendar project for a new client. I turned to Google and asked: “What’s the ideal frequency to post on LinkedIn?”
As I typed, the search engine’s auto-populated options finished the phrase with options including:
LinkedIn
Instagram
YouTube and YouTube Shorts
TikTok
Most social media platforms
Posting content in a Facebook awareness campaign
Like most marketers, I had hoped for a one-size-fits-all answer even though I knew that was silly. People are not homogenous. They don’t all consume social media, newsletters, podcasts, videos, etc., at the same time. And their consumption behavior varies depending on how the topic fits with their personal and professional interests.
However, that doesn’t mean you just guess. To help make educated choices and develop a go-to publishing frequency strategy, learn how your peers do it and glean relevant tips from their advice.
Start frequency decisions with others’ research
OK, yes, this recommendation seems what you would find Googling a question about scheduling and frequency. But, as long as you don’t treat it as the first and only stop on your quest, it’s truly helpful.
Common social posting frequencies for B2B and B2C brands based on the platform include:
Facebook: Multiple times a day (B2B and B2C)
XEx: Multiple times a day (B2B and B2C) and multiple times per week (B2B)
TikTok: Multiple times a day (B2B), once a day (B2C)
Instagram: Multiple times a day (B2B), multiple times per week (B2C)
LinkedIn: Multiple times per week (B2B), weekly, or multiple times per month (B2C)
Pinterest: Multiple times a day (B2B), multiple times per month (B2C)
Sprout Social analyzed nearly 2 billion engagements across 400,000 social profiles including, X, Facebook, LinkedIn, Instagram, Pinterest, and TikTok, to determine the best times to post on social media:
Mondays: 11 a.m. to noon
Tuesdays: 10 a.m. to 2 p.m. and 3 to 4 p.m.
Wednesdays: 9 a.m. to 3 p.m.
Thursdays: 9 a.m. to 2 p.m.
Fridays: 10 to 11 a.m.
Though it doesn’t identify the best publishing times for Saturday and Sunday, it says Sundays are the worst-performing days. The best days are Tuesdays, Wednesdays, and Thursdays.
CJ Digital, a hospitality marketing agency, relies first on recommendations from expert sites because they’re based on quality research, says CEO Joshua Wood.
Then, the agency does A/B split testing on each platform to see what works in the hospitality industry. What works on one platform may not work on another. “We change it up quite often,” he says.
TIP: Don’t forget to use the recommendations provided in your content distribution tools, such as your newsletter platform, as they base those suggestions on the data your audience is providing.
Sally Howard, founder and marketing strategist at 49 North Digital, has some general preferences for publishing times based on the distribution vehicles:
LinkedIn: 7 a.m. — the early morning works best to reach commuters and decision-makers heading to the office.
Instagram: Though the platform now delivers content based on interests, the morning is a good time to grab people’s attention because they scroll while having coffee. Loyal followers who see it first thing in the day can interact with it, potentially pushing it out to more people.
Blogs: Publication time doesn’t really matter. People Google things at all times of the day, so timing doesn’t matter if SEO is the goal.
Emails: If you target corporate audiences, don’t publish on Mondays and Fridays. If you’re a small business retailer, post at 6 p.m. on Friday when your audience is looking to treat themselves after making it through the week.
However, Sally cautions that you can’t pick a publishing time and forget it. She points to an agency client in the coaching industry who experienced shifts in email open rates throughout the year. The agency played with distribution times and found a sweet spot — shifting from an evening email to a morning one prompted open rates to go from around 36% to over 50%.
Sally says marketers should review their send times quarterly around seasonal changes. “For example, if you normally send emails at 6 p.m. and you’ve noticed in the summer those email open rates have dropped because people who are your target market aren’t picking up their phones as much on summer evenings, you may want to consider targeting them during their morning commute,” she explains.
You also should test send times if you notice a sharp decline in your open rates and haven’t made drastic changes to your subject lines or experienced significant industry updates like the recent domain verification by Google.
Research your audience qualitatively and quantitatively
Recognizing your audience’s preferences is a must. Connie Smart, a writer and content creator for the City of Edmonton in Alberta, Canada, prefers the direct approach to assessing what channels the audience prefers, how often they want to receive the content, and what time they’re most available to consume and engage with it.
To get the answers, ask your audience. “Surveys, online polls, focus groups, and even informal chats can help you glean some great nuggets,” she says.
Then, combine that qualitative feedback with your quantitative analytics to better understand your audience’s content consumption behavior.
Build a strategy based on your primary social platforms
Mariela Azcuy, vice president of B2B strategy and executive communications at Carve Communications, recommends you focus on a few anchor channels and then:
Pick a frequency based on the channel: Post more often on social media to appease algorithms and reinforce messages. Post blog articles less often to emphasize quality, though the actual number will depend on the available resources and SEO’s importance in your marketing strategy.
Evaluate the effort vs. payoff: Assess your resources, including AI and external contributor support, to identify a schedule and frequency that will have the biggest payoffs.
Think seasonally: Publishing schedules shouldn’t necessarily be the same every month of the year. What are the big moments in your industry and in the audience’s world? How should your schedule address them?
Build on what works: Launch something small, and if it works, grow from there. For example, Carve Communications started a behind-the-scenes video series on LinkedIn. It received great viewership, so Carve created a separate LinkedIn multimedia newsletter dedicated to its behind-the-scenes work.
Test, then analyze
William Reinhart, founder and president of Signature W Studio, says a publishing schedule and plan are critical to scaling your efforts.
When his agency works with companies to reach a new audience, it goes through four stages — experimenting, analyzing, iterating, and analyzing again. “We will stagger the time of day, vary the number of times posted per week, and alternate the content types,” William explains.
The experiment phase runs 60 to 90 days, which is usually enough time to develop a sample size that provides sufficient metrics for an analysis.
The analysis lets them know which post types and times get the most engagement and drive audiences to the brand’s desired results. Then, the process moves to the iteration stage. “Alternate successful post types with popular times of day,” William says. “This will help you build the best possible posting schedule based on the type of content.”
When the iteration stage achieves a sufficient sample size, return to the analytics. Compare the metrics from the iteration phase to the initial period to make informed decisions for your publishing plan.
Experienced marketer Liz Kolb, is the co-founder and CEO at Axion Now, a company specializing in the collectible card game Magic the Gathering.
When Axion Now sends email marketing campaigns to promote an event, it uses its database with years of information to send when open and sign-up rates are likely to be the highest.
“We never send out emails on a Monday or Friday. It seems our customers are busier on these days, and the average open rate is around 40% lower,” she explains.
Whatever the frequency, show up consistently
Don’t get so focused on the optimal publishing time that you ignore the roles that publishing frequency and consistency play.
Adam Nathan, CEO of Blaze.AI, explains, “The more you post, the more you create a repeatable pattern with your audience that the (social media platform’s) algorithm can recognize, leading to compounding engagement and account growth.”
Michelle Garrett, founder of Garrett Public Relations, sees value in consistency for newsletters, too. She religiously sends hers on the second Tuesday morning of the month.
As a newsletter consumer, she also appreciates consistency.
“I remember one newsletter I always received on Friday mornings. I always read it when it arrived. Then it started showing up randomly, and I stopped reading it as often,” she says.
Recognize when to adjust the plan
Holly Gaffney, marketing brand and content manager at Calla Shoes, grew its Instagram account from 14,000 to 174,000 followers in 2024. Her best advice? If an Instagram Reel goes viral, increase the frequency of your Instagram posts to “ride the wave.”
She explains, “We had a few viral reels, and the videos that followed also always had a great uplift. It’s also a great chance to post content that is particularly informative or engaging to people who are new to your account.”
I would think the same strategy would work well for any social media platform.
Chris Inman, president of I.D.E.A. Cleveland, adjusted his podcast frequency from 30-minute episodes one day a week to three 10-minute episodes three days a week. “I have noticed that the number of listeners doesn’t change, but the completion and retention numbers go up,” he says, noting the increased frequency also gives him a chance to share the call to action more often.
Expect to make industry-related adjustments, too.
Writer Connie Smart explains, “Become aware of how your audience’s content needs might fluctuate throughout the year. If your audience is small business owners, you might consider pulling back on frequency during heavy sales periods like the holiday season. If your audience is financial services, maybe you ramp up your frequency around tax time or savings contribution deadlines.”
Belinda Conde, head of marketing at Datos, a Semrush company, says you also should consider timing in the context of your industry, not just your audience’s behavior.
“While timing is important, what matters even more is aligning our content with timely industry trends,” she says. “We look at what’s happening in the market or what our customers are currently concerned about and make sure we’re publishing insights or data that address those needs when it’s most relevant.”
For example, Datos published a white paper, Retail AI: Four User Behavior Trends to Know, when many journalists were writing about how they used AI for their holiday shopping. “By publishing during this conversation, we provided research that was both timely and valuable for our audience and the industry at large,” Belinda says.
A single answer doesn’t exist
Of course, not everyone has the same opinion or priorities on when to publish. Lindsay Young, owner and president of 3 Aspens Media, advocates for publishing content on your website when it’s ready. “There’s zero reason to wait if it holds true value to your prospects or customers,” she says.
Dane Frederiksen, founder and chief visual storyteller of Digital Accomplice, favors the publish-more strategy. “Video every day. The algorithm loves frequency; feed the beast,” he says.
5 steps to the best publishing frequency decisions
When you’re ready to optimize your content calendar, from social media posts and podcast episodes to blogs, newsletters, and videos, follow this curated advice:
Investigate your audience quantitatively and qualitatively to understand their consumption behavior with content formats, topics, and distribution channels.
Use the personalized recommendation tools from your relevant software providers.
Develop a scheduling strategy that consistently delivers at a frequency that works for your audience and your resources.
Be flexible enough to capitalize on trends related to your industry and the big success your content may find.
Analyze the behavior metrics after two to three months, and revise the strategy based on what you’ve learned.
By implementing this thoughtful process, you’ll never need to Google “What’s the best time to publish …” again.
Want more content marketing tips, insights, and examples? Subscribe to workday or weekly emails from CMI.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
Once upon a time, that word was the most common answer I heard when I asked marketing leaders what was wrong with their content operations. “We have limited visibility into what content is planned and produced and how effective it is,” they’d say.
One CMO of a Fortune 1000 company even admitted she learned about the company’s thought leadership by subscribing to the newsletter. “I have no idea what they’re planning,” she said.
Over the last two years, that word has faded.
Generative AI stormed into our vocabularies, commoditizing content creation. Speed and quantity are the new watchwords, and senior leaders seem to have resigned themselves to content wastage as the cost of doing business.
“Visibility? Meh. Why worry about it when we’re producing so quickly? What’s the worst that can happen? It won’t get used?”
Well, yes. And that’s precisely the problem. I talk about it and the solutions in this video. Keep reading for even more detail.
Now, we’re sleepwalking into the same room with content strategy — or, more precisely, the lack of one. Forrester estimates that 65% of customer-oriented content goes unused due to issues with findability, relevance, or quality.
Let’s do some quick math: If marketers recovered even half of that wasted content, do you think overall marketing results might improve?
The messy content machine
Consider how raw ideas become marketing messages, thought leadership, articles, and campaigns. That process — now supercharged (or muddled) by generative AI — usually starts with someone creating or curating the “right” inputs to feed the content machine.
Leaders may establish the themes, but those soon get distorted by siloed teams using tools that promise efficiency but deliver chaos.
Here’s the irony: AI was supposed to make this easier.
Spoiler: It doesn’t.
AI amplifies the mess. Ideas are invisible until they’re transformed into content. And without visibility, businesses fall into the same trap: Content is everybody’s job but nobody’s strategy.
Frontline teams use AI to pump out hyper-specific content for immediate needs. Meanwhile, central teams struggle to manage the tidal wave of content or hesitate to trust it all — because they have no visibility into what was generated by AI versus what was crafted by humans.
Imagine running an automobile assembly line. The average car has 30,000 parts assembled along a line about 1,000 feet long.
Now, imagine you only have visibility into the last 50 feet. You’d have no idea how many cars are coming, which models, and whether someone swapped out a key part.
That’s what many organizations’ content operations look like today: no visibility, no alignment, and no control.
The fear factor in content collaboration
At the heart of this visibility crisis lies a deeper, often overlooked issue: a fear of collaboration.
I’ve noticed this fear growing over the last few years — especially in environments where production speed is the priority. Collaboration is often perceived as a bottleneck, requiring more time for multiple voices to be heard, consensus to be built, and conflicts to be resolved. Put simply: The focus shifted from “crafting with intention” to “publishing for the sake of speed.”
AI has only added to this challenge, amplifying the tension between speed and meaningful collaboration. Let’s unpack this further:
Fear of losing control (to the machine)
A global enterprise I worked with has been trying to use AI to churn out massive quantities of SEO-oriented content. But regional teams often find it tone-deaf and irrelevant. Leadership resists collaborating with regional teams to improve relevance, fearing it would “pollute” the AI’s training data or slow production. The result? AI content that’s fast but increasingly ineffective.
Fear of too much process
At one SaaS company, the CEO proudly claimed, “GenAI will replace midlevel employees soon.” They’ve implemented AI tools for everything — content creation, analytics, publishing schedules, etc. But without a collaborative framework, the tools have become distractions. Teams generate more content, but it lacks strategic alignment. The result? Algorithmic clutter.
(This situation reminds me of actor and director Ben Affleck’s comment about AI and art: “AI is a craftsman at best … craftsman is knowing how to work. Art is knowing when to stop.”)
Fear of failure (in the AI spotlight)
I know of a midsize consultancy that has deployed AI tools to centralize content marketing creation. But I also know that individual practitioners fear that the shared system will expose their work as less polished. So they’ve tried to use their own models. Instead of fostering collaboration, AI reinforced silos. The result? Missed opportunities and a more complicated case for future AI investments.
Generative AI will perform much better in environments with precise inputs, processes, and collaboration.
Logistics offers a perfect analogy: AI optimizes supply chains when it has complete visibility into raw materials, production stages, and delivery timelines. Your content “supply chain” is no different.
Embrace the AI-powered mess
Here’s the uncomfortable truth: AI doesn’t eliminate our content mess — it amplifies it.
Regional teams will still create their own content. Subject-matter experts will still upload slide decks that don’t align with strategy. AI will still generate headlines that sound right but miss the point.
And that’s OK — as long as there’s a mechanism to make the mess visible to the humans who need to make the content mean something.
Think of your content strategy and the visibility it provides as air traffic control. You don’t dictate every takeoff or landing. But you do need to know what’s in the air, what’s ready to launch, and what’s grounded.
Generative AI isn’t going away — it’s only becoming more central to content creation. The first step to thriving in this new era is reclaiming visibility.
Here’s how to start:
Map your content supply chain: Identify every stage of content creation, including where AI contributes.
Test and choose collaborative tools: Prioritize tools that enhance visibility and teamwork, not just automation.
Build a culture of partnership: Embrace AI as a tool that works with the individuals on your team and their role in the process, not in place of them.
Slow down to speed up: Sometimes, the most effective way forward is to pause, reflect, and create intentional friction in your content process. This pause isn’t about delaying progress — it’s about ensuring sharper focus, fostering creativity, and making decisions that lead to impactful, sustainable momentum.
It’s your story. AI can help you tell it — but it still needs you (and a strategy) to guide it.
Subscribe to workday or weekly CMI emails to get Rose-Colored Glasses in your inbox each week.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
Open a marketer’s treasure chest and you’ll see an abundance of data.
How do you select the valuable gold among all the worthless pyrite? And how can AI help you find that gold?
Dana DiTomaso has some thoughts based on her experience as the founder and lead instructor of Kick Point Playbook, which provides online marketing training. She recently shared her insights at CMI’s Content and Marketing Trends for 2025 event.
Watch Dana’s take on how to make the most of Google Analytics 4, AI tools, and all your other data, or read this edited transcript.
Accept that data isn’t perfect
Let’s talk about data. We’ve never had more of it. We have Google Analytics 4 and all sorts of other data we can evaluate on our website. We have our CRMs. We have all this AI information being tossed at us. We have tons and tons of data.
Unfortunately, data has never been less accurate.
Market analytics data is wrong. Can it be fixed? No. Why? Because people use ad blockers. There are all sorts of other reasons, and they all mean that your analytics are really not accurate.
I really want you to accept in your heart that analytics will never be perfect. Instead, work with what you have.
Know that Google Search Console data is not going to be 100% accurate in terms of the volume or number of impressions or clicks. But directionally, it is more or less useful. Don’t focus on the numbers; look at the trends.
Assess whether a page is doing its job
Are you matching search intent? This is a tricky question. People will look at search intent and think, “Well, I guess I got a lot of traffic here. I don’t want to look too far behind the curtain and decide if the search intent isn’t very good or not because if I better match the search intent, I might get fewer visitors to the website. That would look bad in my reports.”
However, wouldn’t you rather have 500 visitors who are more likely to convert than 10,000 visitors who aren’t going to convert? Matching search intent is critical. You can use GA4 and AI to better match search intent.
If you’ve worked in software development, you might be familiar with the concept of “jobs to be done.” A page has a specific job. The contact page has a job of enabling people to contact you. The privacy policy page has the job of making sure that you’re fulfilling your legal requirements.
If people landed on your privacy policy page somehow, would you expect them to convert? No. Some pages may have people who already have bought your service looking at them, so are you expecting them to convert again? No. Then why are you including those kinds of pages when you list landing pages with conversion rates?
So, recognize the job of the landing page.
Then, ask if the (search) queries that land visitors on a page match the job of that page. If they don’t, do you need a new page, or do you just need to fix the page that already exists?
This is where AI really shines because it can easily identify new opportunities. I really like Claude. I’m not doing anything at scale just yet. I have a text file of a page on our website, and then I go into Google Search Console and ask it to give me all the queries that led people to this page for the last 16 months. That’s the maximum amount of data you can pull natively out of the Google Search Console interface.
I look at which queries are showing up for this page. You might have an opportunity to rank for those phrases because if your page, which isn’t totally relevant for that term, shows up, Google’s really trying to figure out something that should rank for them. Those are probably good content opportunities because they may not be served well by existing content.
Then, I pose this question to Claude: “Can you identify any queries that aren’t well served by this page? And if so, what new content should I create to satisfy these queries?”
Claude comes back with a gap analysis and identifies some really fantastic pieces that we should write about on our site. My next question to Claude is, “Now, I want you to add up all the impressions and tell me which ones have the most possibilities.”
Follow the visitor journey in GA4
What is the user journey from that landing page? If that landing page is looking good, but it may not be the place where people convert, where else can they go from it? I encourage you to use the path exploration in Google Analytics 4 (GA4).
Look at the event’s “session start.” What is the path of that page? Where do they go next? You can just keep clicking on those (options) until you get to where the visitors ended up. You also can do a path analysis by starting with the end point.
If you look at the gap between the landing page and the high-value pages, you can find opportunities. People started on this page; they clicked here, but they didn’t continue. How can you get people from point A to point B?
Know how visitors engage
Do you know how users are using your website?
I don’t just mean page views. I mean looking at other metrics that tell you if users are having a good or bad time with your website. You may have used bounce rate in Google’s universal analytics. It was not a good metric. GA4 has a new metric called the engagement rate. A session becomes engaged when a user does at least one of these three things:
Had your website in an active tab for at least 10 seconds
Visited a second page on the site
Had a key event
This is why it’s important to make sure your key events record things that relate to your goals for your website. Looking at engagement rates can really help you know if people are engaging with your content the way you want them to. User behavior also outlines the quality of your traffic. You can identify bad traffic by looking at sources with bad engagement rates.
Engagement rates don’t tell the entire story, either. We often measure content consumption to tell us what content is engaging. It’s a Google Tag Manager recipe. It’s also a WordPress plugin. It takes the piece of content and measures how long it would take to read that piece of content. If the person dwelled long enough to view it and scrolled to the bottom of that content, the content was consumed. It gives a starting point (to know) which content to improve to make sure people are reading everything on the page.
However, remember, content isn’t just the written word. Videos have never been more popular. You should record content consumption based on how people are viewing your videos. We often track someone viewing 90% of the video as (content consumption) completion.
Then, by comparing the content consumption rates between text and video, you can see for this audience what is more compelling. Does text speak more to the audience, or does video speak more? Now, you know what to prioritize when it comes to creating more content.
Use AI to analyze the data for opportunities
What new content opportunities should you pursue?
Take your AI tool of choice. Feed it everything you have, from content assets to keywords and audience research. Then, feed it with your performance data from GA4, Google Search Console, your CRM, etc.
With your entire website and content assets in its brain, it can draw connections between the performance data and the content on the page. Then, you can ask it questions to help you make better content decisions, such as:
“Here’s our performance data from GA4. Here’s what we’re saying in Google Search Console. What content do we already have that fulfills these search queries?”
“Which content is doing well on search versus social?”
“Based on this research, what content is missing?”
“What content is doing a great job of bringing those high-value sales?”
The last question is where your CRM data comes in. I’m a big advocate of tying together GA4 data with your CRM data.
For example, people fill out a form and you know how they got to the form, but do you know the actual value ultimately of that sale? It might take months or years, depending on the field. By tying the GA4 and CRM data together, you can say, “This ad campaign actually drove X number of dollars of value.”
You can feed that information to your AI brain and say, “Tell us which content is doing the best job of driving those high-value sales.” Then, you can ask, “Now you know what content is bringing in the high-value sales; what other content do you predict would be of high value for our business?”
It can identify those opportunities and help you prioritize your work for 2025 in the place where you are making the most money.
Get the most from GA4
What else should you start tracking in GA4 in 2025?
Track image views. I record every single image viewed on our website. I can record scroll depths of 25%, 50%, 75%, etc. It gives me a highly fine-grained knowledge of exactly where people bail. I get a good sense of where people get bored and stop reading our blog posts. And it’s a really helpful way to optimize that content.
I also recommend using audiences in GA4. I love using audiences for all sorts of different stuff, such as locations or pages that people have engaged with. For example, I often use it to understand the audience, excluding people who viewed a careers page. They’re probably not going to buy stuff; they just want a job.
However, the most important thing is to ensure that you set up insights in GA4. On the homepage of GA4, scroll down to the bottom of this page and click on “create custom insights.”
That’s where you set up your alerts for things like no organic traffic or no conversions to know if something is wrong. The last thing you want is to have something horrible happen and you don’t find out until you pull the report for the next month.
Discover the latest strategies, insights, and tools to elevate your content marketing. Explore our 2025 webinar lineup and start building your expertise today. Register for free now!
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
As the founder and CEO of The Joy Brigade, Shabnam Mogharabi counsels people to rebel with joy.
She’s embraced the strategy herself, doing the research, getting brands to buy in, and executing projects in marked contrast to her journalistic beginnings where she knew “if it bleeds, it leads,” also known as negativity sells.
Shabnam co-founded the mission-driven studio SoulPancake, which focused on uplifting and inspiring content, with actor Rainn Wilson. She served as its CEO for nearly a decade.
But she’s no Pollyanna.
“I think the Pollyanna-look-on-the-bright-side is actually detrimental to harvesting true joy, which requires understanding, feeling, acknowledging the negative points,” she says.
Eliciting true joy requires recognizing the negative while offering a different perspective. “It works in how you tell stories. It works in how you write. It works in how you communicate ideas,” explains Shabnam in our interview after her well-received keynote presentation at Content Marketing World.
Negativity works in marketing, but positive emotions do, too
Negativity, of course, isn’t limited to mainstream headlines to attract an audience. Clickbait headlines abound on social media. “They don’t actually tap into any emotion other than fear,” Shabnam says. “While fear is a great motivator, I think that love and inspiration and joy can be strong motivators as well.”
It’s not just what she thinks; it’s what the research shows. Her advocacy is rooted in the theories of positive psychology. “You can change the way your brain responds and reacts to various situations — good or bad — that you find yourself in,” she says.
But challenging negativity isn’t an easy battle. Shabnam points to John Gottman’s research, which found that it takes 20 positive interactions to counteract a negative one.
It’s biological. Human brains are primed to look out for danger and potential threats. “Joy is a rebellion against how we’re wired,” she says.
Negativity is easier, but the best marketers eschew the easy route. “The best marketing campaigns truly capture the full spectrum of human emotion. They recognize that things are hard, days are stressful, and achieving greatness takes a lot of work,” she says.
Brands see the good in positivity
Shabnam shares a handful of brands among many that have successfully used joy in their marketing. She worked on some of the campaigns through SoulPancake and admired others as a consumer.
They all share one thing: They identify a potential (or actual) negative or challenge but pivot to an insightful or “aha” moment that inspires and uplifts the audience. They make people feel joy, connection, and hope — the positive emotions in the spectrum of that human experience.
Nike does it
Nike is known for taking on negative stereotypes. Shabnam shares an example from the early 2010s when the company produced an ad with a person running slowly on a paved road in the distance. As the runner gets closer to the camera, the viewer sees that it is a young person who weighs more than a stereotypical runner. The voiceover talks about how greatness isn’t reserved for superstars; it’s something everybody can achieve.
The company continues celebrating commitment while acknowledging the difficulties, as this 2024 spot — Joy — shows. The video, with the description, “Feeling great doesn’t always feel good,” shows people sweating, grimacing, gasping, smiling, and crying as they run with the cheery folk tune Joy Joy by Bob Gibson playing in the background.
Procter & Gamble sees little noticed
Procter & Gamble has often shared the hard work it takes to get to jubilation during the Olympics with campaigns like “Thank You, Mom.” This example shows the parents getting their kids up in the darkness of morning, feeding them, doing the laundry, and getting them to sports practice year after year — recognizing the hard, behind-the-scenes work that often goes unnoticed. Then, the ad shows the joy experienced by their families when their athletes compete at the Olympics.
Purina pivots from scientific benefits
At SoulPancake, Shabnam worked on a campaign for Purina, which been marketing the latest product by showcasing the science behind it.
But SoulPancake scrapped the benefits-focused ad and went in an entirely different direction. The team set up a box on a Los Angeles street corner. They asked people about their stresses in life, invited them to go inside the box, and surprised them with a basket full of kittens to play with. Afterward, the once-stressed people shared the positive effects of playing with the kittens.
The wildly successful campaign got billions in views and tons of influencer engagement, Shabnam says. “People really responded to it because we tapped into the emotional side of how people feel about their cats, what their cats offer to them, and the motivation you have to take care of them coming from a place of the love and fulfillment you get from the cats,” she notes.
California Casualty delivers unexpected joy
Insurance isn’t an industry that automatically makes people think “joy,” but SoulPancake changed that. It worked on a campaign with California Casualty, a provider of auto and home insurance for educators.
It brought in five teachers to talk about the challenges of teaching. They talked about how they didn’t even know if the kids were paying attention, the lack of resources, helicopter parents, and more.
Then, those teachers got a surprise. Former students showed up to read thank-you letters to them, describing the impact the teachers had on them and reminding the teachers why they worked so hard.
Shabnam says all marketers can rebel with joy, no matter the brand they’re promoting. “Even if there are no kittens or joyfulness naturally involved, there is something universal you can tap into,” she says.
Dramamine gets the good with The Last Barf Bag
Dramamine is a good example of that. The anti-nausea drug maker celebrated its 75th anniversary in 2024 with a 13-minute documentary, The Last Barf Bag.
Though the film ponders briefly late in the documentary whether Dramamine’s debut led to the continuing decline in airlines providing air sickness bags, the real story centered on a small but fascinating group of barf bag collectors. In the nine months since its debut, more than 300,000 people have viewed the video on the brand’s YouTube channel, with only 3,870 subscribers.
“Even vomit can have an interesting story, and it was brought to you by Dramamine. It was such clever marketing,” Shabnam says. “The work is in finding that universal insight that you can tap into.”
Getting internal buy-in
Of course, creatively tapping into the spectrum of human emotions isn’t the only ingredient to being a rebel. It also will require leadership that approves the concepts and a marketing culture that makes them possible.
Shabnam says the first step is to know how executives view the business. Some may want to expect results in the next quarter; others may take a long-haul view. In some cases, executives are driven by the bottom line first, while others say employee satisfaction. As you identify their priorities, also listen to the language they use.
“If you don’t learn to speak their language, communicating and selling the benefits of changing your approach to marketing will never make progress,” she says. “It’s all about knowing who your audience is and how you adjust the message, the benefits, etc., for that.”
Once you have executive support, you also need to get the marketing team on board. That involves examining the people and the processes. To make more emotive, joyful, and sticky content, you need people whose interests and passion — the things they consume and invest their time in — reflect what you’re interested in building.
You need people who think creatively and can see the data differently. You need team members who are voraciously interested in content, whether it’s books, movies, podcasts, or something else. They want to know what’s happening in advertising and expose themselves to creativity in the wild, such as visiting museums.
And don’t forget, leadership is important here, too. You must act like you want the team to. For example, if you set up a Slack channel for an upcoming campaign and ask team members to share podcasts, videos, books, etc., that relate to the themes or examples to inspire, you should contribute, too.
“People will do what they see modeled. If it’s not being reflected at the top, they won’t model it,” Shabnam says.
In addition to the people, processes should also be examined because they can sometimes stop creativity. Identify points in the process that hinder or help the team’s creativity. Commit to getting rid of extraneous things. Shabnam says if you don’t do this postmortem after every campaign, make sure to do it annually.
“If you’re not really reflecting all the time on ‘Do we have the right people and the right processes,’ you’ll never have the kind of culture that kind of creates this environment of creative thinking and thinking about insights and the type of content you’re trying to make,” Shabnam says.
Strategize to embrace joy
Eliciting the fear factor is easier, but you can do the harder work to evoke joy and connect more strongly with your audiences.
The best content, Shabnam says, acknowledges the full spectrum of emotion. It isn’t just positive for the sake of being positive.
“It is, ‘Hey, we know that there are these challenges. We know there are hard things, but here are inspiring, uplifting, creative, gratitude-filled solutions or ideas that can help address those challenges.
As she explains, “It is much harder and takes much more work to do that. But if we don’t do it, we cannot possibly rebel against these larger (negative) forces at work.”
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
I recently interviewed Marcus Collins, author of For the Culture: The Power Behind What We Buy, What We Do, and Who We Want To Be, for an episode of Live With CMI (with my co-host, JK Kalinowski). Marcus is an award-winning marketer who is the former head of strategy at Wieden+Kennedy New York and a clinical assistant professor of marketing at the Ross School of Business, University of Michigan.
Our chat about the role of culture in marketing covered more than we could fit in a single episode, so we released a bonus video of our entire conversation. Watch it here or read the edited transcript below.
Why should culture matter to marketers?
Culture is an organizing operating system that ultimately influences just about everything we do as humans. And that’s important for marketers because your job is to influence behavior, and there is no external force more influential to human behavior than culture.
When you launch something — a new campaign, a new product — it is negotiated and constructed based on the discourse that’s happening. Say you launched a new carrot brand when an E. coli breakout affects carrots. You are negatively impacted by what’s happening in the cultural zeitgeist.
Influencing and impacting culture means contributing to discourse in a meaningful way. My friend Eric Hultgren says culture is like a car:
You can drive it: You contribute new ideas or new conventions.
You can ride shotgun: You engage in existing conventions.
You can suck tailpipe: You just follow whatever is happening with no point of view and no clear conviction.
The brands that lead culture contribute new artifacts, new language, and new behavior through their works. They are the brands most likely to win.
Does authenticity relate to culture?
Scholar Eric David Brown Jr. talks about authenticity occurring when you are one’s truest self despite the context. The same thing goes for brands. Brands are authentic when they are the same, despite who they’re with or where you find them. They are awarded a level of credence that helps them engage in culture meaningfully.
If you are known to be inauthentic, it would arguably be exorbitantly difficult, and one might say impossible, to engage in and contribute to culture sustainably.
Bud Light taps into culture
In the late 1990s, Budweiser identified a cultural product in the form of a short film by Charles Stone III, a music video producer who wanted to get into Hollywood. Charles and his friends made a (three-minute) film called True. The dialogue was mostly “Wassup?” — it was how they communicated without having to say more words.
The executive from DDB, the advertising agency for Budweiser, saw the short and said, “That’s exactly what we’re trying to capture in this brand.” So, Budweiser commissioned Charles Stone to rework his short film to become an ad for Budweiser. People who saw themselves in that short film — in that cultural work — began to use that “Wassup?” language to talk to each other. This cultural lexicon became a way to signify closeness. It’s a receipt of friendship.
In this way, Budweiser identified the language used by this group. It wasn’t new, but the brand engaged in that lexicon through these cultural creators to benefit from the equity associated with it. And Budweiser was saying “Wassup?” all the way to the bank. And so was Charles Stone, who found his way into Hollywood to make movies.
Everybody associated with the “Wassup?” campaign won not because of any changes to the product but because of the brand’s ability to have proximity to culture.
Beyoncé sees the BeyHive’s real power
Part of my job working with Beyoncé was to help build her online fan club. Take an offline fan club, where people write her letters that would go without replies (as with most celebrities), and build it into an online fan club where these people could engage with each other through their fandom of Beyoncé.
However, we realized that the engagement on the platform we built was nowhere close to the engagement within the (wider) community. In the clubs of the BeyHive, these folks had their own language, their own vernacular, their own artifacts, and their own behaviors.
They weren’t just fans of Beyoncé. They saw the world the way Beyoncé did. Their belief system brought them together. The music was merely the cultural production that expressed the shared belief that was exchanged among them.
What that illuminated for me is that building a community is “I’m going to bring people and rally them around me and my ideas.” Facilitating community is about finding people who already believe what you believe and using your resources, effort, and social capital to help them connect so that they might collectively achieve the things they set out to achieve together.
While one may see that as wordplay, I think that (thinking) is foundationally, if not philosophically, different. When you facilitate a community, you find yourself in service of people. And the best marketing is always in service to help people get through their jobs to be done, whether it’s the functional job, the emotional job, the social job, or the alchemy of all three.
So, marketers should be looking for these communities that may already exist for their brand, their product, or whatever it may be. That requires the brand to be more than a maker of products or a provider of service-based products.
The idea is that these vessels of meaning that we call brands transcend the value proposition, the category in which they operate. Then, they preach the gospel to people who see the world similarly. And those people go, “Yes, totally, I always thought about it that way. Finally, someone said it.” Then, these people preach the gospel for you. They evangelize, creating network effects that bring people toward you.
B2B and B2C brands can do this. It’s just context. Brands are vessels of meaning, and brands that mean one thing when I’m shopping through the grocery store have the same mechanisms as brands that mean something when I’m in my cubicle trying to decide whether to buy this cloud computing system or that one. It all depends on what the brand means to me.
You know that saying, “No one ever got fired for hiring IBM?” That’s because there was cultural credence and trust in IBM. Therefore, the cultural and social expectations are pushed upon that (buyer) so that even if they see a product that performs better than IBM, they are going to go with IBM because they’re likely to get (the purchase) through the system more easily. No one is going to get upset with them. The boss probably would pat them on the back. The buyer gets all the social capital from that, even though another product may be better.
Kamala Harris didn’t get a big network cultural effect
I think people look at Kamala Harris’ presidential campaign and say, “Well, her efforts were not effective enough because she didn’t win.” I say, “Well, no, not really.”
She preached the gospel. She started with what she believed, and people who saw the world similarly went, “That’s my candidate.”
The truth of the matter is that the country didn’t believe what she believed. Should she have said something she didn’t believe to win? Then people would say, “Well, that’s not authentic.”
It’s like brands that say they believe in something, and some people go, “Nah, I don’t choose you.” So, the brand goes, “We shouldn’t have said what we believed.” Well, no. The people who chose your brand (because of what you shared) are the ones to target.
In the game of politics, it’s a binary matter — one winner and one loser. In the marketplace, a brand could not be No.1 and still win. You could be No. 5 and profitable.
Also, in politics, it’s not enough to preach the gospel to the people who see the world the way you do. You have to create the mechanisms by which you ignite the network effects.
Perhaps Kamala didn’t have enough time for that to take hold because she only entered the race in July. She only got the first reverberation of the believers and didn’t get a chance to benefit from their ability to influence other people.
The momentum she catalyzed in a short time is unprecedented. She raised a billion dollars in donations. That is unreal. What she did was a Herculean effort. Was her campaign perfect? No. But was it impactful? 1,000%.
Want more content marketing tips, insights, and examples? Subscribe to workday or weekly emails from CMI.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
To get everybody on the same page with your brand’s content marketing, you need an actual page.
Your team — and everybody else involved in the process — needs to know the who, what, when, where, why, and how behind their work.
A written strategy makes it easier to:
Align content marketing with the organization’s business goals.
Secure leadership and budget support.
Ensure that internal, external, and adjacent content teams work in the same direction.
Onboard and re-educate your team as the strategy evolves.
Content Marketing Institute research has shown that a written strategy is a differentiator for top performers. A few years ago, CoSchedule reported that marketers with a documented strategy were 414% more likely to report success than those who don’t have one.
To craft a strategy that all stakeholders will actually consume (and refer to later), you should make it a single page. To help, I’ve developed seven steps to a one-page content marketing strategy.
Let’s get started.
Step 1: Identify your business’s operational objectives and goals
Your content marketing program won’t be successful if it doesn’t align with what your organization wants to achieve.
Example
Business objective: To increase the belief that Bountiful Bank is a good source for loans (home, personal, and auto)
Business goal: To increase all types of loan applications by 10% (year over year) from Bountiful Bank customers
Step 2: Set the content marketing objective
Knowing what your business executives want to achieve, consider how content marketing will help. At this point, you’re looking for a general content marketing objective, not specific tactics or topics.
Example
The business objective is specific (raise awareness and trust in Bountiful Bank as a lender), and the goal is measurable (increase loan applications by 10%).
With that understanding, the content marketing team identified an objective that could ultimately help Bountiful Bank achieve that goal (becoming a go-to resource on personal finance).
Content marketing objective: To become a go-to content resource for bank customers interested in personal finance topics
Now, the work begins to define the path to achieving that content marketing objective.
Step 3: Define the audience
It’s tempting to detail a broad audience — all, you may think, the more people who consume your content, the more people to help you achieve the goals.
Resist that temptation because it’s ineffective. It’s difficult, if not impossible, to create content that works well for as many audience segments as possible.
Pick one primary audience and, possibly, a secondary audience.
To narrow the options, research your potential audiences. Look at the relevant data — demographics, sociographics, interests, needs, and pain points. Detail how and where people in that group currently get information related to your general topic (as mentioned in your content marketing objective).
Ask who would be most interested in your company’s content topics and who is more likely to take the desired action to achieve the business’s operational goal. This is your primary audience.
Example
Bountiful Bank considered several audiences interested in personal finance content. But when the content marketing team asked which of those audiences would be more likely to apply for a loan in the next five years, they narrowed it down to one — parents (with at least one young child). This target audience would be more likely to apply for car or home loans as their family grows.
Audience: Parents (with at least one young child) who:
Are customers of Bountiful Bank
Oversee their family’s budget
Expect their living and transportation needs to evolve in the next five years
Are challenged by balancing the family’s space and transportation requirements as the family grows
Are crunched for time in all aspects of their life
Step 4: Identify content categories and topics
Knowing and describing your audience opens the window to content. What would this group of people want to read, watch, or hear that’s related to your content marketing objective?
Brainstorm a list of content ideas — big ideas, specific story angles, or both. As you review the list, put a star next to the ones that would benefit your target audience the most.
Identify several broad themes. List sample story topics that would fall under those categories to help people better understand related ideas and envision new possibilities.
Example
Bountiful Bank opted for three categories — home life, car travel, and free or low-cost fun. All those themes work well for parents (with young children) who are interested in personal finance and someday might apply for a home, auto, or personal loan. Then, it added specific story angles under each category:
Content categories:
Living at home
How to create a multipurpose living room (story topics)
The best furniture fabric for families
Time-saving cleaning tips
Traveling by car
Emergency tools every car should have
Tailgate picnics when your vehicle doesn’t have a tailgate
Apps to find the best gas prices
Free or low-cost fun
Be a tourist in your own town
Help your children make their own board games
Step 5: Detail content types and formats
Deciding on content formats and types is closely tied to Step 6 (distribution channels).
Ask two questions:
How would the target audience most want to consume the content?
Which of those formats fit within available resources and capabilities?
Be realistic. For example, your audience might enjoy videos. But if no one on your team has video skills and you have no budget to hire or outsource, don’t choose video as one of your formats.
Example
Bountiful Bank found that parents value accessing content in a variety of formats.
Formats: The mix of digital and print content types includes:
Blog articles
E-newsletters
Social media posts
Print newsletter
Videos
Step 6: List distribution channels and frequency
Often, your chosen format will lean toward a general delivery channel. But be as specific as possible in detailing where your content distribution priorities lie.
For example, you might distribute an article on your company’s blog or a third-party website. You might distribute a social media post through X (formerly Twitter), Instagram, LinkedIn, etc.
At this point, you also need to look at the available resources to create, publish, and promote the content. What is the minimum amount of each type that your group can produce?
TIP: Don’t be overly ambitious. Pick a frequency you can realistically meet. You can always increase it later.
Example
Bountiful Bank evaluated its resources and opted for this schedule and delivery vehicles.
Frequency and distribution channels:
Blog articles: 3 times weekly; Bountiful Bank website
E-newsletter: Once a month; Bountiful Bank subscriber database
Tweets: Once a day; Bountiful Bank handle
Facebook: 3 times weekly; Bountiful Bank Facebook page
Newsletter: Twice a year; Bountiful Bank and partner physical locations
Videos: Twice a year; Bountiful Bank YouTube channel
With the format, platform, and frequency determined, Bountiful Bank detailed the categories (from Step 3) for each format and planned to:
Rotate the three categories for each blog post as well as social media posts.
Include all three categories in the e-newsletter and print newsletter.
Use the travel-by-car content category as the theme for videos.
Step 7: Connect to the business purpose
Now, you’re ready to go back to the beginning. It’s time to add measurable goals to your content marketing objective (Step 2).
Consider:
What do you want your audience to do after consuming a piece of content?
How will you measure success?
What are the specific goals (remember to tie them to the business’s operational goals)?
How long will you have to achieve them?
Example
If you recall, Bountiful Bank wanted to increase loan applications by 10% year over year. To help contribute to that goal, the content marketing team wanted to become the go-to resource for personal finance.
Content marketing goals with metrics:
Increase awareness of Bountiful Bank as the go-to resource for family-focused personal finance topics
Increase visits to blog pages on website by 10% each month
Grow the database of customers who want content from Bountiful Bank
Increase customer e-newsletter sign-up number by 20% each quarter
Convert customer subscribers into loan applicants
Grow the number of customer subscribers who also apply for a loan (personal, home, or auto) by 5% over a year
Notice how their measurable content marketing goals ultimately lead to the business’s operational goal.
Now, Bountiful Bank has its content marketing strategy in a single page:
Bountiful Bank Content Marketing Strategy
Audience (most interested and most likely to act on business goals)
Parents (with at least one young child) who:
Are customers of Bountiful Bank
Oversee their family’s budget
Expect their living and transportation needs to evolve in the next five years
Are challenged by balancing the family’s space and transportation requirements as the family grows
Are crunched for time in all aspects of their life
Content categories (valuable angles for the audience)
Living at home
How to create a multipurpose living room (story topics)
The best furniture fabric for families
Time-saving cleaning tips
Traveling by car
Emergency tools every car should have
Tailgate picnics when your vehicle doesn’t have a tailgate
Apps to find the best gas prices
Free or low-cost fun
Be a tourist in your own town
Help your children make their own board games
Formats, distribution channels, and frequency (consistently deliver in relevant channels)
Blog articles: 3 times weekly; Bountiful Bank website
E-newsletter: Once a month; Bountiful Bank subscriber database
Tweets: Once a day; Bountiful Bank handle
Facebook: 3 times weekly; Bountiful Bank Facebook page
Newsletter: Twice a year; Bountiful Bank and partner physical locations
Video: Twice a year; Bountiful Bank YouTube channel
Content marketing goals (what audience should do related to the business and the business’s goals)
To increase awareness of Bountiful Bank as the go-to resource for family-focused personal finance topics
Increase visits to blog pages on site by 10% each month
To grow the database of customers who want content from Bountiful Bank
Increase customer e-newsletter sign-up number by 20% each quarter
To convert customer subscribers into loan applicants
Grow the number of customer subscribers who also apply for a loan (personal, home, or auto) by 5% over a year
2 more things: Distribute and plan to revisit strategy
Once you have the written strategy, distribute it to all the stakeholders and share it in an easily accessible place.
But you’re not quite done. Schedule an appointment on your calendar based on the earliest timeframe in your goals to revisit the strategy and make sure the choices remain valid.
Among the other times to review the strategy:
All documented goal deadlines
Triggers or events happen within your organization (e.g., a reduction in content marketing resources, the addition of new technology or platform)
Triggers or events happen outside your organization (e.g., a pandemic, a shift in consumer behavior)
Operational strategic planning changes or updates (e.g., a new business goal, a new vision plan)
Start writing
OK, now you know that a content marketing strategy isn’t overly difficult to put into writing. Frankly, you probably already have the answers to most of the steps. So, set aside a morning or afternoon to pull it all together in one document. Your content marketing team — and the leaders who approve the budget — will appreciate being on the same winning page.
Updated from an August 2022 article.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
People prefer the easiest route. When they search for information, that now means they turn to generative AI tools, like Gemini and ChatGPT, or even AI Overview in Google Search.
These LLMs deliver neatly packaged answers. They don’t require the information seekers to scroll through a results page, click on a promising link, consume the site’s content to find the answer, and click the back arrow if they don’t find what they need.
That’s why marketers must adjust their search strategies to keep attracting online audiences to their brand and its content. To optimize your content for the search revolution, read on for recent research and advice from a few of CMI’s go-to experts in the field of search, analytics, and AI.
AI isn’t an alternative to Google; it will be the new Google
“In 2025, AI is not just AI Overviews. AI is Gemini, its new features coming to Gemini and possibly the release of features developed from Project Astra, a multimodal universal agent … All of these are a departure from the traditional search box as the point of contact between users, Google, and websites,” Roger explains.
Will people really move from the familiar search box to Gemini? Google’s recent statements and products indicate that the company is betting on it.
Google’s AI lab co-founder says the company will “turbo charge” the Gemini app in the next two years. Google’s universal assistant — Project Astra — will converse with users audibly and visually through their phones and prototype glasses and give answers, recommendations, and more information based on those chats.
And that’s just what’s happening at Google.
Microsoft has integrated its Bing search engine with its AI tool, CoPilot. ChatGPT, which is already a slang term for generative AI, has released SearchGPT, which draws from Bing.
And given the growing volume of players in the diverse generative AI game, expect ongoing disruption in this revolution.
Don’t panic; learn the game board
Revolutions aren’t unique. If you’re a seasoned professional, you know that before Google was THE search engine, there was Alta Vista, Ask Jeeves, MSN Search, Yahoo!, and more. Each had its own nuances, from algorithm preferences to how it delivered the results.
Answer-focused AI may be in a similar stage. So, now’s the time to understand what each tool cares about the most when generating responses and decide where your SEO team should invest more of its time.
Training-first systems such as Claude and Llama “generate responses based solely on their training data — snapshots frozen in time until the next model update.”
Search-first systems such as Google AI Overviews and Perplexity “rely heavily on real-time indexing of web pages … It’s like SEO on steroids, with a dash of content curation.”
Hybrid systems such as Gemini and ChatGPT “blur the lines by deciding, often in real time, whether to answer based on their training data or fetch updated information from the web.”
Discover your audience’s preferences
Now that you know the potential systems, how do you know what your audience prefers? You should do what every good marketer does: Look at your web analytics.
Go to the Engagement > Page path and query string report.
Set a long date range.
Click the “Add filter +” button at the top of the report.
In the filter settings on the right, select “Page Referrer” as the dimension. Select “exactly matches” as the match type. Enter “https://chatgpt.com” as the value.
Click “Apply”.
Then, you can see the traffic coming from ChatGPT. Apply the same process but change the values for the “Page Referrer” to other domains, such as https://gemini.google.com and https://perplexity.ai.
Given the newness of AI as an alternative search method, don’t expect a lot of traffic to come from any of the sites, Andy says. As that changes, you’ll already be monitoring the impact to better understand what answer AI tools your audience prefers.
For example, Orbit Media’s site saw AI referrers made up 0.2% of its total traffic in the previous 30 days, but that’s twice as much as the previous month, Andy explains.
By checking the numbers regularly, you also can see how (if) your traditional search traffic declines month over month.
Of course, just as you don’t sit and hope for search engine traffic, you shouldn’t wait for AI sites to deliver traffic. Investigate the emerging trends and know how your brand appears (or doesn’t appear) in the current systems.
It found ChatGPT Search listed Go Fish Digital, but it didn’t include the agency’s notable clients as it did for some other firms mentioned in the results.
To remedy that, the Go Fish team revisited the source page most frequently cited for its ChatGPT Search mentions. It added a “notable clients” section to the content in a bulleted list, a format the search engine LLM would be more likely to appreciate.
A week later, ChatGPT Search added Go Fish’s notable clients to its results mention.
It took 300,000 keywords related to the finance and SaaS industries and got their traditional search engine rankings and other related data, such as backlinks, format, etc. It also selected 10,000 questions that would mostly trigger answers that mentioned a brand from the People Also Ask results. It ran those questions through OpenAI’s GPT4o API and counted the brand mentions in the answers.
The results led to these conclusions:
Brands ranking on page one of Google strongly correlated with their mentions in the AI answers. Bing rankings mattered but slightly less.
The quantity of backlinks had a weak or even neutral impact.
Content format variety (videos, images, etc.) didn’t have much of an impact.
Seer asked 1,000 versions of this question: “Who are the best brands for composite decking?”
The 1,000 answers mentioned a total of 74 unique brands, with an average of six brands included in each answer.
Seer Interactive’s Christina Blake says the results indicate that AI tools prioritize semantic intent over specific words. Thus, marketers should focus on the themes and concepts behind the questions, not minor variations in phrasing as they might do with traditional search.
Do the hard work for the easy search route
In the coming year, more and more people in your target audience will change their search behavior and opt for the easier route.
To ensure that your content and brand show up in those nicely wrapped packages, update your marketing playbook. Don’t abandon traditional search rankings, given their potential role in AI-generated answers. But do spend less time perfecting the keywords and other minutia that doesn’t really matter to your audience or the generative AI tools.
All tools mentioned in this article were suggested by a contributor to the article. If you’d like to suggest a tool, share the article on social media with a comment.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
At the beginning of that segment, Zuckerberg notes that Meta takes a different approach than Apple regarding product strategy:
“We’re the opposite of Apple…They take this approach that’s like, ‘We’re going to take a long time, we’re going to polish it, and we’re going to put it out.’ And maybe for the stuff that they’re doing that works, maybe that just fits with their culture.”
In other words, they move slowly, and we move fast.
But you can see that Zuckerberg visibly struggles during this 8-minute segment to separate the ideas of speed and agility. When questioned about prioritizing speed and releasing suboptimal things, he backtracks, saying, ‘Well, I don’t want to overstate it.’
Gradually, he works his way to the realization that he means their ability to learn and adapt quickly — in other words, their agility:
“Product strategy is about learning and iterating as fast as possible…If we can learn faster than everyone else, we’ll win.”
The punch line, however, lies in the audience’s reaction. Most LinkedIn comments (and the articles covering the interview) interpreted the clip as Zuckerberg saying that velocity defines a great strategy.
One commenter said, “Speed is everything in marketing.”
Spoiler alert: It isn’t.
The pitfalls of reckless velocity
I wrote recently about how the “move fast and break things” motto has permeated marketing’s culture.
I’ve seen too many marketing teams rally around new technology and activities in the name of prioritizing speed. Companies encourage teams to “fail fast” and deliver more and more content and iterative advertising faster.
In 2025, most marketers will move significantly faster than in 2015. Marketing has become more efficient and more algorithm-driven. Unfortunately, it’s also become more superficial.
Have marketers hit “peak speed,” where the downsides of constant acceleration outweigh the benefits?
Speed isn’t inherently bad. In fact, it’s critical in specific scenarios — such as responding to customer needs (as Jay Baer points out), managing crises, or adapting to rapid market changes. Yet speed for speed’s sake can lead to chaos and, paradoxically, hinder the capabilities it’s meant to enhance.
Last year, I worked with an organization whose marketing team was so focused on optimizing their automation tools to launch email campaigns faster and cheaper that they failed to recognize the consequences. Their prospects were buried under a relentless wave of emails — sophisticated, personalized, and, unfortunately, overwhelmingly poor content.
This reckless velocity culture makes teams feel like the work is happening to them rather than with them. Nobody questions where the content came from or whether it’s the right content for the goal — there’s no time for that.
Priorities become muddled, collaboration breaks down, burnout surges, and the pressure to deliver sacrifices creativity, learning, and, ultimately, quality.
Consider Meta for a moment. The company started rolling out AI-driven (ostensibly fake) profiles platform users could chat with. After some serious blowback over the last couple of weeks, Meta has decided to delete these profiles (at least for now). None of these choices were a good look for the brand. (I talk more about that misadventure in this video and article.)
Facebook may be large enough to weather this misstep, but the lesson for smaller brands is clear: Moving too fast has serious consequences.
But what’s the better way?
The answer is the same one Zuck ultimately settled on: Agility.
Intentional agility is a far more effective way to approach marketing efforts. It involves deliberate, thoughtful, and adaptive action rather than racing forward for the sake of momentum.
Intentional agility: More than speed
Agility has also become a buzzword in marketing, touted by many as the only way innovation and adaptability can happen. But, too often, people wrongly conflate agility with speed.
Speed refers to how fast you can move in a straight line, while agility describes the ability to quickly change direction with a purpose.
So, “If we can learn faster than everyone else, we’ll win” actually means, “If we can process where we should change direction more quickly than everyone else, we’ll win.”
That’s intentional agility: the ability to respond effectively to change built on a foundation of expertise, preparation, and deliberate practice. It’s about knowing when to act quickly and when to pause, assess, and plan.
It’s about moving forward with intention, not just momentum.
Move toward inventing things intentionally
At the heart of this discussion is a philosophical shift for marketing teams: from valuing rapid, iterative change to prioritizing deliberate, creative progress.
Stop long enough to question the need for speedy change. For example, ask:
Why do we need the Ferrari of marketing automation systems when our strategy calls for a truck?
Why do we need to figure out how to get to 42 AI-generated versions of content when three will get us 95% of the way to our goal?
Why do we need to create 100 pieces of content for that social media channel when it’s not delivering the desired level of benefit?
When I work on content marketing strategies for organizations, I often recommend changing the content creation process to start with the story rather than the containers (e.g., the designed asset).
For example, if they’re planning a thought leadership piece, I recommend they avoid saying, “We need a white paper!” Instead, I recommend they define the story first and then plan whether it should be a white paper, an e-book, a webinar, a podcast, an email, or all of the above.
The No. 1 pushback I get on this recommendation is, “It sounds like you’re going to slow down the content creation process.”
My answer is, “Yup, absolutely. And by doing that, you’ll exponentially increase your re-use and repackaging capabilities.”
Intentional agility as a strategic advantage
In a world obsessed with speed, it’s tempting to equate velocity with progress. However, the most successful organizations understand that real progress comes from moving with purpose.
Fortunately, I’m noticing more and more marketing leaders raising their hands and saying, “Maybe it’s time to pause, take a breath, and slow down.”
By shifting the focus to intentional agility— toward inventing things intentionally and away from breaking things quickly — you can create a work environment that is more sustainable, innovative, and impactful.
So, the next time you face pressure to move fast, don’t. Consider whether you’re merely chasing velocity or driving toward a meaningful destination.
Then move forward — intentionally.
It’s your story. Tell it well.
Subscribe to workday or weekly CMI emails to get Rose-Colored Glasses in your inbox each week.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
Meta just learned the hard way that no one likes fake friends.
Users quickly sniffed out the company’s AI-generated profiles with their awkward bios, wonky AI-generated photos, and deceptive backstories, and the backlash has been swift. Meta called it a “bug” and quietly deleted the accounts, but not before it raised ethical questions about using AI to impersonate humans.
AI-generated “friends” aren’t new, and the deleted “bugs” don’t signal the end of their use. This year, expect AI-generated customer service agents and friendly co-pilots to grow in number and impact. They will help solve problems like complex software challenges and give out the secret hack to writing that email to your boss explaining why you won’t be at work Friday.
What does this mean for marketers? We turned to CMI’s chief strategy advisor, Robert Rose, for his take.
AI characters prompt revealing conversations
So, Meta thought it was a good idea to sprinkle its platforms with AI-generated profiles pretending to be people. Spoiler alert: It wasn’t.
It introduced AI-powered profiles in September 2023 but killed off most of them within the year. (Is “killed off” correct? Or should it be “deleted” for deactivated droids? I’m not sure.) Anyway, a few characters remained.
Over the holiday break, the AI-profile survivors garnered new interest when Meta executive Connor Hayes told the Financial Times about plans to roll out more AI character profiles. “We expect these AIs to actually, over time, exist on our platforms, kind of in the same way that accounts do,” he said.
These AI profiles post AI-generated pictures to Instagram and answer messages from human users on Messenger. These characters have bios, profile pics, and stories. “Liv” described herself as a “Proud Black queer momma of 2 & a truth-teller.” When a reporter for The Washington Post asked Liv about the racial and gender diversity of her creators, she responded, “My creators’ team is predominantly white, cisgender, and male — a total of 12 people: 10 white men, 1 white woman, and 1 Asian male.”
I asked Liv, the Meta-Ai created “queer momma” why her creators didn’t actually draw from black queer people.
Not sure if Liv has media training, but here we are.
Liv also pointed out the glaring problem in her reply, “Zero black creators — pretty glaring omission given my identity!”
In another “conversation,” a CNN reporter chatted with “Grandpa Brian,” who identified himself as a retired African-American entrepreneur from Harlem. He spun folksy tales about his life until the reporter asked about his creators. Brian claimed interviews inspired him with 100 retirees via a nonprofit called Seniors Share Wisdom.
Adorable, right? Except that nonprofit doesn’t exist. Pressed further, Brian admitted his bio was “entirely fictionalized,” calling himself a “collection of code, data, and clever deception.” If you weren’t already cringing, Brian added, “Meta saw me as a golden goose — baiting emotional connections for profit.”
As the internet gleefully roasted Meta, the company deleted those AI profiles and claimed they were part of an “early experiment.” A bug made it impossible to block them from Meta users, a spokesperson said. But maybe, just maybe, what if the bug launched the profiles?
Why did Meta think creating a digital army of bots pretending to be real people was a good idea? Apparently, the company hoped these AI accounts would increase engagement and keep users scrolling. But instead of crafting heartwarming companions, Meta created digital imposters who couldn’t keep their stories straight.
Don’t fall under the AI siren spell until you do this
Meta’s latest misstep is a lesson for marketers: While the world rewards moving fast and breaking things, sometimes that broken thing is the trust of your customers.
You will be enticed to create anthropomorphized influencers, characters, and other personas to represent your brand. But before you succumb, be circumspect about how you will go about it.
Put the same or more care and rigor you use in vetting your external human influencers into the AI versions. Because, as you can see, if generative AI does one thing well, it can get cringy and creepy as fast or faster than you do.
Want more content marketing tips, insights, and examples? Subscribe to workday or weekly emails from CMI.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
Brands generate original research to grow their recognition as thought leaders in their industries.
But the buzz won’t materialize if the marketing team doesn’t promote the research. Whether you have a massive budget or not, consider these five strategies to ensure that your organization’s research maximizes its direct and indirect benefits.
You can start with these five ideas based on my and others’ experiences:
1. Pick topics that promote themselves
Buffer is a social media management SaaS company. Between 2018 and 2023, it published the State of Remote Work. Instead of compiling another “state of social” report like its competitors — an approach tied directly to the services they offer — Buffer took a creative topical twist by addressing the growing trend of remote work, even though it’s not directly related to its core offerings.
Buffer recognized that research on remote work would attract wider interest than another report on social media for marketers. The strategy worked, as top media outlets such as Forbes, Harvard Business Review, TechCrunch, and Fast Company regularly reference and link to Buffer’s State of Remote Work reports.
That media coverage netted Buffer helpful backlinks, which indicate to search engines that the Buffer research is worthy of attention in results rankings. However, in 2022, the State of Remote Work report netted staggeringly more attention than it did in 2020.
As these Ahrefs’ reports show, the 2022 study earned over 1.8 million backlinks during its lifetime (621,000 of which are still live), while the 2020 study received 9,000 backlinks (more than 3,000 are still live).
What explains the tremendous difference? Remote work was a trending topic in 2022 because, by then, everybody had access to COVID-19 vaccinations. Employees were thinking about voluntarily returning to the office or were being forced back by their employers. Media looked for data to cite on this increasingly important topic and showered Buffer’s fresh study with press mentions and backlinks.
2. Publish the report on a more prominent website
When I created the first edition of the How To Build a Credible Blog report, I planned to publish it on my website () and do a ton of outreach.
Then, an idea hit me: “What if I published the study on another site before mine?” I had seen other companies do this and earn press mentions.
So, I asked Jeff Bullas, who has a big social following, to publish my report on his site, which receives a ton of traffic and for which I had previously written. I told him I would debut the study on his site, and he said yes.
The idea paid off. People who visited Jeff’s site, which gets a healthy amount of organic search and direct traffic, discovered my work. Jeff also shared the link to the blog post on social networks and tagged my handle. This got more eyeballs to gravitate toward the study and boosted its credibility.
I republished the study on my site one week later and used that link for other sites that mentioned my research.
TIP: Transform some of your study’s results into an infographic and promote it to journalists so their sites need to embed only one image.
3. Email study participants
An easy way to quickly get some views is to email the published research link to everyone who participated. But to do this, you must think ahead.
I like to add a line at the end of the survey that says, “To be among the first people to see the report, make sure you add your email address.” A lot of people submitted their details. Just make sure you stick to your promise and contact them before sharing it with anyone else.
TIP: You can also use the notification email as a request for them to help promote it. Share descriptive text and an image or two and encourage them to let their social followers know.
4. Partner with influencers
I came across this LinkedIn post from Matt Navarra, author of the Geekout newsletter and social media consultant with over 250,000 followers on social, including over 64,000 on LinkedIn.
He previewed Metricool’s study on LinkedIn in the post’s text and published a 10-image carousel with findings, ending both with a call to check out the full report. I ended up providing my contact information to Metricool and downloading the report.
TIP: Support the influencer partner after the promotion is published. When someone commented about the lack of polling as an option in the research, Matt replied and tagged Metricool, which followed up by thanking the commenter for the suggestion and noting it may add it in the next survey.
Of course, for this strategy to work well, you should team up with influencers who have access to the audience you want to reach.
5. Tease the content in blog post and ads
Even when you want to generate leads and require registration to access the report, you can use some of the content to attract the audience.
Publish a blog article with some key results that would entice the viewer to hand over their contact information to read the rest of the research. Include a sign-up box on that page or at least provide a link to the research sign-up landing page.
You also can run ads that direct people to the substantive blog article. You’ll likely find the cost per click to be less than ads that direct readers to a landing page where they only get an option to sign up for something.
TIP: The higher traffic to and time spent on the blog article also will likely net more positive results from the social media and search engine algorithms.
Make the most of your original research
Original research is one of the best kinds of content to create. It’s unique. However, your target audience can’t marvel at its one-of-a-kindness if they don’t know about it. So, plan a promotion strategy and amplify the study as much as you can through survey participants, well-known websites, media, influencers, and more.
Want more content marketing tips, insights, and examples? Subscribe to workday or weekly emails from CMI.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
Content marketers have long had an identity crisis.
In recent years, the crisis has grown with the ubiquity of content creators in the creator economy.
In truth, you know who you are in the workplace. But does your title reflect that? Does your job description? What happens when you do a job search? Or, if you’re hiring, how do you handle attracting content marketer candidates?
We posed those questions to the CMI community and, not surprisingly, discovered no one had THE answer. But their replies indicate the possibilities that the employed, job searchers, and employers need to consider. And they highlight a potentially big challenge in the long term.
Can a ‘content creator’ be a ‘content marketer’?
Let me explain how this conversation originated. In the last few years, the creator economy raised the profile of “content creators.” In that context, the term is meant to indicate people who create content to attract audiences but who may not qualify as or want to be known as an influencer.
For me, as a writer for the Content Marketing Institute, I have used the term “content creator” to describe marketers who create the content. I used it as a catch-all term for writers, graphic artists, photographers, videographers, etc., who worked in marketing.
Marketer Roxanne Blanford had similar thinking. She explains, “Typically, the term ‘content marketer’ has been used to reference individuals who create, curate, and distribute content that attracts, educates, informs, and engages a target audience over a period of time, leading them through the funnel and building trust so that a purchasing consideration can take place and the sales team has a warm and highly interested lead to pursue.”
Fellow marketer Victoria Bishara de Leon says, “When I hear the title ‘content creator,’ I immediately think influencer,” she says.
But, Victoria explains, companies that hire content creators expect that person to not only build strategies for social but also shoot the content, write the scripts, edit the content, and stay on top of trends. “It’s unreasonable and asking a person to be really good at way too many things,” she says.
Make a ‘word salad’ to describe what content marketers do
Roxanne says she’s adopted a word-salad approach in her job search. “We are all living in a world of SEO, keywords, buzzwords, and the like,” she says.
In her LinkedIn header, Roxanne includes “marketing and communications,” “marketing copywriter,” and “multichannel and omnichannel content writer” along with her purpose, “Enabling B2C/B2B market and customer connections.”
Roxanne ponders whether a succinct role title is even possible, given the number of hats worn by a content marketer.
That’s why Roxanne purposely adopted the word-salad strategy, listing every type of content she can and has produced. “It enables me to better articulate a professional identity that is simultaneously specific and adaptable on a multichannel scale,” she says.
“With content writing and content management roles becoming increasingly multifaceted, communication professionals need to present descriptions that help navigate applicant tracking systems (ATS) when looking for work,” Roxanne says.
Test job title assumptions: Content marketing may be missing
Victoria started her job search looking for senior, director, and manager titles with the term “content marketing” in them. But she soon realized “content marketing” isn’t always in the title of a role that involves content marketing.
So, she expanded her search to include titles such as copywriter, web content manager, web content designer, and content lead.
“For the longest time, I equated copywriters with those who wrote short bits of copy with the intention of getting their audience to take almost immediate action,” she says.
I don’t think her understanding of a copywriter was wrong, but its practical application led to an expansion of the job description or perhaps organizations didn’t change the budget-approved title when they changed the duties associated with it.
Though she’s worn both copywriting and content hats in the same role, Victoria knows the skills are different. “It is challenging for an individual to regularly switch their brain back and forth between writing long-form content that tells a story through several paragraphs if not pages and writing short snippets of content meant to entice audiences into conversion,” she says.
How does a job candidate know what the role will entail without clear definitions? Victoria says you shouldn’t rely on the published job description alone. For example, she always asks if the team has a dedicated designer for marketing needs. If not, responsibility likely falls to another role.
“Ask as many questions as you can about the team and what the roles and responsibilities of those people entail,” Victoria says, suggesting reaching out to the future peers to ensure everything tracks.
Does the title matter?
Anna Wagner Schliep most recently had a marketing communications title where she owned the content for her area of the organization. (The company didn’t have a content marketing role, though it did have a content strategist who did SEO.)
In her current job search for content and communications work, she primarily looks at two titles — communications manager and content marketing manager. But many other titles may fit.
On her resume, she emphasizes in the headline and bullets her content and “owned” content experience. “So far, that approach doesn’t seem to be delivering for content marketing manager titles,” Anna says. “Perhaps that’s because the content marketing space is so crowded that if I haven’t had that title, it doesn’t matter.”
But, she says, the strategy does work OK for roles focused on communications with a marketing element.
Anna’s wish? That employers would be open to candidates with different titles on their resume and be clear in what the business seeks from the role. For example, “Do they want a social content creator or someone who’s looking at bigger-picture messaging and development,” she asks.
Switch up titles to assess the applicant pool
At AdDaptive Intelligence, Laura Goldstone has tested a few titles when searching for someone to fill their content marketing coordinator/specialist roles.
She discarded a lot of “content creator” applications from people who were social media influencers or ran social media accounts but had never worked in marketing or weren’t qualified for the more strategic, holistic, full-funnel content marketing contribution the company sought.
“I do think ‘content creator’ being used in the creator economy/social media influencer realm has muddied the waters a bit when it comes to hiring for traditional content marketing roles,” Laura says.
When the company posted a “content marketing specialist” role, applications came from all age groups, from entry-level to experienced in general and niche marketing.
But when it sought a “content marketing coordinator,” the candidate pool was more consistent — applicants typically in earlier phases of their career who had some experience writing and promoting.
Laura understands the challenges of using titles that accurately reflect the role. Her title is senior director of communications and branding strategy / head of brand and content.
“It’s a mouthful because a more concise title didn’t seem to do justice to the wide range of responsibilities I have,” she says.
The AdDaptive Intelligence marketing department is split into brand and demand. All the content comes from the brand team, which she oversees, along with messaging and design. The communications component of her title indicates to internal stakeholders her broader scope of responsibility. (The company’s content team reports to the head of communications.)
Giving proper perspective
Marion Abrams, director of content at Dartmouth Health, says she sees the challenge in using the term “content.”
One version is old school, referencing everything written on a website and the site’s SEO, structure, and information architecture. The more modern version encompasses social media, videos, emails, podcasts, and articles.
“And both are 100% sure that what they mean is obvious,” Marion says. “It causes a lot of confusion.”
That’s in part why Dartmouth Health strives to solve the problem by adding descriptors when using the term “content,” and that includes their current work of writing job descriptions.
Knowing what is and is not
Lee Densmer, owner and content marketing strategist of Globia Content Marketing, says being precise should be a must. “A content creator is not a content marketer. Also, a social media manager is not a content marketer. Also, an SEO writer is not a content marketer,” she says.
Though an SEO writer or social media person can become a content marketer, it shouldn’t be expected, and none of those people is automatically a content strategist.
While she recognizes that few, if any, companies can budget for all those roles, they should invest in a strategic role first, perhaps a fractional content marketing strategist, and then add practitioners, she says. To help, she has crafted a handbook for hiring a content marketing team that provides eight roles, including job descriptions and pay rates.
Making this differentiation
Jason Patterson, founder of Jewel Content Marketing Agency, views a content marketer as someone who has one foot in content and one foot in marketing. If someone does content in a branded newsroom, not marketing, they are brand journalists or something similar.
“The key point to remember is that these people are often in corporate marketing or brand-level teams and not product marketing,” Jason says.
As for clients, the terminology doesn’t matter. “Most clients … have things they want done and pay us to do them. Regardless of whether they’re right about what content marketing is or should be,” he says.
Expanding duties
Michelle Garrett, founder of Garrett Public Relations, says she’s observed content marketing duties being added into job descriptions for public relations and social media roles. “There is a lot of overlap and confusion about who should be responsible for what,” she says.
As some of the skills overlap, human resources and hiring managers may not understand how to capture that in a title and job description. Or perhaps it’s because the company wants one person to do all those things, Michelle says.
“While I understand that it might be beneficial to hire someone who has different skills, that shouldn’t make it OK to expect one person to take on too many responsibilities,” she says.
“I think the days of the specialist may be behind us, unfortunately.”
Recognizing long-term impact of muddled titles and roles
Jeremy Bednarski, senior manager of content strategy at Salesforce, says he sees a long-term impact of confusing and inconsistent job titles.
“What’s the next title and/or set of responsibilities when you get promoted? What’s the career path when there’s not much consistency in roles among companies?” he asks.
AdDaptive’s Laura Goldstone sees it as problematic, too. “Through 15-plus years, I haven’t seen one clear answer emerge as the obvious winner or most data-backed trend (for title names).
“It’s confusing when it comes to career pathing — both for myself and for the team members I lead. But I try to view it as being empowering since we have a bit more autonomy and flexibility when it comes to creating roles — from title to scope — that match the breadth of work we produce.”
Want more content marketing tips, insights, and examples? Subscribe to workday or weekly emails from CMI.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
Here we are again. It’s the beginning of a new year — that magical time when your journaling app sends you a passive-aggressive reminder to “set your intentions” (and you almost believe you’ll live up to them).
What are your New Year’s traditions for starting again? Do you write resolutions? Do you set intentions? How about goals? How do you make sure you’ll keep working toward them?
I’ve found that setting a single word as my aspirational and guiding principle for the year makes it easier. My New Year journals track my words for at least 20 years.
In case you’re curious, here’s the list for the last 10:
Imagination (2024)
Balance (2023)
Freedom (2022)
Love (2021)
Elegance (pre-COVID 2020)
Happiness (2019)
Scale (2018)
Execute (2017)
Evolve (2016)
Manifest (2015)
I also assign a word for what the previous year became. In fact, I choose a word for the old year first. The two words rarely match. 2018’s “scale” turned into “choice” at year’s end, and 2016’s “evolve” became “evolved.”
The years when they don’t align reveal my struggles. 2019’s “happiness” gave way to “rambling,” and last year’s “imagination” gave way to “pivot.”
Focusing on a single word gives my intention a name and provides the foundation for every action I plan and take rather than a set of rules I’ll likely break.
Drumroll, please: My word for 2025
I mentioned that my end word for 2024 was “pivot.” I went through a lot of change this year (as many of you did).
The nature of my work today is completely different than in January of 2024. The model by which I do it changed. The business world has changed. Geopolitics has changed. And our beloved marketing practice faces some of the biggest disruptions in over a decade.
Some of this change felt hard and discouraging. Other elements sparked positivity and excitement. But I feel grateful for all of it. As I mentioned in a recent post, shifting my focus from “I have to” to “I get to” helped tremendously.
So, I almost chose “gratitude” as my word for 2025. Here’s why I decided on a different word.
It’s so easy to fall into the trap of thinking about what we don’t have. And it’s much harder to remember all that we do. But that keeps people stuck in a scarcity mentality.
Gratitude can tip the scales back in the other direction. But, if you’re not careful, you can go too far. Then, what I call “rationalized gratitude” becomes toxic.
Rationalized gratitude sounds like a cruel inner monologue: “Unhappy in your job? Be grateful you have a job!” Or, “Need more money? Be thankful for the money you have and spend less of it.”
This form of “gratitude” is actually a scarcity mindset in disguise. It tells you there isn’t enough to go around, so you should feel lucky to have anything at all.
When you’re practicing gratitude, it’s OK to acknowledge that life isn’t perfect. And it’s OK to recognize that you have things others might be grateful for but aren’t right for you.
After I thought long and hard about the “pivot” I’m still in the process of making, my word for 2025 emerged. It’s abundance.
Abundance is a word that feels expansive, hopeful, and deeply aligned with a fresh start. Abundance, for me, isn’t about accumulating money, stuff, or more of anything.
Abundance is about flow — a dynamic, energizing rhythm of giving and receiving, of noticing and amplifying what already exists.
Motivational speaker Wayne Dyer once said, “Abundance is not something we acquire. It is something we tune into.”
That simple truth has stayed with me as I’ve reflected on the kind of year I want to create.
For me, abundance isn’t about striving, hustling, or pivoting. It’s about attunement. It’s about opening my eyes to the richness of life that’s already here — in creativity, relationships, opportunities, and even uncomfortable challenges that stretch me.
It’s about trusting that life has a rhythm and that by participating fully, I’ll receive what I need when I need it.
This idea of abundance as flow feels especially meaningful as I continue to pivot my professional career toward providing fractional marketing services.
I’m drawn to the idea of creating something sustainable and balanced: A business that thrives not through constant hustle and 225 days on the road but through steady momentum.
I want to deepen relationships with colleagues and friends, generate ideas with people I encounter, and contribute my expertise in ways that feel energizing and reciprocal. And, in return, I want to feel inspired and free, with the kind of peace of mind that comes from knowing I’m aligned with my purpose.
Abundance, in this sense, touches every aspect of life. It’s the freedom to choose how to spend time and energy, the creativity to imagine new possibilities and bring them to life, and the gratitude that fuels a mindset of “enough,” even while I aspire for more.
Abundance isn’t static — it’s a river, always moving and continually replenished, as long as you stay in tune with its flow.
So, as I set out to live my Year of Living Richly (the title of an imaginary book I wrote in my notes), I found myself writing these questions in my journal:
How can I give more generously without fear of running out?
How can I create space for inspiration to find me?
How can I honor the flow of abundance by trusting in what’s yet to come?
I hope that by sharing this intention I’ll inspire you to think about what abundance might mean for you. It’s not something we need to chase or hoard. It’s already here, waiting for us to tune in.
What’s your word for 2025? Let me know on LinkedIn (and tag Content Marketing Institute).
It’s your story. Tell it well.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
I hope you are getting ready for a wonderful season of giving, and taking a pause from all things marketing and business. For the last — well, decade — I have ended the year with a special review.
This year, AI seems to have taken all the oxygen out of the marketing room. With a nod to those brands feeling compelled to fill their marketing with AI-generated content, 2024 felt a little grinchy. So, if you’ll indulge me:
Everyone in Marketing loved creativity a lot, But the executives running the business did NOT.
They hated Creative! The sentiment! The trends! Expensive brand campaigns with emotional ends.
They smirked at the memes; the creative was so cute. They sneered, “Who needs empathy when we’ve got compute?”
“Look at these fools with their thought leadership fluff, Brainstorming for hours — like that’s ever enough! They’re slow and inefficient, stuck in their ways, While I optimize content in seconds, not days!”
Now, with a neural net hum and a Tesla-like purr, AI learned all their content in one swift blur. They launched drones over Jersey with flair, And rewrote their ads with a cold, bot-generated air.
Gone were stories, the joy, and the fun, Replaced with AI: “Delving and evolving savings! Buy one, get one!” Ads smacking and packing with gerunds galore, While bots buzzed in circles and crashed at the door.
And as the execs planned to lay off the team, The tech bros got together and logged in with a scheme. Sam Altman posted, “Let’s optimize joy with OpenAI flair!” While Bezos declared, “Creativity’s dead — AI will write with more care!”
Sundar Pichai chimed, “Productivity’s key! No delay!” “AI will deliver Marketing’s Christmas, the Google way!”
But way down in the marketers’ corner, the teams regrouped, Ignoring the chaos of tech-bro loops. They slowed down, creating stuff humans would feel. Not algorithms or billionaires making a steal.
They crafted slow stories with care and delight, Handmade campaigns that felt human and bright. While AI churned dreck — cold, soulless, and bland, Their creative magic flew, built by real hands.
The execs stared down at their dashboards and feeds, Perplexed by the magic that human joy breeds. They paused their machines, unsure what to say, As the marketers showed, they knew the right way.
They didn’t need bots or predictive commands, Just humor, emotion, and work from their hands. They gathered in rooms with ideas to share, Proving it’s humans who give brands their flair.
“What is this?” the execs cried, “We can’t look away! How did humans outshine the power of AI?”
They learned that connection can’t be tracked on a chart, And real engagement begins with the heart.
So, what happened then? Well, in Marketing they say, The execs’ sense of wisdom grew five sizes that day! They joined the marketers, crafting captions with flair, And helped Santa upgrade with Wi-Fi to spare.
Now, every Christmas, they play a small part, Balancing big data with a marketer’s heart. And even Sam Altman, with a sheepish, small grin, Writes human content — with no AI spin.
Want more content marketing tips, insights, and examples? Subscribe to workday or weekly emails from CMI.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
When your content fires on all cylinders, the signs are obvious.
Your audience searches for your content by name, eagerly engages with it, and spends time exploring your related assets. Rave reviews are posted across social media. Buyers fill the sales funnel to connect with your sales team and buy your products.
When your content stalls out, the signs aren’t always easy to see.
However, you must figure out how to get the content humming again. The best place to start is looking for simple oversights and missteps that cause performance to slip over time or fail to move altogether.
To help, consider these four common mistakes, along with signs, symptoms, and corrective actions to get your content program back on track.
Mistake 1: Content lacks a clear and distinct purpose
On the surface, your content seems great — it’s creative, well-written, and provides valuable insights for consumers. You consistently produce stories in multiple formats to accommodate consumer preferences; you share them everywhere your audience will likely look for them.
However, according to your analytics, the audience doesn’t seem to care. Your content doesn’t get traction on any content platform, and those who view it move on quickly without taking action.
Signs of this mistake
“Great” content that doesn’t resonate or spark the desire to connect with your business may indicate the lack of a clear, unifying purpose. It often manifests as a jack-of-all-trades, master-of-none syndrome: You aim to appeal to anyone and everyone instead of building the deeper, trusted connections that drive desirable marketing outcomes.
Here are a few signs this mistake exists:
You publish content without defining your business purpose or how your content will work to achieve it.
You can’t explain who your target audiences are, what you want them to do, and what it will take to nurture them from casual viewers to active customers.
Your content doesn’t speak from a unique point of view, leaving your audience struggling to find a compelling reason to engage.
Solution: Build a content marketing strategy
It’s common to think casting the widest possible net will get your content enough traction. What business would miss an opportunity to connect with a potential customer? But even the highest-quality content in the world won’t help the business if you don’t clearly understand why it’s being created, for whom, and how it functions best as a business asset.
To make that happen, you need a content marketing strategy. Start with these three questions:
What goals will the content help the business accomplish, and what does that contribution to success look like?
What audiences should the storytelling activate?
How will those stories uniquely compel and provide value to those audiences?
TIP: View your brand’s priorities through your audience’s lenses. Keep an eye on industry trends, marketplace disruptions, and emerging ideas that may affect your content’s relevance and value proposition.
Mistake 2: Content is narcissistic and lacks empathy
You’ve worked hard to create content that puts your business in the spotlight and casts your experts as follow-worthy thought leaders. But while your unique views are on an upswing, they don’t translate to an uptick in customer behaviors or inquiries.
This mistake happens when brands forget that content is a conversation — both parties must see the benefit of the exchange. Your business talks a good game but fails to give its audience members a voice, demonstrate an understanding of their problems, or express a genuine interest in providing help. Potential customers see your content as irrelevant noise and decline to engage more deeply.
Signs of this mistake
Content solely focused on your business, its offerings, and its messaging priorities shows that your business is more interested in speaking than listening — a common turnoff for today’s marketing-fatigued consumers.
Remember, the goal isn’t just to get users to consume your content. It’s to convince them to convert as customers. That becomes harder to achieve unless you demonstrate an understanding of their needs and your unique ability to satisfy them.
Here are a few signs your content is falling short:
Your content discusses your products and solutions instead of audience needs and interests.
Your experience is organized hierarchically rather than contextually, making it difficult for consumers to find the content they need most or take action on the intentions that brought them to it.
Your content prioritizes attracting attention over earning the audience’s trust.
Solution: Make your audience the star of the content experience
Instead of focusing on your marketing goals first, focus on the customers’ desired outcomes — not just the transactional moves. Remember, consumers aren’t abstract constructs. They’re people who want to be seen and valued. If your content experience is built for personal resonance, it will gain traction more quickly.
These content tactics and techniques are well-suited to demonstrate a genuine interest in helping customers achieve their goals:
Use social media to create trust, not just transactions. Pay attention to the conversations in relevant communities. Ask questions that encourage your audience members to share their experiences and then respond to their comments with genuine concern — even when you can’t provide a product-related solution.
Drive participation with interactive content. Give audiences something to do, say, see, and feel. Allowing them to express their views, opinions, and preferences helps them feel more connected to your content experience.
Recognize and empower customers to share their stories. Content like reviews and ratings, case studies, and testimonials lets customers talk about your benefits in their own words, which can inspire other like-minded audiences to put their trust in your brand and its value.
Customize the information exchange. Giving your audience the ability to decide how, when, and what information they receive from your brand puts the power in their hands while keeping the channels of communication open. At the very least, offer subscribers the ability to opt out of messages they aren’t interested in. If you have marketing automation capabilities, use personalization techniques to tailor their content experience based on interests, behaviors, and preferences they’ve shared with your business.
Enlist community members to lead your brand’s conversations. Your social media communities may be filled with subject matter experts looking to share relevant experiences and discuss challenges with their peers. Offer them opportunities to elevate their profiles, such as guest hosting your forums. Not only can this encourage their fellow participants to share authentic perspectives, but it can also increase their interest in contributing to your content success.
For example, the Content Marketing Institute asked Jeremy Bednarski, a senior manager of content strategy at Salesforce, if he would be interested in hosting the CMI Slack channel. Five years later, Jeremy’s daily conversation prompts have helped grow the channel into one of our most vibrant and active community forums.
ADVERTISEMENT
Learn How a CMS
Can Simplify Your Content Strategy
New to content management? Perplexed about organizing your brand’s content? Learn how a CMS (Content Management System) simplifies creating, organizing, and sharing content—all in one place. Gain valuable tips, tools, and insights.
Start Learning
Mistake 3: The content experience has grown stale and stagnant
It’s normal for content marketing performance to ebb and flow. However, if you see steady or significant declines, your content program could be overdue for an overhaul.
Business conditions, media trends, and consumer interests evolve, which means topics and tactics that once worked like a charm can lose their relevance and impact. And even once-reliable subscribers and followers can become less receptive to your stories if they don’t reflect current needs and priorities.
Content marketing isn’t a set-it-and-forget-it technique. You must continually refresh your approach and offerings, so consumers see your brand experience as a resource worthy of their attention.
Signs of this mistake
Failing to adapt your content around emerging marketplace trends and consumer behaviors can harm your brand perception and drive your audience into the arms of your competitors. Avoid that fate by demonstrating your ability to experiment, innovate, and lean into new insights and ideas.
Here are some signs that a lack of content agility may put your customer relationships at risk:
Your creative team struggles to generate fresh ideas and find novel ways to approach evergreen topics.
Your distribution plan centers on channels your target audience has abandoned (sorry, Snapchat, SlideShare, and X) or fails to embrace up-and-coming platforms and media products.
Your top-performing search content includes outdated stats, information, and creative examples, which reflects poorly on your brand’s relevance and value.
Solution: Audit, analyze, and intervene
Flagging performance may not be your fault, but it is your responsibility to proactively see the red flags and fix obvious signs of stagnancy before they escalate into a full-scale content fail.
Audit
The process of diagnosing performance problems starts with an audit of your content assets. It can give a clearer picture of the stories and formats customers care about most and help identify critical gaps in your coverage.
TIP: The process doesn’t require a massively disruptive undertaking. A streamlined content audit speeds things up without losing any directional guidance you need.
Analyze
Monitor your analytics regularly to quickly pinpoint any high-performing assets that need updating to preserve their accuracy. The data can also reveal topics or formats to retire, allowing the team to refocus resources on areas of greater interest.
TIP: Build a performance dashboard to give the content team an at-a-glance view of the metrics that matter most for your organization’s goals.
Intervene
Once you analyze the insights and evaluate your course-correcting options, you are prepared to conquer even the most intimidating tasks required to recapture your audience’s attention and reinvigorate your content performance.
TIP: It can be challenging to get the support you need to implement strategic overhauls and tactical retrofits. CMI’s Robert Rose recommends staying the course in the short term while working behind the scenes to build a new strategy from the ground up.
Mistake 4: Team resources are pushed to breaking point
“Do more with less” — it’s the default mantra for every budget-conscious marketing department (and show me one that isn’t). Out of necessity and determination, your team pulls together, tightens their belts, and pushes forward as best they can with the resources available.
But there comes a point when frugality exceeds feasibility. When marketers stretch content resources beyond those limits, the resulting stress can send shock waves across productivity, work quality, and turnover.
Signs of this mistake
A company might need to add a few tasks to their content creators’ to-do lists in a pinch. However, these stop-gap measures shouldn’t be a long-term substitute for filling critical roles or providing adequate resources.
When extra tasks and asks add up to an untenable volume, signs like these may appear:
The normally high-functioning content team loses efficiency. They struggle with getting regularly planned efforts off the ground, let alone bringing novel content ideas and initiatives to fruition.
Deadlines are frequently missed, obvious errors are made, and exciting projects sit in limbo because the team focuses on the low-hanging fruit that can be executed quickly.
Team morale is shot, staff churn is high, and burned-out workers air grievances on public channels.
Solution: Educate, prioritize, and partner on content
Businesses commonly expect their content marketing teams to tackle all kinds of content requests across the enterprise. This scope creep typically happens when hiring budgets are stretched, and no one else can share the writing workload. It also occurs when management sees competitors making waves on a new channel and demands that a brand also needs a presence.
You can address these issues in a few ways, but it always starts with a root cause.
Educate
When management doesn’t understand why your content team can’t just create a few more assets to fuel a new channel or fulfill their requests, developing (and documenting) a clear content plan is a good idea.
Sharing this business case for content creation and distribution, quality criteria, governance policies, and benefits can help stakeholders see the bigger strategic picture. Once they recognize how much work is involved in effective content marketing, they may provide additional support or authorize a budget increase.
Prioritize
With too few players and too many asks, your team must set clear priorities around the content types, channels, and platforms.
Implementing a content-scoring process can help with this. It provides a quantifiable way to gauge which kinds of content deliver the strongest performance against industry benchmarks or internal criteria. That information can help you advocate for focusing your resources on viable efforts and pulling back on less impactful ones.
For example, if your company wants to add livestreaming video to the mix, run some competitors’ efforts through your scoring worksheet first. If you find that those conditions aren’t ideal for your business (e.g., you don’t have video editors or production resources, your audience isn’t engaging with this format, the market is oversaturated with competing livestreams), it’s best to leave it off your list until the situation changes.
However, if you discover that this new format presents an attractive opportunity or offers a high-priority benefit you have been struggling to provide, scale down or pause lower-performing content activities to free up the necessary team resources.
Partner with creators and technology
If your options are limited and upper management won’t staff up or scale down, forge a content partnership.
Co-creating content with the help of relevant industry influencers, high-profile thought leaders, and like-minded complementary brands can be a cost-effective way to shore up your assets without overstressing in-house content creators. Tap into your actively engaged community’s creative talents by empowering them to contribute guest posts or other types of user-generated content.
Content partnerships don’t always have to be people-centric. You can unlock content marketing potential by pairing your human creatives with the power of technology.
Incorporate generative AI and other machine-learning tools into your content operations to produce more content — in more formats — with less manual effort:
Remix and reuse existing content to give older assets new relevance and value.
Fill gaps in your team’s design or video production capabilities using AI to transform text-based content into eye-catching videos, animations, and data visualizations.
Use text-to-audio tools to instantly convert lengthy copy into easy-to-consume audio stories and podcasts.
TIP: Consider these nine additional actions to help get better content results without blowing your budget or causing your team to break down.
Got problems? Get answers
Though not all content marketing problems have simple solutions, identifying warning signs like these four is your best first line of defense against major missteps, miscalculations, and missed opportunities. What other big content challenges are you currently struggling with? Share this article on social with a comment.
Updated from a September 2021 article.
Want more content marketing tips, insights, and examples? Subscribe to workday or weekly emails from CMI.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
Hashtag stuffing isn’t as tasty a dish as it once was.
This month, Instagram ended its following hashtags feature. Users can no longer follow hashtags and have that content show up in their feeds or Reels. However, they can still search for a hashtag.
The move is a definite problem for hashtag stuffers — those spammers who include any and every popular and trending hashtag regardless of relevance to get their content in front of more people.
But is the end of Instagram’s follow feature a harbinger for marketers about the future of hashtags?
Yes, according to a handful of marketing experts who responded to CMI’s query on the Qwoted platform.
Forget mass attraction
Robin Dimond CEO & Founder, Fifth & Cor
Robin Dimond, CEO and founder of marketing and innovation firm Fifth & Cor, says the role of hashtags is evolving. “There’s now a tool to enhance relevance rather than to drive mass visibility,” she says.
To optimize their use, she recommends using five to 10 broad and niche hashtags to gain a wider reach and connect with more relevant groups.
Also, lean into other Instagram best practices, such as writing SEO-friendly captions and using trending audio. Collaborate with creators or other brands to boost discoverability.
“While hashtags can support your strategy, they are no longer the centerpiece — authenticity and algorithm-friendly engagement are,” Robin says.
Hashtags count in a different way
Saleh Malik Founder, S-Squared
Saleha Malik, founder of S-Squared, agrees that hashtags still matter, but not the way they used to. She says marketers would do well to adopt a holistic strategy that focuses on engagement metrics, relevancy, and quality content that sparks interaction.
“Once, hashtags were like open-door invitations to broader communities. Using #Travel or #OOTD (opinion of the day) could catapult a post into the feeds of thousands following those topics,” Saleha says.
Now, Instagram prioritizes delivering content tailored to the user’s interests, so its algorithm is more interested in interactions and conference preferences.
She points to sustainable fashion brand Reformation’s Instagram channel. It minimized hashtag usage in its posts — many don’t include any hashtags. This post even uses OOTD in the text in the visual post with three clothing options for being the life of the party — without ever using the hashtag sign.
Instead, Reformation now focuses on encouraging user interaction through questions and polls in Stories to boost its rankings in personalized feeds.
Take a TikTok-like approach
Kaveh Vahdat Founder & President, RiseOpp
Instagram’s move reflects the shift to a more TikTok-like, algorithm-driven approach, says Kaveh Vahdat, founder and president at RiseOpp, a fractional CMO services company.
“On TikTok, while hashtags help categorize content, the platform’s algorithm prioritizes user interactions — such as likes, shares, comments, and watch time — to determine what appears on users’ for-you pages,” he says.
Liam Taylor Content Marketer for Performers & Singers
Liam Taylor, a content marketer for performers and singers, also notes that on TikTok, the best strategy to attract many users is not to use any hashtags.
But that still isn’t the best strategy for Instagram. “The more tags you use, the more it allows you to niche down and reach a specific user,” he says. Still, Liam recommends using no more than three hashtags to attract a target niche.
Kaveh says the most important thing for marketers to do is producing compelling content that resonates with their target audience and fosters engagement, as this is more likely to be favored by the algorithms on platforms like Instagram and TikTok.
Back to a Google-like strategy
Kate Smoothly Founder & Director, Webhive Digital
Kate Smoothly, founder and director at Webhive Digital, says today’s social media users adopt a Google approach to social media, using these platforms as search tools. So, marketers should follow suit and use keywords to get their content surfaced.
Liam agrees. “You’re better off writing detailed captions, which are engaging and encourage users to interact,” he says.
In the end, how many hashtags to use or not to use is not the question marketers should be answering.
“The most important thing is to find space to experiment. What works today might not work tomorrow. What works for me might not work for you,” Liam says. “Whenever you try a new approach, be sure to measure the results and use that to inform your strategy going forward.”
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
Earlier this year, everybody was all aflutter about the U.S. ban on TikTok.
But when the ban moved into the courts, everybody moved on to something else.
Well, the ban is back. Or is it?
Last week, a federal appeals court upheld the law, citing national security concerns and rejecting TikTok parent company ByteDance’s argument that the ban violates the constitutional right to freedom of speech.
What’s really happening? What’s probably going to happen before you lose the dance videos, dog memes, and general ridiculousness of TikTok — and one of the most powerful marketing and commerce platforms of the last decade?
As the clock ticks, we asked Robert Rose, CMI’s chief strategy advisor, for his take. Here’s what he had to say:
Court: TikTok isn’t a First Amendment issue
The clock is running out on TikTok and ByteDance.
Judge Douglas Ginsburg laid down the law in his ruling to uphold the TikTok divestiture. In the decision, he wrote, “The First Amendment exists to protect free speech in the United States. Here, the government acted solely to protect that freedom from a foreign adversary nation and to limit that adversary’s ability to gather data on people in the United States.”
Translation: It’s complicated.
Of course, TikTok’s lawyers clapped back, saying the ban will “silence the voices of over 170 million Americans here in the U.S. and around the world on Jan. 19, 2025.”
And let’s be real — how will the world survive without endless cat videos and questionable life hacks?
First Amendment issues aside, TikTok has grown into a marketing, advertising, and e-commerce juggernaut. I’ve talked many times about how both B2C and B2B marketers see real engagement, real success, and real dollars using TikTok.
Don’t believe the Jan. 19 deadline
In spring, I spared you from reading the bill and outlined what was going on. And this time, I must say that many media outlets still are not communicating what’s really happening. They make it sound like Jan. 19 is a line in the sand, after which all access to the network will be blocked. That is simply not true.
The Jan. 19 date is 270 days after the bill was signed into law — the deadline for ByteDance to divest from TikTok. But TikTok has filed an emergency injunction to stop the ban from taking effect.
Honestly, this was always going to happen, even without the interesting wrinkle that Donald Trump, who said during the election campaign he opposed the ban, will take office on Jan. 20. Talk about timing.
In March, I said TikTok was in little danger of going anywhere, and I still believe that.
The Jan. 19 date might get stayed by the courts, the U.S. infrastructure might not be able to block the site, or President Trump might step in before dinner on Inauguration Day. In any case, a TikTok conclusion will not be realized in the next few months.
So, if you are pondering a pivot out of TikTok or considering a pivot in, take a breath. Give it a few weeks. I think you will be just fine.
Want more content marketing tips, insights, and examples? Subscribe to workday or weekly emails from CMI.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
For consumers, these are the things travel dreams are made of.
For content marketers, empowering aspiring travelers to realize those dreams is their job.
“Job” is the operative word, as storytelling in this crowded space takes more than associating the brand with a pleasant and purposeful journey. To influence travelers’ choices, marketers must walk the extra mile in their customers’ shoes.
The following brands may share a vertical industry, but they all address the universal challenge of connecting with consumers distinctly. Their work, which earned 2024 Content Marketing Awards, illustrates some best practices marketers can apply.
Support your partners in business success
One of the largest cities in the United States, Chicago is home to many world-renowned tourist destinations. Business travelers and vacationers likely know its biggest attractions, like the Magnificent Mile and Millennium Park. However, they may not know about its 77 neighborhoods.
Choose Chicago — The 77: A City of Neighborhoods
To position Chicago’s lesser-known communities as premier destinations, the city’s tourism board, Choose Chicago, developed The 77: A City of Neighborhoods.
The centerpiece of this content initiative is a video travel series showcasing five of Chicago’s most culturally and geographically diverse neighborhoods: Uptown, Little Village, Bronzeville, Humboldt Park, and Pullman and Roseland. (A sixth neighborhood, La Villita, was added later.)
Each episode dives into a neighborhood’s culture and history through personal stories shared by residents and small-business owners. But the series doesn’t shy away from addressing contemporary challenges. For example, the segment focused on Uptown (above) notes its history as a refuge for immigrants and LGBTQ+ communities, pointing out the impact of this cross-cultural enclave’s popularity — a shortage of affordable housing and ongoing gentrification.
Of course, awareness is only half the battle, so Choose Chicago directly supported the neighborhood businesses and their owners. Several content creators from its ongoing resident influencer program interviewed the business owners, and over half of the initiative’s production budget went to women and minority-owned contractors. Some of the spotlighted businesses catered a red-carpet premiere screening of the docuseries. Choose Chicago also hosted screenings in each featured community.
The 77: A City of Neighborhoods won the Best in Travel and Tourism category at the 2024 Content Marketing Awards.
Take consumers inside your distinctive offerings
Cruises are ideal for travelers looking to explore multiple destinations while having all their needs catered to along the journey. Highlighting what it takes to make every customer feel at home while away can help create a distinct experience — and increase affinity for the brand delivering it.
Norwegian Cruise Lines — Embark
Travelers often want a lot of information to help them choose the best cruise line operator and ship offering for their interests. But poring through detailed booking brochures is tedious and doesn’t always make for easy distinctions.
With its EMBARK With NCL travelogue series, Norwegian Cruise Lines sets itself apart by giving cruisers a uniquely appealing and insightful brand experience before they set sail.
EMBARK takes audiences on an all-access tour of NCL’s Guest F1rst Experience, including the meticulously planned operational details executed for each cruise to be successful. It tells stories about the people who work below deck, and satisfied passengers provide testimonials.
EMBARK vividly showcases the brand’s breathtaking destinations and signature experiences. For example, in the video above, host Zay Harding takes viewers on a tour of Hawaii’s coffee and cacao farms and a quick hula lesson. Afterward, he hits the island of Kaua’i to catch some waves and rides a UTV across its lush mountainous terrain.
But the wind really hits the sails when the series brings viewers back on board for glimpses into the lives of crew members. In the video above, Zay also talks with general manager Kai Turuneu about why he’s worked at NCL for over 16 years.
The EMBARK campaign was a finalist in the Best Travel and Tourism category in this year’s Content Marketing Awards.
ADVERTISEMENT
Learn How a CMS
Can Simplify Your Content Strategy
New to content management? Perplexed about organizing your brand’s content? Learn how a CMS (Content Management System) simplifies creating, organizing, and sharing content—all in one place. Gain valuable tips, tools, and insights.
Start Learning
Enable equitable enjoyment
Traveling can broaden horizons and shift perspectives. But for people with disabilities, it can also present unexpected obstacles that prevent them from accessing attractions or taking full advantage of the amenities.
No matter whether you work in a tourism business or another industry, creating detailed guides, checklists, and assessments can go a long way toward earning consumers’ trust, appreciation, and booked business.
Visit Lauderdale — Wheel the World
Florida might not leap to mind as a beacon of inclusivity. However, Visit Lauderdale aims to change that by highlighting Greater Fort Lauderdale as an accessible destination for travelers with disabilities.
For its Wheel the World content initiative, Visit Lauderdale partnered with Aqua Marketing and Communications to conduct detailed accessibility assessments of 70 hotels, restaurants, and attractions.
The verified details were compiled into a comprehensive online guide and shared via a co-branded website featuring blog posts, FAQs, travel tips, and e-learning training. A series of sizzle reels and social media videos bolstered the campaign’s reach.
For example, the video above shows travelers enjoying wheelchair-friendly activities like feeding the birds at Flamingo Gardens, touring the Florida Everglades in an airboat, and cruising the Jungle Queen Riverboat.
By showcasing Fort Lauderdale’s inclusive nature through compelling storytelling and detailed guidance, the campaign reinforced the area’s reputation as a welcoming place for all travelers. It enabled consumers to choose suitable activities and accommodations with greater confidence.
The extra effort taken by Visit Lauderdale to support specialized needs also proved it worthy of recognition as a finalist for Best Use of Social Media in the Content Marketing Awards.
Show off big benefits in smaller packages
Summer may be the high season for extended vacations. But with the right content, travel brands can tempt consumers into taking shorter but equally appealing trips at any time of year.
Connecticut Office of Tourism — Find Your Vibe
Though Connecticut offers the same quaint charm and multi-seasonal activities as other New England states, it’s known more for its wealthy suburban neighborhoods and traffic-filled roads on the way to more exciting destinations.
However, this compact state has many more traveler-friendly offerings than meets the eye, even if the same can’t be said about its tourism budget. So, the Connecticut Office of Tourism partnered with marketing agency Adams & Knight to emphasize the former while working within the confines of the latter.
It resulted in Find Your Vibe, a series of articles, directories, and short videos built around a central message: Connecticut’s compact geography means visitors can pack a lot of leisure activities into a quick getaway any time of year.
For example, a video highlighting autumn fun (above) previews outdoor activities like hiking with llamas and horseback riding, plus opportunities to shop at local boutiques, attend arts performances, and visit animals at the state’s aquarium and zoo.
Find Your Vibe is also part of a larger initiative — CTVisit — that includes a dynamic content hub and weekly broadcast programs in partnership with news stations in Connecticut’s tri-state area. It enables the tourism board to promote many more experiences and businesses and continually update locals and vacationers alike on new experiences they can explore in the upcoming season.
The effort has helped support tourism in Connecticut and achieved finalist status in the Travel and Tourism category at the Content Marketing Awards.
Serve up a gen-ex(perience) to connect with youthful audiences
Younger-generation consumers can have vastly different expectations than their older or family-focused counterparts. For them, “catching a tour” is likely more about music than museums.
Content gets and stays on their radar when it fuels their interest in immersive experiences and makes personal connections to their passions.
Marriott Bonvoy — The Road to Beautiful with Rolling Stone
Marriott Bonvoy wanted to enhance the perception of its portfolio among next-generation experience seekers. The brand found the perfect opportunity in a partnership with Rolling Stone — the magazine with a storied history for engaging young music lovers and festival goers.
In advance of the Life is Beautiful festival in Las Vegas in 2023, Rolling Stone and Marriott Bonvoy teamed up to join three of the festival’s performers on their tours and created The Road to Beautiful, a series of up-close interviews captured at Marriott properties reflecting each artist’s unique style.
The interviews were shared through articles and photos published on Rolling Stone and in short clips posted on YouTube and TikTok. But the conversations go deeper than the average band promotion by digging into the personal connections these artists feel for the interview setting.
For example, in a clip filmed at The Blackstone hotel in Chicago (above), the members of musical collective Franc Moody check out a local music store, talk to local DJs, and discuss how the city’s eclectic musical influences inspired their signature sound.
The Road to Beautiful also led to an additional achievement for Marriott International: being named a Content Marketing Award finalist for Best Use of Native Advertising/Sponsored Content.
Reach for the skies
These brands show the power of storytelling in all formats, from behind the scenes to deep immersions. No matter what consumers want to achieve through travel, your brand’s robust content efforts can connect them to their passions, ease the path to experiencing them, and inspire them to bring your brand along for the ride.
Let us know on social with #CMWorld if these efforts have sparked new content ideas to help your business reach its desired marketing destinations.
Want more content marketing tips, insights, and examples? Subscribe to workday or weekly emails from CMI.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
As a marketer, you might ponder generative AI’s role in the industry and the outlook for marketing jobs.
As a demand-gen marketer or a marketer to marketers, you may reflect on how you made it through a difficult year.
As a writer or manager of a corporate blog, you might review your current operations.
No matter your role, you may look for ways to strengthen your content and marketing in 2025.
Get help to improve your strategy in the coming year with these curated statistics from CMI’s 2024 research and bonus stats from the blogging survey by Andy Crestodina and Orbit Media Studios.
Content and marketing employment and career stats for 2025
CMI’s 2025 Career Outlook: Content and Marketing Professionals research (registration required) studied employment trends, job satisfaction, salaries, use of generative AI tools, and training/professional development.
Outlook for marketing jobs
One in three marketers (33%) say their company laid off marketing employees in the last 12 months.
Sixty-eight percent say finding a job in marketing is more challenging today than it was five years ago, 25% say it’s about the same, and 7% say it’s less challenging.
Three-fourths of marketers list macroeconomic factors as a reason for the challenging job search environment, while 69% cite heightened competition. Only 33% indicate that AI is a factor.
Salary satisfaction and supplementary freelance income
Marketers believe they should earn approximately 20% more than they currently do.
More than one in five full-time marketers (22%) say they freelance on the side. On average, they make an additional $8,250 per year from these gigs.
Job satisfaction and plans for change
Seventy-six percent of marketers say they’re somewhat or very satisfied in their roles.
Those with roles at the director level and above are most likely to be very satisfied (79%). Forty percent are somewhat satisfied, 10% are neutral, and 12% are either somewhat or very dissatisfied.
Even satisfied marketers keep their options open: 35% of all marketers say they’re pursuing or highly interested in finding another job (up 4 percentage points from the previous year and 7 percentage points from two years ago).
Remote work preferences
Eighty-four percent of marketers work remotely, at least part-time.
Among marketers who work remotely or in hybrid arrangements, 68% say they would leave their current employer if forced to work in the office full-time.
A much higher percentage of women than men (55% vs. 35%) say they’d leave their current employer if forced to work in an office every day.
How content and marketing practitioners use AI
Here’s the breakdown of their AI use:
Brainstorm new topics (62%)Summarize content (53%)Write drafts (44%)Optimize content (41%)Write email copy (38%)Create social media posts (34%)Outline assignments (32%)Repurpose content (32%)Proofread (27%)Analyze data/performance (12%)Create buyer personas (10%)Create graphics (9%)Create videos (4%)
Eleven percent say they do not use AI tools.
Skills training offered and desired
Only 35.5% say yes, their marketing training (internal and external) meets their career needs, while 29.7% say no, and 34.8% are unsure.
Yet 76% of marketers say they need to master specialized or niche skills to remain relevant in the face of AI.
And 58% of marketers say their organization’s training program is not keeping pace with changes in marketing.
Forty-eight percent of marketers pursue professional training outside their organization.
Career guidance
If you suspect you’re underpaid, start by researching what others in your position make, as Ann Gynn advises in How To Make the Case for a Raise in Your Content or Marketing Role.
And don’t discount the value of a strong personal brand during this process.
Bria Bell Senior Marketing Strategist JPMorgan Chase & Co.
We asked Bria Bell, senior marketing strategist at JPMorgan Chase & Co., for her thoughts on how content professionals and marketers can best position themselves for career growth:
“A strong personal brand can be a game-changer, whether you’re seeking a new opportunity or negotiating a raise. It’s about positioning yourself as an asset, demonstrating your unique value proposition, and building credibility.
“By highlighting your value and contributions, you can effectively advocate for a higher salary or better benefits.
“Additionally, enhancing your personal brand can boost your confidence, empowering you to quiet your inner critic and overcome imposter syndrome, thus allowing you to negotiate the terms you believe you deserve.”
What to do for your team
As noted, three in four marketers say they need to master specialized or niche skills to remain relevant. To keep your talent (and keep them happy and productive), look for opportunities to support them — either through internal or external training opportunities.
Regarding salaries, U.S. employers, on average, anticipate a 3.9% salary increase for 2025, about the same as actual growth in 2024, according to a new report from The Conference Board.
If you can’t afford an adequate raise, think about what else you can do to recognize and reward employees. Consider options like additional days off, participation in high-profile projects, or a change in title.
B2B content marketing statistics for 2025
CMI’s annual B2B Content Marketing Benchmarks, Budgets, and Trends: Outlook for 2025 research delved into the challenges faced by B2B marketers and how the top performers stand out.
Content marketing challenges
Only 29% of marketers whose organizations have a documented content strategy say it’s extremely or very effective. Another 58% say it’s moderately effective, 12% say it’s not very effective, and 1% say it’s not at all effective.
Among B2B marketers who rate their strategy as moderately effective or worse, 42% attribute that in part to a lack of clear goals.
Other reasons for less effective strategies include:
Not tied to customer journey (39%)
Not data driven (35%)
Ineffective audience research (29%)
Other (26%)
Unrealistic expectations (23%)
Emphasizes content quantity over quality (20%)
Failure to iterate/adapt (18%)
Inconsistent brand voice (17%)
Poor content quality (10%)
Fifty-four percent of B2B marketers say lack of resources is a challenge.
Forty-five percent of B2B marketers lack a scalable model for content creation. Thirty-five percent have one, and 20% are unsure.
More than half of B2B marketers (55%) say it’s challenging to create content that prompts a desired action (e.g., conversions). Other content creation challenges include:
Creating content consistently (42%)
Creating the right content for our audience (40%)
Creating enough content (39%)
Creating quality content (27%)
Technology issues
When asked what’s missing from their marketing tech stack, 47% of B2B marketers say efficient lead generation and nurturing processes, and 47% say streamlined marketing data management and reporting. Other missing capabilities include:
Ability to automate repetitive tasks and workflows (44%)
Easy access to enterprise analytics (41%)
Strong alignment between sales and marketing (39%)
Eight percent say their tech stack isn’t missing any capability.
Only 26% of B2B marketers say their organization has the right technology to manage content across the organization. Thirty-eight percent say they have the technology but aren’t using it to its potential. Twenty-seven percent say they haven’t acquired the right technology, and 9% are unsure.
Metrics and goals
The two challenges cited most often for B2B marketers measuring content performance are attributing ROI to content efforts (56%) and tracking customer journeys (56%).
Eighty-seven percent of B2B marketers say content marketing created brand awareness in the last 12 months. Among the other content marketing achievements:
Generated demand/leads (74%)
Nurtured subscribers/audience/leads (62%)
Grew loyalty with existing clients/customers (52%)
Generated sales/revenue (49%)
Grew a subscribed audience (37%)
Reduced customer support costs (9%)
Top performer attributes and activities
Twenty-two percent of B2B marketers characterize the success of their content marketing as extremely or very successful. These top performers most often attributetheir success to understanding their audience (82%). Other factors include:
Produce high-quality content (77%)
Possess industry expertise (70%)
Have high-performing team members (69%)
Set goals that align with their organization’s objectives (62%)
Measure and demonstrate content performance effectively (53%)
Have a documented strategy (47%)
The characteristics among the most successful (top performers), the least successful, and all respondents break down as follows:
Think the size of their content marketing team will grow in 2025: most successful (38%), least (19%), and all (27%)
Say their content marketing strategy is extremely or very effective: most (74%), least (2%), and all (29%)
Organization has generative AI usage guidelines: most (49%), least (29%), all (38%)
AI is integrated into daily processes/workflows: most (31%), least (12%), and all (19%)
Realizing more efficient workflows from AI: most (56%), least (31%), and all (45%)
Seeing improved content optimization from AI: most (55%), least (31%), and all (42%)
Have the right technology in place to manage content across the organization: most (46%), least (13%), and all (26%)
Have a scalable model for content creation: most (61%), least (17%), and all (35%)
Content creation model creates the desired outcomes: most (71%), least (6%), and all (41%)
Agree that the organization measures content performance effectively: most (84%), least (15%), and all (51%)
In addition, performance level also produces differing results, including:
Generate demand/leads: most successful (89%), least (49%), and all (74%)
Nurture subscribers/audiences/leads: most (77%), least (36%), and all (62%)
Grow loyalty with existing clients/customers: most (66%), least (33%), and all (52%)
Generate sales/revenue: most (66%), least (33%), and all (52%)
B2B marketers and AI
Most B2B marketing teams (54%) take an ad hoc approach to AI (i.e., they’re experimenting but not necessarily applying it widely). Another 27% report that their teams don’t formally use AI, but individual staff members may choose to use it. Only 19% of B2B marketers say AI is integrated into their daily processes/workflows.
Only 4% of B2B marketers report a high level of trust in generative AI’s outputs. Sixty-seven percent say they have a medium level of trust, and 28% say they have a low level of trust. Only 1% say they don’t trust AI’s output.
Seventeen percent of B2B marketers rate the quality of the content generated by AI as excellent or very good. Forty-four percent say it’s good, 35% say it’s fair, and 4% say it’s poor.
Content types, distribution, and social media
Ninety-two percent of B2B marketers use short articles/posts, 76% use videos, and 75% use case studies/customer stories. B2B marketers say videos produce the best results for their content marketing.
Most B2B marketers (89%) use organic social media platforms to distribute content. Eighty-four percent use blogs on corporate websites, 71% use email newsletters, and 63% use email. Fifty-five percent use both in-person events and webinars, which are the two distribution channels that B2B marketers say produce the best results for their content marketing.
Eighty-five percent of B2B marketers say LinkedIn is the social media platform that delivers the best value for their organization.
Eighty-four percent of B2B marketers use paid channels to distribute content. Among those, 73% use social media advertising/promoted posts, and 64% use search engine marketing (SEM)/pay-per-click (PPC), which marketers say is the most effective paid channel.
Regarding their evolving use of social media platforms in the last 12 months:
Sixty-eight percent of B2B marketers increased their use of LinkedIn, 27% stayed the same, 3% decreased, and 2% didn’t use it.
Thirty-one percent increased their use of YouTube, 36% stayed the same, 10% decreased, and 23% didn’t use it.
Twenty-seven percent increased their use of Instagram, 30% stayed the same, 11% decreased, and 32% didn’t use it.
Twenty percent increased their use of Facebook, 40% stayed the same, 19% decreased, and 21% didn’t use it.
Nine percent increased their use of TikTok, 7% stayed the same, 4% decreased, and 80% didn’t use it.
Six percent increased their use of X, 27% stayed the same, 28% decreased, and 39% didn’t use it.
Six percent increased their use of Reddit, 7% stayed the same, 2% decreased, and 85% didn’t use it.
Content marketing budgets and investment for 2025
Forty-six percent of B2B marketers think their content marketing budget will increase in 2025. Forty-one percent expect it to stay the same, 8% think it will decrease, and 5% are unsure.
Most B2B marketers (61%) expect their organizations’ investment in video to increase in 2025. Fifty-two percent expect investment to increase in thought leadership content. Other areas of expected budget boosts include:
AI for content optimization/performance (40%)
Paid advertising (40%)
AI for content creation (39%)
In-person events (35%)
Webinars (32%)
Building online community (27%)
Digital events (21%)
Audio content (20%)
How to apply these stats to your content strategy
If, like many other B2B marketers, you feel meh about your content strategy, reflect on the past year, identify the problem areas, and plan for changes to make in 2025.
Robert Rose Chief Strategy Advisor Content Marketing Institute
Here’s some advice from Robert Rose, CMI’s chief strategy advisor:
Get your content house in order. Tackle the difficult work of creating cross-team governance, workflows, and standards.
Regarding AI, come together to collaborate and commit to a few structured activities. An ad hoc approach won’t get you far.
Stop doing activities that don’t contribute to targeted outcomes and quit measuring what doesn’t align with overall objectives.
Demand generation statistics for 2025
CMI’s Content Marketing for Demand Generation research explores the daily issues faced by demand generation marketers. Fifty-seven percent thought AI was the demand-generation trend/development that would have the biggest impact on their strategy in 2024.
Pressure to achieve results
Over half of demand-gen marketers (56%) say they felt pressure to a great extent to achieve results despite limited budgets and resources. Another 39% felt that pressure to some extent, and only 5% felt no pressure.
Almost one in four (24%) say their organization’s demand-generation strategies are extremely or very successful. Another 63% rate their programs as moderately successful. Ten percent say their strategies are not very successful, and 3% say they are not at all successful.
Ability to create targeted content
Forty-seven percent rate their organizations’ ability to create targeted content as excellent or very good. More than half (53%) rate their ability as average, fair, or poor.
Budget allocation
One in five demand-gen marketers spend more than half of their budget on demand generation; another 21% say it consumes more than a third of their budget. Email, in-person events, and video were the top three areas where they planned to increase spending in 2024.
Challenges faced
Budget constraints are a challenge for 62% of demand-gen marketers. Fifty percent or more cite lack of internal resources (58%) and content issues (50%). Other challenges include:
Audience segmentation (44%)
Personalization (35%)
Researching audiences to understand them better (31%)
Identifying audiences (24%)
Creating buyer personas (20%)
Competition (18%)
Lack of executive support (17%)
How to use these findings
If you feel pressured in your demand-generation efforts, face budget and resource issues, and worry you need to use AI to do more with less, you are not alone. It’s been a challenging year for marketers. CMI’s Robert Rose says, “Marketers who spend their efforts at the earliest parts of the customer journey have arguably had it the worst.”
Stay the course when it comes to creating targeted content. Know that AI cannot replace good ideas, a smart content strategy, and a solid measurement process.
Marketing to marketers research
In CMI’s first Marketing to Marketers study, we asked marketers about the content they value, how they learn about solutions, and why they choose the solutions they work with.
Fifty-five percent of marketers prefer to consume work-related content by reading online. Twenty-six percent opt for videos, 11% prefer listening, and 8% choose print.
The top five content types used by marketers researching tools, technologies, or services include:
Forty-five percent of marketers prefer to discuss solutions on a video call. Twenty-seven percent want a text-based email, 7% choose a phone call, and 4% opt for an in-person meeting. Seventeen percent say they prefer no contact, perusing the vendor’s digital content on their own.
Half of marketers (51%) attend one or two in-person events per year (either marketing-focused or specific to their industry).
Almost all marketers (98%) attend digital webinars.
Eighty-four percent of marketers who attend webinars say the most important thing they want is relevant and actionable content. Seventy-three percent say content that addresses current challenges and trends is important; 55% want on-demand access to recordings; 53% seek expert speakers with hands-on experience; 8% are looking for interactivity and engagement; and 8% say a user-friendly platform is important.
Ninety-four percent of marketers say a company that makes extensive thought leadership content available raises their perception of the brand as a valuable information resource.
Seventy-three percent of marketers say that their request for the content is the primary factor that prompts them to open an email. The second most compelling factor is a relevant subject line (62%).
How to use the findings
If you market to marketers, provide prescriptive, specific advice. Creating value requires a point of view and actionable content.
Marketers aren’t all that different from other business buyers. Yes, the bar may be higher because marketers know a pitch when they see one. Give them content that will inspire, educate, and engage. Otherwise, you’ll find your prospects avoiding sales conversations altogether.
Blogging in 2024
Andy Crestodina, co-founder and chief marketing officer of Orbit Media Studios, published the 11th Annual Blogger Survey in 2024. I’m including those findings because many of you are bloggers or involved with blogs and the findings are illuminating. Among the highlights:
The average blog post is around 1,400 words and takes three hours and 48 minutes.
Only 20% of bloggers report strong results, down from 30% five years ago.
Those who spend more than six hours on each article are much more likely to report strong results.
Bloggers who publish more often are more likely to report strong results. The data suggests that publishing content biweekly is the minimum for content performance.
Fifty-three percent say it’s gotten harder to attract visitors from search engines.
Seventy-four percent of bloggers create how-to articles. Other structures include lists (50%), guides and e-books (46%), news and trends (45%), opinion (43%), original research (43%), interviews (34%), webinars (26%), infographics (22%), and roundups (22%). The most effective formats, according to bloggers who produce strong results, are roundups, infographics, and original research.
We asked Andy for some guidance on how to get better results from your publishing in 2025. Here’s what he suggests:
Andy Crestodina Co-founder & Chief Marketing Officer Orbit Media Studios
“Your content doesn’t just compete with competitors’ content. It competes for attention with the social streams themselves,” he says. “So, the more your content feels like a social stream, the more likely you are to keep your visitor engaged.
“What does this mean? Fill your content with visuals. Include lots of contributor quotes. Embed a few videos. Make it long and detailed. Inject a few strong opinions. That’s what the social platforms do. That’s why they are so compelling.”
How to use these stats
Use these findings to benchmark your blogging strategy against your peers. Questions to ask include:
Are we spending the right amount of time writing blog posts?
Are our blog posts the right length?
Are we writing an ideal number of words in each post?
Are we publishing often enough?
Has it become harder for us to drive traffic to our blog via search? If so, how will we adapt?
Are we publishing effective content formats?
Map out your strategy for a successful 2025
Stats are just figures, but they can help you tell the stories to make the case for the resources you need for a successful year. Use them to guide your thinking as you plan for 2025.
Finally, CMI would like to thank all the marketers who participated in our 2024 surveys. Your input helps advance the practice of content marketing, and we’re grateful.
Updated from a November 2023 article.
Get the latest Content Marketing Institute research reports while they’re hot – subscribe to the daily or weekly newsletter.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
“The future is already here — it’s just not evenly distributed yet.”
That fantastic quote, usually attributed to author William Gibson, perfectly captures the state of generative AI and automation in marketing.
As we approach what I hope will be a better year, I’m optimistic that AI’s benefits will become more evenly distributed.
But I also worry that this might lead us to forget this crucial truth: The iterative work of strategy and the creative process are inherently full of friction. And that friction is valuable.
I think friction also plays an important role in the experiences marketers create for potential buyers and customers.
Let me explain.
The no-friction pizza order
I ordered Domino’s pizza not long ago. Yes, I know. But stay with me for a second.
Remember the scene in Reality Bites where Lelaina, played by Winona Ryder, orders Domino’s and asks, “Do they take checks?”
I hadn’t ordered Domino’s since that movie came out. That’s right — it’s been nearly 30 years.
In the mid-1990s, there were no apps, websites, or pizza trackers. Instead, someone would leave a Domino’s magnet menu on your doorknob, and you’d stick it on your fridge. When you called to order, the menu was simple: pizza. Large or small. Thick or regular crust. Eleven toppings. Done.
In 1994, ordering Domino’s was all about efficiency. You’d call, choose your pizza, and 30 minutes later, it showed up at your door.
The brand became synonymous with average, efficient pizza.
After several neighbors told me I was “missing out,” I gave Domino’s another try. I approached the 2024 experience with my 1994 expectations: average, efficient pizza.
To Domino’s credit, its iPhone app nailed the efficient part.
The menu has exploded over the past decades to include chicken, tater tots, sandwiches, pasta, salads, desserts, and pizza with five types of crust.
The app walked me through the ordering process quickly and painlessly. I selected a few pizzas and threw in some cheesy tater tots (don’t judge). The GPS-suggested delivery address was eerily accurate. My order was in motion.
Less than 30 minutes later, my pizzas and tots arrived.
How were they?
Meh. It might be another 30 years before I try again.
When I shared my experience with my neighbors, they were horrified. “You didn’t do it right,” they said. “You have to customize and ask for double cheese. Add garlic! And the cheddar bacon tots — those are the real deal.”
I was fascinated. In their eyes, my “meh” experience was my fault. I hadn’t taken the time to dive into the endless customization options and curate the optimal experience.
And honestly? They weren’t wrong.
But my Domino’s experience holds an important lesson for marketers: Friction can be a good thing in complex sales.
Wait. Really?
Isn’t the whole point of marketing to remove friction from the buyer’s journey?
Maybe not.
The “right way” to buy
For the last 20 years, marketers have been bombarded with this message: Eliminate friction.
You’ve probably implemented tech that promises to “remove friction from the customer journey.” You’ve streamlined websites, stripped down product landing pages, and built sales enablement scripts so airtight they leave no room for a rep to read the room.
But here’s the thing: B2B products and services are inherently complex. Your endless “toppings” and “sides” set you apart and make your solution truly valuable.
Take “marketing cloud” and “marketing hub” products from HubSpot, Oracle, Salesforce, or Adobe. They offer so many options that even I can’t tell you every component they include — and I’ve spent over a decade analyzing this space.
This complexity presents a significant challenge: How do you give customers meaningful choices without overwhelming them?
The answer? You introduce friction — strategic, intentional friction that slows the buyer’s journey just enough to add value and enhance their overall experience.
I’ve seen a few modern B2B companies nail this approach using one or more of the following approaches.
1. Use content data to add context, not just precision
Most B2B companies collect first-party data to personalize their offerings, but they often miss the mark. They focus too much on who the buyer is and gloss over the why or what behind their decisions.
A smarter strategy? Tag your content with attributes that refine and prioritize your recommendations. Highlight unique features or combinations that prompt the customer to pause, slow down, and say, “Oh, that’s different than I thought. That might be exactly what I need.”
2. Feature bundles sell better than endless possibilities
I learned this one the hard way years ago. As CMO for an enterprise web content management software company, I was proud of our “we can do anything” flexibility for translation and localization workflow capabilities. We thought eliminating objections — any friction at all — would seal deals.
Turns out, we were wrong. Customers didn’t want a blank slate. They wanted to hear exactly how we would solve translation problems. They wanted to compare methods because their current process wasn’t working. Saying “Yes, anything you want” gave them no confidence that we had a point of view on a solution.
By recommending specific options like “Most customers choose this,” “Recommended for you,” or “Editor’s choice,” you slow the decision-making process — but you guide it toward better outcomes.
Customers feel supported, not overwhelmed.
3. Turn the “dead zone” into an engagement zone
There’s a phase in every B2B buyer’s journey I call the “dead zone.” It’s that awkward gap after the customer says “yes” but before the contract is signed and the solution is delivered, onboarded, or implemented.
Here’s what usually happens: The sales team backs off, afraid to rock the boat, while the customer gets anxious. Contracts, delivery, and onboarding can make them second-guess their decision before even using the product.
Slowing things down here — adding intentional, valuable friction — can make all the difference. Share thought leadership, helpful resources, or onboarding content that gets them ready to succeed. Instead of silence, give them reasons to feel excited and prepared.
Valuable engagement during this “dead zone” reduces buyer’s remorse and makes new customers loyal advocates. It’s not about upselling; it’s about delivering confidence.
Adding friction isn’t about making the process harder — it’s about making the outcomes better.
Friction can be good
The B2B marketer’s job isn’t to grease a buyer’s journey so thoroughly that they miss opportunities to pause and rethink. Sometimes, that pause creates real value.
Take my Domino’s experience. The app was a marvel of efficiency: Identify the delivery location, set the time, and select items. Pizza? Big. Crust? Thin. Toppings? Pepperoni, onions. Anything else? Tots. Checkout. Done.
But imagine if the app had slowed me down after I selected the first few options. Maybe with a message like, “Hold up — most customers in your area swear by double cheese. Want to try it?” Or, “Welcome back! Did you know this special combo is trending right now?”
That moment of friction could have made me rethink my choices and enjoy the experience (and perhaps the pizza) more.
Often, customers don’t know exactly what they want. Or, worse, their assumptions lead to subpar decisions.
You and your competitors might offer nearly identical products, but the difference lies in how you guide your customers through the decision-making process.
By introducing intentional pauses, you help customers discover the combinations that make your solution stand out.
As you focus on building more valuable, loyal customers who stick around and evangelize your brand, remember: Sometimes it’s better to slow down and help them make the right choice than to rush them into the wrong one.
It’s your story. Tell it well.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
This past couple of weeks, it wasn’t politics or U.S. Thanksgiving gatherings that dominated social media arguments.
Instead, it was a car manufacturer.
That’s right. Jaguar’s bold rebrand, including a new logo, visual style, and everything else, prompted the internet to lose its collective mind.
There’s a saying, “If you put four marketers in a room, you’ll get five opinions about the best way to do something.” That cliché took center stage as everybody seemed to have a position on Jaguar — the genius, beautiful, strategic, horrible, woke, ridiculousness of the whole thing.
But was it any of those things?
Or was Jaguar trolling to get everybody talking about it?
After all, at least a dozen global automobile manufacturers changed their logo in the last five years, and that list included Jaguar. But the 2024 iteration of Jaguar seems to be the only one generating meme-worthy attention.
Is that the only way to get people noticing and talking about your bold new look? Or is something else afoot?
We took those questions to CMI’s chief strategy advisor, Robert Rose. Read on or watch this video for his take:
Jaguar shakes up brand like none other
Fun fact: Jaguar was originally founded over 100 years ago as the Swallow Sidecar Co. It made sidecars for motorcycles.
Jaguar vehicles have been around since just after World War II and have always been associated with British luxury, detail, and a focus on performance.
But Jaguar — the company — has done something bold, and yet it’s the least mentioned thing in all this branding debate. Jaguar hit pause and reboot. The iconic brand stopped making petrol-powered cars and shifted gears toward fully electric luxury models. It’s even taking a year-long production break for the reinvention.
Jaguar will focus sales on exclusivity, not volume. In 2026, it will sell three electric models, each priced over 100,000 British pounds (approximately $126,000) and supported by a more selective dealer network.
Rawdon Glover, Jaguar’s managing director, sums it up, “This is a complete reset. Jaguar is transformed to reclaim its originality and inspire a new generation.”
Given that road map for the business, how would you have created the new brand creative, logo, and tone?
Well, Jaguar’s internal creative team took all that to heart and upended the traditional automobile brand. In a subtle change, it flipped the jaguar in the logo to leap forward instead of backward.
But that wasn’t what created the collective toxic freakout. The Copy Nothing campaign stirred a big reaction. The ad didn’t show a car. I’ll remind you why — the all-electric luxury line won’t debut until the 2026 model year. (This week, two weeks after the video release, Jaguar shared a design vision concept that certainly matches the new branding.)
The new brand identity possesses a modern and colorful look. It illustrates what Jaguar intends to move beyond — the well-known conservative colors of classic British luxury, such as Carmen Red, Fuji White, Ultra Blue, and of course, British Racing Green.
This switch seemed to upset so many people. The social media posts came fast and furious. People called it a massive mistake. Others pondered who was going to get fired for the rebranding. Still others posted, calling it woke and ridiculous.
Why did people seem so utterly disturbed by Jaguar’s rebranding? After all, the Jaguar team had nothing to go on, well, except 100 years of history and the context of its current business strategy.
The real lesson from this controversial creative rebrand
As you can tell, I don’t hate the rebrand. I don’t love it either. I recognize I’m not the target market for this new Jaguar.
What I do love is that Jaguar did the one thing modern marketers always profess that every brand should do. It did the thing that speaker after speaker at conferences talk about. It did the thing mentioned years later as the motivation when the brand wins awards.
Jaguar did something bold, creative, outside the box — and did it knowing that people would either love it or hate it. It takes me back to the famous 1984 Apple ad, which tested as the worst commercial they’d ever seen for persuasiveness.
Now, I’m not saying Jaguar’s rebrand is another 1984 Apple ad.
But Jaguar, as a company, is pivoting hard. The complete business reboot stems from a full-on self-realization that, to stay relevant for the next 100 years, it must change. Its focus is stopping production for a year, redesigning its product portfolio, and redeveloping its dealer network.
With the creative rebrand, I suspect the only thing even remotely permanent is the leaping jaguar as a badge and the logo itself. The cool, weirdly odd, diverse circus-like video is simply what’s happening this month.
In this company rebrand, Jaguar’s team has a lot of room to roam around and express themselves in a new way. That is the modern branding strategy.
Don’t box yourself into legacy. Don’t limit where you can take the creative ideas.
Jaguar even says it’s going to do that. It even calls this chapter “Copy Nothing,” and its website meta description says simply: “Inspire like no other: Challenge convention.”
The brilliance of this brand campaign — and the lesson from it — isn’t how much it looks like the past. It’s how much room Jaguar has given itself to take the brand into tomorrow. It can continue to create weird moments that keep people talking and attract new people. Or it can simply settle in.
And that harkens back to Apple’s brilliance. Its 1997 Think Different campaign featured iconoclasts from history all thinking differently and offered no product shots. Apple wasn’t calling itself iconoclastic, nor saying that it was thinking differently. The campaign tells the viewers that they are the iconoclasts. Apple said, “Here’s to you — the ones who think differently. We’re the one for you.”
What Jaguar is doing is everything, whether it succeeds or not. Jaguar is not saying it is the inspiration. It is saying Jaguar is the brand for those inspired to challenge convention.
And that leaves a lot of room to fly in the brand-creative sky.
Want more content marketing tips, insights, and examples? Subscribe to workday or weekly emails from CMI.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
That’s a lot of money, given that the survey finds marketers in the U.S. average $108,380 per year, which is 3% less than the previous year.
So how do you get that 20%? Well, the best advice to get a huge increase like that is to switch jobs. Few companies will pay you 20% more in 2025 than they did in 2024 for the same work.
But that doesn’t mean you must accept what you’re earning now. You can take steps now. How can you ask for and get a realistic increase? Do your research. Prep the case and present it effectively.
Do external research
Just as you do for your content marketing, you should research the marketplace. What do others in similar roles in similar industries earn?
Fortunately, you live in an era of pay transparency laws and a global economy. California, Colorado, Connecticut, Maryland, Nevada, and many cities, including New York City, require companies to publish salary ranges in their job postings. In some cases, big companies now include salary ranges in all their postings, probably to ensure compliance with any potential law.
Search job postings on LinkedIn, industry job boards, and employment sites to learn what compensation is being offered. By using job postings, you can also better understand whether your responsibilities match, or are at least similar to, what the employer is requesting in the job posting.
From here, you can move on to salary benchmark reports. Though more general than individual job postings, they provide some cumulative, credible research.
As mentioned, CMI research finds that the average U.S. marketer earns $108,380 per year. But when configured for major urban centers, such as Boston and San Francisco, and all other locations, the numbers differ. The average rate in major urban centers is $122,265, while other locations have an average pay of $93,737.
When breaking down the salaries into roles, more differences appear. Directors and above earn an average of $146,901, while the average for managers is $102,914, and individual roles earn an average of $89,455.
Another option is to use the salary tool from the recruiting agency Creative Circle. When you select a job title and location, the tool reveals both the average pay and the desired salary, based on what candidates say they want. All the data comes from Creative Circle’s clients and job applicants.
Get ready internally
Of course, arguing you should get a raise because everybody else makes more money won’t get you anywhere.
You must get specific about your work situation and ask these questions:
Is my employer doing well? CMI’s research finds that 33% of marketers say their companies have laid people off in the last year. If that’s you, a raise isn’t likely unless your role has significantly expanded. However, if you’re in the majority that hasn’t seen a layoff, a raise could be possible.
How is content and marketing affecting the business? The bigger the impact of content and marketing on the bottom line, the better case you likely can make for a raise.
With the macro factors identified, you should now reflect on your role and work.
Nikola Baldikov, CEO and founder of Inbound Blogging, says it’s all about showing the difference you’ve made.
Start with clear examples of your achievements backed by measurable results. “These are the kinds of wins that connect your work directly with the company’s success. It’s important to highlight your determination to drive results,” Nikola says.
I suggest every employee create a bullet list. In this document, you paste positive feedback, metrics, and results from your work when you get them. That way, whenever you’re ready to argue for a salary increase (or update your resume), you can pull the most important and relevant bullets into your formal request.
Nikola notes that you shouldn’t forget to look to the future in your plea. Detail the new tools or skills, such as AI, that you’ve learned and show how they can help improve performance and bring more value to your role.
With that external, internal, and personal research, you’re almost ready to make the ask. But it’s helpful if you’ve already executed this next idea.
Build a bench of supporters
Steve Rose, a product manager and former vice president at Intent, offers a tip to help you prepare your case: “Aggressively cultivate your support base. Having someone else advocate for you can go a long way toward demonstrating your value.”
But don’t wait until the last minute. “Build these ties proactively over time,” Steve says. “If they’re comfortable, ask one or two of them to send a statement to your boss about your progress and improvement.”
Or if that seems too daunting, ask people with whom you work to provide recommendations on your LinkedIn profile and pull what you need later for your salary request.
Prepare for the conversation
Don’t make the ask for personal reasons; put the spotlight on the value you’ve added to the business, says Jay Egger, senior manager at SBG Funding.
“Also, understand that often your direct manager isn’t the only one making the decision, so the goal needs to be to make it easier for them to sell the decision,” Jay says.
Even a well-researched request can feel nerve-racking, so rehearse the conversation. “Most people tremble at approaching their boss about a wage boost, says Vaibhav Kakkar, CEO of Digital Web Solutions. He offers this prompt to get you started:
“As you’re aware, I just finished my (X) year with (organization). I am eager to continue working toward the company’s goals in my current position and expand my duties. On that basis, let’s talk about my pay.”
Don’t let the employer make an offer; make a specific request based on your research. Be realistic. If you have the same responsibilities, a 3% raise is typical. “Anything over 5% is remarkable,” Vaibhav says.
If your duties have expanded or the circumstances have changed (e.g., a job with minimal travel becomes a job with 50% travel), a higher rate of 10% to 20% might be possible, he says.
If you retain the same role and responsibilities but your research points to a wide gap between the average standard industry rate and your compensation, plan for a more extensive conversation. The industry gap likely exists for other roles, too. A significant change in your salary likely would lead your employer to need to address other underpaid positions as well.
Just remember not to make the request all about the past or even the current situation. “Share your vision for how you’ll continue to deliver results, whether it’s fresh ideas for campaigns or new ways to take on greater responsibility. Showing that you’re focused on the company’s future is a great way to strengthen your case,” Nikola says.
Also, know that your supervisor is unlikely to approve your request during your initial conversation. They may need to revisit their budget, reflect on what you’ve shared, or have a conversation with their boss.
So, at the end of the conversation, set follow-up expectations, says Adam Crossling, marketing and new business director at Zenzero.
Acknowledge you understand the supervisor likely can’t approve your request right that minute. Then, indicate that you’ll check in a week or two later. It’s one more way you can lead the process rather than take a sit-back-and-hope strategy.
Winning the raise and planning for the alternative
Allison Gagliardi, legal content director at PaperStreet Web Design, has a successful history in asking for salary bumps. At two previous employers, she asked for 10% raises during her annual reviews and got them.
How did she do it? She wrote a letter outlining her compensation request and listed her accomplishments to date in a bullet format. She signed the letter — with an actual pen – and put it in a two-pocket folder. In the other pocket, she included emails/letters from clients and co-workers singing her praises. “It’s proof they just can’t argue with,” Allison says.
Alllison advises all marketers requesting salary increases to have a response ready if the answer is no. Ask for additional paid time off, suggest a bonus for achieving a specific benchmark, get permission to bring a pet into the office on certain days, or ask for a standing desk, an improved title, a continuing education plan, or even control of the AC unit in your department (yes, for real).
Get ready for next time
If you don’t get the raise (or even if you do), Anthony Miyazaki, professor of marketing at Florida International University, offers three things to do (or keep doing) to ask for higher compensation, get promoted, or get hired.
Ramp up your training in consumer psychology. Understand how and when different types of persuasive appeals will work to nudge an audience in a certain direction.
Connect your work to marketing key performance indicators. You must understand marketing analytics and their role in determining the value of marketing efforts such as ad campaigns and content creation.
Combine your knowledge of marketing analytics and your human ability to create persuasive content to present convincing arguments, including compelling data visualizations, to decision-makers.
What do you think? Is now a good time to ask for a raise? How do you persuade your superiors? Let us know on social.
Updated from a November 2022 article.
If you’re hiring, send the details of your open position to [email protected], and we’ll add it to our Content Marketing Job Listings page.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
It hasn’t been an easy year, and I won’t be sad to say goodbye to 2024. I’m looking at 2025 as a complete reset and a time to focus on positivity, hope, and community.
Meanwhile, having just experienced the American Thanksgiving holiday, I’m struck by my gratitude for everything that happened (and even things that didn’t happen) this year.
What helped me get to this place? A simple check-in, where I ask myself, “What eyes am I judging this situation with?”
I won’t belabor all the options here. You’ll likely understand what I mean when I say we all have child’s eyes, adult’s eyes, cynical eyes, the ego’s eyes, etc.
I’ve made it a habit to ask which lens is coloring my judgment in any situation. Then, I try on my lens of gratitude.
Understanding the gratitude assignment
Traveling home on a cross-country flight recently, I had an unusual experience. As my fellow passengers and I waited for the flight to take off, we listened to the usual dings, dongs, and announcements.
Then, the pilot came walking down the aisle, introducing himself to everyone. Every single person.
When he got to the business travel veteran in seat 3C, he joked about commuting 2,500 miles. When he got to the nervous woman in seat 10A, he reassured her that today’s flight would be smooth and uneventful. When he got to the family with the crying toddler, he offered some baby talk, some comforting words, and a piece of candy.
When the captain passed my seat on his way back to the cockpit, I asked whether he does this on every flight.
He said, “You know, people either hate our company or love it based on many things that I have no control over. My crew and I play such a tiny part that it would be easy to do less. Nobody would notice. But we do what we do anyway. I’m happier if my crew, my passengers, and I all have a great experience. Having gratitude for all of it makes the job better.”
His outlook made me think of my grandfather, who used to ask me, “What experience did you create for someone today?” This question was his way of teaching me that when you create a positive experience for another person, you get to experience that positivity, too.
This captain and his crew were a living testament to that idea.
All the usual trappings of the flight experience were still there: The usual entreaty to apply for the partner’s credit card, the standard brand content from both automated systems (the preflight instruction video) and real live humans.
But by looking through the lens of gratitude, the pilot and crew created the best experience they could for others, creating a better experience for themselves.
‘We get to’ (it’s a privilege)
This lesson applies to marketers, too. In a year like the one we’ve all been through, a lot of things feel like a series of “we have tos.” We have to finish phase two of the marketing plan. We have to create another thought leadership piece. We have to get our act together to measure our impact.
But what if you switch that lens to “we get to” instead? “I have to write my column for CMI this week” becomes, “I get to write this column every week.”
That’s how I feel.
You may sometimes feel that the experiences your content or marketing create are a drop in the ocean of the overall customer experience. No matter what you do, your company will probably get some excellent ratings and some not-so-great ratings.
People may hate some of your campaigns. People may love some of your other campaigns. Either way, there’s always room for improvement. Your work is never “done.”
You always have a choice. You can do your job by the book, resigned to the notion that any experience you create has a minuscule effect.
Or you can commit to creating remarkable experiences, one after the other, and feel gratitude for getting to do that.
I promise there’s a difference.
The lens of gratitude
Gratitude is an extraordinary lens at work in our personal relationships. If you look at conflicts and community you create through a lens of gracious gratitude, then you get to:
Create that next great business strategy or brand
Code your next project
Visit with friends at dinner
Argue over politics at dinner
Even that last one becomes a privilege.
In its own way, gratitude represents evolutionary change and — yes — hope. You may or may not like the direction or the source. You may feel discouraged and appalled over the anger it can incite. But you can still be grateful that it causes us to think or act differently.
I’m deeply grateful for my family, my friends, my colleagues, my clients, and all the people I get to interact with every day.
But I’m also grateful for all those I don’t know, who I don’t like, and who may never realize the impact (good or bad) they’ve had on me.
I’m reminded of this quote from Nobel Peace Prize winner Albert Schweitzer: “I always think that we all live, spiritually, by what others have given us in the significant hours of our life.”
What remarkable experience will you create tomorrow?
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
You can access a wealth of marketing-related data — from web analytics and customer journey behavior to competitor analysis and product usage.
However, if the data isn’t clean, you can’t truly tap into its value. Or worse, you could steer your marketing in the wrong direction and see diminishing returns.
James Hunt, principal consultant at Vivanti, says data cleaning and modeling are essential to extract value and gain knowledge and wisdom from the information. In his presentation at the Marketing Analytics & Data Science Conference, he details why it’s necessary, the basics of data cleaning, and the role of governance and observability.
What is data modeling?
Data models turn data into something useful, and you need to understand data modeling so you can understand the best cleaning options. James explains that data modeling involves three parts — additive, context, and domain.
Additive means you let the machines figure out how to standardize the data. You don’t manually “fix” the data, such as lowercasing the sporadic all-cap names on a spreadsheet. That would actually be data destruction because, as James says, “As humans, we’re really bad at doing the same thing twice.”
Context organizes the data to tell a story. You don’t add new information; you impute the existing data. For example, the context of a sales transaction could include the marketing emails the buyer saw, the social media content the buyer engaged with, and the other products they viewed.
Domain is the set of all possible data values for a given element. It can be qualitative and quantitative. James points to these five common domain types:
Identity — a unique value that distinctly and discretely pinpoints somebody, such as an email address, Social Security number, or customer ID
Nominative — a supplemental identity not strong enough to stand on its own, such as a person’s full name or a product name
Categorical — a grouping across arbitrary boundaries, such as customer type or industry; often used for cohort subdivision
Monetary — the currency which can be compared, ordered, aggregated, and disaggregated, such as order total or unit price
Temporal — a point or span of dates and times, such as sign-up date, last purchase date, or loyalty period
With this foundational understanding of modeling, you’re ready to learn about cleaning the data.
What types of data cleaning exist?
James details the three types of data cleaning — mechanical, explicit mappings, and patterns and rules:
With mechanical cleaning, the data is cleaned up without changing the meaning of the information, such as normalizing the case for names and removing unnecessary spaces. “These are all things that I can do all by myself as a data engineer that nobody gets mad (about),” James says. “Nobody says, ‘Well, you took the spaces out of their first name, so it’s a different person.”
Explicit mapping uses an activity called “cardinality reduction” to decrease the number of unique values associated with an attribute. It simplifies the dataset by grouping values while retaining the relevant information. These datasets are more manageable and can improve model performance.
For example, James says, perhaps a customer status field started with two values — active and inactive. Over time, the field expanded to include suspended, on-hold, and prospective options. An explicit mapping cleaning might move the “suspended” customer status into the “active” value.
A cleaning for patterns and rules identifies and corrects inconsistencies, inaccuracies, or errors in the data based on identifiable structures (i.e., patterns) and constraints (i.e., rules).
Standard patterns encompass data like email addresses, date strings, and phone numbers. Deviations from that structure indicate data that needs to be cleaned.
Rules refer to logical conditions or constraints. So, for example, if the monetary data for an insurance policy exceeds its maximum value, the entry needs to be cleaned.
James says you also can set rules and patterns to map the customer journey. Let’s say a brand doesn’t care how many times a person opens and clicks its email. Instead, it cares about identifying who is susceptible to purchasing from an email marketing campaign. It could set up rules to clean the data for that goal.
For example, all emails sent would be labeled “E”, and all clicks would be labeled “C”, while an order would be recognized as “O.” Those rules collapse the data so it’s most helpful for the brand and its marketing goals.
What is governance’s role in data cleaning?
“Anytime you are cleaning data, you are making a decision. You are deciding what is relevant; you are deciding what is important. You’re deciding what to keep and what to surface,” James says.
You must document those data-cleaning decisions in an internal repository, such as a spreadsheet, or use a version control system like the open-source Git.
Each decision should answer these four questions:
What decision was made?
When was it made? This point-in-time reference helps with historical analysis.
Who made the decision?
Why was this decision made? It’s helpful to inform future actions. For example, if the decision was made because of a government update, reversing it probably isn’t possible. But, if the decision was made because the data team thought it was a better way to do it, reversing course may remain a viable option, James says.
Let’s go back to the example of collapsing the customer status fields so the “suspended” status was grouped into “active” customers. Here’s how that decision might be recorded:
“Customers with ‘suspended status’ are still considered active as of Oct. 22, 2024. The decision was made by James Hunt because a mapping analysis showed customer behaviors can best be assessed by active or inactive status.”
Humans are essential to the governance process, James says. Computer-generated algorithms can suggest data-cleaning steps, but a human should be in the loop to review the suggestions and approve or reject them.
What is observability?
Even after you set up rules and patterns to ensure clean data, some data will run afoul of those parameters. Instead of letting this data through or cleaning it up automatically, you should embrace observability, which James says is 10 times more important than governance.
Surfacing the metadata of your data cleaning might look like this example from a client of James’. The data-cleaning rules set a lower limit on policy sizes to catch bad data. It worked well for about six months until a policy entered the system with a limit below the one set in the rules.
James flagged this record and then asked the client, “Do you want us to adjust the limit?” The client said yes, and the lower limit data rule was updated.
“We caught that through the observability loop by saying, ‘This is what we expect the data to look like. It didn’t look like that when we were cleaning it. We weren’t comfortable making that decision (without client input). And that’s what observability is going to get you,” James says.
Having the right observability practices can save you hours, days, weeks, months, and a whole lot of embarrassment, he notes.
Are you ready to pursue data cleaning?
Now that you’ve learned about data modeling, cleaning, governance, and observability, you are ready to apply them to your marketing if you have:
Datasets where the integrity of data is not pristine or perfect
Datasets with a high number of unique values (i.e., for which cardinality reduction can help processing and analysis)
Where would you find that data? It could come from a multitude of sources, such as:
CRM platforms
Customer contact records
Customer questionnaires and feedback forms
Survey responses
Web analytics
Customer behaviors
Product or platform information
Competitor analyses
Start with the ones that would most benefit from one or more of the three types of data cleaning, proper governance, and observability. Then, you can decide whether to engage with data teams in your organization to assist.
MADS 2024 is over, but you can still experience all the learning and inspiration. A Digital Pass gives you access to recordings of the keynote talk by Seth Stephens-Davidowitz and in-depth sessions from Etsy’s Vishwa Bhuta, Google’s Suraj Rajdev, ReflexAI’s John Callery-Coyne, and many other experts. Register for a MADS Digital Pass today to make every minute of access count — access expires on January 31, 2025. (Don’t forget to use code DAA200 to save $200).
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
It’s Thanksgiving Day in the United States, when you try to leave work behind, put aside petty squabbles, and be present with the people you care about (at least until the post-meal nap attacks hit).
Of course, not everyone observes the same holiday traditions or shares the same good fortune. But finding ways to recognize and relate to others’ authentic experiences is what great content marketing is all about.
In that spirit, I’ve gathered some holiday marketing and content examples that capture the essence of this day, including some winners and top finalists at this year’s Content Marketing Awards. As you fill your plate, save room for these tasty treats.
Sharing a meal
Food is the official Thanksgiving love language. Whether you’re in charge of cooking or just plan to consume, marketers serve up plenty of content to prepare you for a fulfilling experience.
Turkey may be the star of the Thanksgiving show, but another farm-sourced dish deserves second billing: pumpkin pie. To share the origin story behind the unofficial flavor of fall, Nestlé Professional LIBBY’S®️ Pumpkin created Libby’s in the Field.
This content-rich microsite features an immersive virtual-reality experience, From Our Fields to Your Kitchen. It aims to help the brand’s target audience of operator partners and suppliers better understand its agricultural process, from seed cultivation to picking, processing, and packaging the produce for wholesale distribution.
At each step, clicked hot spots reveal compelling visuals, video interviews with farmers and agriculture experts, and details on the company’s sustainability practices.
The powerful educational tool highlights the brand’s core values of sustainability, land stewardship, and farmer relationships. Its innovative application of VR technology put the campaign on the finalist list for the 2024 Content Marketing Award for Best Use of Technology.
ADVERTISEMENT
Learn How a CMS
Can Simplify Your Content Strategy
New to content management? Perplexed about organizing your brand’s content? Learn how a CMS (Content Management System) simplifies creating, organizing, and sharing content—all in one place. Gain valuable tips, tools, and insights.
Start Learning
Traveling the highways and byways
The Thanksgiving holiday includes some of the busiest travel days of the year. Great content might not always save you from the stress of getting to where you’re going, but it can help pass the time in transit and remind you of the joyful experiences that await once you arrive.
Marriott: The Power of Travel
On Thanksgiving, travel plans typically involve a return to familiar spaces and faces. But journeys to unexpected places are often the most memorable — and some can be downright transformational.
In its streaming video series The Power of Travel, Marriott Bonvoy explores the idea of travel as a catalyst for meaningful change. Each short film shares the story of an inspirational individual striving to create a sense of belonging and expand people’s horizons.
As you might expect from a travel brand, the films feature stunning natural landscapes and spotlight exotic locations where Marriott operates. But its focus on fostering community while far from home makes the content series a standout and a finalist for the Content Marketing Award for Best Motivational Video or Video series.
For example, on their first-ever trip to Puerto Rico, Zi Donnya Piggott talks about how they founded the travel platform Pink Coconuts to help connect LGBTQ+ travelers with queer-friendly spaces worldwide (video above). In another film, The World in a Glass, sommelier Tahiirah Habibi discusses a trip to South Africa that led her to create the first international chapter of The Hue Society, an organization advocating for increased inclusivity in the wine industry.
Connecting with friends and family
Thanksgiving is a time to gather with those you care about and turn to in times of need. It’s also a reminder of how complex human relationships can be, whether they manifest around the dinner table, in front of the TV, or through the screens of digital devices.
Peloton: Find Your Push, Find Your Power
Many people aspire to maintain healthy habits during the holidays, but those intentions can go out the window in the face of a Thanksgiving feast. Similarly, you might vow to keep the conversation civil during dinner, yet a triggering topic overwhelms your resolve.
Peloton ran with the concept of friendly family rivalries for a new campaign to increase its appeal among men fitness enthusiasts. The video features big-name NFL stars — and real-life brothers — T.J. and J.J. Watt. The siblings bring their competitive edge to their personal workouts. Each pushes to outperform the other until the Peloton coach calls a timeout. However, as they settle on the couch to power down, a text from their mother spurs them to jump back onto their machines for another run.
Giving back
Showing gratitude is admirable. Paying it forward by supporting those in need and contributing to the greater good is even better. Stellar content efforts can further those philanthropic ideals by bringing them to life through storytelling.
Bill and Melinda Gates Foundation: Partners of Human Potential
The Bill and Melinda Gates Foundation had an awareness problem. While the public may have heard of the philanthropic organization, few outside its target list of academics, policymakers, and nonprofit leaders were familiar with its work, mission, and impact.
To close that knowledge gap, the foundation teamed up with the agency Message Lab to create Partners of Human Potential as part of a large-scale branding initiative. Each of the five full-length feature articles with an accompanying sizzle reel and images profiles an organization supported by the foundation and the people who have benefited from its work.
The stories span the globe, from students in New Orleans empowered to turn their dreams into academic and career success to water-saving sanitation technology in South Africa that increased school attendance.
In addition to illustrating the foundation’s impact on individuals, the series truly shines by showing the interconnected nature of its work. For example, in the intro video above, a narrator describes how a novel neonatal care technique inspired by kangaroos helped significantly reduce infant mortality rates in India and will soon be implemented worldwide.
The campaign made an impressive impact on the foundation’s marketing goals, according to Message Lab. It also drew admiration from the 2024 Content Marketing Award judges, who named it the winner in three categories: Best Feature Article, Best Series of Articles, and Best Interview or Profile.
Bargain hunting on Black Friday
While some choose to sleep off the carb overload after dinner, others prefer to get a jump-start on their holiday shopping. For those in the latter group, marketers are standing by to help them discover the perfect present for everyone on their list.
Etsy: Waldo Anthem
It’s hard for small retailers to compete with massive marketplaces like Amazon. But Etsy steals its share of shoppers’ attention by promoting its signature strength: a community of creators who craft customized products that satisfy virtually any niche interest. This bespoke gifting expertise is highlighted in Waldo Anthem, Etsy’s first ad of the 2024 holiday season.
If you’re looking to stand out in a crowd, there’s no better star for your ad than Waldo — the bespectacled bloke who’s easy to spot in his signature red-and-white striped outfit. In the video above, Wally (as he calls himself) wanders through a holiday market, smiling graciously at the shoppers who spot him. Yet, he laments, most are more interested in learning where Wally is than who he is.
As he arrives in a cafe, a friend, also dressed in red and white stripes, demonstrates she’s the exception. She presents him with a custom-made compass inscribed, “I’m glad I found you.” It’s a touching moment that reflects Etsy’s unique value proposition and speaks to the power of personalized connections — something content marketers can undoubtedly relate to.
Malls were invented because people loved the convenience of one-stop shopping. However, when their online retailer of choice is Amazon-sized, they can browse for days and still not find what they’re looking for.
To make its gift-buying experience more manageable, Amazon has launched a whimsical virtual-reality simulation of a high-end holiday emporium. The brand’s Virtual Holiday Shop experience features familiar brick-and-mortar Christmas mainstays — visually appealing product displays, merry background music, and festive decorations. But instead of expecting shoppers to do the standard search-and-scroll thing, Amazon has curated collections of trending products organized into categories like beauty, tech, toys, and stocking stuffers.
Visitors can zip around the shop and zoom in on items that catch their eye. And unlike a physical storefront, shoppers don’t have to wait for a sales associate to answer their questions or stand in long holiday lines. Clicking on a product in the virtual display opens a detailed description and the ability to add it to the shopping cart.
Find fulfillment — no matter how you define it
From the CMI team to yours, we hope you find time to relax this holiday season so you can return refreshed and ready to create content experiences your audience can’t wait to dig into.
Want more content marketing tips, insights, and examples? Subscribe to workday or weekly emails from CMI.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
At a conference last week, the CEO of a professional services firm asked me about some advice they’d received from a marketing consultant.
The consultant urged the company to overhaul its messaging to focus on its team’s passion for what it does. According to the advice, even major client pitches should start with that message.
“Ahhh,” I said. “They want you to start your message with ‘your why.’”
“Yes,” the CEO nodded. “That’s exactly it. So, what do you think?”
I smiled and replied, “Well, if we’re starting with ‘why,’ my answer is why you should not take that advice.”
Whose why matters more?
That consultant isn’t the only one out there talking about using “your why” as the anchor of your brand’s story. So many articles tout the advice to “know your why” that the phrase is now a marketing cliché.
And, yes, this one talks about it, too.
But I think the advice to start with “know your why” steers marketers wrong.
The idea of finding the “why” behind what you do caught on almost a dozen years ago due to Simon Sinek’s book Start With Why and the accompanying Ted Talk.
From a marketing and brand lens, Sinek’s idea was simple: He claimed, “People don’t buy what you do; they buy why you do it.” Therefore, he suggested, brands should start their positioning with their why.
Sinek subsequently pulled back from the brand-positioning why in his follow-up work, Find Your Why: A Practical Guide for Discovering Purpose for You and Your Team. That book focuses on how people (not brands) can find their unique purpose to motivate their actions. I believe this is the much more useful purpose for his why framework.
Still, the advice to find the brand’s why before creating content became the rallying cry of many agencies and consultants in brand storytelling.
Here’s the problem: Most people outside your brand don’t care about your why.
And even if they do, that’s not why they purchase from you. And it’s not an effective way to differentiate from your organization’s competitors.
The challenge of why-based brand stories
Let’s be honest. Most businesses don’t start with (or stick with) some fantastic, world-changing why.
Even some of Sinek’s original examples never really took this approach. Brands conveniently reverse-engineered their why to fit a brand narrative.
For example, that famous Ted Talk opens with Apple’s why as a success story: “In everything we do, we believe in challenging the status quo. We believe in thinking differently.”
As Sinek pointed out, that statement inspired Apple’s successful Think Different campaign, which ran from 1997 to 2002.
But by 2010, when Sinek published his book and gave his Ted Talk, Apple had long moved on from Think Different to Get A Mac.
That campaign featured John Hodgman (personifying a PC) and Justin Long (as a Mac) talking about how the Mac platform made things like creating photobooks and listening to music easier.
It certainly didn’t support the idea of “challenging the status quo” and “thinking differently.” Instead of focusing on Apple’s why, the ads explain how what the product does connects to why potential customers would want it.
This ad does what Sinek says every company’s content does — it focuses on features and benefits (while showing how it helps potential customers).
In fact, one might argue that it’s simply a funnier copycat of Google’s “Dear Sydney” ad fail.
Did Apple forget how to do marketing? Did the company forget its why?
No.
Apple didn’t discover its why and then change its business to match. It came to understand its customers’ whys. Then it clarified what (emphasis intended) business it was really in (making “life stuff” easy) and how to communicate it.
Understanding your brand’s why is important.
But (not to get too meta here) knowing your customers’ why matters more for marketing and content development.
Match your why to your customers’ why to differentiate with content
I see situations like the one the CEO described to me all the time. Teams craft messages to convey their brand’s why without connecting it to their customers’ why.
Frustration sets in when the reactions to their ideas sound like this: “But do customers want any of that?”
It was that it made a creative bet that its customers would see themselves in those iconoclastic figures. The Apple campaign didn’t say, “We think different.” It said, “You think different.”
Businesses still struggle to create content that truly differentiates. But it’s not because they don’t understand how to discover their why. Many books and workshops exist to help brands do that.
It’s because they believe the brand’s why should dictate what they do.
Your brand’s why only matters if it defines why you do what you do and how that connects to things customers care about. But you can’t stop there.
You must still convince customers to love what you do and how you do it.
How to come up with your customers’ whys
One of the techniques I use to go from “tactical idea” to “larger purpose” is a classic exercise built on the foundation of the 5 Whys exercise from the Six Sigma problem-solving technique.
Here’s how it works. First, come up with content marketing ideas (in a group or by yourself). The ideas may look something like this:
Launch a social media effort to educate prospects on using the kind of product we sell.
Position our firm/brand as a thought leader in the space.
Create a white paper or video series on the business benefits of the kind of service we provide.
Use a blogging platform to curate industry news to position ourselves as thought leaders.
Then, take one of the ideas and ask why five times. That will help you understand the true purpose behind that idea and how it fits into your larger story. (By the way, this example comes from an actual workshop for a B2B company.)
Let’s try it with the “curate news” idea.
Starting idea: Use a blog platform to curate news from our industry to position us as thought leaders.
1. Why is curating news to position us as thought leaders important to our customers?
Because our customers will see that we have our finger on the pulse of the business and a point of view on the industry.
2. Why is it important that customers see that we have our finger on the pulse and have a point of view on the industry?
Because our customers and prospects will have more trust in what we say.
3. Why is it important to our customers and prospects to have more trust in what we say?
Because developments in our industry are changing quickly and our customers need a trusted partner to keep them up to date.
4. Why do customers need a trusted partner to keep them up to date with what’s going on in the industry?
Because they are busy trying to succeed, a trusted partner can help them be informed.
5. Why is it important for our customers’ success to be informed?
Because if our customers are properly informed about the industry, they will be more competitive — and more successful.
Well, isn’t that interesting?
Within five whys, we’ve gone from a blog focused on “positioning us as thought leaders” to a platform that “helps our customers be more competitive and successful.”
Go back and read the answers in reverse, and you have a why to motivate you and your team.
I did a similar exercise with the CEO of the professional services firm. We worked through an exercise to identify how their point of view matched solving their client’s why.
The answer to the why is “to have the client’s business be more forward-leaning in technology.” But this doesn’t get to the core value.
When we got to the fifth why, we discovered that the client’s answer is “to provide stable employment for their employees, support their family, and create a legacy that lasts beyond their tenure.”
This matched the CEO’s point of view about how their services could help future-proof small and medium-sized businesses. But now they had something much more interesting to hang their hat on rather than saying, “I’m passionate about helping businesses become cutting edge technologically.”
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Connecting the whys
You’ve probably heard the advice, “Do what you love. The money will follow.” That advice encapsulates why it’s important to understand your own why.
But for content creators and marketers working for a brand, I suggest this tweak: “When your audience loves what you love to do, the money will follow.”
Matching your brand’s why to your audiences’ and customers’ why sets you on the path to convincing them to love what you love to do. And that’s how your brand will find success in whatever it loves to do.
You can learn so much more from the voices of experience in content marketing. To subscribe to the daily or weekly updates, visit www.News.ContentInstitute.com/Subscriptions or click the orange subscribe button at the top of any page.
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
On the other hand, Threads and Bluesky have seen an astronomical rise in new accounts. Bluesky says its user base is now over 15 million and Instagram head Adam Mosseri of Meta says Threads has now surpassed 275 million monthly active users. That activity falls somewhere between 60% and 65% of activity on X, and it’s only expected to grow.
What does this mean for marketing?
Should you and your brand join Bluesky or build a brand page on Threads?
We asked CMI’s chief strategy advisor, Robert Rose, for his take. Read on or watch this video:
Users are flying the X coop
Call it the great flight from birds to butterflies — the growing migration of celebrities, influencers, and major organizations leaving X for the rising social media platform Bluesky.
Actors, directors, musicians, journalists, and now brands, agencies, and marketing strategies are increasingly turning their backs on X, citing concerns over hate speech, harassment, bots, and controversial artificial intelligence policies under its owner, Elon Musk.
Just last week, the Guardian media group, which includes The Guardian newspaper, joined the exodus, labeling X a “toxic media platform.” Earlier this month, the Berlin Film Festival announced its departure. They join NPR, which left X in April 2023, and brands like 3M, UnitedHealth Group, and Best Buy, which have retained their accounts but haven’t posted in years. And then, there are the brands that have pulled their advertising or quit X altogether, including Apple, IBM, and Disney.
A new independent network, Bluesky, is the refuge for X escapees. In recent weeks, the upstart platform has seen explosive growth, with over 1 million users joining in a single day and total users surpassing 15 million. Its app tops the download charts for both Apple and Google’s app stores.
Threads, Meta’s answer to X, had huge numbers when it launched in 2023, making it the fastest-growing social media network in history. In the last few weeks, it has experienced another surge of new accounts.
Should you expect a resurgence in organic content marketing and branding on these new microblogging, text-focused platforms, just like you had on Twitter back in the day?
Well, no. Let me explain.
I don’t think this activity is all about X.
Is this the start of a new microblogging era?
The days of brands setting up shop on these platforms and trying to create a constant stream of great content that engages, entertains, or educates a large audience for organic traction are gone.
That’s not to say brands should forego customer service channels on these platforms or ignore making their name claims. (On Bluesky, you can use your domain as your handle.)
I also suspect influencers on these recently popular platforms can help with the organic amplification of brand voices.
But in its heyday, the goal of microblogging was to build a channel of news, entertainment, or some harnessed brand voice that attracted engagement, shares, and subscriptions. These channels evolved to become newsfeeds for celebrities, journalists, and others reporting information, and I think that’s where microblogging will stay for at least the short term.
Yes, the big news will be people — mostly people with a bit of a brand — flocking to Bluesky, Threads, and other non-X microblogging sites to communicate directly with their fans. But I see no strong argument for brands to put that level of effort into the same.
Instead, marketers might do better in finding who — the CEO, the CMO, or all the sales folk — can speak through the voice of the brand. On LinkedIn, for example, I see many brands exist to amplify their human voices, reposting what the people are posting.
Could this organic social media, especially microblogging, be the strategy of the future? Possibly. Maybe microblogging will go back to its roots as a way for people to just quickly share and connect with one another.
As for organic social media marketing itself, the focus is on long-form and valuable. Perhaps it is really focused on video platforms like TikTok, Reels, YouTube, and others, where it’s less about connection and collaboration and much more about content consumption.
Social media will certainly be an interesting space to follow.
Want more content marketing tips, insights, and examples? Subscribe to workday or weekly emails from CMI.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
Every year, the Content Marketing Institute asks the community to share their opinions on the best books in marketing (and for marketers). Often, the titles ring familiar. After all, many people have a favorite and don’t sway from it year after year.
That’s why this year’s list surprised me. It includes 17 books new to CMI lists (though most aren’t new releases).
Most books that received recommendations this year delve into marketing topics (writing, social media, storytelling, and content strategy). But several recommendations cover more general topics (like friction, the psychology of persuasion, Excel, and lost customers).
We’ve organized the list by topics, with the books recommended this year appearing first and picks from past years below them.
Thanks to all for helping create the ultimate book list for marketers and content pros. Maybe you’ll find a gift idea for someone on your team.
Description: Using real-world and imagined examples, this practical guide supports you through the content design process one step at a time. This second edition includes updated case studies and a new chapter on journey mapping.
Recommended by Teresa Lee, content manager, Datos: It is the bible of content creation. It’s relevant not just for content writers but for everyone who deals with content (which is pretty much everyone) and practices what it preaches: The book has a unique, clear, and user-friendly design.
Description: The content itself is one part of content marketing, but in many respects, it is not the most important. Before you start thinking about what types of content you need to create, you need to lay the groundwork. Think of this as the edge of the puzzle that holds the whole picture together.
Recommended by Robbie Schneider, director of U.S. communications, Health Tech Without Borders: It’s an easy, actionable read.
Description: This book shows how to succeed by taking a simplified yet strategic approach to standing out and driving revenue impact. It covers time-proven strategies to create video, audio, social media, and longer-form content that audiences will actually want to consume and how to do so in a genuinely inclusive way.
Recommended by Dashnor Dosku, Realtor: It explains the ins and outs of the marketing industry. It is an excellent book to read.
Description: Every organization is plagued by destructive friction. Yet some forms of friction are incredibly useful, and leaders who attempt to improve workplace efficiency often make things even worse. Drawing from seven years of hands-on research, bestselling authors Robert I. Sutton and Huggy Rao teach readers how to become “friction fixers.”
Recommended by Sarah Mitchell, founder, Typeset: The whole book is good, but I wish every marketer would read chapter seven on “jargon monoxide.” The authors call out the four types of jargon muddying our language (in mildly NSFW terms) and offer advice for making writing more constructive. I’m on a mission to make the world a better place for readers everywhere, and this book helps.
Description: This book takes a different approach to learning Excel. It’s about bringing the detective mindset to it, of approaching with curiosity rather than terror. It offers a practical way to tackle Excel learning and to work on your mindset as you go through it.
Recommended by Carrie Eddins, owner, The Blondepreneur Ltd.: It’s funny (Anne’s Irish and has a sharp wit) and uses stories to share how to find a way through the cells. It’s genius.
Description: It is not the high customer satisfaction itself that is the problem. It is what those metrics (that data) might not tell you that’s the issue. Discover how understanding the distinction between customers and users can reshape your business strategies.
Recommended by Carrie Eddins, owner, The Blondepreneur Ltd.: It shares perceptive and much-needed insights to help us all understand our customer journey on a whole other level. It’s so clever.
Description: This book provides these professionals with a practical guide to managing their mental health and building resilience in the face of constant pressures and online negativity.
Recommended by Robbie Schneider, book’s author and director of U.S. communications, Health Tech Without Borders: Even if you don’t work in the social space full time, understanding the societal context we’re working in and taking steps to improve internal processes and communications is essential for marketing teams.
Description: In a world where trust is scarce, and competition is rampant, this book emerges as the essential guide for expert business owners navigating the murky waters of the expertise economy. It offers not just hope but tangible strategies to transform your business from overlooked to overbooked.
Recommended by Carrie Eddins, owner, The Blondepreneur Ltd.: It shares how to remain relevant and become a highly sought-after and trusted expert. And who doesn’t want that with what’s happening now?
Description: The popular speaker and strategist presents a simple program for “taking the stairs” — resisting the temptations of “quick fixes,” eliminating distractions, and transcending personal setbacks to reach your goals.
Recommended by Hannah Szabo, marketing director, Digital Brand Kit: One that surprised me. It’s a New York Times bestseller from 2012. While it doesn’t speak exclusively to marketing, it challenged my rushed, overly anxious approach to marketing.
Description: The seminal expert in the field of influence and persuasion explains the psychology of why people say yes and how to apply these principles ethically in business and everyday situations.
Recommended by Hannah Szabo, marketing director, Digital Brand Kit: There’s a reason this book is a marketing staple. If you haven’t read it yet (or twice), *hint, hint, nudge, nudge.*
Description: This book shows how to apply behavioral science principles in key areas of marketing, including marketing communications, email, direct mail, ad campaigns, social media marketing, and sales funnel conversion strategies. Highly practical and accessible, it includes case studies and examples from AT&T, Apple, Spotify, and The Wall Street Journal, showing how these approaches have been used in practice.
Recommended by Daniel Paulling, director of communications and publications, U.S. Masters Swimming: The book is brilliant.
Description: This book is a succinct distillation of wisdom gained from over two decades of boots-on-the-ground work in public relations and marketing. Using her signature no-nonsense style, Garrett crafts her own experience and stories from experts in the field into down-to-earth takeaways you can apply instantly. By following her smart blueprints, you’ll be able to smoothly navigate frustrations working with reporters, ethical dilemmas, and budgetary constraints, all while rocketing toward success.
Recommended by Ann Gynn, editorial consultant, Content Marketing Institute: B2B brands aren’t always as into PR as their B2C counterparts. And yet, it’s an invaluable tool, particularly for B2B content. This easy-to-read book walks you through the path from the why to the how and what now.
Description: Kivi Leroux Miller reveals what she’s learned from coaching hundreds of nonprofit communications directors and teams. Effective nonprofit communication is about much more than list targeting, relevant messaging, email open rates, and social media scheduling. The most successful communications directors and teams are those who are CALM — collaborative, agile, logical, and methodical.
Recommended by Rhea Landholm, communications manager, Center for Rural Affairs: Whenever I need to check myself, I pick this one up. Nonprofit marketers (and probably for-profit marketers) tend to work long hours and say “yes” because they believe in the mission and want to drive it forward. When I find myself working at 10 p.m. or even telling people I’m too busy for this, too busy for that, I think of what Kivi says in this book: Don’t make yourself a martyr. Be CALM.
Description: Pixar movies have transfixed viewers around the world and stirred a hunger in creative and corporate realms to adopt new and more impactful ways of telling stories. A former Pixar and The Simpsons animator and story artist translates his two-and-a-half decades of storytelling techniques and concepts to the CEOs, advertisers, marketers, and creatives in the business world and beyond.
Recommended by Emma Lieberman, director of content marketing, Impact Networking: The author worked as a creative at Pixar, is deeply familiar with the craft, and does a great job clearly and concisely showing how to use story techniques from filmmaking in business. Plus, it’s filled with fun stories from his career that are, unsurprisingly, beautifully structured and told.
Description: For a quarter century, more than a million readers — scribes and scribblers of all ages and abilities — have been inspired by Anne Lamott’s hilarious, big-hearted, homespun advice. Advice that begins with the simple words of wisdom passed down from Anne’s father — also a writer — in the iconic passage that gives the book its title.
Recommended by Adam P. Newton, copywriter and content manager, NRG Energy: A classic recommendation for writers, this book should be pored over by marketers looking to re-examine how and why they tell stories, especially when it comes to drafting, revisions, clarity, and purpose.
Description: The book guides readers through the Story Cycle System to craft their overarching brand narrative, a process that has grown business by as much as 600%. Recommended by Chris Inman, president, I.D.E.A. Cleveland: What got me was the whole hook of what he discusses and how creating that brand storytelling can guide you through some of your marketing content — particularly video/podcasting, which I help businesses create.
Description: Your brain burns with a powerful idea worth sharing. Could writing a business book spread that idea, create real change, and launch your career on the path to visibility and influence? Definitely. But don’t start by piling up words. Instead, focus on the story. What urgent problem does your reader face? How can they solve it? And what journey must your readers take as you guide them from confusion to understanding, action, and success?
Recommended by Michelle Garrett, founder, Garrett Public Relations: If you’re writing a business book, this is a good read.
Description: The StoryBrand process is a proven solution to the struggle business leaders face when talking about their companies. If you don’t have a clear, distinct message, customers will not understand what you can do for them and are unwilling to engage, causing you to lose potential sales, opportunities for customer engagement, and much more.
Recommended by Ali Orlando Wert, senior director of content strategy, Appfire: Your customers don’t want to hear about your features and functions; they want to be invited into a story where they are the hero! If you nail this story (your positioning and messaging), it will dramatically improve your content marketing strategy and efforts.
Description: This practical guide combines the science and art of story to help you influence the change you need to see. It’s a proven framework that makes ideas sustainable, adaptable, and unforgettable.
Recommended by Carrie Eddins, owner, The Blondepreneur Ltd.: It offers practical ways to make your ideas and you unforgettable; truly worth its weight in gold right now and heading into 2025.
Description: DataStory teaches you the most effective ways to turn your data into narratives that blend the power of language, numbers, and graphics. This book is not about visualizing data. Instead, you’ll learn how to transform numbers into narratives to drive action.
Recommended by Penny Gralewski, vice president of marketing, Rimo3: Whether you’re explaining data to a large customer base or a small leadership team, this book helps you develop a story that moves your audience. Agency contacts always hear me ask, “How can this be more Duarte-like?”
Description: A hands-on field guide to consistently creating page-turning content your audience loves (and that delivers real results). The updated edition of Everybody Writes delivers all the practical, how-to advice and insight you need for the process and strategy of content creation, production, and publishing.
Recommended by Michelle Garrett, founder, Garrett Public Relations: I always recommend Ann Handley’s Everybody Writes, which is so helpful no matter where you find yourself in your business writing journey.
Description: A singular and brilliant elucidation of literary strategies, it also brings high spirits and wit to its original conclusions. It is a liberating manifesto that says, Let’s leave the outdated modes behind and, in thinking of new modes, bring feeling back to experimentation. It will appeal to serious readers and writers alike.
Recommended by Adam P. Newton: This remarkable and clear-eyed book provides exquisite tips and fresh perspectives for authentic creative work. It’s an essential resource for marketers, whether you think of yourself as a writer or simply want to improve how you use language to improve your communication.
Description: Immensely helpful and illuminating to any aspiring writer, this special edition of Stephen King’s critically lauded, million-copy bestseller shares the experiences, habits, and convictions that have shaped him and his work. Part memoir, part master class by one of the bestselling authors of all time, this superb volume is a revealing and practical view of the writer’s craft, comprising the basic tools of the trade every writer must have.
Recommended by Michelle Garrett, founder, Garrett Public Relations: I recommend it for anyone who writes as part of their role. The stories told in the book are enough reason to read it, but the practical advice he provides to spice up your writing is also something I think of often.
Also recommended by:Robbie Schneider, director of U.S. communications, Health Tech Without Borders: My oldest stole my copy of it.
Description: Verlyn sets out to help us unlearn that “wisdom” — about genius, about creativity, about writer’s block, topic sentences, and outline — and understand that writing is just as much about thinking, noticing, and learning what it means to be involved in the act of writing.
Recommended by Ian Faison, CEO, Caspian Studios: It completely changed how I view writing. Hint: How we were taught in high school/college was wrong.
Description: A bestseller for over 15 years, Blake Snyder tells all in this fast, funny, and candid look inside the movie business. “Save the cat” is just one of many ironclad rules for making your ideas more marketable and your script more satisfying.
Recommended by Emma Lieberman, director of content marketing, Impact Networking: It offers wisdom on everything from process and story structure to straight-up and down tips to make your writing more exciting and compelling. And it opens the door to a more insightful way to watch movies for film buffs.
Description: This book provides readers with the most comprehensive, integrated explanation of the craft of writing for the screen. No one better understands how all the elements of a screenplay fit together, and no one is better qualified to explain the “magic” of story construction and the relationship between structure and character.
Recommended by Ian Faison, CEO, Caspian Studios: Marketing needs more stories that are actually written like stories. This book is how you do it.
Also recommended:
What do you think?
Did your favorite book make the list? If you’d like to add a recommendation, share it with us on social. Tag Content Marketing Institute or use #CMWorld so others in the community can see it. We’ll consider your recommendation for the 2025 list.
Updated from a November 2023 article.
Want more content marketing tips, insights, and examples? Subscribe to workday or weekly emails from CMI.
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
New research suggests that manufacturing marketers — like a lot of other B2B marketers — only feel “average” about their content marketing.
Sixty-seven percent of manufacturing marketers say their content strategy is moderately effective. Thirteen percent say it is not very or at all effective, and only 20% say it is very effective, according to the Content Marketing Institute’s annual survey conducted with MarketingProfs.
Manufacturing marketers say the main reasons why their strategies are not as effective as they could be is because they are not tied to the customer journey (47%), are not data driven (46%), and/or lack clear goals (40%).
Fewer than half blame:
Ineffective audience research (25%)
Failure to iterate/adapt (22%)
Inconsistent brand voice (21%)
Emphasizing content quantity over quality (18%)
Unrealistic expectations (18%)
Other (16%)
Poor content quality (11%)
Content challenges: Creating enough that converts
Sixty-six percent of manufacturing marketers say creating content that prompts a desired action is challenging. Fifty-four percent say creating content consistently is a challenge, and half say creating enough content is. Other challenges include:
Creating the right content for our audience (45%)
Differentiating our content (44%)
Content repurposing (42%)
Optimizing for SEO (34%)
Creating quality content (32%)
Other (6%)
Morgan Norris Senior Brand and Content Strategist TREW Marketing
Morgan Norris, senior brand and content strategist, TREW Marketing, explains why these content challenges may exist and how to overcome them:
Technical marketers sometimes stall because they don’t know what to create or what type of content will resonate with their prospects and customers. If this is you, try sitting in on a few sales calls to better understand what your customers are experiencing and how your products or services solve their challenges. Listen for the specific words they use to frame their problem and how they’ve tried to fix it thus far. Identify topics and content pieces that would attract these prospects earlier, and content that would help them make a purchase decision faster. Getting pushback from sales? Ask for call recordings or transcripts from their meetings and start with those.
Situational issues: Lack of resources
Manufacturing marketers’ most common pressing situational challenge is a lack of resources (57%), and half say they’re challenged in aligning content with the buyer’s journey. Other challenges include:
Measurement challenges: Tying to business goals
Manufacturing marketers split in their assessment of how well they analyze performance — 45% agree that they measure effectively, and 34% disagree. Seventeen percent neither agree nor disagree, and 5% don’t measure effectiveness at all.
So, what kind of challenges do they face while measuring content performance? Sixty-four percent say they have difficulty attributing ROI to content efforts and tracking customer journeys. Other challenges include:
Inability to tie performance to business goals (53%)
Lack of clear marketing goals/KPIs (48%)
Data silos within the organization (40%)
Insufficient resources or budget (39%)
Complex or inadequate reporting systems (36%)
Inability to extract valuable information from data/analytics (32%)
Lack of data skills/talent (32%)
Limited access to advanced analytics tools (31%)
Content management issues: Technology’s potential
Only 21% of manufacturing marketers tell us they have the right technology, while 36% say they have the technology but aren’t using it to its potential. Thirty-five percent say they haven’t acquired the right technology, and 8% are unsure.
In addition, more than half (54%) of manufacturing marketers lack a scalable model for content creation. Thirty-one percent say they have a model, and 15% are unsure.
Tech stack hurdles: Lack of essential capabilities
When asked which, if any, essential capabilities are missing from their tech stacks, 58% of manufacturing marketers say the ability to automate repetitive tasks and workflows. The same number also cite streamlined marketing data management and reporting as missing features. Other missing capabilities include:
Data-driven decision-making capabilities (57%)
Efficient lead generation and nurturing processes (52%)
Strong alignment between sales and marketing (50%)
Advanced personalization options (49%)
Easy access to enterprise analytics (39%)
Eight percent say no capabilities are missing from their marketing tech stack.
AI matters: Minimal integration
Seventy-six percent of manufacturing marketers report using generative AI tools, an adoption rate like other B2B marketers in the broader annual content marketing survey.
While 57% of manufacturing marketers describe the quality of content generated by AI as excellent, very good, or good, another 43% describe it as fair or poor. This latter group may be more wary of the content, which makes sense, considering the technical nature of the products they produce.
Regarding adoption, only 7% of manufacturing marketers say AI is integrated into daily processes/workflows. Around half (51%) say their teams experiment with AI on an ad hoc basis. Forty-two percent say their teams do not formally use AI, but individual staff may choose to use it.
Craig Coffey, content strategy and marketing manager at Eaton, shares what may be happening with AI use and attitudes:
When it comes to the adoption of AI, I think a couple of things may be at play. First, I think manufacturing content marketers are being expectedly cautious about allowing LLMs to gain access to information that could be intellectual property (the “secret sauce”) related to their products; their due diligence process and learning curve are more cautious and protracted.
Second, manufacturing tends to lag the rest of B2B in the adoption of technology not because they don’t see the value but because of their tendency to be more long-term planners — chasing the shiny new thing isn’t in their DNA.
With all the AI tools and tech out there, manufacturing marketers may likely be looking further out, and instead of adopting technology that is cutting edge now, they’re making educated bets on which of these products might be acquired by larger martech providers and becoming features of their current tech stack, rather than standalone tools.
Content type trends: Video popular and effective
The two most popular types of content used by manufacturing marketers in the previous 12 months are short articles/posts (89%) and videos (85%). Other formats include product technical/data sheets (71%), case studies/customer stories (70%), long articles/posts (57%), data visualizations/visual content (53%), e-books/white papers (44%), interactive content (19%), and research reports (14%).
Of those content types, manufacturing marketers say videos are the most effective (74%), followed by case studies/customer stories (45%), e-books/white papers (43%), and short articles/posts (36%).
Pete Grasso Head of Marketing Communications & Technical Training Heatcraft Refrigeration Products
Pete Grasso, head of marketing communications and technical training, Heatcraft Refrigeration Products, shares why video works so well:
B2B companies can’t afford to be left behind in effective communication trends — our audiences are used to consuming video content from B2C brands, and we need to meet them where they are.
Videos allow us to simplify complex topics into engaging, digestible content, making sure we’re not just informing but genuinely connecting with our audience. Just because we’re in manufacturing doesn’t mean our content should be static or unengaging. Videos have transformed the way we share technical knowledge, keeping it fresh and accessible. The shift toward video isn’t just a trend; it’s a necessary adaptation, one that we’re embracing to stay impactful and relevant in our communication strategy.
Read about how Heatcraft Refrigeration Products uses video in its marketing.
Distribution channel uses: Organic tops and in-person wins
Nearly all manufacturing marketers (95%) distributed content via organic social platforms in the last 12 months. Seventy-six percent published blogs on their corporate website, and 71% used in-person events. Other channels include:
Email newsletter (64%)
Email other than newsletters (62%)
Webinars (42%)
Digital magazine (40%)
Print magazine (36%)
Digital events (31%)
Less than one-fourth of manufacturing marketers used microsites (23%), online learning platforms (16%), podcasts (16%), direct mail (14%), branded online communities (10%), hybrid events (7%), mobile apps (3%), and separate content brands (3%).
Manufacturing marketers say in-person events (51%) are their most effective distribution channel, followed closely by blogs on corporate websites (49%) and webinars (49%).
They also rate email (45%) as effective, as well as email newsletters (40%) and organic social media platforms (39%).
Paid channel applications: Search wins
Ninety-two percent of manufacturing marketers say they used paid channels in the last 12 months. Of those who did, 70% used search engine marketing (SEM)/pay-per-click (PPC). Other paid channels cited include:
Digital display advertising (69%)
Social media advertising/promoted posts (66%)
Sponsorships — events, booths, workshops, etc. (60%)
Print display advertising (46%)
Native advertising/sponsored content, not including social media platforms (41%)
Partner emails promoting our content (33%)
Influencer marketing (19%)
Sixty-eight percent of manufacturing marketers cite search engine and pay-per-click marketing as producing the best paid-channel results. Forty-eight percent say sponsorships, followed by social media advertising/promoted posts (42%), partner emails promoting the brand’s content (37%), and digital display advertising (35%).
Social media use: LinkedIn tops, X sees drop
Most (85%) of manufacturing marketers, like most other B2B marketers, say LinkedIn is the social media platform that delivers the best value for their organization. Forty percent say YouTube delivers value, which makes sense considering the popularity and effectiveness of videos for manufacturing marketers. Here’s the breakdown by platforms that manufacturing marketers say deliver the best value:
LinkedIn (85%)
YouTube (40%)
Facebook (31%)
Instagram (18%)
TikTok (5%)
X/Twitter (5%)
Sixty-seven percent of manufacturing marketers increased their use of LinkedIn over the last 12 months. Thirty-five percent increased their use of YouTube, 26% on Instagram, 23% on Facebook, 10% on TikTok, 7% on Reddit, and 3% increased their use of X.
Of those marketers who spent less time on platforms, X saw the most decline (26%), while only 6% decreased their use of LinkedIn. Thirteen percent decreased their use of Instagram, 18% on Facebook, 4% on TikTok, and 2% on Reddit.
Budgets and spending trends: Flat but boosts in video, thought leadership
Thirty-seven percent of manufacturing marketers tell us they expected their content marketing budget to increase in 2025; however, more expected it to stay the same (46%), and 11% expect a decrease. Six percent are unsure.
At least half of manufacturing marketers predict increased investment for videos (62%) and thought leadership content (50%) in 2025. Other areas where they see increased investment include:
AI for content optimization/performance (35%)
In-person events (35%)
Paid advertising (35%)
AI for content creation (33%)
Webinars (31%)
Building online community (21%)
Audio content (18%)
Digital events (13%)
Looking toward 2025
To improve their content strategies, manufacturing marketers must continue to map strategy to the customer journey, have better access to customer data, and work with other internal teams to define clear goals for content marketing.
In the battle to produce enough content to meet their organizations’ needs, manufacturing marketers not only need to align with internal sales teams but also develop scalable models for content creation.
Manufacturing marketers report that they’re often strapped for resources, so identifying ways to get the most bang for their content buck will be critical in 2025, especially when many expect their content marketing budgets to stay flat in the year ahead.
Methodology
Content Marketing Institute conducts an annual survey with MarketingProfs every year. These findings come from the 104 manufacturing participants of the 1,186 marketers around the globe who responded between June and August 2024.
Seventy-eight percent of the manufacturing marketers work for B2B brands, while 22% work for B2B and B2C brands.
These marketers work in manufacturing companies of these employee sizes:
One to 99 employees (19%)
100 to 999 employees (31%)
1,000-plus employees (50%)
Get the latest Content Marketing Institute research reports while they’re hot – subscribe to the daily or weekly newsletter.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
“Visionaries see a future of telecommuting workers, interactive libraries and multimedia classrooms. They speak of electronic town meetings and virtual communities. Commerce and business will shift from offices and malls to networks and modems. And the freedom of digital networks will make government more democratic.
Baloney. Do our computer pundits lack all common sense? The truth is no online database will replace your daily newspaper, no CD-ROM can take the place of a competent teacher, and no computer network will change the way government works.”
Today, that pronouncement sounds incredibly naïve — and online posts ridicule the author for not seeing what transformational power the internet would bring.
But later in that same article, Stoll writes:
“[W]hat the Internet hucksters won’t tell you is that the internet is one big ocean of unedited data, without any pretense of completeness. Lacking editors, reviewers or critics, the internet has become a wasteland of unfiltered data.”
He then concludes his piece by saying:
“a poor substitute it is,this virtual reality where frustration is legion and where — in the holy names of Education and Progress — important aspects of human interactions are relentlessly devalued.”
Stoll was wrong about the plot. But I think he nailed the story. One might rightly argue that the modern web is one big “wasteland of unfiltered data” and that human connection is increasingly devalued.
Don’t confuse plot for story
In the context of any moment of innovation, people cling to the familiar. Author and philosopher Marshall McLuhan called this the “rear-view mirror:“
“We tend always to attach ourselves to the objects, to the flavor of the most recent past. We look at the present through a rear-view mirror. We march backward into the future.”
Yet marching backward into the future often gives us a good understanding (consciously or otherwise) of how the past informs the future.
In other words, we might get the future plot (events) wrong but get the story correct.
Consider the apocryphal story of Netflix’s triumph over Blockbuster. It’s too simplistic to say Blockbuster failed because it ignored the rise of streaming. Blockbuster recognized the shift in consumer preferences and behavior (the story), but the constraints of legacy systems and shareholder expectations slowed its response to change (the plot).
The company’s leaders weren’t wrong about digital vs. physical — they were wrong about the speed and format of the transformation.
Consider the total story
Today, marketers face a similar challenge. We stand at the cusp of an internet-sized disruption in how we reach, engage, convert, and serve audiences and customers. And that raises many questions about how to proceed. Here are a few:
Will AI completely upend the content creation process? Which content pieces should we hand off to generative AI, and which merit human writers?
Should we finally abandon PDF files as a delivery mechanism for lead-generation content? Can we predict what format will replace it?
Are websites even needed anymore? Will AI-generated answers and other zero-click search results box out owned media (including websites and blogs)?
Is there any future for e-commerce, or is it just a matter of time before all businesses get “Amazoned?”
One of my favorite books on marketing theory is The Marketing Imagination by Harvard Business School professor Theodore Levitt. In it, Levitt describes his “total product” concept, which offers a practical lens for balancing marketing plot predictions with our understanding of the story.
The “total product” concept is that consumers don’t buy a product or format — they choose the complete experience that best fits their current needs and context.
Apply that concept to cars, for example. The car’s features matter to the consumer, but so does the whole ownership experience (a nearby service center, a great warranty, and even digital content and ownership tools).
What does this have to do with content or marketing?
Think about aging formats like PDFs or PowerPoint presentations. They’ve been the norm in digital marketing for years.
Are they still serving your audience effectively? Content needs to be integrated, interactive, and engaging today. Do those formats deliver on those expectations?
But how do you predict a better format when one may not yet exist?
One answer (but not the only one) is to look at the digital experiences and marketing content you create as a total product — or a total story if you will.
For example, consider these options:
Don’t abandon PDF files entirely. Instead, try to understand all the contexts that apply to your audience and address them. You could create structured content hubs to answer questions and provide thought leadership. Then, add a PDF as a downloadable, adjacent piece that offers a more visual layout or the functional interactivity of a form or template.
Don’t worry about whether you should kill your website or blog. Figure out how to evolve your website into something else. For example, perhaps your corporate website evolves from that thousand-page online billboard to a simple hub designed to direct customers to apps, social media, or other owned media content brands. You can see this in action on Coca-Cola’s corporate site.
Embrace multiple iterations of where your website might live. For example, you may decide that a partner for e-commerce for your products/services on third-party shops makes sense. They may be less profitable than your own shop, but customers may appreciate the more relevant context. For example, the entire buyer’s journey for Red Hat Linux’s complete educational platform can take place on the Amazon Web Services site.
Instead of looking at generative AI as a way to create more efficiency in doing the things you already do, think about how it might prompt even greater wisdom and creativity in a human team.
Backing into the future
Content and marketing professionals are in precisely the same place Clifford Stoll was in 1995 — no more or less knowledgeable, talented, or prescient.
Focus on the story and allow the plot to unfold in uncertain ways. That’s how you’ll thrive.
Learn to see the past and use it to understand the story of the future without getting hung up on the details of the plot.
You’ll still be walking into the future backward. That’s inevitable. But you can use what you know to help you understand what you don’t — and prepare for whatever comes next.
It’s your story. Tell it well.
Subscribe to workday or weekly CMI emails to get Rose-Colored Glasses in your inbox each week.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
What happens when search-related data shows your organization’s content isn’t delivering?
You dig deeper into data.
That’s what Brian Piper does as director of content strategy and assessment at the University of Rochester. At the Marketing Analytics & Data Science Conference, he explained what his team’s done and how it has expanded that SEO work in the era of artificial intelligence.
Seeing organic traffic drop to almost zero
At one point, a new article on the University of Rochester’s NewsCenter, which was promoted in a newsletter and on social media, attracted traffic the first week before plummeting to almost zero.
That traffic boost was good for the university’s business goal — to generate awareness — and the content’s primary KPIs — page views and new visitors. But Brian and his team knew those one-time traffic bumps wouldn’t be enough.
So, they analyzed the audience, developing a strategy to create and optimize content so future visitors asking similar questions would see the University of Rochester in their search results.
Their data-informed strategy worked. Organic search traffic page views from July 1, 2022, to June 30, 2023, increased 540% over July 1, 2017, and June 30, 2018.
Boosting rankings and organic search traffic
If you are like many marketing analytics and data analysts, SEO remains a top KPI for your organization. Yet, today’s SEO world is even less predictable than it has been (and it’s always been somewhat of a mystery).
Investigating little things could have a significant impact on your organic traffic. Brian says the process starts and ends with data. Analyze the current metrics against your strategy and goal. Then, make changes and measure the impact of those changes. Let’s look at several ways the University of Rochester does that and how you can, too:
Meta descriptions: The data showed that the University of Rochester ranked well for several high-volume search terms, but searchers didn’t click on their content. Brian optimized the meta descriptions by adding the specific program names (e.g., the Simon Admissions Team) and searchers started clicking and visiting the programs’ sites.
Images and social media: Conventional wisdom says don’t publish images with text in them because search engine crawlers don’t read the text. But that conclusion is no longer true, Brian says.
His team now advises schools and programs within the institution to put their logos into their published images. Now, when their images show up in search, users can see the institution name, Brian says.
The same text-in-image advice holds true for social media visual assets, including covers, banners, and headers.
Not only do social media images show up, but your social accounts may appear in search, too. Brian says that makes it even more important to include the right keywords in your profiles.
Voice search: Since more people, especially Gen Z and Gen Alpha, use voice search more frequently, Brian spends time testing voice platforms to see if the answers include branded search terms and strategic keywords.
“The trick with voice search is there’s one result,” Brian says. The university’s strategy to be included in that answer is to become a featured snippet within the text-based search results. Then, it massages that content to include its branding within the voice search results.
Brian explains, “When someone asks a question about good research universities in New York, we want it to say that the University of Rochester is one of those schools.”
Community search: Data also tells Brian that traditional search engines aren’t enough for the University of Rochester to attract organic audiences. Gen Z and Gen Alpha frequently prefer to search on community sites such as Reddit. So, Brian monitors those communities.
“We’re trying to figure out how to get our subject matter experts to participate in those communities, to add value in those communities, and go in and answer questions and help solve problems without pitching or selling anything in those channels,” he says.
ADVERTISEMENT
Learn How a CMS
Can Simplify Your Content Strategy
New to content management? Perplexed about organizing your brand’s content? Learn how a CMS (Content Management System) simplifies creating, organizing, and sharing content—all in one place. Gain valuable tips, tools, and insights.
Start Learning
Optimizing content for AI-generated results
Voice and community-related searches aren’t the only modern search traffic differences. These days, it’s also important to have data about where your content and brand appear in generative AI results, chatbots, and search engines.
Brian and his team see where the University of Rochester shows up for its targeted keywords — branded and unbranded — in ChatGPT and Gemini. “We’re searching on those within these different tools and seeing what content comes back and seeing how we can change that and influence that,” he says.
For example, the University of Rochester published an article titled Why Did the U.S. Enter World War I?” It featured insights from Hein Goemans, an associate professor of political science and author of War and Punishment: The Causes of War Termination and the First World War.
The title should work well for people asking this question in search — most likely high school students writing a paper for their history class and the ideal customer profile for the university. Expecting search-related traffic, Brian adds calls to action on the page for visitors to learn more about the history program at the University of Rochester.
But when Brian prompted ChatGPT with “Why did the U.S. enter World War I,” the answer didn’t obviously mention the University of Rochester article.
“The nice thing about using ChatGPT is you can just ask it, ‘Well, what are the sources? Where are you getting your information from this?’ And it’ll tell you,” Brian says.
It turns out that ChatGPT search did cite the article, but the ChatGPT response didn’t show it.
Next, the team looked at the cited content to see how it could tweak the university’s content to have a bigger impact on the AI-generated answer.
After Brian’s presentation, I did a Google search, asking, “Why did the U.S. enter WW1?” The Google AI overview featured the University of Rochester’s article as a source.
It also appeared as the fourth source listed when the question was posed through Google’s Gemini:
Though the University of Rochester article isn’t yet shared in a ChatGPT response, the article is cited for the same search by Perplexity, an AI search engine:
Using AI to help with SEO analytics
Designing content to turn up in generative AI prompt answers and search results isn’t the only way artificial intelligence can help your marketing analytics. It can do some analysis.
Brian says that while Google Search Console contains a wealth of useful data, it doesn’t present it in a way that’s easy to consume. “You can’t see the page URL and the keyword in the same view. And when you export from Google Search Console, it only gives you a portion of the actual data,” he says.
So, Brian got an assist from Google’s Looker Studio (free). He connected Looker Data Studio to their Google Search Console account so he could access all the data in one dashboard view. It shows the data for the university’s NewsCenter content: search query, URL, impressions, clicks, and average ranking position for the content.
“You can actually put in the URL at the top and it’ll tell you all the different terms that you rank for on that page. So, when you’re looking to optimize your content, this is a great resource. We use this all the time, and it [analyzes] 929,000 results on our NewsCenter site.”
But the AI assist doesn’t stop there. Brian exported the Looker Studio dashboard metrics into a spreadsheet and uploaded the CSV file to ChatGPT.
He crafted a prompt using Trust Insights’ Christopher Penn’s RACE framework — role, action, context, execute.
Role: “You are a content marketing expert.”
Action: “You will be coming up with strategic recommendations on new content we could create that would support our strategic priorities and be relevant for prospective undergraduate students, graduate students, or knowledge seekers.”
Context: “Use the attached search console data to see areas where we currently have search potential and compare those to the general interest of our target audience and determine which content might also support our strategic priorities at http://boundless.rochester.edu.”
Execute: “Create 20 new content ideas, please. Take your time.”
ChatGPT immediately returned content ideas strategically relevant to the topic areas for which the University of Rochester already ranks. “That will help us establish our expertise and authority in certain areas so that we’ll start ranking for even more terms, which will add extra search power for us,” Brian says.
Experimenting with AI, SEO, and AI SEO
The opaque nature of AI engines means that, like Brian, marketers and data analysts will need to explore, observe, and experiment.
Make some data-driven recommendations. Try some things and measure whether they work. If they don’t, try something else. If they do, know that it might not last when the search formula changes.
All tools mentioned in this article were suggested by the author. If you’d like to suggest a tool, share the article on social media with a comment.
Want more content marketing tips, insights, and examples? Subscribe to workday or weekly emails from CMI.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
Predictions for 2025 started fast and furious before the calendar flipped to November.
But, as you’ve learned, marketing predictors are really bad at them.
In 2023, virtual and augmented reality was supposed to take off. And 2024 was to be filled with agile marketers scrambling to do innovative things to drive growth. This was to be the year that AI would find its way because marketers’ optimism would drive rapid and exciting adoption of the technology.
Brand safety was to be another story of 2024. Yet, as research from Forrester finds, more than half (53%) of U.S. B2C marketing executives recently said they’re becoming less “prudish” about brand safety.
Yes, predictions are fun, engaging, and what people (including us at CMI) do. So, keep all of this in the proper perspective.
With that said, we turn the microphone over to CMI’s chief strategy advisor, Robert Rose, to learn what he sees for 2025. Read on or watch the video:
Create for moments, not momentum
What will be the focus in 2025?
Will it be SEO and content? Predictions from Forrester say SEO budgets will triple in 2025 as AI integration reaches a critical path moment for search.
And how about AI? Well, research firm Kantar predicts that 2025 marketers will care a lot about auditing and managing their data and its quality so they and, in turn, their customers have more trust in the content produced by generative AI.
There’s a lot to unpack for 2025, especially with the U.S. election now complete. So, let’s grab the CMI Magic 8 Ball to see what’s going to happen (or not happen) next year.
Brace yourself: Using the U.S. national election as the lens, I confidently see a wild and curvy path for marketers on the content road.
Pressure will be renewed when it comes to how brands talk about cultural and social issues. Regardless of where your brand sits in the culture wars, your No. 1 job will be to create belief and trust with your audience, and it will require stepping outside your normal content box.
Taking a stand as a brand while adapting to the shifting landscape is here to stay. Young people want to see brands that share their ideals, and businesses are really beginning to understand that.
In so many ways, marketers will look to create trusted moments instead of long-form narratives. That may sound esoteric, but it’s not. Marketers will create moments of surprise, delight, and value rather than taking the time to build momentum through a long-form story.
Gain from shifting trust
If it’s even possible, trust will likely sink lower. Expect the 2025 Edelman’s Trust Barometer to show a decrease across mainstream media and government. Nonprofit organizations and for-profit businesses may be the only two institutions in 2025 that move in a positive direction for trust.
What does that mean? It means podcasts over broadcast and cable TV. It means content for social media instead of long-form downloadable PDFs. It means paid media goes more digital, and marketers care less about brand safety on social media platforms as the platforms themselves become less trusted than the brands that are there.
From a social media perspective, this shift is good for platforms like TikTok. If your brand hesitated to invest in that platform because it might go away, you can probably safely place that bet now.
Operate in a nonregulated AI world
On the tech front, AI will continue to get boosted, and any regulations on the technology will lag. Don’t expect any short-term clarity on things like copyright infringement or formal rules on where and how AI content can be used.
What about M&A in the marketing and content space? It should be interesting. Expect a flurry of new AI-oriented marketing tools to enter the space.
Additionally, more and more “marketing agent” tools will emerge that promise to automate everything from your customer emails and drip campaigns to media buying. However, most of these pronouncements will be vaporware fueled by a frothy venture market that will use the astronomic rise of cryptocurrency as a fund. And I wouldn’t rule out a return of NFTs and other blockchain marketing solutions as the startup world and money return to things on the back burner.
Know this prediction is guaranteed
In short, as you wait to see if any of these dynamics play out, one thing is certain: Now more than ever, marketing leaders must navigate A LOT. So, hold tight.
The one prediction I really want to be true is that brands increase their investment in their teams — their time, training, and wisdom — and build the institutional value of their marketing teams and the people in them. AI and automation never swing for the fences with imaginary creative.
I can guarantee this one prediction will be true in 2025: You must be wiser, more creative, and more empathetic than you’ve ever been. As Peter Drucker famously said, “The only way to predict your future is to create it.” It’s up to you to make 2025 what you want it to be.
Want more content marketing tips, insights, and examples? Subscribe to workday or weekly emails from CMI.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
Many agencies listen to client needs and then develop a program to match. But Caspian took the opposite approach — coming up with an intriguing idea first, then pitching it to potential clients.
Another unexpected element subverted expectations for B2B content. Instead of featuring a brand’s or industry’s experts, Caspian pitched a serialized fictional audio story featuring A-list actors’ voices that capitalizes on the true-crime podcast trend.
That unexpected strategy propelled Caspian’s Murder in HR podcast to win Best Podcast/Audio Series in the Content Marketing Awards. It also earned Caspian Studios CEO Ian Faison a nomination as a 2024 Content Marketer of the Year finalist.
Here’s the story of the twists and turns involved in bringing this unconventional B2B marketing strategy to life.
Fiction for B2B podcasts? Really?
Yes. And Murder in HR, which debuted in 2023 with 12 episodes, wasn’t even Caspian’s first B2B fiction series.
The studio also created The Hacker Chronicles, a tale of a woman who turned to the dark web and hacked into a giant food conglomerate (featuring the voices of well-known actors Michael C. Hall and Chloe Taylor). Tenable, a cybersecurity firm, published 22 podcast episodes in 2022 and 2023.
“I really believe in this idea of fiction for B2B,” Ian says. “Nobody’s doing it, and the reason is because it’s really hard.”
But the effort can pay off. Murder in HR debuted its second season at the end of September. Work is already underway for seasons 3 and 4.
The true-crime-style story centers on a brilliant 30-year-old woman who’s quit every job she’s ever had yet ends up handling HR at a tech company.
When a murder happens, she tries to solve it. Along the way, she discovers that the company is a front for an assassin business and she will be killed if she leaves. That detail explains her commitment to the job and secures Caspian’s ability to tell the story through multiple seasons.
“It’s an interesting story that has this really crazy twist,” Ian says.
Voiced by A-list actors Kate Mara and Brett Gelman, the podcast’s first season was published by Gympass (now Wellhub). Season 2 was published by Wellhub and Bamboo HR.
Caspian’s third B2B serialized fiction podcast, Scam Hunters, debuted this fall. The “business thriller” features a disgraced chief information security officer (voiced by Greg Kinnear) who gets a call from a Miami journalist (voiced by Erin Moriarty) who needs help investigating scams targeting terminally ill patients. Thoropass, an information security compliance platform, publishes that podcast.
Developing a surprising B2B content idea
CEO Ian Faison, Caspian Studios 2024 Content Marketer of the Year finalist
The Caspian Studios team starts with the idea, not the client. The idea, Ian explains, is, “Let’s make something amazing. Let’s make something consumer-grade that people could listen to.”
The Caspian team brainstorms possibilities, then whittles a list of about 50 ideas into a handful. From there, it shares the concepts with potential partners. With Murder in HR, the ask went to chief marketing officers and other marketing leaders in the HR space.
The pitch read something like, “Hey, we’re considering doing this podcast — a fictional murder mystery set in an HR department.”
Caspian received several responses that read something like, “You are crazy. Good luck with that type of stuff.”
However, Ryan Bonnici, former CMO of Wellhub, had the opposite reaction. “The team at Wellhub loved the idea for the story and the crazy twist,” Ian says.
Ryan liked the idea of this “very big thing” targeting the audience that buys Wellhub products.
Wellhub is a brand all about employees’ well-being, and Murder in HR is set in the most toxic company possible. Fortunately, the story’s hero is an HR professional who turns it into a nontoxic environment.
The story also reflects how the fictional characters use Gympass services, such as its access to the Calm app and fitness classes.
Chief people officers reviewed the scripts for accuracy. “It is the same stuff that HR deals with in real life — well, hopefully not the assassin part,” Ian explains.
Delivering big marketing results
About 20 Caspian team members worked on Murder in HR with about 10 people from the Wellhub side.
The fictional podcast series proved remarkably successful. Though Caspian and Wellhub targeted only 50,000 listeners in its marketing campaign, the first season garnered over 1.1 million downloads in the first six months.
Murder in HR ranked No. 1 for fiction in Apple Podcasts for one week, earned No. 1 in the new and noteworthy category, and No. 39 on Apple Podcasts. It increased awareness of Wellhub among the audience and highlighted the company’s versatile and flexible platform.
Wellhub can swap new ads and messaging into the episodes to keep the messages relevant. Wellhub also promoted the story in different spheres, from marketing and media to webinars and sales conversations.
What did listeners think? “We got feedback in droves from people that said, ‘We love this. This is a very cool story.’ We even had a group reach out to say they wanted to do an event for the Season 2 premiere,” Ian says.
Telling stories that executives will buy
A fictional story as a podcast may seem like a risk in the B2B space, where marketers and executives usually prefer to showcase their expertise to educate their audience.
The business case for Murder in HR is making a hit show for and about an audience that has traditionally been the butt of workplace jokes (think Toby from the TV show The Office.) And it tells stories about things these professionals can’t talk about publicly.
To Ian, that type of storytelling isn’t risky. “Brand risk is talking about politics on LinkedIn – the idea of alienating people,” he says. “Telling a whodunit story that’s meant to be funny and interesting is pretty low risk.”
Caspian plans to take the concept to the next level. The studio is working to create what Ian calls the “Murderverse,” an interconnected set of stories that could attract many brand partners. The formats could be anything from podcasts to feature films.
“We have all sorts of crazy ideas,” Ian says.
B2B audiences are people, too
Some executives think these fictionalized stories appeal to the masses and won’t work for niche audiences targeted by their brand.
However, Ian argues that a podcast with consumer appeal can work. For one thing, it speaks to the targeted demographic with insider jokes and Easter eggs. And it works for broader audiences, too.
One chief people officer told him, “I listened to it with my daughter on a road trip, and it was so fun. We were trying to figure out who the killer was together, and I talked to my daughter about work.”
And that’s the point, Ian says. Most B2B content doesn’t require the listener to pay attention to an entire episode, let alone finish the entire season. “The whole premise of Murder in HR was to try to change that.”
Find all the blogs and newsletters recommended by your content marketing peers over the last few years in this list. Find all the podcasts and video series here.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
You’ll never know what content works — and why — unless you regularly track and evaluate its metrics against your business goals. However, just as content performance doesn’t remain static, best measurement practices, definitions, and tools don’t either.
In this mad world of measurement musical chairs, your best defense is to stay on top of the latest terms and how to apply them. To help, I’ve compiled 27 critical definitions and simple explanations of how they may fit into your content’s performance strategy.
Content measurement definitions:
Analytics
Marketo defines analytics as managing and studying metrics data to determine the return on investment of marketing efforts like calls to action, blog posts, channel performance, and thought leadership pieces, as well as to identify opportunities for improvement.
Attention metrics
Attention metrics gauge how well your content retains your audience’s interest. They can include biometrics (e.g., eye tracking, facial recognition), explicit emotional feedback (e.g., focus groups, interactive surveys), or a combination of data signals such as dwell time, scroll speed, cursor location, and completion rates.
As the need for more precise and predictive audience insights grows, these metrics play a central role in multiplatform content measurement. However, because no universally accepted standards exist, decisions on which data points to focus on — and how to calculate them — may differ from brand to brand.
Attribution/attribution models
In calculating marketing ROI, attribution determines how much credit to assign to a content channel or touchpoint when a desired outcome is achieved. It’s critical for performance measurement because a direct line can’t always be drawn from content consumption to business impact.
Depending on your use cases, you can choose from various attribution models (i.e., methodologies) to track a user’s progression through your customer journey and their actions at each step. You’ll find a list of commonly used models, use cases, and definitions here.
Bounce rate
Prior to Google Analytics 4 (GA4), bounce rate referred to the percentage of single-page visits in which the user had no further interaction on the site. However, Google now defines the bounce rate as the percentage of sessions that fail to meet its “engaged session” criteria — a session that lasts 10 seconds or longer, has one or more key events, or has two or more page or screen views.
Click-to-open rate (CTOR)
The click-to-open rate is an email metric that quantifies the percentage of recipients who clicked on a link within an email campaign they opened. It’s calculated as the total number of unique opened emails divided by number of unique clicks multiplied by 100.
Click-through rate (CTR)
Click-through rate refers to the number of recipients who clicked on a link compared to the number of people who received the asset. It’s calculated as the number of clicks divided by total recipients (or impressions) multiplied by 100.
It’s commonly used to gauge success for email campaigns and newsletter-driven website visits. Still, it can also apply to other content formats and platforms (e.g., display ads served on websites, social ads, or native advertising campaigns), where the total number of recipients can be specified rather than estimated.
Conversion/conversion rate
Generally speaking, a conversion happens when a consumer takes a desired action upon engaging with the content. The action is what your organization designates as meaningful — purchasing a product, registering for an event or a gated asset, subscribing to a blog or newsletter, or joining a social media community.
Calculate the conversion rate by dividing the number of those who took action by the total interactions with that piece of content.
Customer acquisition cost
Customer acquisition cost is how much the company spends to obtain that customer. Calculate all the expenses — including product research, development, manufacturing, marketing, and advertising. Divide that total by the number of customers gained within a designated time frame.
Downloads
The download metric is commonly used to gauge performance for lead-magnet content assets like white papers, e-books, and infographics. It indicates a deeper level of engagement and interest than a view or visit because the user found the content valuable enough to add to their files and explore in more detail or share with others in their networks.
The metric also is applicable to podcasts to indicate listening interest.
Engagement
Engagement is both a fundamental content metric and a content marketing goal. As a metric, it’s broadly defined as an act of interaction — opening an email newsletter, reading a blog article, clicking on an ad or an interactive asset, or liking/commenting on a social media post.
While engagement indicates at least a passing interest in your content, it’s not an informative indicator of why the content captured audience interest or its value over time. Engagement is often best used to contextualize other metrics rather than as a definitive decision-making tool.
Entrances/exits
Entrances are the number of times users enter your site through a page or set of pages. Likewise, exits indicate how often users end their website visit on that page. A page with a high entrance rate could indicate it’s well-optimized for search.
However, neither entrance nor exit rates are clear indicators of content success (or failure). It’s a good idea to correlate this data with other insights — such as bounce rates, dwell time, user flow, and referral traffic sources — to better understand what these data points mean for your content performance.
Events
GA4 considers every interaction a trackable event — including site page visits, clicks on a link, PDF downloads, video views, and purchases. This more flexible approach allows marketers to designate any triggered event as a conversion goal, and every instance of that event gets counted — even if the same event is recorded multiple times during a single session.
Goals
Broadly speaking, goals are the desired business outcomes achieved through your content marketing strategy. While the stated goal of content marketing is to ultimately drive a profitable action, your goals should be more specific and quantifiable with an established time frame, such as increasing sales conversions by 10% in three months, saving the company $100,000 in a year, building a subscribed audience to hit 10,000 in six months, or driving greater customer loyalty and brand satisfaction as measured by repeat purchases over 12 months.
From a web analytics standpoint, Google’s shift to tracking interactions as events changed how it configured and tracked goals in the Universal Analytics era.
KPI
Key performance indicators are agreed-on measurements for assessing progress against your content marketing goals. Potential KPIs include average conversion rates, number of leads, quality of leads, or revenue per new customer.
Marketing-qualified lead (MQL)
MQLs are leads generated by the marketing team that satisfy the criteria to get passed along to the sales team for further outreach.
Metrics
In contrast to KPIs, metrics are the business-as-usual measurements for things that add value to your organization but aren’t focused on the most critical goals. They might include website page views or likes on social media posts. These numbers can help you achieve or optimize your KPIs.
Objectives and key results (OKR)
Objective and key results can help determine which metrics best gauge performance against your goals. The method starts with designing a measurement pyramid that includes goals, key performance indicators, and metrics.
CMI’s chief strategy advisor, Robert Rose, details the OKR process here. The end result should be your business mission segmented into strategic objectives. Each segment connects to the OKR pyramid and serves as a source tool for each metric in it.
Click to enlarge
Open rate
Open rate is the percentage of recipients who opened an email sent to them. It is calculated as the number who opened the email divided by the total number of email recipients multiplied by 100.
The open rate does not measure whether any recipients clicked on links in the email content. Already limited in value due to its narrow focus, its reliability has come into question even further as email platforms evolve their privacy controls and new regulatory requirements emerge.
Referral traffic
When a user reaches your domain through a third-party link (e.g., search engine, link from an article published off your site), it’s tracked as referral traffic by Google. As a metric, it’s a useful indicator of brand awareness and thought leadership.
In GA4, click the Reports link in the left-side menu, navigate to Acquisition >Traffic Acquisition, type “referral” in the search box, and hit enter for a focused view of referral traffic stats.
On the main Traffic Acquisition report, you can select “session source” from the Session Primary Channel Group dropdown to see the top referral sources to your site, the number of sessions for each referral, and data on the visitor’s behavior after arriving on your site.
The more sources that send traffic your way, the more Google and other search engines highly regard your domain — an outcome that may lead to better domain authority and rankings of your content on search.
Registrations/subscription count
These terms refer to the total number of people who provided their contact information to gain access to your content — attending an event, downloading a lead-magnet asset, receiving email newsletters, or joining your brand community.
Growing a subscribed audience is among the top goals for content marketing. Subscriber/registrant data can also gauge progress against other desired outcomes in the marketing funnel. For example, when registrants or subscribers renew, that renewal rate is an additional metric that can be used to gauge brand loyalty.
Return on investment (ROI)
Return on investment in marketing is a broad term describing the financial impact on the business of marketing initiatives. Knowing the ROI for content campaigns enables marketers to determine budget allocations, maximize the efficiency of each marketing expense, and demonstrate the impact of their efforts to their executive stakeholders.
Though it’s (arguably) the most critical measurement of a marketing technique’s effectiveness, the complex nature of attributing conversions to a content asset makes calculating a definitive ROI challenging.
Sales-qualified lead (SQL)
A sales-qualified lead is a prospect active in the market from a sales perspective. These leads are more likely to become customers than MQLs.
Sessions/users
In GA4, a user (called a visitor in previous analytics) is a user who arrives on your website and app. Seems simple, right? But characterizing that act and how it gets factored into content measurement is more complicated.
GA4 labels these website and app page visits as “sessions” — the designated period during which a user interacts with a website or app. The default session timeout period is 30 minutes (though you can reconfigure your settings), and sessions reset each day at midnight (local time). GA4 counts each visit from a single user as one session regardless of the source.
However, the user must have enabled tracking cookies for your business to track a session. (This is why the end of third-party cookies was feared to be the end of digital marketing.)
Share of model
With the advent of generative AI tools comes the need for a new marketing metric — share of model — to gauge the perception of your brand and the likelihood of its content being cited in a relevant AI query.
MarketingWeek defines a share of model as the number of mentions of a brand by one or multiple large language models (e.g., ChatGPT, Meta’s Llama, Microsoft’s CoPilot, Google’s Gemini, Anthropic’s Claude) as a proportion of the total mentions of brands in the same category.
Time on site/time on page
These metrics indicate how long a user spends on the site (web or mobile). Sessions exceeding the average time on page or site indicate higher interest and engagement with that content. However, when using this metric alone, it is challenging to determine whether the user actively engaged with the content all that time or simply left it open on their browser.
Video views/duration
Video views measure how many times a video asset is watched, and duration indicates the length of time the average viewer watches that video. However, just because a video was viewed in its entirety does not mean the viewer actively engaged with all of it.
Views
Views (known as page views in Google’s earlier analytics) are the total number of times users load a site page or app screen over a session. If a user views the same page three times during a session, total views increase by three.
In GA4, you can find the views count under Reports > Engagement > Pages and Screens. However, you’ll need additional configurations to view data by page URL instead of the page title.
Know what’s in the measurement name
Every content marketing program requires a solid measurement strategy. By knowing the terms and how they fit with your brand’s content marketing, you can arrange those measurement musical chairs to create a melodic evaluation of your content’s effectiveness.
Updated from a May 2022 article.
Want more content marketing tips, insights, and examples? Subscribe to workday or weekly emails from CMI.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
It’s easy to get stuck working on one piece at a time — trying to make one thing rank higher, reach its conversion goal, or have the intended impact.
But what if you zoom out to optimize — or simply organize — all the content across all the channels your brand uses?
Would it help you elevate your entire content ecosystem so that all the parts work together to amplify your messages and impact?
Reorganize your content library
Optimizing an entire body of content is far from new. In fact, the renowned Greek poet and scholar Callimachus built the first Google about 2,300 years ago.
Despite common misconceptions, the Pinakes (as it was called) wasn’t simply a catalog of the works housed in the Library of Alexandria. It was a comprehensive inventory of all Greek literature that included details about each author, their other works, and biographical information.
The purpose of the Pinakes was similar to Google’s stated mission: to help “organize all the world’s information and make it accessible and useful.”
No surprise — helping people find information today requires a vastly different approach.
Organizing your brand’s body of content as a library gives people a standardized way to find a lot of information quickly — if they know what they’re looking for.
A library is hierarchical. You start with a topic or author and then drill deeper through subcategories until you find something that suits your need.
Before Google’s debut, people used the same hierarchy-based idea to organize the internet. The first iteration of the Yahoo! search engine, for example, worked like a keyword search through manually assigned content categories and subcategories.
Today, that style of organization makes less sense. That’s because the role of content is to pull audiences into a body of experiences about something they may not have realized they need or want.
Think about it. If you wanted to educate yourself about the future of business, would you start in a library? And, if you did, how helpful would it be for the librarian to simply point you to the Business category?
Yet even in 2024, marketers often default to organizing thought leadership resource centers as an inside-looking-out hierarchical library.
Worse still, I see many businesses still cataloging it by content type. I’ve seen so many B2B resource centers organized into these categories: e-books, white papers, videos, and articles.
That approach forces audiences to choose their content experience before choosing a topic or question to answer.
To meet audience needs in 2025, you must consider how to optimize your body of content for traditional search engines, AI search engines, social channels, vertical platforms, and (yes) the people who navigate their way to your content.
With all these competing needs, how do you decide what to optimize for and how to do it?
ADVERTISEMENT
Learn How a CMS
Can Simplify Your Content Strategy
New to content management? Perplexed about organizing your brand’s content? Learn how a CMS (Content Management System) simplifies creating, organizing, and sharing content—all in one place. Gain valuable tips, tools, and insights.
Start Learning
The modern content optimization framework
Historically, marketers have optimized content by some categorized hierarchy because it worked well for search engines.
But AI and other technologies, such as personalization and targeted content, make that approach less helpful.
Try this framework to help you develop a modern approach to content optimization:
Intent
Authority
Internal context
External context
Described
Let’s look at this one by one:
Intent
Understanding your audience’s intent is almost more important than understanding who they are. Think about it. If you have 1,000 new visitors coming to your website, what’s the most valuable thing you can know about them? Is it who they are? Or is it why they came?
Optimizing the way you organize and present your content can help you understand their intent before you ask them who they are.
How do you do that? One way to start is to organize and categorize content by your customer’s objective or desired outcomes. Detailed category and content titles can help.
For example, you might have a thought leadership paper titled “Visions of a New Future for Our Industry: What You Need To Know as You Contemplate Change.” You might have a category (or metadata) assigned for that content in a category called “Understanding the Future of Our Industry.” The outcome associated with that category might be creating demand.
The point is that somebody downloading a white paper in this category is NOT a qualified lead yet. So you’d measure awareness, not leads. And deciding all the channels where this content will live should be predicated on this categorization. In other words, you won’t need to optimize this content for a sales enablement experience.
Your goal should be to make the information that matches the person’s intent easy to find and available in experiences designed for that intent.
Authority
When you develop any content — whether the goal is to educate, inspire, entertain, or provide instructions — authority, details, and depth matter.
You can’t deliver authority in a single piece of content. Instead, you communicate it through your library of content. In other words, you link, connect, and serve relevant and increasingly in-depth content so your visitor never needs to go anywhere else.
A large, global, B2B technology organization I work with banned PDFs from its thought leadership program entirely. This means that their content will all be organized in a manner that enables cross-linking and non-linear consumption. That change creates a better experience for the brand’s audience and the ability for the brand to lead people to multiple “best-next” experiences from thought leadership. This kind of forward-leaning content optimization will contribute to content success in 2025.
Internal context
The internal context attribute is about meaning. It might be your brand’s point of view about the world or its unique take or solution to a problem. It might be the information you provide in proximity to other information.
Organizing your content by points of view (or story pillars or narratives, if you prefer those terms) is similar to organizing by intent. But in this case, the organizing principle isn’t tasks or questions but rather the disparate elements that make up the holistic argument your body of content puts forward.
For example, a technology company focused on cybersecurity might organize one section of its resource center by the brand’s point of view on the future of AI and include another section on the future of financial security in a digital world.
Your content’s clear, consistent, and differentiated point of view or meaning makes it stand out when people search for answers. How the content gets displayed also communicates a context, which can deepen the engagement.
I call this the “settle the bar bet” scenario. Someone at a bar says, “What’s the answer to that question?” You answer. They search and find something that confirms your answer. Usually, the questioner nods, puts their phone down, and moves on.
But what if your answer included even more contextual information or a “best next” step to spark their interest? They might read it aloud to their friend, saying, “Did you also know that ….” They might even bookmark it for future reading. That’s the internal context you want to achieve.
External context
Technology and AI-driven solutions also enter the optimization framework to help with conditional contexts. These might include how the content will be organized at a user or account level or whether it will be served on a mobile device or desktop computer.
You could decide that first-party data, such as location, buying history, content consumption, and device type, will inform the content’s organizational appearance.
You could optimize based on whether the content will be gated or not. I recently wrote about the new twist in the gating debate caused by zero-click and AI-oriented search. Both trends raise interesting arguments for making digital content scarcer instead of more abundant.
If you do decide to gate, remember to consider intent. What motivates your customer to go through the gate? Perhaps instead of asking for personally identifying information, you ask, “Why do you want this content?”
You could use the responses (the data) gleaned from this form to understand not just what you think the intent is behind accessing this content but what the customer is seeking. This can help drive insights into which stories/content should be promoted on different platforms, such as social media, vertical sites, and other interfaces, that better match what customers are actually looking for.
Described
If the external context is an attribute that helps you organize content by how it’s displayed based on consumer behavior or context, the described attribute involves creating organization systems that let audiences filter, categorize, measure, personalize, and activate content. Described elements usually fall into three categories:
Descriptive metadata: categorical terms about the piece of content such as the audience persona, buyer’s journey phase, author, or product category.
Administrative metadata: content management elements such as publication dates, expiration dates, rights management, legal or compliance categorization, etc.
Structural metadata: details that help connect one content asset to others such as a set of data that reacts to a prompt like “If you like this, you might like this too.”
Move beyond Callimachus – optimize like a media company
I wouldn’t recommend using all of these methods, but you can (and should) include multiple approaches to reorganize your content.
The key is to start optimizing for humans. When you understand your audience and its intent, you can optimize content for findability.
Once you create in-depth, valuable, informative, and engaging content with authority, you can bring out the best meaning in your content and drive better internal context.
With that achieved (or in progress), you can move to the tech side of optimization with external contexts such as mobile, search, social, etc. You can describe that content so machines can understand and do more with it and use technical solutions to present it optimally.
Put more simply: The modern content marketer must emulate both Callimachus and modern media moguls. Your brand’s body of work is the poems and stories – you are the media distributor.
Your goal isn’t just to provide an information resource. It’s to engage and guide people to the best stories when they need them.
It’s your story. Tell it well.
Updated from a June 2023 article.
Want more content marketing tips, insights, and examples? Subscribe to workday or weekly emails from CMI.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
For the last 25 years, people have used internet search in a straightforward way.
Input a keyword or phrase, and the search engine returns pages and pages of results that match identically or conceptually to the request. The results were ranked by relevance — the word that became the Holy Grail for getting the coveted No. 1 slot on the results page.
Marketers cried everywhere, “How do we become more relevant?” and “How do we rank?”
The answers would deliver the prized organic — also known as free — traffic to your brand’s content.
Well, a week or so ago, the next big step in search arrived. It’s not really an evolution; it’s more like a devolution of how people can find information on the internet.
OpenAI launched ChatGPT as an AI-powered web search engine, bringing real-time information directly into conversations. As of this week, paid subscribers and people on the SearchGPT waitlist can access the new capabilities. Free, enterprise, and educational users will get the new feature in the coming weeks.
What will it do to traditional search? Should this change your cries about relevancy and ranking? Will you now ask, “How do we become THE answer?” and “How do we get cited?
Instead of turning to the chatbot to find out, we asked Robert Rose, CMI’s chief strategy advisor, for his take. Read on or watch this:
Reflection on search early days
The early days of internet search centered on the giant that is Google. It set the standard for everything.
Ever wondered why Google’s search results page was so ugly? Why did they never use images to break up the page or publish icons to help navigation? Google wanted to make searches as fast as possible. For years, Google highlighted how reducing its logo’s file size on search results pages saved bandwidth and, therefore, energy requirements. That’s how big Google was.
Google’s power was so great that Googlewhack was a game in the early days. Google’s index was so big that most combinations of words would return many results. So, the game was to come up with a two-word combination that would return exactly one result.
My favorite winner? “Demurrable insufficiencies.”
Googlewhack ended about 15 years ago when search indexing changed.
My point is that, like the size of the universe, it’s hard to understand how comprehensive, popular, and ubiquitous Google search has become and its influence on how people access information.
But AI search is growing. Google has begun including AI-generated overviews as one component of its classic search engine page. And, over a week ago, OpenAI launched an integrated web search into ChatGPT’s interface.
The ChatGPT feature determines when users can click or tap into web results based on queries, though they can also manually trigger web searches. This addition closes a key competitive gap with rivals like Copilot and Gemini that have long offered real-time access, which isn’t surprising given that their companies — Microsoft and Google — are behind two of the most popular search engines.
Is this the future vision of AI search?
Is OpenAI defining AI search the same way Google did for web search? Will it be better? Is it better already?
As a user, I must say it’s darn impressive. I used the ChatGPT Chrome extension as my default search browser and made my common everyday queries such as “marketing news this week” and “10-day forecast for my area.” It returned good results.
Further, the “answer” appears in the window, and the query conveniently goes on the left-side activity tracker. The sources cited in the answer appear on the right, followed by general search results.
Now, this is the interesting part. As far as I can tell, it cites three to five sources and provides another 12 results. That’s it — no page after page of results. Now, some may find that bad, and some may find it good. But one thing is certain: If ChatGPT keeps that format and its search takes off, a battle royale will ensue for those 12 spots listed for a query.
Here’s the other kicker. Articles have already been published about how OpenAI finds, indexes, and ranks content for display. Spoiler alert: It’s the Bing index, which makes sense given OpenAI’s partnership with Microsoft. But OpenAI also uses its own indexing bot.
I discovered the results for my search tests on Bing did NOT have the same rankings as those on ChatGPT. For example, a search for “workflow tools” on ChatGPT turned up a Techopedia listing as the fourth organic result. On Bing, that result appears on page two — about the 15th listing.
When I made a subtle change to the ChatGPT query, “OK, now I’m serious. Can you tell me the real best workflow tools?” ChatGPT returned very similar results, and only the order differed slightly.
However, when I changed the ChatGPT query to “I need a workflow tool for marketing content — which one is best?” ChatGPT gave me different answers altogether.
Welcome to the next round of search engine optimization. How do you become THE answer? How do you become ONE of the cited answers, AND how do you become a generic search result? Of course, I suspect Open AI will quickly monetize this so you can purchase your way into many of these recommendations and lists.
Will AI search be an easy game?
Finally, I decided to see how ChatGPT would handle a game of Googlewhack, or, maybe I should say, Chatwhack. I tried my old winning combo of “demurrable insufficiencies” — just two words meaninglessly stuck together.
Today, Google returned exactly 15 results, which all reference the Googlewhack game. ChatGPT desperately wanted to create an answer.
Instead of saying, “You’re joking” or “Come on, that’s not a real word,” ChatGPT said, “demurrable insufficiencies likely refers to deficiencies in a legal pleading that render it susceptible to a demurrer. In California, for instance, a demurrer can challenge a complaint on grounds like lack of jurisdiction, lack of legal capacity to sue, or failure to state facts sufficient to constitute a cause of action …” It also cited a few sources that define demurrable and insufficiency.
Uh, OK.
This Chatwhack test illustrates an interesting thing you must watch out for: The biggest insight may be what you don’t get from search results. What does it say when you ask for insight on a particular restaurant or pose a technical question and get 15 nonsensical results from the internet?
Even if it makes up desperate responses, ChatGPT must achieve its goal of providing an answer. In some cases, these forced answers are likely to be combinations of sources referring to one part of the query or another.
So, remember, searchers will get an answer, but it might not be the answer.
Big adventures on the way for search, marketing, and AI — and ChatGPT might just be the tipping point that brings you to it.
Want more content marketing tips, insights, and examples? Subscribe to workday or weekly emails from CMI.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
Someone suggests a content marketing tactic or topic, and you instantly think, “That’s an awful idea. We can’t do it.”
Maybe it’s a new tactic that doesn’t fit into your content strategy. Perhaps it’s an idea that’s already been done. Or, possibly, the suggestion requires significant resources, and your content and marketing teams are already stretched thin.
Instead of giving them an immediate “no,” what if you explored how to turn the underwhelming idea into captivating, audience-engaging content? It’s not a pipe dream — it’s a skill set and framework you can learn.
We break the process into two parts — gathering information and developing a communication road map. Let’s begin so you don’t waste more time fretting over less-than-thrilling ideas.
Part 1: Prepare an informed response to the bad idea
Let curiosity lead the journey to turn the bad idea into something marvelous or gain alignment to kill it. Follow this framework to make every transformational step purposeful and impactful.
Step 1: Understand the ask
“Let’s do a podcast,” says the CMO.
“Let’s create a microsite that talks all about our new customer,” says the CEO.
“Let’s do a blog post about all of our updated product features,” says the vice president of product marketing.
Requests like these raise one question: “Why?” Try to get to the root of the request. Is the CMO asking for a podcast because they like listening to them? Does the CEO want to celebrate the new customer in a big way? Does the product marketing team think a blog post is the only way to let customers know about a product’s new features?
To gain insight into the motivation, ask the requester some questions, such as:
Why is this idea top of mind?
What do you like most about the idea?
How did this idea originate?
Have you done it or seen another company do it?
Then, ask what success would look like.
Sometimes, your partners, even with the best intentions, propose deliverables that may be better achieved in a different way. By knowing the background for the request, you can consider other options. For example, that blog post could work better as a newsletter. That microsite might be more successful as a case study on the main site. And that podcast might never deliver the expected outcome.
Step 2: Determine the intent
Successful organizations have goals from companywide to individual team key performance indicators. So, focus on the idea’s intent and answer these questions:
How does its objective align with existing goals?
Do the goals align?
Where are they off, and why?
Find the idea’s overlap or misalignment between what the requester views as success and your team’s KPIs. Now, you can evolve the idea into something new.
For example, when our CMO wanted a podcast, the goals and the metrics of the podcast were misaligned. The team’s content KPIs are related to driving traffic to the website and leading people down the funnel to acquire leads. However, the podcast-hosting platform only tracked subscribers. We couldn’t track any listeners who came to our website or converted to a lead. Ultimately, this misalignment contributed to the CMO’s acceptance of not doing the podcast in favor of activities that aligned better with the goals.
Step 3: Focus on the real audience
You usually start a content initiative by understanding the needs of your brand’s target audience. However, it’s the third step in this framework because your first audience is the requester of the bad idea. By understanding their ask and the expected outcomes, you can then redirect the conversation to the customer.
Look for opportunities to transform the idea to fulfill the customer’s wants. Use the “yes and” method with the requester, such as: “Yes, I love your idea of a blog post about the product features, and let’s start the article by explaining how our customer can solve their pain point.”
Step 4: Identify where the idea fits in the content journey
Now, you must identify how the ask fits into the planned editorial calendar. Do you have content gaps along the journey that could be filled with this idea? Can you optimize other assets to help meet this request?
You may need to audit your published content to understand what is really working for your audience and why. That data can help you move the conversation to a better idea.
Step 5: Look at your resources
A lot of the time, not-so-great ideas come with a ton of enthusiasm and urgency — leading to delays in other activities and stress about how to execute them. Instead of succumbing to that disruption, assess what your team needs to facilitate the conversation on what to do next:
Do you need more budget or resources?
Do you have the right tools to measure the impact of the request?
Do you have the time to do it correctly?
With all the knowledge gained in Part 1 of this process, you now have sufficient information to start the next framework and build a better idea.
Part 2: Collaborate to get a better idea
Now, you are ready to communicate and collaborate so you and the requester can move forward together. You’ll likely need written communication and face-to-face conversations to finalize the proposal or strategy document and a creative brief.
Step 1: State the common ground
Start by stating your alignment, such as: “I’ve talked to everyone involved in this project, and we all agree on who the audience is and that we don’t want this project to hijack the work this quarter.”
A statement like that builds a strong foundation for what’s ahead.
Step 2: Acknowledge obstacles
Be open about what may get in the way of success. Be upfront about the uncovered challenges, anticipated problems, and areas of disagreement. Is the budget adequate? Is the execution team overloaded, forcing reprioritization? You don’t need to spend a lot of time on this step. Simply naming the challenges makes it easier for everyone to discuss them and work together to overcome them.
Step 3: Restate the goals
Next, build the business case for the revised idea. Lay out the goals identified in the information-gathering steps. You don’t need an exhaustive list. Capture the most important top-line goals from the major stakeholders and the goals expressed by more than one person or team.
Step 4: Find a common goal
If you’re lucky, Step 3 will reveal a common goal or at least identify overlap to create one or two shared goals.
More commonly, though, shared goal setting requires in-person conversation or debate. To make this discussion productive, use everything you learned in Step 3 to narrow the list. Kick off the debate by suggesting three to four likely goals.
Let the requester and other stakeholders narrow the list to a single, shared goal. (If one goal isn’t possible, identify a primary and secondary goal.)
Setting the common goal(s) anchors the brainstorming in the next step to ensure the new ideas can achieve it.
Step 5: Let the ideas roll
Now comes the potentially hardest and most fun part. Your approach to exploring new ideas will vary to suit your situation, the culture of the organization, and the nature of the request.
A brainstorming session with most or all the players will likely generate several options. If that participant number is too unwieldy, brainstorming with a smaller subset may be more productive. In any brainstorming group, include an outsider — someone in your organization who isn’t a stakeholder or directly involved in the project. This fresh, baggage-free perspective can be just what’s needed to get that aha moment that often precedes the emergence of the winning idea.
Another option is to kickstart the ideation process by putting forth a short list of alternative ideas. To get buy-in, present more than just your “great idea.” Even if the decision-making process isn’t democratic, asking for input in the selection can help get everybody to support the chosen idea and do their best work on the project.
As you work through the ideas generated from the brainstorming exercise or your shortlist of options, orient everybody around the common goal identified in the previous step. Set aside really cool ideas that won’t achieve that goal for discussion at another time. Pointing your colleagues back to the goal is also a handy way to stop new “bad ideas” from emerging.
Step 6: Repeat as needed
It’s time to admit a hard truth: This process may not be linear. It’s perfectly normal to take two steps forward and one step back. You may need to revisit earlier steps or even start over. But even that signals progress — your earlier learning makes it easier and faster the second (or third) time around.
Step 7: Get a final agreement
While everyone’s path through these steps may be unique, the feeling of triumph in moving in a better direction is universal. At this stage, it’s helpful to summarize the journey and thank everyone for their involvement. You want them to feel invested in the process and the outcome because you’ll likely need their help and support in the execution.
Work together to get a better idea
Even if the information-gathering and transformation framework process isn’t straightforward, turning those not-so-great ideas into something wonderful is incredibly satisfying. You work together to consider more options and get everybody on board for a smooth transition from ideas to action.
So, instead of responding with an immediate “no” to a bad idea, say, “Come at us. Give us all you’ve got. Let’s transform the terrible into terrific to uncover the real magic of innovation with top-notch content.”
Updated from a November 2023 article.
Want more content marketing tips, insights, and examples? Subscribe to workday or weekly emails from CMI.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
You likely associate influencer marketing with well-known B2C tactics. Engaging social media personalities to co-create content and promote products to their massive follower base is a proven way to drive awareness for consumer-friendly products and services.
The technique is playing just as big a role on the B2B side. A 2023 Ogilvy report finds that 75% of B2B businesses use influencer marketing, and more than half of the remaining 25% plan to do so.
However, business audiences may be less likely to turn to Instagram or TikTok for trustworthy product advice. And because B2B sales cycles are longer and more complex, campaigns targeting lower-funnel informational needs could drive a more significant impact.
B2B marketers need to follow a different game plan when working with influencers. It starts with making informed decisions about who to partner with and how to position your efforts for optimal success. Use these expert recommendations to guide you.
Choose your influencers wisely
B2B influencers come in two flavors: internal and external. Often, B2B marketers will use a mix, but each has a role to play, says Pam Didner, a B2B marketer, author, and speaker.
“Internal influencers should be subject matter experts,” Pam says. “An external influencer is a thought leader in your space — someone you want to collaborate with.”
Collaborations with thought leaders can be tricky, though, because thought leaders have their own business needs to consider. That’s why B2B marketers need to put a lot of care into screening and preparing the influencer for their campaigns.
“With [external] thought leaders, you really want to understand their expertise, where they shine, and how your brand can leverage their expertise to amplify your message,” Pam says. “You need to have a very in-depth conversation.”
Audience size matters – but not how you might think
Working with an influencer with millions of followers may not be essential for effective B2B engagement. According to Tim Davidson, a B2B content creator and the founder and vice president of marketing at B2B Rizz, the size of an influencer’s audience should correlate to the size of the total addressable market.
Wendy Covey, CEO and co-founder of TREW Marketing, concurs. Wendy points out that it’s much more important to have the right audience — likely those who inform or drive purchase decisions later in the buying cycle.
Tim also notes that a massive audience could be a big red flag: “It’s quite easy to game the algorithms with broad content, engagement pods, and buying followers.”
That means you may not get the reach you expect from your chosen influencer partner(s) — a compelling reason to consider building your strategy on internal expertise.
Support the success of your internal evangelists
At the other end of the spectrum, developing influencers internally makes it easier to scale campaign cadence and align their efforts with your brand’s goals. However, companies must inspire and support employees who agree to be influencers.
“People care more about [how being an influencer] impacts their career than the business,” Tim says. “[You have to] show how being known as an expert impacts them and their opportunities.”
Even if content creation and external-facing roles come naturally to in-house influencers, it helps to invest in education and training. That can mean hiring a ghostwriter to level up the copy in their articles and op-eds and provide technical specialists to help in-house influencers produce professional-quality podcasts and videos. Just as important, leaders should recognize that influencing is work.
“Give people time to post and create,” Tim says. “If you expect them to do it on top of everything else, they simply won’t have enough time, and it’ll always get de-prioritized.”
Weigh your compensation options
It’s impossible to talk about influencer selection without discussing compensation — financial or otherwise.
While employee influencers typically aren’t paid extra, be prepared to incentivize their brand advocacy in other ways. Discuss how the opportunity can help advance their career or personal goals. Offer media training or pair them with specialists to help refine their content’s quality. Tim also recommends adjusting their workloads so their influencer tasks don’t end up on the back burner.
On the other hand, if you are paying external influencers, don’t expect a standard rate. “It’s the Wild West right now in B2B,” Tim says. “It’s all negotiable so that payment will differ from one influencer to the next.”
Remember: There’s a big difference between paying an influencer and treating it as a transaction. Payment, after all, is a normal part of any business. However, transactional engagements probably won’t feel organic or authentic to the audience.
“Many [B2B influencers] are motivated by benefits from your company that help grow their business rather than a generic transactional relationship,” Wendy says. “These benefits may include early access to products, behind-the-scenes tours, a trade show demo in your booth, or elevated support. Ask lots of questions to uncover points of synergy and then think out of the box when it comes to how they will support your brand, and vice versa.”
Align influencer efforts with top-priority goals
While intelligent personnel and payment decisions are critical, influencer success often hinges on the strategic alignment of your efforts with your marketing goals.
One school of thought holds that B2B influencer campaigns should focus on driving awareness at the top of the funnel.
For example, Wendy Covey says the ultimate goal of the B2B influencer is to make sure their brand is top-of-mind when a prospect is ready to talk to sales rather than to drive a transaction at the moment. “B2B influencers are thought leaders — buyers look to them for information about the history and trajectory of their industry, answers to challenging problems, and insight on how to stay ahead of the trends.”
Yet, Tim Davidson argues that B2B influencers can do more than raise brand awareness. “Think of influencers [as a value-add] at every stage of the funnel. What changes is how you use the influencer.”
For example, in the middle of the funnel, Tim sees customers talking about their experience with the brand’s product as an influencer play that helps pull prospects into higher-level conversations.
Tim also notes a viable approach for fueling bottom-funnel goals: “Assuming the person you’re working with is a subject matter expert [and they’re open to it], try and have them on sales calls, or make introductions to help move potential deals along.”
Activate on actionable B2B channels
B2B influencer marketing isn’t necessarily as dependent on social media as its B2C counterpart. However, LinkedIn is a notable exception, as it’s the preferred social platform for developing professional relationships.
To tap into relevant conversations on LinkedIn, Allison Champion, former senior director and head of marketing communications at e-commerce fulfillment platform Flowspace, treats influential industry voices like traditional media by inviting them to briefings and pitching story ideas. “B2B influencers are more approachable than press because they’re eager to build their networks,” Allison says.
Pam Didner has a name for this tactic — influencing the influencer — and suggests providing them with early scoops, inside information, research, and access to your thought leaders: “This will help them position themselves as an industry-forward pundit and bring your brand along for the ride.”
Diversify your engagement destinations
While influencing the influencer often involves LinkedIn, the reality is that the platform doesn’t capture the entire audience. Part of the reason for that is media fragmentation. Another factor is how B2B spaces are changing, thanks to digital tools, new platforms, and remote work.
Allison recently began hosting a Flowspace podcast, Stories from the Shelf, to reach customer personas that might not show up in traditional spaces.
“We want to be a forum for conversations in the fulfillment space,” Allison says. “Our guests are the influencers, and we invite logistics and operations leaders to tell stories about how brands grow, scale, and move the needle.”
Allison’s experience isn’t unique. Wendy Covey notes that, in an episode of her Content Marketing, Engineered podcast, the marketing team at Heatcraft Refrigeration Products told her their YouTube influencer has helped them troubleshoot quality issues, improve products, and close the loop between product, manufacturing, and customers.
Let influential voices speak to your brand experience
Even if your influencer relationships don’t directly impact your products, they can improve the value of your content. Cultivate beneficial partnerships and properly position their expertise, and you both stand to make a meaningful impact on your content goals.
A version of this article originally appeared in the May/June 2024 edition of Chief Content Officer.
Get more advice from Chief Content Officer, a monthly publication for content leaders. Subscribe today to get it in your inbox.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
Your first thought might be about first-party data collection, performance metrics, or metadata for targeted content. But that’s not what I’m getting at.
Instead, I’m asking: What’s your strategy for shaping thought leadership, crafting stories, building your brand message, and delivering sales materials that engage and persuade?
“Hold on,” you might say. “Isn’t that content strategy?”
Well, yes. But also, no.
Is it content, or is it data?
Generative AI is blurring the lines between content and data.
When you think of your articles, podcasts, and videos, you likely don’t see them as “data.” But AI providers do.
AI providers don’t talk about their models learning from “engaging content” or “well-crafted stories.” Instead, they talk about accessing and processing “data” (text, images, audio, and video). AI providers commonly use the term “training data” as the de rigueur way to refer to the datasets they rely on for model development and learning.
This perspective isn’t wrong — it’s rooted in the history of search engines, where patterns and frequency determined relevance, and the “indexes” of search engines were just big buckets of unstructured files and text (i.e., data).
No one ever pretended that search engines understood the meaning in their giant bucket of every content type imaginable. Reducing it down to “data” seemed appropriate.
But AI companies now attribute understanding and intuition to this data. They claim they have all that information and the ability to rearrange it and intuit the best answer.
But let’s be clear: AI doesn’t understand. It predicts.
It generates the most probable next word or image — structured information devoid of intent or meaning. Meaning is — and always will be — a human construct resulting from the intentionality behind communication.
Fighting for meaning
This difference underpins the growing tension between content creators and AI providers.
AI vendors argue that the internet is a vast pool of publicly accessible data — as available to machines as it is to humans — and their tools help bring deeper meaning.
Content creators argue that people learn from content imbued with intent, but AI merely steals the products and rearranges them without care for the original meaning.
Interestingly, the conflict arises over something both agree on — that the machine determines the meaning.
But it doesn’t.
The internet makes data (content) available to AI, but only humans can create meaning from it.
And that makes the distinction between content and data more critical than ever.
What’s the difference?
A recent study found that consumers show less positive word-of-mouth and loyalty when they believe emotional content was created by AI rather than by a human.
Interestingly, this study didn’t focus on whether participants could detect whether the content was AI-generated. Instead, the same content was presented to two groups: One was told it was created by a human (the control group), while the other was informed that it was generated by AI.
The study’s conclusion: “Companies must carefully consider whether and how to disclose AI-authored communications.”
Spoiler alert: No one will.
In another study, however, researchers tested whether people could distinguish between AI-generated and human-generated content. Participants identified AI-generated text correctly only 53% of the time — barely better than random guessing, which would achieve 50% accuracy.
Spoiler alert: No, we can’t.
We are hard-wired to get this wrong
In 2008, science historian Michael Shermer coined the word “patternicity.” In his book, The Believing Brain, he defines the term as “the tendency to find meaningful patterns in both meaningful and meaningless noise.”
He said humans tend to “infuse these patterns with meaning, intention, and agency,” calling this phenomenon “agenticity.”
So, as humans, we’re wired to make two types of errors:
Type 1 errors, where we see the false positive — we see a pattern that doesn’t exist.
Type 2 errors, where we see the false negative — we miss a pattern that exists.
When it comes to generative AI, people are at risk of making both types of errors.
AI providers and people’s tendency to anthropomorphize the technology primes people for Type 1 errors. That’s why the solutions are marketed as a “co-pilot,” “assistant,” “researcher,” or “creative partner.”
A data-driven-content mindset leads marketers to chase patterns of success that may not exist. They risk mistaking quick first drafts for agile content without questioning whether the drafts offer any real value or differentiation.
AI-generated “strategies” and “research” feel credible simply because they’re written clearly (and the vendors claim the technology taps into deeper knowledge than people possess).
Many people equate these fast answers with accuracy, overlooking that the system only regurgitates what it has absorbed — truthful or not.
And here’s the irony: Our awareness of these risks could lead us to Type 2 errors and hold us back from realizing the benefits of generative AI tools. We could fail to see patterns that really are there. For example, if we settle into believing that AI always produces average or “not quite true” content, we’ll fail to see the pattern that shows how good AI is at solving complex processing challenges.
As the technology improves, the risk is settling for “good enough” — from both ourselves and the tools we use.
CMI’s recent research highlights this trend. In the 2025 Career Outlook for Content and Marketing study, the most commonly listed use for AI among marketers is “brainstorm new topics.” However, the next five most common responses — each cited by over 30% of respondents — focused on tasks like summarizing content, writing drafts, optimizing posts, crafting email copy, and creating social media content.
But CMI’s B2B Content Marketing Benchmarks, Budgets, and Trends research reveals growing AI hesitation. Thirty-five percent of marketers cite accuracy as their top generative AI concern.
While most respondents report only a “medium” level of trust in the technology, 61% still rate the quality of AI-generated content as excellent (3%), very good (14%), or good (44%). Another 35% rate it as fair, and 4% as poor.
So, we’re using these tools to produce content we consider satisfactory, but we’re uncertain about its accuracy and only moderately trust the results.
This approach to generative AI shows that marketers tend to use it to produce transactional content at scale. Instead of living up to the promise that AI will “unlock our creativity,” marketers risk living down to the possibility of locking ourselves out of it.
Seek better questions instead of faster answers
The essence of modern marketing is part data, part content — and a lot of understanding and giving meaning to our customers. It’s about uncovering their dreams, fears, aspirations, and desires — the invisible threads that guide them forward.
To paraphrase my marketing hero, Philip Kotler, modern marketing isn’t just about mind share or heart share. It’s about spirit share, something that transcends narrow self-interest.
So, how can we modern marketers balance all those things and deepen the meaning of our communications?
First, recognize that the content people create today becomes the dataset that defines us tomorrow. No matter how it’s generated, our content will carry inherent biases and varying degrees of value.
For AI-generated content to provide value beyond the data you already have, move past the idea of using the technology merely to increase the speed or scale of creating words, pictures, audio, and video.
Instead, embrace it as a tool to enhance the ongoing process of extracting meaningful insights and fostering deeper relationships with our customers.
If generative AI is to become more effective over time, it requires more than just technological refinement — it requires people to grow. People need to become more creative, empathetic, and wise to ensure that both the technology and the people who use it don’t devolve into something meaningless.
Our teams will need more, not fewer, roles that can extract valuable insights from AI-generated content and transform them into meaningful ideas.
The people who fill these roles won’t necessarily be journalists or designers. But they’ll have the skill to ask thoughtful questions, engage with customers and influencers, and transform raw information into meaningful insights through listening, conversation, and synthesis.
The qualities required resemble those of artists, journalists, talented researchers, or subject matter experts. Perhaps this could even be the next evolution of the influencer’s role.
The road ahead is still unfolding.
One thing is clear: If generative AI is to be more than a distracting novelty, businesses need a new role —a manager of meaning — to guide the way AI-driven ideas are shaped into actual value.
It’s your story. Tell it well.
Subscribe to workday or weekly CMI emails to get Rose-Colored Glasses in your inbox each week.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
Seth, a data scientist and New York Times bestselling author, recounts the story of Jeff Seder, an entrepreneur and self-described innovator in analytics for horse racing.
With three degrees from Harvard University, Jeff quit his banking job to be around nature and horses. His mission was to use data to determine what makes racehorses great. It was an era before Michael Lewis’ 2003 book, Moneyball, explained the use of analytics in Major League Baseball.
How do you find the winning data analytics formula?
Jeff analyzed the attributes of racehorses to see which predicted champion-level success. The characteristics he examined included:
Size of nostrils
Volume of fast twitch muscles
Size of defecations
They all failed to predict success. But Jeff kept trying, and after 20 years, was on the verge of bankruptcy.
But then the tide turned.
Jeff built the first electrocardiogram to measure a horse’s internal organs and discovered that the heart’s left ventricle was a valid predictor of champions. Case in point: American Pharoah. In 2015, the horse won the Triple Crown, the first in 37 years to win all three famed races run by 3-year-old thoroughbreds. But two years earlier, no one realized the amazing racehorse American Pharoah would become, except Jeff.
Consider these attributes of American Pharoah:
Height (56th percentile)
Weight (61st percentile)
Pedigree (70th percentile)
Size of the left ventricle (99.61st percentile)
While height, weight, and pedigree weren’t overwhelmingly impressive, American Pharoah’s outsized left ventricle accurately predicted its Triple Crown success.
Seth shares the story to illuminate these takeaways for data-focused marketers:
A dataset’s value usually is not its size but its newness.
Winners in Big Data are entrepreneurial.
Winners in Big Data fail a lot to find the big winner.
“Left-ventricle” discoveries are out there.
By embracing these insights, Seth says, you can make your data model 10 times better than everyone else’s.
MADS lesson: You can discover your brand’s “left ventricles” in analytics data (e.g., web, email marketing, social media marketing, paid search). Form a hypothesis by asking a question. Analyze the data to answer it. If the answer is no, ask another question. Keep going, like Jeff Seder did, until you find the “left ventricle” that leads your campaigns to Triple Crown success.
Can you trust what people say?
All data, though, isn’t necessarily helpful. Take surveys, for example. Seth explains that the format frequently used by Gallup and Pew Research Center can be used to understand why people do things. But there’s an inherent problem with surveying.
People often say what they think will impress someone else. It’s called social desirability bias. Seth gives an example of people saying they voted when they didn’t or saying they voted for one candidate when they voted for another. They knowingly give incorrect responses because they want to be seen as doing the socially acceptable thing.
But where can marketers go to find pure honesty? In Google searches, Seth says. He calls it the “digital truth serum” because people confess to it. They ask questions about their health conditions, relationships, and whatever else is on their mind. They feel free to be honest because they perceive no one is on the other end to judge them.
Seth says Google knows more about people than their own partners and family members. So, instead of asking what people do, use Google Trends. It is better than Gallup at predicting who will turn out to vote and unemployment rates, and at measuring racism.
However, Seth cautions us not to treat all Big Data as the same truth serum. If Google is a digital truth serum, Seth calls social platforms like Facebook the “digital brag-to-my-friends-about-how-good-my-life-is serum.”
To illustrate his point, Seth shares his research about the term “husband” in social media posts and Google searches. Here are the top phrases completing the statement, “My husband is ___________,” based on the platform:
Social media
Google searches
The best
Gay
My best friend
A jerk
Amazing
Amazing
The greatest
Annoying
So cute
Mean
As you can see, spouses want to project positivity about their husbands on social media, whereas Google searches reveal what they really think.
MADS lesson: Study what users say (i.e., survey data) and what users do (i.e., web or app analytics data). Find your source of digital truth serum and use that to guide your marketing and business strategy decisions.
It’s not just in surveys and social media posts. People lie to themselves. In other words, your gut feelings can be wrong. Seth tells a story about an app called Mappiness. Users receive a ping at different times during the day with a prompt asking how they are feeling and what they are doing.
The first-person data revealed that these activities are most associated with happiness:
Intimacy/making love
Theater/dance/concert
Exhibiting/museum/library
These activities are the least associated with happiness:
Care or help for adults
Working/studying
Sick in bed
While these two lists may not surprise you, the research revealed a surprising result — the difference between what people think will make them happy and what actually does. Here’s what the Mappiness data uncovered.
Underrated activities that made people happier than expected included:
Museum
Sports
Drinking alcohol
Gardening
Shopping
Overrated activities, which made people less happy than expected, included:
Sleeping
Computer games
Watching TV
Eating
Browsing the internet
Seth says the data is clear: If you want to be happier, spend less time inside. Go out, be active, and explore the world.
MADS lesson: Collect data to analyze how well your marketing gut (i.e., perception) performs in reality (i.e., overrated, underrated, on target).
What role does appearance play?
Seth brought the personal into the conversation when citing research from Alexander Todorov, a professor at the University of Chicago Booth School of Business. His study explored the prediction of election winners based on their appearance.
In the experiment, participants viewed two candidates’ photos side by side and were asked to identify which one looked more competent. The research concluded by finding that 70% of elections were won by the candidate whom users selected as appearing more competent.
Before reading this research, Seth says he never paid attention to his appearance. But now he considered changing it, so like any good data scientist would, he turned to data analytics, for the assist.
Using AI-powered FaceApp, Seth created 100 versions of himself. Following Alexander’s research, he placed two versions before people and asked them which one looked more competent.
Using a regression analysis, he concluded that the only two factors that influenced the competency preference were a beard and eyeglasses. Wearing both boosted his competency rating to a 7.8 from a 5.8.
Not surprisingly, Seth appeared on stage with a beard and glasses.
MADS lesson: Just as a candidate’s appearance influences the viewer’s perception of competence, so do the look and feel of websites and apps. Use focus groups to understand which design elements users associate with feelings of delight or satisfaction.
How will you use data analytics in your marketing?
I left Seth’s keynote talk inspired to find new and creative ways to use marketing analytics to drive decision-making. Now, though, I will do that better because I have heard Seth’s “left-ventricle” thinking. Data should be the arbiter of decisions, but only if it’s true and accurate.
All tools mentioned in this article were suggested by the author. If you’d like to suggest a tool, share the article on social media with a comment.
Want more insight from these and other Content Marketing World speakers? Register for an on-demand passto get access to session recordings through January 31, 2025. Use code BLOG100 to save $100.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
It looks like Semrush took notes on CMI’s advice that the best way to launch a content marketing platform is to acquire one.
The search engine software provider acquired Third Door Media, which owns and operates properties that include Search Engine Land, MarTech, Search Marketing Expo, and Digital Marketing Depot.
Semrush’s acquisition of the company with digital publications and events stands as one of the most meaningful content acquisitions in some time. So, we asked CMI’s chief strategy advisor, Robert Rose, for his take. Read on or watch this video for his insight:
Semrush bucks the trend of languishing interest in owned media
In modern marketing, this is the right way to go.
Over the last year, I’ve seen a pullback in owned media property launches. The decline in organic search traffic, social media competition for eyeballs, and bigger walled gardens have discouraged brands from embracing the classic idea of marketing as a publisher.
Ironically, an SEO company recognized — or at least placed a big bet — that the owned-media property battle isn’t over.
It’s not often that I get to go down memory lane, but Third Door Media is one of the most storied digital marketing media companies that you haven’t heard of. Going back to the turn of the 21st century, marketers were reeling from the disruptive changes of this new thing called internet search.
Danny Sullivan was a super smart guy in the space. He started a company called Search Engine Watch and later added an event called Search Engine Strategies, which I attended in November 1999 as a fancy internet strategy consultant. It was when I first saw a small startup company exhibiting that had a funny name called Google.
Anway, five years later, Danny and Chris Elwell started another publication — Search Engine Land — and launched an event called Search Engine Expo.
By 2006, the company Third Door Media was founded, and it has quietly provided great content and events for the last two decades. Along the way, it launched Martech.org and an associated event on marketing technology and even got Scott Brinker and his MarTech Landscape involved.
And now, Semrush, the search engine marketing software company, owns it all. In the announcement, Semrush CMO Andrew Warden says this acquisition is “part of our commitment to inspire and equip both current and future generations of digital marketers with the know-how to succeed in an increasingly competitive landscape.”
Carefully worded, public-relations-generated quote aside, make no bones about it, Semrush executed a content marketing-owned media play. In one fell swoop, it now has access to the first-party data of an incredibly valuable audience that loves the content made by Third Door Media properties.
Semrush also gets multiple built-in customer events, immediately adding a Salesforce Dreamforce-like platform to its content marketing portfolio.
2025 will bring a bigger story and renewed interest
Given that Semrush is a publicly traded company, I expect more information to be revealed in the coming quarters about how it will account for this new acquisition that’s already a revenue-generating platform. It has the potential to be a marketing strategy that pays for itself in short order.
A hearty congratulations to the Semrush and Third Door Media teams. It’s a win-win, especially for such storied content brands now under the stewardship of Semrush.
My only caveat: Don’t mess it up. Acquisitions can be tricky. It’s easy to lose the trust these publications have built over the years.
I look forward to seeing this real-time case study develop. I hope the strategy team at Semrush feels what I feel — having and building a portfolio of owned properties is a trend returning in 2025. I already see some interesting new projects from brands, indicating a new focus on differentiated owned media as a way to generate great marketing.
Want more content marketing tips, insights, and examples? Subscribe to workday or weekly emails from CMI.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
Last week, I witnessed glimmers of light building into full-on radiance on the faces of thousands of attendees at Content Marketing World as new ideas took hold.
The enthusiasm expressed in San Diego felt especially welcome given the general feeling of “meh” about their content and marketing strategies our latest research detected earlier this year.
Here at CMI, we don’t gatekeep good ideas. I’ll share some of the highlights from the keynote stage here. And we’ll bring you many more takeaways from other sessions throughout the year. (Of course, if you can’t wait, you can always pick up a digital pass and watch the sessions on demand.)
I hope these ideas spark your excitement to follow CMI chief strategy officer Robert Rose’s appeal to do something (bold, or big, or brilliant) with your content and marketing strategies.
1. Inspire admiration and demand
Another college story also lit up the keynote stage — this one from R. Ethan Braden, vice president and chief marketing and communications officer at Texas A&M University and 2023 B2C Content Marketer of the Year.
Late last year, Ethan moved to Texas A&M from Purdue University, where he presided over award-winning content and marketing programs.
On the Texas A&M campus, he spotted this motto engraved in stone:
“From the outside looking in, you can’t understand it. From the inside looking out, you can’t explain it.”
Yet that was Ethan’s charge — to tell Texas A&M’s story and stories to the outside world in a way that stands out from the competition (4,000 other institutes of higher education).
He found the spark to meet that charge in the verb “enchant.” Though it sounds like a Disney philosophy, Ethan prefers this definition: to rouse and attract an ecstatic admiration and demand for something.
How can your brand do that?
Ethan outlines the four principles that make your brand remarkable (or should I say, “resparkable?):
Great brands stand for something and someone. Ethan pointed to Patagonia, Nike, and Volvo as standout examples. Standing for something and someone can attract an audience, but it often repels a potential audience, too. Decide what you stand for and who you are for.
Great brands offer outcomes, not features. I loved the quote Ethan shared from Tony Ives, “Be a painkiller, not a vitamin.” He explained that, though people should take vitamins daily, they often don’t because they don’t see an immediate benefit. However, people take painkillers because they solve a problem at the moment. The lesson? Offer something the audience needs or wants now. Figure out what outcome your brand makes possible for them.
Great brands are about feelings, not facts. Envy, respect, shame, fear, relief, and nostalgia are only a handful of the reactions your brand can evoke. Ethan shared this observation from Seth Godin (which was a lightbulb moment for me): I don’t know that anyone has ever gotten a Suzuki tattoo, but millions pay to tattoo Harley Davidson on their bodies. How are you harnessing feelings to develop an enchanted audience?
Great brands tell great stories. What stories are you telling?
2. Efficiency isn’t everything
A favorite returning keynote speaker, Ann Handley, didn’t disappoint. She sparked the audience’s interest with a topic on every attendee’s mind — the impact of generative AI. Ann extolled AI’s efficiency virtues. But she also asked if efficiency should always be the goal.
Ann’s answer is a resounding no. She sees value in inefficiency — slowing down can allow you to think differently about the content you create.
Cultivating high-growth projects with lasting impact requires a different meaning for ASAP, Ann says: as slow as possible. She even coined a word for it, combining slow and moment into slowment.
3. Keep seeking the glow
Seth Stephens-Davidowitz, author of Everybody Lies and Don’t Trust Your Gut, reminded us all that it’s OK if the spark doesn’t light as long as you try again.
He relayed the story of Jeff Seder, a consultant on racing thoroughbred horses. Jeff wanted to adopt a data-based strategy for determining which horses would be big winners. He started studying the nostril size of winning horses, but that spark didn’t shed any significant light. Jeff worked through multiple ideas, including the size of a horse’s poop, which all failed. But he eventually found one that ignited — the size of the left ventricle of the horse’s heart. And that discovery helped him predict a fire on the racetrack — American Pharoah, the horse that became the rare Triple Crown winner in 2015.
Seth shared another story to show how data can spark the future success of your content and marketing programs. Just make sure you have the whole story. For example, likes and follows on social media are not necessarily signals of buying interest. Seth used a comparison between The Atlantic and the National Enquirer. On Facebook, Atlantic Monthly has 45 times more followers than the National Enquirer. However, the National Enquirer sells three times more copies.
4. Put out content fires the right way
At one point, a Salesforce content initiative led by Melissa Leu landed on an “on fire” list — and not the good kind.
But the initial failure of that program provided the spark that led Melissa and her team to work to create a better program. They pivoted to create Salesblazer, which earned recognition as the 2024 Content Marketing Project of the Year.
How? They went back to the basics of content marketing — helping the audience solve their problems on a channel they want to use. (I encourage you to read the in-depth story behind what they did.)
5. Create joy, professionally and personally
Shabnam Mogharabi, author of Harness the Power of Joy to Uplift and Inspire, sparked something within many in the audience.
She co-founded Soul Pancake, a content-focused endeavor to uplift and give meaning to the human experience by creating more joy, with Rainn Wilson (of The Office fame).
Stress and anxiety consume so much of people’s professional and personal lives that intentionally choosing joy is an act of rebellion, Shabnam said. And she also came prepared with a toolkit on how to do that:
Express gratitude: Being grateful and expressing your thankfulness for other people is the magic bullet. Shabnam says expressing gratitude isn’t just about the recipient. It has a profound effect on the givers’ brains, too.
Know your why: What you do matters less than why you do it. To uncover your why, Shabnam suggests the seven-levels-of-why framework. Each time you answer the question, you get closer to the essential seed of truth. For example, you may first say a meeting deadline at work is important because you want to be a good worker. But keep asking why, and you may ultimately reveal that it’s because you want your kids to be proud of you.
Build community. Yes, it can feel uncomfortable to put yourself out there. But vulnerability is the key to good relationships and building trust. How do you do it? Join. Show up. Stay.
Shabnam closed by sharing the final steps in rebelling through joy: Start small. Start today.
You don’t have to go big, but you do have to start.
What small spark will you ignite today? And how will you coax it to burn bright in your content and marketing programs?
Meanwhile, I’ll express my gratitude for these incredible speakers and the fantastic Content Marketing World community. Hope to see you next year!
Couldn’t attend Content Marketing World in person this year? Register for the Digital Pass to access on-demand session recordings from the live event through January 31, 2025. Use promo code BLOG100 to save $100.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
Did Salesforce really need another content project?
The company’s mega-successful Trailblazer program, launched way back in 2007 as IdeaExchange, had evolved into a global community (mainly Salesforce admins and developers) that helps members learn and succeed in their careers and businesses. In 2014, the free online learning platform Trailhead launched as an additional step in the experience.
But sales professionals — the primary users of Salesforce’s OG product, Sales Cloud — weren’t interested in taking that trip.
As competitors sprouted to take market share and website traffic declined, Salesforce’s visionary CEO Marc Benioff planted a seed. “He saw these headwinds coming and wanted our company to get ahead of it,” says Melissa Leu, senior director of content strategy at Salesforce.
The Salesforce team asked: “How do we reestablish market leadership? How do we show that we’re innovating? How do we show that we care about salespeople? How do we show that we’re here to serve their needs?”
The answer manifested in a new trail designed for sales professionals — Salesblazer, which debuted in spring 2023.
The adventure is paying off. Among its audience victories are 5 million unique page views in the first year and 15,000 people who joined the Slack community in its first six months.
Salesblazer was named the Project of the Year among the competitive entries in the 2024 Content Marketing Awards after being named Best Content Marketing Launch and Best Content Marketing Program. It also earned Melissa a spot on the list of finalists for 2024 B2B Content Marketer of the Year.
Starting down a different path
Salesblazer started, as most content marketing projects do — by identifying the problems the audience is facing.
Melissa Leu Senior Director of Content Strategy, Salesforce 2024 B2B Content Marketer of the Year Finalist
“Sales can be a pretty lonely career in some places. In other places, it’s a team sport. It’s very much like a numbers game. You just have to hit your quota, figure out how to do it, and go,” Melissa says.
Yet, Salesforce research found that only 28% of sales professionals expected their team to hit their quotas. Conversations with customers revealed that many wanted more than Salesforce’s software. They wanted help to succeed and grow in their sales careers.
Once the Salesforce team identified the primary challenges for the target audience, they looked at the company’s strengths — its expertise and a network cultivated over 20 years as a leader in sales.
Salesforce had built the Trailblazer program around those same strengths, but that community targeted a more technical group. Sales professionals didn’t see it as a program for them.
Melissa says the Salesforce team thought, “We can be the curator of all this knowledge from the community, from experts in the field. How do we share that with everyone out there?”
The Sales Cloud content team blazed a new trail. “It was fail fast, learn fast,” Melissa says.
Failure never happened. However, the project did evolve after the team learned a few lessons.
Building the Salesblazer trail
The Salesblazer-building team had to be scrappy. Though Salesforce employs over 72,000, fewer than 15 people make up the core Salesblazer team. In just a few months, they created the website, crafted the content, launched the community, hosted events, and obtained professional certification accreditation for its online courses.
“It was a lot at once,” Melissa says.
Fortunately, they could draw on their own and others’ content marketing expertise and subject specialists elsewhere in Salesforce. “There were dozens and dozens of people we could reach out to to share their expertise on how to do things,” Melissa says.
Salesblazer’s high visibility within the company, a sign of leadership’s commitment, meant the team’s calls, emails, and messages were returned quickly. Still, it wasn’t all smooth going, Melissa says. “With anything new, you have to teach people what it is. You have to convince them why it’s important. That happens both externally and internally.”
The Salesblazer content hub stands as a testament to that widespread expertise and cooperation. It serves as a centralized sales career hub filled with free resources, including a mix of Salesblazer-specific content and other relevant Salesforce articles.
Visitors can follow a path based on their role — sales representatives, operations, or leadership. They can download Salesforce’s State of Sales Report or dive into a Salesblazer Ask Me Anything feature provided by an industry expert. They can watch demos and webinars. They can download free templates, worksheets, reports, and guides. They’re also invited to sign up for a twice-monthly newsletter and join the Salesblazer Slack community.
No matter the tactic, all the content is filtered through the lens of whether it helps a sales professional grow their career. “That’s really our North Star,” Melissa says.
But the Salesblazer debut tactic wasn’t the content hub. It was an educational event in New York in April 2023. “We wanted to start with our core group of customers, prospects, and people who are fans of Salesforce and see [their] reaction, get some feedback, and then grow from there,” Melissa says.
The event included Salesblazer partners, including household names like Dale Carnegie and industry organizations like Women in Sales.
The team reached out to Dale Carnegie because it aligns with Salesforce’s goal to help salespeople better their careers, Melissa says. “There was natural overlap and complementary skills we could bring each other.”
The partnership with Women in Sales came through someone in the existing Sales Cloud’s influencer program. “The whole group of influencers were critical in providing feedback to our program, helping us create content, and generating word of mouth about the community,” Melissa says. “They’re real salespeople, so they were our focus group.”
Delivering results and evolving for bigger impact
In its first year, Salesblazer hit over 5 million unique page views, fueled by ranking for thousands of keywords on search. Merchandising Salesforce product offerings within the content led to a 250% increase in referrals to product pages.
Salesblazer generated over 3.2 million social impressions and 102,000 social engagements. Over 45,000 people subscribe to the newsletter, and over 230,000 engage on community platforms. The Salesblazer community has earned 320,000 badges through the Trailhead learning platform, and thousands of people have expanded their networks at 46 events.
Success, though, didn’t happen without an evolution.
“We learned we had disconnected the content from our business. It was solely community-based and community-focused,” Melissa says.
The team realized it had disregarded some of the best practices in content marketing — linking and SEO. As a result, the content didn’t hit the organic heights they expected. “Once that push was over past the launch, we were like, ‘OK, well, we want to build an audience; we want the audience to return. How do we do that?’” Melissa explains.
They pivoted, implementing those best practices, linking to related content, and doubling down on search engine optimization efforts.
They also told a better story internally, so people understood that Salesblazer wasn’t just a fun side project but something that led to views on product pages and long-term engagement. And that was the moment the content side of Salesblazer accelerated to produce impressive results.
Another lesson learned: What works for one audience won’t necessarily work for others. “With this program, it’s a lot of seeing what works, investing in what works, and moving on from what doesn’t. It’s a lot of listening to the reactions of our community and what they’re looking for,” Melissa explains.
The biggest change from the launch is the Salesblazer community gathering place. Initially, it used the same forum infrastructure as the Trailblazer group.
“We found that salespeople aren’t necessarily attracted to a forum experience. They want that real connection. They want a real-time ability to reach someone,” Melissa explains.
So Salesforce moved the Salesblazer community to a Slack channel, where it’s grown at two times the pace of the forum iteration (attracting 15,000 members in six months).
“When audiences are not yet ready to buy,” Melissa explains, “these [Salesblazer] engagements play a crucial role in keeping Salesforce top of mind and positioning us as a leader in empowering sales professionals.”
But for the Content Marketer of the Year finalist, a personal moment helped her appreciate the Salesblazer impact.
“It didn’t hit me until we were at one of our events. Somebody came up to me and said, ‘I’m so thankful for this program. It changed my career. It brought inspiration back, and I’m so thankful to have this as a resource.’ They got a job from the connections they had made in the community and the learning they had taken in,” Melissa shares.
“It’s a moment like that when you feel like, ‘Oh my god, we did it.’”
Want more content marketing tips, insights, and examples? Subscribe to workday or weekly emails from CMI.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
“While many [companies] find themselves simply treading water, a group of top performers has found a way to surge ahead. They’ve figured out how to understand their audience’s needs, produce high-quality content, and use AI to create more efficient workflows.”
I say “yes, and…” through the lens of our training, consulting, and advisory work with 20+ successful brands over the last year.
B2B marketing has had an interesting year. While it’s become more strategic and focused on the long term, the short-term playbook has been shredded. One research report recently quoted a CMO saying, “The traditional B2B playbook that worked for so many years isn’t working anymore to grow and capture demand.
Over the last two years, I’ve seen at least three significant disruptions that indicate where content and marketing may be headed. Identifying the implications of these disruptions may help you plan for the future of content and marketing.
Disruption 1: Customer media consumption and the importance of brand
Wow, that sounds important, doesn’t it? It’s just a fancy way of saying things are moving faster, people have more choice in content, and trust in branded experiences plays a bigger role in generating demand and creating loyalty.
Now, you’re no doubt familiar with the shift in how people consume and spend time with content. I shared some of these points in a recent news video and article:
But don’t make the mistake of assuming these statistics mean short, provocative social videos purely focused on grabbing attention are the only content that resonates.
People’s attention spans haven’t decreased — their patience for value has. If you can hold customers’ attention by delivering value quickly, you have the opportunity to create a differentiating experience.
This trend also indicates decreasing patience with anything that interrupts the flow of engagement. For example, a recent study found that people answer barely half of unidentified calls on their mobile phones.
Not only do people dislike interruptions, but they also know they can easily replace any content. Don’t like that TikTok video? Swipe up. Don’t like that Netflix show? Exit right out of it and into something else. Don’t get the sources you need within seconds of that search? Ask AI for the answer.
The brand impact from this disruption fascinates me. That lack of patience and the ease of acquiring replacement content removes some of the ability (and, some might say, the need) to build a brand legacy.
In 1958, the average life span of a company on the Standard & Poor’s index was 67 years. Sixty years later, it had fallen to less than 15 years.
Product and service brands are evolving to resemble startups, fashion, or media. Brands launch, gain recognition, earn audience trust, and then fall out of favor, wear out their welcome, or get replaced by something new.
Ironically, the push to be present across multiple content platforms has led some brands to adopt a more minimalistic approach to corporate branding — in what many now call “blanding.”
Interestingly, successful companies are pivoting toward launching or acquiring content brands and using them like shiny media attractors.
These specific, branded experiences are designed to do the heavy lifting in the short term, capitalizing on the short lifespan of brands in general. These content brands aim to create immediate trust and deep engagement, but they can be discarded if they fail to achieve their goals or fall out of fashion.
For example, fast food maker Chick-fil-A recently launched a new streaming service. But, it’s not so much a streaming service as an effort to create new shows (i.e., content brands) that could be distributed through any number of digital platforms.
That gets to the second disruption.
Disruption 2: Scarcity of physical presence
One thing everyone’s realized is how precious physical presence is. There’s nothing like something being taken away to make you realize how much you value it.
The rapid growth of remote, freelance, and fractional work has reshaped our cultural mindset. People have developed a strong preference for maintaining physical separation. And that makes in-person connections feel more special and rarer.
In simple terms, people now value their personal spaces and surroundings more than before.
More people think, “I’ve come to value working from home,” or “Is my physical presence at my job site worth more than before the pandemic?”
We also ask more critically whether we need to be somewhere in person because we’d much rather be someplace else physically. The saying “work is where the WiFi is” is still prevalent.
Some companies have demanded that employees return to offices. And attendance at events (business and otherwise) has surged.
However, the nature and quality of those events have changed to meet the higher demands of those attending.
As physical presence remains more precious, in-person events (still among the most effective content marketing tactics) have become luxury items. So the nature of the content at these events had better be really good.
Perhaps less obviously, this trend also puts renewed pressure on digital content experiences. Why? Because digital content platforms must also act as proxies for physical presence.
All digital content (events, thought leadership, etc.) must be differentiated because audiences expect more, and the content noise is getting exponentially crazier.
B2B company Salesforce’s investment in launching Salesblazer shows this trend in action. Years ago, Salesblazer might have launched as a blog covering sales news and trends.
But this award-winning project is a resource center, a blog, an education platform, and a community. It markets itself as the “largest and most successful community for sales.”
And that brings us to the third disruption.
Disruption 3: Decline of trust and truth
As we approach elections in the United States, the world feels more divided than ever. Trust in mainstream media is at its lowest level ever. Whether from government, businesses, or nonprofit organizations, an epidemic of misinformation has led to widespread mistrust of institutions and their leaders. Generative AI exacerbates this decline of trust.
When the bar is so low, marketers have an opportunity (and perhaps a responsibility) to use content to build trust as a differentiation.
Great marketing adds value that customers invest in and can create wealth for the business. However, not all customer investment involves a purchase.
You can monetize marketing in different ways — through time, attention, referrals, personal data, brand loyalty, and even trust. All of this can be converted into wealth for the business.
Content and Marketing in 2025
Put these three disruptions into context, and you can start to see patterns for a future of marketing — if not the future of marketing.
The future of content and marketing is:
The creation of trust and truth
Differentiated digital and physical content experiences that respect audiences’ heightened expectation
Quick value delivery without interruptive communication that considers audiences’ willingness to seek value in alternative forms of media
Content and marketing are evolving again. Both content strategy and marketing as a practice have the opportunity to become more valuable and enriching to the business — if we can get out of our way.
What if the outputs of content and marketing were treated as if they were as important as the brand’s products and services?
Would you spend the bulk of your time tweaking things to create the most efficient process without regard to the quality of the output?
What if brands saw marketing as more than an expense line that develops activities and creates content to persuade audiences to become customers?
What if brands treated marketing as a function that enhances the entire customer journey, where the primary function is creating experiences for audiences that could be monetized in multiple ways (only one of which is purchasing products and services)?
Put even more simply, what if adding value, monetizing audiences, and treating content as important as the brands’ products is the future of marketing?
Fifty years ago, Dennis Gabor, a Nobel Prize-winning physicist, wrote in Inventing the Future:
“Rational thinking, even assisted by any conceivable electronic computers, cannot predict the future … All it can do is map out the probability … Technological and social inventions are broadening this probability all the time …. The future cannot be predicted, but futures can be invented.”
In 2025, great marketing won’t be invented with a prompt. It will be invented by us.
It’s your story. Tell it well.
Subscribe to workday or weekly CMI emails to get Rose-Colored Glasses in your inbox each week.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
This week, thousands of content marketers from all over the world invaded San Diego to celebrate the beloved practice, do lots of learning, and have a little fun, too.
Yes, it was Content Marketing World 2024, and we’re thrilled to have connected with so many new and returning community members.
After CMI’s chief strategy advisor, Robert Rose, left the stage, we asked for his rundown of THE event run by CMI.
Read on for his take, or watch this video from the event itself:
What’s everybody talking about?
My Content Marketing World experience kicked off with the Executive Forum. Senior-level executives got together to discuss what content and marketing issues keep them up at night.
Of course, we talked about AI. Most companies are still experimenting, but few have adopted a structured way to apply this disruptive new technology.
We also discussed the evolution of marketing’s role within the organization and other fascinating trends, including the expanding roles of content and data science. We ended with a discussion on talent retention in a challenging hiring environment.
All that and the main conference hadn’t even started.
From the keynote stage on Tuesday morning, Ethan Braden, vice president and chief marketing and communications officer at Texas A&M University, talked about bringing emotion and time back to the practice of developing great brands. Great brands don’t just happen, he says. They need insights, story, and positioning — and all of those things take time.
The wonderful Ann Handley talked about “slowments,” the idea of slowing down to work high-impact creativity back into marketing. She also made the case for having humans do the thinking.
And, of course, I can’t leave out the closing keynote presentation with Issa Rae. The amazing content creator, actor, writer, and entrepreneur spoke with interviewer Aisha Harris, co-host of NPR’s Pop Culture Happy Hour, and took questions from the audience. The conversation explored her creative process and projects (including the role of marketing) and her media companies HOORAE, which develops content that breaks boundaries in storytelling and representation across mediums, and Ensemble, which connects diverse creators and influencers with brands who want to reach their audiences.
Let’s go beyond average
In my keynote talk and workshop, I discussed the state of content and marketing in 2024. CMI’s recent research found that 58% of marketers feel that our work is only moderately successful — it’s just kind of average.
Why is this happening?
I see too many marketers stuck in a perpetual loop of tinkering with tools to make things more efficient, losing their creative spark in the process.
We’re making marketing more efficient. But we’re also making it less joyous.
I ended Content Marketing World 2024 with a wish for the upcoming year: I hope you stop the endless tinkering and start doing something. Start making big, creative moments. Stress over the strategy. Allow time for the creative process. Tackle the slow work.
That’s how to bring humanity back in — and differentiate your marketing strategy.
Couldn’t attend Content Marketing World in person this year? Register for the Digital Pass to access on-demand session recordings from the live event through January 31, 2025. Use promo code BLOG100 to save $100.
MORE ADVICE FROM CMWORLD SPEAKERS:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
So, how do you know if your brand’s content gets used and performs the job it’s designed to do?
Metrics help, but they don’t tell the whole story. To truly understand the effectiveness of your content, you need a scorecard.
A content scorecard shows how an asset scores against industry benchmarks or your company’s standard content performance. It marries qualitative and quantitative assessments. Quantitative evaluations are based on metrics such as views, engagement, SEO rank, etc. Qualitative evaluations are derived from criteria, such as readability, accuracy, and voice consistency (more on that in a bit).
Let’s get to work to create a content scorecard template that you can adapt.
Build quantitative content scoring worksheets
To know what to measure, you must know what matters. What is the job of that piece of content?
For example, consider the purpose of a landing page. Since it’s rarely the final destination, it’s usually not a good sign if readers spend too long on it. On the other hand, a long time spent on a detailed article or white paper is a positive reflection of user engagement.
Be specific with your content asset’s goals. What should you measure based on its purpose? Consider these ideas:
Exposure — content views, impressions, backlinks
Engagement — time on page, clicks, ratings, comments
Conversion — purchases, registrations for gated content, return visits, clicks
Redistribution — shares, pins
With your quantitative criteria determined, you need to identify the benchmarks. What are you measuring against? Industry standards? Internal standards? A little of both?
A good starting point for general web user behavior is the Nielsen Norman Group. You also can look at social media and email marketing tools, which often provide engagement benchmarks by industry. And finally, your organization’s marketing history provides an opportunity to measure how a content asset compares to what you have already published.
Below is a sample benchmark key. The left column identifies the metric, while the top row indicates the resulting score on a scale of 1 to 5. Each row lists the parameters for the metric to achieve the score in its column.
Sample Quantitative Content Score 1-5 *
Score:
1
2
3
4
5
Page Views/Section Total (internal benchmark)
<2%
2 – 3%
3 – 4%
4 – 5%
>5%
Trend in Page Views (internal benchmark)
Decrease >50%
Decrease
Static
Increase
Increase >50%
Time Spent/Page (external benchmark)
<20 sec
20 – 40 sec
40 – 60 sec
60 – 120 sec
>120 sec
Bounce Rate (external benchmark)
>75%
65 – 75%
35 – 65 %
25 – 35%
<25%
Click-Through Rate (external benchmark)
<2%
2 – 4%
4 – 6%
6 – 8%
>8%
Social Media Engagement
<0.5%
0.5 – 1.5%
1.5 – 2.5%
2.5 – 3.5%
>3.5%
*Values are defined based on industry or company benchmarks.
Using a 1-to-5 scale makes it easier to analyze content with different goals and still identify the good, the bad, and the ugly. Your scorecard may differ depending on the selected benchmarks.
How to do it
You will create two quantitative worksheets.
Label the first as “quantitative benchmarks.” Create a chart (similar to the one above) identifying the key metrics and ranges for each 1 to 5 score. Use this as your reference sheet.
Label the second worksheet as “quantitative analysis.” The first columns should include the content URL, topic, and type. Label the next columns based on your quantitative metrics (i.e., page views, clicks, engagement, etc.).
Add the details for each piece of content.
Calculate each score (1 to 5) using the benchmark reference sheet.
It’s easy to look at your content’s metrics, shrug, and say, “Let’s get rid of everything that’s not getting eyeballs.” But if you do, you risk throwing out great content whose only fault is that it hasn’t been discovered.
That’s why you need to add a qualitative component to the scorecard.
Create qualitative success worksheets
You will use a different 5-point scale to score your content qualitatively to identify valuable but buried pieces. At this point in the content scorecard process, a content strategist or someone equally qualified on your team/agency analyzes the content based on the organization’s objectives.
TIP: Have the same person review all the content to avoid any variance in qualitative scoring standards.
Among the qualitative criteria I’ve used:
Consistency: Is the content consistent with the brand voice and style?
Clarity and accuracy: Is the content understandable, accurate, and current?
Discoverability: Does the layout of the information support key information flows?
Engagement: Does the content use the appropriate techniques to influence or engage visitors?
Relevance: Does the content meet the needs of all intended user types?
Authenticity: Is the content authentic and original? This evaluation is increasingly important in light of the recent surge in generative AI use.
To standardize the assessment, use yes-no questions. One point is earned for every yes. Add the points and divide by the total number of questions to calculate the average score for each category.
Here’s how that would work for the category of clarity and accuracy as well as discoverability. Bold type indicates a yes answer.
Clarity and accuracy:
Is the content understandable to all user types? Yes.
Does it use appropriate language? Yes.
Is the content labeled clearly? Yes.
Do images, video, and audio meet technical standards so they are clear? No.
Score: 3 (3/4 * 4)
Discoverability:
Score: 1 (1/5 * 5)
TIPS: When calculating the relevance category, base the questions on the information you can access. For example, if the reviewer knows the audience, the question, “Is it relevant to the interests of the viewers,” is valid. However, if the reviewer doesn’t know the audience, the question wouldn’t work. But, almost any reviewer can answer whether the content is current. So, that would be a valid question to analyze.
In some cases, tools can be used to assess attributes like accessibility, readability, or originality. Translate those results into a 1-to-5 scale.
How to document it
Label the worksheet as “qualitative questions.”
Add three columns for content URL, topic, and type.
Add columns to the right for each category and its questions.
Add a final column and insert the formula (yes answers/total questions multiplied by total questions) to calculate the average score.
Create a new worksheet labeled “qualitative analysis” to make it easier to see the results. Include columns for the content URL and each category’s average score.
Put it all together in a content scorecard
With your quantitative and qualitative measurements determined, you can now create your scorecard spreadsheet.
Based on the earlier example (minus the content URLs), here’s what it would look like.
Qualitative Scores
Content A
Content B
Content C
Content D
Content E
Consistency
5
1
2
3
1
Clarity and accuracy
4
2
3
2
2
Discoverability
3
3
3
3
3
Engagement
4
2
4
2
2
Relevance
3
3
5
3
3
Average Qualitative Score
3.8
2.2
3.4
2.6
2.2
Quantitative Scores
Exposure
3.2
1.2
3.0
3.2
2.8
Engagement
1.8
2.2
2.0
2.5
2.0
Conversion
2.2
3.2
2.8
1.5
3.0
Average Quantitative Score
2.4
2.2
2.6
2.4
2.6
Average Qualitative Score
3.8
2.2
3.4
2.6
2.2
Recommended Action
Review and improve
Remove and avoid
Reconsider distribution plan
Reconsider distribution plan
Review and improve
Each asset now has an average qualitative score (total category scores divided by total number of categories) and an average quantitative score (total category scores divided by total number of categories.)
You can now use the side-by-side comparison of each content asset’s scores to determine what to do next:
Qualitative score higher than a quantitative score: Analyze your distribution plan. Consider alternative times, channels, or formats for this otherwise “good” content.
Quantitative score higher than a qualitative score: Review the content to identify ways to improve it. Could it be improved with a rewrite? What about the addition of data-backed research?
Low quantitative and qualitative scores: Remove this content from circulation and update your content plan to avoid this type of content.
High quantitative and qualitative scores: Promote and reuse this content as much as feasible. Update your content plan to replicate this type of content in the future.
Of course, you may find discrepancies between quantitative and qualitative scores that may indicate the qualitative assessment is off. Use your judgment, but at least consider the alternatives.
How to use AI to generate a content score
To turbocharge your scorecard, you can use machine learning to extrapolate a sample once patterns are identified. It takes some patience and iterations, but it’s possible to prompt your favorite AI tool to infer an initial qualitative score for content not in the original scorecard sample.
By showing the AI tool a series of content pieces, along with the respective scores for each piece, you can ask it to score additional similar content using the same logic. For example, if articles with a specific format, topic, or publish date all scored similarly for certain attributes, you can assume all others with those qualities will, too.
Of course, these scores would be preliminary, and an expert would still need to assess their accuracy before you act on the score, but this AI assist could become a time-saving tool.
Start content scoring
Developing a content scorecard may seem like a daunting task, but don’t let that stop you. Don’t wait until the next big migration. Take bite-size chunks and make it an ongoing process. Start now and optimize every quarter, then the process won’t feel quite so Herculean.
Selecting how much and what content to evaluate depends largely on the variety of content types and the consistency of content within the same type. In my experience, 100 to 200 assets were sufficient. Though there is no hard-and-fast science to this sample size, the number should be sufficient for seeing patterns in topic, content type, traffic, etc. Your number will depend on:
Total inventory size
Consistency within a content type
Frequency of audits
Review in batches so you don’t get overwhelmed. Set evaluation cycles and look at batches quarterly, revising, retiring, or repurposing your content based on the audit results every time. And remember to analyze content across the performance spectrum. If you only focus on high-performing content, you won’t identify the hidden gems.
Updated from a January 2022 article.
Want more content marketing tips, insights, and examples? Subscribe to workday or weekly emails from CMI.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
The pandemic didn’t just change the B2B buying game; it flipped the whole table.
That’s how Susan Gonzalez, director of marketing at the wholesale e-commerce platform RepSpark, describes the 2020s revolution in B2B e-commerce.
“It forced businesses to go digital almost overnight. And now, buyers who had to make that switch aren’t looking back,” she says.
Joe Cicman, a principal analyst at Forrester, has the evidence.
In 2019, Forrester expected B2B e-commerce in the United States to reach $1.8 trillion by 2023. But by the end of 2021, it had already hit $1.7 trillion, as Joe and Jitender Miglani noted in the 2022 forecast. They predict that number will reach $3 trillion by 2027.
It isn’t just sales that are going online. In 2020, Gartner projected that 80% of B2B sales interactions between suppliers and buyers will happen in digital channels by 2025.
While it escalated the need for B2B e-commerce, the pandemic also accelerated the acceptance of online purchases by B2B brands.
One-third of B2B buyers say they want a seller-free sales experience, according to Gartner research.
“B2B buyers are expecting the same seamless, self-service experience they get as consumers. They don’t want endless calls and back-and-forth emails anymore. They want quick, efficient, and digital. Platforms like Amazon Business and Alibaba set the standard, and the rest of the industry is racing to catch up,” Susan says.
Plan content for the entire digital sales experience
But unlike many B2C purchases, B2B purchases involve more than the actual buying transaction, says Belinda Conde, head of marketing at Datos, a Semrush company.
“B2B e-commerce is about the pre-, during-, and post-buying experience. It’s also about community-building and how people interact with and perceive the brand,” she says.
Yet, many brands don’t offer that 360 experience, says Jason Wingate, CEO of Emerald Ocean, a manufacturer, distributor, and holding company for various brands.
“Most buyers are overloaded with generic, poorly written emails and uninformed sales pitches, leaving them jaded and defensive,” he says. “Taking the time to adapt your approach to these changes presents a major opportunity to drive growth in B2B e-commerce.”
A B2B e-commerce marketing program requires extending the role of content beyond top-of-funnel activities. Content is the cornerstone to setting your brand apart from your competitors by building trust and guiding the buyer’s decision, Jason says.
To do that, Semrush’s Belinda Conde advises marketers to think about their content from the perspective of someone who would buy the product without contacting the company. What forms, educational content, product marketing materials, self-serve enablement pieces, etc., would be required?
Knowing those answers requires deep audience research and an expert knowledge of your clients. Belinda shares these questions for which marketers must know the answers:
What are the customers’ pain points throughout the funnel?
Which parts of the website are causing the most drop-offs?
Does your product need better UX/UI features throughout the onboarding process?
How do you ensure that customers remain informed and understand your product’s potential throughout their life cycle?
Are there clear and timely opportunities for upselling/cross-selling?
RepSpark’s Susan Gonzalez suggests adopting a broader view — treating e-commerce programs as an ecosystem in which content plays a vital role, but not the only one. “Think self-serve portals, personalized quotes, live inventory, automated workflows. It’s about removing obstacles so businesses can focus on what they do best. It’s not just about moving products; it’s about making business itself move faster,” she says.
In the content realm, that means detailed guides, no-fluff case studies, and helpful research that position your brand as an “expert they can’t live without,” Susan says.
Design content as a buyer’s guide
Anna Stella, founder of BBSA Marketing, suggests shaping your content for every stage of the customer journey. Think about what answers customers might need so they won’t have to search. You’ll improve their knowledge and create a more enjoyable shopping experience.
Think of your content as a buyer’s guide. Address the key questions, such as product suitability, technical specifications, and compatibility with existing solutions. “Well-crafted content enables customers to make quicker and more informed decisions, benefiting both customers and providers,” Anna says.
Well-planned B2B e-commerce content also leads to fewer product complaints and returns. Anna explains, “Providing clear details can help reduce misunderstandings. Comprehensive instructions also assist customers in using products correctly, minimizing complaints and reducing inquiries to customer service.”
Vukasin Ilic, co-founder of Linkter, says marketers should create dynamic content that adapts to a visitor’s profile, such as sector-specific guides or role-specific case studies.
And don’t forget post-transaction content. “Content doesn’t stop after the sale,” Vukasin says. “Post-purchase content, like support materials, user guides, and thought leadership articles, helps nurture long-term relationships, increasing the chance of upselling or customer retention.”
But you don’t need to guess what will work. Unlike offline sales, e-commerce activity generates lots of data.
“Every interaction in e-commerce gives you insights — what your buyers are searching for, what their pain points are, where they drop off,” Susan Gonzalez says. “Use that data to tailor your content, speak directly to their problems, and offer solutions they didn’t even know they needed.”
Join us as we dive into the latest trends and strategies in B2B commerce and content. Our industry experts will explore how businesses are evolving to meet changing customer expectations and the technology shifts driving innovation in the B2B space. Discover actionable insights to modernize your approach and stay competitive in this evolving digital landscape.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
As Content Marketing World 2024 kicks off today, I’m sharing my opening remarks on our beloved practice’s current state and future direction.
Marketers are living in extraordinary times. Every day, we have the opportunity to reshape how people think, work, and connect with the world.
But too few of us do.
It’s not just that marketing is more complex than ever. It’s that too many of us miss out on essential, nourishing experiences, the “valuable friction” that comes from doing difficult work.
Over the last quarter century, we’ve ridden wave after wave of technological transformation. Consider these milestones:
Broadband internet and search engines redefined how to find information (25 years ago).
Professional social media platforms changed how we engage with customers and build communities (21 years ago).
The iPhone put the internet in everyone’s pocket — disrupting the frequency and context for reaching customers (17 years ago).
Generative AI turned the world of creativity upside down, altering the speed and methods of expressing ideas.
These transformational innovations have given rise to many functional tools that shape our marketing activities.
We’ve all witnessed the rapid adoption of internet-based software such as digital content management, e-commerce, CRM, marketing automation, analytics, and on and on.
We created these tools. Then, they shaped what our profession became.
But this phrase helps explain McLuhan’s more famous and often misunderstood saying, “The medium is the message.”
“We shape our tools” describes the start of a new medium (innovation). And “then our tools shape us” describes the “message” (effect) of that medium.
The effect of innovation (whether electricity, the internet, social media, or generative AI) is how it ultimately shapes us.
And there’s no doubt that innovations have shaped us.
Instead of remembering specific new knowledge, people now remember how to retrieve it through online searches.
People and brands now share and connect in ways that don’t necessitate personal interaction due to social media.
Buyers can now enter the information layer from anywhere to get more product details and conduct price comparisons, thanks to mobile and e-commerce technology.
What does this have to do with content and marketing in 2024?
Peak tools are keeping marketers trapped in their ‘meh’ era
CMI’s recently released B2B Content Marketing Benchmarks, Budgets, and Trends: Outlook for 2025 research revealed that too many content marketers produce underwhelming results:
58% of marketers rate their content strategy as only moderately effective.
53% describe their content as average, fair, or poor.
Nearly half struggle with unclear goals.
Only one in three has a scalable content creation model.
We’ve become what Monty Python might call the Knights of Meh. Too many of us are stuck in a loop of incremental improvements, perpetually tinkering with tools to make things more efficient — but losing our creative spark in the process.
Marketing teams are trapped in an endless cycle of fixing things. The CMS was never fully implemented. Marketing automation still doesn’t work. No one can access the right data, but we’re all looking for it. Analytics are broken. The new CMO is reorganizing and auditing everything. And we’re all playing with AI like it’s a shiny new toy, but no one knows where it fits.
No wonder making progress feels like trying to run a marathon in quicksand. Companies are stuck on the hamster wheel of optimization instead of seeking out innovative ideas.
Why are so many marketing teams playing defense instead of playing to win?
We shaped our tools. And then they shaped us.
Organizations have plugged each tech innovation into marketing, hoping to make it more efficient or effective.
But they’ve failed to convey the actual purpose or objectives. And they rarely consider how to nourish people so they can improve their skills or build institutional wisdom to apply to the marketing strategy.
Marketing teams are stuck because of the way technology has shaped brand management, lead management, and the customer experience.
We’ve reached peak tools. We gather data that we can’t access and expend all our efforts to drive incrementally more clicks, views, or purchases. Then, we claim we’ve improved our marketing.
But have we?
Instead of freeing us to take bold, creative leaps, technology has mired us in optimizing the mundane. The result? We’ve forgotten how to take risks that may lead to spectacular success or spectacular failure.
We’ve reduced the risk in marketing and also the joy.
Consider these findings from CMI’s 2025 Career Outlook for Content and Marketing research:
76% of marketers say they’re satisfied with their roles.
But 35% are actively looking for new jobs.
And only half agree that they’d still choose a career in marketing if they could start over.
Marketing is experiencing an identity crisis. We feel siloed and boxed in, with no clear path for growth. We’ve become specialists in optimizing the tools that shape us, and we’re losing sight of the big ideas we could pursue.
Then, right on cue, generative AI entered the scene.
Amplifier or outsourcer?
If there was ever a terrible time to introduce a new tool to tackle marketing’s creative challenges, it was the early 2020s.
But AI is here, and it will change how we work. The question isn’t whether it will reshape us. It will. But how it reshapes us is still up for grabs.
And that’s where the opportunity lies.
AI doesn’t replace creativity; it amplifies what you bring to the table. If your content ideas are mediocre, AI will only churn out more mediocrity. But if you approach it with creativity, strategy, and boldness, you’ll find an opportunity to amplify those qualities with AI.
AI isn’t a villain. People fear a future controlled by robots. They imagine a crazed AI that, given the goal of creating paper clips, starts to make those paper clips out of people and destroys us all.
This is a distraction.
The real threat of generative AI is that it shapes us into even deeper complacency. We may start trusting AI to do more and more creative things without injecting our human spark — diluting the thing that makes marketing an art as much as science.
We may trust AI to generate more and more of our strategy — deprecating our need to understand whether the strategy is sound or not.
By skipping the hard work of creative iteration, deep reading, and storytelling, we miss out on the experiences, knowledge, and empathy that cultivate wisdom.
If we, as marketers and content creators, outsource not just the busywork but the ability to conduct strategic, creative thinking, we risk becoming passive participants in strategies and stories.
The AI available today is the dumbest you’ll ever use, as the saying goes. But that only increases the risk of AI shaping us in negative ways.
The real danger of generative AI isn’t how intelligent it becomes but how complacent it leads us to become.
This is where valuable friction comes into play.
The power of valuable friction
Valuable friction is the deliberate resistance that slows you down enough to think critically, evaluate, and challenge. It’s the tension that forces you to pause and infuse your work with creativity. It’s the mental nourishment you get from reading the book, understanding the details, and working through the process.
Without this friction, people become automated, robotic, and disconnected from the process.
If you aim to move your marketing beyond maintenance mode, redefine your goals and actions, and make marketing more human, where are you in that process?
Are you using technology to amplify your creativity, or are you outsourcing your learning, knowledge, empathy, creativity, and wisdom?
The friction, the effort, and the engagement — that’s where you find value. The more you embrace the challenges of the evolving landscape, the more you’ll unlock your full potential as marketers and content creators.
Where do we go from here?
As you stand on the cusp of the latest marketing shift, you’re not alone. Every content and marketing team is on this journey, too.
You won’t find the answers by looking to technology to automate everything. You’ll only find it by refining processes, applying strategic best practices, and introducing new technologies in ways that cultivate the collective wisdom of the team. (That’s my new focus, too, and I’m standing by to help.)
This approach lets you build institutional strength and create space for your teams to do meaningful, friction-filled work that builds brands, drives revenue, and inspires lasting loyalty.
Go ahead and stir up some serious friction. That’s the only way to spark wisdom.
It’s your story. Tell it well.
Want more insight from these and other Content Marketing World speakers? Register for an on-demand passto get access to session recordings through January 31, 2025. Use code BLOG100 to save $100.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
Does your marketing measurement and data have standards?
What does that even mean?
Well, it means you have a standard method for naming, storing, and tracking data across the organization, according to new research (registration required) from Claravine, a software provider, and research firm Advertiser Perceptions. This could include shared taxonomies for marketing data, measurement metrics, and even tracking codes.
Do you have that?
Probably not, according to the research.
However, 95% of those surveyed agree that standards are a must for moving forward and showing ROI for advertising and marketing. And most agencies (98%) and client marketers (81%) agree their company will fall behind competitors or lose market share over time without a data standards practice.
Yet, weirdly, the same research finds that these same advertisers report an average 33% increase in return on investment that is (or could be) seen from implementing data standards.
Wait. If they don’t have any data standards, how could they be so confident in the ROI to be gained from them?
We wanted to know more so we asked Robert Rose, CMI’s chief strategy advisor, for his take. Read on or watch this video:
Fascinating findings in new data standards research
When I talk to marketers in my workshops, training, and consulting, I talk a lot about setting standards — the definitions for everything that crosses the marketing and content operations threshold. So, I was particularly interested in The State of Marketing Data Standards report released this week by Claravine and Advertiser Perceptions.
It looks at the importance of setting standards and the challenges companies experience in setting them. A few of the findings were fascinating, if not a bit obvious.
For example, the researchers found that advertisers who had implemented a data standards strategy (34%) were significantly more likely to have a strong understanding of data standards than those who had not implemented a strategy (10%).
Well, that makes sense. If you haven’t implemented something, you’re less likely to really understand it. But wait a minute.
That 34% stands out. Does that mean that 66% of those who have a data standards strategy don’t have a strong understanding of the practice?
Though the research doesn’t clarify that, the results almost certainly indicate teams are implementing standards even though they don’t have a strong understanding of them.
Regardless of their understanding, marketers are apparently confident that having data standards will improve things — that’s reflected in the finding that marketers expect a 33% ROI after implementing a data standards strategy.
The impact of the strategy implementation was even higher across categories such as privacy compliance and brand safety and slightly less for areas such as the consumer experience, marketing campaigns, and productivity.
1 in 5 ads get delivered to the wrong consumer
Another finding buried in the research caught my eye. It unsurprisingly concludes that a key benefit of having data standards is confidence and greater visibility into performance. That’s especially important because roughly 23% of ad creative is served to the wrong consumer.
Let me say that again. According to these marketers, more than one in five ads end up in front of the wrong consumer.
Is that just the advertisers’ perception or an estimate? Or is it accurate but the fault of advertisers because they do not have or have faulty data categorization on ads? Or is it the fault of the advertising platforms that serve the ad to unspecified or incorrectly interpreted categories? And if it’s the latter, is that because the ad platforms don’t have data standards by which they manage the ad inventories?
The research doesn’t make the reasoning clear. However, the results make a business case front and center for ensuring that you have a data standard in place for your advertising.
This is the hardest part of standards
What’s my take?
Well, I’m fascinated but not surprised. I frequently tell clients one of the easiest ways to get immediate ROI from developing a content strategy is a set of content and communications standards for the company. You can’t do that by downloading a template from the internet. You can only do that when you come together as a marketing function and define them.
For example, what’s an e-book? What’s the definition of a white paper? What’s a blog post? What’s the standard name for the things marketing does? Is it a campaign? Is it an initiative? Is it a project? What’s the difference between a campaign and an initiative? What’s a theme? What’s a content pillar? What are the standard names of your personas?
From there, you move on to measurement. What’s your standard definition of a lead, an opportunity? What counts as a download? What’s a conversion?
Is it any wonder that marketing can feel so hard to measure? Yet, it’s really not. The hardest part of measurement is agreeing on the standards for measurement.
As Taiichi Ohno, the creator of the Toyota Production System, said decades ago, “Without standards, there can be no improvement.”
Or, as I have asked clients so many times, “How will you know if you’re successful if you haven’t agreed on what the standard of success looks like?”
In an interesting twist, this new research study unintentionally illuminates that as marketers, your approach to developing standards has to meet the teams where they are.
If you approach team-wide development of marketing, content, advertising, or data standards by using external definitions, you’ll instantly get caught up in a conversion about how they won’t work for your organization because you don’t understand how they apply.
But, if you sit down and collaborate to define what you need to standardize to have a shared vision of your objectives and goals, you will find them meaningful to your organization even if they differ from how the world sees them.
Just remember, the point of setting any standard is to be able to improve upon it. However, to improve anything, you first need to define what improvement means. In other words, you must define the standard or truth before accuracy means anything.
Then you’ve got a standard for setting standards, and that should be standard in your marketing.
Want more content marketing tips, insights, and examples? Subscribe to workday or weekly emails from CMI.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
Those six simple words command attention. They create an expectation that an engagement-worthy experience is about to unfold.
Thoughtfully produced podcasts and videos can deliver on the promise of brand storytelling. But success is far from a given.
These efforts typically play in crowded, noisy spaces where it’s hard to get discovered. Without a compelling hook, your target audience might tune out or scroll by. And if you fail to tie the story to a real-world value, your business may not achieve a happy-ever-after outcome.
Many enterprise organizations struggle to implement advanced marketing tools and technologies. They must manage many moving parts and coach team members to minimize resistance and process friction.
To facilitate the smooth adoption and use of its new digital asset management (DAM) system, Bayer Crop Science set out to tell — and sell — a story of successfully streamlined content operations.
Example: How To Use Bayer’s Digital Asset Management System
The How To Use Bayer’s Digital Asset Management System video starts as a standard explainer on DAM systems and their benefits. But the sales pitch quickly cuts to a charmingly animated story. In it, “marketing warrior” Alex must navigate a maze of disconnected tools and file systems in search of the rights-free image she needs for a campaign.
Fantasy genre fans will recognize some characteristics of quest-based storytelling — heroes, magical incantations (i.e., marketing buzzwords), and an arrogant dragon that mocks Alex’s attempts to retrieve the asset with competitors’ tools.
And the video, a finalist for Best Topic-Specific Video at this year’s Content Marketing Awards, has one more plot twist for viewers: Before the final scene, it cuts to the narrator for a detailed online demo of Bayer’s DAM solution.
By jumping between factual insights and a fictional parable, Bayer skillfully blends message-driven education with engaging entertainment. It’s a great way to get viewers’ attention on the critical details while hooking their viewing interest until the video’s end.
Idea 2: Sustain engagement with serialized content
It takes more than a hit single to turn initial curiosity into enduring audience relationships.
To keep consumers coming back, consider an approach perfected by streaming TV platforms and popular podcasts: Create binge-worthy serialized entertainment.
Example: Murder in HR
Image provided by Caspian Studios via its Content Marketing Award submission.
Murder in HR isn’t another trendy true-crime podcast. It’s a clever, star-powered send-up of the genre, scripted to organically weave corporate wellness brand Gympass (now Wellhub) into an episodic thriller.
The plot centers on Jemma (voiced by actor Kate Mara) — an HR executive at a tech company who uses her people skills to investigate a death at a corporate retreat. As Jemma interrogates potential suspects, the audience learns about their use of the wellness services offered through Gympass. Customized ads aired during story breaks provided more information about Gympass benefits.
Teased out with a weekly release schedule, the podcast concludes when Jemma solves the crime. With the help of promotional activations across marketing, media, and sales, the show earned more than 1.1 million downloads and reached No. 1 on Apple’s list of top fictional podcasts. It also won the 2024 Content Marketing Award for Best Podcast.
Idea 3: Show the impact of your intentions
Telling a convincing story about results that won’t fully manifest for over 25 years presents challenges.
Marketers in construction and manufacturing have good reason to publicize their climate action initiatives that align with the goals of the Paris Agreement. However, consumers can struggle to grasp how the long-range plans relate to their lives.
Volvo Group used video to turn its communication priorities into a compellingly resonant story for its audience to understand what’s at stake.
Example: Dear Jackie
Volvo, the world’s leading manufacturer of industrial vehicles and construction equipment, promises to become a fossil-free company by 2050 — and help its customers do the same. The urgency of achieving those goals is as clear as the blue stream in its Content Marketing Award-winning video, Dear Jackie.
It starts with a young couple in 2023, eagerly awaiting the arrival of the titular baby girl, Jackie. Viewers get to see the baby’s life unfold as she transforms from a sonogram image into a thriving adult about to welcome her own child into the world.
In the accompanying voiceover, a narrator reads Volvo’s letter to Jackie’s future self, setting its climate-change ambitions against the milestones in Jackie’s life. The company pledges to make one-third of its fleet electric by the time she starts school and be fossil-free when she completes her education.
By illustrating how they’ll work together to shape “the world we want to live in,” Dear Jackie embodies Volvo Group’s commitment to doing the work today so tomorrow’s generation can reap the benefits.
Idea 4: Support personal and professional success
Great storytelling doesn’t just promote the value of your brand’s products and services. It inspires — and empowers — customers to achieve their goals. B2B storytelling typically supports professional success, but don’t overlook personal aspirations and interests, too.
Example: The Path To Owning It
Image via Provide (from its Content Marketing Awards entry materials).
Doctors and other health care providers receive medical training, but that doesn’t prepare them to run a practice. Sharpening the business acumen of current and aspiring medical practice owners is the goal of Provide — a health-care-focused division of Fifth Third Bank, N.A., and the purpose of its The Path to Owning It podcast.
Each episode offers guidance on financial and operational decision-making, such as choosing whether to build or buy a practice or hiring the right care team. While the goal is to ease the transition from caregiver to practice leader, the discussions aren’t all business. They also delve into more personally resonant concerns.
In one episode, veterinarian Sarah Baker, owner of Lane Veterinary, touches on the mental health struggles of veterinary practitioners and the need for more female representation in leadership. Inspiring health professionals to advocate for their own well-being as they care for their patients makes The Path To Owning It a B2B storytelling standout. It earned recognition from the Content Marketing Awards as a finalist for Best Podcast.
Idea 5: Express your unique voice and views
Marketers may be tempted to jump on the latest TikTok challenge or meme-friendly trend to capture audience attention. But playing follow the leader with your video budget is unlikely to help your brand stand out from the pack.
Instead, take your video conversations in distinctly different directions. Contradicting conventional wisdom or expressing opposing points of view may feel risky. But by bucking the status quo, you stand a better chance of making a lasting impact on like-minded consumers.
Example: Play It Safe
You may not be familiar with musician, actor, composer, and comedian Tim Minchin. But you should recognize the Sydney Opera House — the architectural landmark visually synonymous with his home country of Australia.
To celebrate the performing arts center’s 50th birthday, Australian agency The Monkeys (a subsidiary of Accenture Song Sydney) enlisted Tim to star in a four-minute musical ode.
Tim sarcastically sings the virtues of playing it safe and sticking with formulas to attract an audience. Yet, the accompanying sights and sounds of renowned artists, architects, and performers show that the opposite rings truer.
More than a birthday celebration of a building, the spot serves as an uplifting homage to the artists taking creative risks inside the structure. More importantly, the video proves that unique storytelling can amass a stronger following than calculated mediocrity.
The judges at this year’s Cannes Lions International Festival of Creativity certainly got the message. The mini film split Grand Prix honors with another inspiring effort that you’ll see in Idea 6.
Idea 6: Shift perspectives to change minds
While Play It Safe honors artists and their critically acclaimed achievements, its Cannes Lions Grand Prix co-honoree tells the story of a group whose talents have been overshadowed.
Example: La compil’ des Bleues
This video campaign, produced by Orange (a French telecommunications company), highlights the stunning athleticism exhibited by France’s men’s national soccer team.
Or does it?
The real story is cleverly revealed halfway through: The footage was digitally altered. All the remarkable plays shown were made by members of the women’s national soccer team.
While many deepfake videos are designed to deceive to damage someone’s reputation, Orange’s use of visual effects tools does the opposite: It challenges the common (mis)perception that women’s soccer is less exciting and view-worthy than games in the men’s league.
Did the ruse achieve its purpose? In a follow-up case study video released by Orange, the impressions left by the video (in the media and on viewers) are made clear: The most viral French video ever sparked a global conversation about the entertainment value of women’s professional sports and led to broader discussions about gender inequality.
Show, tell, and sing your brand’s value
Whether it’s a child-friendly fable, a crime-solving series, or a true-life tale of overcoming obstacles, audio and video storytelling captures attention and sustains engagement in a way few other content formats can achieve.
Register to attend Content Marketing World in San Diego. Use the code BLOG100 to save $100. Can’t attend in person this year? Check out the Digital Pass for access to on-demand session recordings from the live event through January 31, 2025.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
When Mo Sherifdeen joined Travel Oregon 19 years ago, he was the first person hired to work on the website.
His role as web manager involved uploading documents and images via FTP sites. In other words, he was a glorified pixel pusher (the digital version of a pencil pusher).
As the digital landscape expanded, so did the importance of content in tourism. So, in 2010, Oregon’s tourism agency united its content efforts into a cohesive, structured unit and put Mo in charge.
Travel Oregon Mo Sherifdeen B2C Content Marketer of the Year Finalist
“By the time we grew on social and added more channels to the mix, the one team made a lot of sense. We were luckily ahead of the curve,” he says.
The editorial goal of the content team is to be the trusted source for trip inspiration and information. To support that mission, the team publishes content to ignite a traveler’s desire to experience Oregon.
And it’s doing something (or many things) right: In 2024, Travel Oregon took top honors for Best Content Strategy in the Content Marketing Awards, and Mo earned recognition as a finalist for B2C Content Marketer of the Year.
Growing as a united team
Today, the one-team approach encompasses Travel Oregon’s marketing and sales staff. Now called the brand stewardship team, it’s charged with building brand awareness for Oregon globally and inspiring travel that uplifts Oregon communities.
About half of Travel Oregon works on the brand stewardship team. The other half works on the B2B side — focusing on the individual destinations and businesses that benefit from travel and tourism.
Together, the team balances Oregon’s economic, environmental, and social/cultural needs while working closely with the state’s tourism industry and residents.
The brand stewardship team includes a brand services group, which focuses on campaign execution and works with Travel Oregon’s ad, social, digital, and publishing agencies. It also supports the global sales team and the integrated marketing department, which Mo leads as the director of global integrated marketing and publishing.
Integrated marketing, also part of the brand stewardship team, includes these roles:
A managing editor who looks at what Travel Oregon says across its channels
A production editor who oversees social media and website production
A digital platforms manager who is responsible for website innovations
A listing manager who handles all list-related content, such as hiking trails and events, on TravelOregon.com and third-party sites
An information specialist who manages Travel Oregon’s listings on third-party sites, among other duties
An analyst who closely watches SEO, site speed, and UTMs to monitor performance vs. ad spend
A team coordinator who helps organize the work
“It’s a lot of collaboration,” Mo says.
Several agency partners support the team, and Mo stresses the importance of bringing them in at the concept stage rather than handing over a final campaign to execute.
“If they feel like a concept is not going to fly or is not something our community would respond to, then they flag it up front,” he explains.
Travel Oregon also avoids being the gatekeeper for the agencies. It encourages its ad, social, digital, and publishing agencies to work directly with each other.
“They’re empowered to pick up the phone and call each other and build that relationship,” Mo says. “They’re all singing from the same songbook and pitching us on the same idea.”
It works well partly because the agency partners have worked with Travel Oregon for so long: 30+ years in one case and six years in another.
Embarking on an equitable journey
That leadership support isn’t just about empowering the teams behind the scenes. It also extends to Travel Oregon’s strategic vision — driving equitable economic impact from tourism across the state and being welcoming to all.
That means promoting lesser-known tourist destinations and not marketing the places everybody goes to in the prime tourist season. It means attracting diverse audiences, such as the LGBTQ+ community or travelers with disabilities, and showcasing previously untold stories about the area’s first inhabitants.
“You can’t be welcoming to all if you’re not an accessible place,” Mo says. “We have a huge network, but ultimately, it’s limited to people who subscribe to us. So, we use influencers to broaden our reach into those communities,” Mo says.
That’s why they worked with Ravi Roth, the host of Ravi Around the World. An influencer in the LGBTQ+ community, Ravi was thrilled when Travel Oregon invited him to come in July because he’s overwhelmed with invitations in June – Pride Month.
“That’s just an example of trying to be mindful that people are here year-round. We can’t just think about them for Black History Month or Pride Month,” Mo says.
“We’re trying to make sure that we have equitable representation in our content so that it’s not just lip service,” Mo explains.
Travel Oregon also worked with Kelcie Miller, the Chronic Explorer, a disabled environmental scientist and social entrepreneur who explores the world.
Accessible travel also involves tourism related to the first Oregonians — the federally recognized tribes of Oregon.
Travel Oregon worked with a tribal editorial steering committee that guides the content work and recruits tribal writers and photographers to help execute it. It published two tribal guides to help travelers experience Indigenous culture in Oregon. It also created a Tribal Nations section under Places to Go on the Travel Oregon website that showcases the nine tribal nations in Oregon.
Each nation’s guide includes tips on visiting, short articles on places to see, and deeper long-form content. For example, in Keeping a Native Language and Culture Alive, author Riley Rice, a member of the Cow Creek Band of Umpqua Indians, tells the story of Warm Springs, weaving in the cultural traditions, tales of its people, and places to visit — from a museum to outdoor adventure spots.
Images and a video from Wahoo Films punctuate the wonderfully written long-form text:
“When it comes to work, we want to do it in a way that’s mindful and respectful,” Mo says.
Millions embrace Travel Oregon and boost economic impact
The welcoming strategy works, as Travel Oregon reported in its Content Marketing Awards submission:
TravelOregon.com, the content hub for both inspiration and nitty gritty logistical content, attracts 9 million page views and 4 million sessions a year.
Print guides serve up information for travelers on the ground. About 500,000 copies are printed and distributed. Digital versions are also available.
Its social channels’ content reached users’ feeds 41 million times in one year.
More than that, Travel Oregon’s content has a financial impact.
Visitors to the website are most likely to spend $1,000 or more a day on their trip. They also are more likely to have viewed an online destination travel guide, read a travel article on the site, and used the printed destination guide.
A 12-month analysis (done using pre- and post-surveys of website visitors about the site’s impact on their trip) showed a $48.9 million economic impact from the 25,255 incremental trips made by out-of-state website visitors who hadn’t committed to traveling to Oregon until after they visited the site.
The analysis also found a $6.2 million economic impact from 16,190 new visitor days — the time out-of-state website visitors extended their stay in Oregon. Seventy-three percent of out-of-state visitors increased their stay by an average of 2.2 days, and 36% of in-state visitors stayed an average of 1.9 days longer.
What makes the content strategy work
Many factors go into Travel Oregon’s success (a small but mighty team, support for thinking outside the travel box, collaborative agencies, etc.).
But Mo and the team also aim for more than engagement. Getting a like on an Instagram image of a beautiful Oregonian sunset is never the goal because inspiration without information is meaningless.
Yes, they want the photo to attract attention and pique curiosity so Travel Oregon can share practical information about the place, the people who live there, the best time to visit, etc.
But Mo says success boils down to one thing.
“Building trust and doing it consistently through inspirational educational content is huge,” he says.
Want more content marketing tips, insights, and examples? Subscribe to workday or weekly emails from CMI.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
Pretend it’s late 2024. Oh, wait, it is. How time flies.
As you plan your marketing strategy for 2025, think about the team you’ll be part of or that you’ll build.
When considering your next hire or agency option, would you prefer someone with deep expertise in a specific niche or someone driven by curiosity to deeply understand the topic areas your company specializes in?
Your initial response might be, “It depends.” And that’s perfectly valid.
But I’ve noticed something troubling in recent years. Many B2B marketers who work for brands with highly specialized or technical topics aren’t trying to understand those subjects.
For example, I recently worked with a new CMO at an engineering-focused B2B technology company. When I asked how well the marketing team understands the solutions they sell, he told me he wasn’t sure. And he admitted he didn’t yet fully grasp them himself.
But here’s the thing: He was trying to learn. He dove into the industry, learning about the customers, the competition, and the technology.
Yet, he hadn’t brought his team along for the ride. The real kicker? When he offered them an opportunity to learn, almost no one took him up on it.
They didn’t care.
Does anyone care about what we do?
Over the years, buckets of tea have been spilled over how customers don’t care about our products. The jobs-to-be-done framework explains this perfectly: Customers focus on solving theirneeds, not on the products themselves. The adage often attributed to Theodore Levitt captures this well: “People don’t want to buy a quarter-inch drill. They want a quarter-inch hole.”
Some of CMI’s earliest posts about content marketing discuss how customers care about their needs, not yours. David Meerman Scott has been writing for the last decade about how no one cares about your product except you.
Lately, though, it seems marketers have stopped caring about their products. They’ve become more like special agents — laser-focused on optimizing their pieces of the customer journey without ever asking what real value the widget holds for the market. The product is just a prop in their mission, not the star of the show.
I recently asked a senior marketing director at one of the largest cloud infrastructure companies in the world to give me a primer on the space and the company’s competition. He replied, “Oh, I don’t know much about that. My job is to make sure leads get into the funnel. I could put you in touch with one of our subject matter experts.”
He wasn’t trying to be difficult. He didn’t consider having that depth of product knowledge essential.
Increasingly, I find B2B marketers view their efforts as an intellectual puzzle. Fitting together the internal and external pieces of the creative, process, data, and measurement is an intellectual challenge they must solve to level up (or stay) in the game. They lack emotion about and interest in the products or the industry they work in.
B2B marketing used to be a team sport
I don’t blame marketing practitioners. The reason many of them don’t seem to care has just as much to do with most companies’ lack of investment in fostering that curiosity as with their reluctance to dive deeper into learning.
Businesses often see content and marketing practitioners as replaceable chess pieces. Then they’re surprised when their practitioners feel like pawns — unmotivated, disengaged, and unwilling to learn the details of the game.
Maybe I’m longing for a version of marketing that no longer exists. I remember the passionate debates among marketing teams 15 or 20 years ago. Back then, B2B marketers were passionate about their industries. In highly technical companies, the marketing teams felt excited about what their companies did. Marketing leaders made sure of it — they ran training, brought in guest speakers, and provided journal subscriptions and continuous industry education to keep everyone engaged.
Product marketing would evangelize the innovative new features of the product to an excited sales-enablement team. Brand and demand-gen teams constantly learned the finer details of the industry; everyone became (at some level) a subject matter expert in the topic. Marketers attended retreats where they made fun of the competition and brainstormed ways to compete against them as if they were a rival sports team.
Marketing teams cared. Deeply.
But that brings us back to the question: Do we care? As you plan your marketing for 2025, would you prefer to work with people with specialized skills or the curiosity to become an expert? Does that difference matter?
I think it does.
B2B customers demand better
Caring about your company’s business topic should matter.
The findings in Marketing Week’s recent State of B2B Marketing report (subscription required) show why. According to the research, the most sought-after skill for B2B marketers is customer insight, with 54.4% of respondents placing it at the top. Close behind are commercial focus at 46.9% and creativity at 30.3%
Empathy ranked at the bottom.
At first glance, this seems at odds with the idea that caring about your company’s business topic matters. B2B marketers in this study seem to prioritize data-driven customer insights over emotional understanding of the topics and the customer experience.
Then I remembered this eye-opening article from B2B marketing expert Ardath Albee. She highlighted research that shows only 1% of C-level buyers believe the B2B marketing they encounter demonstrates a “meaningful understanding of human experience.” Essentially, none of them feel understood. There is no empathy.
When you compare Marketing Week’s findings with CMI’s latest B2B research, the picture becomes clearer.
The content-creation challenge B2B marketers cited most is “producing content that actually drives action.” Meanwhile, the top use for generative AI among B2B marketers is to “brainstorm new topics.”
Most tellingly, 88% of B2B marketers who see themselves as successful say the key to that success is “understanding the audience.”
When you put it all together, things start to make a bit more sense.
Today’s B2B marketing is as dry, beige, and bland as a bowl of unsweetened oats. We’ve data-driven all the emotion and empathy right out of our content. We don’t know what topics will resonate because we’ve stopped trying to understand them ourselves.
Instead, we rely on generative AI to tell us what to write about topics we barely grasp.
If successful B2B marketing should have a point of view, consistently generate emotion, and demonstrate an understanding of the human experience, shouldn’t our marketing teams have at least a little of the same?
Fighting inadvertent indifference
Again, I don’t blame content and marketing practitioners, though we are the only ones who can fix this. And I’m not suggesting “quiet quitting,” where people put in just enough effort to get by, is at play. I know many B2B marketers who go above and beyond, solving complex intellectual puzzles about topics they don’t care about at all.
The issue is that many don’t understand why it’s important to explore the details of their industry.
I call it “inadvertent indifference.” It’s a chicken-and-egg circumstance. Does it happen when companies no longer try to get marketing teams excited about the business’s topics? Or is it a lack of interest from the marketing employees? Is it both?
One mid-sized tech company gets its marketers engaged and interested by hosting a training program. It runs formal internal campaigns and provides all marketing teams with access to industry conferences.
When I was the CMO of a small but technical software company 20 years ago, enterprise web content management wasn’t the most exciting topic for me. I had just come out of the world of movies and TV.
However, I believed the marketing team needed curiosity, a willingness to learn, and industry knowledge to connect with our customers. We held regular sessions to help them (and me) understand the industry, the technology, and why competing in this space should be challenging, fun, and engaging. I immersed myself in learning everything I could about enterprise web content strategy and management. It turned out to be the foundation for the career I have today.
Interest, not fanaticism
You don’t need to build fanaticism around your brand. Nor do businesses have to build this into the DNA of the company. But, they should provide a thorough education about the space.
But I’m less concerned about brands’ efforts and more focused on content and marketing careers. I can’t imagine working for a company where I didn’t care — or at least try to care — about its business. That’s why I love my job now. I get a front-row seat to many industries and their key players.
I’ve also realized that I’m not as effective when I don’t care about the product or the industry. Marketing leaders should feel a greater responsibility to teach and inspire their teams to be as excited (and as connected) as possible about their business and marketing’s place in it.
You spend an inordinate amount of time trying to make customers care about what you do. But if the content and marketing teams don’t care at least as much as your customers do, you won’t succeed.
It’s your story. Tell it well.
Subscribe to workday or weekly CMI emails to get Rose-Colored Glasses in your inbox each week.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
The iconic yellow-and-black books summarized all manner of literary works. They digested the plot and detailed the themes and symbolism. CliffsNotes referred to them as “study guides,” but many used them to get around reading the full-length version.
(Fun fact: CliffsNotes started in 1958 with a whole line of Shakespeare summaries and continues publishing today.)
Critics of CliffsNotes argue that the surface analysis loses many of the nuances and themes of the work. Teachers and others considered using CliffsNotes as cheating. But that wasn’t really what many students were thinking when they read the CliffsNotes the night before an assignment was due.
CliffsNotes came back in our mind with the latest conversations about NotebookLM from Google. It’s taking the business world by storm, so we asked Robert Rose, CMI’s chief strategy advisor, for his take. Read on or watch this video:
Is NotebookLM the 21st century CliffsNotes? Does a rose by any other name smell as sweet? What would NotebookLM ask if it could speak?
What’s up with Google’s AI app?
Like most things from Google, NotebookLM is still in “experimental mode.” Billing it as a notetaking app at its December 2023 U.S. launch, Google has added new features in the past 10 months and it has a growing fan base.
As it stands today, NotebookLM offers a way to talk to and get summaries of documents, videos, and audio files uploaded into its system. It does remind me of a much more sophisticated and advanced version of CliffsNotes.
Users can upload the document, or source, as Google calls it, then have NotebookLM summarize it, create a study guide, critique it, or answer questions about it in a chat-style interface. I’m blown away by how easy and natural it is to “talk to my documents.”
But the feature released in September that has everybody frothy is the Audio Overview. It outputs the document as a friendly podcast-style audio file. The AI hosts — an unnamed man and woman who sound young and energetic — give a casual back-and-forth overview. To put it into a professional sports metaphor, the male AI does the play-by-play commentating, and the female AI gives the color commentary and insight by asking questions or providing answers.
It’s impressive, especially as the technology adds one of my favorite new words — disfluencies — into their speech. The technology includes false starts, filler words, ums, ahhs, likes — all those natural language vocals that make the hosts sound more human. They really sound like two young people chatting about your source document and what it all means.
A few people have proclaimed that NotebookLM can automate business podcasts with these AI personalities. But is that really the best use case? Why would you value “someone” else doing it where the only creative input is the document you’re curating? It seems like a thin moat of differentiation and value.
Does NotebookLM produce something really different?
Is something different at play with NotebookLM that can add actual usefulness?
Based on my experimentations with it, the answer is yes. It fits with the broader themes about AI that I’ve discussed lately, and thus the most recent CliffsNotes metaphor.
I uploaded the big bucket of numbers from CMI’s 2025 B2B content marketing outlook that will be released next week. I asked it to write a summary. As you would expect, it gave a straightforward synopsis in about two pages of bullet points of the main topics and results. But it also wrote a section with key takeaways and actionable insights.
It seems impressive. However, after getting beyond the magnificent language assembly, I realized that the takeaways and insights aren’t insightful or wise. They simply highlight the results in a book-report-like format.
The key actions include “prioritize strategy and goal setting,” “embrace data-driven decision making,” and “invest in technology and training.” While all that sounds nice, it’s the equivalent of reading a report about the best practices for baking a cake and the key actions include “start with fresh ingredients,” “make sure you mix everything well,” and “ensure your oven is working.”
So, I asked NotebookLM for one key takeaway a marketer should get from reading this report. Well, it couldn’t give me just one, which makes sense, given it’s built to summarize. It gave me three, one of which was “top performing B2B marketers attribute their success to a deep understanding of their target audience and the creation of high-quality content.”
Again, that sounds impressive, but coming back to the cake-baking report analogy, it’s the equivalent of saying, “The best bakers attribute their success to the care they put into learning how to bake a cake and the creation of high-quality cakes.”
So, then I tried the audio feature since that’s the most exciting aspect of NotebookLM. I asked it to provide a podcast-style audio overview. The eight-minute overview was impressive. But again, it just delivered an overview of the results without any insights. The hosts made comments like, “Yeah, good quality content is hard to make,” and “Wow, B2B marketers are frustrated at the quality of their results.”
These results mimic what I see in all types of generative AI solutions because that’s what they’re built to do. It’s all plot and no story. Generative AI tools are fantastic at recognizing patterns, summarizing, structuring and providing the what-happened part of any story. It’s much like the 21st century version of CliffsNotes. The magic happens when a human combines their experience to look beyond the “what happened” and derive or assign meaning to it.
Is this The Road Not Taken?
I have two thoughts. The first is that NotebookLM’s value isn’t diminished by its summarizing emphasis; it reminds you of the tool’s potential value. If you want a literal summary of a document, it can be extremely helpful. If you want an eight-minute audio version summarizing a 50-page corporate earnings report, a research study, a technical document, source code, or almost anything else, it is truly valuable. It can act as a study guide when you don’t have time to consume the whole document.
But that first thought lives in tension with the second, and it’s the same caution CliffsNotes makes about its products. Valuable friction exists when you read, consume, and find the meaning in the work. You must recognize that it is better to read the original sometimes, so you can use your experience, empathy, creativity, and knowledge (largely your wisdom) to connect the unobvious dots in the work. That’s what often leads to valuable insights, and you may not find them unless you read the entire work.
One of my favorite poems is The Road Not Taken by Robert Frost. I asked NotebookLM for a summary, and it gave what CliffsNotes would have. Then, I asked for the major takeaway, and NotebookLM gave the same lesson that millions of speeches at graduation, hundreds of television commercials, and business books have concluded: “(T)aking the road less traveled can lead to a more unique and fulfilling life.”
Except that’s not what the poem is about. If you read the poem carefully, thoroughly, and multiple times, you realize that isn’t the point. The title is The Road Not Taken, not The Road I Took. The poem is about what the author didn’t do, not what he did. Frost says clearly the roads are largely identical and there is no difference between the two. Further, the author says in the future he’ll be telling this story with a sigh, meaning he’s not necessarily happy about the less traveled road or not taking the one more traveled. He leaves the reader with the ambiguous, “That has made all the difference.” The poem itself is a commentary that life choices are what you make of them. There is no right road to travel. The difference happens after you choose.
So, if you choose the NotebookLM road, don’t see it as a crutch to save you from the friction of making meaning from the complexities and complications of ideas. See it as a companion that can help you move more fluidly from idea to idea and spend the time on the ones that really matter.
That is your choice.
Want more content marketing tips, insights, and examples? Subscribe to workday or weekly emails from CMI.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:6 Ways to Elevate the Text-to-Audio Experience for Your Content
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
My neighbor was a math professor at a college in San Francisco. He once told me: “The longest distance between two points travels through a committee.”
His quote applies well to B2B sales. A Forrester survey found that 80% of respondents say at least three people are involved in the purchase process, and most of the other 20% say they buy in teams of two.
Caitlyn Wood, lead data scientist at IBM, says transitioning your B2B marketing strategy from targeting individuals to focusing on the account level is a must.
During her presentation at the Marketing Analytics & Data Science (MADS) conference, Caitlyn compares B2B buying to a family buying a house. Though the parents are the ultimate decision-makers, they aren’t the only voices in the process. “The teenage daughter might want a bigger bedroom, or maybe they want to live near a playground for the son, or maybe they want a nice fenced-in yard for the dog,” she explains.
In a B2B setting, the decision-makers and the other voices in the buying process have different needs. IT wants a product that complies with cybersecurity standards. Engineering wants an API to extend the product, and marketing wants the ability to have easy-to-create dashboards.
“In the typical lead-based (marketing) model, you’re looking at individual interactions with people, but in a B2B context, you really need to look at the full picture of what’s going on within an account, not just these little slices,” says Caitlyn, who creates data science models for sales and marketing at IBM.
Read on for her account-level methodology to renovate your B2B marketing strategy.
Follow a high-intensity account framework
When multiple people in an organization consume your content, you can quantify their interest in your products and services. Caitlyn looks for accounts with multiple marketing interactions in a 30-day period. You could use a month or longer, such as 90 or 120 days, depending on your sales cycle.
In the IBM sales pipeline, about 12% of accounts attain this multi-interaction status every quarter. About eight in 10 accounts involve two or more people, and 87% involve multiple product areas. These accounts are four times more likely to convert into an opportunity within 30 days.
“We want to learn from the accounts that are consuming our content rapidly and leading to conversion pretty quickly,” Caitlyn says. “These are the accounts that say, ‘I’ve looked at IBM, I really like what you’re doing, and I want to purchase from you.’”
With these high-intensity accounts identified, marketing can invite them to events and encourage them to sign up for free trials or demos. Sales can also prioritize follow-up interactions because these accounts are likely to convert quickly.
The framework also allows marketing to better understand the journey of the highly coveted customers. Caitlyn explains, “We can look at what are the most likely pathways for our accounts to get to high intensity. Are there sticking points in there? Can we fix those sticking points? Is this particular content resonating really well with the finance industry in Germany? Can we tweak this content to other industries or other geographies?”
Prioritize and highlight patterns for sales teams
Remember the family buying a house? A real estate agent would show them homes that met the needs of the parents and the wants of the children — a large second bedroom, a fenced-in yard, and a location near a playground.
In B2B, marketing and sales play the role of the real estate agent, delivering on the wants and needs of the multiple buyers in the process. Caitlyn says the journey might look like this:
In early January, the potential buyers looked at a research report.
Then, a few individuals at the organization did a free trial.
A C-suite member and others attended an event hosted by the seller.
In February, other individuals in the organization did another trial.
Given the surge in account activity, the marketing and sales teams would evaluate the interactions and tailor their follow-up conversations and activities accordingly.
“It’s not just one individual. It’s not just one trial,” Caitlyn explains. How do these products interact with each other? How do they mesh? What is this account really interested in looking at? And can we tailor our conversations to best match their needs?”
Use the data to optimize high-impact journey
Caitlyn’s study of the high-impact account data uncovered interesting patterns, which she used to improve the customer journey with IBM.
Over half (54%) of prospects whose first interaction with IBM is a trial followed by consumption of a research report are identified as high-intensity accounts. Yet only 26% of prospects who do just a trial are likely to become a high-intensity account. Similarly, prospects who received a research report within a week of a product demo were 3.2 times more likely to become a high-intensity account.
The data has shown Caitlyn that the research report provides important background and context to the product being tested or demonstrated. Prospects might think, “I’ve tried the product and the trial; I kind of get it, but then this research paper comes in and explains all of the benefits that I wasn’t really seeing within the trial itself.”
Use data science to find more high-intensity accounts
IBM doesn’t just use the data to maximize the current prospects’ journey; it analyzes data to find new accounts resembling those high-intensity accounts — also known as lookalike accounts.
It builds the strategy under the assumption that low-engagement accounts have not yet reached the content that will propel them into the high-intensity bucket. The blocks to accessing that content could be as simple as a broken link or the failure to follow up with a research report after a demo, Caitlyn explains.
To find lookalike accounts, IBM uses positive-unlabeled learning, a type of machine learning that uses positive accounts (i.e., high intensity), with unlabeled accounts. It analyzes the unlabeled accounts (usually low and medium intensity) to determine whether to label them as high intensity.
“We’re not trying to predict who will be high intensity yet, but who looks similar enough to our high-intensity accounts that we think they should behave similarly, and we can nudge them into continuing discussions with us,” Caitlyn explains.
The positive-unlabeled learning uses market activity, third-party industry data, geo/market data, and historical purchase data in the analysis. Caitlyn says it accurately identifies the lower-engagement accounts that can be nurtured into high intensity 93% of the time. These lookalike accounts also convert two times more than the average account.
Add account lessons into the system
After identifying the high-intensity and lookalike accounts, ensure that the account intelligence flows properly into the sales and marketing systems. Here’s a look at how IBM does it:
The high-intensity accounts flow to the sales rep to execute the Salesloft system’s inbound action at a cadence for the next-best actions, leading to the conversion.
The lookalike account triggers marketing actions that could prompt the outbound Salesloft cadence to drive additional activity or launch the nurture email stream through Marketo. This new activity could convert the lookalike account into a high-intensity account. Then, the new high-intensity account is funneled through that process.
Are you ready to focus on account-level insights?
If my neighbor transitioned from academia to B2B marketing, he’d say something like this: “The path from inquiry to close travels through a committee, so identify the constituencies on that committee and understand what’s important to them.”
In the old days, if the chief information security officer at a Fortune 500 company downloaded a white paper, the brand’s marketers used to jump up and down, thinking it was the opening play for a large sale.
But don’t get that excited about a C-suite download. That CISO might have her signature on the purchase order but likely has a committee of three to 10 or more influencers who collectively decide on a vendor and product offering. Like the parents buying a new home, the interests of the daughter, son, and dog are of high importance.
As the IBM journey shared by Caitlyn proves, it’s smart to transition from individual to account-level insights. Use the data gained from the pursuit of high-intensity accounts to identify new accounts likely to convert to high-intensity.
Like most people, I hate spending money on some things but love spending on others.
For example, I’ve been known to overpay for hotels, restaurants, good wine, and good food because I enjoy them. But I’m a Scrooge when it comes to things like cars or handyman tools (screwdrivers, hammers, pliers, etc.).
In marketing, I find that most organizations are the same way. They’ll readily and eagerly purchase (and even pay above-market prices for) some things. But they’ll tell everyone to get other things as inexpensively as possible.
Technology is one of those things companies want to buy inexpensively.
Technology as the gatekeeper
Technology investment is one of the biggest barriers to innovative marketing changes. Inevitably, when teams get excited to try a new approach in their marketing strategy, everybody gets excited until this realization hits: They’ll have to invest in new tools to get the project done.
That’s when analysis paralysis sets in. Teams often feel they can’t move forward with the new approach until they decide on the technology purchase. But they can’t decide on the specific technology until they’ve designed the new approach.
“The technology will help enforce the standards and how we’ll work,” they think. “But don’t we need to create the new ways we’ll work before we can create the standards?”
It can be messy.
Now that it’s the fourth quarter (for many), planning is underway. Budgets are due. New strategies are being formed for 2025. Leftover money must be spent before the year’s end.
Naturally, thoughts turn to technology needs. You may be mulling over questions such as:
What technology should we budget for (and why is it AI)?
Which new tools will help us achieve our plan (and why aren’t they AI)?
What cool new capability might we buy with that leftover money (is it AI)?
This year’s tech questions seem particularly complex.
I hear many marketers asking if a customer data platform will become the next new thing. Others don’t even know what a customer data platform is.
Some talk about finally upgrading to a digital asset management system (DAM). Others wonder if the four DAMs their company already has are enough to accomplish the new thing they want.
How about a new analytics solution? Some people hate Google Analytics 4. But what would be better?
Then there’s AI. Is it time to finally invest in an enterprise AI solution? Or should you stick with the ones embedded in your productivity suites?
And didn’t product X get four new updates last week? Wait. Did we forget about intent data? Add that to our tech dream board, too!
Before you buy any or all of that, pause. Take a deep breath. Realize that all those dreams could quickly become nightmare scenarios if they require skill levels your company can’t accommodate.
That’s one reason marketing technology decisions can be incredibly frustrating. Everyone wants the technology to be easy.
ADVERTISEMENT
Learn How a CMS
Can Simplify Your Content Strategy
New to content management? Perplexed about organizing your brand’s content? Learn how a CMS (Content Management System) simplifies creating, organizing, and sharing content—all in one place. Gain valuable tips, tools, and insights.
Start Learning
Caveat emptor: Think before you buy
Have you heard this aphorism? “A boat is a hole in the water that you throw money into.”
It means that when you decide to invest in a boat, you’re not just buying the boat — you’re also committing to everything that goes along with owning a boat. That includes renting a dock, acquiring a trailer, keeping up with the significant maintenance required, and paying for the fuel and other costs of operating it.
It’s not a stretch to adapt that saying to our industry: “Marketing tech is a hole the business throws money and time into.”
That doesn’t mean you shouldn’t invest in it (or buy that boat if you need it or love to go out on the water). Marketing technology can return extraordinary value. But, yeah, no one’s excited about writing the check to pay for it.
The key is to be conscious of what you’re buying. Any marketing technology worth purchasing involves all these elements:
Implementation
Training
User learning curve time
Ongoing administration
I’ve seen some real challenges on this front.
One B2B company I work with has been stuck in some form of software selection or technology implementation cycle since the beginning of the year. It’s limited in the number of creative campaigns it can craft because it has been so busy figuring out the technology to help craft more creative campaigns.
Ironic.
But if tech purchases won’t make your 2025 content dreams come true, what should you focus on to set your program up for success?
I have a few ideas.
Focus on change first, then technology
I’ve been advising clients and colleagues to worry less about which new technology will be a must-have for 2025. Instead, I recommend developing the muscle to evolve content activities into repeatable processes. Then, you can apply technology to support or enforce those processes.
How do you do this?
I find that it’s critical to hold frequent discussions with stakeholders about the audience and customer journey. It’s the one thing that is genuinely cross-functional, involving not only marketing but also sales, customer service, finance, product, brand, and even the C-suite.
In other words, your team probably isn’t the only one creating bold new content plans for the coming year.
Expect to participate in many meetings to understand what the sales team wants, what the brand team thinks, what the public relations crew has on their mind, and what senior leadership thinks.
But success isn’t built from a mutual understanding of separate agendas. The teams must come together to develop one collaborative content strategy for customer and audience engagement.
To achieve it, focus on these three fundamentals:
1. Orchestrate connected experiences, not siloed hand-offs
Think about 2025 planning in a way that lets you decouple customer and audience data management from the content experience. Explore how you can create a unified view of your subscribers and customers so that things like “audience,” “lead,” “opportunity,” and “customer” are attributes in a single database instead of siloed buckets.
That probably means technology will eventually play a role. But first, create awareness of what content is planned, by whom, and where it will be distributed.
Almost every business would benefit from communicating about the portfolio of content that will be created rather than meeting about what was created.
2. Shift to meaning-driven (not data-driven) content operations
What meaning do the email address, first name, and last name of someone who registered for a white paper contain? If it’s early in the customer’s journey, chances are little to none.
You can, perhaps, draw some inferences about buying intent based on the topic of the digital asset. But, the intent with which that data was provided may completely circumvent that inference. (How many [email protected] or similar email addresses do you get?)
That kind of marketing data has no inherent meaning. It’s just a collection of facts, figures, and attributes. You need more interactions with that person to develop a relationship.
Focus on developing new strategies to find the emotional value in information that’s given rather than gathered.
Consider an email address gathered from a gated white paper versus one given to subscribe to a weekly newsletter after reading that white paper. How much more valuable is the email address when you know it’s given willingly, trustingly, and with the expectation of receiving valuable communication from your brand?
3. Organize for agility, not speed
You’ve probably read many essays about how marketing teams need to operate with more agility. Just remember, agility isn’t about moving faster. It’s about focusing on high-value, high-priority activities.
The constant pressure of more and more content arises from a fear of moving too slowly. Replace that fear with joy by planning to spend more time developing powerful thought leadership stories and less time creating endless assets.
Think about how to shift your processes to spend more time planning powerful, meaningful, differentiated content. Once you create those stories, you can decide how to transform them into digital assets.
Can you separate the process of content creation and digital asset production and end up more agile? I think you can.
Content marketing field of dreams
An “if we buy it, they will come” approach to technology (to paraphrase a famous movie line) rarely leads to success.
Yet, it’s one of the primary drivers of technology selections. Too many businesses allow their technology purchases to drive their future marketing approach.
You can’t measure success by how much technology you deploy. That’s like thinking you can get to work faster by purchasing more cars. You’ll just accrue more debt and spend too much time managing and maintaining those cars.
What will 2025 bring? More AI? A social media collapse? Google search collapse? Paid media explosion? The growth of influencers? The return of the metaverse? NFTs? A B2B version of TikTok? We. Don’t. Know.
But, as you’re looking at your budget, plan, or year-end spending, take a beat. Before you commit to a tool purchase, think about what you hope you and your team will be spending time and money on this time next year.
Write it out. What does your day look like?
That’ll help you dream about how to accomplish it. You may still hate spending on technology, but the ability to apply it to a better purpose should diminish the sting.
It’s your story. Tell it well.
Robert Rose consults and hosts workshops on helping marketing teams align their marketing processes to all kinds of technologies – including generative AI. Contact him to learn about those programs.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
Tell me something, marketers. Are you satisfied with the state of B2B content marketing?
According to 980 of you, the answer is likely “no,” given how much more you say you want in the Content Marketing Institute’s annual B2B Content Marketing Benchmarks, Budgets, and Trends: Outlook for 2025, conducted with MarketingProfs and sponsored by The MX Group.
More what? Well, resources, sure. That’s a given.
Also, more people. Clarity of purpose. Goals. Technology. And maybe more inspiration.
Without these, many of you feel just meh about your work:
A whopping chunk (58%) of B2B marketers rate their content strategy as merely “moderately effective.”
Nearly half of those say their strategy struggles because they lack clear goals.
Only one in three say they have a scalable model for content creation.
The biggest challenge? A lack of resources.
So what else is new? In the 15 years CMI and MarketingProfs have conducted this survey, these same limitations surface again and again.
As Robert Rose, CMI chief strategy advisor, said after looking through these findings, “One of the most remarkable things about this year’s research is how unremarkable it is. Frustration and simple maintenance have become the status quo in B2B marketing.”
But, while many find themselves simply treading water, a group of top performers has found a way to surge ahead. They’ve figured out how to understand their audience’s needs, produce high-quality content, and use AI to create more efficient workflows.
Let’s dive into the results — including what separates meh from marvelous. (Use the Table of Contents to navigate to the sections that interest you most. You’ll find Robert’s suggestions on what to do about all of this in Action steps.)
Team structure
Are organizations dedicating enough people to their content initiatives? When we asked B2B marketers how content marketing work gets done within their organizations, most (76%) have a dedicated content marketing team or person on staff. And the larger the organization, the more likely it was to have dedicated resources.
But most (54%) who have a dedicated content marketing team or staff say the team is small, consisting of two to five people.
What if there’s no dedicated team or person?
Believe it or not, 24% of B2B respondents say they don’t have dedicated content marketing teams or staff. When we asked that group how the work gets done, 50% say they rely on multiple content teams (e.g., department, brand, or product), 7% say they use an outside content marketing agency/vendor, and 43% list “other.”
Those who chose “other” offered explanations that ranged from two people with multiple responsibilities, including content, to whoever was available.
And therein lies a problem: While staff may handle content-related tasks, no one is responsible for leading content marketing as a strategic approach. Reactive, scattershot content tactics aren’t likely to generate any meaningful (or consistent) results.
Content strategy effectiveness
Next, we asked the 95% of B2B marketers who have a content strategy to rate its effectiveness. Less than a third (29%) call it extremely or very effective. Well over half (58%) say it is moderately effective, while 12% say it is not very effective, and 1% say it is not at all effective.
Among those who rate their strategy as moderately effective or worse, 42% cite a lack of clear goals as the reason why they didn’t rate it higher.
Other reasons include:
Not tied to customer journey (39%)
Not data-driven (35%)
Ineffective audience research (29%)
Other (26%)
Unrealistic expectations (23%)
Emphasizes content quantity over quality (20%)
Failure to iterate/adapt (18%)
Inconsistent brand voice (17%)
Poor content quality (10%)
Those who selected “other” cite the following problems:
Lack of resources (time, budget, and people)
Lack of leadership (no clear direction)
Internal silos (inefficiencies and conflicting priorities)
Their comments include:
“Constantly shifting messaging in response to shifting leadership priorities”
“Lack of budget to develop content and too many cooks in the kitchen”
“Lack of resources with strategic content planning and development skills”
“Limited time and resources to focus on prioritizing content”
“Too many diverse business units”
“Too many brands and products without clear priority”
“Lack of time to focus on long-term strategy due to short-term demands by the organization. Long-term strategic content marketing projects are not prioritized, even though they would move the needle for the overall brand; not enough people/resources and high volume of work.”
Content marketing challenges
When we asked about challenges not related to content creation, the most often cited was lack of resources (54%). Last year, about the same amount (58%) said the same. It’s a problem that just doesn’t go away.
Measuring the results of content efforts (a new option in this year’s survey) came in second, cited by 47%. Aligning content with the buyers’ journey remains a challenge, as 45% indicate it’s a problem this year vs. 48% the previous year.
Another challenge that’s not going anywhere — aligning content across sales and marketing (43% cite it as a challenge this year compared with 45% the previous year).
Also new to the list this year was communicating across organizational silos, with 40% indicating that it’s challenging.
B2B marketers appear to have gained some ground with:
Managing workflow issues/content approvals process: 33% mention it this year, down from 41% the previous year
Keeping up with new technologies: 27% cite it this year, down from 34% the previous year
Accessing subject matter experts: 33% indicate it’s challenging vs. 39% the previous year
Creating content that prompts a desired action isn’t easy
Content creation challenges look different for B2B marketers than the previous year. Based on our conversations with marketers, we added a new option to the list of challenges: Creating content that prompts a desired action.
Turns out, our observation was right. More B2B marketers (55%) cite it as a challenge than any other option.
We asked Ann Handley, chief content officer at MarketingProfs, why B2B content teams struggle with this. Here’s what she says:
Ann Handley Chief Content Officer MarketingProfs
My question is … how are you measuring this? Or, rather, how do you know it’s not creating the action you want to inspire?
B2B content is part of a complex matrix of various touchpoints, seen and unseen, including word of mouth, dark social, that one guy who mentioned your brand on LinkedIn. We want to believe the purchase journey is a straight, orderly line of attribution: Read blog post. > Hit demo. > Buy.
But B2B — or any marketing — doesn’t work that way. It’s less straight line, more squiggly scribble that overlaps in oddball ways. Less straightforward path; more conspiratorial crime scene investigation board.
What marketers can do about it is to rethink the messy muddle of attribution to think about more meaningful ways to know what’s ‘working.’
Not how many people downloaded a white paper … but how many then signed up for your email newsletter? And then, how many of them wrote back to you when you told a story in the last issue about a specific problem they have? What did existing customers tell you worked the last time you spoke with them? Rethink off-the-shelf metrics (because there is no shelf).
Other content creation challenges
Last year, most B2B marketers (57%) cited creating the right content for the audience as a challenge. This year, only 40% did. That may indicate that B2B marketers have improved or focused more on crafting better-targeted content in the last 12 months.
Fewer marketers mention differentiating content and creating it consistently as top challenges this year compared to last (43% and 42%, respectively, this year, down from 54% for both last year).
Creating enough content is still a challenge for 39% this year. Last year, we distinguished between creating enough content to keep up with internal demand (34%) and external demand (30%). Content repurposing is a challenge for 37%. As it was a new option this year, a comparison is not available.
And here’s a somewhat surprising change given recent SEO developments: Only 35% of marketers cite optimizing for SEO as a top challenge this year, down from 45% last year. Perhaps even more surprising? Only 27% said creating quality content is a challenge, down from 44% last year.
B2B marketers’ tech stacks lack these essentials
When we asked B2B marketers which capabilities, if any, are missing from their marketing tech stack, nearly half (47%) say they lack efficient lead generation and nurturing processes. The same number say they do not have streamlined marketing data management and reporting.
Almost as many (45%) said they lack the tech to support data-driven decision-making. Forty-four percent say the ability to automate repetitive tasks and workflows is missing, and the same number say advanced personalization options aren’t available. Forty-one percent lack easy access to enterprise analytics, and 39% say strong alignment between sales and marketing systems isn’t possible. Only 8% say no capabilities are missing from their tech stack.
Too few have the right technology — or use it to its potential
It’s no wonder B2B marketers struggle with essential tech capabilities: Only 26% of those surveyed think their organization has the right technology to manage content across the organization. That’s worse than last year, when 31% said the same thing.
Also challenging is the percentage of marketers who say they have the technology but aren’t using its potential, which increased to 38% this year from 30% last year.
Nearly half of B2B marketers lack a scalable model for content creation
Here’s another way B2B marketers struggle: Nearly half (45%) lack a scalable model for content creation. Just slightly more than a third (35%) say they do have a scalable content creation model, and 20% said they’re not sure whether they have one or not.
Andi Robinson, content strategist at Hijinx Marketing, explains why this failure to have and integrate tech capabilities holds B2B marketers back:
Andi Robinson Content Strategist Hijinx Marketing
Companies that have not taken the time to develop a robust and scalable content creation framework risk bottlenecks in their process, content that is not aligned to organizational and marketing strategy, and audience-facing brand inconsistencies.
Having a structured, scalable content creation process leads to greater content consistency and quality, more efficient use of resources, and better audience engagement.
On the brighter side, we followed up with those who have scalable models to ask if those models create the desired outcomes. Forty-one percent say they do. Slightly more than half (53%) say no, but we’re getting there, and just 6% say no, we have a long way to go.
B2B marketers struggle to measure content’s impact
Year after year, we hear marketers say how hard it is to prove the impact of their work. Let’s dig in to where they struggle.
We asked the B2B marketers (96%) who say they measure their content performance to indicate their agreement with the following: “Our organization measures content performance effectively.”
About half (51%) say they strongly or somewhat agree. Fifteen percent neither agree nor disagree. Twenty-three percent somewhat disagree, and 11% strongly disagree. So, the struggle is real for at least a third to half of marketers.
We asked B2B marketers what challenges their team faces while measuring content performance. Fifty-six percent say difficulty attributing ROI to content efforts. The same number cite difficulty tracking customer journeys.
Other challenges include:
Inability to tie performance to business goals (44%)
Insufficient resources or budget (41%)
Lack of clear marketing goals/KPIs (39%)
Data silos within the organization (37%)
Limited access to advanced analytics tools (33%)
Complex or inadequate reporting systems (29%)
Inability to extract valuable information from data/analytics (29%)
Lack of data skills/talent (25%)
Amy Higgins, director of content strategy at Cloudflare, offered her take on why it’s so hard:
Amy Higgins Director of Content Strategy Cloudflare
Many marketers have a hard time calculating the ROI of their content initiatives because they don’t count both the creation and the distribution of their content. Most look only at the distribution costs alone.
It takes time to create content — whether the hours you pay an agency or your in-house team, their time costs money. Many people forget that and will only look at an agency invoice or the distribution spend. That means they are only calculating a portion of their content investment.
AI use trends
When it comes to AI use in B2B content marketing, we found many marketers experimenting, but few incorporate it into daily operations. That’s one area where top performers have pulled ahead of their peers. I’ll get into that shortly. For now, let’s look at a few findings.
Eighty-one percent of B2B marketers tell us their teams are using generative AI tools — that’s a jump up from 72% the previous year.
Marketers who don’t use AI cite accuracy concerns
We asked the few marketers who don’t use generative AI tools why. They cite these reasons:
Accuracy concerns (35%)
Corporate mandates not to use (28%)
Copyright concerns (26%)
Lack of training (22%)
Lack of understanding (19%)
No need/no use for gen AI (17%)
Other (14%)
Unsure (13%)
Many teams experiment, few integrate it
Most teams (54%) take an ad hoc approach to AI (i.e., they’re experimenting but not necessarily applying it widely). Another 27% report their teams don’t formally use AI, but individual staff members may choose to use it. Only 19% of B2B marketers say AI is integrated into their daily processes/workflows.
How can B2B marketers move the needle on AI integration? Pam Didner, author of The Modern AI Marketer, suggests these elements:
Pam Didner Author The Modern AI Marketer
Train with show and tell. Show what AI can do in real time. Give examples of how different job functions can use AI.
Incorporate AI into your processes or workflows. Identify specific, repeatable tasks where AI can seamlessly fit, reducing the need for experimentation. If necessary, building custom AI tools or integrating existing platforms can help more consistent use.
Advocate for it: C-suite executives and department heads must actively champion AI adoption. Their support is vital to fostering a culture of innovation, encouraging teams to move beyond occasional experimentation.
More B2B marketers have AI guidelines than last year
The number of B2B marketers whose organizations lack AI usage guidelines dropped to 45%, down from 61% last year.
Well over a third (38%) say their organization has AI guidelines, while nearly a quarter (23%) say their marketing team has guidelines. (Respondents could select both options.) Three percent are unsure if guidelines exist.
What AI guidelines cover
The respondents’ generative AI guidelines address a range of topics. Acceptable uses in content marketing topped the list, cited by 78%. Other areas include:
Security measures specific to using generative AI (66%)
Unacceptable uses of generative AI in content marketing (66%)
Data-handling guidelines for generative AI platforms/output (64%)
Purpose/objectives for using generative AI in marketing (58%)
Transparency (i.e., disclosing when content is generated by AI) (48%)
Legal/copyright recommendations (47%)
Mitigating bias in generative AI output (29%)
Real-world applications for generative AI (27%)
Most still use free AI tools
As in the previous year, most B2B marketers working with generative AI use free tools (88% vs. 91% the previous year). Forty-nine percent (up from 39% the previous year) use AI tools in their content creation/management systems, and 32% (up from 27% the previous year) pay for tools.
Do B2B marketers trust generative AI’s outputs?
We wondered how much trust B2B marketers place in generative AI’s outputs. It turns out that only 4% report a high level of trust. Most (67%) have a medium level of trust, and 28% say they have a low level of trust. Just 1% don’t trust AI output.
AI content quality is doubted
What about the quality of content generated by AI? That gets mixed reviews. Only 17% rate it as excellent or very good. But 44% say the output is good, and 35% say it’s fair. Only 4% rate it as poor.
Erika Heald, fractional head of content and founder at Erika Heald Marketing Consulting, explains why generative AI content underwhelms:
Very few companies have comprehensive content governance programs in place, starting with defining their unique brand voice and how that affects the content they create and how they communicate with the communities they serve.
When combined with a detailed content style guide, content templates that make it clear what good content looks like, and agreed-upon workflows, content governance is what gives AI tools the context they need (just like humans) to create truly exceptional content.
Almost half of B2B marketers who use gen AI have more efficient workflows
Half of B2B marketers (51%) who use generative AI are noticing fewer tedious tasks as a result. Forty-five percent see more efficient workflows, 42% experience improved content optimization, and 38% see improved creativity. Far fewer see the following effects of generative AI use:
Job anxiety (18%)
Changing job requirements (16%)
More personalized content (14%)
Lower-quality content (13%)
Employee layoffs (2%)
Employee hires (2%)
Other (5%)
Only 8% say AI has no impact.
More than half prioritize AI-powered automation in 2025
When we asked B2B marketers how their organizations will prioritize AI-powered automation in 2025, 56% indicate it would be a high or medium priority. Twenty-one percent say it’s a low priority, and 11% don’t rate it as a priority, with 12% unsure of what will happen in 2025.
Again, MarketingProfs’ Ann Handley has some thoughts:
Ann Handley Chief Content Officer MarketingProfs
Let’s go back to that earlier stat that showed how 43% of B2B marketers struggle with differentiating their content from their competitors. We struggle standing out in the sea of same. Yet, at the same time, 56% of B2B marketers are looking to prioritize AI-powered automation in 2025.
The question is: What are we automating? Let’s be smart about it.
Actually, here’s a plea from me: Use AI to automate the boring stuff that gets in the way of creativity. Use it to free up time to be more strategic and creative. Don’t offload your creativity to AI because next year … that 43% is going to increase in the 2026 version of this report. (FOREBODING SWELL OF MUSIC.)
Content and marketing goals
As we’ve seen in past years, content marketing helps most B2B marketers at the top of the funnel, with 87% reporting that it helped them create brand awareness in the last 12 months. Seventy-four percent say it helped generate demand/leads; 62% say it nurtured subscribers/audience/leads; 52% say it grew loyalty with existing clients/customers; and 49% say it helped generate sales/revenue. Thirty-seven percent say content marketing helped grow a subscribed audience, and 9% say it reduced customer support costs.
Success factors
On to what you can learn from the most successful marketers.
Each year, we ask, “How would you characterize the success of your organization’s content marketing approach in the last 12 months?” (Success is defined as achieving your organization’s desired/targeted results.)
This year, 22% of B2B marketers characterize the success of their content marketing as extremely or very successful. Fifty-four percent report moderate success and 21% feel minimally or not at all successful. Three percent are unsure.
We segmented the responses from marketers who rate their organizations as extremely or very successful and dubbed them as the top performers. We looked at what they do differently from their peers and explored the factors they attribute to their success.
What the most successful do
How do the most successful content marketers differ from their less successful peers? Top performers are more likely to:
Think the size of their content marketing team will grow in 2025.
Rate their content strategy as extremely or very effective.
Have the right technology to manage content across the organization.
Have a scalable model for content creation.
Say their scalable model is creating the desired outcomes.
Do a better job measuring content performance effectively.
Use content marketing successfully to generate demand/leads, nurture subscribers/audiences/leads, grow loyalty with existing clients/customers, and generate sales/revenue.
Regarding AI, little difference existed last year between top performers and their peers. That changed this year, as top performers pulled ahead of their peers in some areas, including:
Existence of organizational guidelines for generative AI use
Integration of AI into their daily processes/workflows
Realization of more efficient workflows from AI
Improved content optimization from AI
Reasons for top performers’ success
Like the previous year, the top performers attribute their success mostly to understanding their audience (82%).
Other factors mentioned include:
Produce high-quality content (77%)
Possess industry expertise (70%)
Have high-performing team members (69%)
Set goals that align with their organization’s objectives (62%)
Measure and demonstrate content performance effectively (53%)
Have a documented strategy (47%)
We asked B2B marketers with moderate or lower levels of success, “What would it take to improve your content marketing success?” These comments illustrate some common themes in their responses:
“More human resources and fewer rush requests from other teams.”
“Better strategy, more focused goals. Prioritizing the various internal clients’ needs vs. ROI.”
“A larger team, more/clearer direction from leadership about the role of marketing within the organization, more resources.”
“Fewer silos and more coordination between teams.”
“More dedicated content repurposing process, buyer journey insights — creating more targeted content that aligns to each stage of the journey.”
“Align the content marketing team’s strategy and goals with other teams that create content.”
“Resources to generate more content and repurpose it effectively.”
B2B content tactics
Now that we’ve explored how B2B content marketers work, where they struggle, and how top performers differ, let’s turn to the kinds of content produced and where marketers get the best results.
Short articles are the most-used content type
We asked B2B marketers about the types of content, distribution channels, paid channels, and social media channels used over the last 12 months. The data didn’t show any notable differences between the top performers and the rest of the marketers.
The list of content types and usage looks almost identical to last year’s. Ninety-two percent used short articles/posts, 76% used videos, 75% used case studies/customer stories, 69% used long articles/posts, 57% used data visualizations/visual content, and 51% used e-books/white papers. Less than half of B2B marketers used product technical/data sheets (41%), research reports (36%), and interactive content (27%).
Videos are rated most effective
Last year, B2B marketers said case studies/customer stories were the most effective types of content. This year, they say videos (58%), which came in second last year, are the most effective, followed by case studies/customer stories (53%), e-books/white papers (45%), research reports (45%), and short articles/posts (43%).
Almost all distribute content via social media and corporate blogs
As we saw with the content types, the distribution channel list looks almost identical to what we reported last year.
More than half used organic social media platforms (89%), blogs on corporate websites (84%), email newsletters (71%), email (63%), in-person events (55%), and webinars (55%). Fewer than half used digital events (40%), podcasts (27%), and microsites (26%).
Other channels included digital magazines (22%), direct mail (16%), hybrid events (16%), print magazines (15%), branded online communities (14%), online learning platforms (13%), mobile apps (8%), and separate content brands (5%).
Podcast use saw a slight decrease from the previous year (27% vs. 30%). Why aren’t more B2B marketers using this format?
A. Lee Judge, co-founder and chief marketing officer of Content Monsta, offers his take:
A. Lee Judge Co-founder and CMO Content Monsta
Most businesses view podcasts only as a channel, missing the chance to use them as a content source. Podcasts produce media-rich and engaging content that performs well across multiple channels, including social media, blogs, and newsletters.
Like other content marketing, tracking direct attribution from podcast engagement to closed deals is hard. The way podcasts are consumed makes measurement that much more difficult.
Under pressure to show ROI, valuable marketing programs like podcasts get cut due to imprecise measurement. And marketers often focus on the wrong KPIs for podcasts.
Podcasting for business should be viewed as a content engine and a relationship builder. Traditional metrics miss both. Businesses don’t need a large podcast audience — they need the right audience. So, instead of tracking downloads and subscribers, they should measure content engagement, brand mentions, lead generation, and business relationships.
In-person events and webinars most popular and effective distribution channels
Like the previous year, B2B marketers say in-person events (52%) and webinars (51%) are the most effective distribution channels, followed by email (42%), organic social media platforms (42%), blogs on corporate websites (41%), and email newsletters (37%).
84% use paid channels; social media advertising tops the list
Eighty-four percent of B2B marketers say they use paid channels. Of those, 73% use social media advertising/promoted posts. More than half also use search engine marketing/pay-per-click (64%), digital display advertising (62%), and sponsorships (62%). Fewer than half use native advertising/sponsored content (34%), partner emails (30%), print display advertising (21%), influencer marketing (16%), and other (5%).
Search engine marketing produces best results among paid channels
As they did the previous year, B2B marketers said SEM/PPC was the paid channel that produced the best results for their content marketing (61%), followed by social media advertising/promoted posts (49%), sponsorships (48%), and digital display advertising (35%).
B2B marketers consistently cite LinkedIn as the social media platform that delivers the best value for their organization, and this year is no different. Eighty-five percent say LinkedIn delivers the best value, followed by 28% who say Facebook, 22% who cite YouTube, and 21% who say Instagram. Only 7% mention Twitter and 3% say TikTok, with responses nearly identical to the previous year.
Heike Young, head of content and integrated marketing at Microsoft, says LinkedIn remains a gold mine for B2B marketers:
Heike Young Head of Content and Integrated Marketing Microsoft
Think you need to be overly formal, corporate, and professional on LinkedIn? Nope. Nowadays, creator-led campaigns and vertical videos bring a funnier and less stodgy flavor to the LinkedIn feed.LinkedIn is ubiquitous with B2B audiences. Literally everyone is there. Now’s the time to stand out and reach your audience where they are with content that’s refreshingly human and real.
The brands that do LinkedIn right today will wield huge influence over the next year.
Where did social media use increase?
With LinkedIn delivering the best value, it’s unsurprising that 68% of marketers increased their use of it in the last 12 months. What else is up?
31% increased their use of YouTube
27% increased their use of Instagram
20% increased their use of Facebook
9% increased their use of TikTok
6% increased their use of Reddit
6% increased their use of X
X’s overall use declines
B2B marketers’ use of organic social media platforms looks much like it did the previous year. The only sizeable decrease came from X: 39% say they don’t use X. Last year, only 27% said they didn’t use it.
Only 15% say they use Reddit. Considering its recent debut in Google’s search results, it will be interesting to see what happens over the next year on that platform.
Budgets and spending trends
Sixty-three percent of B2B marketers say they have knowledge of their organization’s budget/budgeting process for content marketing. Among those marketers, 46% think their content marketing budget will increase in 2025 when compared with 2024 (last year, 45% thought their budget would increase). Forty-one percent think their budget will stay the same, 8% expect it to decrease, and 5% are unsure.
AI investments join the list of spending areas for 2025
As we saw in the last two years, the majority of B2B marketers (61%) think their organization will increase investment in videos in 2025. Budgets for AI for content optimization/performance (40%) and AI for content creation (39%) were new areas of investment on the list this year.
The other investment areas were cited in numbers similar to last year except for in-person events, which decreased to 35% this year vs. 47% last year.
To summarize, 61% think their organization will increase investment in videos in 2025, followed by thought leadership content (52%), AI for content optimization/performance (40%), paid advertising (40%), AI for content creation (39%), in-person events (35%), webinars (32%), building an online community (27%), digital events (21%), and audio content (20%).
1 in 4 think their team will grow in 2025
In a new question, we asked B2B marketers to predict whether their teams would grow, stay the same, or decrease in the coming year. Almost two-thirds (64%) expect the size of their content marketing team will stay the same in 2025; however, 27% think their team will grow. Only 6% think the team will decrease, and 3% are unsure. Among the top performers, 38% think their teams will grow.
When we asked why they think their teams will increase in 2025, several themes emerged:
Content importance: When the organization sees value in content, more resources are needed to manage and produce high-quality content.
Integration and collaboration: Many marketers expect to integrate content marketing more fully within their organizations to break down silos and create more cohesive teams.
Gaps and demands: Marketers reported plans to fill the content gaps for various audience segments.
Market demand: More content staff can capitalize on market opportunities and meet customer needs.
Organizational growth: Some organizations are expanding operations and entering new markets.
Here are some of the B2B marketers’ comments:
“Demand is high, and we have a unique proposition in the market.”
“Increasing understanding of the power of content.”
“Content has become more relevant to the business in the last few years.”
“Our business is growing, and our need for content has increased. Content has been a significant part of our organic growth.”
“Good content is more important than ever, so our needs will continue to grow.”
“Higher demand for increasingly diverse content.”
While such growth will be exciting, it will be important to ensure that these teams have the leadership, goals, strategies, resources, budgets, scalable content models, and technologies they need for success.
Action steps
So, how can B2B content and marketing teams act on these benchmarks and trends? I asked CMI’s Robert Rose to provide some advice. Here’s what he said:
“Do. Or do not. There is no try.” — Yoda
Robert Rose Chief Strategy Advisor Content Marketing Institute
One of the more common situations I see B2B marketing teams facing today is the perennial state of “fixing things.” The CMS never got fully implemented. The “phase X” of marketing automation doesn’t work the way it should. Customer data is inaccessible. So are the analytics. The new CMO is reorganizing and auditing the teams. Everyone’s struggling to keep up with content demand, so we’re trying to fix our production tools. And we’re all busy experimenting with AI.
On many teams, 100% of time and resources go to fixing or maintaining things. When new ideas come along, the team either can’t do them or sighs wearily and says, “OK, we’ll try.”
But the most successful teams don’t try. They do these things:
Create a content orchestration approach. Fixing the communication, collaboration, and alignment among the teams handling content creation, consumption, publishing, and measurement isn’t glamorous. Still, here’s a truth about one company that now seems to effortlessly produce compelling content that wins all the awards. It once spent years tackling the non-glamorous work of creating cross-team governance, workflows, and standards. It was tough and messy, and it required a shift in working habits. Today, it’s operating on an entirely different level.
Take a structured approach to content and marketing innovations. Letting every team member experiment with AI and other innovations is like setting dogs or cats loose in a pet food store to find a workable approach to better animal nutrition. You won’t get efficiency by adding “experiment” to everyone’s workload or by filling every spare moment with a “making marketing better” meeting. Instead, come together (see previous point) to collaborate on and commit to a few strategic bets. They might still fail, but you’ll learn why they failed rather than just saying, “We didn’t give it enough resources.”
Stop doing some things. Many marketing challenges are caused by institutional momentum. One company I worked with created 250 PDFs for thought leadership in a year — only 63 of them earned more than 20 downloads. Teams increasingly focus on task-based outputs rather than meaningful outcomes. Stop producing what doesn’t work, end activities that don’t contribute to targeted outcomes, and quit measuring what doesn’t align with overall objectives.
Marketing teams must let go of the mindset that being 100% busy is a good thing. It isn’t. There will always be things to fix and maintain. But the only way out of meh content and marketing results isn’t to seek new resources to supplement the repair and maintenance work.
To be remarkable, you must create space for the possibility of creating something remarkable.
As I’ve said to many clients in the last six months, the decisions you make are not nearly as important as making them.
Stop trying things. Do things.
Methodology
The 15th annual content marketing survey was conducted by Content Marketing Institute and MarketingProfs. The survey was fielded between June 25 and Aug. 16, 2024, and was sponsored by The MX Group. The survey drew 1,186 global responses. This article reports on the 980 B2B respondents, mostly from North America.
The industries represented include:
Technology (27%)
Agency (15%)
Manufacturing (11%)
Professional services (10%)
Banking/finance/insurance (9%)
Consulting (7%)
Health care/med/pharma/life sciences (7%)
Other (14%)
The B2B marketers surveyed work in these organizational sizes:
One to nine employees (16%)
10 to 99 employees (28%)
100 to 999 employees (29%)
1,000-plus employees (27%)
Thanks to the survey participants who made this research possible and everyone who helps disseminate these findings throughout the marketing industry.
Get the latest Content Marketing Institute research reports while they’re hot – subscribe to the daily or weekly newsletter.
About Content Marketing Institute
Content Marketing Institute (CMI) exists to do one thing: Advance the practice of content marketing through online education and in-person and digital events. We create and curate content experiences that teach marketers and creators from enterprise brands, small businesses, and agencies how to attract and retain customers through compelling, multichannel storytelling. Global brands turn to CMI for strategic consultation, training, and research. Organizations from around the world send teams to Content Marketing World, the largest content marketing-focused event, the Marketing Analytics & Data Science (MADS) conference, and CMI virtual events, including ContentTECH Summit. Our community of 215,000-plus content marketers shares camaraderie and conversation. CMI is organized by Informa Connect. To learn more, visit www.contentmarketinginstitute.com.
About MarketingProfs
More than 600,000 marketing professionals worldwide rely on MarketingProfs for B2B Marketing training and education backed by data science, psychology, and real-world experience. Access free B2B marketing publications, virtual conferences, podcasts, daily newsletters (and more) and check out the MarketingProfs B2B Forum — the flagship in-person event for B2B Marketing training and education at MarketingProfs.com.
About The MX Group
The MX Group is the second-largest independent B2B marketing agency in the U.S., with a mission to impact the marketplace for companies that impact the world. For over 35 years, we’ve created meaningful Market Experiences for national and global B2B brands. Our clients are leaders and innovators in the automotive, energy and utilities, financial services, food, oil and gas, industrial, manufacturing, packaging, technology and SaaS sectors as well as trade associations. Whether a client is an established brand or a startup, we have the people and perspectives to be a strong partner that makes a difference. For more, visit themxgroup.com.
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
Building the ideal tech stack for content marketing remains a pie-in-the-sky dream for most marketers.
So, we asked the experts presenting at Content Marketing World 2024 which tools should be in those tech stacks but usually aren’t.
As usual, some rejected the premise, offering smart advice about why you should pause before moving forward with a new tool. Others got into specifics about the categories of tools every content marketing team needs.
Combine their tips to form a thoughtful approach to updating your content and martech strategy.
Retro ideas: Don’t buy new martech until you do these things
Before the era of digital marketing technology, marketers had to rely on strategies and other kinds of tools to reach audiences and deliver results to their brands. Some of that work should still happen today, as several experts advised:
Make a measurement plan before investing in new technology
It may not be a tool specifically, but most content marketers lack a measurement strategy and plan. Crafting a measurement strategy and tagging implementation are important steps that help inform future content and marketing decisions as well as optimizations. Marketers need to document business objectives and engagement goals that highlight where and how content is aiding in the customer journey. — Jill Roberson, senior vice president, digital marketing, Velir
Pick up the phone
The one invented by Alexander Graham Bell in 1876. It’s also one that we all carry in our pocket or pocketbook. The prevalence of AI tools in marketing creates an abstraction layer that I fear takes us further away from our customers. So yes, use that telephone and have meaningful conversations to better understand your customers. Getting on Zoom with webcams on is OK, but I prefer old-fashioned audio. — Dennis Shiao, founder, Attention Retention
Invest in people first
I’d say that many content marketers are probably trying to use too many tools. Instead of adding more tools, I’d take stock of what you’re paying for now and how (if?) you’re using them. If I had additional budget, I’d invest that in talent, either as full-time employees or consultants/contractors. — Michelle Garrett, consultant and writer, Garrett Public Relations
Use your noggin
There are many wonderful tools out there, but I think the biggest tool missing is the brain. With no offense, your client or your business should be as individual as a human. Tools can’t capture the humanness of your brand. — Michael Bonfils, global managing director, Digital International Group
Acquire new tools following this thinking
With your plans in place and your teams well educated, it’s time to tackle the martech tools and categories. Here’s some advice to consider:
Pay for generative AI
Tools are less important than the process. You can have a great process and be successful with no tools. And you can have lots of tools with no process and you won’t be successful.
That said, I think most content marketers are missing paid versions of generative AI tools and training on how to best leverage those to help with their workflows and processes.
This technology can make us so much more efficient and effective, and it’s still not being leveraged by the marketing teams at most of the institutions I work with. — Brian Piper, director of content strategy and assessment, University of Rochester
ADVERTISEMENT
Learn How a CMS
Can Simplify Your Content Strategy
New to content management? Perplexed about organizing your brand’s content? Learn how a CMS (Content Management System) simplifies creating, organizing, and sharing content—all in one place. Gain valuable tips, tools, and insights.
Start Learning
Buy for internal comms
An internal communication tool (beyond email/Slack) can organize ideas, concerns, suggestions, etc.
Sometimes the battles that content marketing has in quantifying its value up and down the organization are because of a lack of communication. — Troy Sandidge, founder, Strategy Hackers
Get a keyword research tool (and training)
Every web content marketer needs direct access to a key phrase research tool and knowledge of how to use it. Fewer walls between SEO optimization tools and content marketing execution speed up the build-measure-learn process. — Haley Collins, director of operations, GPO
Choose beyond-basic measurement tech
Marketing tech stacks today are siloed by function. As a result, many content marketers focus on vanity metrics such as downloads, page views, etc. What’s missing are sophisticated measurement tools that don’t just show how many downloads your content has generated but whether the content resonates with your intended audience. Similarly, we need data to capture where and how content is consumed in the customer journey. — Royna Sharifi, senior marketing campaign manager, Amazon Web Services
Unify management
True omnichannel content platforms, rather than simplistic web CMS (content management systems) and DAM (digital asset management) platforms that don’t manage component data, text, and media in a truly object-oriented way. — Tony Byrne, founder, Real Story Group
Get a comprehensive DAM
Many organizations attempt to save costs by using one platform for multiple purposes that may not be intended. Many SaaS vendors are happy to try to sell companies more features or functionalities they might not need or that are not right for them. The one piece of technology that is present in most SaaS platforms but is more of an afterthought than a strategic advantage is digital asset management (DAM). While most project management, social media, and campaign management platforms have a built-in DAM, that does not mean it should be used as a company-wide DAM. Most organizations lack a true, full-featured DAM with the appropriate functionality to manage all their content effectively. — Andi Robinson, content strategist, Hijinx Marketing
Listen to your customers on social media
Many organizations don’t have a tool for social listening or understanding their customer behaviors and preferences, which is crucial for improving their strategy and delivering personalized content. Social media can offer a treasure trove of insights into their customers and what they want to see from their content. Social media also provides a snapshot of the everyday language people use to talk about your topic, including specific pain points, giving color to your qualitative audience research. — Erika Heald, founder and chief content officer, Erika Heald Marketing Consulting
Invest in listening, despite the cost
Social listening tools! I’m baffled at how expensive social listening tools are — making them harder to access for content marketers without the right financial resources. This may be more of an accessibility issue than a personal one. Still, I feel social listening tools should be made more equitable so all content marketers can benefit from each other’s successes. — Beth Elderkin, content marketing manager, Informa Connect
Project management tools to monitor upcycled content
Most content marketers’ tech stack lacks sufficient tools to track the usage and repurposing of content. Digital asset management platforms may do well to store and catalog content but can fall short of tracking its use. Social media platforms typically are a poor place for storing content. To solve this, marketers need tools that allow them to both store and track the use of content so that it is not used once and forgotten. This could be a project management tool that integrates with both DAM and social media distribution platforms. — A. Lee Judge, co-founder and CMO, Content Monsta
Tools for bottom-of-the-funnel insights
Content marketing teams need a tool to easily understand their audiences’ interests, behaviors, activities, and intent signals. With insights like these, they can craft the content their audiences need and crave.
An abundance of content today focuses on top-of-funnel education, but audiences need more. Richer insights into buyer-level intent, interests, and needs allow content marketers to go deeper, understanding why their buyers buy and what challenges or hesitations they face along the way.
This enables content marketers to create content that directly addresses these needs, positioning themselves and their brand as trusted guides throughout the buying journey. — Josh Baez, senior manager, demand generation, NetLine
Seek out SEO research and website intelligence
SEO platforms related to website optimization and intelligence. Without this in their tech stack, it’s extremely hard for content marketers to do the research necessary to improve their content and monitor how it is doing. — Zack Kadish, senior SEO strategy director, Conductor
Ask for search query trackers
Organic search query tracking dashboards. There are tools that can help you identify the sentiments and search terms surrounding user search, but many organizations don’t use them to their full extent from content ideation to creation and distribution. — Mariah Obiedzinski Tang, assistant vice president of content marketing, Stamats
Keep asking for what may not (yet) exist
The unicorn of marketing remains elusive: true multi-touch attribution. — Jenn VandeZande, editor-in-chief, SAP CX + Industries
Build a martech stack you’ll really use
Yes, that famous martech diagram now includes 14,000-plus tools. But you don’t need every one of them.
Start building and editing your organization’s martech stack by assessing the resources you have (people, processes, and technology). Then, modify your tech stack to deliver what you need to grow a content marketing program that delivers big results.
All tools noted in the article are mentioned by the source. If you have a tool to suggest, tag Content Marketing Institute or @CMIContent on social media.
Register to attend Content Marketing World in San Diego. Use the code BLOG100 to save $100. Can’t attend in person this year? Check out the Digital Pass for access to on-demand session recordings from the live event through the end of the year.
MORE ADVICE FROM CONTENT MARKETING WORLD SPEAKERS:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
All this fragmentation of content consumption takes people out of shared media and cultural experiences and puts them into echo chambers, which makes it tough for new content experiences to break through. Almost every viral, popular, or culturally resonant breakout seems like an accident — content lightning in a bottle.
Successful marketers follow the same memo. They understand fragmentation’s implications on paid advertising, search marketing, social media, and owned media.
So, how do you innovate on fragmented terrain?
Where do you focus that hard-earned marketing budget in a world where reaching your consumers feels a bit like playing Dungeons and Dragons? You know, when you awake in the early morning among the failed remnants of your competitors’ content marketing campaigns. You have content to create. What do you do?
We took that question to Robert Rose, CMI’s chief strategy advisor. Read on or watch for his take:
See a full content experience like Progressive and Lenovo
Over the last couple of months, I’ve talked a lot about moving your content experiences to the edge. In this article and a subsequent webinar, I discussed the trend in content and marketing of delivering valuable content experiences in their entirety beyond your website.
As much as I found it annoying, I said it was the oxygen in the room. You’ve got to focus more on designing the experiences on your “rented land properties.” That’s content at the edges. It puts increased pressure on making your owned media experiences even more valuable, such as making that FAQ with the special, you-can’t-get-it-anywhere-but-here content.
This week, Digiday made that point in a discussion on the fragmentation in marketing and media consumption: “Brand marketers are increasingly more receptive to alternative advertising options to reach consumers.”
While Digiday refers to these options as “non-traditional formats,” you know them better as content marketing efforts.
The article references the Are We Becoming Our Parents? campaign from Progressive.
Its wonderful fictional counselor, Dr. Rick (played by Bill Glass), has appeared as a guest on the Hot Ones, the popular YouTube series where the hosts interview celebrities as they eat increasingly spicy hot wings.
Digiday also talks about the Pop-Tarts Bowl, the college football bowl game that originated last season and returns on Dec. 28, as a wonderful example of a differentiated owned-media approach.
But back to the Digiday article. The kicker for me was two quotes from Evan Giordano, a strategist at the creative and ad agency Mother New York. “You can’t rely on advertising around a piece of culture anymore and expect that anyone and everyone will see it,” he said.
Eric followed that up with the approach to alternative formats “is pretty liberating because your creative team and your strategist have to think like product people; they have to conceptualize the outside of traditional formats.”
Yes, that’s long been the focus of how content marketers can build value in today’s world. I devote a module to thinking like a product manager in my content marketing strategy class.
In any event, the heart of these trends in alternative formats involves doing interesting, out-of-the-box experiences and delivering them on specially designed platforms at the edges and your owned media.
Here’s my question for you: As you plan for 2025, can you plan swing-for-the-fences, content-driven experience products? You can design them for YouTube, other social media, your owned media, or all of the above.
Think about what you can do that goes beyond another year of incrementally getting one more spot higher in search, decreasing your cost per lead by 5%, or testing a hundred button shapes and colors to bump conversion rates by 2%.
Those expected goals are important, no doubt. But maybe in a world of fragmentation, you can try something that’s not so, well, piecemeal.
Want more content marketing tips, insights, and examples? Subscribe to workday or weekly emails from CMI.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
Reasons abound when you don’t want to do something: “I haven’t the time.” “The team is just me.” “Our audience needs new content.”
But are those the real reasons? Or are they excuses to thwart your fears of the unfamiliar, the unexpected, and the unknown?
If it’s the latter, try some of these techniques to get over the uncomfortable and tackle these five things in your content marketing program:
1. Talk to your ideal customers
Why you fear it: I admit it. This is my fear because it takes time to schedule interviews with members of your target market. Their feedback can be scary, too. Your ideal customers may not say what you expect, but that’s exactly why you should get to know their needs, challenges, and jobs to be done better. Without a detailed and well-researched buyer persona, your content can miss the mark regarding relevance and engagement.
Actionable steps to do it:
Engage the entire marketing team to document a detailed buyer persona that aligns with your content strategy.
Analyze your organization’s existing customer base and market research to understand the ideal customer.
Converse with members of the target market to understand their pain points, learn more about their needs, and explore the jobs they must do. Schedule interviews for detailed conversations or send surveys for quick replies.
Incorporate the research into a comprehensive buyer persona document, which details their pains and challenges, goals and motivations, jobs to be done, preferred channels and content types, and other relevant points of interest.
2. Pause new content and refresh existing content
Why you fear it: Many marketers are concerned about spending less time creating new content and more time editing content they already published. That shift goes against what they have been taught about frequent publishing.
I’ve never had this fear. From my first year in the content space, I refreshed content as often as I got the chance. I wrote two original articles a month and then analyzed past articles and edited them accordingly. This approach improved rankings and reader engagement.
Actionable steps:
Evaluate each content asset’s key metrics, such as traffic, engagement, conversion rates, and search rankings. Identify the top-performing content, which is typically only a handful or so in a large content library.
Use SEO tools to reevaluate your targeted keywords to see if interest has changed or if the term has a new meaning in searches.
Establish criteria for prioritizing which content to refresh (e.g., high potential keywords, evergreen topics, content with outdated information).
Update the content assets by making any necessary changes and enhancing their quality.
TIP: Run these content audits and refreshes regularly. Short on time? Set the expectation of updating one content asset a week whether it’s done internally or outsourced.
3. Ask industry peers for honest feedback
Why you fear it: No one likes to hear negative comments about their work, particularly if it’s harsh. It can be discouraging or damage your confidence. Impostor syndrome, time constraints, or a lack of peers can trouble many marketers. Some worry that seeking feedback could expose their weaknesses or reveal ideas their peers could use.
Actionable steps:
Realize that the content marketing community is vast and supportive.
Build a network of your industry peers. Attend in-person networking events, participate in online forums, and join relevant social media groups on LinkedIn or Facebook.
Talk to the peers you meet. Publish a group message or reach out directly to the people you know. Chat informally or schedule a call to discuss a pressing challenge or something cool you just learned about.
4. Run your content through a plagiarism checker
Why you fear it: You think your ideas and phrasing are unique and don’t want to discover someone who has already published something similar. You don’t want to make the writers, partners, and other internal and external collaborators think you doubt them. But with so much information overload, likely someone’s already thought of what you’re about to publish — maybe even using the exact words.
Checking for plagiarism should be mandatory if you’re working with writers, partners, and other external collaborators. Plagiarized content can severely damage a brand’s reputation, leading to a loss of trust among audiences and potential legal issues. There are also legal implications to keep in mind alongside a potential penalty from Google.
Actionable steps:
Accept that plagiarism is a dangerous possibility that could damage your trust with the audience, get a penalty from Google, or lead to a lawsuit.
Use plagiarism checker tools like Copyscape or Grammarly to ensure that your content is unique. Microsoft built a “similarity” check into Word’s editor tools.
Review the assessment to determine if the text requires rephrasing and new citations or is sufficient because “plagiarism” is really the use of common knowledge phrases, idioms, etc.
TIP: Use plagiarism checkers on your published content to learn if other websites have copied it entirely or published snippets.
5. Turn to internal teams for help
Why you fear it: You don’t want to bother their developers or customer support reps. You think your requests will not be supported or understood. You also may work for an employer where interdepartmental aid isn’t part of the organizational structure.
Actionable steps:
Specify what your needs are and identify which ones require input from internal teams. Do you need technical insights, customer feedback, or creative ideas? Which team members have the expertise relevant to your needs, such as developers, customer support reps, or designers?
Make an articulated request. Explain why it’s important and how their input can make a difference, the latter of which can motivate them to do it.
Make their process easier and communicate deadlines. For example, provide a developer writing an article for your tech blog with a rough outline of the core ideas. Edit their work so they can prioritize getting down their thoughts.
Organize interdepartmental meetings and brainstorming sessions to foster collaboration. Consider projects that require input from various teams so everyone feels valued and involved.
Conquer your fear with new techniques
These strategies might seem daunting, but doing what you’re afraid to do can significantly improve your content marketing. You can ensure that your brand distributes original content that reflects a deep understanding of your audience. You will gain from prioritizing quality over content and reap the value of feedback from industry peers and input from your internal teams.
Which fear will you tackle next?
All tools mentioned in this article were suggested by the author. If you’d like to suggest a tool, share the article on social media with a comment.
Register to attend Content Marketing World in San Diego. Use the code BLOG100 to save $100. Can’t attend in person this year? Check out the Digital Pass for access to on-demand session recordings from the live event through the end of the year.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
Almost three years ago, Micky Onvural made a surprising move. She left her role as CEO of a B2C fashion brand, Bonobos, to become CMO of TIAA, a century-old B2B brand focused on retirement plans.
“This was a whole new ball of wax for me,” says Micky, who has also held marketing-related roles at B2C brands eBay and L’Oréal.
That fresh perspective is just what TIAA wanted. Micky was hired as its chief marketing and communications officer shortly after CEO Thashunda Brown Duckett took the helm.
TIAA knew it needed to break free of the perception it was a “stuffy, old, white man’s brand” because of its heritage in higher education and not-for-profit insurance. Instead, it wanted to be known for its modern, fast-moving, and dynamic work.
TIAA CMO Micky Onvural 2024 B2B Content Marketer of the Year
A rebrand like that is already a big goal, but another big hurdle compounded it. TIAA had never really had a marketing strategy. For its first 95 or so years, its market dominance was enough. When Micky joined, TIAA needed to raise awareness and cut through a crowded market in a way that would get people’s attention.
“I’ve been incredibly fortunate to get somewhat of a blank slate,” Micky says.
To tell a new TIAA story, Micky and the team turned to two staples of B2B content marketing: an event and a publication, both called TMRW.
In 2024, TMRW (the publication) won Best B2B Branded Content Campaign at the Content Marketing Awards. And Micky, who championed and led the work, won the 2024 B2B Content Marketer of the Year title.
An event that’s the offspring of TED and Coachella
The TIAA reinvention started with an existing annual conference for its core customer base — retirement plan sponsors. Traditionally, attendees would spend a day and a half earning their industry’s continuing education credits as TIAA promoted its products.
Micky wanted to transform the event into something she conceived as the child of TED and Coachella. Her team leaned into the idea.
They named the “baby” TIAA TMRW and planned content to help retirement plan sponsors do their jobs better and get smarter about the retirement-related challenges employees face in the higher education industry.
The transformation worked. “We have seen people’s perception of the brand change dramatically and quickly,” Micky says. “I think it’s because of things that I call ‘symbols of reevaluation.’ There are moments where you go, ‘Oh, that wasn’t what I was expecting to see.’”
Evaluations showed that more than 80% of people at their first TIAA TMRW event positively shifted their perception of the brand. “It has become a want-to-go-to event because who doesn’t want to get better at their job and engage with their community,” Micky says.
The incredibly successful event prompted the TIAA team to expand the educationally focused marketing strategy to include a full-blown content brand.
Expanding the TMRW content brand
TMRW now encompasses a digital content hub and a print publication in addition to the event.
The editorial team, led by former journalist Beverly Goodman, tackles dense topics (like the retirement crisis and financial literacy) without the jargon typically associated with corporate thought leadership in the financial services sphere.
Using conversational language and a human element, TMRW breaks down complex concepts into relatable terms.
TIAA launched TMRW online in June 2023 and followed with the first edition of a 30-page print magazine. The second edition in October 2023 totaled 34 pages and was mailed as an insert in PLANSPONSOR magazine.
The team created more than 300 digital assets to support the first issues, including webinars, social media posts, promotion on online trade publications, and internal automated marketing sequences.
TMRW articles are also cataloged in TIAA’s content library (on the Seismic platform). Sales and distribution teams, some of whom provide feedback at editorial planning meetings, can “shop” for the content they need.
TMRW’s results exceeded every benchmark TIAA set to increase awareness and improve the perception of TIAA as a thought leader.
In the digital arena, in less than three months, TIAA received 764 online subscription lead records (a 2.6% subscription rate). Of those, 625 were new leads, resulting in a 2.1% lead generation, which was better than expected.
The second edition produced even better results. An added 365 subscribers helped to spur a 176% increase in web traffic.
TIAA also added TMRW webinars to the content distribution model, which produced more lead generation.
While they showed TIAA TMRW was good for business, the metrics also helped guide the editorial planning. Page views, average time-on-page, email messaging, and A/B testing across social media and digital advertising provide essential feedback. For example, the team had theorized that clients wanted more regulatory news, but legislative updates received the least engagement.
More proof the future of TIAA TMRW is strong: A trade publication picked up one of its articles. And relationship managers (sales team members) continue receiving positive feedback.
One client even took the time to write, saying, “Thank you for sharing this new publication with the Retiree Roundtable! I’ve subscribed and look forward to reading each of the segments.”
Committing to print
Print (yes, print) is essential to the TMRW strategy. TIAA treats readers to beautifully designed issues that look and feel like a high-end consumer magazine.
Designed by agency partner Transport, TMRW is a literal manifestation of TIAA’s reinvention.
“I don’t think our first edition would’ve achieved that same sit-up-and-pay-attention impact without the physicality of a print edition,” Micky says. “(It’s) quite unexpected for us as a brand and for the [financial services] industry.”
TIAA publishes two issues of TMRW a year — a February/March issue targeted to plan sponsors and an October issue focused on consultants. Though the issues differ slightly in content and tone, Micky says they both build the TMRW franchise and “the perception of who we are as a more forward-leaning organization.”
Print also allows the TIAA team to offer a plethora of content with different insights and points of view — internal and external — into a single package. TIAA reps teams bring copies of the magazine to the events where they host or exhibit and to client and prospect meetings.
Micky says print magazines usually don’t work well in B2C marketing. However, they can work well for B2B brands with finite audiences. And TIAA has that in its institutional plan sponsors and financial consultants.
Print also has the “passable” factor, as Micky calls it. A chief human resource officer will hand it over to the CFO at their institution and say, “You should take a look at this.”
Looking to TMRW’s future
The TIAA team isn’t resting on TMRW’s laurels. Micky says they plan to evolve the digital experience to include more video and other elements. “We’ve been playing with some of that on a smaller scale, and we will continue to work on that through 2025.”
Continuing to prove TMRW’s impact is critical to its sustainability. But the results involve more than numbers.
“What’s been exciting is to see people engaging with us differently because they see us differently,” Micky explains.
Employees, including those who distribute the magazine at events and client meetings, have more positive experiences because they are involved with something new and exciting at the 116-year-old brand.
And now, TMRW’s stories fill Micky’s once-blank slate.
Register to attend Content Marketing World in San Diego. Use the code BLOG100 to save $100. Can’t attend in person this year? Check out the Digital Pass for access to on-demand session recordings from the live event through the end of the year.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
In my opening keynote talk last year, I proclaimed, “Content marketing is marketing.” It felt slightly provocative at the time.
As it turns out, the entire marketing practice has evolved to embrace something familiar to those practicing content marketing: delivering value through trusted content-driven experiences.
Independent of the paid, owned, and earned media approach, most marketing organizations focus more on creating trust than grabbing attention.
To be clear, I don’t mean to suggest that classic direct marketing and advertising techniques are dead. Nothing is dead.
I just mean that modern marketing techniques require teams that have assembled their operations like a media organization rather than as a trading desk, arbitraging attention, clicks, and search results.
The old marketing career ladder doesn’t fit the new model
It’s been a weird year in marketing. I’ve been saying that for 18 months, but it’s still true. There’s the quiet recession in B2B marketing. There are challenges in the job market. And AI continues to suck the oxygen out of every discussion of possible innovations.
But as much as marketing seems to have changed, many things remain the same.
For example, many mistakenly believe that people stay in their jobs for much shorter durations than they used to.
In fact, the average job tenure has remained about five years since the early 1980s. While more tenure differences exist with age and gender, it’s a myth that young people have become drastically less loyal to working for the same company.
But how can young people be called the “job-hopping” generation if their average tenure is similar?
It would be easy to chalk it up to young people’s impatience. Gallup research finds that only half of workers ages 25 to 40 strongly agreed they would be working at their company in a year, while 60% of older workers said the same.
However, those numbers are too similar to be distinctive. After all, if 40% of one part of your workforce and 50% of another aren’t confident they’ll be there in a year, something else is at work.
We found a similar tension in CMI’s 2025 Career Outlook for Content and Marketing Professionals.
Overall, marketers are optimistic about their jobs and careers. More than three-quarters (76%) are somewhat or very satisfied in their marketing role. Even so, more than a third (35%) say they’re actively pursuing or highly interested in finding another job. That’s up 4 points from last year and 7 points from two years ago.
What gives?
The answer stems from the redefinition of “career management” in marketing and the corresponding lack of response from many businesses.
Put simply: Organizations have evolved their marketing operations, but the related career paths are dead-end labyrinths.
How it started …
In the 1990s and into the 2000s (yes, I was around then), businesses would hire bright young people fresh out of college or university and plug them into entry-level marketing positions.
The company laid out a path — a ladder — to climb for more responsibility and higher pay. The person would advance from coordinator to manager to senior manager to director to vice president, senior vice president, and perhaps even the C-suite.
The ladder reflected an employee’s ability to advance from a “skilled player” contributor to a manager of people, teams, divisions, geographies, and companies.
The employee’s marketing specialty dictated how they might move across different ladders. Product marketing, brand, sales, and communications had distinct, functional career paths.
Then, digital entered the picture. Companies started distinguishing between “digital marketing” and “other marketing.” (Some companies still do that today. Yes, it’s weird.)
But worse, companies chopped digital marketing into channel-based silos like web, email, and social. It created confused and siloed versions of career paths.
Is it any wonder content marketing grew to be yet another marketing silo without a clear career path?
Career silos have also arisen because of the flattening of organizational structures. With the rise of tech-driven marketing, many businesses removed middle management in favor of more agile, fast, and multifunctional digital teams. Practitioners focused on channels, and leaders spent time de-siloing (or de-duplicating) the channel teams.
This chaotic organization obfuscates what it means to manage your marketing career in one organization. And it changes the nature of what managing a marketing career even means.
If marketing leaders care about retaining great talent, businesses must redefine, clarify, and communicate the pathways in their organizations.
How it’s going…
In almost every business I’ve consulted with in recent years, content and marketing managers have three choices after they reach a specific level. They can:
Move into a more siloed technology-driven marketing role, leaving integrated marketing and content behind to optimize one aspect of the marketing portfolio. (Senior director of social media, anybody?)
Depart for a lateral position at another company.
Leave to build a solo practice.
Again, the 2025 Career Outlook for Content and Marketing Professionals validates that experience.
We asked marketers why they think it’s more challenging to find a marketing job than it was five years ago. Most (75%) attributed it to financial/economic pressure on companies, but the next four responses were:
More competition for jobs (69%)
Marketers not valued (55%)
Poorly defined career path/ladder (34%)
Poorly defined job responsibilities (34%)
Content and marketing professionals have lost their identity inside companies. Typically, there is no obvious next career move. Therefore, they must prioritize avenues that lead to a better (if still siloed) marketing job.
That’s why most respondents (76%) agreed they need to “master specialized/niche skills to remain relevant.”
This isn’t surprising.
Most businesses are still (almost five years later) trying to evolve in or out of remote work and other digital disruptions of the pandemic. Many, if not most, younger marketers likely have never seen a clear marketing career path.
Why we need new marketing career paths
When I was CMO of a fast-growing startup, a mentor told me hiring someone is the only truly expensive thing a company does. So, he said, “Make sure you do it carefully.”
If hiring is expensive, so is losing a great employee. Some reports place the cost at 21% of the position’s annual pay on average.
The answer to retaining great talent can’t be to tie the content and marketing practitioner to some traditional siloed digital marketing career ladder. That misses the point of modern marketing — and jeopardizes your organization’s ability to retain the talented communicators of tomorrow.
Your HR department almost certainly has an established career ladder for some traditional marketing roles. It has job descriptions for entry-level marketing specialists, marketing managers, senior email managers, social media directors, etc.
But do those roles and descriptions match what’s really going on with marketing teams in 2024?
In my experience, many don’t. I’m often asked to help organizations create new roles.
For now, I’m not suggesting the roles, titles, or even the kind of team you should build. (If you’re interested in my recommendations for content marketing-related career paths, read The 7 Core Roles of a Content Marketing Team.)
I’m working to create new career path resources that reflect the reality of modern marketing organizations, so look for that later this year. In the meantime, consider this column the beginning of the new marketing career path discussion, not the end.
Creating valuable content-driven experiences has become a foundational element of modern marketing. Businesses that differentiate to attract and retain their talent will build the career paths that support it.
I’d love to hear your thoughts about the marketing career ladder. Look for me on LinkedIn to continue the discussion.
If you’re hiring, send the details of your open position to [email protected], and we’ll add it to our Content Marketing Job Listings page.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
An update to terms of service isn’t usually a headline-making event, even at the biggest brands.
Yet, this past year tells a different story.
In June, Adobe got into hot water for scraping content to use for its AI-learning models and then changing its terms of service to allow it. Weeks earlier, Meta went through a similar challenge when it changed the terms of its privacy policy to allow the use of customers’ data in its AI-learning models. In August 2023, Zoom faced criticism for its updated terms of service around AI training and then had to write a blog article to clarify its plans.
Did all those headlines serve as a cautionary tale for other big brands to stay clear of an AI-related terms-of-service controversy? Ask LinkedIn.
The social media darling of the B2B world has come under fire this month for automatically opting users into a program that trains generative AI models with their data. Some LinkedIn users weren’t happy to learn of the change.
So, we asked Robert Rose, CMI’s chief strategy advisor, for his take. What he says is the reason for the outcry may surprise you. Read on or watch the video:
LinkedIn’s terms of service turns heads
Is the fuss warranted? Do you care that LinkedIn is using your content on LinkedIn to make LinkedIn more LinkedIn-y? Or, as my wife says, is it that “It’s not the thing. It’s the principle of the thing?”
404 Media broke the story about AI content-mining and reported that LinkedIn would update its terms of service “shortly.”
Once the company made the change, the terms of service included this passage (as many do today):
“We may use your personal data to improve, develop, and provide products and Services, develop and train artificial intelligence (AI) models, develop, provide, and personalize our Services, and gain insights with the help of AI, automated systems, and inferences, so that our Services can be more relevant and useful to you and others.”
I translate that to: “We use your data to make things better and teach computers to help make our services more useful for you and other people.”
However, the problem doesn’t seem to be the fact that LinkedIn added this section to its terms of service or even that it requires users to opt out rather than opt in to the program.
This is the real reason LinkedIn got in trouble
The criticism comes from LinkedIn seemingly updating the terms of service after it started doing it, as Tech Crunch reported last week.
What’s going on among legal, marketing, and corporate communications teams? I don’t understand why these things aren’t better coordinated, even at a company the size of LinkedIn.
They should have learned from the public fails at Zoom, then Meta, and most recently Adobe.
You see, the problem isn’t that LinkedIn is using customer data. Most people should assume companies are going to do this.
And isn’t the whole point of your LinkedIn content to have everybody see it, learn from it, and value it? Wouldn’t anything that helps you shape the ultimate content to your point of view about the world on LinkedIn be a net positive?
I get not wanting pictures of your kids, family, and home, or your private messages on Facebook to educate Meta’s AI, but LinkedIn is different. Or am I missing something?
OK, back to the real takeaway. The bad optics happened because these brands failed to communicate to their existing audiences. Blundering seems to plague these companies.
You may have missed the terms-of-service news because LinkedIn was quiet about it. But I’m sure you noticed the ham-fisted AI prompts that appeared under LinkedIn posts as “suggested comments.” They’re now gone after LinkedIn heard the clamor from users about the ridiculousness of these prompts. This new AI data update move seems like LinkedIn’s trying to make the platform smarter to either return a newer and better version of suggested comments or offer new AI-generated features.
Expect more of the same, hope for better communication
The lesson is that this is inevitable. Platforms will use your behavior and your content to learn how to engage more deeply and motivate you to use it more heavily.
Today, it’s Netflix, Adobe, Google, Meta, and LinkedIn. Tomorrow, it’s your business software provider, your airline, your favorite hotel chain, your bank, or your health-care provider.
Let’s just hope those companies will have learned the lesson so they coordinate their content, AI learning, and messaging a bit better. As I’ve said for years, 90% of an intelligent content strategy has nothing to do with the content; it’s the coordination and collaboration of how you communicate to the world.
Perhaps, like using daylight saving time as a reminder to change your smoke alarm batteries twice a year, you can use a platform’s change of its terms of service as a reminder to check on your content strategy.
Want more content marketing tips, insights, and examples? Subscribe to workday or weekly emails from CMI.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
In the 20th century, marketers relied on coupons, customers’ anecdotal feedback, and mainstream media subscriber numbers to understand their reach and impact. It was an educated guessing game at best to discover what worked and what didn’t.
But in the digital world, numbers abound for marketers to analyze and interpret their audience and customer behavior. Still, marketing analytics remains a challenging discipline.
To help you realize you’re not alone in the analytics conundrum, we asked the experts presenting at Content Marketing World what they see as the biggest challenge in marketing analytics. Fortunately, they shared their concerns and came through with advice on how to overcome the hurdles.
Seeing all the data as necessary
Holding onto the past belief that capturing every behavior and all the attributes about an individual you can is the road to despair. That level of granularity is going away and — with modern models and methods — is proving to no longer be cost-effective. — Jim Sterne, president, Target Marketing of Santa Barbara
Having too much and not enough
One of the biggest challenges in marketing analytics today is the overwhelming amount of data available and the complexity of integrating data from multiple sources. With the proliferation of digital channels, social media, and various marketing tools, organizations often struggle to consolidate and make sense of the vast amounts of data generated. Organizations need to invest in data analysts, who are part of the marketing organization, to seamlessly integrate data from various sources. — Royna Sharifi, senior marketing campaign manager, Amazon Web Services
Treating it like a scientific walk in the woods
Overkill. Sometimes seeing the forest from the trees is more important than just analyzing the trees. — Michael Bonfils, global managing director, Digital International Group
Failing to integrate analytics
One big challenge in marketing analytics is the “overwhelm” factor. Most of us manage multiple tech platforms. While we can aggregate insights from several platforms into one set of dashboards, it takes skill and effort to configure and maintain it. It’s worth it, but it’s not easy. Get expert help or risk procrastinating to your own detriment. — Bernie Borges, vice president, global content marketing, iQor
Missing dashboards
We see that many companies either don’t measure or don’t measure the right things. For us, as a company, it is essential to set up a report or dashboard for every client. This way, we always focus on the right KPIs (established when setting objectives). We don’t just report at the end of a campaign but also during its execution. This allows us to constantly adjust and optimize. — Pauline Lannoo, head of digital strategy, The Fat Lady
Bungling for business objectives
The biggest problem is the failure to connect the goal to the measurement. Marketers will often rely on vanity metrics or irrelevant metrics as indicators of success when they might not indicate the achievement of a goal.
If you’re just looking to increase traffic or brand awareness, page views might be one good metric to report on. If you’re trying to sell more products or services, page views only matter if they turn into conversions. Match your key performance indicators (KPIs) to your objectives and key results (OKRs). — Brian Piper, director of content strategy and assessment, University of Rochester
Interpreting by many
Lack of consistent reporting language. Organizations are collecting and have access to more data than ever before, yet this data is often siloed in different tools.
Because of this, data can mean different things to different people. What defines a visit in one tool may not be the same as in another. Also, organizations often try to marry together anonymous and known data, which can be nuanced. It is important to define a consistent reporting language to get the most out of your marketing analytics. — Jill Roberson, senior vice president, digital marketing, Velir
Giving ‘fuzzy’ AI assessments
Few tools exist to monitor whether AI presents your content, so marketers have little to no insight. I know of two ways to get an idea of AI’s interaction with your content.
One is in GA4, where you can track AI bots. Create an exploration with “page referrer” as the dimension and “sessions” as the metric. Then apply this filter: ^https://(www.meta.ai|www.perplexity.ai|chat.openai.com|claude.ai|chat.mistral.ai|gemini.google.com|bard.google.com|chatgpt.com|copilot.microsoft.com)(/.*)?$
The other way is in Semrush through its keyword position report for tracked keyphrases or the SERP features section in a domain overview.
All these assessments are fuzzy at best but do offer directional information if your informational content is seeing decreases in clicks. Fortunately, or unfortunately, the need to monetize AI will result in much more straightforward AI insights and tools for brands and partners. — Haley Collins, director of operations, GPO
Going for the quick and easy decision
Marketers often have numerous systems tracking different metrics and no way to integrate and normalize that data. This means we tend to over-rely on whichever tool we think is easiest to get whatever data people ask for most frequently instead of using the data to make better content marketing decisions overall.
For example, although it’s been over a year since GA3 quit collecting data, a lot of marketers still have not defined their goals or optimized their GA4 reporting. I even know of one team that hasn’t turned G4 on yet.
It’s hard for me to imagine having an entire year without any web analytics to learn from. — Erika Heald, founder and chief content officer, Erika Heald Marketing Consulting
Minimizing the power of GA4
Getting what you need out of GA4. There are two approaches here: Have team members dedicate the time and energy to learn it or outsource to an agency or consultant. — Dennis Shiao, founder, Attention Retention
Paying the price
The cost is a big challenge. These tools are inaccessible for many smaller companies and independent content marketers, and that needs to change. — Beth Elderkin, content marketing manager, Informa Connect
Lacking accountability
Definitely attribution. This means taking more ownership of the full cycle from external agencies and building up internal expertise and capabilities over time, particularly around basic tracking. — Tony Byrne, founder, Real Story Group
Believing in unicorns
The biggest challenge by far is holistic attribution, IMO. The unicorn of multi-touch hasn’t really been actualized, and plenty of marketing can drive results that’s never attributed – without that attribution, funding becomes questionable. — Jenn VandeZande, editor-in-chief, SAP CX + Industries
Having only one key to the vault
Many marketing analytics are gatekept by one individual or team. Evangelize this data to everyone so they can monitor how their content is doing and keep eyes on it themselves. This will make organizations more data-focused and proactive with this information. — Zack Kadish, senior SEO strategy director, Conductor
Missing collaboration between marketing and sales
There is a disconnect between the top of the purchase funnel metrics (marketing) and the bottom of the purchase funnel metrics (sales). The crux of the matter lies in transitioning prospects from the top of the funnel seamlessly to the bottom of the funnel, ultimately driving conversions and maximizing sales potential. — Pam Didner, vice president of marketing, Relentless Pursuit LLC
Lagging skills and time
The biggest challenge with analytics is not devoting resources and time to keeping your systems up to date. It’s critical to assign an analyst or expert to handle the ongoing maintenance and updates required to keep your systems in step with your evolving marketing campaigns and strategy.
Keeping that analyst in the loop as things evolve — so they can make appropriate updates to your systems — is the only way you can properly and confidently report on actual results. Without this, you risk getting an inaccurate or incomplete picture of what’s actually happening. — Monica Norton, vice president, communications and content, Nextiva
Ignoring inclusivity
Transitioning from third-party data to first-party data and quantifying data points in a cohesive, equitable way is what many are navigating now and even more so in the coming years ahead. How do we accurately (and equitably) define an ideal customer profile (ICP) without bias, pulled from trusted sources that give us a good holistic picture to speak to? Many brands have not done the leg work with the shift as privacy is changing, and capturing accurate data is even more critical.
Put together a process that embraces DEIBA (diversity, equity, inclusion, belonging, and accountability) best practices or work with trained professionals who can help integrate that into the capture, nurturing, and output process. — Troy Sandidge, founder, Strategy Hackers
Making the most of the analytics that matter
Whew, that’s a lot of challenges with marketing analytics. How many resonate with your situation? Fortunately, awareness is the first step to overcoming them. So, now that you know you’re not in a unique situation, make a plan today to tackle one piece of advice on how to solve it.
Register to attend Content Marketing World in San Diego. Use the code BLOG100 to save $100. Can’t attend in person this year? Check out the Digital Pass for access to on-demand session recordings from the live event through the end of the year.
MORE ADVICE FOR OUR CMWORLD SPEAKERS:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
A small team writes and publishes content for a corporate blog. The company doesn’t know what, if any, impact the content has on visitors. The team just keeps creating and publishing content, and no one knows if, let alone how, it ultimately drives action.
At Ally Financial, that was the beginning of an innovative story that ultimately led to a win for Best Content-Driven Website and Best Use of Interactive Content at the 2024 Content Marketing Awards. It also led to Jim Bentubo being named the 2024 B2B Content Marketer of the Year.
The story got its first new chapter in 2021. Jim, who was the director of social content at Ally, saw that the blog was disconnected from the brand literally (it was on a separate platform from the main website) and figuratively (it published an article on the best bumper stickers).
“I want to take this on. It’s a great challenge,” the former journalist says.
So, he and the team at Ally did. Jim became the senior director of content production, and that “blog” turned into Conversationally, a data-driven content hub.
First-party data reveals opportunities
“We’re in such a unique situation where (our customers are) literally telling us what they’re saving for, what they’re striving for with their life goals,” Jim explains.
That happens through a feature of Ally’s savings and spending accounts. Customers can create buckets such as a vacation, home, higher education, etc., and set a total goal. Then, they can automatically or manually save a portion of their income for that bucket.
Jim wanted to use that and other data to craft a personalized “blog” strategy that connected all the threads under the Ally.com umbrella.
He and another Ally employee dug into the first-party data to understand what people were spending money on, what they saved for, etc. They overlaid search trends, social conversations, and third-party research to create a lens from which to think about content.
“We were given tons of freedom from our leadership who said, ‘We agree with your direction. You guys are the experts, build this,’” he says, noting that the initial planning was done over 18 months.
Audiences think uses, not products
A lot of financial sites explain what a mortgage is, but the Conversationally team sees its role differently. “People don’t go, ‘Oh man, I can’t wait to get a mortgage,’” Jim says. “They’re like, ‘I’m saving for a home.”
So, Ally sees customers’ goals as savings buckets for homes, weddings, travel, etc. They also work as broad themes for Conversationally. “There is a lot of power in personalization and being able to put content closer to our products,” Jim says.
The personalization he refers to isn’t just, for example, content about home ownership targeted to people looking for mortgages. Instead, Ally tailors the content to the journey.
For example, a person who starts a wedding savings bucket will see content based on their progress. So, once they’re close to the goal, Ally knows they’re likely close to the wedding, so it delivers content about tipping vendors.
Someone with a home savings bucket would want to know how to pick the right real estate agent as they begin the journey but won’t care about what goes into closing costs until they are near the end of the journey.
While that progression works well for personalizing wedding and home ownership content, the Ally team learned that audiences with trip-savings buckets operate differently. Most people take a vacation before they save 100% of their goal. Since the journey isn’t linear, Ally delivers a mix of content that might resonate at any point in their trip-savings journey.
Ally calls this the “nurture nature of content” — Conversationally nurtures its readers to become customers. Someone who reads a piece on the data-driven content hub and visits an Ally product page is two times more likely to convert into a customer than someone who just goes to a product page.
In its first year, Conversationally attracted nearly 4 million page views.
Publishing partners help Ally find audiences
But to get there, the team needed to come up with a strategy for reaching audiences. Potential visitors aren’t just eagerly waiting for a corporate blog update, so the Conversationally team needed a strong distribution plan to get in front of people when they might be thinking about money and major life milestones.
Ally went to the places where those audiences were already consuming relevant content by partnering with media brands. The team worked with Condé Nast’s Traveler to reach the travel-savings audience and Architectural Digest for the home-savings audience. It turned to Dotdash Meredith to reach its Brides audience for wedding savers and the Parents property to connect with growing families.
In these co-branded distribution partnerships, Ally relied on the expertise and credibility of the publisher to craft the relevant content, which Ally published on the Conversationally site. The publisher promoted the content on its social media channels and directed the audience to the Conversationally site. After the visitors read that article, Ally could serve up content about how its saving products could help them achieve the relevant goal.
Jim says this co-branding idea isn’t common. Many times, publishers slammed the door on his idea. They wanted their social media followers to land on their sites, not Ally’s.
But Jim knew the best outcome for Ally required the publishers’ social media audiences to visit the Conversationally site and get into the Ally content ecosystem.
Ally grows a Conversationally team across the brand
Conversationally launched as a team of two with an assist from an agency partner who designed the site’s wireframes and conceptual elements. An in-house tech team did the site development work, which ensured that Conversationally was connected to the Ally site.
The content hub had a soft launch in 2022, and the fully integrated website debuted in 2023. The team now totals seven — primarily content strategists and editors who have areas of specialty such as deposits and investments, home and brand, and distribution channels, including Meta, Pinterest, and Reddit. They brief and work with an outside agency that creates the content.
The Conversationally team views the content through the lens of end-to-end consumer journeys. “We’re more thoughtful about how the content is going to show up. Are people going to see it? If they do see it, is it going to lead to something that is mutually beneficial for the consumer and for Ally? The team focuses on every piece having a path logically to a product we have.”
Though an outside agency produces most of the content, an in-house team member is dedicated to brand writing, telling the money stories related to their corporate partnerships such as the Charlotte Major League Soccer team and NASCAR driver Alex Bowman.
While the Conversationally team is small, many people across Ally play a role in the content and promotion.
Every quarter, the Conversationally editorial board gathers. Division presidents, tech executives, and marketing leadership learn about the data-informed editorial plans and chime in with their perspective. That ongoing buy-in for the content means the Conversationally team doesn’t get requests for individual content pieces from the various divisions.
In addition, a content planning meeting is scheduled over two days. The research team presents the trends they’re seeing regarding the consumer’s mindset, spending habits, and other topical buckets. The search team goes over what’s spiking and what people are talking about. Social listening also is brought into the conversation.
With all this data, the team is better informed to plan the content.
For example, they once learned in these planning meetings that one of the top reasons people used their credit card was cruise-related. Though Ally published a lot about travel, it hadn’t delved into the cruise space. The next quarter, it did.
The Conversationally team also analyzes the big picture, looking for the overlaps of what’s happening and where people are today, along with expected events like the U.S. elections, to put together a content plan that will resonate with the audience.
Conversationally chases a better North Star
Conversationally uses a data-informed, executive-backed editorial plan that shows how corporate blogs can evolve into a dynamic and engaging site.
“Too often brands are chasing SEO terms that might not align ultimately to what they want, what is beneficial to a consumer, or what they provide as a service,” Jim says. “Our North Star is always to provide personalization whenever we can so it’s relevant to the audience. But, ultimately, it puts somebody on the path to the right product or solution, so it’s mutually beneficial to us, too.”
Register to attend Content Marketing World in San Diego. Use the code BLOG100 to save $100. Can’t attend in person this year? Check out the Digital Pass for access to on-demand session recordings from the live event through the end of the year.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
For any successful journey, you need to know where you are, where you want to be, and what paths you can take to get there. Much like traveling in a car equipped with a GPS, a content strategy roadmap can help you navigate complex content decision-making and reach your goal.
What is a content strategy roadmap?
A content strategy roadmap is a high-level plan designed to achieve your marketing objectives. It provides an overarching view of content development and distribution across each stage of the marketing funnel (awareness, consideration, and decision). It should include key initiatives, who’s responsible for each of them, and deadlines for their completion.
While similar to a content calendar, a content strategy roadmap is more comprehensive. It focuses on the broad steps for reaching high-level goals rather than the fine, tactical details of producing individual pieces of content. Think of it as a macro view of your content marketing plan that helps keep you on course as you work toward success. (See the sidebar below for details on building a content calendar.)
Essential components of a content roadmap
A content roadmap should provide a clear overview without diving too deeply into specific action steps. When you’re ready to build it, take note of the critical elements that should be included:
Target audience: Who you are trying to reach
Objectives: What you want the audience to do after engaging with your content
Content plan: The types of content you will create and how you plan to distribute them (e.g., blog posts, white papers, social media)
Project milestones: Key moments you’ll track, such as kickoff, first draft, final draft, and publishing dates
Stakeholders: The team members responsible for each initiative and any other departmental partners you’ll involve when necessary.
Building your content roadmap
The first step of developing your roadmap is determining what priority goal(s) you want to achieve. For example, are you aiming to grow your customer base, generate leads, convert prospects into customers, engage your audience to improve retention, or all of the above? The objectives you select will be the destinations your content roadmap leads to.
Next, evaluate your existing content — this represents your current location. Identify evergreen assets that are usable as-is, content that needs updating, and stories that don’t align with your goals and can be discarded. This process will help you set the starting point for your map.
From there, identify gaps along the path that need to be filled and the effort required to fill them. This represents the possible routes you can take toward your destination.
Your efforts may involve keyword research, collaboration with your sales team, and analyzing customer data to understand what content resonates with your audience. By assessing these factors, you’ll identify the milestones you must reach as you progress along your content journey.
Standard features of effective content roadmaps
Although their structure and design can vary depending on your business, effective roadmaps typically share these features:
Visual clarity: Your roadmap should be easily interpreted at a glance, whether it takes the form of a flowchart, timeline, or map.
A well-organized structure: This helps ensure consistency when multiple team members contribute to developing the roadmap.
Accessibility: The full path — and all the steps in between — should be easy for others to understand, including executive stakeholders.
Fluidity: The roadmap should be easy to update or revise when your strategy, goals, or customer insights change.
When you’re ready to create your content roadmap, a robust content management system can help streamline the process, making it easy to update, organize, and optimize your content strategy.
How to Build an Effective Content Calendar
As industries evolve, marketing teams must move quickly while also staying organized. A content calendar enables this by helping you track the content you’re publishing, where, and when.
What is a content calendar?
A content calendar is a tool that outlines your publishing schedule across different channels. It can track content for various purposes, including blog posts, social media updates, and press releases.
The level of detail can vary, but a well-constructed calendar keeps everyone aligned and ensures you provide your audience with a consistent stream of quality content.
Three steps to creating a content calendar
Define outcomes: Ensure all business goals and stakeholder priorities are accounted for and all the assets you plan to produce align with your strategic content roadmap.
Set a schedule: Establish a realistic content creation cadence based on the available team resources. Consider using a content management system to speed up all the steps in your publishing process.
Create and populate: Fill your calendar with key information like topics, channels, due dates, and links to drafts. Don’t forget to note important events or critical themes that will resonate with your audience.
Once created, continually assess your calendar’s performance, making adjustments to optimize your strategy when new insights come to light.
About Brightspot
Brightspot is your CMS solution for delivering brilliant, modern digital experiences with a flexible, fast, and secure platform that you can trust to consistently elevate your content approach. An enterprise-grade powerhouse of tools and templates that can be tailored to your specific business needs for today and beyond. Our robust, ready-to-go library is fully customizable to meet the demands of your business, content contributors, and developers. But we don’t stop there: We offer the flexibility to craft front-end experiences, ensuring content delivery exactly as you need it. For more information on how Brightspot is the right CMS platform for your company, visit our website here. Ready to learn about the ways Brightspot can support your digital strategy? Chat with an expert today!
How many times have you asked this question? How many times have you heard it asked?
In a work setting, this phrase often comes out when you realize some request or suggestion you thought you conveyed wasn’t acted on.
This signal amplification bias (as psychologists call it) explains how some miscommunication happens. People routinely overestimate the quantity (and quality) of the information they communicate.
In other words, people believe they conveyed a lot more than they really did.
Remote work no doubt exacerbates this phenomenon. Email, text messaging, Slack, and Zoom create conditions that increase the potential for miscommunication.
And don’t think you’re safe because your close team shares some kind of mental shorthand. Researchers found that miscommunication happens more frequently among people in close relationships. (My wife just held up her hand to say something.)
As people use AI and other technology to automate even more content — including inter-office communication — I’m seeing more challenges arising from miscommunication (or under-communication) between marketing teams and the rest of the business.
The failure to communicate
For example, a B2B technology client I worked with last month asked me to help streamline its content by aligning its sales and marketing teams.
The sales team didn’t use much of what the marketing team created. Instead, sales reps turned to ChatGPT to create their own content for email and social media.
Worse, they still requested new content from the marketing team, causing a backlog of requests and conflicting priorities. Should the marketing team continue its existing thought leadership plan (and risk sales ignoring it) or accommodate the sales requests for content that didn’t fit into the marketing plan?
This kind of challenge is well documented in sales enablement and B2B content marketing circles. Interestingly, research firm Gartner found that the No. 1 reason for sales and marketing team misalignment is that each group has its own ideas about what moves a customer to action (i.e., they see the funnel differently).
CMI research found that the top three situational challenges marketers mention are related to this misalignment:
A lack of resources (58%)
Aligning content with the buyer’s journey (48%)
Aligning content efforts across sales and marketing (45%)
Wait a minute, you might say. If both teams agree that using the best content is problem No. 1, why not just get everybody together and let the numbers tell the teams which content is the best?
I mean, isn’t it obvious?
Well, it seems obvious. And my client did try it.
The sales team said it needed “better” content. Marketing agreed to produce what sales asked for but delivered this message, “You’d better use the new things we create.”
But the problem didn’t go away. If anything, it got worse.
As it turns out, the teams didn’t suffer from a content quality problem. They didn’t have a usage problem. They had a communication problem.
Two sides of the same problem
Yes, both teams agreed that using the most up-to-date and compelling content is the biggest challenge. But that challenge means different things to each group.
And that insight offers the key to solving the problem.
For sales, the challenge of using the most up-to-date content comes from struggling to find the right pieces and (most importantly) understanding how to use them.
In other words, you might create an excellent technical market guide or complex thought leadership paper. But if the salesperson doesn’t understand it or know how to speak to it, they can’t determine when to put it into a potential customer’s hands.
For the marketing team, the challenge arises from trying to create content that the sales team would use. In other words, when marketing prioritized creating new pieces to attract the sales team’s attention, it shifted its focus away from the audience.
That made the new content less about thought leadership and more similar to what the company’s competitors put out.
When salespeople used the new pieces, they found they didn’t work because they didn’t differentiate the brand. So they’d stop using them and request something new (again).
Neither team got what it wanted.
The answer might seem obvious to you. But it wasn’t to them.
Sales enablement saves the day
You’ve probably heard my bumper-sticker slogan: 90% of a content strategy has nothing to do with content — it has everything to do with communication.
For my client, the way forward turned out to be better communication and sales enablement. In other words, they started creating guidelines and instructions to enable the sales team to use the right content pieces in the ideal way.
Every time the marketing team developed thought leadership content (a white paper, presentation, a bylined article, etc.), it would also develop instructions on how to present the piece, how to sell it, and, ultimately, what it all meant. That way, the sales team would understand when to apply it. Marketing also offered training to help the sales team members act as informed storytellers.
As a result, the teams developed a much closer relationship with the content experiences they created for their prospects. They jointly built a process to identify a prospect’s main pain points, choose the right content to help them, and measure how well the offered content resonated.
This company stopped looking at sales as the final distribution channel of sales materials. Instead, sales became an opportunity for a personalized, intelligent, content-driven experience that delivered value to a potential or existing customer.
Did you make yourself clear?
It’s easy to assume you’ve effectively relayed all the expectations, responsibilities, and processes your content strategy requires. After all, you work in it. Every. Single. Day.
But business moves fast today. And the prevalence of remote teams means asynchronous communication is the norm. Oversights and inefficiencies easily go undiscovered.
Not long ago, I worked with a client at a Fortune 100 insurance company. I discovered that updating one critical part of the company website required a lengthy, manual process with many potential points of failure.
Someone would email the necessary change to a freelancer, who then returned a formatted package of HTML files. Those files were uploaded to a server in the IT department and then moved to the web server to go live.
I asked the person in charge of the process how long he’d been doing it that way. “10 years,” he replied.
“Who knows that you do it this way?” I asked.
He shrugged and said, “I assume everybody knows. I’m not doing this in secret. It goes without saying that this is a critical part of the website.”
Turns out, no one knew.
If you find yourself saying, “Isn’t it obvious?” or “That goes without saying,” pay close attention to the rest of your sentence. Chances are, whatever you think could go without saying needs to be said.
Obviously.
It’s your story. Tell it well.
Subscribe to workday or weekly CMI emails to get Rose-Colored Glasses in your inbox each week.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
“By 2025, data stories will be the most widespread way of consuming analytics.”
That prediction from Gartner a few years ago was geared toward CFOs, but it applies perfectly to another group that traffics in data — marketers.
Gartner even identified the rise of dynamic storytelling as one of four data and analytics trends:
“Leaders across organizations continue to struggle to interpret insights from finance. Despite modern analytics and business intelligence (A&BI) platforms, insights often lack context and aren’t easily understood or acted upon by the majority of users.”
Replace “finance” with “marketing,” and the challenge remains true. While marketers can access vast amounts of data and have numerous tools to analyze and present them, non-marketers in the company struggle to understand what the data means.
David Ciommo, a decision intelligence leader and data storytelling lead at Humana, discusses this conundrum in his presentation at the Marketing Analytics & Data Science (MADS) conference. “I’m surrounded all day long by people who care about data, but yet the audience, the people consuming the data, are the people who are making decisions,” he says.
To help, David explains how to bridge that gap.
How data can make a difference
Working with data, David says, usually follows this six-step process:
Define the objective.
Gather the data.
Clean the data.
Conduct field-level analysis.
Consolidate data.
Analyze data and glean business insights.
However, David says too many marketers don’t spend enough time on Step 6. Data alone doesn’t convince leadership to approve your marketing budget. You must use the data to get insights and action. You must use the data to tell a good story.
Data is cold, factual, and objective. Stories are warm, emotional, and subjective. One study found that after a presentation, only 5% of people could recall a statistic. However, 63% could remember a story from it.
“Storytelling, to some degree, creates and affects our brains in ways that we are completely unaware of, yet we like it. When you walk out of that movie or that play, and you talk about it for days, what’s happening is that the chemistry of your brain, including the dopamine, is being affected,” David says.
The mission for marketers is clear: To drive more impact in your organization, you must use data as the basis for a great story so more people will remember it. In other words, you need to become data storytellers.
What makes good data storytelling
David says, “Data storytelling is the ability to effectively communicate insights from a dataset using narratives and visualizations. It can be used to put data insights into context for and inspire actions from your audience.”
Using a business intelligence tool to create a dashboard with charts doesn’t make you a data storyteller. “All you get is data visualization. You don’t get the story,” David says.
Data stories encompass four elements:
Visual design that incorporates imagery and other design elements and principles
Context that indicates you understand the audience, have a clear purpose and goal, and use feedback loops
Data from quality sources accurately analyzed and represented
Narrative that encompasses the message, has a beginning, middle, and end, and includes calls to action
David shares one of his favorite sayings, “Every single data insight has to be meaningful, valuable, and actionable.”
To achieve that, ask yourself these questions when creating a data story:
Does it engage the target audience?
Will it remove doubt and clarify decisions?
Does it reveal truths and deliver meaningful insights?
Will it provide actionable opportunities?
If the answer is no, go back and rethink your data story idea.
How to put together a good data story
To tell effective data stories, David follows this sequence — story, data, visualization, and tool.
You may think that seems counterintuitive. In a data story, data should be the first step, and the story should be last. Not so, says David.
He explains, “Many departments within a company often depend on data to understand what is happening. Consequently, when teams reach the reporting or dashboarding phase, the final product tends to focus heavily on displaying data rather than telling a compelling story. This approach can diminish the impact of insights that the data can provide.”
The story-first framework prevents the overcomplicated use of data with no actionable insights. You begin by asking a series of questions to understand the business priority and perspective before diving into the data.
“Ask critical questions about intent and key insights you aim to uncover. By outlining the specific answers you’re going after, you can minimize the volume of data presented and avoid overcomplicating the analysis, ultimately saving time and money,” David says. “It allows us to organize our thoughts in advance, ensuring we stay focused and convey our points in the most efficient and clear manner possible.”
Example of data storytelling
David walks through a fictional scenario so you can see the story-first framework in action:
A company’s sales team wants to understand the market for a new product. To help, the marketing team doesn’t just compile all the available data in a dashboard, instead, it works with the sales team to clarify its goals for insights.
They conclude that the goal is to introduce the product into existing and new regions. They know the current products have performed well in neighboring regions and believe the new product will succeed elsewhere. That focus helps identify the core story and allows it to focus on a need not provided elsewhere.
Next, the marketers can identify the data to analyze to support the story and how to present it in a report or dashboard. Then, they can work with the data to extract relevant insights.
After the data processing, the work turns to visualizing it in a way that clearly communicates the message of those insights. Data visualizations are not appropriate for every story — not everything needs a line, bar, or pie chart.
In data storytelling, the goal is to select visuals that simplify the insights. For instance, exploring opportunities in a new market might lend itself to a color-coded geographical map.
The visualization tools depend on your goals and their capabilities. For example, some business intelligence platforms may not be able to show real-time data. If that was the case, the data story wouldn’t incorporate real-time data.
Follow these data visualization tips
Among David’s tips for crafting a quality data story that will provide value and drive action:
Identify the right data for the story.
Simplify the story with fewer, more meaningful visuals.
Use color to help tell the story.
Aggregate less important information.
Calibrate the visual to the message and the needs, not the wants.
Include only insights that will drive viewers to make decisions.
Don’t ignore or play into cognitive bias.
David also shares a couple of things to avoid.
The first is to stop using tables because consuming data in that format requires the viewer to spend too much time to gain insights. “We process visuals faster than text. When you take that exact same data, and you put it in a visual, the story comes across so quickly,” David says.
Look at this example, which includes a table on the left and a visualization on the right about global COVID-19 infection rates. The world map works well for those who want a quick understanding. The table exists for a segment of the audience who may want to do further analysis.
The second tip of what not to do is adding pizzazz for the sake of pizzazz, or as David calls it, “chart junk.”
In this pie chart about Brexit, the data is simple: 47% say yes, 43% say no, and 10% don’t know. However, the presentation gets in the way of the data. The British flag is the image on the pie, which makes it hard to see the data slices, and the graphic uses two shades of blue, red, white, black, and yellow. “The drop shadows, gradient blends, textures, etc. confuse and muddy the water. It makes the story hard to read,” David says.
Are you ready to tell stories with data?
You are awash in numbers: web analytics, social media, video, paid search, lead generation, email marketing, and more. This sea of data leads to oceans of spreadsheets, reports, charts, and dashboards. You allocate precious time to generating and managing these reports each week, but in the end, is it serving the marketing team? Is the broader organization even looking at them?
Instead, build stories from your data. As a refresher, ensure that each story:
Engages the targeted audience
Removes doubt and clarifies decisions
Reveals truths and delivers meaningful insights
Provides actionable opportunities
Maybe you like the story David told. Now, it’s your turn to tell an equally good story with your data and have a bigger impact within your organization.
The world seems chockablock with research and data about how AI is now — and in the future — having an impact on the careers of marketers and creators.
Is that because we’re in the research business and have seen a few recent studies, including CMI’s 2025 Career Outlook for Content and Marketing, that speak to AI’s impact on career opportunities, both current and future, for marketers?
We took the question to Robert Rose, CMI’s chief strategy advisor, who has his human finger on the pulse of the studies and AI. He explains what’s happening and the takeaways all marketers should have. Read on for his take, or watch this video:
Stat’s inverse indicates the real picture
A mentor once told me something that’s top of mind this week, “When our ability to cleanly measure is imprecise, humans will fill the gap for better or worse with narrative.”
In other words, you fit the data into the story in your head rather than fit the story into the data. If you use Google Analytics to tell a marketing story, you know exactly what I’m talking about.
Over the last few weeks, new research studies, including CMI’s, speak to the impact of AI on marketing careers. A lot of amazing stories are out there, but the reality is a bit more boring.
Are industries really changing to meet ideas? What do stats like “72% of industry leaders say they need to reshape talents and skills of their organizations” really mean? Is that really anything new? Disruptive?
I always like to ask, “What’s the story with the inverse?”
What about the 28% of industry leaders who don’t feel like they need to reshape the talents and skills of their organizations? What are they thinking? Do they feel great about things the way they are? Or are they saying, “Meh, we’re pretty happy with the team the way it is.”
When it comes to AI in marketing and your careers as marketers, is the sky falling? Or is it, you know, just another Friday?
The cognitive bias known as the frequency illusion fascinates me. Also known as the Baader-Meinhof phenomenon, it occurs when you notice a word or concept more frequently after you’ve been made aware of or focused on it for some time.
The classic example is after you buy a new car. You’ve explored the options, priced them, chosen one, and now, as you drive around, the world is filled with that car.
Are the multiple recently released studies on AI’s impact on marketing job opportunities creating a frequency illusion? What’s really going to happen? To say it’s a decidedly mixed bag would be an understatement.
If you want to stop reading now, the truth is nobody knows. To paraphrase one of my writing heroes, William Goldman, of The Princess Bride film, talking about movie executives: Nobody knows anything. Not one person in the entire industry knows for sure what’s going to work or how it’s going to all turn out. Every time, it’s a guess and, if you’re lucky, an educated one.
Is generative AI really important in marketing careers?
In CMI’s outlook, demand-gen marketers didn’t even put AI on the list of where they planned to expand spending in the next year. However, 57% of marketers in the research named AI as the No. 1 biggest impact. Additionally, marketers feel pressure to “get good” at generative AI, primarily from the C-suite.
Is it any wonder?
Other research headlines are filled with the changing-so-fast-it’s-making-our-heads-spin theme. A recent study by Deloitte finds that 79% of director and C-suite respondents expect generative AI to drive substantial organizational transformation in less than three years.
The more recent Kantar research (registration required) finds that almost half of respondents say AI already affects their media organization. OK, but remember my inverse preference? That finding means that more than half don’t.
Experience in AI was 10th in Kantar’s list of the top 10 most important skills sought by leaders in the media industry in the next three years. Only 27% say it is a very important skill.
Gartner’s November 2023 analysis of more than 300,000 job postings found that fewer than 1% mentioned generative AI skills or responsibilities for AI-related content creation.
What’s the real story?
After consuming all this research, you would be right to still be confused. All these numbers seem to indicate a lot of FUD — fear, uncertainty, and doubt — about the most appropriate uses of AI, and people, mostly those in senior leadership positions, think they’re a lot farther behind in its integration than they actually are.
Marketing media seem to play a bit in the talk that AI will fundamentally disrupt the marketing organization. They say leaders are deeply convinced their organization will be disrupted, upended, torn apart, made exponentially more efficient, innovate like never before, double in creativity, halve in size, and ultimately evolve marketing to be automated in the next three to 50 years.
It’s as clear as mud.
Ground your AI plans in these ideas
How do you move past the headlines as you round the bend and head toward the fourth quarter of 2024 and the planning season for 2025? Consider these three things:
Businesses are taking a considered approach to this enterprise AI thing. Most don’t really know what to do with it or whether it’s going to work. Many talk a big game, but privately wait to see how it starts to shake out.
Marketing practitioners and content creators are worried but a little less worried than even a year ago. Most businesses integrating AI seem to avoid the bumper sticker advice, “AI won’t replace you, but someone using AI will.” Instead, they treat generative AI as a core technology, not unlike computing. They employ smart strategists, storytellers, and innovative and creative people and teach them AI rather than hiring AI specialists and trying to teach them how to be strategists and storytellers.
AI changes every day. It’s almost changing too fast for its own good. In the early days of the internet, a big challenge was how quickly the technology and skillsets needed for workers to thrive were changing. Many people concluded that becoming a generalist and knowing a little bit about a lot was better than trying to know a lot about a little piece. You never knew when that little bit would be outdated.
Many businesses over-purchased technology and over-indexed on complex technology they didn’t know how to derive value from. One of the biggest reasons for the dot-com bubble and subsequent pop was that fast-expanding technology stars realized they were building nothing other than a lot of hot vaporware that amounted to little value.
Now, whether an AI bubble or crash is coming is uncertain, but the thinking relates to your career, skills, and how marketers use this technology.
My advice? Pump the brakes. Learn as you can and keep your Spidey senses up. Just don’t move so fast you lose your peripheral vision.
As you look at all these AI tools — and all the research — you start to see everywhere, you’ll see opportunities everywhere. But remember the frequency bias. Not everything is a problem to solve and not everything is a problem to solve with the hottest technology in the last few decades.
Take the time to see what’s going on behind the headline stories. When the data shows AI is dead last in the list of the top preferred skills and 80% of organizations appreciate communication skills and storytelling, that tells you something. It’s important to listen, watch, and ask questions to make the story your own.
Want more content marketing tips, insights, and examples? Subscribe to workday or weekly emails from CMI.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
Should you still invest in paid social media promotion and advertising for your brand?
When I posed the question to experts in marketing, the responses were almost unanimous:
“Yes, but …”
Some view it as a necessary evil given the limited organic reach on social today. Others say that although social platforms are crowded with content, they’re still valuable for marketing. Others qualify their replies with “It depends.”
Let’s explore the nuances behind those answers. (If you’re already sold on paid and want advice on how and where, skip to this section for tips on improving your social media planning and budgeting.)
How should you play the paid social game?
First, the experts presenting at Content Marketing World share their thoughts on what you should consider before paying Facebook, Instagram, X, TikTok, LinkedIn, YouTube, or any other social media platform.
Consider it required
Paid social is likely an unspoken requirement now if you want other organic content to surface on networks. Understanding what social channels drive demand for your brand or company is critical so you can strategically prioritize where you’re spending on paid versus blanket paid efforts across all social channels. — Jenn VandeZande, editor-in-chief, SAP CX + Industries
Go for reach
I strongly believe in the collaboration of paid, owned, and earned channels. When you start with content marketing, you need to invest in paid channels to achieve reach. If you do this correctly, your organic and earned reach will grow. Over time, you will need less paid investment. — Pauline Lannoo, head of digital strategy, The Fat Lady
Integrate strategically
Investing in paid social can be effective if it’s part of a multichannel strategy. The spray-and-pray approach to pushing a ton of content to your target audience is a Hail Mary, not a sound strategy. Instead, marketers should create user journeys based on persona, engagement, and cross-channel targeting to deliver value to their target audience. — Royna Sharifi, senior marketing campaign manager, Amazon Web Services
Reach your audience where they are
It’s another channel that people can find you on. It’s important to make sure you are relevant on any channel that users might be searching on. — Zack Kadish, senior SEO strategy director, Conductor
Accommodate social-first audiences
Of course! There is no one-size-fits-all when it comes to your marketing strategy. The way people see and absorb content varies by demographic and geographics. For example, someone at one age may only purchase products or services via paid ads on social. Someone in Japan may only be interested in validating their purchase journey on a social ad. Not only that, with AI built into most ad platforms these days, you stand to win more than lose. — Michael Bonfils, global managing director, Digital International Group
See if social is a habit
It depends on your audiences. If your audience is predominantly found on social media, then indeed, it becomes an indispensable channel for connecting with them effectively.
Ultimately, the key factor in determining the relevance of social media marketing is your target audience and their online habits. It’s all about your audience. — Pam Didner, vice president of marketing, Relentless Pursuit LLC
Start small and test
Paid social is still a good channel for brand building and getting your brand in front of new audiences. To see success with paid social in driving a more specific action or conversion, try it on a small scale and see what works.
For example, at my last company, we saw a return on investment using paid social to increase visibility and registration for marquee digital events. It was one of our strongest paid methods for driving traffic to our event web page. — Monica Norton, vice president of communications and content, Nextiva
Make quality choices
It still makes sense to invest in paid social media. The question is where, to whom, and when. Understanding the days of cheap paid campaigns driving high-yield results in the form of clicks, impressions, views, etc., which are quantitative, has changed significantly. — Troy Sandidge, founder, Strategy Hackers
Let return on ad spend guide you
If it did before, then it probably still does now. It’s just another paid channel. All paid channels should be evaluated by return on ad spend (ROAS) and other impact measures and not on a priori channel bias. — Tony Byrne, founder, Real Story Group
Do an audit first
Whether content-rich advertising or boosting posts, paid social is still one of the best ways to increase your social reach. Channels like Facebook have limited organic reach, so paid posts are often necessary if you hope to reach any audiences — even those who follow your page. Luckily, that can be done cost-effectively on that channel. LinkedIn, on the other hand, can require a significant investment to acquire individual leads.
The best way to understand your opportunities on social media is to perform a social media audit. Review your recent performance on every channel where your brand has a presence, and research your competitor channels to understand the size of the audience for your content, what opportunities you may be missing, and where you’re already standing out. — Erika Heald, founder and chief content officer, Erika Heald Marketing Consulting
Proceed with caution (and creativity)
The part of me that loves social media wants to say, “Yes, it’s still a powerful tool when wielded correctly.” But I also recognize how many caveats come with that statement. Paid social offers precise targeting options and can significantly amplify your reach, leading to higher engagement rates and a better return on investment compared to traditional advertising methods.
However, the costs can be high, especially in competitive industries, and users experience ad fatigue, so your content must be exceptionally creative to stand out. But if your budget and audience are there, then yes, paid ads can still be impactful. — Ashley Baker, founder and chief marketing officer, Coastline Marketing LLC
Pay for influencers, not advertisements
It depends on what type of paid social you’re talking about. Do I believe companies should pay for ads to appear on sites like Facebook, Instagram, and Twitter? Not really. They don’t deliver enough for what’s put into them. However, I would consider working with influencers as a form of paid social (when goods or money is exchanged), and that form of promotion has only continued to grow. — Beth Elderkin, content marketing manager, Informa Connect
Lower the friction for higher conversion
LinkedIn Ads work well for B2B businesses looking to generate qualified leads. The targeting abilities are good, and LinkedIn Lead Gen Forms allow you to capture conversions native to the LinkedIn platform. Lower friction results in higher conversion rates. — Dennis Shiao, founder, Attention Retention
Return to branding
With search engines using generative AI to summarize results, branding is coming back, and paying to remain visible is becoming more important every day. — Jim Sterne, president, Target Marketing of Santa Barbara
How much should you invest in paid social media?
If you buy into the premise that brands should make social media buys, you likely want to know the how and how much. Marketers who responded to my query through the Qwoted platform have some thoughts. (Spoiler alert: They don’t all agree.)
Get your platform mix right
One of the keys to a successful paid social strategy is finding the right platform mix. It’s crucial to not only be presentwhere your personas spend the most time but also where they’re most likely to engage with your brand.
Interestingly, some of the most successful B2B lead-generation campaigns I’ve managed have seen platforms like Facebook and Instagram significantly outperform traditional choices like LinkedIn and even Google paid.
Selecting the right ad unit formats is key to driving the success of your paid social campaign. It’s important to explore all available ad units and understand how users engage with them. While video often outperforms static images, including a mix allows platforms to optimize content delivery based on their algorithms. Continuously monitor performance, pause inefficient ad units, test new formats, and iterate to achieve the best results. Ultimately, the chosen ad formats should align closely with your campaign’s objectives to ensure maximum impact. — Justin Eveloff, vice president of performance marketing, OBI Creative
Take advantage of retargeting
While consumers have become more ad savvy, well-crafted paid social campaigns can still yield significant results. Successful strategies often involve targeted remarketing or leveraging influential voices within specific niches.
In B2B, a more targeted strategy is often beneficial. Utilizing LinkedIn to reach specific job titles within target companies can be highly effective. Retargeting these professionals on Meta platforms can further reinforce brand messaging, as business decision-makers are also active consumers on these networks.
While still valuable, B2C paid social on platforms like Meta requires a more nuanced approach. Unsolicited ads may be less effective, necessitating strategic planning and execution. — Kim Bode, owner, 8thirtyfour
Combine video and text
LinkedIn’s thought leader ads are a powerful tool. When combined with retargeting site visitors (and coordinated with YouTube videos diving deeper into the same content), they can amplify credibility and trust on a fast timetable.
Tactically, the best success comes from creating long-form content on YouTube with a link to download resources from your website. Now, write an article (no links) on LinkedIn with a short native video introducing the topic. Have a teammate comment a link to the YouTube video on the article and a link to the website to download the resources. Use a small ad budget to amplify the article on LinkedIn and the video on YouTube. Retarget site visitors who haven’t downloaded the resources on both LinkedIn and YouTube. Follow up with downloaders to offer a conversation on putting the recommended strategy into use. —Mark Osborne, founder, Modern Revenue Strategies
Budget for competition
For small businesses, starting at $5,000 per month is enough to get started. This has been my starting budget for most brands for a few years. Of course, that depends on what you sell. I’ve had an e-bike company that had an average order value of $5,000, and $4,000 per month was not enough to run ads as it’s highly competitive, and it takes a long time for a new customer to purchase a new e-bike. But let’s say you’re selling a T-shirt for $25 per unit. Then, $4,000 is enough since it takes less than seven days to make a purchase decision. — Erika Castro, co-founder, CMO, Croia
Ramp up the budget and retain the data
Compared to organic marketing, which demands substantial time and resources in AI, systems, automation, and team development, paid marketing requires a significant upfront financial commitment but less time, making it particularly attractive for established businesses. For brands generating over $50,000 to $100,000 monthly, paid strategies offer more predictability and scalability.
For starting out, a modest daily budget of $20 to $50 allows you to test and refine your approach using the feedback and profits to gradually increase your investment. It’s crucial to choose a platform that resonates most with your target demographic to maximize engagement and conversion rates. Consider an increase if your initial results are promising and aligned with your scaling strategy.
Lastly, when engaging professionals to manage your paid campaigns, opt for experts who collaborate under your ad accounts. This ensures you retain your data and insights, which are crucial for ongoing strategy adjustments. Avoid agencies that retain control over your analytics and data. — Sophie Musumeci, CEO and founder, Real Entrepreneur Women
Exercise spending flex
Budget levels may change throughout the year depending on the client for a few reasons. Factors such as seasonality, competition, and fatigue can cause CPMs (cost per thousand) to increase, meaning you have to spend more to reach your audience. Clients selling a product may want to increase budgets around key periods such as Black Friday and Christmas or to drive sales and ensure you are visible more than your competition. Making sure you plan for those more expensive periods will allow you to be more efficient with the budget and remain competitive. — Helena Taylor, paid social team lead, Space & Time Media
Spend more with more competition
At Kimberfire, which bridges the gap between online and offline diamond jewelry retail, we’ve consistently leveraged paid social media to reach our target audience. We’ve seen the need to slightly increase our spend to maintain visibility as competition grows. However, the key is to continually test and optimize — focusing on what delivers the best ROI rather than just increasing spend blindly. — Jonathan Goldberg, founder, president and CEO, Kimberfire
Budget based on goals
I recommend brands allocate 10% to 30% of their expected annual revenue toward marketing, depending on how aggressively they want to drive results. Of that, 60% to 70% should go toward lead generation in a B2B context, and the remaining 30% to 40% toward branding and awareness. It’s important to note that LinkedIn is not cheap, so serious results require serious investment.
After about three months of A/B testing different content types and ensuring other marketing touchpoints are aligned, most marketers should have a clear understanding of whether paid social is a channel worth continuing, stopping, or increasing investment in. — Belinda Conde, head of marketing, Datos
Say yes and figure out the specifics
The resounding answer is that paid social media can work for your brand. “While there is a myriad of options for organically growing your audience and reach, the brass tacks are that paid plays a major role in converting that audience growth into actual customers. Fun in organic, to the point in paid,” saysTed Harrison, founder and CEO of neuemotion and former head of production at Twitter (X).
But how (and how well) it works depends on your brand’s goals and audiences. As always, pick the most relevant advice for your scenario, see if it delivers what you want, and adjust accordingly.
Bring your team to Content Marketing World this October for inspiration, ideas, and actionable advice on developing and executing a strategy that drives profit for your business. Group rates are available. Register today.
MORE ADVICE FOR OUR CMWORLD SPEAKERS:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
What’s the outlook (and current reality) for marketing jobs involving content these days?
Our 2025 Career Outlook for Content and Marketing research found a mix of good and less-than-great signals. On one hand, most marketers are more or less satisfied with their jobs. And the generative AI boogeyman? Not stealing jobs yet.
On the other hand, marketers report feeling somewhat down about their job prospects and the difficulty of job searches. And return-to-office mandates? They’re a no-go for most.
The 700 marketers who participated in the study shared all kinds of interesting information about career goals, hiring trends, and reskilling plans. (Did you know that 22% of full-time marketers freelance on the side?)
They also shared details about their salaries and what factors may influence compensation.
I’m sharing six key findings here to help you advance your career (and not get too bogged down with AI anxiety).
Download the 2025 report (registration required) to review the figures, nuanced salary details (years of experience, position, gender, location, etc.), and other findings.
1. Outlook for marketing jobs
One in three marketers tells us their company laid off marketing employees in the last 12 months — a higher figure than we expected.
And many feel somewhat pessimistic about the job market: 68% believe finding a job in marketing today is more challenging than five years ago. A quarter say it’s about the same, and only 7% say job hunting is less difficult.
Most (75%) believe the challenges are related to macroeconomic factors like financial pressures. And 69% cite heightened competition for marketing jobs as a challenge. Far fewer (33%) believe AI is a factor.
Meanwhile, an undercurrent of frustration exists among marketers about “phantom job” postings. More than a few shared suspicions and anecdotes:
“Many job listings are not actually real or open. Many I encounter are scams.”
“Some companies are not really hiring. They’re posting jobs to see what’s out there and then ghosting people.”
“I wonder whether some job listings I see are just a way to grab followers on social media, or even worse, collect data about job seekers.”
On the brighter side, marketers who were laid off in the last two years report it took just three months on average to find a new role. That’s undoubtedly slower than during the hot talent market a few years ago but not as discouraging as informal chatter might lead you to believe.
2. AI isn’t taking marketing jobs … yet
Here’s more good news. The claim that AI can replace marketing departments? Yeah, that’s not happening yet. Only 3% of marketers report that their teams have replaced employees with AI tools.
But that’s only part of the story.
In open-ended responses about how AI impacts marketing careers, many tell us their employers won’t hire to backfill positions anytime soon. That may mean the promise of AI-driven efficiencies is quietly shrinking teams after all.
Even so, many marketers (51%) view generative AI tools as a net positive for their marketing careers — that’s four times more than those who call them a net negative. This bodes well for the innovative AI-based marketing tools hitting the market.
3. Most marketers do use generative AI (if somewhat unenthusiastically)
Don’t be fooled by that “net positive” number. Many who responded seem conflicted about generative AI’s abilities.
The study shows that marketers tend to use generative AI primarily as a “co-pilot” — a tool to make them more efficient and creative. And 68% say these tools save them time.
The majority say they use generative AI to brainstorm topics (62%) and summarize content (53%). Fewer are using generative AI to create content: Less than half (44%) say they use AI to “write drafts.”
That’s likely because most (69%) believe that the writing output from AI tools is mediocre — “soulless,” as one marketer tells us. Another says, “My direct report uses AI for outlining and brainstorming at times, but I usually find AI-generated content to be unsophisticated.”
But when we looked at which AI uses marketers consider “high value,” the list turned out a little different. The top 10 uses marketers rated “high value” are:
Proofread (50%)
Summarize content (48%)
Outline assignments (42%)
Brainstorm new topics (40%)
Write article drafts (38%)
Analyze data performance (38%)
Write email copy (34%)
Repurpose content (32%)
Create buyer personas (31%)
Optimize content (31%)
4. Most marketers report job satisfaction — but still might move on
Satisfaction levels for marketers are remarkably high. Most marketers (76%) report being somewhat or very satisfied in their roles.
That percentage varies slightly by position (percentages do not total 100 due to rounding):
At the director and above level, 79% say they’re somewhat or very satisfied, 10% are neutral, and 12% are somewhat or very dissatisfied.
Among managers, 79% are somewhat or very satisfied, only 7% feel neutral, and 15% are somewhat or very dissatisfied.
Among individual contributors, 73% are somewhat or very satisfied, 11% are neutral, and 16% are somewhat or very dissatisfied.
But don’t mistake satisfaction for complacency. Even satisfied marketing professionals eye how to grow and advance in their careers. More than one-third of marketers (35%) tell us they’re pursuing or highly interested in finding another job. That’s up 4 points from last year and 7 points from two years ago.
5. Remote work is not negotiable
Marketers as a group appreciate remote work. And most tell us they don’t want to go back to the office full time.
A sizeable chunk (84%) of marketers say they work remotely or in a hybrid setup (a mix of remote and in-office). Of that group, 68% say they would leave their job if their employer required them to work in the office full time.
Employers may be getting the message. Less than a quarter (24%) of marketers say their employers are less willing to allow remote work than they were a year ago. More than half (58%) say their willingness remained the same, and 18% report their employers are more willing to allow it.
6. When it comes to salary, location matters
So many factors go into how much marketers earn that a single average amount obscures more than it reveals.
For example, marketers who work in large urban centers (e.g., New York City, Boston, and San Francisco) make quite a bit more money than their peers in smaller markets.
People who work in major metro areas earn about 30% more than those who don’t. And that bump is even higher for director-level-or-above employees in major markets: They make 43% more than their peers in smaller locations.
The report goes into so much more information about:
It’s been a challenging year for most groups within the marketing realm.
But marketers who spend their efforts at the earliest parts of the customer journey have arguably had it the worst.
With an economy that looks good on paper but doesn’t seem to lead to more marketing budget, the continuing “short-termism” espoused by leaders, and AI sucking all the proverbial oxygen out of innovation, brand and demand-gen marketers feel out of sorts.
This is just one of the conclusions from CMI’s Content Marketing for Demand Generation research conducted between March and April 2024.
Here are some highlights and insights based on the answers of 117 respondents responsible for brand awareness or demand generation in their organizations.
The knights who say “meh”
We asked these marketers if they feel pressure to achieve results despite limited budgets and resources. And guess what?
More than half (56%) said, “Yes, to a great extent.” Another 39% said, “Yes, to some extent.” Only 5% answered “No.”
Perhaps unsurprisingly, only 24% of these same marketers report that their organization’s demand-generation strategies are extremely or very successful. Another 63% of marketers rated their programs as just moderately successful. Ten percent said their strategies are not very successful, and 3% said not at all successful.
That same “meh” feeling applies to demand-gen marketers’ feelings about their ability to create targeted content. More than half (53%) rated their organization’s targeted content as average, fair, or poor. This percentage decreased slightly compared with last year’s 58%, but that’s hardly comforting.
Only 47% rated their targeted content abilities as very good or excellent this year.
The demand-generation round table holds
Here’s some better news: Collaboration and integration into the broader business seem to be working better than in years past.
More than three-quarters of marketers (77%) somewhat or strongly agreed that their company’s demand-generation efforts are integrated with other internal marketing initiatives or departments. Only 10% said they neither agree nor disagree, and 13% said they somewhat or strongly disagree.
Furthermore, demand-gen marketers said they’re extremely involved in content. Most respondents (90%) said they were very or extremely involved in their organization’s content strategy, marketing, or creation. Ten percent said they were moderately involved, and none said they were not involved.
Events, email, and SEO are the sharpest tactics
We asked these marketers which channels they use and which provide the greatest impact on their results.
SEO, organic social media, email, and in-person events are the top channels used, with more than 90% reporting they use each of these four. But when it comes to effectiveness, in-person events, email, and SEO remain in the top three, while organic social media drops to the sixth most effective channel.
While partnerships and collaborations tied with video as the third most effective channel, they’re only the seventh most used channel. That’s an opportunity for demand-gen marketers to pursue in the quest for better marketing results.
Pleasing the exchequer
As usual, revenue is at the heart of what demand-gen marketers found most challenging in the last year: 62% of respondents mentioned budget constraints as a challenge, and 58% cited a lack of resources.
Half of the respondents mentioned content (as in having the right or enough content) as a top challenge. Audience segmentation (44%), personalization (35%), understanding audiences (31%), identifying audiences (24%), creating buyer personas (20%), competition (18%), and lack of executive support (17%) round out the challenge list.
Yet demand generation takes up a fair amount of the budget: 20% reported spending more than half of their marketing budget on demand generation, and another 21% said it takes up more than a third of their budget.
When asked about future budget allocation, these respondents seem to have gotten the memo about what works. Email, in-person events, and video topped the areas where demand-gen marketers plan to increase spending in the coming year.
AI isn’t saving the day
While we didn’t ask marketers about their spending plans for AI this year, we did find that 57% think AI is the development that will have the biggest impact on their demand-gen strategy.
The pressure to “get good” at generative AI is primarily driven from the C-suite down to the marketing practitioner base, based on the assumption that the technology will lead to more marketing efficiency.
For example, a recent Deloitte study found that 79% of C-suite respondents expect gen AI to drive substantial organizational transformation in less than three years.
So, demand-gen marketers get pressured to use AI to do more with less.
But while I can see the correlation between those objectives, the causation isn’t there.
Today, when I see generative AI taking root in a marketing organization, it’s a cross-collaborative way to drive a more effective content strategy. It doesn’t take fewer people, and it doesn’t take any less effort, creativity, or content.
The simple truth is that gen AI amplifies people’s efforts — end of sentence. If you have bad ideas, too few ideas, or an inefficient measurement process, AI can only amplify those things.
If you have diverse ideas; a solid, collaborative content strategy; and a good measurement process, gen AI amplifies those things.
AI is not the hero coming to save the day. It’s simply the potion that enhances what you’re already doing.
As this year’s research proves, great demand gen is still a very human-driven, challenging process. Efficiency won’t elevate the Knights of “Meh” to Prime Ministers of Prosperity or Kings of Kudos.
Only creativity, differentiation, and the application of ideas will lead to the happily ever after.
It’s your story. Tell it well.
Looking for new ways to spark your lead generation? Join us for a FREE Masterclass on Sept. 18-19, 2024. We’ve invited experts to share their insights on maximizing ROI and attracting higher-quality leads, leveraging AI for more efficient outreach, future-proofing your demand strategies, and much more. Register now to watch live or on demand.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
Some marketers are uncertain how to feel about this new technology. Some see the opportunities for next-generation marketing.
It’s a lot to think about, so we asked CMI’s chief strategy advisor, Robert Rose, for his thoughts. Fortunately, he was already speaking at this week’s epicenter of the conversation — the Marketing AI Institute Conference (MAICON) in Cleveland, Ohio. Watch or read on for his take:
Gathering to talk marketing AI
This week was the fifth annual MAICON, an event that cultivates a community of forward-thinking, smart, and bold marketers that grows year after year.
It was great to see talks from familiar thought leaders such as Chris Penn, Andy Crestodina, Andrew Davis, Katie Roberts, Jim Sterne, and Amanda Todorovich.
It was also great to meet leaders in the field with whom I was less familiar. Mike Walsh, CEO of Tomorrow, discussed how AI is part of a bigger transformation of the system of work. He challenged marketers to think bigger.
Adam Brotman and Andy Sack started Day 2 by sharing what they’ve learned interviewing some of the biggest players in AI, including Sam Altman, Bill Gates, and Reid Hoffman, for their 2025 book, AI First: The Playbook for a Future-Proof Business and Brand.
I was a minority voice in the speaker crowd. I didn’t dissent per se. I agreed with many, in fact most, of the speakers who talked of the fundamental transformations that AI will bring.
But I remain convinced that what everybody calls generative AI — which is really the focus of the conference and how most marketers think about AI — is an assistive innovation to human creation, not the other way around.
After spending time with the bigger thinkers in this space, I still don’t see how generative AI is like getting bitten by a radioactive spider or finding a secret formula in a lab for superpowers.
What generative AI really is (for now)
Generative AI — in the current moment — can amplify, magnify, and scale the expression of your ideas. If the human ideas are small, generative AI will just amplify flawed ideas. If the ideas are mistaken, generative AI will make mistakes faster. If your goal is to decrease your use of diverse and expensive human creativity, generative AI will absolutely meet that goal.
What I shared with MAICON attendees revolved around the opportunity to harness generative AI tools for different aspects of marketing’s very human, creative, and collaborative workflow. How can you apply these tools without losing the benefit gained through a considered approach to creativity?
Creativity is not a problem that needs to be solved. That’s why I spoke about the concept of getting ready to be ready for AI. Adopting generative AI requires you to first identify the real question or problem to solve with it rather than trying to be worthy of the questions raised by generative AI.
Now, recommending that approach doesn’t necessarily mean I disagree with anything (well, maybe a couple of things) said by thought leaders this week. I learned more in two days than I have all year on a quickly moving topic.
Kudos to the Marketing AI Institute team, and a big thank you to all those new and old people I got to hang out with. And I’ll note with no irony at all that this was all made possible by humans doing human things in a physical event. The chemistry, the vibe, and the space added just as much as the “data” or “content” being given.
Want more content marketing tips, insights, and examples? Subscribe to workday or weekly emails from CMI.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
No marketer has ever said their content distribution budget is too big.
That’s why brands of all sizes eagerly consider free and low-cost ideas.
So, what are the best no- or small-budget tips that will work in 2024 and beyond?
We asked the experts presenting at Content Marketing World, and their responses offer a plethora of opportunities to grow your content’s reach and engagement without depleting your budget.
Turn to social influencers
Pushing something valuable via social. For example, you sell dog toys. You can put together a downloadable white paper titled Social Influencer’s Top 20 Products Needed for Your New Puppy. Interview five dog influencers and have them provide their top 20 favorite products. Make sure they have credit in the document and have them mention the product sheet to their followers. — Michael Bonfils, global managing director, Digital International Group
Ask the rank and file
When employees share your brand’s content, that is as close to free as it gets. Unfortunately, many brands don’t understand the value of employee content sharing, and the same is true of many employees. Equipping employees with training and tools to enable content sharing is a worthwhile investment. This has been true for many years, especially on LinkedIn for B2B brands. — Bernie Borges, vice president, global content marketing, iQor
Welcome upper management
One of the most overlooked free channels is your executive leadership team. Publishing a post on your organic social channel will generate some traction, but having your executives publish personalized versions of the said post will generate a conversation. It will give credibility and provide customers and prospects with a feedback loop. — Royna Sharifi, senior marketing campaign manager, Amazon Web Services
Create custom shares
Social employee advocacy for the win. Your employees’ network is a powerful distribution channel that many marketers forget about. Sure, there are tools you can use to help do company-wide social advocacy programs. But I found a simple share link in Slack when you do a launch post can help a ton.
Wanna get a great impact? Think about who at your company has the largest social influence with your audience. Then, create custom shares for them that include images and trackable codes (hello UTMs!). I did this once for our large state-of report, where we created custom shares for our executives to promote the report. In the first week alone, their shares produced 20% of overall views, both paid and organic, for the report. Talk about a great free distribution plan. — Amy Higgins, director, content strategy, Cloudflare
Wear a public relations hat
Using a PR approach to get more out of your content is a cost-effective way to wring more value from it.
Look at the content you’re creating. Are there pieces that would make a great fit for a trade publication, for example? Maybe a customer success story or case study or a piece of original research?
Trade publications help you get in front of your ideal target audience, and often, the editors are looking for content to help fulfill their needs. If you can package up the written piece with some visuals (high-resolution photos and video, if you have it) and send it to the editor, chances are they might publish it. This helps you get more visibility for content that otherwise might have just been collecting dust on your blog. Then, you can share that earned media coverage on social media, too.
If you don’t have an in-house PR resource to help with this, consider hiring a consultant on a project basis to give it a try . — Michelle Garrett, consultant and writer, Garrett Public Relations
Help an audience discover your brand
Content syndication is one of the most effective channels for expanding reach and reducing the strain on your email database.
If you don’t have someone in your CRM, marketing automation platform, or on your website, it’s impossible to reach them until they find you. Content syndication puts you in control, allowing you to proactively meet buyers where they are already engaging.
Buyers engaging through content syndication may not be immediately ready to purchase, but they are ready to learn and understand more about the topics you cover. They have questions and needs, and you can provide them.
Then, after capturing these leads, you can nurture them like any other and guide them through your funnel. — Josh Baez, senior manager, demand generation, NetLine
Go to where your audience lives
User-generated content and platforms! Look through forums related to your industry and share your articles there because the users clearly care about this topic already, and it can be an easy way to get more people to learn about how knowledgeable your company is about this topic. — Zack Kadish, senior SEO strategy director, Conductor
Start from the beginning of creation
Create for humans, not for algorithms. Search intent-driven efforts have been and will continue to be the most effective communication approach for content marketers. — Mariah Obiedzinski Tang, assistant vice president of content marketing, Stamats
Show up in inboxes
Channeling my inner Joe Pulizzi here: Create the No. 1 email newsletter in your industry. You’ll be able to use that for content distribution at some point, but focus first on insight distribution. — Dennis Shiao, founder, Attention Retention
Look into the camera
Learn how to make and edit videos. Video content is where you’ll get the most attention and the biggest ROI, especially on platforms like TikTok and YouTube Shorts. You don’t need expensive programs like Adobe Premiere to make effective video content (although they do help!), but you do need to make sure your videos look good, sound good, and represent your company in a way that makes you proud to share them with the world. But don’t make them flawless: Today’s audience loves a shaky cam or jump-cut moment. — Beth Elderkin, content marketing manager, Informa Connect
Make more from one asset
Consider repurposing long-form content into bite-sized YouTube Shorts using Opus Clip. Additionally, use Vocal Videos to create concise, engaging testimonials or share valuable and relevant tips, further increasing your content’s accessibility and reach across multiple platforms. — Pam Didner, vice president of marketing, Relentless Pursuit LLC
Get an AI assist
Start with an authentic and valuable piece of content focused on a specific audience. Then, use generative AI (the free version of ChatGPT 4o works great) to help you repurpose that content for other channels. Have it help craft social posts, newsletters, video scripts, and podcast ideas and then come up with a workflow to easily post those or leverage those on the other channels. — Brian Piper, director of content strategy and assessment, University of Rochester
Think about offline opportunities
It may not be free, but print can be a very effective and cost-effective way to break through the digital noise, especially for an audience that is highly targeted and hard to reach. With print-on-demand, you can create and distribute premium, personalized content for a relatively low cost.
A handwritten (or at least hand-signed) note to a valued customer or influencer is much more likely to be opened and remembered than an email or ad. And it costs only your time and creativity (plus the price of a first-class stamp). — Carmen Hill, principal strategist and writer, Chill Content LLC
Contemplate these many options
Encourage your audience to share your content or create user-generated content. Experiment with new channels on a small budget: TikTok and YouTube Shorts. Invest in social SEO, especially for the younger generation. Combine different channels that can reinforce each other, such as online and offline communication. — Pauline Lannoo, head of digital strategy, The Fat Lady
Promote inside your content
1. Distribute your email newsletter (or a version of it) on LinkedIn. [Check out mine, The Content Chat Bulletin.] This gets your content in front of people who don’t want something else cluttering up their email inboxes.
2. Don’t be one-and-done with your content promotion. Always share content more than once on all relevant social channels, and be sure to cross-link between your new and existing web content. To ensure this always happens, when we create content briefs for clients, we always ask, “What content will you update and link to this post?” and “What internal content will you link to from this post?” — Erika Heald, founder and chief content officer, Erika Heald Marketing Consulting
Stack up the outreach
1. Do double down on email marketing. This tried-and-true method is basically free or very inexpensive and is yet the most powerful, owned distribution you have.
When building out your campaign tree, incorporate it more throughout and in balance with organic social and other methods. Using it as a checkpoint helps reassess audiences.
2. Embrace content distribution stacking (CDS). A short video serves as the trailer that drives interest to the full experience video on another platform that has a deeper dive behind a downloadable or email sequence. CDS is still the best way to drive interest from all distribution channels to the same place, quantifying each step and learning what best connects with these subgroups. — Troy Sandidge, founder, Strategy Hackers
Try many options
Encouraging social sharing via employees, networking consistently to grow and retain an engaged audience, cross-publishing on other networks or platforms with a clear link back to your original content, and experimenting with paid social campaigns with small budgets to see what yields the best results so that you know where to allocate funds in the future. (RIP Google Search). — Jenn VandeZande, editor-in-chief, SAP CX + Industries
Act on free for positive returns
You won’t max out the budget with all those great content distribution ideas, but you likely will max out your team’s energy if you try to do them all now. Instead, pick one or two of the tips that could work best for your organization. Try them first and see what works before you move onto the next idea.
All tools mentioned in the article were selected by the source. If you have a tool to suggest, tag us on social media using #CMWorld.
Register to attend Content Marketing World in San Diego. Use the code BLOG100 to save $100. Can’t attend in person this year? Check out the Digital Pass for access to on-demand session recordings from the live event through the end of the year.
MORE ADVICE FOR OUR CMWORLD SPEAKERS:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
Listener-friendly content formats like podcasts, audiobooks, and sound snippets enhance the emotional appeal of your stories and strengthen marketing performance.
Think about it. How often do you get your audience’s full attention?
“During your workday, you’re getting pitched and pinged on your devices while you’re in ‘deflect and move on mode,’” says Jeanniey Walden, CMO of Rite Aid and host of the popular Liftoff Journeys podcast.
“But when listening to audio, whether a podcast or an audiobook, you are most likely in a transitionary or relaxed state. At that point, it’s just you and the content.”
You’ll need to develop a strategy to rise above the noise of a crowded content marketplace and set realistic expectations of the value audio can contribute.
Here are some expert perspectives and advice for building content and marketing strategies that include podcasting, sonic branding, and sound snippets.
How to decide whether to launch a brand podcast
According to EMARKETER’s June 2024 industry forecast, U.S. podcast listeners will tune in for an average of 50 minutes daily.
“Humans tend to love to multitask, and audio is the most passive way to learn and consume content,” says A. Lee Judge, co-founder and CMO of audio and video production agency Content Monsta. “You can listen to the podcast while walking or doing daily chores.”
And you can repurpose podcast assets, which extends your production investment’s value. For example, you can edit a lengthy conversation into short snippets for use on social media. Or you can pull verbal testimonials from the show transcript for reuse on websites and in marketing campaigns.
“The podcast is not the end product. The podcast is a source of content,” Lee says.
Still, a podcast may not be an ideal fit for every marketing goal.
“If you have an existing but passive audience or a singular premise you wish to own publicly (similar to what a book can do for you), then you may want to launch a show,” says Jay Acunzo, host of the How Stories Happen podcast and co-founder of Creator Kitchen.
On the other hand, a podcast may be a poor choice if audience growth is your primary goal. “The podcast itself doesn’t spread like other forms of content. The host must go out and promote the show, like an actor with a film or author with a book,” Jay says.
To create a successful show, Jay recommends investing in these critical elements:
A well-developed, perspective-conveying premise
An irresistible format that gets people to stick around through the end of the episode
Trustworthy, entertaining talent
Just don’t expect to compete with celebrity podcasters like Steven Bartlett or Anna Faris.
Lee Judge explains, “If you’re selling industrial door hinges, your entire market may only be 100,000 people.”
When gauging the marketing impact of your podcasts, don’t rely solely on traditional podcast metrics. For example, one of Lee’s clients reported a noticeable increase in inbound inquiries, though her podcast analytics data didn’t reflect this successful outcome.
“If she stuck with what her podcast analytics indicated, she would have thought the show wasn’t working. But when people began telling her, ‘I heard you here. I heard you there.’ She knew it was working,” Lee says.
If you lack the buy-in or budget to host a show, consider pitching company thought leaders as potential guests on other industry podcasts — or sharing your content as a show sponsor.
Should you invest in sonic branding?
When certain sounds or musical triggers make your audience automatically think of your company, that’s sonic branding at work.
“Sonic branding is a system of strategically crafted sound that makes people feel something about a brand or experience,” says John Taite, EVP of global brand partnerships at Made Music Studio. “We often say that people think about what they see, but they feel what they hear.”
There’s real marketing power in an instantly recognizable sound.
“It’s a subconscious memory trigger that kicks in when you’re making a purchase decision — be it a car or a candy bar,” John says. “Every piece of branded sound or music makes a long-term impression on a consumer — from advertising to social content to activations.”
John should know: His company is behind Cricket Wireless’s signature beep, Nature Valley’s “call of the crunch” whistle, and the Cinnamon Toast Crunch “Cinnadust!” sound.
Whether you’re a B2B or B2C brand, large or small, your organization is probably making a sound. But unless it’s deliberate, it’s just noise, says Roscoe Williamson, global creative strategy & innovation director at MassiveMusic, which creates music and soundscapes for brands.
“You would never just have a random logo, random type fonts, or a random visual identity, right? If you’re not thinking about sound in those same terms, you’re missing out [on potential branding advantages],” Roscoe says.
Roscoe cites his team’s work with TikTok as one of his favorite examples of the power of sonic branding:
“TikTok had a problem with off-site brand attribution. When people [shared] a TikTok film to another site, like Instagram or Reddit, research showed that people weren’t attributing that content to TikTok as much as the brand would like,” he explains.
His team created the now ubiquitous sonic logo that appears on any TikTok content pushed off-site — in other words, onto millions of films every week — which is now the signature sound of TikTok.
Sonic branding includes using sound for social media touchpoints, audio advertising, in-person experiences (like trade shows or in-store shopping), and the product sounds like alerts when a task is complete or an error has been made.
Choosing the right sound palette for your brand starts with creating guardrails for what you do and don’t want to sound like.
“[Those decisions] should align with what your brand stands for — either its values or its tone of voice or promise,” Roscoe says. “Just having that point of view and being consistent will put those brands ahead of others [that] don’t even think about it.”
But, when sonic branding isn’t taken seriously or done right, it can damage consumers’ perception of your brand. “Just ask one of the 15 brands on-air right now using the sound of a doorbell,” says John Taite of Made Music Studio. “You can’t stand out from the clutter when you are the clutter.”
Add audio to existing content
If podcasts and sonic branding initiatives aren’t strategic fits, other approaches are worth exploring. For example, you can use AI automation to efficiently create sound content or incorporate audio features into your existing stories.
Ann Handley, author, speaker, and the world’s first “Chief Content Officer,” sees the ease of working with the latest tech as “an opportunity to use audio to create a fuller, richer customer experience and deeper audience connection.”
Brands can also give their Reels, TikTok videos, and text-based content an audible upgrade with the help of AI-generated audio overlays.
“AI is great at voicing factual information. If I’ve created a blog article, it’s useful to have an AI voice read it just like it’s written because my goal is to [help my audience] consume the facts on the page,” Content Monsta’s Lee Judge says.
Lee says AI can be a good substitute for human talent if you lack sufficient resources. He uses this analogy: “AI is like a stand-in recording. You can enjoy watching recorded music videos, but it isn’t like being at the concert.”
Even so, AI can help in a different way.
“AI can translate audio into different languages and make it available to global populations in ways that it hasn’t been done before,” Rite Aid’s Jeanniey Walden points out.
Let your audience hear your brand voice
As you prepare your strategy, consider turning up the volume to invite people to gather around and listen. Podcasts, sonic logos, and adding music and sound to existing content assets help deepen relationships.
Remember: “Audio is about resonance, not reach,” Jay Acunzo says. “Focus on activating existing audiences and turning them into superfans.”
A version of this article ran in the August 2024 edition of Chief Content Officer.
Get more advice from Chief Content Officer, a monthly publication for content leaders. Subscribe today to get it in your inbox.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
Does trust begin with the story or the storyteller? I’d argue they should be on equal footing at the start.
For example, I can shout out loud in a quiet restaurant and make people aware of me. But who they think I am and what I shout are equally important factors in whether people behave the way I desire.
If I’m wearing a badge and uniform, people make certain assumptions. So, when I yell for everyone to follow me in a crowded restaurant, everyone follows. (In marketing terms, the conversion rate is higher.)
But the outcome will be much different if people can’t discern who I am or if I’m wearing a badge and uniform but shouting incoherent things.
The ‘authentic’ marketing storyteller
Lately, brands increasingly prioritize people as the voice (storytellers) of their value.
Consider the rise of influencer marketing, which relies on people (internal or external to the brand) to gain access and build trust with audiences. Recent Ogilvy research found that 75% of B2B marketers are already utilizing influencers, and most of those who don’t say they plan to start soon.
Then there’s the founder-led marketing trend (that name is new, but the practice isn’t), which activates founders or senior leaders to create a more personal bond with potential customers.
And finally, there’s the increased pressure (even in large companies) for senior leaders to comment on and communicate their take on social and cultural issues. The 2024 Edelman Trust Barometer found that 62% of respondents expect CEOs to communicate about societal changes, not just those occurring in their business.
As a result, many marketers focus on “authenticity” these days.
But, if trust in the storyteller starts on equal footing with the story itself, we’d be better off using words such as “trust,” “honesty,” or “transparency.”
Why? Well, because the primary definition of “authentic” is simply “of undisputed origin; genuine,” as in an authentic Andy Warhol painting. Other definitions include “accurate or reliable” or “based on facts,” as in an authentic depiction of that historic event.
So, you can be an authentic jerk (reliably unkind, mean, and untrustworthy). And you can be an authentic liar (one of undisputed origin).
In short, your brand (and its storytellers) can be authentic and distrusted.
Authentically distrusted
I recently spoke with a team at a large, well-known tech brand that’s trying to tell a new story through its blog and social media. The company’s new CEO is the lead thought leader and storyteller, and the team is having a heck of a time getting anyone to listen.
Comment after comment and poll after poll told them the same thing: The audience didn’t trust the brand to tell that story because they didn’t know this CEO or believe in his depth of knowledge.
It wasn’t that they questioned his authenticity or motive — they just didn’t trust him yet.
You can see this mistake happening across several founder-led initiatives. For example, OpenAI has used CEO Sam Altman and CTO Mira Murati to tell the generative AI story. It’s safe to say they’ve failed at building the trust the brand needs to broaden its audiences. The company seems to now be on its back foot, trying to regain trust — even with its own employees.
You can see the same challenges with Tesla/SpaceX CEO and X owner/CTO Elon Musk and Meta CEO Mark Zuckerberg on the struggling side of trust.
On the other side, you have Canva CEO Melanie Perkins, Spanx founder Sara Blakely, and 37Signals CEO Jason Fried.
The primary challenge for founders and influencers who struggle with trust isn’t authenticity, it’s belief in the storyteller. The new CEO at the tech brand hadn’t earned his way to “trusted storyteller” status. And the leaders at OpenAI seem incapable of telling a consistently trustworthy story.
Evolving trustworthiness
So, wait a minute. Doesn’t this seem like a catch-22? If the storyteller must earn the trust of an audience before they can tell a new story, how do they do that without actually telling the story?
Does that mean a brand can never evolve into new stories or introduce new storytellers? No, of course not.
The cause of failure for these brands isn’t that they’re trying something new. It’s thinking of influencer- or founder-led approaches as a shortcut to building customer trust. The calculus seems to be: “We have to develop trust quickly, so a warm, human storyteller should be the star instead of the cold, corporate brand.”
But trust and storytelling don’t work that way.
To succeed, you have to do one of two things.
The first option is to slowly and purposely evolve the story (with or without new storytellers) to ease audiences into it. Consider the years-long journey Mattel took with Barbie, slowly addressing the toy’s disconnect with modern audiences before tapping new storytellers (Greta Gerwig and Margot Robbie) to tell a new and different story.
The second is to suffer the distrust of a large portion of a potential or existing audience as the storytellers prove themselves trustworthy to those who choose to give them a chance. Like it or not (I and many others didn’t), Toys “R” Us used OpenAI technology as the storyteller in a controversial ad. The brand has since said it’s moving ahead with AI as the storyteller despite unfavorable reactions.
The tech brand I mentioned earlier created incredible content for the CEO as honest, passionate, and true stories told in a humorous way. But because the team was telling these stories through the mouth of their new, not-well-known CEO, they might as well have been CNN trying to launch a streaming service. Nobody was willing to give that a chance.
The answer for them? One experiment they’re trying is to break the content away from the corporate voice and brand. Creating a separate content brand gives them the opportunity to build a trusted voice (and an engaged audience) and bring the CEO along for the ride.
They’re also pairing the CEO with other influencers to build his bona fides in that industry. They’re easing their audience into realizing that their brand (and its CEO) is behind this new story.
The author John Maxwell once wrote, “People buy into the leader before they buy into the vision.”
Is his quote at odds with my position that they’re equals? I don’t think so.
The story creates the value and the trust. But if your audience doesn’t believe in the storyteller, it’s so much harder to make the story worth telling.
It’s your story. Tell it well.
Subscribe to workday or weekly CMI emails to get Rose-Colored Glasses in your inbox each week.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
Marketers know that data-driven personalization presents a huge opportunity and a meaningful way to deliver on customer expectations.
Research backs up that common sense. In one recent study, 89% of decision-makers say they believe personalization “is invaluable to their business’s success in the next three years.”
Yet most organizations struggle to personalize content. I explained some reasons in a recent episode of Live With CMI. Read on for the highlights, or watch the video interview:
You lack the right data (or don’t have access to it)
You know you need to offer personalized recommendations on content, products, use cases, etc. Yet, you may only be able to do it at a high level of segmentation (if at all) because you lack the data that empowers personalization that matters to the audience.
That obstacle arises when you don’t have an integrated data system or enough data. Your organization likely looks at data in an ad hoc way:
Customer relationship data sits with the sales team.
Website data sits with the technical team.
Customer service data sits with the customer support team.
All that information lives in silos. Without bringing it together, you can’t create a holistic customer view to which the marketing team aligns its goals and needs.
You don’t have a say in data infrastructure or collection
As marketers, we present the case of why our brand is relevant and the right fit for the customer. That’s why in both B2B and B2C organizations marketers are the ones who need to know their customers and prospects best.
That means you (or someone on the marketing team) must have a seat at the data table. Marketing should drive the strategy behind the organization’s data collection, infrastructure, and use.
Customers expect brands to give them highly relevant information. According to a 2023 survey I conducted with Researchscape for my book, most people (88%) expect brands to interact with them based on their history with that brand. A similar number (85%) of folks expect brands to share personalized recommendations with them.
That’s not a surprise. Anyone who has shopped on Amazon or browsed shows on Netflix knows well a brand can recommend things based on past consumption. Imagine if every time you signed into Netflix, you had to retrain it to fit your preferences. That would be a horrible customer experience.
Years ago, in an interview in TechCrunch, Todd Yellin (then-vice president of innovation at Netflix) said their goal was to know a viewer so well that they could give the viewer one button that would play the exact show you want to watch in that second.
Customers want companies to make everything that easy. But to deliver on that vision, marketers must drive data strategy. That’s because you can ask questions that help determine how data should be collected.
If you don’t have a strong voice in how the organization invests in data infrastructure, how the data will be used, and how to tell the data story to your customers to build trust, then you miss the ability to control your destiny.
You overlook this important data
When you think about the information to collect about your prospects, consider some commonly overlooked data points. Behavioral, technographic, and psychographic data is dramatically underused.
With behavioral data, I’m not talking about how often somebody buys with you or how much they spend. I mean:
Where are they consuming content?
Which content drives them through to other content?
How often are they interacting with you for support?
How often do they interact with each other to learn more about the industry?
You want a holistic view of customer behavior, not just while they’re using your product.
Many B2B companies should consider the technographic data — the tech stack related to your brand’s space.
For example, if you work for Zapier, the automation tool that connects web apps and services, you’d want to know what customers connect to your tool. The data analytics team should track that. Understanding buyers’ tech stack would let you know, for example, which additional connections they want you to enable.
Technographic data is valuable on the B2C side, too. If you work for a video game company, you’d want to understand which headphones or accessories your customers use. A company like Apple would want to understand the other kinds of tools customers would expect to use together. That kind of data lets you anticipate your customers’ needs.
Psychographic data involves your customers’ attitudes and motivations that determine what they value. Think about how people shop online. Somebody who cares about a good deal might look for websites that offer free shipping or a discount for an annual (vs. monthly) subscription.
Other customers aren’t necessarily looking for value. They prioritize ease of use. They would want to hear a story about the ease of onboarding, available support, or how you’ll simplify their lives.
Each person has a different set of motivations. By working with your data analytics team to collect information about those motivations, you can tailor the messages on your landing pages, in your emails, and in all other communication vehicles. Somebody focused on value gets one set of messages, and somebody focused on ease of use gets a different set. That’s a more effective marketing approach — you’re not wasting time delivering an irrelevant message.
Ultimately, you need to identify the right mix of data your organization should collect. You shouldn’t collect every piece of data because that can overwhelm your team. And asking for too much data makes customers uncomfortable.
You should show prospects how giving data benefits them
In personalization, privacy is a big part of this story. It’s possible to collect data and use it in a transparent way rather than creeping people out.
Several brands ask people about their preferences in a way that builds trust. For example, some brands offer the option to opt out of Mother’s Day messaging because it can be a sensitive time of year for some customers.
Questions like that build a customer preference profile for the marketer, but they also build respect and trust with the customer.
Some companies do a great job of explaining what data they collect and how they use it. Lemonade, an insurance company, is a great example. It clearly discloses what it will and will not do with the customers’ data. Itsdata privacy policy is written to be human and easy to understand. It wants customers to trust that Lemonade won’t do something untoward with their data.
If you ask people their preferred balance of privacy and personalization, about 50% of consumers say they’re happy for their data to be used for more personalized services and experiences, according to a recent PwC study.
People recognize the tradeoff. Since they receive more messages than ever, many appreciate companies that give them recommendations that save them time.
For example, as a parent of a young child, I appreciate it when Amazon recommends the clothing size to purchase based on the last time you bought the item. If I bought a 12-month size six months ago, Amazon recommends an 18-month size the next time I shop.
That saves me time because I’m less likely to order the wrong size. It saves Amazon time on returns. Both the customer and the organization benefit when you get personalization right.
Are you ready for “advergaming”? Or is it ad gamification? Gamified advertising?
Whatever the word or phrase, interactive advertising is here. Big brands like Disney, Amazon, and even tech company Discord are featuring interactivity in their advertising formats.
If you think that sounds like something B2B companies have been doing for a while, you’re right. Interactive polls, surveys, and even games have long been a staple in the B2B marketing quiver.
But interactive insertions on streaming media and other content platforms take this to a new level. So, we went to CMI’s chief strategy advisor, Robert Rose, to ask what’s up. Watch this video or read on for his take:
Bringing gamification ads to Hulu and more
Several recent articles tackle the new trend of gamification in advertising as a different kind of marketing and advertising strategy.
In July, Marketing Dive explored Burger King going all in on gamification and speaks to more of a content marketing approach. The fast-food burger chain launched a video game called Balloon Burst to celebrate its 70th birthday. It replaced two other video games that Burger King created as a means of building the “stickiness of our brand,” as one representative said.
Not sure I’d connect the word “stickiness” to a burger brand, but then I’m not on the comms team at Burger King, but I digress.
More recently, this kind of gamification entered the paid media side of marketing.
Disney, Hulu, and others are rolling out opportunities for brands to use “advergames” on streaming media and other television-like platforms. As Marketing Brew details, Disney rolled out Quiz Show and Beat the Clock on Hulu and ESPN. Advertisers can engage viewers by hosting a quick trivia game or asking them to answer rapid-fire questions using their TV remote. Topgolf was the first to take advantage of the new ad format.
Amazon rolled out advertising on Prime Video in May. Now it’s added a new ad format — interactive quizzes. Brands can ask questions or conduct a poll or survey. Viewers can request more information via email and win prizes, such as Amazon shopping credits.
You could see this ad gamification coming. Demand for video games, especially mobile games, has been incredibly hot. Sensor Tower’s Digital Marketing Index finds that digital ad spend on mobile apps reached $25 billion in the first quarter of 2024, the second-highest figure since the record was set in the fourth quarter of 2023.
So, advergames are here and unlikely to disappear.
Playing ‘advergames’ into your B2B marketing
B2B marketers should embrace them. You’ve long seen the advantage of building configurators, polls, surveys, and other elements of interactive applications into your marketing cycle. In fact, some of the greatest B2B marketing examples are gamified. The HubSpot Website Grader has become almost legendary as an interactive way to develop new leads. Its success is so great that HubSpot made it available as a tool that partners could white label on their websites.
But not every example is a winning one.
The other day, I saw an interactive poll on a technology company’s site. “Take a poll to see if you should buy now,” the promotion said. The first question was, “Are you read to buy now?” Then it said, “If not, what would make you ready to buy now?”
Stop doing those.
Don’t make a playbook all about business configurators or polls that overtly try to discern the buyer’s customer journey status.
Instead, think about clever ways to determine intent and add value and entertain at the same time. Look at ways to incorporate this strategy not just on your websites and social media channels but in your paid media strategy.
How could you include polls and surveys to help customers along their journey and earn your brand valuable first-party data to figure out their intent?
I’ve seen this done by a brand that gated its research. Instead of asking for first and last name, title, and email address, it simply asked, “What questions are you looking to answer?” and “Would you like to see how that compares to other colleagues?”
The ongoing poll gives potential customers value by letting them know if they’re asking the same questions as their colleagues and sharing questions they might not have thought to ask. It also provides the company with insight into how and what content to deliver.
I’ve seen incredible ideas, from trivia games to assessments and interactive resource guides. Now, you can use them for more than people who visit your website, you can incorporate them into your paid media strategy. That’s a game worth playing.
Want more content marketing tips, insights, and examples? Subscribe to workday or weekly emails from CMI.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
In the most recent CMI research, 84% of marketers say they use videos — that’s an 11% jump over the previous year.
Yet executives, managers, and others still clamor for more videos. You’ve probably sat in a meeting where the CEO says the company needs more videos. Or received a forwarded TikTok link with a note from a sales manager saying, “We should be doing this.”
But making more videos because people in your organization want them isn’t a good enough reason. Well, a CEO request might be. But even then, you need a strategy behind your video decisions to get the most value out of them. In CMI’s video survey, 60% of marketers say a video strategy would help them deliver better results.
Bean Porter, manager of brand and content production at Grainger, and A. Lee Judge, co-founder of Content Monsta, recently joined CMI Live to share advice on how marketers should approach video at their brands and offer practical tips for creating quality videos.
Watch this video or read on for the highlights:
Build a video strategy for your customers
“Always think of the customer first,” Bean advises.
To do that, ask these two questions:
What will attract an audience to watch a video?
What does the brand want the audience to do after viewing a video?
By identifying the objective and the call to action at the start, you’re more likely to create an effective video for viewers and your brand.
To meet Grainger’s brand recognition objective, for example, Bean and her team created Everyday Heroes, a video series spotlighting various Grainger customers.
However, if the objective had been to motivate a viewer to buy a product, Bean says a five-second YouTube bumper promoting the product and driving viewers to a landing page would make more sense.
Combine customer considerations and brand objectives to guide decisions
An audience-first video strategy will naturally lead to a mix of video content, from subject matter to tone.
Video length will also vary. Short or long? The answer goes back to the audience.
For example, people won’t watch a two- to three-minute video about a product. “Make it short. Make it quick. Grab their attention right away, and you know what you want them to do — click to purchase,” Bean says.
Explore longer-form videos when you want to connect emotionally, which is often helpful for top-of-the-funnel objectives. Bean suggests 12- to 15-second clips featuring Q&As to help a middle-of-the-funnel audience get to know more about what your business does.
“There’s a creative way to use different types of videos with different lengths to continue to tell the story and take them down that funnel,” Bean says.
You also can use the same video content in several ways. For example, you could publish a two-minute video telling the story of your brand or of a customer to YouTube and embed it on a landing page.
Then, create shorter cuts from it to post on social and drive traffic to the landing page. You can lead the prospect further down the funnel by linking to videos for a specific product from that landing page.
“Tell the whole story to keep your customer engaged with your brand,” Bean says.
Use storytelling to strengthen your human-centered video content
While length, tone, and subject matter will vary, your videos should always resonate on a human level.
“Every brand has a story to tell, and every product can have that emotional element to it,” Bean says.
Say you sell hammers. It’s not a sexy product. People just pick it up and use it, right? How likely is it that a demo video of a hammer would grab an audience?
But if you focus on the person behind the hammer, people will respond, Bean says.
Do a video story about the customer who has the hammer. Did they buy it? Did they get it passed down to them? Who else used the hammer? What did they use it for? How does the current owner use it? How do they like it?
“You’re creating that human connection with it and emotional connection with the audience utilizing video as a platform,” Bean explains.
Among her other ideas for creating videos that connect with audiences:
Record the sound of a product being created to appeal to ASMR-oriented audiences. (Autonomous sensory meridian response videos are popular because the sounds can trigger a tingling sensation in some listeners.)
Go through the step-by-step process to make the product and give tips about its uses and features.
Follow a day in the life of a product or an employee.
Do a Q-and-A with a product specialist or customer who uses the product.
Use a drone to fly over the building as employees enter for the day and repurpose it in multiple videos.
“There’s no shortage of stories,” Bean says.
Devise a distribution plan
With many platforms available to distribute your videos, the choice can seem overwhelming. But Bean says just go back to your original strategy — the audience.
“You want to meet your customers where they’re at, so they’re actually engaging with the brand and building that relationship over time,” she says. “You don’t want to be creating video for a platform that you’re not getting a return on.”
Conduct a test by publishing the videos to every platform where your audience views. Peel back the results to really understand which, if any, videos attract and engage your audience. See which ones are most likely to provoke responses to your calls to action.
With that data, you can stop publishing on platforms that don’t deliver results and focus on those that do.
Tips for producing better video
With your strategy documented, you and the team can begin production. Bean says Grainger shoots horizontally so the full-length content can live on YouTube. Then, they edit the content to better fit the audience on vertical platforms.
Content Monsta’s Lee Judge offers these additional tips to produce better quality videos that work for your brand and audience:
Adopt a listening tempo: When you speak to communicate, you need to slow your pace even though it won’t seem slow to you. Take the time to enunciate and get your point across so the listener can process what you’re saying, Lee says.
Give on-camera energy: Watching his early videos, Lee realized that when he read a script, his eyebrows never moved. “That’s not normal. In a conversation, you get excited, your eyebrows move, and things happen. It was a telltale sign I was reading, and I didn’t have the correct emotion.”
Turn up your emotions a little so you appear more natural. When you’re engaged, not only will your eyebrows move, but so will your hands and even your smile.
Try throwaway takes: When you encounter subjects who aren’t comfortable in front of the camera, plan for an extra take. Lee says his colleague Marc Raco at Content Monsta lets the person know it went well, but he asks them to do one more. “Forget all the rules. Just be yourself, and let’s give it one more take,” he tells them. That second take is almost always the one they use. “At that point, he’s already trained them. He’s already told them how to do certain things, and they’ve become more relaxed.”
Take time to craft your video plan
If you want to create videos — and you probably should — be thoughtful about it. Map out a strategy for how you’ll use video throughout the customer journey.
“You want to make content that’s relevant and a great representation of your business,” Bean says.
Register to attend Content Marketing World in San Diego. Use the code BLOG100 to save $100. Can’t attend in person this year? Check out the Digital Pass for access to on-demand session recordings from the live event through the end of the year.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
Your content isn’t polished until you make it accessible to all.
Google regularly introduces new accessibility features and updates to enhance the accessibility of digital content. However, marketers shouldn’t just rely on third-party sites to break down barriers so everyone can enjoy your content.
The Web Content Accessibility Guidelines provide a foundation based on four principles related to how people interact with content — operable, perceivable, robust, and understandable. For example, a visitor uses a keyboard instead of a mouse, or someone uses voice commands to navigate a website. Audience members might use screen readers to read the content aloud or a screen magnifier to read sections of the content.
To achieve accessible digital content and websites that include all members of your audience and adhere to accessibility laws, follow these practical and easy-to-implement tips:
1. Optimize title tags and headings
Ensure that visitors can easily understand your content’s structure and find the information they need, whether they do it themselves or use voice assistants. Use clear and unique page titles and headings, including relevant keywords, and ensure that it flows logically.
Use only one H1 tag. Keep your subheadings in sequential order (H3 after H2, etc.) and precisely describe the content. For example, instead of using “Things To Know” as the H2 subhead, make it “Things To Know About Accessible Content.” With this approach, visitors can know what to expect of each section of the content.
2. Create accessible tables
Tables inside text can be difficult for screen readers to interpret. To make your tables accessible, don’t cut and paste them from other documents or add them as image files. Use cascading style sheets (CSS) to create them so voice assistants can read them easily.
3. Use descriptive anchor text for links
Read these two statements:
To learn more, click here.
To learn more, review WCAG standards.
The first option says almost nothing. The second — and better — choice describes what the user can expect when they click the link.
With your anchor text, avoid generic phrases, consider using a target keyword, and be concise.
4. Include descriptive alt text for images
Descriptive alt text helps search engines interpret image content, makes it possible for the visually impaired to understand what’s shown, and potentially boosts your website visibility and rankings on Google. Write alt text for every image and video posted on your site and social media channels. Add captions for content published on sites, such as Instagram Reels, that do not have an alt-text option.
Here’s the alt text used to describe this image in a recent article from the Content Marketing Institute: “The e-book headline in this example from OptinMonster is straightforward: 50 Smart Ways to Segment Your Email List.” The alt text describes the image (e-book headline) and the reason for its inclusion (straightforward).
If the image is a logo, write “[company name] logo.” Get specific when possible. For example, instead of explaining an image as “business insurance,” say the kind of insurance.
5. Add public sitemap
Sitemaps allow visitors to quickly find the content they need and help search engines to index your pages.
An XML sitemap generally gets the most attention because it’s helpful for search engine crawlers. An HTML sitemap, though, provides a clear, accessible overview of the essential pages for visitors. It is usually presented in a clickable format and found in the footer, making it easier for users to navigate your website.
Here’s an excerpt of the publicly available site map from fashion company Mango. It highlights the women’s section, detailing the types of clothing, shoes and accessories, and plus-size categories available.
Ensure that your site includes both an XML and an HTML sitemap.
6. Make social media content accessible
Many marketers prioritize making their websites accessible but overlook their social media channels. Some hesitate to spend time on social media accessibility because it’s not required under WCAG 2.1 standards. However, given that 85% of Gen Zers say social media affects their buying choices, it’s a smart decision to post accessible content.
Follow the same tips as for your website content — add captions and transcripts for video and alt text to images, such as this one that We Rate Dogs did in its Instagram post about Pioppi: “a blue staffy pokes his head up above a piece of furniture, front paws resting on a bit of white fabric. His ears are out wide, and his eyes glint with a hint of mischief as he smiles a close-mouthed grin your way.”
You also should consider incorporating a sign language interpreter into your videos and events as they can be more helpful in localizing the conversation or supplementing the auto-generated transcripts.
Write accessible hashtags by capitalizing each word, like #MyCanyon, #ChelseaSodaro, #CanyonSpeedmax, #Triathlete, and #Triathlon, in the post below. It makes it easier for screen readers to pronounce each word separately.
Don’t use many emojis. Voice assistants read every emoji aloud. Hearing 10 emojis in a row, for example, would be challenging for any user.
Your words are as important as your content’s organizational structure. Exacting language and a well-structured format make content easy to understand for everybody.
Website Accessibility Initiative guidelines say you should use clear and simple language or provide a simplified version. If you must use uncommon words, idioms, phrases, and abbreviations, explain them.
Other suggestions include using bullet points, creating emphasis within the text, and indicating the content’s language with the “lang” attribute in HTML.
Don’t forget to craft accessible CTAs to encourage all people to take the next step. To do so, follow these tips:
Write descriptive and action-oriented text.
Consider color contrast. The minimum ratio should be 4.5-to-1 for most people to read the text. However, that varies based on text size or WCAG conformance level. Use this contrast checker to determine whether your CTA button meets accessibility guidelines.
Place your primary CTA above the fold so users can see it without scrolling down the page.
Adjust the size and placement of your CTA in the mobile version to ensure that it is still effective.
Regularly assess your content for accessibility
To evaluate your site’s performance, you can use free website accessibility checker tools like Accessibility Checker or Google Lighthouse. Any time you make changes or add content, you should ensure that the update is accessible.
As shown in this screenshot of an audit of www.Paralympics.com, Accessibility Checker gives the site a score out of 100, identifies whether the site is compliant, and highlights specific accessibility issues.
In your reviews, you can also ask users with disabilities to test your site. Publish a pledge for website accessibility on the site and note how people can request accommodations.
In today’s world, it’s vital to understand that accessibility is not a choice but a must. When you create accessible online content, you help create a more inclusive online environment where everyone can have access and engage.
All tools mentioned in this article were suggested by the author. If you’d like to suggest a tool, share the article on social media with a comment.
Register to attend Content Marketing World in San Diego. Use the code BLOG100 to save $100. Can’t attend in person this year? Check out the Digital Pass for access to on-demand session recordings from the live event through the end of the year.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
In B2B content marketing, tension typically arises between marketing and sales teams over how much (if any) content should be gated. How much content should be accessible only to those willing to provide contact information?
The debate about gating content has been hot for as long as I can remember. Sales teams rage that content should be gated because that’s the only way the business can drive qualified leads and opportunities. They say it’s the only way content marketing can be measurable. That’s wrong, of course. It’s not the only way.
Some marketers rage back and say gated content always loses because it makes engagement more challenging, can’t be indexed for SEO purposes, and acts as a barrier between audience building and selling. That’s wrong, too. Some engaged audiences do come through content gates.
Recently, a new player has entered the discussion: AI search. Should you protect your most valuable content behind a gate so it doesn’t show up as a “no click” answer on a search page or in someone else’s AI-generated content?
There’s no good answer. #TheStruggleIsReal.
Content gating isn’t a yes or no question
Let’s be clear. There is nothing inherently wrong with gating some content. First-party data acquisition is a clear and present priority for B2B marketers. And it’s not just the qualified lead or contact information that provides the value. The insights you can glean from the first-party data help optimize many other parts of the journey.
Gated content can produce leads, opportunities, and sales. And it’s often the first step in a successful buyer’s journey. Awards have been given, case studies have been written, and budgets have increased because content marketing campaigns that led to gated assets produced results.
However, positive results also come from content marketing, which supports an audience journey. These audiences are typically filled with people who provide their contact information because they’re genuinely interested in a future relationship with your brand — carried out by consistently delivering valuable content.
Wait a minute. Should we care about their audience journey if these people aren’t destined to become buyers?
Absolutely. That’s because audiences (and the insights they provide) are one of the most valuable attributes of a successful marketing operation.
The question is how to balance content creation, distribution, and promotion for the different journeys you design to support your business goals.
Are you building or moving audiences?
As a part of my consulting and advisory practice, I ask B2B clients about their focus. Do they want to build audiences, move them, or both? Their usual response: “What’s the difference?”
Here it is in a nutshell.
If you want to build an audience: You’ll work to amass a group of people who want your communications and value your content whether they buy from you or not. These people may represent longer-term opportunities. Or, they may never buy from you. And their value to your marketing operation lies in the data and insights you gather from studying how they interact with your content.
If you want to move an audience: You’ll work to continually and efficiently move people through the journey (i.e., becoming a qualified opportunity, becoming a buyer, and remaining a loyal customer).
In other words, some content efforts feed short-term campaigns to move audiences from one part of the buying journey to the next. And some build and satisfy an audience along one step in its journey — even if it never progresses to the next step.
It’s not an either-or choice. It’s a “yes and” choice. But they’re inherently different goals.
So, how should you balance your efforts between them?
Look to what I call (with my tongue firmly in cheek) the “three laws of audience motion.” Like Isaac Newton’s laws of motion, these three foundational concepts help you better understand (and measure) how audiences behave when entering and traveling along the buyer or audience journeys.
I call them laws not because they are absolute but because the world we all work in would recognize them as “normal” circumstances. And, yes, there are exceptions to these laws.
Let’s explore.
1st law of audience motion
Content value consistency is the key to audience engagement
A content consumer will either remain disengaged or become increasingly distant unless they are consistently provided with content experiences they find valuable and that are delivered regularly.
I wrote a piece late last year about why your audience isn’t the same as your marketing database.
Personal data is emotional. You don’t build audiences with gated content — you move them (hopefully). When you get accurate, trusted information from a simple gated content transaction, the content consumer is emotionally, if perhaps not intellectually or financially, ready to move to the next step of the buyer’s journey.
When you’re building an audience, on the other hand, you’re attracting people who are not necessarily ready to move.
People who provide their information to subscribe after free and unfettered access to content are not subscribing to what they just received. They are subscribing to the promise of future value inherent in the content they have already received. In other words, they just became customers — not of your product, but of the ideas you’re evangelizing.
Think about it this way: Would you rather have the contact information of 100 people who may or may not be interested in buying but will fill out a form to get a piece of content? Or would you rather have 50 people who may or may not be on the purchase track but signed up because they read ungated content and want more?
Which result would be better? Your answer probably depends on the objective.
Once either relationship has been set, your success in keeping it requires you to build on that expectation you set continuously. If your first action after someone signs up for your thought leadership newsletter is to have a sales representative call, you violated the first law of audience motion — and you can bet the content consumer will be set in motion away from you.
2nd law of audience motion
Once you start moving an audience, you have to work to keep it moving
If the initial content experiences guide the consumer into a buyer’s journey, then the likelihood of that buyer becoming a loyal audience member depends on the consistent progression they make throughout the journey.
The true benefit of building an audience is either that you engage a pool of people who can help you reach others who are willing to move or that you and your brand will be top of mind when people are willing/able to move.
One of the primary purposes of advertising, cold calling, or any sort of external campaign to move audiences is to find (as quickly as the campaign is designed to run) some number of people who are ready, willing, and able to move into the buyer’s journey.
But many things may stall their progress. So, creating smooth off ramps to move people from the buyer’s journey back to an audience where they can “rest” can be productive. Then, move them back into the buyer’s journey when they’re ready and not before.
And while your amazing, persuasive ad copy, brochure, or campaign call to action may convince them to move sooner, the further along in the buyer’s journey someone is, the more likely they’ll become valuable audience members.
For example, I worked with a global enterprise B2B software company that launched a thought leadership email newsletter. The call to action at the end of each newsletter directed people to its website to speak with a consultant who would give them a quote. That effort fell flat on its face.
Then, the marketing team noticed that many cold leads from its other sales campaigns subscribed to its newsletter. So, they switched the newsletter content to be more how-to and stopped selling to this audience. Instead, the team included calls to action for other thought leadership platforms like webinars and physical events).
This cold-lead audience ended up sharing the webinars and physical events at twice the rate of customers. The group also answered polls and provided excellent data for keyword and SEO benefits. And, over the long term, many of those cold leads returned to become buyers.
3rd law of audience motion
The longer an audience member stays engaged, the more likely they are to purchase
If the initial content experience engages the consumer as part of your audience, the likelihood of them influencing a purchase increases exponentially, depending on the size and quality of the audience.
One of the main benefits of audience building is that it establishes a more trusting relationship from the outset. By delivering valuable content, you immediately position your company as more differentiated and valuable.
But the value of an audience as a corporate asset has many facets. I’ve discussed the examples and definitions of audience value before. But the key, generally speaking, is to look at the value of audiences as a multiplier of value to influence purchases. Engaged, subscribed, and measured audiences typically buy faster, buy more, stay longer, and evangelize more frequently.
A few years ago, I worked with an enterprise software company that deals with long buying cycles and an even longer time between purchases (think decades). The company’s original research and thought leadership platform helps professionals in the industry get better at their jobs. It’s a long-term audience-building strategy focused on pooling likely customers and letting them become leads on their schedule. Today, nearly a third of all their leads come from subscribers to this platform.
Balancing the laws
If you build distinct business goals for the types of content you create, you can segment and balance the types of value expected from each approach (moving and building audiences).
This chart illustrates the business value of both moving an audience and building an audience:
Each conversion point illustrates the business value you can measure across either journey or when they cross into one another.
The diagram shows these conversion points for moving an audience:
Filling out a gated content form
Qualifying as a lead
Going through a nurturing process
Transacting/making a purchase
Conversion points for building an audience include:
Filling out a subscription form
Becoming part of the modeled audience
Becoming part of an audience segment
Becoming part of a measured audience
For example, moving an audience follows a classic direct marketing funnel value, where you measure:
Optimized behavior
Number of leads (identity value)
Lead value
Opportunity value
Transaction value/average selling price (ASP)
Customer value
However, if our goal is to build an audience, you can deliver similar conversion points to measure the value of the audience as it grows:
Contribution value (the multiplier effect on extended reach or influence)
Competency value (the ability to leverage data to provide insight into marketing)
Campaign value (the multiplier effect on pooling willing but not ready prospects)
Customer value (the creation of better, higher-value customers)
Cash value (the ability to generate revenue or cost savings)
Audience value (the value of the audience asset monetized in multiple ways)
Both journeys culminate in a business asset. Moving an audience creates a customer asset. Building an audience creates an audience asset.
Together, they form three categories:
Audience members who will never be customers
Audience members who are customers
Customers who aren’t audiences.
That gets us back to two questions: Where could you add the most value? Where do you add the most value?
If you can balance moving and building an audience, the answer to those questions would ultimately make the overlap of those circles so big that it becomes one large group of customers and audience members.
So, take your time. Figure out where the business needs the most value now and how you might begin to reinvest in a better balance between the short-term benefits of moving an audience and the long-term benefits of building an audience.
It’s your story. Tell it well.
Updated from a July 2020 article.
Subscribe to workday or weekly CMI emails to get Rose-Colored Glasses in your inbox each week.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
When you hire architects to design a house, they don’t just give the interior and exterior drawings to the construction crew and call the project complete. To ensure that the finished product meets everyone’s expectations, they provide comprehensive specifications for the team.
So why do many content marketers expect a content strategy to do all the heavy lifting on its own?
While a detailed content strategy is the foundation for a successful content marketing program, it’s just the starting point. Putting the strategy to work to meet your business goals requires building a governance framework that supports it.
What is content governance?
Content governance is the collection of processes, workflows, templates, frameworks, and guidelines an organization uses to manage its content. At its core, it takes all those must-dos internalized by your head of content and turns them into content consistency tools.
It helps you deliver more seamless customer experiences across channels. It also takes the content team out of the content police business.
Some content creators balk at constraints on their creativity when they must adhere to governance standards. However, content governance puts the content strategy into action. Without this framework, random acts of content abound.
Every content team has different needs. However, every content governance toolkit needs these documents.
Documented content workflows and processes
Detailing content marketing workflows clarifies team roles, responsibilities, and progression of tasks from ideation to publication. The goal is to streamline content production while ensuring that content reflects the content strategy and meets your quality standards. Two of the most common workflows are related to content requests and editorial.
Editorial workflows
A documented editorial workflow can be as simple as a flowchart showing the people and tasks in the content life cycle. It should include each step from ideation through drafting, editing, approval, and publication. It also should note the average time for each step.
Content request workflows
A workflow for content requests allows you to adopt a consistent approach to organizational asks. A document template, sometimes referred to as an intake form, can manage this workflow. It ensures that you receive all the information to evaluate an incoming request. It can also help thwart last-minute requests while ensuring that any new content aligns with the overarching content strategy.
Following this flow chart, the idea is shared in an intake form, which goes to an editorial board for review. If it decides yes, the idea should be added to the content calendar and assigned to the content creator and workflow. If the editorial review ends in a no, the requester is notified by email and can revise the idea on the intake form so the editorial board can review it again.
Content templates: Your blueprints for quality
Content templates are not creativity’s enemy. They are not fill-in-the-blanks recipes for bland, basic content. Content templates work as reusable blueprints for consistently creating high-quality content. They detail all the elements for publishing and promoting every content project.
Content brief template
A comprehensive content brief includes the objective, target audience, key messages, and call to action. It can be a standalone template submitted as part of the intake workflow, or you can include it as a component of other content submission templates.
Content submission templates
Publishing a piece of content involves more than securing the image, video, or copy. The elements vary by channel, too. Create content submission templates for each of your most common formats (e.g., blog posts, webinars, emails, e-books).
Content distribution templates
The best way not to forget an important content distribution opportunity is to have a template that outlines the possibilities. It should detail prioritization criteria and map content formats to each channel.
Strategic supporting documents drive alignment
Along with templates and workflows, reference materials and resources can help align content with the strategy. Among the supporting documents to include:
A content style guide
Even if you use a third-party guide, such as AP Style, you should still draft your brand’s content style guide. In addition to identifying brand-specific style, it can share your brand voice chart and how to apply it. Consider the style guide as the basic operating manual for your content organization.
An editorial calendar
In addition to helping you plan the team’s workload, an integrated editorial calendar gives everyone in the organization visibility into your priorities. It aligns the content team’s work with the content strategy, mapping activities to business cycles and highlighting key dates.
Implementing content governance
You can get started with content governance with the same tools already used in your organization to collaborate and share documents. As your content team grows and its output increases, consider adopting technology platforms designed for content teams.
With your governance frameworks in place, you can also turn to generative AI to scale your efforts. Generative AI is particularly well suited for applying templates for content repurposing and comparing content against your guidelines.
The final step in implementing content governance is identifying and tracking meaningful content metrics. Your governance activities should increase content engagement and conversion key performance indicators.
Content governance can seem intimidating, but it’s a great way to democratize content creation. A shared governance toolkit helps your organization create good content that fits your brand and strategy. It allows you to unlock a range of perspectives and expertise throughout the company, increasing the content program’s potential.
For a deeper look at aligning metrics with business objectives and demonstrating content’s value to stakeholders, plus examples of the governance documentation mentioned throughout this piece, watch Erika’s recent CMI webinar on content strategy.
Register to attend Content Marketing World in San Diego. Use the code BLOG100 to save $100. Can’t attend in person this year? Check out the Digital Pass for access to on-demand session recordings from the live event through the end of the year.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
Are you ready for AI-assisted search paid advertising?
Whew … a lot of buzzwords in that one question.
That’s the concept pitched by Perplexity, a search-focused generative AI platform. Its new advertiser pitch deck shows how the platform will win the hearts and minds of marketers by making them the prioritized answers to queries, all for a negotiated fee.
If that sounds like classic search advertising, it’s not exactly. Classic search advertising allows advertisers to pay for ads based on their position. If you want the top spot, you pay more than you would for the second or third spots.
In a world of AI-assisted search, though, only one answer is provided to a query. So, how would that pricing model work? And what about brand safety?
To get the answers, we went to CMI’s chief strategy advisor, Robert Rose, for his take. Read on or watch this video:
What will it cost to be the only advertiser?
Google has started integrating the AI message and functionality into Google Ads. But it’s mostly relegated to creating more relevant copy for search ads, optimizing performance by helping to create bid amounts, and, of course, analyzing landing pages to help you create a richer conversion experience.
But in regards AI search result ads, what I and most marketers think about how do we pay for the privilege of being THE answer at the top of the results. What would that look like? What would we be buying?
For example, I typed “who is the best content marketing strategist” into Google. Its AI Overview names a few folks, many of whom I know well. Good to see Neil Patel (like he needs more publicity) and folks like Scott Abel and Barry Feldman. But I’m not sure that’s the list I’d go with for content marketing strategy services. And yeah, I’m not there, though they do cite one of my articles (from 11 years ago) as the source of this knowledge, so that’s interesting.
Maybe I could buy an ad on that results page for the right article to cite.
Next, I went to Perplexity because it’s been giving Google a bit of a run for its money as an AI-related search engine. It markets itself as the platform “where knowledge begins.” Surely, it must have a better set of results for that query.
It returned a better list, which includes my pals Ann Handley, Joe Pulizzi, Michael Brenner, and Jay Baer. That’s a fine list. But I’m not on that list either, and I’m not bothered by that. (Pardon me while I weep in the corner for a moment.)
But what if I could buy a spot on that result screen?
Which one would be for sale? The priority spot on the citation list or the actual answer? We’ll just have to wait and see.
OK, the point to all of this is that Perplexity is already pitching the idea of integrating ads within the answer to the searcher’s query. According to the slide deck viewed by Digiday, the feature could appear as soon as October. Though it doesn’t detail pricing, a source said the plan is to charge north of $50 CPM (1,000 impressions).
Wow, that seems expensive. Of course, no data exists on the expected performance of those ads, and much may depend on the queries purchased.
But consider this. A classic Google search ad hovers in the $38 to $40 CPM. So, Perplexity would charge a 25% premium. If it didn’t just pull that figure out of the air, it must have good vibes that the performance of its AI search ads will be strong.
The Digiday article says Perplexity plans to launch more than a dozen categories for its AI ad product, including technology, health and pharma, arts and entertainment, finance, food and beverage, sports, science, and travel. It will also include B2B, internet, telecom, home and garden, beauty and fitness, retail, and shopping. I can’t think of a category they missed. I mean, maybe politics, but they seem to have everything else covered.
But deep in the article is another interesting tidbit.
Why is Perplexity partnering with traditional publishers?
Perplexity is building publishing partnerships, already inking deals with Time Magazine, Der Spiegel, Fortune, Entrepreneur, and Automatic. I’m struck by how many of those fit the B2B category, and apparently, the pitch deck details how marketers can buy inventory that will appear on pages from their third-party publishing partners.
It raises some interesting questions about how the integration between generative AI and these publishers will take shape. Will they be a classic ad network, like Google Ads and its publisher partnerships? Or will they merge the AI within the content pages under the publisher brand? Would they create, for example, a custom site driven by Der Spiegel “knowledge” with original content generated by Perplexity, all sponsored by a big brand?
That will be interesting — custom content hubs using proprietary learning sets of content and sponsored by brands. What about a small business content hub where all the content is generated by Perplexity using Entrepreneur magazine’s content as its learning model and sponsored by a relevant brand?
Pay attention to these developments because these new opportunities won’t just influence your paid media budgets. They can impact where, how, and why you’re putting money into original content.
Content marketing is getting AI’d, too, and you’d better be ready to pay to play.
Want more content marketing tips, insights, and examples? Subscribe to workday or weekly emails from CMI.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
Email presents a marketing benefit unavailable on any social media channel: Your brand can show up directly in your audience’s inboxes whenever you want.
But to gain email’s true advantage, you don’t just hit the send button. You must do the things that attract audiences to open, read, click, and act.
To help, the experts presenting at Content Marketing World share 19 do’s and don’ts to improve your email marketing:
1. Do see its true value
It’s tempting to see email as a traffic-driving channel intended to send folks to our site, social, or elsewhere to get value. I highly recommend inserting more into the email for actual value so that there’s self-contained value in any email they open, which creates an added incentive to open it. — Melanie Deziel, co-founder, CreatorKitchen.com
2. Do the upfront work first (and don’t presume)
Front-load the value, remembering (with few exceptions) that what you are presenting, offering, hosting, or writing about is not what’s valuable to the owner of that inbox. Nobody cares that XYZ company has an upcoming webinar. Be creative. Be clever. Be intriguing. Test and tune for your audience.
Don’t presume to know about my interest in your brand, products, services, or even your content. By now, we should all know that content “consumption” does not equal a lead. Just because I clicked, registered, or downloaded something doesn’t mean I’m engaging with you. A subject line that suggests otherwise is not likely to get your email opened or read unless it’s to find the unsubscribe link. — Carmen Hill, principal strategist and writer, Chill Content LLC
3. Do familiarize yourself with the recipients
If you have their email already, wouldn’t you know them? Know your audience very, very, very well and personalize that content for them. For example, I hate to admit I have a hard time following sports. As much as I love to pretend that I am into them, my impatience exceeds my desire to watch hours of play to see the end result. There is a lot to unpack there on my personality and how I might or might not absorb content. You should already know that about me before you send me that email. — Michael Bonfils global managing director, Digital International Group
4. Do what you’ve been told
This one is simple. You’ve heard this before. Provide VALUE to a niche audience. Your emails should provide real value in the form of useful information, solutions to their problems, or exclusive deals. — Dale Bertrand, president, Fire&Spark
5. Do your thing
I hate to be the “depends” person, but what works for your brand in email marketing 100% depends on your unique audience and brand voice. While some people like a mysterious subject line or one that makes them feel like they’re doing something wrong, others are offended and delete or report them as spam.
People are increasingly protective of their time, and your subject line must pique their interest and deliver on the promise of what the subject line says you will deliver. — Erika Heald, founder and chief content officer, Erika Heald Marketing Consulting
6. Do test and see
Test, test, test. Test out different subject lines that are compelling to your users. Also, create emails and content that add value to your users; otherwise, they will not click on it, and it will get lost in the noise. — Zack Kadish, senior SEO strategy director, Conductor
7. Do it for ‘this’
Testing. What works for some in some industries will not work for others. You have to find the right length, frequency, content mix, and calls to action that work for this product in this market for this segment of your audience. — Jim Sterne, president, Target Marketing of Santa Barbara
8. Do add motion
If you really want people to start opening your emails, make sure to include a video. I know — I am a video producer, so it’s easy for me to say. In this case, there’s all sorts of data that shows adding video increases both open and click-through rates. Simply adding the word “video” to your subject can help increase your open rate. — Tony Gnau, chief storytelling officer, T60 Productions and T60 Health
9. Do ‘friendly’
Interject a sense of urgency, time constraints, etc. From a consumer psychological perspective, people react more to the fear of losing than the joy of gaining.
Updating the from field address to a person’s name gives a higher chance of clicking. “Sue from XYZ brand” will do better than just the brand name unless the brand relationship is strong (but most don’t have that type of power).
Use emojis. It won’t get your email sent to the spam box. Stand out by playing with text. Be less formal and ask a simple question or make a quick statement. Many still try to stuff so much in the headline, but it won’t help increase open rates. — Troy Sandidge, founder, Strategy Hackers
10. Do forgo the sales focus
Build trust by making your emails interesting and useful. Most email marketing aims to get a sale or move the reader along the sales funnel. That rarely works. In fact, nurture can often be a “four-letter word.” Instead, take a content marketing approach with your emails. Be useful, earn trust, and business benefits will surface over the long term. — Dennis Shiao, founder, Attention Retention LLC
11. Don’t get lulled into a false sense of security
Avoid generic, clickbait subject lines that can lead to high open rates but low engagement. Seeing a high open rate can feel like a win, but when your audience isn’t engaging or clicking through to respond, or reaching out beyond the initial open, have you really won?
Instead, aim for clarity and relevance. Craft subject lines that accurately reflect the content of your emails, enticing recipients with genuine value and setting clear expectations. This approach enhances engagement and builds trust and long-term relationships with your subscribers. — Ashley Baker, founder and chief marketing officer, Coastline Marketing LLC
12. Don’t tempt unsubscribes
Take care not to overdo it. One of the biggest mistakes I think companies make with email is sending it TOO often. There’s nothing more annoying than receiving an email from a brand every day, for example. That will make me (and probably many other folks) unsubscribe immediately. — Michelle Garrett, consultant and writer, Garrett Public Relations
13. Don’t forget what’s most important
Getting emails open and read is not easy. Sender reputation is key. The from line is often more important than the subject line, and a powerful preheader that amplifies or completes the subject line message is essential.
Now, let’s talk about subject lines. I’ve had really good results with these three approaches:
Take a serious, authoritative tone: Write a short, instructive line that does not appear promotional — one that seems important and unignorable.
Use eye-magnet words: They are scientifically proven to attract the human eye like a magnet. Words like “new,” “now,” “introducing,” “announcing,” “finally,” and “soon” can all be good performers. The word “free,” despite some people still fearing it triggers spam filters, is a top-performing subject line word. So, too, is “you” because everyone is more interested in themselves than anything else.
Flag urgency: People hate to miss out. They also wait until deadlines are really close. Use words and phrases such as “last chance,” “this week,” “tomorrow,” “don’t miss,” and “deadline approaching.” — Nancy Harhut, chief creative officer, HBT Marketing
14. Don’t worry about the inbox crowd
Competition will play a minimal role if you have a strong follower base and a good approach to your emails, combined with relevant content. You must continue investing in building your own audience. You can only do this by creating unique content. — Pauline Lannoo, head of digital strategy, The Fat Lady
15. Don’t send, send, send
Email less frequently. Reducing your frequency while maintaining high quality may get you more opens and click-throughs. — Bernie Borges, vice president, global content marketing, iQor
16. Don’t dominate the inbox
Make sure you’re not emailing too much! One of the biggest pitfalls is oversharing. Save that for Threads. — Beth Elderkin, content marketing manager, Informa Connect
17. Don’t do long-form
Once again, headlines (or subject lines) matter, as does the content in the email. It should be simple (use bullets or short sentences with clear CTAs) and informational. — Jenn VandeZande, editor-in-chief, SAP CX + Industries
18. Don’t rely on subject lines alone
Consistently create authentic and valuable content that helps your audience. The best subject line or most interesting story might get a recipient to open or read the email. But if you don’t provide them with something that will help them do their job better or make their lives easier, they won’t keep opening your emails, no matter how clever your subject lines are. — Brian Piper, director of content strategy and assessment, University of Rochester
19. Don’t spend time on email
Unpopular opinion: We care too much about email when only a third of your target audience actually opens them. Now, you can try to craft compelling copy, but that doesn’t change the fact that our inboxes are cluttered. Instead of spending hours writing copy and building your email programs, invest the time to better understand your customers. Understand the touch points in the sales cycle to inform your engagement and content strategy. — Royna Sharifi, senior marketing campaign manager, Amazon Web Services
Don’t forget to tie it all together
After taking in all that do-and-don’t advice, don’t forget this: Connect the dots to create a successful email marketing program that works in tandem with your brand’s overall content and marketing strategy. Then, you’ll have a wide-open case to continue your email investment.
Register to attend Content Marketing World in San Diego. Use the code BLOG100 to save $100. Can’t attend in person this year? Check out the Digital Pass for access to on-demand session recordings from the live event through the end of the year.
MORE ADVICE FROM CMWORLD SPEAKERS:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
We have an update on the Snoop Dogg viral ad from earlier this year.
Fresh off his Olympic hosting duties, Snoop Dogg has reunited with Solo Brands for a new campaign called Blunt Marketing. (See what they did there? In case you didn’t know, Snoop is the world’s most famous marijuana aficionado.)
Is this campaign different than the one that influenced the CEO’s departure in 2024? Yes, it is.
Solo says it’s learned its lesson and is focused on the right thing — sales.
But has Solo really turned over a new leaf?
We asked CMI’s chief strategy advisor, Robert Rose, what he thinks and how you can learn from these bookended campaigns when constructing your next marketing initiatives. Watch or read on for his take.
Great campaign influences CEO departure
In January, I opened my video on Snoop Dogg and Solo with a quote from my good friend Michael Brenner: “Behind every piece of bad content is an executive who asked for it.”
Of course, the opposite is largely true, too.
The executives seem to have asked for the right piece of content this time around (well, at least they feel better about it).
But I’m getting ahead of myself. To get you back up to speed, let me explain the first campaign. Late last year, Solo Brands launched an influencer campaign with Snoop Dogg. It started with a tweet from Snoop Dogg that read, “After much consideration and conversation with my family, I’ve decided to give up smoke. Please respect my privacy at this time.”
That was followed by a viral brand awareness campaign for Solo’s new smokeless stove. In the explainer video, Snoop says he’s tired of coughing and his clothes smelling bad. The camera pans wider to reveal him sitting in front of a smokeless Solo Stove fire pit.
Cool, right? What an incredible influencer and brand awareness campaign. It amassed 30 million likes, comments, and shares on social media. Ad Age ranked it 18th in the 40 best ads of 2023.
What could possibly go wrong?
Well, when the CEO departed, Solo indicated in the announcement release that one of the reasons for his dismissal was the Snoop Dogg campaign.
In my opinion, Solo is saying, with a straight face, that the brand awareness campaign it started in November 2023 failed because it didn’t provide a revenue lift within six weeks. Six. Weeks. Solo probably hadn’t even paid the agency’s bill yet.
Solo brings back Snoop Dogg
Cut to August 2024, and the Martin Agency has launched a new Snoop Dogg promotion — Blunt Marketing — with a completely different take.
Arguably pulling a page from the Ryan Reynolds brand of creativity, the new Snoop spot is a straightforward ad. Snoop, quite literally, says this is an ad for Solo stoves, you should purchase one, and the reason he’s doing it is because he’s an influencer.
Get it? That’s blunt marketing.
It’s a funny spot. Will it go viral like the last one that hid the product and focused on the humorous bit? Almost certainly not. Will it make Ad Age’s top spot list? That remains to be seen. Will it help move product, unlike the viral spot cited in the CEO’s departure? That’s the most important thing for Solo Brands.
Interestingly, part of that last question is no longer correct. Solo Brands now says something to the effect of, “Well, we actually misspoke in our press release. We did see a sales lift from the viral Snoop ad.” But, they said, “Maybe it wasn’t as intentional as it could have been.”
Solo lesson for all marketers
What can you learn from this Snoop-Solo Brands marketing?
In January, I said Solo Brands had a brilliant concept and an amazing, differentiating story told by an exceptional influencer connected to nothing in the customer’s journey. Yet all the links in the campaign took viewers to Solo Brands’ boring e-commerce storefront. It worked well if you wanted to buy a stove, but not so well for understanding why you might want to buy a stove. I lamented the company had removed Snoop Dogg from the rest of the story to foster a connected experience.
Of course, they didn’t listen to me; it was just good sense from the beginning. But now they seem to have done it.
The new video’s call to action goes to a specially designed part of Solo Brands’ website that pulls the creative, the tone, and everything else to motivate sales. They even created the Snoop edition fire pit.
The best part? The first thing that appears is a sign-up form to get more information by email.
It’s like I said earlier this year. What’s the next best action you want the customer to take once you’ve gotten their attention through an ad, social media post, video, etc.? I don’t mean “next-best,” as in not as good, but rather, the best experience you want a person to have next. Then, you must connect that to your content. After all, you have the audience in your theater; you should hold them there.
Solo Brands addressed this in its new campaign. Hindsight being 20/20, it would have been amazing to directly connect the innovative viral campaign from Snoop to a “best next” action, such as a “stay-tuned-for-the-next-episode” campaign like this one.
But overall, let me be blunt: Solo Brands seems to finally be on fire with its marketing.
Want more content marketing tips, insights, and examples? Subscribe to workday or weekly emails from CMI.
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
Most brands understand what it takes to deliver a satisfying content experience — or think they do.
But what your brand believes will compel engagement may not align with what works for your audience.
When gauging value, the audience’s perception is reality. If your content experience doesn’t deliver at someone’s first point of entry, you may not get a second chance.
It takes organization-wide alignment to meet audience expectations. Here’s how to help everyone understand the assignment.
Disconnects breed consumer discontent
An effective content experience should draw casual audience interest — and gradually transform it into trusted and enduring customer relationships.
However, that trajectory can get disrupted when siloed functions independently manage specific components of the experience.
If these content partners don’t understand your audience’s intentions and motivations, they can conflate their messaging priorities and marketing goals with the audience’s needs and concerns.
That’s why Cupid PR co-founder Mark McShane says, “Every good communication starts not with the message you want to send, but with a deep-rooted understanding of what your audience already thinks, feels, needs, and wants.”
Audiences can tell when experiences — or their content components — are built to drive the business’s goals rather than address their challenges.
Align your audience lens
Viewing every decision through the lens of audience understanding is essential, says Steve Pritchard, managing director at It Works Media. An enterprise-wide process that combines multimodal research with performance data analysis can sharpen that understanding. “Telling a story through your brand will only come naturally when all content functions have direct, well-aligned knowledge of what makes your audience tick,” Steve says.
Use direct feedback to humanize your audience
Ricci Masero, marketing manager at Intellek, points to a few data-driven signs that indicate when you’re not on the same page as your audience: “Engagement plummets, people bail shortly after landing on your offerings, and conversions become few and far between.”
But you can’t get a complete picture from metrics alone. Diana Zheng, head of marketing at Stallion Express, says platform metrics can give brands a false or incomplete view of engagement.
While these metrics pinpoint surface-level behaviors and patterns, they do little to illuminate the interactions’ underlying causes or contexts. And those insights are critical to decision-making.
Diana and Ricci both recommend combining quantitative analyses with direct feedback mechanisms to enhance your understanding of your audience.
“Surveys, focus groups, and user testing pull back the curtain on their motivations, pain points, and decision frameworks,” Ricci says. “Layering that with quantitative data patterns will give you a 3D view of your customers, which you can then share with your functional content partners.”
‘Seamless’ starts with bridging siloed strategies
Understanding your audience is invaluable. But transforming every moment of engagement into an opportunity for deeper connection takes strategic orchestration of all your content touchpoints.
For many enterprise brands, this requires rethinking how to architect the experience. Rather than siloed steps along a path, content experiences should be networks of valuable, contextually resonant insights — no matter where, when, or how a customer initiates contact.
Seamlessly connecting every brand asset and interaction point is a big nut to crack.
When I spoke with CMI’s Robert Rose, he recommended auditing your existing experiences first. The data may reveal insights into your audience’s primary interests, which can help you set focal priorities across your organization. Robert asserts that this will help you align on the direction and set manageable schedules so you’re not reengineering everything at once.
Onboard your collaborators
You’ll need to involve and prepare your cross-functional partners (such as sales, comms, and other teams who collaborate on content) to co-create a cohesive experience. As Ricci notes, every player needs to understand their responsibilities and how their roles in the audience journey fit together.
Journey map it
Cupid PR’s Mark McShane suggests creating integrated customer journey maps to illuminate audience needs that your collaborators may not be aware of. The maps should include all touchpoints and the intended experience at each stage of the journey.
“This might identify opportunity gaps — places where the experience might frustrate or overwhelm customers, or where obstacles and delays occur,” he says.
Establish workflows and communications channels
Next, establish efficient workflows and clear lines of communication. Make sure all involved teams have input into the strategic direction and understand the execution process. These steps can help neutralize the friction and resistance that commonly occur in sweeping organizational changes.
While your teams may be reluctant to reach across the aisle and work outside their comfort zones, doing so is essential to delivering a cohesive and compelling content experience.
Maxwell Pollock, former content marketing specialist at Memora Health, says, “(You) have to do it, and (you) have to incorporate all the required efforts into your workflows.”
The collaborative process will be helpful for developing and deploying the audience experience.
Maxwell notes that his team built a content library that streamlined their brand’s cross-functional collaborations. “It’s made it much easier for sales to access our content to fuel their purposes. It’s also sparking valuable conversations among our teams in a direct, mission-focused way,” he says.
Establish consistent quality and user experience standards
Set enterprise-wide content quality and value standards. Without alignment on your brand’s tone, style, and voice, you risk confusing people as they move from touchpoint to touchpoint.
Maxwell suggests collaborating with key stakeholders to develop a company-wide editorial style guide.
“It ensures that our clients receive a consistent, high-quality content experience from our brand across all our different platforms and content types,” he says.
In addition to content quality, consider setting usability guidelines. Make it easy for consumers to find what they’re looking for and move on to the next step, no matter where they enter your brand’s experience.
Stallion Express’ Diana Zheng suggests focusing on these user-experience considerations to ensure positive interactions and improve customer satisfaction:
Her tip: Make navigation more useful by organizing content based on your visitors’ most common challenges, not by content formats (e.g., videos, white papers, blog posts), use cases, or target verticals. Those structural approaches better address your brand’s priorities and assumptions than your customers’ practical needs and preferences.
Monitor, test, learn, and experiment
As you rebuild your experience under a more customer-centric vision, don’t overlook the value of testing and experimentation. The digital space constantly changes, and the popularity of platforms, technologies, and trends can wax and wane with little warning.
You may have to test new strategies and pivot as new insights and opportunities emerge. Those opportunities will flow more consistently if monitoring your customer feedback channels is an integrated component of your content experience workflow.
Capitalizing on any opportunities you discover also requires the will — and operational agility — to try new ideas.
Embracing experimentation has become a core tenet of Cupid PR’s approach, according to Mark McShane. “It’s about finding what works and doubling down,” he says, “but also constantly asking, ‘I wonder if …?’”
Brands win when their content experiences offer value their audiences appreciate. To deliver on that goal, your entire organization must work from a unified strategy aligned to their vision of success at every step of the journey.
A version of this article originally appeared in the March 2024 edition of Chief Content Officer.
Get more advice from Chief Content Officer, a monthly publication for content leaders. Subscribe today to get it in your inbox.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
Strategy consultants and agencies often get a bad rap.
Sometimes they deserve it. But sometimes they don’t.
The cliché (and some stereotypes exist for a reason) is that consultants and agencies recommend strategies the business can’t implement. The proposed changes might be too complex, disruptive, expensive, or lengthy, making them impractical.
Sure, consultants often suggest a phased or a “crawl, walk, run” approach. Even then, management may not be fully on board, the team may not be excited about it, or it all seems so different that doubt about the strategy’s value creeps in.
You may have heard jokes based on this experience. One says marketing strategies are measured by the weight of the report (a variation says by how loud of a thump they make on a desk when dropped from a certain height). Another is that marketing leaders in companies have bookshelves lined with strategies that never got implemented.
Why does this happen? Marketing teams often complain that the consultant didn’t understand the realities of their situation (or even the assignment). Consultants and agencies claim the client “doesn’t get it” or “wasn’t ready for an optimal strategy.”
And there’s the word: optimal.
You see, in these situations, both sides are correct, and both are wrong.
The author of this optimal strategy probably didn’t understand the realities of the marketing team’s situation or history. And the marketing team probably wasn’t ready or able to execute the optimal strategy as constructed.
Here’s the thing: No strategy consultant or agency would develop a suboptimal strategy to account for the client’s current capabilities. After all, no client has ever gone to a consultant or agency and said, “Forget optimal. We’re not that talented. We need the just-good-enough plan.”
The mistake is in assuming that the optimal strategy is always better than “good enough.”
Sometimes it’s not.
Does culture really eat strategy for breakfast?
I worked with a marketing team of 30 people at a technology company not long ago. Most team members have been at the company for years and have developed a specific way of working together.
Two marketing leaders left recently, and two new leaders came in.
The new leaders wanted new processes, workflows, and measurement approaches to manage all the moving parts of their digital marketing. And they took a top-down approach to implement these changes.
Narrator: “It didn’t turn out well.”
When I reviewed their plan, I found it beautifully designed. It was right. The strategy was sound. It was optimal.
But the team couldn’t seem to execute on it.
Why? Well, it was so much change and such a different way of working that it simply overwhelmed the team.
Some people didn’t buy into the plan. Some bought in but didn’t feel empowered to make some of the required decisions. And some were so busy keeping things going that they couldn’t see themselves devoting time to learning an entirely new way of working.
It was a perfect example of the famous quote attributed to business guru Peter Drucker: “Culture eats strategy for breakfast.”
Drucker didn’t say those exact words (though he said something relatively close). Regardless, that saying is often misconstrued to paint culture as an impediment to optimal strategy.
He believed that implementing strategy depended on making sure that the people involved would change their habits to accommodate it. And, as he wrote, “Changing behavior works only if it can be based on the existing ‘culture.’”
Story map your better plan
Developing the optimal strategic plan is important. Different people will have ideas about what “optimal” looks like. But shooting for the right plan — independent of limitations, current capabilities, or culture — is the best place to start.
But what comes next is the most important.
When you review the plan, map out what would work best. You might need to take it more slowly or remove elements to make it achievable.
You have to take the time and effort to understand how to improve the “optimal” plan by scaling it back, changing it, or molding it to your current situation.
In my book Content Marketing Strategy, I explain the story-mapping approach I’ve used to do this with my clients for years. It involves reviewing any optimal strategy and then working to find out what makes it realistic — and ultimately better — by reducing its optimization.
Here’s how it works, in a nutshell.
Let yourself feel the uncertainty. It’s usually not the uncertainty of the “big hairy audacious goal’s” success that provokes anxiety — it’s the emotions that overwhelm people. Let yourself feel it. List all the things that scare you and could go wrong. Then, list those that could go right or spark joy. Then, acknowledge that the future is uncertain. You can’t control how you’ll feel, but you can control how you’ll react.
Map everything out. Start with describing what success would look like. Then, ask yourself: “What needs to be true for that success to be realized?” Write it all down. It might still be overwhelming, but you’ll be surprised how settling this step can be.
Prepare for different outcomes and contexts. Look at your list of what needs to be true and ask yourself what might get in the way. List everything. Then ask, “Which are the big things?” In other words, which things — if not settled — would wreck the foundation of the whole project?
Now that you’ve defined priorities (and not priorities), you can use them to make the plan more realistic, achievable, or believable for the teams affected.
When I ran this process for my technology company client, they compromised on some top-down new processes. Was it necessary to have a new fixed process for this thing that wasn’t really broken? It seemed optimal on paper, but the disruption might outweigh the benefit.
In de-optimizing the strategy, the team made it better. And it works well today.
People aren’t machines
Thinking of business as a machine that needs to be tuned is a metaphorical trap. Organizations are collections of people who perform best when nurtured.
Today’s marketing teams don’t thrive because they’ve been optimized with mechanical adjustments. They thrive when their success is cultivated through relationships and shared purpose.
Sometimes, you can (and should) opt out of optimization.
It’s your story. Tell it well
Robert Rose consults and hosts workshops on helping marketing teams align their marketing processes to all kinds of technologies – including generative AI. Contact him to learn about those programs.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
Online reviews are a gold mine for marketers, and fortunately for you, the gold keeps growing.
Just four years ago, the volume of online reviews surged 87% year over year, according to McKinsey research. While the growth may have slowed, it hasn’t stopped and is expected to intensify.
And all that online feedback is tied to revenue. McKinsey found that even small gains in a product’s star rating can result in increased sales.
But for marketers, a different kind of gold can be discovered in those reviews – the power to discern potential needs and improvements to their messaging and products.
Think of ratings and reviews as unfiltered focus groups with tens of thousands of users. Reviews, Gautam says, provide granular measures of consumer preferences to assess answers to questions such as:
What marketing claims are resonating with my customers?
How can we benchmark against competitors and use competitor consumer data?
What are the common complaints across a category?
By analyzing the reviews to answer those questions, you can improve your marketing claims and optimize product detail pages and campaigns immediately. By analyzing your competitors’ reviews, you can develop updates and new iterations of your products in the likely 12- to 18-month cycle. Assessing common complaints in the category could open your brand’s eyes to innovate new products in a similar timeframe.
Example: Tylenol updates product label in response to reviews
Tylenol sells acetaminophen in Dissolve Packs – the product can be placed directly in the consumer’s mouth, where it dissolves on the tongue. Yet, what do many consumers do when they open a pack of powder? They add it to a glass of water where it sits on top and doesn’t dissolve.
Tylenol discovered consumers’ confusion after reading product reviews. Customers would leave comments such as, “This product doesn’t work. No matter how much water I poured onto it, no matter how much I shake, nothing is happening.”
While the original package included the text, “No Water Needed,” the print was small, and consumers weren’t paying attention to it. So, Tylenol updated the messaging, showing a water bottle with a line through it accompanied by the words, “Fast and effective pain relief. No water needed.”
Gautam says that this change has eliminated complaints about the product not dissolving. It also resulted in an increase in the product’s average star rating, which leads to more impressions, higher conversion rates, and more sales.
Example: Rating data clues Estée Lauder into reaction to formula change
Gautam collected rating data for night repair skin care products. He assessed more than 86,000 ratings from six sources, including Sephora, ULTA, and Nordstrom, for similar products from Estée Lauder and Clarins. The analysis revealed a drop in ratings for Estée Lauder when it changed the product’s formula. It went from a high of 4.8 out of 5 stars in the second quarter of 2022 to a low of 4.2 stars a year later, while Clarins held relatively steady around 4.4 stars.
The cosmetics industry relies on consumers who repeat purchases of infrequently purchased products like night cream. “If someone who’s used to purchasing this product has a negative experience [with the new formulation], it’s going to cause them to purchase something else the next time,” he says.
Now, Estée Lauder knows how consumers reacted to its formula change and can assess what, if any, product changes it wants to make going forward.
Example: Scünci, maker of scrunchies, analyzes marketing claim
Hair accessory brand Scünci makes marketing claims focused on the durability of its scrunchies — that they last longer than other brands. Gautam analyzed the reviews that mentioned durability and calculated their average ratings. Scünci’s durability-focused reviews averaged 3.26 out of 5, while reviews mentioning durability for all related manufacturers had an average score of 3.81.
Those findings prompted Gautam to say Scünci’s marketing claim around durability may need to be adjusted. If consumers buy the product for its durability and it falls short, their negative experience may lead to a poor online review.
“So maybe you have to reframe what you’re focusing on, what you say you’re best at, or two, this is a priority that has to be sent to the product team to kind of make improvements to understand what’s happening or probably a combination of the two,” Gautam says.
How to start analyzing reviews
Though the value of assessing online reviews is great, McKinsey notes that few companies have programs dedicated to the effort. Even if you don’t have the resources to devote a full-time person or team to customer review analysis, you should take some time to glean the benefits.
A team member with analysis experience could review the data manually to answer simple questions such as “Have our reviews improved since changing our formula last quarter? and “What is the most common keyword in our 1-star reviews?” To make the manual assessment more manageable, use a smaller scope of data.
If you can devote more resources, licensing or building an AI-powered tool can be helpful. It will give insight more quickly, deepen the analysis, allow for filters, and create competitive data sets. Among the sample questions to consider: “Are we focusing on the right things in our product description pages and marketing? and “How does time of year impact consumer opinions in our product’s sugar content?”
Gather B2B consumer data
Gautam’s examples focused on B2C brands, but the process works similarly for B2B brands, too. I once helped establish a ratings and review program for a B2B software company. Here’s how you can get started:
Enable customers to leave ratings and reviews on your website (e.g., product pages). Helpful tools include Trustpilot and TrustRadius.
Publish your average ratings and customer reviews on your website.
Claim your product listings on review sites like G2, Capterra, and Gartner Peer Insights.
Work with internal teams (e.g., sales, customer success, customer support) to invite customers to leave ratings and reviews on your website and on external review sites.
Monitor and review the ratings and reviews. Escalate any observed issues to the appropriate team or executive.
Share product feedback from reviews with product teams.
Go for the gold
Whether B2C or B2B, ratings and reviews offer a gold mine of data. Use Gautam’s insights to start your ratings/review program or take an existing program to the next level. It can be a great opportunity to increase the marketing team’s value throughout your organization. Let me know how it goes, and I might leave you a 5-star rating.
All tools mentioned in this article were suggested by the author. If you’d like to suggest a tool, share the article on social media with a comment.
In a crowded marketplace, influencer marketing ranks as an effective strategy for brands to reach new audiences.
Yet, many marketers, whether in B2B or B2C, still equate influencer marketing with A-list celebrity promotion. Think Salesforce enlisting Matthew McConaughey to fight for AI and customer data privacy. Or model Hailey Bieber, wife of singer Justin Bieber, showing up in an Erewhon grocery Instagram story to talk about a great smoothie.
But for every big celebrity, hundreds of influencers work with companies of all sizes. Recent research from Influencer Marketing Hub finds that 26% of U.S.-based companies spend more than 40% of their total marketing budget on influencers.
Interestingly, another research report finds that nano influencers — those with fewer than 10,000 followers — yield a better ROI than some of the A-list celebrities.
Is it better to go with a few big, expensive influencers or do you go with many smaller, inexpensive influencers?
We took the question to CMI’s chief strategy advisor, Robert Rose, for his take. He also adds a wrinkle to the dilemma. Read on or watch the video to see what he’s talking about:
Influencer marketing wrinkles smoothed by AI
What happens if the influencer goes rogue? What if they spew heated political rhetoric? Or what if they talk about your competitors and have a toxic moment?
Managing a portfolio of influencers can mean managing a diverse range of thinking. But it also means you get a diverse set of actions, and some of them may not be in your brand’s best interest.
This week, an article in The New York Times discussed the growing trend of brands using AI tools to scan social media influencers’ content and grade how likely they are to share strong political opinions on their channels.
In this divisive atmosphere, brands of all kinds have shied away from getting political out of fear of offending the very consumers they want to attract. So, an AI tool that can assess the potential of political conversations can be immensely helpful.
That’s especially true, given the growing impact of influencer marketing. The Times article reports on a July House Judiciary Committee hearing in which a representative from WPP, the world’s largest advertising agency, disclosed that news media ad buys — historically, a major recipient of ad revenue — make up less than 5% of its overall ad spending.
Just last week, X and its mercurial CEO Elon Musk decided to sue GARM, a nonprofit amalgamation of consumer brands that banded together to say they aren’t advertising on the X platform any longer. That’s one way to handle this influencer challenge: Stop supporting the platforms where your brand’s content could appear next to things antithetical to your company’s focus.
However, the AI grading approach is also intriguing. It puts an interesting lens on what it means to be an influencer these days. If this technology can predict the likelihood of influencers to espouse their political beliefs, it can also analyze just about any other type of content.
To me, this creates an intriguing tension where the world of AI, influencer marketing, and brand safety come full circle.
Pick many smaller or one big influencer?
Influencers are often influencers because they move back and forth fluidly between a transparency and/or at least a filtered view of their private lives. They live in public with multiple brands and more performative types of activities. But today’s G-rated influencer who shows off their family and is good for promoting a kid’s brand is tomorrow’s not-safe-for-work celebrity who ends up getting arrested for something.
Increasingly, influencers will have to monitor their brands more tightly. And brands will be more judicious about who they work with.
So, back to the initial question: Do you manage 100 influencers where one of them is bound to go rogue and do something stupid? Or do you put all your eggs into one influencer basket and do the necessary background research and ongoing monitoring to ensure that they are a good spokesperson for the brand?
The answer isn’t terribly clear. But given the advent of the tools that can calculate scores and historical information about influencers, it won’t be long until you can look at a report and see not just an influencer’s current rating and brand safety grade but all the times they’ve gone out of the box.
What I do know is that influencer marketing is growing and should be an important part of your go-to-market plan. Working with recognizable human and influential faces will be increasingly important as AI pervades the content ecosystem.
But just like media buying and assessing brand safety have become specialized skills, so are engaging, managing, and measuring influencer programs. Who does that for your brand? Do they have the necessary framework, standards, and measurement approach for your company? Those are the meaningful challenges in the months ahead.
Want more content marketing tips, insights, and examples? Subscribe to workday or weekly emails from CMI.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
You don’t just create content for the sake of the audience.
You’re a marketer. You create content to ultimately drive profitable customer action. (It’s right in the definition, after all.)
How do you create content that converts? We turned to the experts presenting at Content Marketing World for their best tip. Interestingly, they had different ideas of what to put at the top of your list (and one person’s best tip is to create content that doesn’t convert).
Read on for the 21 top takes related to audiences, content, and business.
Revolve around the audience
By definition, successful content marketing attracts and retains a clearly defined audience. That’s why these experts’ best advice centers around the consumers of your content.
Deliver solutions
Know your audience and their problems. Create content that solves these problems. — Royna Sharifi, senior marketing campaign manager, Amazon Web Services
Solve the unsolvable
Give your audience solutions to challenges they can’t otherwise solve. Your solution doesn’t need to solve 100% of their challenge. Solve maybe 85% of it and make your call to action an invitation to complete the remaining 15%. — Dennis Shiao, founder, Attention Retention
Make them care
Make it all about the person it’s written to help. If your content does not answer “what’s in it for me,” then people won’t care. If you write a case study all about your brand, written in your brand voice, featuring your brand messaging, it won’t be persuasive. But when you publish a case study with direct quotes from the happy customer whose experience you’re sharing, that will actually connect with your buyer. — Erika Heald, founder and chief content officer, Erika Heald Marketing Consulting
Contemplate avoidance
Before you write your first word, think about why someone would not want to do what you’re about to ask them to. As marketers, we often dwell on all the reasons why someone should click, call, or buy. And that’s fine. Helpful, even. But the real question is, why might they not?
That’s what allows us to craft content that converts and addresses those buying barriers at the moment before they take root and spread like conversion-killing kudzu. Once you’ve identified the one or two most likely barriers to success, then you look for the best behavioral science tactics to overcome them.
Behavioral science offers marketers ways to prompt decision-making shortcuts — automatic responses to certain situations. Is your big buying barrier price? Test anchoring or magnitude encoding effect to overcome it. Is it low brand awareness? Consider social proof or the authority principle. Remember, people’s decisions are often influenced by these hardwired behaviors. So, add the appropriate triggers to your content and watch your conversions soar. — Nancy Harhut, chief creative officer, HBT Marketing
Give the answers they seek
To improve conversion rates, you must create content that answers your customers’ questions. Find out what they’re searching for with customer research (i.e., talk to your customers) and give them direct answers on pages formatted for clarity.
Keep your sentences short and simple. Include calls to action (CTAs) that align with their expectations. In other words, give them the next step that they want. Try not to force them down a path that feels uncomfortable to them or premature. Meet them where they are. — Dale Bertrand, president, Fire&Spark
Be deliberate
No more random acts of content! While a person’s individual content journey is never linear, I’m amazed how many content teams today still create content without thinking about their overall audience’s journey. How does your audience find the content? What do you want them to do next? What other assets might be related to the one you just published? How do they connect? It seems so simple, yet it’s often the thing people forget to do that can make the biggest impact. — Amy Higgins, director, content strategy, Cloudflare
Scrutinize your content
Content is the star, but it requires you and the team to make it shine. Follow these tips to make your content sparkle with conversions.
Stick to the definition
Create content that is compelling, useful, and relevant to your users. This is the best way to connect to them, answer their questions, stay on your site, and then have them convert on your site. — Zack Kadish, senior SEO strategy director, Conductor
Do these two words
Talk human. — Tony Byrne, founder, Real Story Group
Practical content written by a human (not AI) is one type that many audiences seem to appreciate. You definitely want to avoid sounding like everyone else when you create content. That’s why a human touch is more important than ever. It helps you stand out in a sea of sameness. — Michelle Garrett, consultant and writer, Garrett Public Relations
Tell a story
Everyone seems to be very excited about producing short-form videos. The truth is those short-form videos are raising awareness, but they’re not the best for conversion. When you build a video strategy, you need to consider all phases of your funnel or flywheel and produce videos for each one. I still can’t think of any video that helps convert more than a good testimonial that tells a customer/client’s story. — Tony Gnau, chief storytelling officer, T60 Productions and T60 Health
Helpful tops fun
From the start, winning the online content race is a matter of posting things that are fun, interesting, or useful. Fun is fleeting. Comedy is much harder than it looks. Interesting is better, but with so much out there, it’s a continuous struggle for the latest and greatest, and you end up being a news organization. Useful wins the day. Answer a question, solve a problem, or give somebody an application that does something for them. — Jim Sterne, president, Target Marketing of Santa Barbara
Design it for function
You need a great image and headline to pull in, clear calls to action within the content, and a simple UX to help readers that might want to dig deeper before taking that next step. — Jenn VandeZande, editor-in-chief, SAP CX + Industries
Follow this path
All content that converts in the modern era needs to embrace what I refer to as the conscious growth pathways, tapping into the 4 Es — experiential, educational, entertaining, and empowering.
Most consumers, businesses, and audiences don’t care about how it looks or sounds anymore as much as they care about how it makes them feel. We live in a world now where a video with a CEO in a graphic T-shirt in his car now converts seven times more than a high-production 4K video with graphics and perfect lighting and sound on the same distribution channel.
Content needs to embrace the 4 Es and be relatable, authentic, and less about selling or forcing action and more about presenting value that guides the consumer to choose action on their own. If one can harness that regardless of content type and medium it will eventually do well. —Troy Sandidge, founder, Strategy Hackers
Stop hawking
Don’t sell your product. I know that sounds counterproductive, but one of the key parts of content marketing is making sure your audience doesn’t feel like they’re being sold something. They’ll see through that right away. Give them content that connects them to you, as well as your company and its values. The more connected they feel to you, the more trusted you become, and the more likely you are to convert. — Beth Elderkin, content marketing manager, Informa Connect
Create without conversion goal
My biggest tip is to also create content that doesn’t convert. You can give without strings attached all the time. The resulting action for you is the learning you can gain from the data of that content. Are people reading it? How long is it sitting on the right path of the customer journey? Can I make it exclusive for my own committed first-party data? — Michael Bonfils, global managing director, Digital International Group
Spark cohesive experiences
Make your content a joy to experience, not just a joy to read. We know from the recent Google leak that how long someone spends on your web page and what they do while visiting matters. On-page engagement directly influences your ranking, so content that converts impacts more than your bottom line.
Ensure your content is visually attractive. Does it breathe? Now, make sure the ask relates to the intent of the content topic. We’ve all had the equivalent experience of reading an article about the Top 10 Kid-Free Things to Do in Gatlinburg and then being asked to schedule a teeth cleaning at a Gatlinburg dentist. Uh, mismatch. No action from these pearly whites. So, work on your curb appeal, then match your ask with your info. — Haley Collins, director of operations, GPO
Think business
You’ve thought about the audience and the content, now it’s time to ramp up the profitable action game — what you want the audience to do after consuming the content. Use these insights to identify your business priorities.
Be straightforward
When crafting your calls to action, carefully consider the desired action you want your audience to take and make it easy for them to engage with or follow through. — Pam Didner, vice president of marketing, Relentless Pursuit, LLC
Know what’s next
Before creating any piece of content, get clear on the purpose and explicitly articulate what you hope consumers will do next. Often, you know this on some deep level, but without bringing it to the top of mind during production, it’s easy to lose sight of the action you’re trying to create. When you remind yourself of your purpose at the start of content creation, you can ensure that you’re keeping that purpose at the center of what you’re creating. — Melanie Deziel, co-founder, CreatorKitchen.com
Think on and off
Make the call to action the next natural step — even if that step is offline. Call, click, contact CTAs are effective, but inviting the visitor to engage person to person, such as attending an event, offers an experience and not just a transaction. It shows that you support the user’s entire journey well before they are ready to commit. — Mariah Obiedzinski Tang, assistant vice president of content marketing, Stamats
Start with end in mind
Content converts because it’s relevant and valuable. Before you create anything, have a solid understanding of your strategic goals, know your specific audience, and figure out what problems of theirs you can solve or what questions you can answer. Then, think about the content format and channel that is best suited to deliver that content. And, of course, be sure to track and measure so you know if it worked. — Brian Piper, director of content strategy and assessment, University of Rochester
Go for their motivation
Several different types of customer actions could be desired as part of your content marketing strategy. Whether you want your audience to click a link, share information about your brand, or contact your company, think about their behavior patterns. What inspires them to act?
Your audience cannot take action if they don’t have something they will react to. Your message, visuals, format, and distribution channels must cause an emotional reaction for your audience to act. Emotion causes a reaction, which causes action. In addition to enticing visuals and messaging, you must include a clear and compelling call to action to guide your audience toward the desired behavior. — Andi Robinson, content strategist, Hijinx Marketing
Turn content into the ultimate profitable action
With this expert advice, you’re even more ready to live the definition of content marketing and convert your audiences so they do good for business. Whether it’s a tweak to your content or a major change in your strategy, always keep your eye on the profitable actions.
Register to attend Content Marketing World in San Diego. Use the code BLOG100 to save $100. Can’t attend in person this year? Check out the Digital Pass for access to on-demand session recordings from the live event through the end of the year.
MORE ADVICE FROM CMWORLD SPEAKERS:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
Does every “new” show, series, and film you watch these days seem like something you’ve seen before?
You’re not experiencing déjà vu, and Hollywood (probably) isn’t out of ideas. You’re seeing why sequels, prequels, reboots, and reunion shows have taken over your content channels: Storytelling around instantly recognizable themes has built-in resonance.
Humans evolved through our skill at identifying and categorizing patterns of information for easy understanding. It helped our ancestors learn to stay out of danger and led to the development of shared language — a way to communicate experiences so others could benefit.
It’s also why practically every story written can be classified into one of seven narrative patterns or archetypes. They may be ancient, but they haven’t lost their ability to engage and inspire audiences.
Let’s look at what makes these storytelling staples ideal foundations for creating engaging, relatable, and memorable content.
7 archetypes of storytelling
You’ll undoubtedly recognize these classic story patterns by their definitions and use in popular entertainment properties. But they’re also featured prominently in marketing content that aims to forge an emotional connection.
Stories built on these archetypes serve as parables and rely on literary devices like allegory and symbolism. That makes them best suited to immersive formats like film and video and most used in consumer-friendly efforts.
But, as you’ll see in these examples, that doesn’t mean their benefits are exclusive to B2C brands or visually rich campaigns.
1. The quest
Like the hero’s journey, quests feature a protagonist who must overcome a series of obstacles to acquire an important object or reach a desired destination.
Classic movie examples: Monty Python and the Holy Grail, Squid Game
Brands see the merits of building content on this archetypical structure and use the quest structure often. After all, content marketing entails helping audiences complete their quests for success.
Grainger: The Job You Want
All jobs have their challenges. But conquering them is a taller order for some workers than others. Just ask Jenna Stokes, a Grainger wind turbine technician who’s afraid of heights.
Jenna’s job repairing turbines requires her to climb towers up to 328 feet tall. To succeed in her chosen field, she must find a way to manage her acrophobia. So, how — and why — does she do it?
Those answers can be found in Grainger’s The Job You Want, a series of videos in which the company’s workers share their passion for their jobs and describe what makes their trade an exciting and fulfilling career option.
In her episode, Jenna says she relies on her safety equipment and draws strength from her team of skilled technicians. As the conversation is set against dizzying images of workers standing on top of a turbine overlooking the New Mexico desert, it’s easy to see why that support is critical to fulfilling her ambitious quest.
Jenna details the technical aspects of her craft, such as the types of repairs her team handles and the skill and knowledge required. She also walks viewers through a typical workday, which includes a debrief on the team’s plan for the day, the potential hazards, and the energy she feels when she accomplishes the work.
Industrial supply companies like Grainger face a severe shortage of skilled trade labor. By producing this series for its Grainger Everyday Heroes initiative, the company hopes to motivate more young workers to pursue rewarding careers as technicians.
2. Overcoming the monster
An unlikely hero is challenged by an antagonistic foe they are ill-equipped to fight. Through their experience, they gain the courage, knowledge, or strength to defeat it.
Classic movie examples: Jaws, Harry Potter series
In underdog tales, the monster doesn’t have to be a supernatural creature or fictional evildoer, and the hero may not even be a person. For example, the story can center on a solution that conquers a real-world pain point or a metaphoric representation of an intimidating obstacle.
But no matter the characters’ form, these stories present an opportunity to cast your brand and its customers as conquering heroes.
Dramamine: The Last Barf Bag
For those who experience motion sickness, the agony of nausea-inducing travel is often debilitating. Thanks to effective medications like Dramamine, fewer consumers struggle with that monster of a problem.
Yet, in helping people conquer nausea, other marketplace challenges bubbled up: Manufacturers of barf bags lost business, and a pleasurable hobby was taken away from those who collect them.
Dramamine’s documentary, The Last Barf Bag, holds nothing back as it explores the brand’s impact on all three groups. Interview clips of the brand’s marketing and R & D teams speak to the positive effects Dramamine has had on customers’ lives. Yet, their enthusiasm is tempered by data visualizations that map the company’s growth against the decline of barf bags and stories from proud collectors lamenting the demise of their favorite artistic medium.
The film’s vivid descriptions might make you a little queasy. But if you can stomach it, stick around to the end to see some clever repurposing ideas. It’s a fitting end that illustrates the brand’s commitment to making everyone’s journeys more comfortable.
3. Rags to riches
A protagonist who comes from humble beginnings or holds untapped potential acquires great power, knowledge, or riches. Initially, they struggle under the weight of their heightened position. But they ultimately learn valuable lessons that change them (or the world at large) for the better.
Classic movie examples: Trading Places, Slumdog Millionaire
While the monster archetype is about overcoming an external enemy, the dramatic struggle is primarily internal in a rags-to-riches tale: The main character must battle with themself or their circumstances to rise above their station and serve as an example to others.
Air Jordan: Grandma’s Driveway
Tales of corporate leaders who ascended from mailroom to boardroom and entrepreneurs who built billion-dollar businesses on an ambitious dream abound. But few are told by the subject’s grandma.
For professional BMX athletes, the career path is paved with hard, unyielding cement and plenty of crash landings on top of it. That was the case for Nigel Sylvester, who grew up riding at his grandmother’s home in Queens, New York.
Through hard work and determination, he ascended to become a top professional in the sport. In his grandmother’s view, her driveway was the launchpad for that success.
In this ad for the Air Jordan 4 RM sneaker, “Grandma” (played by Jo Marie Payton) shares her memories of Nigel ceaselessly practicing bicycle stunts on her driveway. She notes his lifelong passion for the sport and his determination to try again after every crash, illustrated in home movie clips and images of his scars and scrapes.
By connecting his past to his present , Nigel’s rags-to-riches story feels personal and broadly relatable. The same might be said for the 4 RM sneakers he co-designed and developed: According to Ad Age, they use a shade of green leather that matches the fence around Grandma’s driveway.
4. Rebirth
An adversarial person or event drives a flawed main character to reflect on their actions. The experience compels them to achieve a more positive outcome by embracing redemptive change.
Classic movie examples: Groundhog’s Day, A Christmas Carol
Everyone makes mistakes. Consumers expect brands to own up to those errors and do better (or, at least, pledge to). Yet, doing so can put businesses at risk of losing face or, worse, hard-won trust.
A rebirth story can rehab a flagging reputation. It also helps reset expectations around your brand, industry, or corporation. By speaking out about known challenges — and the steps you’re taking (or have taken) to combat them — you can reestablish relevance to your audience and increase its trust. That makes rebirth stories an excellent fit for rebranding campaigns and thought leadership efforts.
e.l.f. Beauty: So Many Dicks
Beauty brand marketing is becoming more inclusive as consumers of all genders increasingly use cosmetics as a means of self-expression. e.l.f. Beauty’s So Many Dicks campaign aims to take the brand’s efforts to increase representation off of the cosmetics counter and into corporate boardrooms.
The campaign’s tagline is a clever, winking metaphor. Yet, e.l.f. wants its message to be taken seriously — and acted upon intentionally — to spark a rebirth in the way business decisions get made.
The campaign video explains the focal issue: “There are more men on U.S. corporate boards named Richard, Rich, or Dick than there are entire groups of underrepresented people. That’s a lot of Dicks — and not enough of everyone else.”
But this initiative isn’t just about representation. According to an Ad Age article, CMO Kory Marchisotto says it’s also about improving marketing effectiveness and business performance. When corporate decision-makers don’t reflect the diversity of their audience, they risk leaving real people out of their brand conversations and getting left behind by those potential customers.
So Many Dicks works as both a marketing initiative and a catalyst for a broader industry rebirth. This is because e.l.f. isn’t just asking for external change. It serves as an example of the benefits that can be achieved from such a transformation.
As the Ad Age article notes, e.l.f. is one of only four publicly traded U.S. companies with a board of directors comprising two-thirds women and one-third diverse representation. In the past five years, it’s also become the fastest-growing company listed on the New York Stock Exchange.
5. Voyage and return
The protagonist travels to a strange land, encountering unexpected characters, situations, and oppositional forces. Upon returning home, they realize they’ve been forever changed by the wisdom gained.
Classic movie examples: Oh Brother, Where Art Thou? and The Wizard of Oz
It can be easy to confuse this archetype with quests. Both share the theme of leaving the safety of home. But while a desired destination drives the plot of a quest-based tale, voyage-and-return stories are about the journey itself.
British Airways: May We Haveth One’s Attention
Airline carriers are in the business of providing customers with a mishap-free flight experience. But they can only do so much if passengers refuse to listen to or follow the rules explained at the beginning of every trip.
To help grab flyers’ attention (on and off the plane), British Airways produced a cabin safety video inspired by the drama and pageantry of popular period pieces like Netflix’s Bridgerton. If you’ve ever wondered who still needs help understanding how a seatbelt works or where the exits are, you have your answer.
In May We Haveth One’s Attention, old-world aristocrats marvel at the wonders of modern life — like cell phones and shoulder straps — as flight attendants demonstrate aviation’s standard safety features and passenger protocols.
The clever juxtaposition enables the carrier to show off first-class amenities like its Club World lie-flat seats while subtly communicating that all passengers must act responsibly and civilly when traveling by air.
Its fleet of planes may not be equipped to travel back in time, but the charming nod to Britain’s Georgian era takes its customers on a voyage that just might change their in-flight habits.
6. Comedy
Like other archetypes, comedies are tales in which a protagonist triumphs over adversity. But here, they are often thrust into surreal or unlikely scenarios and go to absurdly extreme lengths to work their way out.
Classic movie examples: The Big Lebowski, Ted Lasso
Content that makes audiences laugh isn’t just entertaining. It can serve marketing purposes across the funnel. For example, it can help small or newer brands draw big crowds, bring legacy brands back into the consideration mix, and fan the flames of passion-driven loyalty.
Surprisingly, though, this may be the toughest archetype to pull off. You need to find a unique idea or angle that’s also broadly relatable and easily understood. Your brand’s pitch can’t overwhelm the humorous payoff. And if your message, scripting, or timing is off, even a brilliantly conceived and executed effort can easily fall flat.
Beats by Dre: The Legend of Ricallen
A fine line exists for brands between skillfully telling a joke and clumsily becoming the butt of one. In The Legend of Ricallen, Beats by Dre dances around that line with the skill of a champion dressage horse.
The real-life friendship between Formula One racer Daniel Ricciardo and NFL quarterback Josh Allen is mined for comedy value in this parody that lovingly mocks the trend of celebrities who become business partners (think Ryan Reynolds and Rob McElhenney or Ryan Reynolds and Hugh Jackman).
As their bromance blossoms, the pair decide to do something crazy together: Buy a racehorse.
Lacking the budget for a thoroughbred and any recognizable horse sense doesn’t stop the duo from acquiring a “bargain horse,” they name Ricallen (a combination of their last names). As montage-friendly theme music plays through Beats speakers, they’re put through the paces of training Ricallen for the big race.
While they remained oblivious to their horse coming in last, the pair — and the Beats brand — still came out as winners: Beats created a special Ricallen edition of its Beats Studio Pro headphones for the duo. Fans of the campaign could buy Ricallen T-shirts and other swag (now sold out) on a dedicated microsite.
7. Tragedy
In the tragedy archetype, a flawed hero makes a choice or takes an action that ultimately leads to their undoing.
Classic movie examples: The Great Gatsby, Daenerys’ story arc in Game of Thrones
Commonly used to evoke pity or take a moral stance, tragedy might not seem the best fit for brand storytelling. But with the right creative approach, it can be a powerful tool for sharing vital information, such as guidance that helps protect consumers from harm.
WorkSafe: Umm
WorkSafe is the workplace health and safety regulator and injury insurer for the state of Victoria in southeast Australia. Its mission of worker advocacy is served well by the organization’s public service campaign, Umm.
Umm is anchored by educational videos that depict a quirky yellow mascot experiencing cringey workplace scenarios like bullying, sexual harassment, and a lack of proper safety gear.
For example, the video above shows the sympathetic mascot working in a fast-paced kitchen. Overwhelmed by the pressure to hurry up and finish a customer’s order, the mascot catches a kitchen towel on fire.
Distressed by this Umm-inducing incident, the character is unsure what to do next. The voiceover reassures viewers that these working conditions are unacceptable and should be reported, which they can do by contacting WorkSafe’s advisory service.
The videos depict worst-case scenarios, but the workplace violations that lead to them are commonly experienced by younger employees. The campaign empowers them to speak up and stop cringey and damaging behaviors before they become victimized as their fellow quirky mascot did.
Continue the legacy of relatable storytelling
The characters in your content don’t have to battle Voldemort or their instincts to benefit from these classic content archetypes. Whether you cast your brand or your customers as the story’s hero, you both stand to emerge victorious.
Register to attend Content Marketing World in San Diego. Use the code BLOG100 to save $100. Can’t attend in person this year? Check out the Digital Pass for access to on-demand session recordings from the live event through the end of the year.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
Both sayings suggest that success will always be a struggle. And if you’re not feeling the struggle, you should question whether you’re doing enough.
That’s a very unpleasant way of looking at life.
But once I read Vaden’s book, I took a different meaning from it. The phrase is part of what Vaden calls the “rent axiom.” Your success — whether in improving your health, creating a thriving business, or achieving financial security — isn’t a single destination. It’s a spectrum.
“No matter where you are on the spectrum of discipline,” Vaden writes, “you can improve and grow. Likewise, you also have some parts [already] figured out.”
In other words, he’s not saying permanent success isn’t achievable or that you have to struggle every day to attempt to get there. He’s saying that the rent due every day is the discipline to try to improve your situation — no matter where you are.
I like that worldview much better.
Renting success in marketing (again)
In a previous article, I explained why the shifting sands of modern content and marketing have some industry experts suggesting a “beyond the website” approach to content strategy.
I argued that the real driver of owned media content is to create differentiated ideas that make people believe.
That belief might persuade them to subscribe, purchase, donate, engage more deeply, or volunteer. But to earn those actions, you have to connect your owned media experiences (your newsletter, websites, blogs, etc.) to create an ecosystem of content that people will want to “live in,” not just visit when they have a product or service need.
Increasingly, however, methods for attracting those people to that ecosystem are changing. For years, marketers have used content to garner enough attention to earn a click from social or search back to an owned property.
But today, people who find your content on rented channels may not be offered anything to click on. You have to deliver value at that precise moment to be noticed and remembered.
Delivering valuable content experiences beyond your website is now imperative – and that’s putting increased pressure on marketers to revamp their “rented land” properties.
Let’s dig into this new model.
Optimizing for value impressions
Several smart people have helped refine my thinking about the overarching trends.
A recent post from Amanda Natividad at SparkToro compares the world’s largest traffic referrers (where marketers get traffic from) with the places where people consume content. Amanda makes the point that “modern content marketing means being present in the places where your audience pays attention, consumes content, and learns about the problems you solve.”
Put simply – it’s about learning where your audience spends time and delivering value to build trust there.
Now, layer that with Andy Crestodina’s recent LinkedIn post. This point stands out: “Write for any site where your audience may be spending time (even if the Domain Authority is low). It’s possible that most of your content should be on other websites.”
Finally, I return to my observations about how social media content consumption and usage have fundamentally changed. Social media use continues to grow, but “for you” algorithms mean that your follower (audience) size matters much less. Every post now has to compete — because you simply can’t depend on your “followers” to see your content like you used to.
So – what do all these trends indicate? The main implications include:
1. Offer value immediately
Offer content that quickly delivers value and optimize it for the platform to give it the best chance of organic reach. For most platforms, this means publishing within the walled garden and not linking to an external site. Look how Amanda Natividad wrote this product announcement on LinkedIn.
2. Broaden content distribution
Get your content (and, more specifically, the valuable ideas it expresses) into as many places as your audience consumes content. Now, achieving reach on third-party platforms has been a mandate since the earliest days of marketing.
But this isn’t a 30-second TV spot, a shoutout from social media, or a paid banner. Think long-form content on influencers’ platforms, with non-competitive partners, on social media, and even on retail media networks. For example, this Red Hat Linux educational video content has a significant presence on Amazon Web Services’ website. Pet food company Jinx is promoting a content marketing video campaign through paid search promotion on Walmart.com.
3. Go big with specific owned media assets
One approach commonly used in the content marketing of yesterday was to develop and package a “tentpole” piece (e.g., a research report, an e-book, or a white paper). Then, you’d design a promotional campaign around that asset and try to draw people in by using it as a lead magnet.
Now, you need a different approach. You’ll still create that big story. But you’ll also develop multiple platform-specific versions of it designed to deliver self-contained value. So, that extensive research report is now also shaped into various LinkedIn post-sized summaries. The e-book gets paired with an explainer video or webinar. The white paper gets a companion mini-course delivered through a partner’s website.
Make owned media the best next thing
Leaning heavily into rented land may feel uncomfortable. But that’s where the market — and the opportunity to get better — lies.
Still, I stand by this mantra: “Don’t build your home on rented land.”
Your owned media — where you control the display and targeting and ultimately build a direct relationship with your audience — should still be your program’s primary focus.
But it’s no longer the place to answer questions you pose on external platforms. Instead, it’s the place to provide the best next (and scarce) answer after you’ve addressed the original question on the external platform.
What do I mean by a “scarce” answer? Think of it this way: Previously, many marketers put frequently asked questions on their websites to try to rank in search. However, the new model is to give FAQ answers on external media and then link to what I call the rarely given answers on your website.
The rented success discipline remains the same: Engage your audiences and inspire them to want to spend time interacting directly with you. You may need to spruce up and redesign your rented land. But don’t forget the ultimate objective: Building an audience that values, trusts, and wants to hear from you consistently.
In content marketing now, the rent that’s due every day is to offer value that’s a tad deeper, a bit more differentiated, and – in the case of external media – a lot more distributed than before.
And when it comes to your owned media, your focus should always be to try to improve the best next experience that only you can deliver to a customer — no matter where you (or they) are on the success spectrum.
It’s your story. Tell it well.
Register to attend Content Marketing World in San Diego. Use the code BLOG100 to save $100. Can’t attend in person this year? Check out the Digital Pass for access to on-demand session recordings from the live event through the end of the year.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
A U.S. court found Google, that tiny little Northern California company that provides search, advertising, and other online services, to be a monopoly. Yes, a monopoly.
If you read mainstream media coverage of the ruling, you might think a giant space alien had just been killed.
Many articles compare this ruling to the anti-trust ruling against Microsoft in 2000 when it was accused of defaulting to its web browser — Microsoft Explorer — in computers’ operating systems. Is that a good comparison?
We didn’t know, so we turned to CMI’s chief strategy advisor, Robert Rose, for his take. Watch or read on:
Is Google decision like Microsoft case in 2000?
Well, the comparison between the Microsoft and Google cases is valid, but not necessarily for the most obvious reason.
Reporters and analysts alike say the declaration that Google’s grip on the search market is illegal deals a significant blow to the behemoth brand. They say it signals a potential turning point in the ongoing regulatory clampdown on Big Tech. They say it paves the way for search engine rivals who have struggled for a slice of the highly lucrative online search pie.
These observers also compare the case to the 2000 Microsoft ruling on its web browser integration into operating systems. And similarities do exist. This ruling focuses on the embedding of Google into devices and platforms. Google pays Apple somewhere north of $20 billion every year to be the default search engine for Apple devices. Google also is obviously the default on Android phones.
However, users can change the default search engine on Apple and Android devices to whatever they prefer. Now, I’m getting into the details, just as you might suspect Microsoft did and Google likely will in their appeals.
What happens from here? It’s anybody’s guess. The certain appeal will take time, and in that time, federal elections will be held, and other related news will happen.
Microsoft didn’t break apart from its computer and operating systems businesses right away. A year after the original ruling, it won the appeal. Ultimately, 17 months later, it settled with the government, which said, “OK, we don’t need you to break apart the businesses, but we do need you to allow more competition on the platform. Open up your systems.” And so, Microsoft did.
What changed after the Microsoft case? Other than the launch of a few competitors, including Firefox, and the eventual replacement of Microsoft Explorer, not much, other than Microsoft getting stronger and stronger in other areas.
Marketers should stay in your busy lanes
What should marketers take away from the Google case? Not a lot.
You have enough to do in marketing, advertising, search, and content without worrying about what’s going on with Google. The headlines talking about the ripple effects on other companies like Apple, Amazon, and Meta are probably right, but those ripples are likely years away.
For consumers, the Google decision is mostly good news. In the long run, it probably means more choices, better choices, and more competition. Watch what Apple does now. Does it build its own web search or purchase somebody else’s? Does it even matter?
These big business tectonic shifts are like real earthquakes. They are easy to feel and see — and scary when they happen — but they are incredibly hard to predict. Just because a big one happens today doesn’t mean anything changes tomorrow. The next big one might come next week or 100 years from now.
Subscribe to workday or weekly CMI emails to get Rose-Colored Glasses in your inbox each week.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
Branded content is among the most misunderstood of all content tactics.
While it’s a distinct approach, it’s easy to confuse it with other paid campaign tactics like native advertising, influencer marketing, or social media ads.
Its non-salesy approach, marked by deeply immersive, entertaining, and educational stories, makes it one of the best vehicles to bridge the gap between awareness and ongoing affinity.
And though it’s often used for brand-building goals like brand awareness, audience engagement, or demand generation, some of the most successful examples make little or no direct mention of the brand or its products and services.
Branded content may not mean what you think it means. But once you understand what it’s all about, you’ll see its significant marketing advantages.
What is branded content?
To understand what branded content entails, let’s start with a summary of the definition offered by the internet’s default dictionary, Wikipedia:
“Branded content is the practice of marketing via the creation of content funded or outright produced by an advertiser… (it is) designed to build awareness by associating (the brand) with content that shares its values.”
As definitions go, it’s a good start. Still, it doesn’t explain what distinguishes branded content from other paid content promotions. And it ignores the tactic’s contribution to lower-funnel marketing goals.
“Branded content is a content creation tactic, typically produced through a sponsored or paid partnership between the brand and the media, that encourages audiences to engage with the brand based on its entertainment, information, and/or educational value.”
A look at some hallmarks of properly executed branded content campaigns illuminates best practices for the technique and its place in your content marketing mix. The best-branded content campaigns:
Take an immersive, sensory-driven approach to storytelling. Branded content typically uses rich multimedia (video and audio) formats and can include interactive features. These features enable a more immersive and emotionally resonant experience than text or static images alone.
Build audience connections through mutual interests and shared values, not sales goals. Great branded content balances entertainment and informational value, making it an ideal format for establishing thought leadership and enhancing brand perception. By exploring issues and ideas about topics of audience interest, branded efforts are more likely to be viewed as trust- and attention-worthy, compared to product- and pitch-driven formats like digital ads.
Impact marketing goals across multiple funnel stages. These stories can expand reach and capture new audiences’ interest. Yet, they can also drive lower-funnel goals. Research from Advertiser Perceptions found that 31% of brands use the technique to increase product consideration, and 29% use it to drive sales.
Enable on-the-go engagement. Marketers typically publish branded campaigns across multiple social networks, third-party media properties, and other external platforms. This broad-reaching approach makes it easy for consumers to discover and access the content while engaging in their usual online activities. And the audio and video components make them well-suited to mobile consumption.
Involve a sponsored or paid media partnership. Brands collaborate with media partners to create and promote content customized to the target media platform’s audience. Co-producing stories with relevant publishers can help your brand’s messages gain traction. It also gives both partners a vested interest in ensuring the content succeeds — a benefit that may not exist with native advertising or when working with paid influencers.
A custom blend of creative appeal and commercial impact
Great branded campaigns create marketing experiences on par with the quality of non-branded content from film studios, TV networks, streaming services, and media outlets.
For instance, the branded content movie Barbie delighted audiences, created a news media frenzy, and generated over $1 billion in revenue worldwide as a traditional feature film. Its emotional resonance, empowering messages, and high-profile promotional partnerships helped relaunch the iconic toy brand for a new generation of prospective customers. Following the film’s success, the brand’s value rose to $720 million, according to Statista data (account required).
Branded content can have a similar impact on B2B consumers. Consider Murder in HR — a fictional true-crime podcast co-produced by Caspian Studios and corporate wellness services provider Gympass (now Wellhub). The series satirizes popular podcasts (Serial, Dr. Death, etc.) with a custom-scripted story about a newly hired HR executive who investigates the death of a co-worker during their corporate retreat.
Image provided by Caspian Studios, via its Content Marketing Award submission.
The brand is subtly and organically integrated into the narrative through the characters’ reflections on the Gympass services employed by the company. A cast of A-list voice talent (including Kate Mara and Brett Gelman, shown in the promo image above) and a storyline designed to resonate with HR professionals elevate the show’s potential to engage Gympass’ target audience.
Content outstanding in your brand’s field
Of course, not all branded campaigns are created alike. Production quality, brand transparency, and consumer appeal vary. The additional time and expense required can make this promotional format unattainable.
Budget and logistics aren’t the only potential barriers to success. You’ll also need to make thoughtful decisions about what brand story to tell, which media to partner with, and whether the potential benefits make it worth the effort.
These carefully crafted campaigns exemplify how to make this technique pay off. While they don’t all follow the official definition to the letter, each strikes a balance between powerful media positioning and compellingly persuasive brand content.
Honda’s Battle of the Bands
Companies often develop branded content around causes and issues that align with their values. For example, Honda Battle of the Bands (HBOB) showcases a celebrated example of the culture at Historically Black Colleges and Universities (HBCUs). The campaign is part of the brand’s 30+ year commitment to supporting HBCUs’ legacy of academic excellence.
HBOB is a multifaceted sponsorship highlighting the talents and achievements of HBCU students. Its live performances, which many consider the marching band homecoming event of the year, are hosted on the HBOB stage and broadcast to virtual viewers.
To deepen community reach and engagement before, during, and after the live show, Honda teamed up with the VIVA Creative agency to produce dynamic online content. For the 2023 event, that content included a microsite detailing the annual Honda Campus All-Star Challenge and the brand’s partnership with the Thurgood Marshall College Fund, plus 100+ graphic, motion, and video assets for social media.
The brand also collaboratively produced a four-part docuseries in which HBCU marching band members and program leaders share their perspectives on the HBOB experience. Each episode revolves around one of the program’s central themes: home, band, culture, and unity.
In this unity-themed video, for example, Dr. William Hudson Jr., Florida A&M University VP for student affairs and enrollment management, describes the feelings of belonging students experience when seeing someone wearing a shirt from another HBCU. Students from Florida A&M and other HBCUs add their views of the personal, social, and academic benefits they receive from this community.
Lenovo Late Night I.T.
Tech brand thought leadership content is typically text-centric and jargon-heavy. But computer electronics manufacturer Lenovo delivered something different with Late Night I.T., a comedy news program published on industry media site CIO.com and available on YouTube.
The videos cover many of the same topics that Lenovo’s competitors do (data management, blockchain technology, cybersecurity, sustainability, and worker burnout).
But Late Night I.T. stands out for the irreverent, unfiltered spin host Baratunde Thurston and his guests put on these conversations. This approach makes for a more entertaining, accessible, and relatable experience for tech decision-makers.
Viewers can tell immediately that this show provides a fresh take on tech. An episode on mental health in the workplace sets the tone with a no-holds-barred title: Mental Health: Generation Burnt-the-F-Out. The teaser copy doubles down by posing a refreshingly forthright (and valid) question: “Is wellness woven into your digital transformation strategy? Or did you deploy a self-help app and call it a day?”
According to Lenovo’s creative partner StudioNorth, the latest season of Lenovo Late Night I.T. became a cult favorite among customers and garnered praise across the press. Even better: Bloomberg TV picked up the show for an additional two months of airtime.
Knorr Yummy Ks
With the right combination of online and in-person promotions, branded content initiatives can have a tantalizing impact on consumers — and their taste buds.
Consider this example from Unilever-owned food and beverage brand Knorr, which had found itself on the edge of a relevance crisis. Known for its bouillon cubes, dips, sauces, and other recipe-starter ingredients, it struggled to compete in the fast-food, delivery-centric culture embraced by today’s on-the-go young consumers.
This audience may be cash-strapped and time-constrained, yet Knorr recognized they strongly desired uncomplicated and yummy food. In fact, 81% of Gen Z consumers say they have made recipes they discovered on social media. This insight grew into the brand’s 360-degree effort to convince Canadian consumers to trade fast food for “good food, made fast with Knorr.”
Together with Edelman Canada, the brand transformed a home into Yummy Ks — a first-of-its-kind takeout joint and digital delivery service. It also enlisted the help of celebrity Canadian chef (and The Bear cast member) Matty Matheson to design a menu of simple yet delicious dishes inspired by popular TikTok recipes. Customers’ orders were packaged in Knorr-branded boxes with samples of the brand’s recipe ingredients to encourage them to recreate the meals in their kitchens.
A platform of branded online content, out-of-home ads, and social media promos featuring Matty drove the message home. Tik-Tok-style recipe videos and Yummy Ks promos leaned into Matty’s energetic, fast-talking foodie persona.
@mattymatheson I’M HERE AT YUMMY K’S WITH @KNORRCA AT 179 CRAWFORD STREET IN TORONTO AND WE’RE SERVING UP MY TASTE COMBOS! COME GET SOME BBQ CHOPPED CHICKEN SANDWICHES OR CHILLED CHILI SOBA THIS WEEKEND ONLY LET’S GO! #KNORRVSCOMBO#AD♬ original sound – MATTY MATHESON
Salesforce Salesblazer
Not all branded content efforts conform to the standard, paid digital media approach. For its Salesblazer initiative, for example, Salesforce worked at the opposite end of the content spectrum: Rather than distributing its topically relevant content through a partnership with external media, it developed a distinct content brand that it operates as a media company.
Salesblazer is a multichannel sales career hub. While the platform is subtly Salesforce-branded, the content doesn’t directly promote (or necessarily even mention) the company’s products or service offerings. Instead, it gives sales professionals tools to learn new skills, connect with their peers, and grow more successful careers.
Salesblazer brings sellers together at in-person and virtual events and supports those relationships online with newsletters and website content organized by roles, industry verticals, and topics of interest.
As you can see from the microsite snapshot image below, the hub’s content includes trend-focused articles and expert advice. Community members can also access videos, training, certifications, and a network of industry experts.
Salesblazer embodies the brand’s philosophy that business can be a platform for change. Company representatives report that the program has become the default model for content marketing within Salesforce, helping refocus its efforts toward creating community-centric programs that cater to a specific audience’s needs.
A brand-building pitch audiences can’t wait to catch
These examples show how great branded content campaigns can help build rapport with new target audiences, expand businesses’ creative horizons, or simply entertain and engage the experience-loving masses.
Are you experimenting with this technique? I’d love to hear what it’s helping your brand achieve.
Updated from a September 2022 article.
Register to attend Content Marketing World in San Diego. Use the code BLOG100 to save $100. Can’t attend in person this year? Check out the Digital Pass for access to on-demand session recordings from the live event through the end of the year.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
Have you heard any of the countless remixes of New Order’s instant classic Blue Monday? Each one reimagines the synth-laden ’80s staple, a derivative of the original work, yet brings something new to the table.
Content remixing operates exactly like that. It’s a form of “cultural remixing” in the digital realm that uses existing ideas and assets to craft something new and unexpected.
Natural language processing models such as ChatGPT or other generative AI tools like Claude have made the art of content remixing easier and more accessible, allowing you to breathe new life into — and get more mileage out of — your greatest hits with a relatively low lift.
The following are four AI-assisted remix strategies for building on existing ideas. I use ChatGPT because it’s my go-to tool, but you can try variants of these on your NLP platform of choice.
Note: It’s worth emphasizing that all remixed content should be original or used with express permission from the original creators. Later in the article, see the do’s and don’ts list about using AI responsibly.
Remix 1: The Best of Album — How to expand articles into white papers
Difficulty grade: 7/10
Use this AI expansion method to transform individual blog articles into a cohesive long-form piece by weaving together insights from handpicked articles with a common thread. Similar to David Bowie’s Legacy album and other best-of smashes, this approach transforms existing content into an elevated and comprehensive resource, like a white paper.
The process takes just a few steps:
Step 1: Develop a unified story
This technique employs a bottom-up storytelling approach, beginning with smaller components and gradually building them into a larger, more comprehensive narrative. You use generative AI to seamlessly blend blog posts into a cohesive storyline to achieve a smooth flow that connects diverse areas of a singular topic.
You can do this in a few ways. First, you can paste your brand’s blog headlines into the prompt or add the themes from the headlines to generate an outline for the white paper.
Example prompt:
As a content strategist for a supply chain technology provider committed to advancing sustainable practices, your objective is to create a cohesive white paper by synthesizing multiple blog articles. Targeted at global companies with complex supply chains spanning multiple countries, your task is to prompt AI to seamlessly connect ideas and findings, crafting a narrative arc that guides readers through a clear journey of discovery and insight.
Your goal is to transform disparate blog articles into a unified white paper that engages readers with a compelling and logical storyline. Your deliverables should be a white paper outline based on our blog articles focused on “supply chain sustainability.” Explore how shifting customer values are reshaping traditional business models, highlight successful case studies, and discuss emerging trends in sustainable practices, environmental stewardship, and carbon neutrality goals.
Example prompt response:
Whitepaper Outline: Advancing Sustainable Supply Chains in a Global Context
I. Introduction
Purpose of the Whitepaper
Introduce the significance of supply chain sustainability in today’s global business landscape.
Highlight the growing importance of sustainable practices driven by shifting customer values.
II. Understanding Supply Chain Sustainability
Defining Supply Chain Sustainability
Define what constitutes a sustainable supply chain.
Discuss the triple bottom line approach: economic, environmental, and social aspects.
III. The Shift in Customer Values and Business Models
Impact of Shifting Customer Values
Explore how changing consumer preferences are influencing businesses to adopt sustainable practices.
Case studies of companies successfully aligning with customer values.
IV. Key Components of Sustainable Practices
Environmental Stewardship
Strategies and technologies for reducing carbon footprint and environmental impact across the supply chain.
Highlight innovations in renewable energy adoption and resource efficiency.
Social Responsibility
Addressing labor standards, human rights, and community engagement in supply chain operations.
Case studies showcasing best practices in social sustainability.
Economic Viability
Balancing sustainability goals with economic objectives.
Cost-benefit analysis of sustainable investments and their long-term financial impacts.
V. Case studies of Successful Implementation
Leading Companies in Supply Chain Sustainability
Highlight specific examples of companies achieving significant milestones in sustainability.
Analyze their strategies, challenges faced, and lessons learned.
VI. Emerging Trends in Sustainable Practices
Technological Innovations
Role of AI, IoT, and blockchain in enhancing supply chain transparency and sustainability.
Predictive analytics for sustainable decision-making.
Regulatory Landscape
Overview of global regulations impacting supply chain sustainability.
Compliance challenges and opportunities for businesses.
VII. Future Outlook: Towards Carbon Neutrality Goals
Setting and Achieving Carbon Neutrality
Strategies for setting ambitious carbon neutrality goals.
Pathways to achieve carbon neutrality across supply chain operations.
VIII. Conclusion
Summary of Key Findings
21. Recap the importance of supply chain sustainability for global companies.
22. Encourage continued innovation and collaboration towards a sustainable future.
IX. Recommendations for Global Companies
Guidance for Implementing Sustainable Practices
Practical steps and recommendations for companies looking to integrate sustainability into their supply chain strategies.
Call to action for industry leaders to drive change and set new standards.
Once you’ve woven a solid outline of your narrative with umbrella storytelling, it’s time to take things up a notch with semantic expansion.
Step 2: Explore semantic expansion
Rather than rehash blog posts in a white paper, harness the power of generative AI to go into the nuances and implications of the key concepts detailed in the outline. Use prompts to explore related topics, dive into underlying principles, and explore real-world applications.
This approach turns your white paper into a powerhouse of insights.
Example prompt:
Conduct a comprehensive semantic expansion for Chapter 4 of the whitepaper on Environmental Stewardship and regulatory compliance. Focus on global regulations, exploring diverse regulatory landscapes across major markets, and analyzing the impact of various initiatives. Discuss the complex challenges and opportunities faced by businesses in achieving compliance and upholding sustainability standards amidst evolving regulatory frameworks.
Tailor this exploration to resonate with our audience—global companies with complex supply chains spanning multiple countries and regions. Highlight our expertise as a supply chain technology provider dedicated to enhancing sustainable practices, ensuring the topic aligns with our authority and relevance in the industry.
Example prompt response:
Chapter 4: Environmental Stewardship and Regulatory Compliance
Introduction
In the context of global supply chains, environmental stewardship has emerged as a critical component of corporate responsibility and operational strategy. This chapter explores the intricate interplay between sustainability goals and regulatory frameworks across major markets worldwide. By delving into these dynamics, we aim to illuminate the complex challenges and opportunities faced by multinational companies in achieving regulatory compliance while upholding stringent sustainability standards.
Global Regulatory Landscape: A Comprehensive Analysis
North America
In the United States, environmental regulations enforced by the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) such as the Clean Air Act and the Resource Conservation and Recovery Act (RCRA) dictate stringent standards for emissions and hazardous waste management. These regulations impact supply chain operations significantly, influencing compliance strategies and operational efficiency. Similarly, Canada’s regulatory landscape under the Canadian Environmental Protection Act (CEPA) and provincial laws introduces complexities that require tailored approaches to environmental compliance across diverse regions.
Europe
Within the European Union (EU), directives like REACH (Registration, Evaluation, Authorization, and Restriction of Chemicals) and the Waste Framework Directive set rigorous standards for chemical safety, waste management, and sustainable production. These directives not only shape product compliance requirements but also mandate transparency and accountability throughout supply chain networks. Post-Brexit, the United Kingdom continues to align with EU environmental standards while developing its own regulatory frameworks to ensure environmental sustainability remains a priority.
Asia-Pacific
In China, environmental regulations overseen by the Ministry of Ecology and Environment (MEE) encompass stringent measures on air and water quality, emissions control, and sustainable manufacturing practices. These regulations are pivotal for companies operating within China’s manufacturing hubs, influencing operational strategies and technological investments. Japan, under the Basic Environmental Law and Industrial Standardization Act, similarly enforces strict environmental standards that impact supply chain operations and sustainability practices across industries.
Complex Challenges in Achieving Compliance
Navigating the diverse regulatory landscapes across North America, Europe, and Asia-Pacific poses significant challenges for global companies with complex supply chains. Variations in environmental standards, compliance requirements, and reporting protocols demand robust governance frameworks and adaptive strategies. The complexity increases operational costs and risks, necessitating comprehensive risk management and compliance monitoring strategies to maintain regulatory alignment while achieving sustainable business practices.
Opportunities for Innovation and Leadership
Advancements in supply chain technologies such as artificial intelligence (AI), Internet of Things (IoT), and blockchain present opportunities to enhance environmental data management, traceability, and compliance reporting. Leveraging these technologies enables proactive compliance strategies and real-time monitoring capabilities, thereby strengthening supply chain resilience and sustainability performance. Strategic partnerships with regulatory bodies, industry associations, and technology providers foster collaborative initiatives that drive innovation and leadership in sustainable supply chain management.
Conclusion
As a supply chain technology provider committed to enhancing sustainable practices, we recognize the critical importance of regulatory compliance in achieving environmental stewardship goals. By navigating the complexities of global regulatory frameworks and leveraging advanced technologies, global companies can mitigate compliance risks, drive operational efficiencies, and position themselves as leaders in sustainability. Our expertise and solutions empower businesses to integrate environmental stewardship seamlessly into their global supply chain strategies, ensuring long-term sustainability and competitive advantage in a dynamic regulatory landscape.
Repeat this semantic expansion prompt for each chapter of the white paper.
From here, you should:
Fact check. Fact check. Fact check.
Develop original content based on the responses given.
Integrate exclusive case studies and insights from expert voices, flexing your perspectives on table stake topics. (Don’t forget to cross-link to the blog articles that inspired this piece.)
Design and add relevant images and data visualizations, such as charts, graphs, and infographics.
Edit, fact-check, proofread,and publish.
Remix 2: The Concept Album — How to create an integrated campaign from one idea
Difficulty grade: 9/10 Creating high-performing campaigns starts with understanding your audience journey, catering to diverse decision-makers, developing a compelling idea, and using different distribution channels to promote it.
Think of Gorillaz’s game-changing album Demon Days. Just as Gorillaz crafted a novel virtual band to execute a concept album and used multimedia storytelling to engage its audience, successful campaigns take a novel central theme and add a lens to all elements and outputs seamlessly. It’s all about integration — think of it as the gold standard for marketing success. Use performance analytics to pinpoint top-performing campaigns, guiding your strategy with data-backed insights.
Here’s how to generate your AI-developed integrated campaign:
Step 1: Craft a clear campaign message
The crux of this approach is simple: Develop a fresh and catchy hook to revolve your campaign around. Then, bring it to life via tailored content designed to resonate across channels and customer stages.
To land in your all-important campaign message, try this style of prompt:
Example prompt:
As a content strategist for an AI retail software company serving enterprise retailers, draw inspiration from your top-performing article “How AI-Powered Personalization is Changing the Face of Retail.” Craft five campaign message variations that are educational or inspirational, each up to two sentences long. Ensure they are platform agnostic and strategically appeal to the specific pain points or interests of B2B decision makers in retail. Example prompt response:
Certainly! Here are five campaign message variations that blend education and inspiration, aimed at B2B decision makers in retail:
“In the age of hyper-personalization, your retail enterprise can thrive like never before. Harness AI-powered insights to understand each customer’s unique preferences and behaviors, delivering tailored experiences that drive loyalty and revenue. Embrace the future of retail with technology that not only meets but anticipates consumer expectations, positioning your brand at the forefront of innovation and customer satisfaction.”
“Imagine a retail ecosystem where every interaction feels uniquely crafted for each customer. With AI-driven personalization, this vision becomes reality. Empower your team with tools that analyze vast data sets in real-time, enabling smarter decision-making and personalized marketing strategies. From predictive analytics to personalized recommendations, elevate your retail strategy to exceed customer expectations and stay ahead in a competitive marketplace.”
“AI isn’t just transforming retail—it’s redefining it. Embrace the power of AI to decipher complex consumer insights, predict trends, and optimize operations seamlessly. Equip your enterprise with the tools to deliver personalized experiences at scale, driving increased conversions and customer retention. Stay agile and responsive in a rapidly evolving market landscape, where AI isn’t just a tool but a strategic advantage that propels your business towards sustained growth and profitability.”
“The future of retail isn’t about guesswork—it’s about precision. AI-powered personalization offers your enterprise the ability to tailor every customer interaction with unparalleled accuracy and relevance. From automating personalized product recommendations to optimizing inventory management, leverage AI to streamline operations and enhance customer satisfaction. Join the leaders in retail innovation by embracing AI-driven solutions that empower your team to exceed customer expectations and drive sustainable business growth.”
“In a world where customer expectations are higher than ever, AI serves as your competitive edge. Revolutionize your retail strategy with AI solutions that transform data into actionable insights, enabling you to anticipate customer needs and preferences before they do. Empower your team to innovate fearlessly, knowing that AI-driven personalization not only enhances customer experiences but also drives operational efficiencies. Lead the charge towards a more personalized, efficient, and profitable future in retail with AI as your trusted partner.”
Step 2: Make it personal
Choose your best message variation and tweak it to match two persona profiles. Create content that speaks directly to their needs and interests.
Example prompt:
Develop a comprehensive campaign focused on Message Variation 3, “”AI isn’t just transforming retail—it’s redefining it,” designed to engage two key personas across four stages of their journey: awareness, consideration, evaluation, and retention.
Persona 1: Business Decision Maker (End User Persona): This persona is responsible for leveraging technology to enhance organizational operations in Retail.
Persona 2. Tech Influencer (ROI and Security Evaluation Persona in Retail): This persona evaluates ROI, security implications, and integration of new technology into existing systems.
Ensure the campaign addresses each persona’s specific needs and concerns at each stage, leveraging Message Variation 3 to resonate effectively throughout the journey.
Example prompt response:
Campaign: Redefining Retail with AI
Message Variation 3: “AI isn’t just transforming retail—it’s redefining it.”
Persona 1: Business Decision Maker (End User Persona)
Awareness Stage:
Campaign Theme: “Discover the Future of Retail with AI”
Content Focus: Highlight the transformative potential of AI in retail operations.
Campaign Activities:
Blog posts and articles on industry-leading platforms discussing AI trends in retail.
Webinars featuring case studies of successful AI implementations in retail.
Infographics and social media posts showcasing statistics on AI’s impact on customer experience and operational efficiency.
Consideration Stage:
Campaign Theme: “Empowering Your Retail Strategy with AI”
Content Focus: Provide deeper insights into AI applications and benefits specific to retail.
Campaign Activities:
Whitepapers detailing AI technologies and their relevance to retail operations.
Customer testimonials and success stories illustrating tangible business outcomes from AI adoption.
Interactive online demos showcasing AI-powered tools and their ease of integration into existing systems.
Evaluation Stage:
Campaign Theme: “AI-Powered Solutions for Your Retail Success”
Content Focus: Address concerns about implementation challenges and ROI.
Campaign Activities:
ROI calculators demonstrating potential cost savings and revenue increases with AI.
Comparison guides highlighting how AI solutions stack up against traditional methods.
Expert-led Q&A sessions and live chats to address specific queries about AI integration and security.
Retention Stage:
Campaign Theme: “Staying Ahead with AI in Retail”
Content Focus: Foster ongoing engagement and support for AI adoption.
Campaign Activities:
Continuous education through monthly newsletters with AI insights and updates.
Exclusive access to new AI features and upgrades for current users.
Customer loyalty programs recognizing early adopters and providing incentives for advocacy.
Persona 2: Tech Influencer (ROI and Security Evaluation Persona)
Awareness Stage:
Campaign Theme: “AI’s Role in Secure and ROI-Driven Retail Innovation”
Content Focus: Highlight AI’s security features and potential ROI.
Campaign Activities:
Thought leadership articles on AI security measures in retail environments.
Webinars featuring cybersecurity experts discussing AI integration best practices.
Infographics and case studies illustrating ROI metrics from AI implementations in retail.
Consideration Stage:
Campaign Theme: “Evaluating AI Solutions for Retail Security and ROI”
Content Focus: Provide detailed comparisons and analyses of AI solutions.
Campaign Activities
Technical whitepapers exploring AI algorithms and their impact on security.
Security certifications and compliance documents for AI platforms.
Virtual workshops on integrating AI securely within existing IT infrastructures.
Evaluation Stage:
Campaign Theme: “Maximizing ROI with AI in Retail”
Content Focus: Address concerns about scalability and long-term ROI.
Campaign Activities:
Case studies demonstrating scalability of AI solutions in large retail enterprises.
ROI calculators tailored to different retail scenarios and business models.
Live demonstrations of AI platforms showcasing scalability and integration capabilities.
Retention Stage:
Campaign Theme: “Partnering for Secure and Sustainable AI Growth in Retail”
Content Focus: Foster ongoing collaboration and support for secure AI implementations.
Campaign Activities:
Access to a dedicated support portal with resources on AI security updates.
Quarterly webinars on emerging AI trends and their security implications.
Early access to beta testing for new AI security features and enhancements.
Cross-Persona Integration:
Throughout all stages, emphasize the collaborative benefits of AI adoption in retail, showcasing how business decision makers and tech influencers can work together to achieve strategic goals. Use consistent messaging from Message Variation 3 to reinforce AI’s transformative potential in redefining retail operations, addressing specific concerns and highlighting tailored benefits for each persona. This integrated approach ensures a cohesive campaign that resonates with both personas, driving awareness, consideration, evaluation, and retention effectively.
As you can see, these are pretty “meh” titles, but what’s offered is a starting point for further development.
From here, you would:
Develop an integrated marketing plan mapped to channels, personas, and stages of the funnel.
Create original content to ensure complete campaigns for each persona.
Integrate expert voices and insights. (Don’t forget to link to the blog articles that inspired this piece.)
Design and add images and data visualizations, such as charts, graphs, infographics.
Edit, fact-check, proofread, and publish.
Implement a structured content calendar with cross-channel promotion for maximum impact.
Embrace dynamic personalization and automation to elevate customer engagement and drive conversions, strengthening your brand’s competitive edge.
Remix 3: The Collaboration Album — How to create an SEO-rich knowledge base
Difficulty grade: 6/10 Knowledge bases that combine diverse insights in one central place are critical for supporting customers and establishing industry authority. Think of this remix style as a collaborative album. In Ella Fitzgerald’s Ella Sings with Her Friends, Ella stays the main character in the narrative, yet the album brilliantly showcases the synergy of a host of top-notch singers.
This type of content is more product-focused in nature, but the idea is to augment it with expertise and knowledge to add value. By tapping into internal and external insights, you can easily curate comprehensive knowledge bases on your company’s products and services. This collaborative approach helps to extract a myriad of viewpoints enriched with expert insights and quotes.
Step 1. Create your Knowledge Base
Use this style of prompt to generate a list of common questions about a company’s products and solutions.
Example prompt: As a content strategist tasked with developing a comprehensive knowledge base for a leading provider of marketing automation solutions for agencies and brands, outline the essential categories and questions that should be prominently featured in our Knowledge Base. Focus on addressing common queries and providing clear, informative answers to support our users effectively.
Example prompt response:
Creating a comprehensive knowledge base for a leading provider of marketing automation solutions involves organizing information into clear categories and addressing common user queries effectively. Here’s an outline of essential categories and sample questions for your FAQ knowledge base:
1. General Information
What is [Your Company Name] and what do you offer?
How can marketing automation benefit my agency/brand?
Is your platform suitable for agencies, brands, or both?
2. Getting Started
How do I sign up for [Your Company Name]?
What are the initial setup steps for new users?
Where can I find tutorials or guides to help me get started?
3. Features and Functionality
What are the key features of your marketing automation platform?
How can I create and manage email campaigns?
Can I automate social media posting and scheduling?
4. Integration
Which third-party applications and platforms does [Your Company Name] integrate with?
How do I integrate [Your Company Name] with my existing CRM system?
Is there an API available for custom integrations?
5. Account Management
How do I update my account information?
What are the different subscription plans available?
How can I add or remove users from my account?
6. Troubleshooting and Support
What should I do if I encounter issues logging in?
How do I troubleshoot common problems with campaign delivery?
Where can I find technical support or contact customer service?
7. Security and Privacy
How does [Your Company Name] ensure the security of my data?
What measures are in place to protect my privacy?
Do you comply with data protection regulations (e.g., GDPR)?
8. Billing and Payments
How do I update my billing information?
What are the accepted payment methods?
Can I view my billing history and invoices online?
9. Training and Resources
Are there training sessions available for new users?
Where can I find video tutorials or webinars on advanced features?
Is there a knowledge base or community forum for users to share tips?
10. Product Updates and Roadmap
How often do you release updates to your platform?
Where can I find information about upcoming features or enhancements?
Can users provide feedback or suggest new features?
Tips for Effective FAQ Management:
Keep answers concise and clear: Avoid technical jargon and provide step-by-step instructions where necessary.
Update regularly: As your platform evolves, ensure FAQs reflect the latest features and improvements.
Use multimedia: Include screenshots, videos, or links to relevant resources to enhance understanding.
Promote self-service: Encourage users to explore the FAQ before contacting support to reduce repetitive inquiries.
Step 2: Crowdsource and scale
Now that you have a list of questions, answer them by tapping into the collective genius of people across your organization — all while keeping a sharp eye on quality. If you don’t have people internally who could answer a question, don’t hesitate to tap into external subject matter experts.
Once you’ve got your answers locked in, fire them off to your product owners and domain experts for a final accuracy check.
This prompt can help you create email templates that make crowdsourcing a cinch:
Example prompt:
Develop a concise email template to solicit contributions for our Knowledge Base from both internal and external stakeholders. Clearly communicate that their submissions will be publicly accessible and used for educational purposes. Ensure their name, position title, and organization are prominently displayed with their answers. Organize prompts according to the predefined chapters. Ensure these prompts encourage stakeholders to offer practical tips or strategies that benefit end-users of our product.
Example prompt response:
Subject: Help Us Build a Knowledge Base: Share Your Expertise!
Dear [Stakeholder’s Name],
We are reaching out to invite you to contribute your expertise to our Knowledge Base, a valuable resource designed to educate and empower users of [Your Company’s] marketing automation solutions.
Your insights will help fellow professionals navigate and optimize their experience with our platform, benefiting from real-world strategies and practical tips shared by industry experts like yourself.
Key Information:
Your Contribution: Please share practical tips or strategies that enhance the use of [Your Company’s] marketing automation solutions.
Format: Responses will be organized into predefined chapters within our Knowledge Base, ensuring easy navigation and relevance.
Visibility: Your contributions will be publicly accessible and attributed to you, prominently displaying your name, position title, and organization.
Prompts for Contributions:
Getting Started: What advice would you give to new users setting up their accounts?
Campaign Management: Share a strategy or tip for optimizing email campaigns or social media automation.
Integration: How have you successfully integrated [Your Company’s] platform with other tools or systems?
Troubleshooting Tips: What common issues have you encountered, and how did you resolve them?
Advanced Features: Share a practical example of how you’ve used advanced features to achieve specific goals.
Your contributions will directly benefit our community of users by offering practical insights and enhancing their overall experience with [Your Company’s] solutions.
Please submit your responses directly to [Email Address] by [Deadline Date]. Should you have any questions or need further clarification, feel free to reach out.
Thank you for your ongoing support and collaboration in building a robust Knowledge Base that serves as a valuable resource for all users.
It’s a no-brainer, but it bears repeating: Once your expert insights are cobbled together, closely fact-check, edit, and proofread your Knowledge Base before releasing it to the world.
Remix 4: The Forward-Thinking Album — How to create timely, responsive content
Difficulty grade: 7/10 Many brands draw inspiration from traditional newsrooms to develop topical content, incorporating timely updates like breaking news or emerging trends. They even use it as intel to set their own trends. This strategy enables them to craft progressive content that builds trust and authority. Just as Beyoncé’s pioneering album Cowboy Carter positioned Queen Bey as a trendsetter squarely in the zeitgeist, yet ahead of her time, all brands should similarly strive to lead the conversation.
Step 1: Zero in on the nut graph
Use ChatGPT to swiftly dissect current events and extract insightful angles for op-eds or in-depth analyses.
For instance, start with this piece from Marketing Week about brand building being the most important factor in achieving business objectives. Seize its core discovery or nut graph (newspeak for the central theme or key insight) and use it as your launchpad. Always attribute properly by crediting the original source and authors. Your goal isn’t to parrot the news but to offer a unique take and expert response.
Example prompt:
As a content marketer at a marketing agency, your task is to create content in response to recent insights revealing that 33% of marketers prioritize brand advertising as their primary tactic, despite concerns over excessive focus on performance metrics. Develop three strategic story angles that explore the implications of these findings on B2B strategies. Each angle should be suitable for a thought leadership piece, opinion editorial, or critical analysis aimed at our audience of marketing leaders. Ensure to attribute and cite the original study titled “Brand building ‘most important’ factor in achieving business objectives” from Marketing Week.
Example prompt response:
Certainly! Here are three strategic story angles that explore the implications of prioritizing brand advertising in B2B strategies, tailored for a thought leadership piece or opinion editorial aimed at marketing leaders:
1. “Strategic Shift: Embracing Brand Building as a Core B2B Marketing Strategy”
Angle: Despite the prevalent focus on performance metrics such as ROI and lead generation, a significant segment of marketers (33%, according to Marketing Week) are prioritizing brand advertising as their primary tactic. This angle examines why B2B marketers are increasingly recognizing the strategic value of brand building in achieving long-term business objectives.
Key Points to Explore:
Building Market Resilience: Discuss how investing in brand advertising enhances brand resilience and market positioning, especially in competitive B2B landscapes.
Long-term vs. Short-term Goals: Analyze the balance between immediate performance metrics and the strategic benefits of building enduring brand equity.
Impact on Customer Relationships: Explore how a strong brand presence influences B2B customer relationships, trust, and loyalty over time.
Citation: According to Marketing Week’s study on brand building as the most important factor in achieving business objectives, this shift underscores a growing acknowledgment among marketers of the enduring impact and value of strong brand equity in B2B markets.
2. “Navigating Complexity: Integrating Brand Advertising with Measurable Outcomes in B2B Marketing”
Angle: In the era of data-driven decision-making, balancing brand advertising with measurable outcomes presents a challenge for B2B marketers. This angle delves into strategies for effectively integrating brand advertising into B2B marketing campaigns while demonstrating tangible ROI and performance metrics.
Key Points to Explore:
Strategic Alignment: Discuss methodologies and technologies for aligning brand advertising efforts with measurable performance indicators such as conversion rates and customer acquisition costs.
Metrics for Brand Impact: Propose innovative metrics for quantifying the impact of brand advertising on brand awareness, perception, and consideration in B2B purchase cycles.
Case Studies and Best Practices: Highlight successful B2B brands that have effectively balanced brand advertising with performance metrics to achieve strategic marketing goals.
Citation: According to Marketing Week’s insights, B2B marketers are increasingly leveraging brand advertising not only to enhance brand perception but also to drive measurable business outcomes, reflecting a nuanced approach to modern marketing strategies.
3. “Beyond the Buzz: Redefining Success in B2B Marketing Through Brand Advertising”
Angle: Beyond immediate metrics, the strategic emphasis on brand advertising signifies a broader shift towards redefining success in B2B marketing. This angle explores how prioritizing brand advertising can redefine success metrics and position companies for sustained growth and market leadership.
Key Points to Explore:
Creating Competitive Advantage: Discuss how a strong brand narrative and consistent advertising can differentiate B2B companies in crowded markets and attract high-value clients.
Long-term Value Proposition: Analyze the role of brand equity in enhancing the overall value proposition of B2B offerings and influencing customer lifetime value.
Innovation and Adaptation: Explore strategies for innovating within brand advertising to stay relevant and adaptable to evolving market dynamics and customer preferences.
Citation: As highlighted by Marketing Week’s study, the strategic prioritization of brand advertising underscores its pivotal role in driving sustainable growth and market leadership in B2B sectors, emphasizing the importance of long-term brand building efforts.
These story angles aim to provoke thoughtful discussion and provide actionable insights for marketing leaders navigating the evolving landscape of B2B marketing. Each angle is grounded in the latest insights from Marketing Week to provide credibility and relevance to the discussion around brand advertising in B2B strategies.
Step 2: Assemble your A team
Choose your favorite angle and team up with three subject matter experts to blend diverse perspectives in an in-depth analysis. Merge AI-generated insights with SME voices to craft compelling content that speaks directly to your audience’s interests and concerns.
For this exercise, lets pick the second angle, “Navigating Complexity”. And let’s use generative AI to create email templates that make sourcing that expertise a breeze.
Example prompt:
Utilize “Navigating Complexity: Integrating Brand Advertising with Measurable Outcomes in B2B Marketing” as a unique perspective to pitch an opinion piece integrating insights from three experts within your organization. Develop a concise email requesting quick quotes from each expert, tailored to their expertise in strategies, advice, or tips for our customers. Highlight the topical urgency with a 48-hour deadline, emphasizing the timeliness of the topic.
Your experts—VP of Product, Head of Insights, and VP of Strategy—are pivotal. Ensure your pitch addresses the insights from the Marketing Week article title “Brand building ‘most important’ factor in achieving business objectives,” specifically citing: “While 33% of marketers prioritize brand advertising, 49.8% acknowledge an excessive focus on performance marketing.” Properly attribute these findings for credibility.
Example prompt response:
Subject: Quick Quotes Needed: Expert Insights on Integrating Brand Advertising with Measurable Outcomes
Dear [Expert’s Name],
I hope this message finds you well.
We are currently preparing an opinion piece on “Navigating Complexity: Integrating Brand Advertising with Measurable Outcomes in B2B Marketing” and would greatly value your unique perspective. This topic is of critical importance, particularly in light of recent insights from Marketing Week, which highlight that while 33% of marketers prioritize brand advertising, 49.8% recognize an overemphasis on performance marketing. These findings underscore the need for balanced strategies that merge brand building with tangible results.
Given your expertise in [specific area related to their role], we are seeking your quick input on this subject. Specifically, we would appreciate a brief quote (2-3 sentences) on:
Strategies: What key strategies should businesses adopt to effectively integrate brand advertising with measurable outcomes?
Advice: What actionable advice can you offer to marketers struggling to balance brand and performance marketing?
Tips: Any practical tips you have for ensuring brand advertising efforts contribute to clear business objectives?
Could you please provide your insights within the next 48 hours? Your timely response will greatly enhance the depth and relevance of our piece.
Thank you in advance for your contribution.
Best regards,
[Your Full Name] [Your Position] [Your Contact Information] [Your Company]
Once you have the angles and the expert intel, creatively bring it all to life in the formats of your choice. Getting your news-focused perspectives and trend-setting concepts into the world before they grow stale is essential, so act fast.
Remix responsibly
Content remixing with generative AI mirrors the music industry’s remix culture — reinventing the familiar to captivate audiences anew with due regard for the original work and its essence.
Given ethics and intellectual property are especially murky waters in the realm of generative AI, err on the side of caution. Only use prompts with content that your brand owns. In rare instances when using someone else’s data point or finding as a launchpad (as seen in the fourth remix above), always credit the originator. With AI’s tendency to hallucinate, triple-checking content for accuracy and unexpected elements is paramount.
Because AI relies on formulaic language, you need to also be wary of its tendency to produce lackluster and robotic-sounding copy. A mere glance at the prompts generated above reveal how generic the output is. And there are some tell-tale words and phrases that are a dead giveaway that AI has generated the copy. “I hope this email finds you well,” “in an evolving landscape,” “unleash,” and “delve” are a few examples among many.
As a result, flexing your own writing skills and ensuring strict editorial oversight will be more important than ever in the age of AI-assisted content creation. The generated prompts in this article are only part of the process. Treat them as thought starters rather than a proxy for this type of original thinking.
This list of do’s and don’ts should sound familiar to any ethical editorial professional:
Do respect copyright and intellectual property laws. When in doubt, ask.
Do review, fact-check, and edit AI outputs before finalizing to ensure quality control.
Don’t feed confidential or sensitive data to generative AI tools, as these inputs might enter public datasets.
Don’t replace expert writers with generic AI responses. Instead, use AI to conjure ideas and complement their expertise.
Employing meticulous oversight and upholding high ethical standards allows your creative game to produce more smash hits.
Grab your generative AI and get remixing
These four remix ideas inspire you to go beyond single, often dead-end prompts. I’m not entirely sold on the idea that generative AI is all about efficiency when it comes to creativity. Sure, it can speed things up, like a turbo boost for brainstorming sessions. But let’s face it, real creativity is more than just churning out ideas — it’s about those light-bulb moments, those gut feelings, and the kind of spark that AI hasn’t quite figured out how to replicate. AI can crunch numbers and spit out options, but when it comes to genuine, off-the-wall creativity, humans still have the edge (and responsibility).
Please note: All tools mentioned in this article were suggested by the author. If you’d like to suggest a tool, share the article on social media with a comment.
Register to attend Content Marketing World in San Diego. Use the code BLOG100 to save $100. Can’t attend in person this year? Check out the Digital Pass for access to on-demand session recordings from the live event through the end of the year.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
I’ve seen several articles and social media posts recently about why modern content marketing needs a “beyond the website” strategy.
Here’s the gist of these arguments: With the decade-long slide in search traffic (made worse by AI-powered answers and zero-click search features) and the “for you” trend in social media feeds, you should now distribute your content in as many places as your target audience spends time and fundamentally change the overall strategy of your owned media (your website, blog, email newsletters, etc.).
The implications of this kind of approach are certainly too many to cover here, but some implied best practices include:
Create zero-click content. Posting a provocative headline and image with a link to read the whole article no longer works. So, this approach entails offering valuable insights directly on whatever social platform, email, or other channels and including call-outs to visit your website (to subscribe, buy, donate, etc.). Amanda Natividad, SparkToro’s marketing lead, explains this approach thoroughly.
Craft specific approaches for each “walled garden.” Some talk about this as a “social-first strategy” or even a “social-out strategy.” This approach involves designing a distinct content plan for each channel rather than using those networks to promote your owned media property (website, blog, e-commerce site, etc.). You’d need a separate strategy for each social platform your audience uses (Reddit, Facebook, LinkedIn, etc.) and other platforms where they engage (YouTube, retail media networks like Amazon and Walmart, and content syndication platforms). Then, you’d use the insights from those interactions to inform the rest of your marketing strategy.
Protect your proprietary content (even from search). Creating digital scarcity is hard. Suggested best practices include placing content behind a subscription wall (creating an exclusive “members only” feeling) and preventing search engines from getting it. (Note that Reddit has blocked all search engines except for Google, with which it struck a $60 million deal to allow indexing.)
All three of these new so-called best practices depend on rented land (channels outside your control). My next column will discuss content strategies on these external platforms in more depth.
In this column, I’ll explore the implications this approach has for your owned media approach.
Does a “beyond the website” approach mean “owned media” is a dying strategy?
I say no. But these trends fundamentally change what kind of content you should focus on for owned media. You have to offer more than simple facts or answers to frequently asked questions.
People don’t believe their eyes and ears
Last week, I spoke to a tech client whose team wanted to revitalize a dying digital content experience. They felt frustrated.
Five years ago, with help from a couple of ad agency consultants, they came up with the idea to launch a digital platform to provide easy access to facts about their technology. All they needed, they thought, was to set up a digital library that could answer every technical question their clients might have.
They’d let the facts speak for themselves and win the customer retention battle.
Five years later, the platform’s organic traffic is slowly disintegrating.
You see, facts rarely speak for themselves (they’re bashful that way). And they almost never win an argument. But now, more than ever, facts have become commodities.
Facts don’t win. Beliefs win. You can lament that fact — but it doesn’t stop it from being true.
In this big-data, deep-fake world, we have more “facts” than ever. And we don’t even have to click to get them thrown at us.
So the question marketers have to answer isn’t “How do we get anyone to click on what we’re saying.” It’s “How do we get anyone to care about what we’re saying?”
A few years ago, researchers at Wharton conducted a study in which they introduced people to various algorithms. Most people found them interesting and valuable — until the algorithm made a mistake.
Once people saw the mistake occur, they were “very, very unlikely to use it and didn’t like it anymore.” The participants seemed to judge algorithms more harshly than they would people, one researcher noted.
But, if these people had input into the algorithm or were allowed to adjust the forecasts, they not only liked the algorithms more, they didn’t lose nearly as much confidence when an error occurred.
We’re already partly under this magic spell with generative AI search. People know it’s all based on “the internet.” And, since we’ve all contributed to the internet, they feel they have a grasp on how these gen AI tools work. And so mistakes in the tools’ output don’t deter them from using it.
So, in 2024, you can’t base your owned media strategy on “just the facts.” You must make people care — and quickly.
As I told my tech client, you have to give people something to believe in (to quote the classic Poison song). On all your owned media properties, you must give audiences something more than facts to care about and act on.
If you don’t, you risk creating some version of this scene from the TV show The Simpsons: Lisa feels sad because one of her favorite teachers left. Her father, Homer, doesn’t seem to get it. “I knew you wouldn’t understand,” Lisa tells him.
“Hey,” Homer says, “just because I don’t care doesn’t mean I don’t understand.”
Ultimately, with every piece of content for your owned media property, ask this question: “Why would someone care about this?”
If you can’t answer it, you need to have an honest discussion about whether that content deserves a place on your property.
Creating belief is about understanding intent
So, how do you start creating content that goes beyond simple fact-based research, data, and information?
Go back to that argument you had on social media or with the colleague or boss who never seems to “get it.” Think about those customers you’re trying to convince to purchase from you or advocate for you.
You’re never going to win those battles with facts — you must understand why they’re arguing, searching, or deciding. You must understand their intent.
To understand intent, you must first create mechanisms — content-driven experiences — that enable your brand to listen more effectively to the signals generated across their interactions.
This is where that walled-garden approach can help. It can provide both the data and insight to help you understand what to create that is scarce, precious, and valuable enough to encourage those interested in knowing more to visit your owned media.
Here’s an example. At a recent Digital Summit, Jennifer Healen, McDonald’s VP of U.S. marketing, explained how insights and observations about how McDonald’s resonated across social channels informed how they created multiplatform marketing campaigns. The insight that McDonald’s was “anime’s most bootlegged restaurant” encouraged them to create a whole campaign and owned-media property around “WcDonald’s” (the most common anime bootleg of the McDonald’s brand).
Connecting these two specific approaches — external and owned media — requires new skills. In my research and consulting practice, I’ve seen marketing organizations develop a self-enablement process to create this level of capability.
It typically involves three steps:
1. Arrange the data house
Create a dictionary or interpretation for understanding intent. Put simply, you need to discern the most appropriate response to a customer’s interaction with your content. This is where a metadata structure and content tagging system to track behavioral context (or intent) comes in. Side note: That’s a great use case for generative AI solutions.
For example, a structured article called Discover How Digital Marketing Is a Good Thing for Your Business might be tagged with a “beginner” or “learning” intent. Someone who consumes this white paper would NOT be considered a lead but will be nurtured as an engaged audience.
2. Develop ‘best next’ capability
Once you have an intent signal, you must understand the “best next” (not next best) thing to make that customer understand and care about the answer. You need content-driven experiences that deliver “best next” content. For example, targeted messaging for the beginner or learning audience member who read the white paper should prompt them to read a “how-to-change” piece.
That’s overly simplistic, of course. But you can see how you can capture levels of nuance with more than just answers to a question. You can glean whether this beginner feels confident or fearful about change through additional content consumption, a poll, or a survey. As you learn more about the nuanced aspects of the customer’s journey, you can automatically deliver the best next experience for that customer.
It’s not all about technology and dynamic content. There’s a human element to this, too. You can share this information with others who can deliver additional experiences that fall outside the digital content realm. For example, you could share insights about the beginner prospect’s behavior with sales. Once the sales team understands what the prospect needs, their role can evolve from a persuader to a consultant helping the prospect understand the best way to move to the next step.
3. Connect the experiences
This step enables the most insight. Once you map your content to understand what you need to deliver based on intent, you must develop the capability to aggregate this data and serve the content (and the intent) contextually across the different experiences. You need to find a way to connect the experiences into a single view of the audience’s progression through its journey.
You might call this “personalization,” but it’s just understanding how to contextually connect your owned media experiences to make the customer want to spend more and more time in your ecosystem.
For example, if the beginner persona ultimately purchases your services, you might want to connect their profile to the onboarding or training module of a 101-level set of training classes. The insight gleaned from a more statistically relevant data set improves these activities or even makes them possible in the first place.
This third step may be the most challenging part of the process because it often requires integrating multiple technologies to create a single view of the customer.
But you can start small. Even if you can just connect the intent upper/beginning part of the journey (awareness) to the mid part of the journey (sales), you are starting to get much better.
People believe in stories, not facts
Data gives you the opportunity to make people care about what you have to say. To get beyond just answers, you must create compelling content that integrates those answers (facts, figures, data, information) into compelling experiences that appeal to the audience’s feelings.
One widespread marketing fallacy is that buyers want factual answers about the products and services they’re considering.
That’s not true. Often, the brand that supplies the least information about a product and the most inspiration, belief, and emotional connection will be the chosen one.
So, you need to convince customers they’re buying into a brand they can believe in. To do that, give them content experiences that lead them to believe.
My next column will explain how to use the new rented-land approach to get your point of view out into the world. That’s how you’ll engage people. Then, use your new owned media strategy to help people change and believe in your story.
Updated from a January 2022 article.
Subscribe to workday or weekly CMI emails to get Rose-Colored Glasses in your inbox each week.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
The CEO asks the company’s data scientist if the marketing strategy should incorporate generative AI and large language models.
The data scientist responds:
“The epiphany of large language models, distinguished by their profound deep neural architecture and expansive parameterization, constitutes a quantum leap in the domain of marketing. Their extraordinary capacity to unveil intricately woven, nonlinear structures within vast and voluminous datasets begets unparalleled precision in the domain of hyper personalized marketing campaigns, transcending the realms of conventional methodologies …”
When the data scientist finally stops, the CEO asks, “Can you dumb it down for me?”
To which the data scientist replies:
“Oh dear, it seems like you’re having trouble grasping the basics. Let me break it down for you like you’re a little kid. Large learning models are super-duper smart tools that help us know what our customers like.
“They’re way better than the old stuff we used. With these fancy models, we can make ads that really speak to people and make them buy our stuff. And guess what? They do it super-fast, too! So, we gotta use these cool models to beat the other companies and be the best in marketing. Got it now? Good!”
That unhelpful interaction underscores the challenges arising when people have different levels of understanding of technology. The data scientist is deep in the trenches, and the CEO has a cursory knowledge of how generative AI works.
Putting together these people of varying knowledge can lead to frustration, or worse, butting heads.
Katie asked managers and technologists how interactions, like the one between the CEO and data scientist, go wrong. Interestingly, both roles identified the same issues with the other party, including:
Being too bossy
Assuming the other party isn’t smart enough
Asking the wrong questions (managers) and poor communication (technologists)
Overcompensating
Bad attitude
Blaming each other
As organizations get deeper into generative AI, machine learning, natural language processing, and deep neural networks, expect an increase in communication breakdowns between managers and technologists, Katie says.
“You need to have a framework for how to communicate with the people who are doing work, the people who are managing the machines,” she says.
To make that possible, Katie shares a framework to help managers and technologists work better together.
Use the 5P Framework to improve tech communication
Katie developed the 5P Framework to help people with different backgrounds and levels of expertise work better together. The five elements include:
Purpose: What is the problem you’re trying to solve? What is the question you’re trying to answer? Why are you having this conversation?
People: Who is involved in this conversation, and what other stakeholders need to know the result of it?
Process: How are you doing this? When do you need to do it? What tools do you have to use?
Platform: What tools are you using to converse? Slack, phone, in-person?
Performance: Did you adequately address the problem?
Katie explains the first three — purpose, people, and process — involve expectations. Process and platform are about execution, and performance is about measurement.
Craft requests with user stories
The 5P Framework works well in crafting user stories. Taking a page from Agile software development teams, the story structure is simple: As a [persona], I [want to], so [that].
Katie says the framework maps perfectly with the user story format. The persona is the people. The “want to” is the process and platform. The “that” comes from purpose and performance.
Let’s consider an example.
Katie’s past employer developed products to help substance abuse clinicians do patient intake. The primary stakeholder was an academic who ran clinical research. He came to development meetings with an attitude that he knew what was best for the product. He asked for a laundry list of product features.
The developers felt micromanaged, while the stakeholder felt like he wasn’t getting what he needed. Poor communication, friction, anxiety, and frustration arose. “Anytime anyone saw him even approaching a meeting room, the anxiety would just swell, and people would start to shut down,” Katie says.
The stress from those conflicting perspectives could have been reduced if they created user stories, such as:
As a clinician [persona], I will use this software during the intake process of new patients [want to], so I can expedite the process and have more meaningful conversations during our appointment [that].
As a patient [persona], I will use this software during the intake process as a new patient [want to], so I can spend more time talking to my clinician about my issues and not be answering standard questions [that].
User stories like these are powerful because they clearly state the purpose and goals. “Every single thing that we should be making decisions on should map back to these two user stories because this is the whole point of the product that we were launching,” Katie says.
User stories can ease turf wars
Now, let’s see how user stories can also ease friction between teams. Conflict often arises when one group says, “I own this. Why are you getting into my business?” User stories can answer or even thwart that question between groups in your organization.
Front-end development vs. back-end development
In Katie’s prior job, front-end development worked with design, UX, and product teams on layouts and images. When the front-end team turned over the design, the back-end development said it wasn’t technically possible based on the system’s constraints. The front-end team then complained to its stakeholders that the back-end team was not cooperating.
What if they had created a user story like this earlier?
As the back-end dev, I want to be brought into the design process earlier, so that I can weigh in on what is possible.
It expresses the team, its goal, and the benefit to all.
Marketing vs. development
Katie’s former employer had a pie-in-the-sky-thinking vice president who had big ideas about what to add to the website’s homepage. A marketing team member would make the request of the development team only to be told no because it had already committed to working on a different feature in the two-week sprint.
What if they had created this user story?
As the dev person, I want to understand the marketing strategy, so that I can include website features into sprint planning.
This story would have helped the vice president understand that the development team operated in sprints and couldn’t slot in any request. It also works well because the development team can better understand the marketing strategy and proactively schedule time for marketing features in its sprint planning.
The benefits of user stories and the 5P Framework
User stories like these can remove or lessen the emotional impact of making decisions and receiving feedback. “We may not express it. We may not know it immediately, but [emotion is] where all of that friction starts to come from,” Katie says.
For instance, if a manager tells you, “That’s the wrong decision, and I don’t want you to do that,” you would likely feel hurt. But, if the manager shares a user story with less emotionally charged wording, you’ll understand and react better.
That’s the power of user stories. They reframe the conversation around the user and align all parties’ goals and motivations around that user.
In addition, the 5P Framework and user stories work well to organize your thoughts. “It helps you set expectations for yourself and other people. It helps you verify that the outcome aligns with the questions being asked, and it helps you cut down on distractions,” Katie says.
Reframing the LLM request as a user story
Remember the CEO and data scientist interaction about generative AI and LLMs at the beginning of this article? Here’s how Katie would reframe it from the data scientist’s perspective, with a little humor mixed in:
As an underling doing the bidding of the CMO, I want to understand the use cases of generative AI so that I can tell my overlord if there are any applications to consider.
With this understanding, the data scientist will now have generative AI use cases that will help the CEO understand:
Generation
Extraction
Summarization
Rewriting
Classification
Question answering
This user-story attempt will result in a more productive and useful conversation.
Try user stories in your work
The next time you don’t get what you requested from another team, don’t get frustrated and conclude they can’t help.
“The way to fix that is to say, ‘This is exactly what I need from you. This is why. This is how,’” Katie says.
In the Parade of Athletes, at every event venue, and during every media opportunity, the competitors generally wear the branded apparel of their country’s sponsor. Unless, of course, the athlete is a star who has a different brand deal.
For example, Nike is the apparel brand sponsor for the U.S. delegation, but men’s basketball star Steph Curry has a deal with Under Armour. So, Steph doesn’t wear a Nike-branded uniform on the court.
Olympic athlete sponsorship is a competitive sport unto itself, and it involves big, big money.
But what about all the unsponsored athletes who earned a spot and could become the next Simone Biles, Trinity Rodman, or Katie Ledecky?
One small sports apparel brand came up with a brilliant solution that also brought it worldwide awareness.
We turned to CMI’s chief strategy advisor, Robert Rose, to tell the story and its takeaway for marketers. Read on or watch this video:
Bandit makes Unsponsored play
Total numbers are hard to find for Olympic sponsorships. Sportico reports that Team USA alone has a $2.5 billion corporate sponsorship goal for the 2028 Summer Games in Los Angeles. It’s a complex investment strategy for brands to figure out which teams, individuals, and sports to sponsor that will get the most bang for their big, big bucks.
But one tiny brand devised a unique move in the face of this high-dollar competition.
Bandit, a small running apparel brand, conducted the Unsponsored Project. It’s a great example of how marketing can solve an actual problem and provide tremendous value for everybody involved.
Here’s the problem that Bandit solved. Many sports host qualifying events to see who will earn a spot on the Olympic team. For example, USA Track & Field hosts the USA Track & Field Outdoor Championships.
At the trials, the stars and previous Olympic athletes wear the gear of their big-name brand sponsors. But the unsponsored competitors have a difficult choice. They can give the big brand free advertising by wearing its clothing and possibly lessening their power in negotiating a brand deal if they make the team. Or they can wear clothing without logos and perhaps go unnoticed.
Bandit, which is way too small to sponsor well-known stars or bet on any one athlete, saw an opportunity. It supported 35 unsponsored athletes in the track and field trials, providing an athlete-only line of the same black, logo-less apparel. It also gave the athletes money for flights, hotels, and meals for the trials.
And here’s the kicker. The Bandit sponsorship agreement included an opt-out clause that let the athletes leave the deal whenever they wanted. So, if they made the team, they could negotiate brand deals with whomever they want.
Why would Bandit do this? To get what we’re doing now — talk about the running apparel brand.
The campaign has been a huge success. Bandit measured press coverage, brand awareness, impressions across all kinds of media. The CEO says they’re sure they’ll see revenue benefits, but the level of awareness created by the company is genius.
And wonderfully, the brand has a presence in Paris. It was contacted after the sponsor for the country of St. Vincent and the Grenadines backed out. Now, Bandit is on the ground at the Olympics.
Play a new game to win against competing brands
So, what’s the takeaway for you?
If you’re a smaller or challenger brand, you probably can’t outspend or outrank your competition. Getting brand recognition is hard.
But you can be deeper, more trustworthy, more valuable, more innovative, and just better than your competition. You can play a different game.
Bandit discovered a way into the big leagues — spreading a marketing investment across a wide array of the small leagues. Those Bandit-sponsored athletes will always remember how the company solved a problem for them.
More importantly, everybody who wants to know who did that — who solved THAT problem — will discover the brand. Bandit solved a bigger — or different — problem than you would normally associate with a brand like yours.
In the early 2000s, I was the CMO of a small software company. No one knew what software as a service or cloud computing even meant, and our product was all about web content management.
We competed against companies a thousand times our size, like Microsoft, Oracle, Hewlett Packard, and Adobe. We didn’t try to go head to head, selling our web content management product as better than the giants’ products.
We sold a better idea for software as a service. We told the story of cloud computing. That was our differentiator. If we could sell people on that, then we would have convinced them we could handle a small part of their cloud computing. We didn’t play the product vs. product game. We played the new-idea game and built trust on that foundation.
So, the lesson you can learn from that and how Bandit stole attention from the biggest competitors at the Olympics? Don’t be better at the existing game, invent a new one.
Want more content marketing tips, insights, and examples? Subscribe to workday or weekly emails from CMI.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
You learn the 2025 budget has room to add a new role to your content and marketing team, and you get to decide what that will be.
Would you add another writer? What about a data wrangler? Or would you opt for a strategist? What about a customer-focused role?
To help in your analysis, we posed the scenario to the experts presenting at Content Marketing World 2024. They certainly don’t agree on the type of role to add, and a few had a challenge with just one role to add (that’s why you’ll see a couple of people share more than one idea).
They tackled content creation, data analysis, operations, and more.
Analyzers of what’s happening
Zack Kadish, senior SEO strategy director at Conductor, says many teams are not sufficiently monitoring their performance and understand how content is doing. “This should be an important step so the teams can analyze if they need to change the content or work different things into the process, so more people find what they are writing,” he says.
Among the possible analysis roles to consider:
Data analyst
Most content marketing teams lack a true data analyst. Someone who is looking deep into the numbers behind what is performing and what isn’t, what your audience is looking for more of, and what your team is wasting valuable time on. A dedicated data analyst can transform raw data into actionable insights that drive strategy, improve results, and help bridge the gap between creative content production and strategic business outcomes. — Ashley Baker, founder and chief marketing officer, Coastline Marketing LLC
Analytics specialist
The role I see most often missing is an analytics specialist. Measurement also happens to be the step most often missing from content marketing campaigns. Understanding how your content performs will help you improve the next round of content. It will help you understand what worked well and what didn’t work well.
An analytics associate can also help during campaign planning by evaluating customer and competitor data to help inform your strategy. Unfortunately, this role is often lacking on content teams. They either feel it is not warranted or have other team members who are less skilled in measurement and analytics take on this responsibility. — Andi Robinson, content strategist, Hijinx Marketing
Metator
“Metator” (a meta-related position) to track relationships among source and derivative / reused content across channels, including personalized variants (some generated by AI). This requires a lot of system tweaking, librarianship, and cleanup — or your platforms will become a complete mess, gumming up your personalization plans! — Tony Byrne, founder, Real Story Group
Data miner
Data mining outside of SEO data. Nothing makes me cringe more than when content teams use just SEO ranking data to create their strategy. The guys at Google have been saying the same thing since their existence: Write content that is meaningful, helpful, and relevant to your business. That may very well mean content that isn’t ranked and isn’t searched, but it can be a customer journey push. — Michael Bonfils, global managing director, Digital International Group
Competitive analyzer
An extremely valuable role in content marketing is competitive analysis. When you have accurate insight into your competitor’s content strategy, as well as their strengths and weaknesses, you can more effectively inform your content strategy. — Bernie Borges, vice president, global content marketing, iQor
Strategists
Keeping the big picture for your organization in mind can be challenging if your team is focused on producing and publishing content every day. But a 30,000-foot view is a must for sustainable success. These roles can help fulfill the vision:
Business translator
Most content teams lack someone who can translate clear business objectives into communication objectives. Additionally, more and more companies need to measure the value of their content efforts. Only in this way can you connect your goals to your results. —Pauline Lannoo, head of digital strategy, The Fat Lady
Chief content strategist
Unlike the traditional content strategist role often found in the marketing department, the chief content strategist oversees the entire organization’s content strategy. They ensure all content efforts align with overall business goals and audience needs, setting a master content strategy that guides all other content strategies. This ensures content creation is strategically aligned with company objectives and key performance indicators (KPIs). — Cathy McKnight, chief problem solver, TCA
Content strategist
It’s difficult to narrow it down to one role because every team needs a content strategist as well as someone to wrangle the data and focus on SEO. Most of the content teams I work with have a gap on the content strategy side or the data/SEO side. — Brian Piper, director of content strategy and assessment, University of Rochester
Bottom-line-related goals
As the strategist must never lose sight of the goals for content and marketing, these roles must never lose sight of connecting those goals to the overall business objectives:
Revenue-generator promoter
Add a growth marketing role — less on the digital marketing or paid ads and more specifically on how to quantify creative and content from revenue and potential revenue perspective.
Most content teams still separate themselves greatly from revenue-generating components and lean only on the awareness/nurturing side. In the modern era, when the content team can be connected all the way through, it makes it significantly easier to get approvals and tie value back to the sustainability and growth of the business itself. —Troy Sandidge, founder, Strategy Hackers
Business wrangler
Someone needs to have a high-level view of how the content aligns with the business goals and strategy and be aware of what other initiatives are going on throughout the business. And someone needs to take a very granular look at the current content performance and the market landscape to discover opportunities to optimize existing content for better performance and to identify market gaps or trending topics for new content. — Brian Piper, director of content strategy and assessment, University of Rochester
Operations
With so many responsibilities, operating a content and marketing program is difficult. These roles can help manage all that’s happening without taking time away from the frontline creators and back-of-the-house strategists.
Project manager
Always have a project manager on your content team. Even with a content management system or a product management system, it’s important to have someone who understands the process it takes to research, craft, and publish quality content.
Since content is a group sport at most companies, the project manager works to align all the key stakeholders across everyone’s timeline. If your creators spend time cat herding, they lose time creating high-value assets. And if your strategy team is also your project management team, they lose valuable time measuring the impact the content has on your business. — Amy Higgins, director, content strategy, Cloudflare
Content operations
Most content teams lack a content operations person. This person might be the marketing operations person, but they need to understand both the technology required for effective marketing and the algorithm nuances to utilizing content. From SEO to social platforms to creative software, these people would provide an immense impact, especially at a time when AI and automation are quickly accelerating operations. — A. Lee Judge, co-founder and CMO, Content Monsta
Content traffic manager
Typically, parts of the content traffic manager role are spread across multiple people and teams but centralizing it can bring major benefits. A content traffic manager coordinates and manages the workflow and distribution of content across all channels. They ensure content aligns with business goals, is audience-centric, and is published at the right time through the best channels.
They also facilitate cross-functional collaboration and maintain quality, relevance, and accuracy through regular audits. Their deep understanding of past, current, and planned content increases content ROI by reducing/eliminating duplication of effort, increasing reuse of existing content components and assets, and reducing internally generated content/campaign competition. — Cathy McKnight, chief problem solver, TCA
Content maintainer
If your team doesn’t include someone whose job it is to actively maintain your content by reviewing, updating, optimizing, or even retiring it when no longer useful, then your content will slowly but surely degrade and stop delivering the results you need and expect. — Carmen Hill, principal strategist and writer, Chill Content LLC
Content creation roles
You may think you can never have too many people creating the content itself. So, if that’s the type of role you want to add, just make sure you make their duties focused and strategic. Among the options to consider:
Content updater
Google’s API documentation leak proved that their algorithm takes content freshness into consideration when making ranking decisions. For most brands, updating existing content is a bigger opportunity than creating new content. But keeping content fresh requires a completely different skillset than planning and writing new content.
To fill this role, don’t hire a writer. Hire a content updater who is adept at data analysis, competitor research, visual design, hunting down broken links, and comparing competing pages in an SEO tool. — Dale Bertrand, president, Fire&Spark
Editor
Most content teams would benefit from having an in-house editor who has the sole role of reviewing content for grammar, punctuation, and house style, as well as offering general content development feedback. It’s easy to get caught up in the day-to-day, and it’s really helpful to have an outside set of eyes to look at your content and help you improve. — Melanie Deziel, co-founder, CreatorKitchen.com
Well-versed writers
Dedicated writers who are well-versed on the tone and voice of an organization. — Royna Sharifi, senior marketing campaign manager, Amazon Web Services
Objective creators
One of the biggest hurdles I see challenging content teams can’t be fixed with a single person in a single role. In the agency world, a content contributor who cannot separate their personal worth and identity from a piece of content will find themselves on a constant emotional roller coaster. This roller coaster can throw the whole team off balance, slow content production, lead to team members working around one another, prevent the giving and receiving of radically candid (but kind) feedback, and ultimately limit the content creator’s career. As Steven Pressfield says, “The professional self-validates. If you’re reading this blog, YOU are a professional.” — Haley Collins, director of operations, GPO
Executor
This is a difficult one to answer as I am my marketing team’s sole content marketer. It would be helpful to have a second person who can help execute ideas and make sure all bases are covered. Sole content marketers have to wear a lot of hats, and they can get pretty heavy after a while. — Beth Elderkin, content marketing manager, Informa Connect
Content-adjacent roles
Content and marketing teams are structured differently in many organizations. Some of these suggested roles may operate in another department, so think about how to work with them as if they were on your content and marketing team. Others bring a fresh perspective and focus. Among the content-adjacent roles to consider:
Public relations pro
Having a PR person work with your content team can really help with not only writing and storytelling but also devising and implementing a strategy to help more people see your content. Many PR pros bring a journalism/writing background to their roles, coupled with knowledge of how to pitch and place news, stories, and content.
The content and PR teams should collaborate (along with the social media team) to maximize their efforts. — Michelle Garrett, consultant and writer, Garrett Public Relations
Designer
Most content teams I’ve been part of or worked with lack a dedicated design resource. While tools like Canva can be incredibly powerful for creating brand images, teams often need a professional designer for their most important content investments.
Without a designer, most content marketers scramble to create videos and images and all sorts of other design content to use across their channels. This forces teams to DIY it or cut corners when it comes to creating full content experiences and delivering the best value to their community through content. — Erika Heald, founder and chief content officer, Erika Heald Marketing Consulting
Audience advocate
You wouldn’t dedicate a person’s full-time role to audience advocacy, so spread it across all content team members. The more we advocate for our audience and deeply understand their challenges, needs, and perspectives, the more impact our content will create. — Dennis Shiao, founder, Attention Retention
Customer guru
Content teams should closely coordinate with their demand gen and customer marketing counterparts. To drive engagement and conversion, content marketers must know everything there is to know about their audiences — their behaviors, their activities, and their interests. Aligning with the teams who have direct line of sight into these insights ensures the content being created is the right kind of content, guiding buyers through their buying journey rather than adding more noise. — Josh Baez, senior manager, demand generation, NetLine
Specialists
In my experience, the greatest gap is having specialists with deep expertise on content teams. There’s a false perception that anyone can write, anyone can research, etc., and anyone can grab an image for art, but for standout results, you need experts. — Jenn VandeZande, editor-in-chief, SAP CX + Industries
Now hiring
With all those potential roles, what would you pick? And if you do get the budget to add a team member, take time to consider the options. Look at your content and marketing goals along with your content and marketing team org chart. If you see gaps where no one is responsible for tackling a critical step to achieving a goal, that may just be the role you add.
Register to attend Content Marketing World in San Diego. Use the code BLOG100 to save $100. Can’t attend in person this year? Check out the Digital Pass for access to on-demand session recordings from the live event through the end of the year.
MORE ADVICE FROM CMWORLD SPEAKERS:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
Everybody expects content about refrigeration products to be boring.
That’s why the marketing team at Heatcraft Refrigeration Products wanted to flip the script in B2B marketing.
The division of Lennox International manufactures and sells refrigeration products such as walk-in, reach-in, and warehouse coolers, to restaurants, supermarkets, gas stations, and warehouses.
So, the marketing team creates engaging, unexpected, and personable content that helps Heatcraft stand apart from the competition.
Heatcraft’s content marketing director, Pete Grasso, and digital marketing director, Tim Fletcher, detailed the experience in their Content Marketing World presentation. Let’s go through their how-to and learn about the business results achieved.
Create compelling videos
Before Tim gets to the B2B, he shares a B2C example. Recently, he bought furniture that needed assembling. Instead of reading the printed instruction manual, he scanned a QR code from the manufacturer and watched a step-by-step assembly video.
In the B2B world, Heatcraft adopts a similar strategy, making short, compelling, and educational videos on how to install its refrigeration products.
“Like Reels and TikTok, we break our videos down into shorter, consumable videos,” Tim says.
Experienced technicians don’t need the content, but the newcomers do. “It’s all about making it relevant to the audience that you’re trying to reach,” Pete says.
Tim and Pete shared how to create relevant content:
Solve your audience’s pain points. Heatcraft imagines scenarios and challenges faced by contractors in the field. It thinks about what junior installers need to learn and gets to making videos on those topics.
Speak your audience’s language. For example, Heatcraft makes a product called a “unit cooler,” but contractors call it an “evaporator.” So, Heatcraft uses “evaporator” on its website, blog posts, and videos. “If we called it anything else, it wouldn’t be authentic to the contractor,” Tim says.
Avoid corporate-speak. B2B content usually mimics corporate-speak. It’s expected. But Tim says, “Use the 90% to have fun, be engaging, be compelling, and you still have that 10% to get in the corporate-speak and make your boss happy.”
Adopt a fresh approach. Pete says, “We don’t want to be the same as others. What’s better? A black-and-white PDF technical document with a lot of jargon on it or a voiced-over animated video that can explain the same thing in a much more compelling way?”
Start an in-house video operation
You don’t need a studio, high-end cameras, and a six-figure budget to create the unexpected in video. Pete and Tim use a do-it-yourself model with an assist from a freelance designer to create 20 to 30 videos per year. They write the scripts, create the storyboards, shoot the videos, and distribute them.
“We started with a $500 Lumix camera, some cheap microphones, and no external lighting,” Pete says. “As we started becoming more self-sufficient and producing really great content, leadership bought in.”
Pete and Tim now work from a studio at Heatcraft’s headquarters. They purchased a Blackmagic Pocket Cinema Camera 4K , the same kind used by reality TV shows. They bought drones.
Now, leadership goes to them for requests that go beyond marketing-related videos. “It’s nice that they bought in. They see the results, and they see the value of making great videos,” Pete says.
In the first two years of video publishing, Heatcraft generated over 1 million views. “For a B2C company, maybe that’s not big, but for a B2B manufacturing company, that’s huge for us,” Tim says.
Apply B2C social media strategies
Heatcraft also takes a more typical B2C approach to its social media marketing. Visit any of its social profiles and you’ll see that only 25% of its posts relate to Heatcraft products.
In three-fourths of the content, you’re likely to see videos, photos, and posts of team members and customers. Showing the people behind their products creates a stronger bond with customers and prospects, and it’s something their competitors don’t do.
“We also found that this was an awesome way to connect with the audience and gain market share through that highlighting of diversity, that family culture that we have, and showing the different ways that we work together,” Tim says.
Example: Family Always Matters
Heatcraft has a manufacturing initiative called “Quality Always Matters.” It uses the name in a hashtag, too. Pete and Tim reworded that initiative to promote the Heatcraft team — #PeopleAlwaysMatter and created this related video, titled “Families Always Matter,” featuring clips of the Johnson family working on the factory floor and letting viewers see the people behind the products.
Since adopting the B2C mindset a year ago, Heatcraft’s follower count on LinkedIn and Facebook has increased by 34%, and engagement has jumped from 3.1% to 5.4%. In addition, Heatcraft’s following is 10 times larger than its closest competitors.
Leverage niche influencers
At Content Marketing World, Onalytica’s Ashley Zeckman covered the six influencer types in her presentation — one of which is the niche expert. These influencers have smaller audiences but hyper-relevant content.
Pete and Tim recommend spending time to research niche experts in your industry. “It’s going to take a lot of time on the front end to make sure it’s the right fit. Don’t choose to engage with the first influencer that you come across with a large audience,” Tim says.
They studied prospective influencers to ensure that their audiences matched Heatcraft’s target audience. They also observed how well the influencers interacted with their audience.
To reach the contractor audience, they partnered with Chris Stephens of HVACR VIDEOS.
Chris Stephens of HVACR VIDEOS partnered with Heatcraft brands as part of its influencer marketing.
Pete shares that Chris didn’t set out to be an influencer but started filming service calls to educate the technicians in his company on the proper way to do things. “He made his YouTube channel live, and it just kind of exploded because now you’ve got refrigeration people from all over watching it,” Pete says.
Chris creates educational videos about Heatcraft products. “He’s done a lot of videos that’s gotten our message out there, but it’s coming from someone who’s authentic and speaking to his peers,” Pete says.
In the first year, Chris’ videos generated 400,000 views and 250 to 300 comments per video. While the high view count is impressive, Heatcraft finds the audience interaction more attractive.
Chris’ work also gathers input. “We’re finding out about issues in the wild, about the products that we can then bring to our engineers, to our quality teams, and our product managers to actually improve products based on these conversations that are happening,” Tim says.
Are you ready to flip the boring script?
Pete and Tim found a way to make content for the manufacturer of refrigeration products engaging and unexpected. They shifted to video content and worked with niche influencers. And they did it all by focusing less on the products and more on the people who make and use those products.
So, as you adopt a B2C approach for your B2B brand, keep Tim’s advice in mind: “Focus on your customer, not your own greatness.”
Register to attend Content Marketing World in San Diego. Use the code BLOG100 to save $100. Can’t attend in person this year? Check out the Digital Pass for access to on-demand session recordings from the live event through the end of the year.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
Thanks to AI, any marketer can quickly create a blog post, article, or other type of content in minutes.
But whether that content will resonate with your audience is another story — especially if you rely on keyword research and AI’s generic ideas to fuel your strategy. It might boost your search rankings but won’t necessarily build brand authority, create trusted connections, or result in a positive marketing impact.
To achieve all those goals through your content marketing efforts, you need a deeper understanding of your audience’s needs. You also need the right data, including insights on who is accessing your content, what they want to accomplish, and what content they’re engaging with most.
To help set you up for success, we’ve compiled 10 tips on leveraging data to sharpen your content marketing strategy. Follow these recommendations to create content that demonstrates your brand’s unique value and drives stronger marketing performance.
Tip 1: Go beyond basic demographics
Don’t rely solely on age, gender, or location data to inform your content approach. Instead, dig deeper with research methodologies that provide a clearer understanding of your audience’s behaviors, motivations, and preferences.
This can be accomplished with audience surveys, customer interviews, and social media listening techniques. Useful insights can also be gathered from your existing website analytics, customer feedback channels, and engagement history data.
What you discover can point you toward ways to optimize your messaging, targeting, and channel selection.
Tip 2: Focus on topics, not just keywords
Yes, SEO is important. However, chasing high-volume keywords won’t necessarily improve your rankings or help distinguish your content. Use insights from your audience data to create content that genuinely interests them.
Start by applying the information you’ve collected through the research techniques suggested above. For example, let’s say the data shows your target audience wants advice on how they stand to benefit from machine learning. You can fill that knowledge deficit with topically resonant content optimized to drive search traffic to your company’s website.
Tip 3: Align with sales and customer success
Your company’s sales and customer service teams regularly interact with members of your target audience, making them valuable sources to tap for content insights.
These organizational partners have direct access to insights like:
Consumers’ frequently asked questions
Common objections they encounter
Behavioral trends and preferences they’ve observed
How existing customers use (or intend to use) your products and services.
Ask them to share what they’ve learned through their customer conversations. Then, use it to inform your decisions on the topics and ideas to write about. It will help your content better address real-world challenges, and your internal teams can leverage that content in their outreach efforts.
Tip 4: Develop core content first
Choosing specific content types and topics can be overwhelming. There are millions of conversations you can create — how do you know where to start?
Take your cues from the learnings gathered by following the three tips above: Look at the data you’ve collected, narrow your topic list, establish who your target audience is, and create a blueprint for the overarching content marketing strategy you intend to use.
Start with content highlighting your unique value proposition and addressing your audience’s main pain points. Then, create supplementary content to support your overall strategy.
Core content can differ depending on how well-established your brand is. Newer brands should cast a wide net with content built to drive brand awareness. Brands that are already well-known or have built a strong customer following may want to prioritize bottom-of-the-funnel topics to connect with consumers ready to convert.
Tip 5: Create a logical content hierarchy
Use website analytics to structure your content experience so it helps guide your audience through their buying journey. You can analyze data to identify common questions to create Q&As and how-to content, as people often search for answers and are more likely to resonate with your content if you provide helpful information.
Additionally, focusing on evergreen content — assets that have remained relevant over time and can easily be updated, according to your data — should be a significant part of your core content. Structure it to lead your audience to the specific content they may have shown interest in. Include Q&As, how-to articles, content clusters, and evergreen topics to funnel your audience into their particular interest areas.
Tip 6: Publish with purpose and update existing content
Your strategy should have a distribution plan that targets specific audiences for key topics. This will help your audiences discover the right content at the right time to impact their decision-making.
Know why you publish each piece and where it will be most effective. Continue to use this as a guide for future content.
The world of content is an ever-changing place — sometimes rapidly, too. That’s why keeping track of published content and periodically reviewing its performance data is just as important as publishing new content. You don’t want valuable information to just sit on your website, collecting dust.
As time passes, information in your content may become outdated, or audiences might demand new details on the topic. Address these issues by updating or improving underperforming content before creating new content. Minor updates can boost rankings and conversions.
Tip 7: Diversify and personalize content across the customer journey
Create different types of content for relevant appeal at each stage of the customer journey, from awareness to post-purchase support. That can include blogs, social media posts, infographics, and multimedia content formats.
While demonstrating your expertise, don’t be shy about making your content a fun and interactive experience for customers. Creating content like surveys, personalized offers, quizzes, and events are great ways to demonstrate your brand’s expertise while also providing consumers with a fun and interactive experience to engage with.
Using a customer data platform (CDP) can help you deliver personalized content based on insights gathered through your customers’ prior browsing, engagement, and purchase behaviors.
Tip 8: Publish consistently and prioritize human resonance
Quality is key, but volume and cadence also matter. According to a HubSpot study, publishing 5-10 articles per month leads to a good ROI and helps you keep content relevant and site traffic consistent. This also continuously checks off keywords your audience regularly searches, further feeding into your SEO data.
Keep a keen eye on your ROI. This measure of your content performance can tell you how often to post and allows you to try out new ideas. Simply put, if some articles are more popular than others, you can decide to focus on creating more content around those high-performing topics.
Use AI for research and ideas but rely on human creativity for writing. AI is fine for research purposes, but it takes away the human aspect of content, so be sure to include well-written pieces that will resonate with your audience. Incorporate customer reviews, testimonials, and social media posts to add authenticity and credibility to your content.
Tip 9: Test everything
Use A/B testing to find what works best in your content, design, CTAs, and distribution methods. Test your layout, design, headlines and subheadings, and other pieces of content and see what impact they have on your organizational goals.
Tip 10: Centralize content management
Use a modern CMS to manage, publish, and measure your content performance across all channels. This will help maintain consistency and enable you to personalize content at scale.
Remember to adapt to the ever-changing trends in content creation. You’ll need to adjust accordingly to best reach your target audience. By following these tips, you’ll have a data-driven strategy for content marketing that genuinely connects with your audience and drives results.
About Brightspot
Brightspot is your CMS solution for delivering brilliant, modern digital experiences with a flexible, fast, and secure platform that you can trust to consistently elevate your content approach. An enterprise-grade powerhouse of tools and templates that can be tailored to your specific business needs for today and beyond. Our robust, ready-to-go library is fully customizable to meet the demands of your business, content contributors, and developers. But we don’t stop there: We offer the flexibility to craft front-end experiences, ensuring content delivery exactly as you need it. For more information on how Brightspot is the right CMS platform for your company, visit our website here. Ready to learn about the ways Brightspot can support your digital strategy? Chat with an expert today!
Do you remember when your whole family went to the same doctor? Believe it or not, that wasn’t uncommon not so long ago.
That one doctor was the go-to resource anytime you or a family member got sick, hurt themselves, or needed medical advice. You’d have a checkup once a year. And you’d only see a specialist if you needed a specific test or treatment.
Sounds quaint, doesn’t it?
A friend recently told me he’d been having chronic headaches. I said the (most unhelpful) thing everyone says: “It sounds like you should see your doctor.”
My friend paused and then asked, “Which one?”
Should he call the cardiologist who treated him for high blood pressure? The ENT who fixed his ear infection? The ophthalmologist who checks his eyes? The endocrinologist he’d seen for something else? Or his primary care physician, who he’d wait months to see because the practice has so many patients?
The number of physicians focusing on a specialty has steadily increased for the last 60 years. From 1961 to 1970, 10% of internal medicine physicians went into a subspecialty. From 2011-2015, that figure was 88%. In fact, only about 25%. of U.S. doctors handle adult primary care.
But what does any of this have to do with marketing?
Marketing suffers from the super-specialization trend, too
One of the biggest marketing challenges today is balancing the number and type of team resources needed. Modern marketing plans have always changed frequently. But shifting plans once meant simply shifting marketing generalists’ attention to different tasks. The resources remained the same — the team members just performed different activities.
In 2024, though, a marketing operation requires hundreds of niche skills. Some specialties emerged around technologies or platforms (think CRM, e-commerce, marketing automation, content management, customer data platforms, digital asset management, and analytics. Some revolve around creative specialties (design, editorial writing, copywriting, social media content, email writing, multimedia creators/editors, and event management). And then there are platform specialists (SEO, content strategy, influencer wranglers, ad network managers, etc.).
And now, of course, artificial intelligence specialists are in the mix.
Here’s a sneak peek at the upcoming 2025 Content Marketing Career and Salary Outlook for 2025 (publishing in September): About three-quarters of marketers (76%) say they need to master specialized or niche skills to remain relevant in the face of modern technologies such as AI.
Modern marketing is becoming a super-specialized practice. Balancing the need for specific skill sets to execute your existing strategy against the need for agile teams of generalists who can handle inevitable strategy shifts might be the most significant marketing operations challenges companies face.
Specialist or generalist? That’s the question
So, what can we do about it? Does it make more sense to hire more deep specialists or more generalists?
Specialists know a great deal about one thing but perhaps little about anything else. They’ll help you differentiate on one particular thing.
Generalists, on the other hand, know a little bit about many things but may lack deep knowledge about one particular thing. Their range gives you the agility to shift priorities quickly.
This question reminds me of a story that might be an urban legend (but I like it anyway). As the story goes, someone asked the UPS CEO how they encourage such differentiating customer service from their drivers. The CEO answered, “We don’t hire drivers and teach them great customer service. We hire great customer service reps and teach them to drive.”
If that sounds like an argument for specialists — it isn’t (because either skill could be considered a specialist role. Instead, it argues for a conscious decision by the company on where they want to focus their employee development.
Does that approach work in marketing? I think it does.
Should you hire talented content creators and teach them how to understand an analytics report, work with AI, or excel in social media? Or should you hire deep analytics, AI, or social media specialists and teach them to create differentiating content?
The decision doesn’t matter — as long as you make a conscious decision one way or the other.
But I’ve found the first way works out better.
The software company where I was CMO years ago operated in a niche market that required considerable subject matter expertise and technical knowledge. We settled on a content marketing approach as the primary strategy, and I knew from my days as a writer in the entertainment business how rare content creation talent is.
So, my philosophy was to hire the best content creators and designers (specialists) I could find. I felt I could teach them the basics of media buying, analytics, and other classic marketing planning. In other words, I hired fantastic content creators and taught them the industry and marketing.
Spoiler alert: It worked. But only because two fundamental things ended up being true:
The business agreed to invest time and resources to help the content creators develop subject matter expertise and marketing skills. Developing expertise isn’t an overnight thing — it’s an ongoing process.
The content creators wanted to learn to become better marketers. In my consulting work, I’ve encountered many marketing teams made up of specialists who don’t have any interest in the topics important to the business. They say, “I don’t care about our industry. This is just a job.” I’ve even had some say, “I don’t care about marketing even though I’m in marketing. I just do great content.” Those people feel their job is simply to make sure the i’s are dotted and the t’s crossed while earning better pay than they could in other jobs. I tell these folks to start looking now – because they won’t be with the company for long.
Assuming your company meets these requirements, you need three elements to balance your team’s skills.
1. Create an education program
I often advise my consulting clients that they create ongoing knowledge-sharing opportunities. For example, in my CMO role, I ran a program called Pizza and Knowledge Sharing Fridays. We’d invite technical subject matter specialists to give an informal class to marketers over pizza. They’d talk about industry trends, go in-depth on a particular challenge, or provide 101 education on how a specific technology worked.
But I didn’t just end their education on pizza day. All the marketers would need to demonstrate their new knowledge in a real-world application for our business.
2. Integrate generalist ride-alongs into your specialists’ processes
A CMO friend recently told me about the incredibly advanced content strategy for his brand’s website. His team had gotten personalization and targeted content set up and integrated it into their Salesforce platform. But now he’s worried. “We’ve trained these martech specialists to become some of the deepest experts in the field,” he said. “I’m petrified that they’ll discover how much they’re now worth in the job market.”
And that’s another reason to have people work cross-functionally. When you have more people who understand what’s going on, you reduce the risk of losing that knowledge when someone leaves. Because every specialist will, at some point, be in high demand and recognize their market worth.
So get your specialists involved in marketing projects. I’ve yet to find a marketing concept that isn’t relatively straightforward to understand. As my mentor, marketing professor Philip Kotler, once said, “Marketing takes a day to learn. Unfortunately, it takes a lifetime to master.”
3. Consider renting (outsourcing) as you scale
You want to invest in people you believe will stay with you for some time. So, most education investment should go into employees rather than freelancers. But sometimes, it makes sense to rent rather than hire your specialists.
For example, projects (such as implementing a new digital asset management system, search taxonomy, workflow, or content marketing approach) don’t require full-time hires.
You wouldn’t hire a full-time plumber for your home, right? But you also wouldn’t invest time in learning more than plumbing basics. So, you shouldn’t purchase a complex content management system, for example, and leave the marketing team to figure out the implementation plan and workflow changes independently.
Instead, create a resourcing strategy that can handle temporary initiatives that require specialists for a specific time and set of activities. One side effect of marketing’s super-specialization is the rise of fractional marketing services and the plentiful availability of freelance help.
Build a balanced strategy
Over time, you can build a strategy that balances specialists, generalists, and outsourced experts. For example, you might find that you end up with levels of expertise that can be applied as marketing strategies evolve.
For content creation, as an example, you might have:
A level-one expert content creator — an in-house SME who can write and even teach other writers
A level-one expert freelancer — an outsourced SME who creates content occasionally or creates frameworks within which the team can create
A level-two expert creator — an in-house marketer who knows enough about content creation to write the framework or transform raw material into great content
A level-three expert creator — a freelance writer who is always available to help transform raw material into well-constructed articles (with some input)
A level-four expert — A junior in-house or freelance writer who needs well-formed topics and subject matter support to turn out a decent article
Perform an audit of your current team skills. Then, build your hiring, education, and freelance plan to develop your marketing team strategy.
Once you do, you’ll know which doctor to call for every marketing pain.
It’s your story. Tell it well.
Updated from a March 2022 article.
Robert Rose consults and hosts workshops on helping marketing teams align their marketing processes to all kinds of technologies – including generative AI. Contact him to learn about those programs.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
A huge leader dropped out of a major campaign this week.
Oh, you thought we meant that national race in the United States? No, that’s news, but this is news of a different kind.
This week, Google decided to say, “Hey, remember third-party cookies — the thing that we’ve been telling you for four years is going away because we’re developing an alternative. Just kidding, we’re going to keep them after all.”
Can it really just do that? In recent years, entire companies have launched, taking advantage of the “cookieless” future.
Marketing pundits, like CMI’s Robert Rose, have been saying for years the cookieless future is already here, and you need to deal with it. And now, they were wrong.
So, we went back to our chief strategy advisor to ask for his take this week. Watch the video, or read on to learn what he has to say now:
Internet user knows best
The world of digital advertising and marketing shook this week. In a blog post Tuesday, Google announced an “updated approach that elevates user choice.” It’s ending efforts to deprecate the third-party cookie. Instead, it will “let people make an informed choice that applies across their web browsing …”
Yes, that’s what the president of Coca-Cola said when acknowledging that New Coke was a bad idea.
But do customers really know?
Cookie saga goes on and on and on
If you haven’t followed the cookie drama, well, it turns out you’re better for it.
In 2020, Google promised to make consumer privacy a priority and get rid of third-party cookies in its internet browser, Chrome. It emphasized how marketers and advertisers could accomplish things such as personalized content, targeted advertising across sites, social media, and even lookalike targeting based on browsing behavior.
If you followed us at Content Marketing Institute, you know I’ve had a lot to say about this.
In May, I wrote about Google’s decision to delay the end of cookies for the third time in as many years. In February, I discussed Google’s Privacy Sandbox and its “promising” experiences for advertisers. In March, the Internet Advertising Bureau (IAB) issued a report saying marketers were nonplussed about the whole thing, and I said that was a mistake.
I’ve been talking about a world without third-party cookies since January 2020, when I noted that Google was going to embark on this grand adventure.
Sheesh, maybe I should have learned over the past four years, but you can’t blame me for repeatedly raising the issue. In January, Google actually started testing a meaningful percentage of browsers without third-party cookies enabled.
Is the cookie drama really over?
Anyway, enough about that. What’s the ultimate takeaway for marketers?
Google’s reversing course about third-party cookies does NOT minimize the importance of getting your first-party data house in order. It does mean personalization based on consumption data across social media, websites, and other media is here to stay.
As a data point, when Apple turned personalized ads into an opt-in feature, only 25% of users said yes. But when users must opt out of tracking, only 23% set their browser that way.
Google will almost assuredly make opting out of tracking an option users must turn on.
Is this good or bad for marketers?
Well, it’s bad for all those technology solutions paving the way for a cookieless future for marketing and advertising.
But ultimately, I think the whole thing might just be a short-term reprieve.
With U.S. elections coming up, depending on which side wins, privacy legislation may finally come up and settle the cookie debate one way or another. Google could have it both ways. It gets the benefits of third-party cookies (meaning you can only target in its ecosystem), and it can safely claim it’s not its fault.
I don’t think the story of the third-party cookie deprecation is dead. But, you know, you may want to keep my record in mind and make up your own mind.
Want more content marketing tips, insights, and examples? Subscribe to workday or weekly emails from CMI.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT: Don’t Wait To See How Cookies Crumble; Cook Up a New Data Strategy Now
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
A dozen applications arrived shortly after the posting for a copywriter on the content marketing team at The TemPositions Group of Companies went live.
Walter Prystowsky, director of marketing, says he expected to have more than 100 within the week.
“Many of these applicants seem to be very qualified with years of experience producing a high volume of content. It’s tough to choose only a handful to speak with,” he says.
The conundrum Walter faces as an employer is even more challenging on the other side of the process — the hundreds (or more) of job applicants vying for the same position.
Well over half of marketers (68%) in CMI’s upcoming Content Marketing Career and Salary Survey (September 2024) say finding a professional job in marketing is more challenging today compared to five years ago.
So, how do job searchers stand out in a crowded, challenging marketplace? What do the people hiring content marketers want to see? What mistakes should you avoid?
A handful of marketers on the frontline of hiring share their processes and what they wished job searchers would do (and not do).
Should you write a cover letter?
Conversations about the cover letter abound on LinkedIn and in professional groups. Many job searchers say if it’s required, they just use a generative AI tool to create it. Others say they never send a cover letter.
Walter says he doesn’t ask for cover letters, though he would read one if someone took the time to write it. “A generic cover letter singing our praises blindly without any substance doesn’t add much,” he says.
“What would stand out to me is if the person did specific research on our company, read our content, and had thoughtful insights on the direction they would take if they got the opportunity.”
HiredSupport is another company that doesn’t put much stock in a cover letter. “I prefer to ask the candidates questions, such as why should I hire them or what sets them apart from other candidates,” says Joel Wolfe, company founder and president.
My preference? I find cover letters work especially well when applying for writing-related jobs. A good cover letter can showcase the applicant’s writing and business skills (or at least show that they don’t have them). When you can write a few paragraphs to show why you are the best choice to help the business achieve its goals, you also demonstrate that you can write persuasively to get the employer’s target audience to take action. (And if it doesn’t get read, no worries. You just drafted your in-person sales pitch for the job.)
What should the resume include?
Mariah Obiedzinski Tang, assistant vice president of content marketing at Stamats, says she wants to see candidates demonstrate their growth.
“That can look many ways — advancements in careers, the addition of responsibility, doing tasks outside their comfort zone, and reporting personal/professional takeaways,” she says.
Most importantly, candidates should show they care about their work and aren’t just saying, “I’m good; hire me.”
But how do you show that growth? How do you share that you care about the job?
Mariah suggests adding a “What I Learned” subheading on your resume to grab the prospective employer’s attention. Highlight those out-of-scope duties or challenging assignments. “It gives you a natural chance for a narrative instead of just listing duties,” she explains.
Also, tailor your resume to the context of the job description. “Your resume should show that you meet or exceed the qualifications, not just that you’ve had a series of content or content-adjacent roles,” Mariah says.
Seeing a strategic alignment is also important to Laura Goldstone, senior director of communications strategy and head of brand at AdDaptive Intelligence.
In fact, candidates make it to the top of her list when they prove they can think and act strategically, connect the dots from strategy to execution, and care about understanding and elevating the brand’s content strategy.
“You don’t have to have one-to-one experience. I just need to feel confident that you can do the job based on the skills and wisdom you’ve honed,” Laura says.
How do you prove that? Explain the skills used in earlier situations and how those skills will help your new employer or what lessons you’ve learned that could be applied in the new role.
At TemPositions, Walter wants to see a track record showing someone who can think strategically about how to align content with business goals. For the copywriter opening for example, candidates who go further in the process quantify their record of producing a high volume of SEO-optimized content.
As far as a candidate’s employment timeline, Walter says one or two short stints aren’t a red flag, but a career of one year here, six months there, etc., is problematic. “It’s hard to trust that they’ll spend much time on my team. A green flag is career progression at a previous company, especially in a short time frame,” he explains.
What about the interview?
Before you land an interview with the hiring manager, expect some additional steps.
At HiredSupport, candidates submit their applications and then take a pre-screening test — a set of technical questions only a professional would know.
Walter at TemPositions used to interview anyone he thought could do the job, taking two to three weeks to screen, interview, and present the candidates to the CEO. But that’s too much work on top of his day-to-day responsibilities so the internal HR team, which knows his hiring preferences, creates a shortlist of candidates for him.
At Stamats, Mariah says she interviews about 10 to 30% of the applicants depending on the role’s required skill level and number of applications. Instead of writing assessment tests, she asks the applicant to pull up a piece of work they’re proud of and describe the writing, research, editing, distributing process, etc. She also asks what they would have done differently.
“This gives a solid indication of their deeper skill in content structure and strategy, not just writing in a controlled environment,” Mariah says.
AdDaptive Intelligence’s Laura says she likes to ask situational and behavioral questions to inspire the candidate to tell a story. For example, instead of asking what marketing tech stack candidates use, she asks them to tell her about a time they had to learn how to use a tool, highlighting the process and outcome.
Among her other storytelling question prompts:
Tell me about one way you’ve grown in the last year.
Tell me about a time when you had to work cross-functionally, highlighting what you do to make the collaboration successful.
How do you build trust in relationships up and across?
“Candidates with detailed stories that answer my questions and show me how they might act favorably in this role shine,” she says.
Laura also listens during the interview to assess not only the hard skills possessed by the candidate but their soft skills, too. She wants to learn how they communicate, the culture they thrive best in, their organizational skills, their priorities, and the conditions to do their best work. “Those intangibles are incredibly important to me as I build a multifaceted but close-knit team,” she says.
Penny Gralewski, vice president of marketing at Rimo3, suggests candidates be prepared with challenge-action-result stories. Walk through a business problem that generated a need for content. Explain how you collaborated with the other teams involved to research, write, and produce the content. Then, brag about the business outcomes.
“Hiring managers learn so much about talent, teamwork, and business mindset when content marketers bring work samples, stories about the content’s creation, and metrics about its impact,” she says.
Take time to think
What mistakes do these hiring marketers see candidates make? They all boil down the answer to two words: blah responses.
“Candidates are quick to answer the questions I send them. They don’t read what I am asking and give me a bland response that lacks technical knowledge,” Joel says.
Instead, he says, candidates should take a beat and respond using a laptop computer to get away from the notification bombardments and disruptions that happen on a mobile phone.
Laura says she often gets generic replies to these questions: What keeps you happy in a job? Where do you get your motivation? What about this role intrigued you and inspired you to reply?
“I tend to get blanket statements or vague responses that don’t tell me anything about the person,” she says. “If someone can answer those questions with something illuminating, actionable, and unique, my ears will perk up.”
Perking up the ears of a hiring manager is the utmost accomplishment for any job searcher in content and marketing. But to get to that point, you better use your content skills to tell a story about how your professional story will help further the hiring company’s story.
Want more content marketing tips, insights, and examples? Subscribe to workday or weekly emails from CMI.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
Original research creates a unique differentiator in your content marketing program, but not everyone or any AI tool can do it successfully.
Before you ever pose a question, you must know why you’re creating it (i.e., how it will help your audience and your brand), which formats you’ll use to package the findings (i.e., blog articles, e-books, webinars, videos), and how you’ll distribute the content you create from the findings. You also must ensure that it fits within organizational constraints, including budget, staff, and expertise.
But that’s not enough.
Conducting high-quality research requires an understanding of:
Research methodologies and objectives
Sampling procedures
Questionnaire design
Project management
Data analysis
Reporting
That said, before you ever launch a survey, answer these eight questions to build the project on solid ground.
1. What is your objective?
Begin with your audience in mind. The research should provide valuable insights for them. Research conducted for self-serving purposes could turn people off.
Be clear about what you want to study — and why.
For example, Aha Media and Mantis Research conducted research to help marketers at health care providers understand the impact of plain language in B2B health care marketing materials. Do readers prefer plain language? Are they more likely to act on the information? (Spoiler alert: Clarity is indeed a competitive advantage.)
They shared the study results in webinars, social media posts, blog posts, and more. (Check out this article on CMI about it: New Study Reveals Clear Writing Tips for B2B Marketers.)
2. Is the data already available?
Once you’re clear on the objective, look for any secondary research — published information — on your subject.
Limit the time spent on this phase so it doesn’t get expensive. Depending on your topic and objective, the volume of potential resources could be big. A basic internet search or prompts into a generative AI tool can lead to industry association data, libraries, government reports, etc. Also, look at your brand’s internal information, such as marketing stats, sales data, etc.
If you discover good existing research, you may find it sufficient to use and properly cite for your content marketing objective instead of conducting new research. On the other hand, your discoveries may identify gaps your research could fill.
If you proceed with an original research project, your objective(s) determines the methodology. Qualitative research (e.g., personal interviews, focus groups) or perhaps a quantitative study (e.g., surveys) — or a combination of the two — may best suit your objective.
To generate credible results, you can’t wing it. A high-quality, original research project for content marketing takes time, expertise, and budget.
“I’ve been managing original research projects for the last 15 years. The single most common problem I see from people who are just getting started with research is that their survey design does not unearth any interesting themes or stories,” says Clare McDermott, founder of Ravn Research.
“The best research uncovers friction — insights that are surprising, uncomfortable, or expose some type of weakness/failing. Designing surveys for storytelling takes experience. That’s not to say people should not experiment with research, but it does help to sign on experts who can advise at the survey design stage.”
Among the questions to answer:
Who will manage the project? Do you have a qualified staff member with time available, or will you need to outsource it?
Who will design the qualitative survey instruments (e.g., moderator guide, screening questionnaire, question/discussion guide), recruit the participants, and conduct the interviews?
Who will design the quantitative questionnaire, program and host the survey, collect, tabulate, and analyze the data?
What survey tools will be needed?
Who will write and design the report? Will it be done in-house or will you outsource it
Who will develop the strategy for creating content pieces around the insights and distribute the findings?
How much will it cost?
What are your ROI goals? Are they financial, metrics-based, or something different? For example, do you want to attract X number of new visitors to view the findings on your site who will convert at a rate of Y% to email subscribers? Or do you want to generate X number of qualified leads from the research-focused content who will convert at a rate of Y% to sales?
If you don’t have the expertise on the team to answer these questions, you should invest the time (and money) to learn or find someone who does.
4. Do you have a quality list?
How will you find the people who can provide the insights you’re looking for? You could use your subscriber list, partner with another company, rent a third-party list, use a list-on-demand feature in survey software, and pay for access to a panel of prescreened participants.
You can distribute the survey in multiple ways. At CMI, we usually send survey invitations by email to a known audience of interest (e.g., B2B marketers who use content marketing). Other options include embedding a survey link on your website, including a link in blog posts and newsletters, running banner ads that link to your survey, or distributing a link on your social media channels.
Your choice will be based on your objectives.
Rather than getting into all the pros and cons of list options and survey distribution methods here, I stress the importance of understanding sampling and methodology and having the expertise to address these issues. If you don’t, seek outside assistance.
5. How will you interpret the data?
After the data has been collected, edited, cleaned, and coded, you move into the analysis and writing phase.
The research methodology will have an impact on the analysis. For example, an in-depth analysis of qualitative data requires different skills than analyzing quantitative data. Do you have this talent on staff? If not, who will analyze the findings for you?
It’s beneficial to have several people see the data. Someone might observe something that another person missed. This analysis may also reveal findings that require further research.
A word of caution: Your report’s text and visual presentation — as well as its written methodology — affect the market’s perception of your study. Ensure that the writer and designer have sufficient understanding of communicating research effectively, such as not making conclusions unsupported by the data and visualizing it in an easily understood way.
6. What type of content will you create?
Your goals will inform your choice of content formats. Consider developing these types around the original research findings:
In your format selection process, also evaluate the resources necessary to create, distribute, and manage that content.
7. Will you gate the research?
Based on your research project’s goals — and prior to releasing the content (e.g., primary report, e-book) — decide if you will require recipients to provide contact or other information to receive the results (i.e., gate it).
Since CMI’s first research report in 2010, we have never gated our annual marketing trends report. The research’s goal is to attract and build an audience by providing helpful information to content marketers, not to collect leads. The research helps us build relationships with site visitors, many of whom become newsletter subscribers.
If you prioritize collecting leads over the possibility of turning off the potential audience, ensure that your findings are so valuable that people will happily give you their contact information. If you’re not sure, try some A/B testing or gate the research for a limited time to see how it performs.
8. Are you prepared for the attention?
Be ready for the questions your findings will bring. Be prepared to:
Explain the methodology and interpretation.
Field public relations inquiries. Contact your media relations person as you plan the study to identify how they can help advance the reach of the findings. Check out these tips from my colleague Amanda Subler: A Step-by-Step Guide to Get More Eyes on Your Research.
Respond to questions and comments on social media.
Reply to requests for interviews — talking about your research is a great way to generate interest in it.
Be open to new ideas and questions offered by people who read the research. Feedback can be useful when planning your next research project.
Keep your sales team in the loop. Determine what your team should do with prospects who learn about your products/services through the research-related content. How will your team move these people to the next step in their relationship with your company?
TIP: Stay abreast of similar research conducted by competitors. Review their methodology and results so you can intelligently discuss the overall research in your industry with your audience and team.
Ready for research
No one-size-fits-all approach exists for original research in content marketing programs. Go through these eight steps to assess your brand’s situation and think through various scenarios. Then, you will know if it’s possible to execute internally and/or outsource portions, as well as how it fits into the overall content marketing strategy.
See all of CMI’s original research reports from its central hub.
Get the latest Content Marketing Institute research reports while they’re hot – subscribe to the daily or weekly newsletter.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
We’re headed down the wrong road with generative AI.
Over the last few months, I’ve been struck by the messages from major gen AI solution providers. Unfortunately, those messages feed the frenzy for implementing generative AI in creative and marketing operations.
Take, for example, this recent quote from OpenAI CTO Mira Murati in response to a question about AI replacing humans: “Some creative jobs maybe will go away, but maybe they shouldn’t have been there in the first place.”
Really?
But she’s not the only one making statements along these lines. Open AI CEO Sam Altman has claimed that AI would handle “95% of what marketers use agencies, strategists, and creative professionals for today.”
And, of course, there’s this famous quote from economist Richard Baldwin at the 2023 World Economic Forum Growth Summit: “AI won’t take your job. It’s somebody using AI that will take your job.”
Now, it’s not that these statements are entirely true or false. If you peel any of these statements apart, you’ll hear some people say, “Well, what they meant by that was….”
And that’s the problem. It’s not the accuracy of the statement — it’s the interpretation.
Tech companies make technology the hero of the story. They’re telling people to feel lucky to be worthy of such amazing tools. And they’re frothing up the argument that human creativity is a problem to be solved.
That’s ironic when you consider how every one of these technologies used the products of human creativity to evolve.
That way lies sophisticated mediocrity
During this gen AI gold rush, business leaders are rushing to tell investors, analysts, customers, and audiences how many roles they can replace with the technology in the name of efficiency.
But will some early adopters regret these decisions? Two researchers think so. They published an article in Harvard Business Review last year arguing that although the initial numbers might “look good, especially in cutting costs, “the company will miss the opportunity for big gains by creating substantial value — or a defensible future niche.”
I see this happening in some companies that have replaced content creators with generative AI. Yes, they are producing more content than ever — they’ve succeeded in creating efficiency in producing content at scale.
And the content they create? It’s average. It’s neither bad enough nor good enough to be remarkable. It’s just average.
And it’s leading us into an age of sophisticated mediocrity.
Wicked problems in content and marketing
I wrote about the “wicked problems” in businesses’ content and marketing strategies a couple of years ago.
A wicked problem is hard to solve because of “incomplete, contradictory, or changing requirements that can be difficult to recognize.” Information researcher Jeff Conklin described wicked problems as those “not understood until after the formulation of a solution.”
Think of the way you organize your kitchen. It might work well enough for you, so you can’t see how much better it could be until someone suggests changes that make it work much better. Only then do you realize that you did have a problem worth solving.
Wicked problems are rampant in marketing. Your content or marketing approach might be working okay. You know it isn’t quite humming on all cylinders, but there’s nothing so dysfunctional that fixing it becomes a priority.
But then you try to fix something minor and realize many other operational areas need improvement, too. Are the problems significant enough to warrant the disruption? Unfortunately, you won’t know until you try.
For example, about three months ago, I worked with a fast-growing technology company to roll out a new governance model, workflow, and content lifecycle plan. The people who’d been with the company less than a year rejoiced. They loved it.
But senior leaders and some veteran marketing and content practitioners didn’t. They agreed that the new plan sounded good. But they didn’t consider the problem it would solve as important enough to spend time on.
That’s wicked.
I often hear CEOs and CFOs ask, “What’s the benefit of fixing this problem?” The answer is, “We don’t know yet.”
Why gen AI isn’t a wicked problem (probably)
Unfortunately, those hyperbolic statements about gen AI replacing people or teams have created what appears to be a wicked problem in creative and marketing.
Business leaders hear about gen AI developments and think, “This is such a cool innovation. We must have a problem it can solve — we just don’t know what it is.”
Then, because of the hyperbolic promises about gen AI replacing agencies and creatives, the sentiment shifts to, “Some of our creative jobs probably are redundant and outdated. Maybe that’s the problem generative AI can solve for us.”
I’m not saying there aren’t some organizations that employ more people than needed or that could improve efficiency or productivity. And those are wicked problems.
But implementing gen AI as a (theoretically) cost-effective replacement for humans who interact with customers or create content usually isn’t a way to solve a wicked problem.
It’s solutionism.
Resisting the solutionism message
Solutionism, a term popularized by tech critic Evgeny Morozov, describes the belief that every problem can be solved with a technological solution.
And solutionism is at the heart of all these statements made by generative AI solution providers.
When Mira Murati says that some creative roles “shouldn’t have been there in the first place,” she’s feeding into the notion that the need for creative roles is a problem that can be solved with technology.
When Sam Altman says “95% of what marketers use agencies, strategists, and creative professionals for today” will be handled by AI, he’s suggesting that inefficiency in the art of creative marketing needs to be corrected.
And the bumper sticker warning “AI won’t take your job, but someone using AI will” suggests that generative AI is the hero we should demonstrate our worthiness to.
Buying into these statements pushes us into the era of sophisticated mediocrity. It means we accept the trade of diversity of human thought for a sophisticated solution to a nonexistent problem.
No CEO wakes up and says, “We have too many people with too many creative ideas. Let’s save some money and get rid of them.” But when CEOs tell their teams to figure out how many (or which) resources they could jettison by implementing gen AI, they’re forcing that calculus.
There are things we can do to avoid this trap. The biggest is to take one all-important first step: Understand and document the opportunity to which you plan to apply AI. That may sound like a no-brainer, but I see more and more companies fail to do it with generative AI.
Just last week, it was reported that 20,000 energy giant Chevron employees are testing Microsoft’s Copilot, a suite of AI-powered chatbots and other tools in Microsoft’s Office 365 apps that can answer questions and generate email drafts. The problem? According to Bill Braun, the company’s CIO: “We’re a little dissatisfied with our ability to know how [well] it’s working”.
My take is they will continue to be. You can’t give 20,000 people a solution to a problem that doesn’t exist and expect them to report back accurate value.
With any productive rollout of an enterprise-wide innovation, you have to first understand what value you want to assess. And to do that, you must understand the existing process that merits assessment. It will be impossible for Chevron to truly get an overall value until it understands what it’s trying to solve.
I’m not arguing against using generative AI. I’m warning against using specific arguments to advance the technology. There are plenty of wicked problems to uncover in content and marketing. And many activities we do every day might be improved with technology like generative AI.
The key is understanding the difference between solving a real problem and forcing technology solutions to problems that don’t exist.
And that’s how you avoid sophisticated mediocrity.
Subscribe to workday or weekly CMI emails to get Rose-Colored Glasses in your inbox each week.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
Of course, you don’t need to follow ChatGPT’s suggestions exactly. However, I’m fascinated that it can generate these suggestions based on the data Andy provided.
Complementing and augmenting analytics and AI
I was competent in Google’s Universal Analytics, but I’m a complete newbie in how to marry GA4 reports with generative AI tools. Andy provides a nice pathway for non-experts:
Create your go-to reports in GA4.
Export the data into CSV files.
Feed the files into a generative AI tool like ChatGPT.
Prompt the tool to analyze the data and provide recommendations.
With that process, you can learn how to optimize existing content to improve rankings, convert more visitors, and create content calendars that detail the most effective headlines, topics, frequency, and distribution days.
I now turn things over to you and ask: What will you ask generative AI to do for your marketing initiatives?
Let me know on social media using the tag #CMWorld.
All tools mentioned in this article were suggested by the author. If you’d like to suggest a tool, share the article on social media with a comment.
Register to attend Content Marketing World in San Diego. Use the code BLOG100 to save $100. Can’t attend in person this year? Check out the Digital Pass for access to on-demand session recordings from the live event through the end of the year.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
“Based on this data, what type of campaigns should be sent more often?”
“What types of campaigns should be abandoned?”
“Suggest changes that would improve the efficiency of this email program.”
“Based on this data, what five possible subject lines would have the highest website conversion rates?”
Campaign timing analysis (dates, days, and seasonality)
In his 20-plus years doing web analytics, Andy has never generated a report using the newsletter’s date as a secondary dimension. However, generative AI makes it possible to find patterns in timing-related data.
To start, Andy generates a GA4 report showing traffic acquisition from his newsletter, sorted by date:
Report: Acquisition > Traffic acquisition: Search default channel group
Dimension: Session campaign
Secondary dimension: Date
Filter: Source medium contains “newsletter”
Andy gives the report to ChatGPT and makes this prompt:
“Draw two charts. One showing correlations by month. One showing correlations by day-of-week. Normalize the data.”
The month correlations chart shows strong performance in the early months of the year, a drop-through October, and a rise in November and December to the early-year level. In the day-of-week chart, Thursday is the clear winner, and Saturday is the clear loser.
The next prompt calls for sophisticated analysis:
“Create and display a one-year calendar for this newsletter. Schedule it bi-weekly, selecting dates for optimal performance. Write draft headlines for each, selecting topics for optimal performance.”
Among ChatGPT’s suggestions:
Optimal day: Friday
Optimal topics: Content marketing, SEO
Start date: Upcoming Friday
Frequency: Every other Friday
Of course, you don’t need to follow ChatGPT’s suggestions exactly. However, I’m fascinated that it can generate these suggestions based on the data Andy provided.
Complementing and augmenting analytics and AI
I was competent in Google’s Universal Analytics, but I’m a complete newbie in how to marry GA4 reports with generative AI tools. Andy provides a nice pathway for non-experts:
Create your go-to reports in GA4.
Export the data into CSV files.
Feed the files into a generative AI tool like ChatGPT.
Prompt the tool to analyze the data and provide recommendations.
With that process, you can learn how to optimize existing content to improve rankings, convert more visitors, and create content calendars that detail the most effective headlines, topics, frequency, and distribution days.
I now turn things over to you and ask: What will you ask generative AI to do for your marketing initiatives?
Let me know on social media using the tag #CMWorld.
All tools mentioned in this article were suggested by the author. If you’d like to suggest a tool, share the article on social media with a comment.
Register to attend Content Marketing World in San Diego. Use the code BLOG100 to save $100. Can’t attend in person this year? Check out the Digital Pass for access to on-demand session recordings from the live event through the end of the year.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
Focus on high-engagement topics (e.g., analytics, content marketing, email marketing).
Reevaluate SEO campaigns.
Enhance personalization.
Optimize send times.
Each high-level suggestion includes supporting details and leads to additional prompts from Andy, including:
“Based on this data, what type of campaigns should be sent more often?”
“What types of campaigns should be abandoned?”
“Suggest changes that would improve the efficiency of this email program.”
“Based on this data, what five possible subject lines would have the highest website conversion rates?”
Campaign timing analysis (dates, days, and seasonality)
In his 20-plus years doing web analytics, Andy has never generated a report using the newsletter’s date as a secondary dimension. However, generative AI makes it possible to find patterns in timing-related data.
To start, Andy generates a GA4 report showing traffic acquisition from his newsletter, sorted by date:
Report: Acquisition > Traffic acquisition: Search default channel group
Dimension: Session campaign
Secondary dimension: Date
Filter: Source medium contains “newsletter”
Andy gives the report to ChatGPT and makes this prompt:
“Draw two charts. One showing correlations by month. One showing correlations by day-of-week. Normalize the data.”
The month correlations chart shows strong performance in the early months of the year, a drop-through October, and a rise in November and December to the early-year level. In the day-of-week chart, Thursday is the clear winner, and Saturday is the clear loser.
The next prompt calls for sophisticated analysis:
“Create and display a one-year calendar for this newsletter. Schedule it bi-weekly, selecting dates for optimal performance. Write draft headlines for each, selecting topics for optimal performance.”
Among ChatGPT’s suggestions:
Optimal day: Friday
Optimal topics: Content marketing, SEO
Start date: Upcoming Friday
Frequency: Every other Friday
Of course, you don’t need to follow ChatGPT’s suggestions exactly. However, I’m fascinated that it can generate these suggestions based on the data Andy provided.
Complementing and augmenting analytics and AI
I was competent in Google’s Universal Analytics, but I’m a complete newbie in how to marry GA4 reports with generative AI tools. Andy provides a nice pathway for non-experts:
Create your go-to reports in GA4.
Export the data into CSV files.
Feed the files into a generative AI tool like ChatGPT.
Prompt the tool to analyze the data and provide recommendations.
With that process, you can learn how to optimize existing content to improve rankings, convert more visitors, and create content calendars that detail the most effective headlines, topics, frequency, and distribution days.
I now turn things over to you and ask: What will you ask generative AI to do for your marketing initiatives?
Let me know on social media using the tag #CMWorld.
All tools mentioned in this article were suggested by the author. If you’d like to suggest a tool, share the article on social media with a comment.
Register to attend Content Marketing World in San Diego. Use the code BLOG100 to save $100. Can’t attend in person this year? Check out the Digital Pass for access to on-demand session recordings from the live event through the end of the year.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
Engagement with analytics: Campaigns related to “Analytics” have the highest engagement rate (49.79%) and the longest average engagement time (81.51 seconds). This suggests subscribers are deeply interested in analytics topics and spend more time engaging with such content.
Content marketing effectiveness: While “Content Marketing” has one of the higher open rates (20%), the engagement time is relatively short (35.48 seconds). This might indicate that while the topic attracts initial interest, the content might not be keeping users engaged for long.
SEO’s lower engagement: Campaigns related to “SEO” have one of the lowest engagement rates and shortest engagement times. It might be worth revisiting the content or presentation style for these campaigns to boost engagement.
Email marketing’s extended engagement: Despite having an average open rate, “Email Marketing” topics keep users engaged for a longer duration (63.94 seconds), indicating the content’s depth or relevance to the audience.
Andy asks ChatGPT to suggest adjustments to his email marketing program based on the data provided. High-level suggestions include:
Focus on high-engagement topics (e.g., analytics, content marketing, email marketing).
Reevaluate SEO campaigns.
Enhance personalization.
Optimize send times.
Each high-level suggestion includes supporting details and leads to additional prompts from Andy, including:
“Based on this data, what type of campaigns should be sent more often?”
“What types of campaigns should be abandoned?”
“Suggest changes that would improve the efficiency of this email program.”
“Based on this data, what five possible subject lines would have the highest website conversion rates?”
Campaign timing analysis (dates, days, and seasonality)
In his 20-plus years doing web analytics, Andy has never generated a report using the newsletter’s date as a secondary dimension. However, generative AI makes it possible to find patterns in timing-related data.
To start, Andy generates a GA4 report showing traffic acquisition from his newsletter, sorted by date:
Report: Acquisition > Traffic acquisition: Search default channel group
Dimension: Session campaign
Secondary dimension: Date
Filter: Source medium contains “newsletter”
Andy gives the report to ChatGPT and makes this prompt:
“Draw two charts. One showing correlations by month. One showing correlations by day-of-week. Normalize the data.”
The month correlations chart shows strong performance in the early months of the year, a drop-through October, and a rise in November and December to the early-year level. In the day-of-week chart, Thursday is the clear winner, and Saturday is the clear loser.
The next prompt calls for sophisticated analysis:
“Create and display a one-year calendar for this newsletter. Schedule it bi-weekly, selecting dates for optimal performance. Write draft headlines for each, selecting topics for optimal performance.”
Among ChatGPT’s suggestions:
Optimal day: Friday
Optimal topics: Content marketing, SEO
Start date: Upcoming Friday
Frequency: Every other Friday
Of course, you don’t need to follow ChatGPT’s suggestions exactly. However, I’m fascinated that it can generate these suggestions based on the data Andy provided.
Complementing and augmenting analytics and AI
I was competent in Google’s Universal Analytics, but I’m a complete newbie in how to marry GA4 reports with generative AI tools. Andy provides a nice pathway for non-experts:
Create your go-to reports in GA4.
Export the data into CSV files.
Feed the files into a generative AI tool like ChatGPT.
Prompt the tool to analyze the data and provide recommendations.
With that process, you can learn how to optimize existing content to improve rankings, convert more visitors, and create content calendars that detail the most effective headlines, topics, frequency, and distribution days.
I now turn things over to you and ask: What will you ask generative AI to do for your marketing initiatives?
Let me know on social media using the tag #CMWorld.
All tools mentioned in this article were suggested by the author. If you’d like to suggest a tool, share the article on social media with a comment.
Register to attend Content Marketing World in San Diego. Use the code BLOG100 to save $100. Can’t attend in person this year? Check out the Digital Pass for access to on-demand session recordings from the live event through the end of the year.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
You’ve used the GA4 version of Google Analytics for at least a year, if not two to three. You’ve also probably tested the potential of ChatGPT and similar generative AI tools.
But have you combined the power of both?
That’s where Andy Crestodina comes in. The co-founder and CMO of Orbit Media Studios discussed the opportunities in his Marketing Analytics & Data Science (MADS) conference presentation, How to Audit Your Content Using GA4: A Data-Driven Approach to SEO and Lead Generation.
In this article, he walks you through step by step how to create GA4 reports and prompt ChatGPT to identify rising and falling search traffic, improve content rankings, and deliver more effective newsletters.
Which content has rising and falling search traffic?
To see traffic from organic search:
Go to the Engagement section in the left column.
In the dropdown, click on the report “Pages and screens: Page title and screen class.”
Next, click “Add filter” to see organic traffic.
To build the filter:
Go to the Include dropdown in the right column.
Select Session medium.
Under Dimension values, select organic.
At the top of the page, click on “Add comparison.” Select the period, such as the last seven days or the last 28 days. Scroll down to turn on the Compare toggle.
Andy says GA4’s date comparison feature is better than the old Universal Analytics because its comparison matches the days of the week between the two periods.
The resulting report identifies rising and falling search traffic as illustrated in this report:
In the report above, the URL — /blog/how-to-write-testimonials-examples — saw a 43.43% drop in views when comparing Jan. 7 through Feb. 3, 2023, to Dec. 10, 2022, through Jan. 6, 2023. But the URL — /blog/website-navigation — saw a 42.86% rise in search traffic during that same period.
Once you’ve identified content with falling search traffic, consider improving it with these ideas:
What phrases does this article rank for?
Knowing the phrases an article ranks for helps you understand why people find the page. It also helps determine how to optimize for additional phrases and drive more organic search traffic to it.
To do this, Andy enlists the help of ChatGPT. However, the first step is to generate a report from Google Search Console:
Search type: Web
Date: [a timeframe] (In this example, Andy selected the last 3 months.)
Query: -orbit (i.e., to exclude branded queries for Andy’s agency Orbit Media)
Page: [the page URL]
Click “Export” in the upper right to generate a CSV file containing the data.
Feed the CSV file into ChatGPT. Andy uses ChatGPT Plus ($20 a month) because it supports data analysis and file uploads. He starts with this prompt:
“I’m giving you Google Search Console data showing the search performance of a URL. Can you analyze?”
ChatGPT replies with the five columns of data and suggested areas it could analyze (e.g., queries generating the most clicks).
Since any ranking page also ranks for a bunch of other things, he consolidates the list with this prompt:
“You are an expert SEO who is highly proficient at keyword analysis. Merge the rows with similar queries into single rows with a single, representative marketing keyphrase. As you do so, for each row, combine the data for impressions and clicks and averaging the data for CTR and Avg Position. Provide link to download.”
Any time you ask AI to manipulate data, ask it to provide a link to download the data so you can confirm that it processed the data properly. In this instance, Andy finds the data from ChatGPT looks good.
The chart includes 19 rows of queries related to what should be on a website homepage, accompanied by their total clicks, impressions, CTR, and position.
With the data on what phrases the page ranks for, Andy pastes the content into ChatGPT and makes this prompt:
“Here’s the page for the data you just analyzed. Evaluate this content’s keyword usage and frequency based on the keywords in the dataset.”
ChatGPT replies with a set of steps it will perform, including text preprocessing and keyword extraction:
Text preprocessing: We’ll clean the webpage to prepare it for analysis.
Keyphrase extraction: We’ll identify the keyphrases that appear in the content.
Frequency count: We’ll count how often each keyphrase appears in the content.
Evaluation: Finally, we’ll assess the usage of keyphrases based on their frequency in the content and their importance in the aggregated Google Search Console data.
Andy refines the prompt to have ChatGPT get more sophisticated in its recommendations (bolded emphasis by Andy):
“Suggest edits to this page that would rank higher by better indicating its relevance for the keyphrases in the dataset. Focus on recommendations for including the phrases that are not used on the page but appear in the dataset. Make suggestions that improve the flow and clarity of the content, as well as keyphrase relevance. Highlight the recommended changes.”
What content edits can improve rankings?
I find the results quite amazing. Some of the recommended changes generated by ChatGPT:
Introduction
Current: Social media streams are crowded, fast-flowing, and very competitive. As social networks pull back on organic reach, showing up is hard, and getting attention is even harder.
Suggested edit: Navigating the crowded and competitive social media video landscape can be daunting. With platforms like Facebook and Instagram curtailing organic reach, the challenge of making your DIY social media videos visible is greater than ever.
Second section: Winning the algorithm
Current: Social media videos are so engaging that the networks are pushing them way to the top of social streams. Facebook, Instagram, and LinkedIn all want us to do more in this all-powerful format. It wins in the algorithms and it wins for attention.
Suggested edit: The power of creating engaging social media videos is so compelling that platforms like Facebook, Instagram, and LinkedIn are giving them preferential treatment. This is why learning how to create captivating social media video content is crucial—it wins both in algorithms and in capturing audience attention.
Third section: Tools and equipment
Current: Your laptop has a camera and mic, but you can do better than that. A little more effort will get you a high-quality video and much better results.
Suggested edit: While your laptop’s built-in camera and mic may suffice for starters, investing in specialized video equipment for social media marketing can significantly boost the quality and engagement of your DIY social media videos.
Which articles convert email subscribers the best?
Over the past 18 years, Andy has written over 575 articles on topics ranging from influencer marketing to web analytics to email marketing. Some articles perform amazingly, while others receive no traffic. Similarly, some articles get people to subscribe to Orbit’s email list, while others generate zero subscribers.
“When you know that difference, you know exactly what to do on social media. You know what to promote and what’s working well,” Andy says.
In the past, he used Excel spreadsheets to analyze the for every article on his site. These days, he uses ChatGPT.
First, he collects the data from GA4. Under the Engagement section, he selects “Page and screens: Page path + query string” report. To customize it, he clicks on the pencil icon in the upper right and adds these metrics:
Sessions
Users
Conversions
TIP: If you don’t see your metric right away, type its name and select it when it appears.
Since Andy only wanted blogs in his data set, he clicks “Add filter” in the upper left and builds the filter with these attributes:
Dimension: Page path and screen class
Match type: contains
Value: blog
From here, click the export icon in the upper right (i.e., it’s two icons to the left of the pencil icon) and select “Download CSV.”
Next, Andy creates a second CSV file by changing “Value: blog” to “Value: /blog-newsletter-thank-you-page” to collect his email signup thank you page data:
He clicks the “+” button left of the report columns to select a secondary dimension of “Page Referrer.” The resulting report shows the pages users read right before they subscribed to Orbit’s email list. He exports this data as a CSV.
Andy cleans up this file by deleting the nine rows of metadata at the top, so ChatGPT won’t get confused in its analysis.
The two files are fed into ChatGPT to confirm it could analyze them. Next, Andy asks ChatGPT to do the equivalent of an Excel VLOOKUP so users can find things in a table or a range by row. He uses this prompt:
“Map the data from the two files together into one file, as you would do with vlookup, so each row is a URL and the sessions and conversions are shown for each.”
He asks ChatGPT to provide a file to download. ChatGPT generates 17 rows of URLs accompanied by sessions (traffic), users (traffic), conversions, sessions, users (converted), and conversions (newsletter):
Then, Andy prompts ChatGPT to draw a bar chart showing the conversion rate for each blog post.
ChatGPT responds with how it calculates the conversion rate for each blog post and visualizes a bar chart showing the top 20 blog posts by conversion rate.
NOTE: Conversion rate data is only available because ChatGPT divided the conversion data (numerator) by session traffic (denominator).
Next steps
To amplify the articles that drive the most email conversions, Andy suggests:
Promoting the article(s) in your email signature.
Featuring them on your homepage.
Putting them into a social media marketing rotation.
Linking to them in presentations.
Linking to them from high-traffic pages.
Which email campaigns perform the best?
You can also use the GA4-ChatGPT combination to understand which email campaigns perform the best. Here’s how Andy does it:
Export GA4 data showing traffic to pages based on UTM codes related to email campaigns.
Export data from Orbit’s email marketing platform (ActiveCampaign).
Ask ChatGPT to merge the two datasets, analyze, and provide recommendations
To collect the GA4 data, Andy uses the traffic acquisition report, which can be found under Acquisition in the left navigation bar. He clicks on the pencil in the upper right to customize it and selects the following metrics before clicking the “apply” button:
Sessions
Engagement rate
Average engagement time per session
Conversions
Session conversion rate
Next, he clicks “Add filter,” selects the “Session medium” dimension, then the value of “email.”
Andy changes the primary dimension to “Session campaign.” The resulting report has one row for each email campaign (i.e., traffic statistics based on the utm_campaign parameter). Andy exports this data as a CSV file.
Next, Andy exports a data file from ActiveCampaign, which includes:
Campaign name
Number of sends
Number of opens
Number of clicks
Number of unsubscribes
Number of bounces
Open rate
Click rate
Unsubscribe date
Bounce rate
Andy uploads each file separately to ChatGPT and confirms it can process each file. He then prompts ChatGPT to merge the datasets:
“These two datasets show the performance of the same campaigns from both the email service provider (active campaign) and the website behavior (google analytics). I want to see the performance of each campaign across both datasets. Merge the Google Analytics data with the ActiveCampaign data, combining ‘session campaign’ with ‘campaign name’ into one column, inferring which campaigns were the same based on names and dates. Provide link to download.”
Once ChatGPT merges the datasets, Andy confirms the data looks good and puts ChatGPT to work.
The basic prompt is:
“You are a skilled digital strategist and email marketing expert. What insights can you gather from the combined dataset?”
Moonshot prompts include:
“What can you tell me about newsletter campaigns?”
“What insights can you gather from this data?”
“Make a chart using an unusual visualization method showing unexpected insights from the data in this dataset.”
“How would Leonardo da Vinci visualize this data? Show your thinking.”
Next, Andy asks ChatGPT to categorize the newsletter campaigns and provide insights on metrics for each category. It returns these strategic insights:
Engagement with analytics: Campaigns related to “Analytics” have the highest engagement rate (49.79%) and the longest average engagement time (81.51 seconds). This suggests subscribers are deeply interested in analytics topics and spend more time engaging with such content.
Content marketing effectiveness: While “Content Marketing” has one of the higher open rates (20%), the engagement time is relatively short (35.48 seconds). This might indicate that while the topic attracts initial interest, the content might not be keeping users engaged for long.
SEO’s lower engagement: Campaigns related to “SEO” have one of the lowest engagement rates and shortest engagement times. It might be worth revisiting the content or presentation style for these campaigns to boost engagement.
Email marketing’s extended engagement: Despite having an average open rate, “Email Marketing” topics keep users engaged for a longer duration (63.94 seconds), indicating the content’s depth or relevance to the audience.
Andy asks ChatGPT to suggest adjustments to his email marketing program based on the data provided. High-level suggestions include:
Focus on high-engagement topics (e.g., analytics, content marketing, email marketing).
Reevaluate SEO campaigns.
Enhance personalization.
Optimize send times.
Each high-level suggestion includes supporting details and leads to additional prompts from Andy, including:
“Based on this data, what type of campaigns should be sent more often?”
“What types of campaigns should be abandoned?”
“Suggest changes that would improve the efficiency of this email program.”
“Based on this data, what five possible subject lines would have the highest website conversion rates?”
Campaign timing analysis (dates, days, and seasonality)
In his 20-plus years doing web analytics, Andy has never generated a report using the newsletter’s date as a secondary dimension. However, generative AI makes it possible to find patterns in timing-related data.
To start, Andy generates a GA4 report showing traffic acquisition from his newsletter, sorted by date:
Report: Acquisition > Traffic acquisition: Search default channel group
Dimension: Session campaign
Secondary dimension: Date
Filter: Source medium contains “newsletter”
Andy gives the report to ChatGPT and makes this prompt:
“Draw two charts. One showing correlations by month. One showing correlations by day-of-week. Normalize the data.”
The month correlations chart shows strong performance in the early months of the year, a drop-through October, and a rise in November and December to the early-year level. In the day-of-week chart, Thursday is the clear winner, and Saturday is the clear loser.
The next prompt calls for sophisticated analysis:
“Create and display a one-year calendar for this newsletter. Schedule it bi-weekly, selecting dates for optimal performance. Write draft headlines for each, selecting topics for optimal performance.”
Among ChatGPT’s suggestions:
Optimal day: Friday
Optimal topics: Content marketing, SEO
Start date: Upcoming Friday
Frequency: Every other Friday
Of course, you don’t need to follow ChatGPT’s suggestions exactly. However, I’m fascinated that it can generate these suggestions based on the data Andy provided.
Complementing and augmenting analytics and AI
I was competent in Google’s Universal Analytics, but I’m a complete newbie in how to marry GA4 reports with generative AI tools. Andy provides a nice pathway for non-experts:
Create your go-to reports in GA4.
Export the data into CSV files.
Feed the files into a generative AI tool like ChatGPT.
Prompt the tool to analyze the data and provide recommendations.
With that process, you can learn how to optimize existing content to improve rankings, convert more visitors, and create content calendars that detail the most effective headlines, topics, frequency, and distribution days.
I now turn things over to you and ask: What will you ask generative AI to do for your marketing initiatives?
Let me know on social media using the tag #CMWorld.
All tools mentioned in this article were suggested by the author. If you’d like to suggest a tool, share the article on social media with a comment.
Register to attend Content Marketing World in San Diego. Use the code BLOG100 to save $100. Can’t attend in person this year? Check out the Digital Pass for access to on-demand session recordings from the live event through the end of the year.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
You’ve used the GA4 version of Google Analytics for at least a year, if not two to three. You’ve also probably tested the potential of ChatGPT and similar generative AI tools.
But have you combined the power of both?
That’s where Andy Crestodina comes in. The co-founder and CMO of Orbit Media Studios discussed the opportunities in his Marketing Analytics & Data Science (MADS) conference presentation, How to Audit Your Content Using GA4: A Data-Driven Approach to SEO and Lead Generation.
In this article, he walks you through step by step how to create GA4 reports and prompt ChatGPT to identify rising and falling search traffic, improve content rankings, and deliver more effective newsletters.
Which content has rising and falling search traffic?
To see traffic from organic search:
Go to the Engagement section in the left column.
In the dropdown, click on the report “Pages and screens: Page title and screen class.”
Next, click “Add filter” to see organic traffic.
To build the filter:
Go to the Include dropdown in the right column.
Select Session medium.
Under Dimension values, select organic.
At the top of the page, click on “Add comparison.” Select the period, such as the last seven days or the last 28 days. Scroll down to turn on the Compare toggle.
Andy says GA4’s date comparison feature is better than the old Universal Analytics because its comparison matches the days of the week between the two periods.
The resulting report identifies rising and falling search traffic as illustrated in this report:
In the report above, the URL — /blog/how-to-write-testimonials-examples — saw a 43.43% drop in views when comparing Jan. 7 through Feb. 3, 2023, to Dec. 10, 2022, through Jan. 6, 2023. But the URL — /blog/website-navigation — saw a 42.86% rise in search traffic during that same period.
Once you’ve identified content with falling search traffic, consider improving it with these ideas:
What phrases does this article rank for?
Knowing the phrases an article ranks for helps you understand why people find the page. It also helps determine how to optimize for additional phrases and drive more organic search traffic to it.
To do this, Andy enlists the help of ChatGPT. However, the first step is to generate a report from Google Search Console:
Search type: Web
Date: [a timeframe] (In this example, Andy selected the last 3 months.)
Query: -orbit (i.e., to exclude branded queries for Andy’s agency Orbit Media)
Page: [the page URL]
Click “Export” in the upper right to generate a CSV file containing the data.
Feed the CSV file into ChatGPT. Andy uses ChatGPT Plus ($20 a month) because it supports data analysis and file uploads. He starts with this prompt:
“I’m giving you Google Search Console data showing the search performance of a URL. Can you analyze?”
ChatGPT replies with the five columns of data and suggested areas it could analyze (e.g., queries generating the most clicks).
Since any ranking page also ranks for a bunch of other things, he consolidates the list with this prompt:
“You are an expert SEO who is highly proficient at keyword analysis. Merge the rows with similar queries into single rows with a single, representative marketing keyphrase. As you do so, for each row, combine the data for impressions and clicks and averaging the data for CTR and Avg Position. Provide link to download.”
Any time you ask AI to manipulate data, ask it to provide a link to download the data so you can confirm that it processed the data properly. In this instance, Andy finds the data from ChatGPT looks good.
The chart includes 19 rows of queries related to what should be on a website homepage, accompanied by their total clicks, impressions, CTR, and position.
With the data on what phrases the page ranks for, Andy pastes the content into ChatGPT and makes this prompt:
“Here’s the page for the data you just analyzed. Evaluate this content’s keyword usage and frequency based on the keywords in the dataset.”
ChatGPT replies with a set of steps it will perform, including text preprocessing and keyword extraction:
Text preprocessing: We’ll clean the webpage to prepare it for analysis.
Keyphrase extraction: We’ll identify the keyphrases that appear in the content.
Frequency count: We’ll count how often each keyphrase appears in the content.
Evaluation: Finally, we’ll assess the usage of keyphrases based on their frequency in the content and their importance in the aggregated Google Search Console data.
Andy refines the prompt to have ChatGPT get more sophisticated in its recommendations (bolded emphasis by Andy):
“Suggest edits to this page that would rank higher by better indicating its relevance for the keyphrases in the dataset. Focus on recommendations for including the phrases that are not used on the page but appear in the dataset. Make suggestions that improve the flow and clarity of the content, as well as keyphrase relevance. Highlight the recommended changes.”
What content edits can improve rankings?
I find the results quite amazing. Some of the recommended changes generated by ChatGPT:
Introduction
Current: Social media streams are crowded, fast-flowing, and very competitive. As social networks pull back on organic reach, showing up is hard, and getting attention is even harder.
Suggested edit: Navigating the crowded and competitive social media video landscape can be daunting. With platforms like Facebook and Instagram curtailing organic reach, the challenge of making your DIY social media videos visible is greater than ever.
Second section: Winning the algorithm
Current: Social media videos are so engaging that the networks are pushing them way to the top of social streams. Facebook, Instagram, and LinkedIn all want us to do more in this all-powerful format. It wins in the algorithms and it wins for attention.
Suggested edit: The power of creating engaging social media videos is so compelling that platforms like Facebook, Instagram, and LinkedIn are giving them preferential treatment. This is why learning how to create captivating social media video content is crucial—it wins both in algorithms and in capturing audience attention.
Third section: Tools and equipment
Current: Your laptop has a camera and mic, but you can do better than that. A little more effort will get you a high-quality video and much better results.
Suggested edit: While your laptop’s built-in camera and mic may suffice for starters, investing in specialized video equipment for social media marketing can significantly boost the quality and engagement of your DIY social media videos.
Which articles convert email subscribers the best?
Over the past 18 years, Andy has written over 575 articles on topics ranging from influencer marketing to web analytics to email marketing. Some articles perform amazingly, while others receive no traffic. Similarly, some articles get people to subscribe to Orbit’s email list, while others generate zero subscribers.
“When you know that difference, you know exactly what to do on social media. You know what to promote and what’s working well,” Andy says.
In the past, he used Excel spreadsheets to analyze the for every article on his site. These days, he uses ChatGPT.
First, he collects the data from GA4. Under the Engagement section, he selects “Page and screens: Page path + query string” report. To customize it, he clicks on the pencil icon in the upper right and adds these metrics:
Sessions
Users
Conversions
TIP: If you don’t see your metric right away, type its name and select it when it appears.
Since Andy only wanted blogs in his data set, he clicks “Add filter” in the upper left and builds the filter with these attributes:
Dimension: Page path and screen class
Match type: contains
Value: blog
From here, click the export icon in the upper right (i.e., it’s two icons to the left of the pencil icon) and select “Download CSV.”
Next, Andy creates a second CSV file by changing “Value: blog” to “Value: /blog-newsletter-thank-you-page” to collect his email signup thank you page data:
He clicks the “+” button left of the report columns to select a secondary dimension of “Page Referrer.” The resulting report shows the pages users read right before they subscribed to Orbit’s email list. He exports this data as a CSV.
Andy cleans up this file by deleting the nine rows of metadata at the top, so ChatGPT won’t get confused in its analysis.
The two files are fed into ChatGPT to confirm it could analyze them. Next, Andy asks ChatGPT to do the equivalent of an Excel VLOOKUP so users can find things in a table or a range by row. He uses this prompt:
“Map the data from the two files together into one file, as you would do with vlookup, so each row is a URL and the sessions and conversions are shown for each.”
He asks ChatGPT to provide a file to download. ChatGPT generates 17 rows of URLs accompanied by sessions (traffic), users (traffic), conversions, sessions, users (converted), and conversions (newsletter):
Then, Andy prompts ChatGPT to draw a bar chart showing the conversion rate for each blog post.
ChatGPT responds with how it calculates the conversion rate for each blog post and visualizes a bar chart showing the top 20 blog posts by conversion rate.
NOTE: Conversion rate data is only available because ChatGPT divided the conversion data (numerator) by session traffic (denominator).
Next steps
To amplify the articles that drive the most email conversions, Andy suggests:
Promoting the article(s) in your email signature.
Featuring them on your homepage.
Putting them into a social media marketing rotation.
Linking to them in presentations.
Linking to them from high-traffic pages.
Which email campaigns perform the best?
You can also use the GA4-ChatGPT combination to understand which email campaigns perform the best. Here’s how Andy does it:
Export GA4 data showing traffic to pages based on UTM codes related to email campaigns.
Export data from Orbit’s email marketing platform (ActiveCampaign).
Ask ChatGPT to merge the two datasets, analyze, and provide recommendations
To collect the GA4 data, Andy uses the traffic acquisition report, which can be found under Acquisition in the left navigation bar. He clicks on the pencil in the upper right to customize it and selects the following metrics before clicking the “apply” button:
Sessions
Engagement rate
Average engagement time per session
Conversions
Session conversion rate
Next, he clicks “Add filter,” selects the “Session medium” dimension, then the value of “email.”
Andy changes the primary dimension to “Session campaign.” The resulting report has one row for each email campaign (i.e., traffic statistics based on the utm_campaign parameter). Andy exports this data as a CSV file.
Next, Andy exports a data file from ActiveCampaign, which includes:
Campaign name
Number of sends
Number of opens
Number of clicks
Number of unsubscribes
Number of bounces
Open rate
Click rate
Unsubscribe date
Bounce rate
Andy uploads each file separately to ChatGPT and confirms it can process each file. He then prompts ChatGPT to merge the datasets:
“These two datasets show the performance of the same campaigns from both the email service provider (active campaign) and the website behavior (google analytics). I want to see the performance of each campaign across both datasets. Merge the Google Analytics data with the ActiveCampaign data, combining ‘session campaign’ with ‘campaign name’ into one column, inferring which campaigns were the same based on names and dates. Provide link to download.”
Once ChatGPT merges the datasets, Andy confirms the data looks good and puts ChatGPT to work.
The basic prompt is:
“You are a skilled digital strategist and email marketing expert. What insights can you gather from the combined dataset?”
Moonshot prompts include:
“What can you tell me about newsletter campaigns?”
“What insights can you gather from this data?”
“Make a chart using an unusual visualization method showing unexpected insights from the data in this dataset.”
“How would Leonardo da Vinci visualize this data? Show your thinking.”
Next, Andy asks ChatGPT to categorize the newsletter campaigns and provide insights on metrics for each category. It returns these strategic insights:
Engagement with analytics: Campaigns related to “Analytics” have the highest engagement rate (49.79%) and the longest average engagement time (81.51 seconds). This suggests subscribers are deeply interested in analytics topics and spend more time engaging with such content.
Content marketing effectiveness: While “Content Marketing” has one of the higher open rates (20%), the engagement time is relatively short (35.48 seconds). This might indicate that while the topic attracts initial interest, the content might not be keeping users engaged for long.
SEO’s lower engagement: Campaigns related to “SEO” have one of the lowest engagement rates and shortest engagement times. It might be worth revisiting the content or presentation style for these campaigns to boost engagement.
Email marketing’s extended engagement: Despite having an average open rate, “Email Marketing” topics keep users engaged for a longer duration (63.94 seconds), indicating the content’s depth or relevance to the audience.
Andy asks ChatGPT to suggest adjustments to his email marketing program based on the data provided. High-level suggestions include:
Focus on high-engagement topics (e.g., analytics, content marketing, email marketing).
Reevaluate SEO campaigns.
Enhance personalization.
Optimize send times.
Each high-level suggestion includes supporting details and leads to additional prompts from Andy, including:
“Based on this data, what type of campaigns should be sent more often?”
“What types of campaigns should be abandoned?”
“Suggest changes that would improve the efficiency of this email program.”
“Based on this data, what five possible subject lines would have the highest website conversion rates?”
Campaign timing analysis (dates, days, and seasonality)
In his 20-plus years doing web analytics, Andy has never generated a report using the newsletter’s date as a secondary dimension. However, generative AI makes it possible to find patterns in timing-related data.
To start, Andy generates a GA4 report showing traffic acquisition from his newsletter, sorted by date:
Report: Acquisition > Traffic acquisition: Search default channel group
Dimension: Session campaign
Secondary dimension: Date
Filter: Source medium contains “newsletter”
Andy gives the report to ChatGPT and makes this prompt:
“Draw two charts. One showing correlations by month. One showing correlations by day-of-week. Normalize the data.”
The month correlations chart shows strong performance in the early months of the year, a drop-through October, and a rise in November and December to the early-year level. In the day-of-week chart, Thursday is the clear winner, and Saturday is the clear loser.
The next prompt calls for sophisticated analysis:
“Create and display a one-year calendar for this newsletter. Schedule it bi-weekly, selecting dates for optimal performance. Write draft headlines for each, selecting topics for optimal performance.”
Among ChatGPT’s suggestions:
Optimal day: Friday
Optimal topics: Content marketing, SEO
Start date: Upcoming Friday
Frequency: Every other Friday
Of course, you don’t need to follow ChatGPT’s suggestions exactly. However, I’m fascinated that it can generate these suggestions based on the data Andy provided.
Complementing and augmenting analytics and AI
I was competent in Google’s Universal Analytics, but I’m a complete newbie in how to marry GA4 reports with generative AI tools. Andy provides a nice pathway for non-experts:
Create your go-to reports in GA4.
Export the data into CSV files.
Feed the files into a generative AI tool like ChatGPT.
Prompt the tool to analyze the data and provide recommendations.
With that process, you can learn how to optimize existing content to improve rankings, convert more visitors, and create content calendars that detail the most effective headlines, topics, frequency, and distribution days.
I now turn things over to you and ask: What will you ask generative AI to do for your marketing initiatives?
Let me know on social media using the tag #CMWorld.
All tools mentioned in this article were suggested by the author. If you’d like to suggest a tool, share the article on social media with a comment.
Register to attend Content Marketing World in San Diego. Use the code BLOG100 to save $100. Can’t attend in person this year? Check out the Digital Pass for access to on-demand session recordings from the live event through the end of the year.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
We’re talking about your brand’s share of answers in the large learning models of search and AI. Imagine a prospect prompting ChatGPT, Anthropic, or even Google for the best brand to provide your product or service. Maybe, they ask if your organization is a reputable brand for those products.
Well, you should understand your brand’s share of model. But before you go to enter the prompt, watch this video or read on for CMI’s chief strategy advisor Robert Rose’s take:
Share of model presents influence on AI
Recently, industry media have published articles about “share of model,” a new metric you should pay attention to.
MarketingWeek defines a share of model as the number of mentions of a brand by one or multiple large language models (e.g., ChatGPT, Meta’s Llama, Microsoft’s CoPilot, Google’s Gemini, Anthropic’s Claude) as a proportion of the total mentions of brands in the same category.
(Much like search engine optimization services cropped up, I must ask if new model operations services will emerge. But more on that in a minute.)
As Adweek explains, this new measurement might look like a brand recall or share-of-voice metrics, looking at how each model perceives your brand. It might assess it through sentiment or how it prioritizes your brand as the answer to a prompt question.
I’m at a bit of a loss as to how one could calculate it, but esoteric marketing metrics already exist.
Some suggest the metric evaluates your brand’s footprint, requiring a more bespoke study of your brand and, let’s say, five competitors on perception, total mentions, and performance against brand-centric queries. Now, that’s a project I can get my head around.
And that’s the key for me.
New metric isn’t really about measurement
The share of model is likely to become a thing, but its biggest evolution won’t be in how it’s measured but the optimization strategies that come from the analysis.
Cue the new service. SEO agencies will start thinking about domains and whatnot. (If you’re looking for ModelOptimization.AI, I took it this morning.)
If LLMs become the new search index, which ones will have your brand and which ones won’t? If that sounds like a lot of work to compile, you’re not wrong. It’s a ton of work. I expect new technology companies will offer cross-LLM analysis to develop quantitative research.
What do you think?
Let us know by email or comment on CMI’s social channels.
Want more content marketing tips, insights, and examples? Subscribe to workday or weekly emails from CMI.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
Generative AI prompts a lot of reactions from content marketers. Everybody seems to have an opinion — or more than one — on the effect of this widely accessible and always evolving technology.
But what’s the worst advice out there about generative AI?
We asked the speakers at Content Marketing World 2024 what they’ve heard and what they advise instead. Over 20 shared the bad and the good — and not all of them agree on which is which. Read on for their takes on the worst generative AI advice:
Take an all-or-nothing approach
Evidently, some people think generative AI involves absolutes. But that’s poor decision-making (or maybe a lack of decision-making), according to our experts.
Ignore generative AI
Some people recommend we avoid using generative AI, which not only sows fear but puts marketers at a disadvantage in a workforce and market landscape increasingly relying on generative AI. I still don’t recommend using generative AI to create content you publish wholesale as is. However, I do think it can be a useful assistant in the content creation process by helping you to generate ideas, analyze data, summarize large pieces of content, extract key points from larger content pieces, identify gaps in your content, and more. — Melanie Deziel, co-founder, CreatorKitchen.com
Don’t use it
The worst advice I’ve heard about gen AI is not to use it at all. That would be like saying I won’t use a spreadsheet. Gen AI is just a tool. Don’t overcomplicate it. Treat it like a member of your staff. Ask Gen AI to help with strategy and ideation and to suggest questions you should be asking, but you’re not. — Bernie Borges, vice president, global content marketing, iQor
Use it ASAP
The worst advice I’ve heard about generative AI in content marketing is to just get started. Yes, it’s undeniably the time to start playing around with generative AI tools and learning their capabilities before you fall behind. However, many content marketing teams — often under the direction of executives who misunderstand the actual capabilities of generative AI — have rushed into using AI to create entire articles and e-books from scratch.
There are many great first content use cases for generative AI — ones that will help you achieve your content marketing goals — and new long-form content creation isn’t one.
Before generative AI can create on-brand and useful content, even if it’s simply repurposing existing content, you’ll need to have a few foundational elements in place.
At a minimum, define your brand voice, create a content style guide, document your content governance policies… oh yeah, and build your content strategy, too! I know this can sound like a lot to take on, but these are integral for helping all content creators—human or otherwise—convey your unique brand voice through content. Otherwise, you’ll produce bland content that won’t appeal to anyone. And our communities don’t need any more of that. — Erika Heald, founder and chief content officer, Erika Heald Marketing Consulting
Go for it or do nothing
Quite a few folks take an all-or-nothing approach to generative AI in content marketing — the idea being that you can either fully embrace it or avoid it entirely. Generative AI can be a helpful tool as long as it’s used in moderation and never used to substitute for your voice or your company’s. — Beth Elderkin, content marketing manager, Informa Connect
Act like generative AI is the be-all-end-all today
Generative AI offers potential solutions, but some of the worst advice comes from people who view it as THE answer for today and tomorrow.
View generative AI as the future
Generative AI is the future of AI. In the martech world, it’s likely to take a back seat to insights AI and decisioning AI (acting) as more of an order taker than a decision-maker (BTW, this is a good thing.) — Tony Byrne, founder, Real Story Group
Treat it as mature technology
Remember the phrase, “I thought I knew everything in my 20s, but when I hit my 30s, I realized I knew nothing.” Generative AI is still in its 20s.
I do a lot of international marketing and I often find that AI can easily make mistakes with the interpretations of culturally rich content. For example, it may utilize the tone of a French Canadian; however, it pulls something that is French from France. All it takes is one error like this to lose the trust of your French-Canadian audience. — Michael Bonfils, global managing director, Digital International Group
Make AI the go-to team member
I’ve heard some scary advice, but by far, the worst has been to fully lean in and let it do all of the heavy lifting for you and your team. AI is a team member, not a replacement for an entire team. It shouldn’t be the crutch on which you lean to write your content but, instead, a powerful tool to enhance and support your creative process.
AI can provide valuable insights, streamline research, and even help with generating ideas, but the human touch is irreplaceable. Content marketing thrives on authenticity, creativity, and emotional connection—qualities that AI, despite its advancements, still cannot fully replicate. Over-reliance on AI can lead to generic, soulless content that fails to engage your audience or convey your brand’s unique voice. — Ashley Baker, founder and chief marketing officer, Coastline Marketing LLC
It’s coming for your job
Generative AI is taking your job. The extent of its effects largely depends on the company’s perspective. While some organizations might be inclined to replace human content creators, others continue to appreciate the value their content teams bring and view AI as a supplementary tool for enhancement.
To better comprehend the implications for your situation, it’s essential to gauge your management’s stance on AI integration. — Pam Didner, vice president of marketing, Relentless Pursuit LLC
Use it as a content creator
Marketers talk frequently about how generative AI tools make content creation easier and quicker, and without the need for human writers. But a lot of that isn’t the best advice.
Create drafts with it
With a few caveats, the worst advice I’ve heard is to use AI to write your first draft. That might be OK for some kinds of content (e.g., technical documentation) or for more mundane aspects of the workflow (e.g., outline, metadata, initial proofing, optimization). But if you’re aiming to differentiate your content from competitors and build a strong, loyal relationship with your audience, then it’s a bad bet.
The real value in starting with an ugly first draft isn’t just to end up with a first draft but to do the thinking that’s involved — to pressure-test your premise, percolate on the possibilities, refine your perspective, ponder whether you’re pushing the alliteration just. a little. too far. Training the AI on your style, voice, and tone may make the robot sound more like you, but writing is a muscle that gets flabby when it isn’t flexed. Use it or lose it. — Carmen Hill, principal strategist and writer, Chill Content LLC
Use it to write
One of the worst pieces of advice I’ve heard about using AI in content marketing is to use it to write content. That type of content isn’t really helpful to organizations in any way unless they’re simply in a race to produce the most content that sounds like everyone else.
Producing more content for the sake of producing more content isn’t getting anyone anywhere. Better content should be the goal. — Michelle Garrett, consultant and writer, Garrett Public Relations
Prompt the posts
Just have ChatGPT write you a blog post.
Do not use these tools as direct content generators without considerable human editing and oversight. These tools are trained with existing content, and the output they create is often word-for-word plagiarism from existing documents.
This technology is fantastic for brainstorming ideas, finding gaps in your content, adjusting the writing style or reading level, but not for copying and pasting. — Brian Piper, director of content strategy and assessment, University of Rochester
Go for volume
The worst advice about generative AI in content marketing is that it allows you to create hundreds of pieces of content and eliminate your writers. It reminds me of the saying, “Just because you can do something, it doesn’t mean you should do it.” Using AI to pump out that much content only ensures your content will not succeed.
While generative AI is getting better at sounding less formulaic, it still cannot match the finesse that comes from using human writers. AI cannot replace the emotion and strategic thinking infused in prose from skilled wordsmiths. — Andi Robinson, content strategist, Hijinx Marketing
Generate to create
Worst advice: Let generative AI generate (i.e., content). As more content is created by generative AI, the more our content sounds the same. Instead of having generative AI do the thing, use it for one step removed from the thing, which is to help brainstorm and plan your content. That’s right, think of it as ideation AI. — Dennis Shiao, founder, Attention Retention
Eliminate the need for human intervention
I spoke to an engineer who was passionate about tinkering with generative AI to find a way to fully replace humans for writing blog posts. They could not fathom that the best use of AI for blog writers was to make them more creative and efficient. They insisted on working toward a solution that would require little to no rewriting or editing and didn’t understand why we thought this was not only impossible but undesirable. — Monica Norton, vice president, communications and content, Nextiva
Write away
By far, the worst advice I’ve heard (and continue to hear) is to use AI to write your copy. Marketing is all about differentiation. If everyone is using the same copy, how do you stand out? Instead, use AI to generate ideas, summarize research content, and suggest topics. — Jenn VandeZande, editor-in-chief, SAP CX + Industries
Tap into generative AI for better content
Using generative AI as a helper in achieving your content creation and marketing goals is certainly an option. But it may not be the best assistant to help you deliver results.
Get-started assistance
Worst: It’s great for getting over the blank page problem.
Instead, It’s great for critiquing the writing you worked really hard to get right and will help you make it better. — Jim Sterne, president, Target Marketing of Santa Barbara
Don’t use ChatGPT for unique content
Worst AI advice: You can’t use ChatGPT to write unique content.
ChatGPT is trained on millions of pages of web content. So ChatGPT is intimately familiar with the content that has already been published on the web. Fortunately, you can use ChatGPT to measure the uniqueness of YOUR content ideas before you write or before you publish. Simply ask ChatGPT to measure the novelty of your content on a scale from one to 10 and explain its rating. This trick works for content, briefs, topics, outlines, and more. — Dale Bertrand, president, Fire&Spark
Write for the algorithm
Many organizations are worried that they won’t be found unless they write for the algorithm. There are two problems with this: 1. We don’t know the algorithm generative AI is using. 2. Writing for anything besides your audience is a waste of budget. Create content for people with user intent as your guide — not a mysterious algorithm. — Mariah Obiedzinski Tang, assistant vice president of content marketing, Stamats
Believe AI killed SEO
Don’t invest in SEO. SEO is dead! AI killed it. Oh, simmer, Chicken Little.
Gartner predicts search engine volume will drop 25% by 2026 due to AI chatbots and other virtual agents, but SEO isn’t dead, especially when it comes to web content creation and publishing. Search is evolving.
Remember voice search? It was supposed to replace how people bought things and got information. Now, it’s mostly used for simple task automation and to check tomorrow’s weather. Consider social media, too. Facebook, TikTok, Instagram — these channels didn’t replace a brand’s website for e-commerce transactions. Instead, they became other channels for e-commerce.
Generative AI will likely be yet another marketing channel in your customer journey. Remember that search optimization means being understood. Generative AI is another channel for your brand and content to be understood. SEO is the mechanism for being understood online. The pursuit of being understood (by people, AI, search engines, etc.) is a worthy investment. — Haley Collins, director of operations, GPO
See AI as a staffing solution
A lot of the debate around generative AI centers on the human impact. Yet, the experts at CMWorld say that’s a mistake.
Reduce your humans
The worst advice? Cut the staff. Let generative AI write it because it’s faster and cheaper. Yes, it is. But is it good? Right now, the A in AI could easily stand for average.
And content that stands out is anything but. It needs to be different than what’s already been done. It needs to offer a fresh take, a new way of looking at things, perhaps a perspective that challenges the status quo.
The best creative ideas make you consider things. Or reconsider them, viewing them from another vantage point. More than that, they make you feel something. And that job’s too important to outsource to average.
If you must, let AI help you research. Let AI check your spelling. Let AI ensure you’re writing at the desired grade level. But always remember who’s in charge. — Nancy Harhut, chief creative officer, HBT Marketing
Expand AI’s role
Worst advice: Reduce content teams and significantly replace them with a barrage of AI-infused tools for graphics, visuals, video, text, downloadables, etc.
You still need qualified, creative, vision-driven humans to create content that advances the cause. Generative AI is an additional tool in the arsenal; it is not a replacement. That’s where many are getting it wrong and spreading that nonsense like wildfire because they see the cost savings but never do the profit analysis of the value a good content team with tools and budget does in comparison to a lack of one. — Troy Sandidge, founder, Strategy Hackers
Erase the people
The worst advice I’ve heard is that AI is going to completely erase content writers and marketing.
I would advise using AI for the content creation process because it can help you be more efficient and creative as it can speed up tedious tasks that you previously were doing manually such as content outlines, content ideation, content calendars, etc.
AI will not replace people, but people who use AI will replace those who do not. — Zack Kadish, senior SEO strategy director, Conductor
Use it as a replacement
It’s nonsense when people say that our jobs will be taken over by AI. We, as experts in our field, will become better by collaborating with tools like AI. Experts working together with tools equals a win-win situation. — Pauline Lannoo, head of digital strategy, The Fat Lady
Let it do everything
Let’s use AI to do all the things!
No, seriously, we have been testing AI (both paid and free programs) to help us craft SEO articles and follow-up promotional deliverables, such as landing pages, email copy, and ad copy. (TL;DR: The output is like rewatching Star Wars or Alien from the 1970s just to laugh at the CGI. It’s very obvious what was created by a computer and what is from an actual human.) It takes us rounds of prompts to get the AI to seem even somewhat on message and craft content that is not plagiarized.
AI can’t solve all our production pain points for content…yet. Today, it’s a great place to do research, brainstorm different wording for titles, start a good first draft for non-writers, and help redo the tone of a piece. — Amy Higgins, director, content strategy, Cloudflare
Everything in moderation
Generative AI certainly generated a lot of conversation from CMWorld speakers. And though some of it may seem contradictory, a consistent theme emerges: AI won’t replace humans, but every content marketer should get to know the possibilities and figure out how this prolific tool can help — not hinder — their brands’ content marketing results.
Register to attend Content Marketing World in San Diego. Use the code BLOG100 to save $100. Can’t attend in person this year? Check out the Digital Pass for access to on-demand session recordings from the live event through the end of the year.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
My wife had already fed our dog. Undeterred, the dog sat by her bowl with an innocent yet hungry look. I fell for it hook, line, and sinker and gave her a second meal.
See what I did there?
I used a hook to grab your attention and encourage you to keep reading. If you’re reading this, it worked.
Liz Willits defines a hook as the first thing that catches your audience’s eye. It should motivate your audience to read or view the rest of the content. Chief copywriter and owner of Content Phenom, Liz, shares this advice in her Content Marketing World talk, Hook Your Audience: How to Grab Attention in a Crowd of Content.
Importance of a great hook
A strong hook is the most important element of copywriting, says expert Joseph Sugarman. “If you can’t capture your audience’s attention right away, you’ve lost them,” he notes.
Liz says without a great hook, the amazing content assets you create might never be successful. She explains hooks have many variations, including:
Website headline or hero image
First line (or first few lines) of copy
Video thumbnail
First few seconds of dialogue in a video
Instagram image
Think about the papers you wrote in school. Your hook operates like a thesis statement. “Every line of text, every image, every video around your hook or your headline should prove your thesis statement, your hook,” Liz says.
Hooks should captivate, grab attention, and be unique. They should also be true. “Bad and unethical hooks are lies. They’re manipulative; they grossly exaggerate. They don’t deliver on what they promise. It’s all sizzle and no steak, and they feel icky,” Liz says.
Liz says while bad hooks could produce short-term gains, they have long-term consequences, including:
Ethical challenges (it’s just wrong)
Legal risks
Reputation damage
Negative brand association
Loss of trust
Loss of engagement
MrBeast uses hooks effectively
Jimmy Donaldson, better known as MrBeast, knows the importance of great hooks. He has one of the most-followed channels on YouTube. Ten months ago, MrBeast had 186 million subscribers. By July 2024, it was 289 million.
Liz says MrBeast’s hooks start with his video titles. She shares some examples:
Lamborghini vs. World’s Largest Shredder
Every Country On Earth Fights For $250,000!
Ages 1 to 100 Fight for $500,000
7 Days Stranded At Sea
I Got Hunted by the Military
I Built the World’s Largest Lego Tower
I find the titles outlandish (in a good way). I’m curious to find out which country won the $250,000, how MrBeast found his way from sea to land, and what the largest Lego tower looks like.
Liz says MrBeast’s thumbnail images serve as great hooks, too:
“They’re very interesting, they’re very colorful, and they stand out on YouTube. He puts a lot of effort into these because he knows that (the thumbnail) is an important part of his hook or his headline,” says Liz.
The opening lines of dialogue are also important. When I see a new selection on my favorite streaming service, I usually decide in the first two minutes whether to continue watching. Liz says that MrBeast’s opening lines are intentional and scripted to hook viewers.
Here are two examples:
“Behind me is an assassin, and if he stabs me with this rubber knife by the end of the day, he wins a hundred grand.”
“We are now stranded on a raft in the middle of the ocean. And there goes our boat. We are now stranded for seven days.”
You don’t need to copy MrBeast, but Liz says your brand can take ordinary ideas and frame them in extraordinary, unique, and appealing ways. Let’s consider an example.
Devising a new hook for a SaaS company
Liz worked with Motion, a software company whose product helps users with time management and scheduling. It builds to-do lists to schedule meetings at optimal times and block times on your calendar for work. “The result is you stay focused and know exactly what you should work on next. Don’t forget about deadlines; spend less time in meetings,” Liz explains.
Before getting to her content hooks, Liz did customer research, interviews, user testing, and market research. She learned why users loved Motion, how they used it, and what value it provided. This research guided her approach to hooks and helped her develop new and unique copy ideas.
The original homepage opened with this headline:
“Not another productivity tool that makes you do more work. We help you work less by cutting distractions by 70%”
The supporting copy noted that Motion saved users two hours per day.
Liz’s research found competing products used similar messaging. So, she reframed those ordinary ideas in a unique and appealing way. Here’s what she came up with:
Headline: There are now 13 months in a year.
Subhead: Motion increases productivity by 137%. With automation and AI that intelligently plan your day, schedule meetings, and build the perfect to-do list.
“It’s intriguing, it’s interesting, and obviously, a 13-month year does not exist. And so, we’re creating some cognitive dissonance here that gets people to keep reading and gets people to continue on down the page. And that was our primary hook,” Liz says.
A great headline creates a sizzle, but the supporting copy is the steak.
Liz ensured that the remaining copy proved the headline statements true. She also updated the page with user-interface-forward imagery with a fun look. She used vibrant colors to stand out from competitors.
3 hook ideas you can use
Liz offers three prompts with examples to create hooks for your content. They tackle approaches for fear, contrarians, and numbers.
Fears (and resolving those fears)
Prompt:
[Audience] are afraid of [specific fear]. But they shouldn’t be, because [why the specific fear isn’t something to worry about].
Prompt example:
Content marketers are afraid that ChatGPT is going to take their job. But they shouldn’t be because content marketing is so much more than writing content.
Use case:
Liz shows a LinkedIn post she published. It begins:
ChatGPT won’t replace your content marketing team.
Here’s why:
The opening line hooked the readers’ fears about generative AI taking their job.
Contrarian or counterintuitive ideas
Prompt:
Everything I know about life says otherwise, but [almost-unbelievable statement].
Prompt example:
Everything I know about life says otherwise, but coffee is dead. Nobody drinks it.
Think about your industry. What could replace “coffee is dead” with a seemingly unbelievable but true fact about your industry?
Numbers
Prompt:
Use specific numbers.
Prompt example:
I have an 84-page Google Doc.
Use case:
Liz used the 84-page example in a LinkedIn post. The number prompted readers to wonder why she had such a long document. They continued reading to learn why.
TIP: Extend the decimals in metrics, such as 99.98274% for uptime or 215.1223% for a product ROI.
Hook, then reel in the catch
You reached the end of this article — the hook worked. What caused you to click through and read the article? It could have been:
Or maybe it was something else.
To use a fishing analogy, the hook is essential in getting initial engagement (that is, taking the bait). The surrounding content reels the person in.
What great hooks will you create, as Liz says, to take ordinary ideas and frame them in extraordinary, unique, and appealing ways?
Join us on July 24 for The State of Marketing to Marketers webinar. Robert Rose and other marketing leaders will dive into CMI’s latest research, exploring what’s working and what’s not in B2B marketing today. Discover actionable insights to elevate your content marketing strategies for the second half of the year. Don’t miss out—register for free today!
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
Don’t you sometimes wish you could redo all that content created years ago?
I go back to things I wrote half a dozen years ago and think, “Sheesh, that didn’t age well.”
But that’s learning on the record , right?
For brands, this problem is relatively new. Before the web and search, a cringy marketing campaign or problematic CEO-penned article could quickly fade away. Most people just evaluated what the brand said at a given moment. Our collective memory was short — and finding older content took much more effort than typing a few characters.
However, you can create a content strategy that applies not only to what the brand says today and tomorrow but also reshapes what we’ve said in the past.
“How’s that possible?” you ask.
Here’s what I mean.
Use new capabilities to reframe the past
In The 4 C’s Formula: Your Building Blocks of Growth, entrepreneur coach Dan Sullivan talks about acquiring new capabilities (one of the titular 4 C’s). He writes that “a new capability creates confidence ahead of it, but it also rearranges everything behind it,” and any jump in capability “automatically transforms both the past and the future.”
Said more simply: When you acquire some new capability — like the ability to do content marketing well — you feel more confident about developing new content marketing projects. But that new ability also lets you reinterpret your past because it shows how your capabilities developed.
Your new perspectives let you — and other people — see your past in a better light. The great content you create tomorrow increases the value of the old content you put out yesterday.
When I read my cringy post from 2013, I can see how forward-thinking some of the ideas were. I can see the links I was trying to make — however poorly they’ve aged in a decade.
Applying these new perspectives to the past may be easier than projecting them to the future. Research shows that people feel disassociated from who they believe they’ll become.
They even discount their existing capabilities when considering their future selves. It’s as if we see our future selves as someone else.
The right content strategy lets you continually reboot (or retcon, as sci-fi geeks might say) your origin story and gives you more confidence about the future stories you’ll tell.
Reshape content for the future and the past
One of the most productive things you can do is to review the content your brand leaves in its wake. As you acquire new content capabilities, advance your story, and change your points of view, you’ll naturally evolve what your brand will say.
Take the opportunity to evolve what it’s already said, too.
Does it sound like I’m suggesting you need a content audit? Well, you probably do.
Whenever I suggest an audit to a content or marketing team, exactly zero people volunteer to take it on. “Yay, let’s do another content audit!” said no one ever.
That’s understandable. A content audit requires a manual review of hundreds, thousands, or tens of thousands of assets to find ROTted (redundant, outdated, or trivial) content.
Someone (or some team) must decide which assets to keep, which to change, and which to delete. Concerns over duplication, SEO, and old branding or outdated designs drive the decisions.
Inspiring? Not particularly.
However, reviewing past content through the lens of your new capabilities can make this tedious task much more enjoyable.
That outdated white paper? How might you reimagine it knowing what you know now? You might find a great metaphor you haven’t used in years. And it may be applicable today if you give it a more modern context.
What about those amazing articles someone created years ago that were never promoted, so they never got traction? Why not reproduce them in your new template and promote them?
That series of webinars you did with a partner that later became a competitor? Feel free to delete them all.
In other words, what insight do you have now that changes how you see the content you created?
Don’t only reshape your future. Change the context of the past.
One of the often-forgotten tenets of the whole magical thing called the World Wide Web is, “We can change it.” Yes, the Internet never forgets, but it stops caring quickly. So, when you have ideas worth caring about, change them to suit the current context.
You can change all of it.
How to decide what to reboot
I once had the privilege of talking with an extraordinary woman who handles investment strategy for consumer and entertainment media brands. She shared something the head of Marvel Studios told her about how they balance origin stories with the need to reboot popular hero arcs. (How many times have we seen the Spiderman origin story told in slightly different ways?)
Marvel sees new origin stories as critical to keeping a story “alive” and relevant to new and different audiences. Audiences sometimes interpret these new stories as playing to the cultural zeitgeist (Black Panther and Ms. Marvel come to mind).
But the Marvel team doesn’t think of them or design them that way, she said.
Instead, Marvel considers rebooting origin stories as a form of co-creation with fans. They look at (and solicit, when possible) feedback from their most passionate audiences to understand when and how a reboot might be necessary or timely.
This is a great lesson.
Before you attempt that content audit, look to your fans to help you understand how to reshape your brand story.
Think about who will co-create with you. Who are your passionate fans? Who knows your mythology and journey so well that they’d know when, how, and where a reboot would be appropriate and will care if you retcon a particular origin story or thought?
Does anyone remember and care about what you wrote five years ago? Find the people who know the equivalent of that detail from your brand stories.
Find those people. Gather with them. Listen to them. You don’t have to act on everything you hear. They’re still your brand’s stories, after all.
But fans can help you reboot your stories at the right time.
Old content rarely survived in the past. The physical space needed to store it and the time and effort required to reprint, reshoot, or recreate it meant that most old content was destroyed or became inaccessible.
Digital content changed all that. Now, it’s possible to keep everything. And it’s sometimes more expensive to address old content at all. That’s why websites are bloated, blogs go back decades, and document repositories remain unorganized.
But that doesn’t mean they should stay that way.
As content practitioners, you’re creating the artifacts of your future every day. Treat them with the respect future treasures deserve.
But don’t forget to seize the opportunity to use them to reshape past stories, too.
Unironically updated from a July 2022 article.
Register to attend Content Marketing World in San Diego. Use the code BLOG100 to save $100. Can’t attend in person this year? Check out the Digital Pass for access to on-demand session recordings from the live event through the end of the year.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
You have 173 days left to reach your marketing goals this year.
Well, let’s be honest. Nobody really works or does anything after Dec. 20. And if we’re really honest, December itself is a wash, and so is the last week of November with the U.S. Thanksgiving celebration.
So, you really have 133 days to reach your marketing goals.
How’s it going?
If your goals are related to organic search, you’ve faced a challenging year. Search continues to disrupt the work of content and marketing teams. From new algorithms to false starts and imperfect paths to AI-generated overviews, it’s a jumbled mess.
We turned to CMI’s chief strategy advisor, Robert Rose, to get his help in untangling all the news and to help you head more purposefully into the next 133 days. Watch or read on for his take:
Analyzing searcher behavior
SparkToro released its 2024 Zero-Click Search Study this month, and you might be surprised to learn just how much traffic isn’t getting generated by search these days.
Zero-click search happens when a searcher gets their answer on the results page without having to click a link. For example, if a searcher asks, “What is the address of the White House?” The address — 1600 Pennsylvania Avenue — appears on the results page, so the searcher never visits www.WhiteHouse.gov.
Rand Fishkin and his team at SparkToro examined millions and millions of Google searches all over the world using what they call a multimillion device clickstream panel. They didn’t look at keywords, which wouldn’t have been terribly helpful anyway. Instead, they looked at what Americans and Europeans do after they conduct a search.
What did they find?
More than one-third (37%) of people end their search without clicking. Of the remaining people, 21% conduct another search and 41% click on something.
Of those who click, 70% go to an organic result, and 28.5% end up on another Alphabet (i.e., Google) property, such as YouTube, Maps, Images, or News. And 1% click on a paid ad.
While nuances exist as they relate to mobile and voice search, those numbers are interesting. For example, almost 30% of clicks go to a Google property where Alphabet can further monetize the searchers’ actions. That doesn’t even count any portion of the 21% who ultimately end up on a Google property when they conduct another search because they didn’t get the right, best, or most satisfying answer the first time.
However, the real punch line is this: Only 360 of every 1,000 U.S. Google searches go to the open web.
The research concludes that Google is NOT losing in search despite what many seem to think. Google is doing very well in translating more searches with more avenues to keep users in the Google ecosystem.
Evolve your Google strategy
What’s the takeaway?
People are overreacting with their claims that AI Overviews (the AI-generated summary at the top of results) and the quality of Google search results are failing.
The research clearly indicates that marketers can no longer think of Google search as a silo. In a more perfect world, you would have matching content on Google’s other properties — YouTube, News, Maps, etc. Every blog post created should be accompanied by a video, a news item, etc.
But the study’s bigger lesson is that marketers must look at the Google ecosystem to understand where they have the best chance of being an off-ramp for people looking for things. It’s most likely not a link to your website or blog, at least initially.
You could wax philosophically about the technically complex zero-search results. But the simplest way to address it is to ask: “How do we become the answer that Google uses for that particular query?”
I can tell you from experience about the benefits of doing that. For a few years, when searchers asked, “What is content marketing,” a page from the Content Marketing Institute popped up. In recent years, Google changed that. CMI remains the No. 1 organic answer in the query, but above it is a “dictionary box” with a third-party definition that I don’t think is quite right.
You must understand that the search game is rigged. Google optimizes for Google, not your brand.
Even if you hate the game, you must play it. But how you play it grows increasingly complex. Take solace in the fact that Google seems to reward good, high-quality, and informative content. Make that what you continue creating for the remainder of the 133 days minus six minutes or so left in the year.
Want more content marketing tips, insights, and examples? Subscribe to workday or weekly emails from CMI.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
Ali Orlando Wert has led multiple content teams at high-growth companies fueled by acquisition. Although these teams are often pieced together from multiple acquired companies, they must operate as one.
Moving quickly to that point can expose flaws in processes, Ali says. Balls get dropped, and things fall through the cracks. Finger-pointing begins. People make statements like, “That’s not my job.” Teams lose their nimbleness and get overwhelmed by last-minute requests.
It can feel like the marketing house is on fire.
To douse that fire requires creating a different kind of spark, and Ali shared her experiences doing just that at Content Marketing World. In her presentation, Making Work Flow: How to Build Critical Content Operations to Scale Your Strategy, she covers swim lanes, silos, and scalability.
Swim your lane: Define roles and responsibilities
When roles are unclear, you often hear one of these statements:
“Please just do your job.”
“Please stop doing my job.”
Ali says both responses result from a lack of understanding of the team’s roles and responsibilities. The solution involves two steps. First, get organizational buy-in on the roles and responsibilities. Second, document them based on projects and processes.
RACI model
Though the process requires only two steps, you must invest time into executing them. Ali’s recommended solution is the RACI (pronounced “racy”) model.
The RACI model encompasses four elements:
Responsible — the person who is directly working on and completing the task
Accountable — the person with final authority over the task being completed
Consulted — the people who must be consulted during the execution of the task
Informed — the people who are not directly involved in the task but need to stay aware of progress
Ali suggests a few ways to pull together your organization’s RACI model:
In-person workshops
Virtual whiteboards
Collaborative documentation (e.g., Google Docs, Notion)
Here’s what a RACI model could look like in chart form:
The top row includes column labels for project deliverable, product manager, strategist, and designer.
The left column lists the project deliverables (design the sitemap, design the wireframes, create the style guide, and code templates). Under each role, an R, A, C, or I (responsible, accountable, consulted, or informed), identifies the person’s responsibility in that initiative.
Team roles and responsibilities
While RACI is useful for documenting roles on processes and projects, Ali also recommends defining individuals’ roles and responsibilities at a broad level.
“If you’re a company or team that has grown really quickly through acquisition, it’s surprising how unclear people might be on their own job and other people’s jobs,” she says.
Ali recommends gathering teams (including marketing leaders) to discuss roles and responsibilities. These important discussions can:
Surface areas of disagreement.
Uncover gaps with no owner.
Provide visibility into each team’s work.
Align priorities across teams.
Break down silos: Work together toward shared goals
How do you know if your organization experiences silo problems? See if anything on Ali’s list rings true:
Departments are antagonistic toward each other.
Too many instances of duplicate work occur.
Tasks regularly slip through the cracks.
Accessing vital information is often difficult.
Teams appear to be working at cross purposes.
Once you’ve identified silo problems that exist, follow Ali’s advice to break them down.
Content mission statement
A content mission statement can provide clarity to all the silos, which is especially important after multiple acquisitions. It should contain these elements:
Audience — who you aim to help
What you deliver — the kind of information you provide
Outcome or benefit — what audience can do because of your content
“As a team, we work through our content mission statement and align on the audiences we’re trying to serve, what kind of content we’re going to deliver for them, and what we want the outcomes to be,” says Ali.
In addition to a documented mission statement, Ali recommends collaboratively answering these questions:
Who are you targeting?
What does success look like?
What tactics will get you there?
How does this align with marketing objectives?
How will you measure success?
How will you report on progress?
What targets do you think you can achieve?
What budget will you need?
Process workshop
At Appfire, where Ali currently works, several people across different marketing groups meet for an in-person marketing campaign process workshop. The participants were practitioners who cared about optimizing processes and breaking down silos.
The workshop included three phases:
Pre-work: Gathering challenges from across the affected teams
Workflow mapping: Detailing the campaign process using the RACI model for every step
Campaign briefs: Creating a document with all the relevant details to execute a campaign
After the workshop, the team turned the campaign briefs and workflows into templates in the project and document management systems.
Results and templates
The team’s efforts to break down silos saw immediate results. “We’ve mapped out all of our workflows. We’ve built out a brand-new deliverable template in our project management system. We made some decisions to change systems,” Ali says.
“We meet for an hour a week, and we just keep chipping away in small pieces. So, it doesn’t have to be a huge commitment of resources.”
Scaling: Build sustainable operations
You have defined roles and responsibilities, published a content mission statement, and addressed the silos, but you’re still not done. You now should tackle the team structure, consider a content council, and address capacity planning to support scaling your operations.
Team structure
Establishing the right team structure is key to scaling your content operations, Ali says.
When structuring content teams of any size, here are a few approaches Ali says she’s found to be effective:
Hiring content specialists who work on both strategy and content creation
Aligning content specialists to product or solution areas
Pairing content specialists with a product marketing partner
Leaning into individual team members’ strengths and areas of interest
In larger teams Ali has also had success with these approaches:
Splitting out editorial vs. strategy managers
Having a dedicated operations lead to manage projects and resourcing
Leaning into freelancers and agencies to supplement in-house resources
Creating dedicated team leads for different geographies
Content council
At one company, Ali built a content council with the help of CMI’s consulting arm, The Content Advisory. The council brought together cross-functional team members responsible for content in different parts of the organization.
Council members met to agree on a common philosophy for content, standards, and share their experiences, insights, and best practices.
Based on her experience managing a content council, Ali suggests the following:
Choose participants who are content advocates and influencers.
Ensure that leadership buys into the idea, and an executive champion exists.
Create a council charter with clear objectives, roles, and responsibilities.
Capacity planning
If you struggle with knowing how much work your team can execute, when to hire added resources, and when to say no, you’ll benefit from capacity planning.
Ali recommends starting by benchmarking how long tasks take. Ask your team to use a free app or browser plugin for a couple of months to record their task and project time. Now, you have real-world data to plan accordingly.
With this real-world data, you can set expectations on team and individual workloads. Assign tasks to individuals based on their capacity. Then, build the case for additional resources if needed.
Operationalize your strategy
I love this statement from Ali: “Operationalizing the strategy is part of the strategy.”
She related a quote from Simon Sinek: “Passion alone can’t cut it. For passion to survive, it needs structure. A why without how has little probability of success.”
In other words, content leaders should elevate the importance of translating the strategy into the team’s daily practices. Optimizing content operations increases the value content marketing brings to the business.
As Ali says, “We all want to be successful. And one way we can make ourselves even more indispensable is by adding content operations to our toolkit.”
All tools mentioned in this article were suggested by the author. If you’d like to suggest a tool, share the article on social media with a comment.
Bring your team to Content Marketing World this October for inspiration, ideas, and actionable advice on developing and executing a strategy that drives profit for your business. Group rates are available. Register today.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
Billions watch TikTok videos, YouTube Shorts, and Instagram Reels every month.
But it isn’t just consumers who like short content.
Google, YouTube, social media platforms, and more expect brief content. In meta descriptions, excerpts, episode descriptions, and sometimes posts. Some even set total character limits.
How do you make the most of those characters? Read on.
Meta descriptions
Some best-practices content says meta descriptions should be between 150 and 160 characters. Other sources say they can be up to 300 characters. Google says it doesn’t matter because it just selects the most relevant information from the meta description for the searcher, which usually appears as a truncated version.
But no matter what’s allowed, you still don’t have a lot of characters to convey the message, so you need to make the most of them.
To craft a meta description that really delivers, you need to think about what the searcher would want from the content. (Hopefully, you thought about that before the content was created, so it aligns with both business and audience intent.)
You shouldn’t need an in-depth analysis to understand the content’s purpose. Look at the designated keywords and categories. Organically incorporate the primary keyword (at a minimum) into the description. And detail what the searcher will get out of the content.
Treat it like a pitch to convince the user the page is exactly what they’re looking for.
Craft unique descriptions for every valuable page.
TIP: You don’t need to write meta descriptions in sentence format; however, avoid stringing together keywords because they don’t give context for the content.
Here’s an example of bad and better from Google:
Bad: “Eggs are a source of joy in everyone’s life. When I was a small child, I remember picking eggs from the hen house and bringing them to the kitchen. Those were the days.”
Better: “Learn how to cook eggs with this complete guide in 1 hour or less. We cover all the methods, including over-easy, sunny side up, boiled, and poached.”
Example: Though I’m not a big fan of using examples from my work, in this case, I must because I can’t see the native meta descriptions (or excerpts) for content on other sites.
Let’s dissect the meta description for this CMI article, Interactive Content: How Quizzes, Games, and Polls Make for Engaging Results:
“Get your audience to stick and click with interactive content. Discover the possibilities, tools, and big results that many marketers are missing out on.”
The description totals 153 characters. It incorporates the primary keyword “interactive content.” As to its purpose, the category helped inform that. The article belongs to the content-creation category. So, the second sentence, “Discover the possibilities, tools …” delivers on that.
One more tip — be direct. Yes, I could have written, “Content marketers can get the audience to stick and click with interactive content. You can discover the possibilities ….” But I didn’t want that noun, “content marketers,” and pronoun, “you,” to take precious space. You don’t need to address the audience unless that’s critical for understanding or targeting.
Excerpts
Now, I see a lot of people simply paste their meta description into the excerpt field in WordPress or the corresponding category in whatever CMS they use. Excerpts can also be used as promo copy for newsletters, social media, and more.
In most cases, excerpts should not be the same as the meta description.
As WordPress explains, excerpts are summaries of longer articles that appear elsewhere on your site, such as a blog summary index or archived pages.
That means the person seeing an excerpt is already on your website. You aren’t asking them to pick your content over a competitor’s page that appears on the same search engine rankings page.
With that understanding, you can craft a more specific summary or highlight the content’s features that would attract someone to consume it.
Example: Here is the excerpt for the interactive content article:
“Host a poll. Do a quiz. Create a game. Interactive content comes in so many forms, but not enough marketers take advantage of it. Discover the possibilities, tools, and big results.”
The excerpt is a little longer than the meta description (about 30 characters or so). It’s also five sentences instead of two. Since I didn’t have to attract someone searching Google for information about how to do interactive content, I could be more specific on the article’s takeaway ideas — host a poll, do a quiz, create a game — before sharing the primary keyword (interactive content) and article overview.
One more tip — you don’t have to completely rewrite your meta description. As you can see in the example, the last sentence, “Discover the possibilities, tools, and big results,” is the same for both. Just make sure the excerpt delivers what an audience already on your site might want to know about the content.
YouTube descriptions
YouTube gives you 5,000 characters to describe your video. That’s the equivalent of about 800 to 1,000 words. But even Google, the owner of YouTube, advises against using all of them to explain the video.
Think of the description in two components — the text that appears before the clickable word “more,” and the text that appears in full after they click.
In the first part, include up to three keywords that reflect the subject matter, at least one of which appears in the title. That strategy makes sense, given YouTube is the second-largest search engine in the world.
With those words selected, spend your time crafting a few unique sentences (about 100 to 200 characters) to stand out. You’ll want to ensure that both a searcher and a subscriber of your channel can quickly understand what they’ll get from watching the video.
“With QuickBooks Online Advanced you can include estimated costs when you fill out Project Estimates. That way you can measure your estimated versus actual profitability on a project.”
The first part totals 182 characters and succinctly explains the video’s topic (how to include estimated costs), the product (QuickBooks Online Advanced), and the benefit (measuring your estimated versus actual profitability). Intuit incorporates targeted keyword phrases — project estimates and QuickBooks Online Advanced.
When the user clicks on “more,” they see the full description. It totals about 1,500 characters — 18 times more than the preview but still far below the 5,000 characters permitted by YouTube.
The full description includes one more sentence on the specifics included in the video. Then, it shows the timestamps and chapters for the video to help viewers know when to tune into a particular topic.
Intuit also includes links to all its step-by-step tutorials broken down by subject matter before asking users to subscribe to the channel and visit the company’s website.
If you’re unfamiliar with how to add chapters and timestamps, YouTube provides instructions. At a minimum, you must include three chapters, each lasting at least 10 seconds.
One more tip — you can also further customize the description for easier reading by bolding, italicizing, or striking through the text. While YouTube doesn’t allow traditional bullets, you can use emojis to make your points easier to read.
LinkedIn
Every social media platform embraces short-form posts. However, given the growing popularity of LinkedIn for B2B marketers, I wanted to focus on that platform. It may seem like a platform where you can write without caring about the character count. It isn’t.
LinkedIn lets individuals use up to 1,300 characters and companies up to 700 characters for posts to their pages. That sounds like a lot compared to meta descriptions, excerpts, and X.
But here’s the thing: LinkedIn shows only about 200 characters or less on the screen before the “see more” button appears.
So, you’re back to crafting a super short message. However, unlike meta descriptions and excerpts, your post may appear in the feed of LinkedIn audiences who aren’t actively searching and not even actively interested in your topic.
You have two choices: 1. Write a post that doesn’t require the reader to click to see more, or 2. Write a post (in less than 200 characters) that attracts the reader to click, and then deliver a brief narrative that makes them glad they did.
Either way, focus your time on the content that will appear in the feed. Create something visually and substantively pleasing to attract attention quickly. For example, use unexpected spacing by inserting line breaks and ellipses or incorporate a (relevant) emoji or two.
Example: In this LinkedIn post, CMI opted for a short post (about 165 characters) with two goals.
The text promotes the interactive content article by touting the topic’s benefit (“delivers bigger results than static content”) and explains what the reader will get (“what works, available tools, and more”). It’s designed to get readers to click on the article link that also appears in the post (the first goal).
But it also has a second purpose — getting the viewer to stop scrolling and take a poll. In 18 characters, it invites people to take a poll. (LinkedIn limits polls to four options. Keep the choices simple, or people won’t bother reading them, let alone vote in the poll.)
One more tip — if you use hashtags, make sure to budget space for those characters. Still, don’t go overboard. Scheduling software Hootsuite recommends no more than three hashtags, and I concur.
Stay short
In Shakespeare’s Hamlet, Polonius says, “Brevity is the soul of wit.”
In content marketing, brevity is the soul of digital content. Google wants it. YouTube likes it. LinkedIn prefers it. But just as importantly, audiences do, too.
So, the next time you craft that meta description, excerpt, video description, or LinkedIn post, don’t think about the upper character limits. Focus on doing just enough to satisfy your brand, the publishing channel, and your potential readers.
Register to attend Content Marketing World in San Diego. Use the code BLOG100 to save $100. Can’t attend in person this year? Check out the Digital Pass for access to on-demand session recordings from the live event through the end of the year.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
More than a month after a source gave thousands of pages of internal Google documentation to SparkToro co-founder Rand Fishkin, the importance of this leak is still being debated.
Rand and others continue to dissect the findings for search optimization hints based on what the documents show about how Google ranks content for search.
It’s an admirable effort. Still, I stick by my early assessment, which is that SEOs and marketers may have learned Coke’s secret recipe, but it lacks the quantities of each ingredient.
And it may be a big bucket of nothing. Search algorithms will continue to change, and the recipe may be outdated by the time you optimize your content based on these “secrets.”
Here’s an SEO lesson you can take away: Your content programs are in a race for position No. 1. But in this race, your program isn’t the car (Google and other search options are). It isn’t the driver (the searcher). It’s the racetrack.
And you’re competing to be the first choice for every car and driver who wants the most reliable or most enjoyable way to get from one place to another.
And that’s why you shouldn’t make SEO the focus of your content strategy.
Watch out for SEO strategy potholes
Many businesses start content marketing programs because they believe it will help them rank higher for organic search results. When their target audiences search for potential solutions (the thinking goes), they’ll find the brand’s array of content and decide it’s the one that provides the most value.
But when you depend on being found in search, you have to focus on content that chases attention instead of trustworthiness. And that creates an inherent pressure to produce content designed to rank rather than content intended to lead, entertain, or inform.
Meanwhile, optimizing content for organic search traffic has become more complex over the last decade. The quality of competition, the sheer quantity of content, the growth of paid search advertising, and the introduction of AI Overviews have made page-one real estate more expensive to acquire and harder to maintain.
Now-retired SEO expert Arnie Kuenn used to joke, “The best place to hide a dead body is the second page of Google results. Nobody goes there.” And that remains true.
Yet I still see organizations use the classic SEO-first approach when building a case for a content marketing program. For example, two of my clients recently shared their frustrations about where they were in launching their new content marketing program.
Each had asked their digital agency to identify the best way to bring their content marketing program to life. In each case, the consultants returned a 30-slide deck, making the business case for content marketing by talking about search terms, keywords, and “snackable” content to answer every question they could think of.
Yeah, 2010 called and wants its strategy back.
To be clear, I know there are digital agencies that do work that goes well beyond my pay grade.
But these slide decks illustrate the problems with this all-too-common argument for launching a content marketing program. First, SEO has arguably never been a good foundation for a content marketing platform. Second, changes in content discovery fundamentally alter the content marketing equation.
Lesson 1: Google doesn’t care
Spoiler alert: Google isn’t (and has never been) interested in helping you build an audience for your brand. Quite the contrary — it always has been interested in you helping it build an audience. That’s why Google designed Search to create enough commoditization in results to make advertising that features what the searcher seeks more attractive.
Remember this lesson as AI answers show up in more search results.
If you think Google wants to surface the most trustworthy response to a query, think again. The search giant wants to surface the answer that can be monetized.
What that looks like is pretty vague right now. But know this: Google will happily use your content to train its AI — and then monetize the output in ways that don’t serve your interests.
AI Overviews and standard search results share that similarity. Neither solution is built to return the highest-quality answer. They’re built to summarize (or prioritize) the highest average of answers. And both are designed to generate more and more searches.
As I’ve said, if you focus on thought leadership and trust as a differentiator, you won’t spend time creating content about frequently asked questions (FAQs). Instead, you’ll focus on providing what I call the rarely given answers (RGAs).
For example, if we’d used search volume in 2009 to decide whether to launch a platform about “content marketing,” we probably would have decided against it. (Spoiler: We didn’t look at the search volume.)
Look what we would have missed. As the chart shows, interest in the term “content marketing” was at 9 in 2009. By 2017, it had grown to 71.
You should know more about your audience than Google does. When formulating a new content marketing platform, you should realize that Google Search has been (and is) helpful for understanding the zeitgeist of popular topics and terms. But it’s not as useful in understanding what your audiences will be interested in tomorrow.
Lesson 2: Google still isn’t here for you
Content discovery is changing the way audiences interact with digital content. Google doesn’t want that to happen on any channel other than Google.
If you feel like search results are getting progressively worse over time, it’s not just you. Recent research has shown that Google Search results have become less useful. And AI Overviews haven’t fared well in their debut, handing out untrustworthy advice about eating rocks and putting glue on pizza.
These degraded results don’t mean that Google is getting “dumber.” The company has to balance the quality of the data/content it chooses to push to the top of SERPs for the best experience with content that can be monetized most effectively.
If Google only had to optimize against one of those things, the results would be much better.
The sheer quantity of digital content means broad informational searches are less efficient and helpful. That’s why search platforms, social media, and other big content providers are leaning into content discovery.
Think of content discovery as “content recommendations without asking for the recommendation.” The discovered or recommended content is delivered without an explicit request.
Think of the TikTok phenomenon — the algorithm quickly learns what you spend time on. That way, it can deliver value (and videos) based on your behavior rather than what you explicitly ask for.
Content suggestions based on a customer’s intent, demographics, and other first-party data are growing in thought leadership resource centers, websites, and e-commerce platforms.
Content discovery in search means that answers appear on the results page. Searchers don’t need to click through to your content, as you’ve surely noticed. They just get the answers directly on the SERP.
That content may be wrong today. Tomorrow, it will be better. And next week, it may be better than yours.
Remember, Google isn’t trying to help you build an audience for your brand. It will use your content to help its brand.
Content marketing starts by focusing on being the best racetrack
Here’s the bottom line: If you’re looking to launch or change a content marketing program, don’t build your case on attracting an audience through search. Those days are gone (if they ever really existed).
Yes, you still need to learn about SEO and understand how the evolution of search into content discovery will affect your content distribution. And I’m not suggesting you stop employing SEO best practices, especially as they evolve for content discovery.
But remember, your content program isn’t the race car or the driver. It’s the track.
Don’t get caught up in a battle for the best, longest, or even most keyword-rich answer to a frequently asked question. Instead, aim for connected content experiences that answer the questions and address the reason behind the question.
For example, the query for an enterprise software search may evolve from “What is the best CRM system?” to “Show me a demonstration of what a great CRM system can do.” The query for a restaurant will evolve from “What are the best Mexican restaurants near me?” to “Tell me the availability at the best Mexican restaurants for two people on Monday night.”
The aim of future content-driven experiences isn’t to answer simple questions. It will be to provide answers and solutions before the questions get asked.
And don’t take that just from me. Google co-founder Sergey Brin affirmed more than a decade ago: “My vision was that information would come to you as you need it. You wouldn’t have to search query at all.”
Put simply: The future of search will remove the need to search.
Put another way: You won’t develop a better racetrack by looking at the engineering of cars. Instead, look to the drivers (your audience and customers). Then, build the roads that lead them to the finish line.
Updated from a November 2022 article.
Register to attend Content Marketing World in San Diego. Use the code BLOG100 to save $100. Can’t attend in person this year? Check out the Digital Pass for access to on-demand session recordings from the live event through the end of the year.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
Read on (or watch the video) to learn what Rand had to say about how marketers got to this point and how you can pivot to more meaningful measurement in 2024.
Take a trip back in time
What does a 1985 model look like in 2024?
Before we get to that, let’s start in 1985.
A Coca-Cola marketer tells its ad agency it wants to run a new campaign in Ohio to drive same-store sales of New Coke. The agency outlines the deliverables but makes no promises on results — and Coca-Cola’s marketers and C-suite don’t expect them to.
The agency puts up a New Coke billboard in Cincinnati and a different version in Cleveland. Whichever one lifts same-store sales more will be run statewide.
By 2005, marketers and agencies had changed the story. They made promises to get their bosses and clients to invest in digital marketing. Search engine optimization, pay-per-click, display ads, retargeting, content marketing, etc., could now deliver the once-impossible — measurement of the buyer’s journey from start to finish.
In this new attribution model, they could quantify the value of each customer’s engagement with the brand.
A buyer could see a YouTube pre-roll ad, watch the video, and then visit the brand’s website to consume a piece of content. Three months later, they signed up for the email newsletter. Then, they saw an ad in the newsletter, clicked it, and made their purchase.
Marketing assigned a fractional value for each touchpoint based on the total sale. Now, the company can accurately calculate the true worth and impact of each marketing tactic.
Measuring marketing in the early 2020s
However, events in the past five years or so mean marketers and agencies can no longer fulfill the promise of an attribution model.
Third-party cookies are dying. Apple further developed a private ecosystem. New regulations and laws in California, Canada, the European Union, and in parts of Europe decimated a marketers’ ability to track the buyer.
And those aren’t the only complications. Almost one-third of all internet users enable ad blockers, which block tracking as well as ads. Plus, people use incognito browsing and multiple devices along their journey, making it still harder to track their activity.
Building a sophisticated attribution channel may still work for large-scale digital advertising, Rand says. But forget it if you want to attribute a journey that includes stops on Slack channels and social media platforms that lead buyers to watch a video or read an article before they buy.
Modeling for 2024 and beyond
Instead, marketers should return to the 1985 model. Rand and host Amanda Subler discussed this scenario: Someone sees an influencer mention a brand’s product on Instagram. Later, they do a Google search for it and buy it.
Now, under the attribution model, Google would get all the credit for the purchase because the brand didn’t know the buyer had seen the influencer’s video. Marketers who relied on that misattribution would make erroneous decisions about investing their budget in Google going forward.
Rand says when he looks at his favorite marketing campaigns and the things they convinced him to buy, none of the touchpoints would be attributable.
The tongue-in-cheek video netted 181,000 views in four days, garnered major media coverage, and created viral posts across the internet.
But Visit Oslo can’t track the journey of those viewers and readers over the next two years and attribute a percentage of increasing flights and hotel sales to the video. However, Visit Oslo will see an increase in demand, and the tourism board will assume the campaign was effective in building brand awareness.
“That’s how almost all marketing investments are going to have to go in the future,” Rand says.
To measure impact, you should follow in the footsteps of the 1980s marketer. Evaluate the before-and-after metrics overall, and don’t assign a value to each component’s contributions.
Think about it. If Visit Oslo had stuck with an attribution model to determine the success of its quirky video, it would likely have been disappointed in the results.
“Attribution destroys creativity. It destroys imagination. It destroys the things that are human and awesome,” Rand says.
Don’t give up on rankings completely
This modern measurement strategy is even more important in a zero-click marketing world as platforms and humans favor one-stop content, and marketers lose traffic to their owned channels. “We’ve really become trained as internet users not to click, to stay on the platform,” Rand says.
Still, your brand can’t ignore search rankings as they play a role in those zero-click results and some humans still see Google, other search engines, and even generative AI tools as their go-to research sources.
Rand relates how SparkToro faced that challenge. It creates a self-contained or zero-click newsletter. The 50,000–plus recipients don’t have to click on a link to read more about a subject. Yet, that also means that Google can’t see and recognize that content’s value and show it in search engine results. So, SparkToro ponders how to use the newsletter content in a way that also gets its attention from Google.
“That’s the tension that exists in a lot of these systems,” Rand says.
But your metrics can help you see how big the tension really is.
Rand tells of a recent presentation from Wil Reynolds, founder of Seer Interactive, who relayed that his agency site’s organic traffic dropped 41% in 18 months as Google changed its algorithm and favored zero-click results.
A drop like that sounds catastrophic, but Wil looked at other metrics and found that new client leads and revenue had inched up slightly in that same time.
TIP: The most valuable traffic from Google search for marketers is branded traffic — people who search for the brand (Adidas) and not the product (running shoes).
What’s a marketer to do?
Every marketer must have a difficult conversation about the failure of attribution modeling with the marketing, finance, and executive leadership teams of their employers or clients.
“They have to understand when you provide attribution, you miss almost every organic channel, every word-of-mouth-channel, almost every social engagement channel that’s organic, and almost every channel that doesn’t directly drive a link that passes a referral string,” Rand says.
Instead, they must recognize that measurement is the preferred method and it requires a long-range assessment of brand strength and recognition. “You’re going to look at lift, not attribution,” Rand says. “They have to buy into this new method of operating.”
But making an interview great requires more than you posing questions and the interviewee answering them.
A great interview incorporates a thoughtful approach that makes the subject comfortable enough to share their thoughts and takes them on a journey that may lead to some surprising answers (for both interviewer and interviewee).
As a reporter, editor, and content marketer, I’ve interviewed thousands of people, ranging from the random person on their street for a walk-and-talk feature to the well-known person sitting on stage in front of an audience. How I approached interviews early on differs from how I do it now.
To help you shorten the learning curve, here are some of the tricks I’ve learned:
Know the purpose
Content marketers interview all types of people for all sorts of reasons. You want to gain knowledge from a subject matter expert. You need to ghostwrite a thought leadership piece for an executive. You wish to learn about customers’ experiences.
That’s the baseline for your interview strategy.
But you also need to know how the interview will be used. Will you take notes or get a transcription and craft a written article? Will you post audio clips on social media or your brand’s website? Will you publish a video on YouTube? Will you do the interview live in front of the audience (virtual or in person)? Or will you use the interview for multiple tactics?
Knowing how the interview will be used lets you follow the right path, so you get what you need from the interview.
Prepare for the interview
You must research both the topic and the person. How much research you do depends on your knowledge level, but never wing it.
Lots has been written about researching topics, but less on researching the interviewee. But both are critical to a successful interview.
I look at what the person’s said or written. It might be about the same topic as the interview, or it might be about something else, but it’s all informative. It gives me a better understanding of what they know, how they think, and how they communicate those thoughts. It not only helps inform the questioning, but it lets me prepare for how they might respond to those questions.
For example, if someone typically gives yes-no answers or writes absurdly short sentences and paragraphs, I better be prepared with follow-up questions to pull more information from them. If someone writes tomes about a topic or goes on and on in answering a question, I better be prepared to interrupt and shift the conversation if they stray from the original topic.
If you’re doing a live interview, such as a livestream or in-person event, do a pre-interview with the subject whenever possible. Use a video-conferencing tool so you’re face to face. During the 15- to 20-minute call, ask a few of the planned questions and develop a rapport with the subject.
Wear the interviewee’s shoes
Building a bond — albeit temporary — with the interview subject goes a long way in delivering great content.
Think about it. This person is placing their trust in you, whom they don’t know well if at all, to tell their story or share their insights with an audience in public.
Some people are comfortable with that. Others are hesitant, worried about how they may come across or that the information they share may be misrepresented (unintentionally or intentionally).
In your early correspondence with the subject, include a short bio, LinkedIn profile, and any other relevant links about you and your work. That gives the interviewee an easy option to learn even more about you.
Then, in the beginning or during the pre-interview, talk a little bit about you. Share something that interests you about the topic or how you learned about the person. Heck, talk about where you live or even the weather. Maybe give them an explanation of your role or a brief background on your relevant experience. You don’t need to verbalize your resume, but weaving in bits of your life helps develop a rapport and establish some credibility.
Before the interview, some subjects ask to see the questions. I totally get it. They want to be prepared and don’t want to get hit with a question that surprises or upsets them. But I don’t send a list of all the planned questions. Instead, I send a synopsis of what’s expected in the interview and a few of the questions. I explain that I can’t send a lengthy list of questions because I often let the interviewee’s answers prompt the next questions.
Do the interview
In my school days, I would write down my questions and leave space for the answers. I quickly learned that I never left enough space for the answers. I also learned that the formal Q-and-A style led to stilted, mundane interviews.
Now, I write down a few must-address points or questions to create a cohesive narrative. This helps me craft the story in front of a live audience and makes for a shorter post-interview process to figure out what I should include in the content.
Find a style that works best for you; just make sure it allows you to feel prepared and leaves room for flexibility.
Too many interviewers stick to their planned questions. They listen only for the interviewee to conclude the answer so they can move onto the next question. They don’t really hear what the person says. They miss the opportunity to ask a valuable follow-up question or invite the interviewee to go further down that path.
If you listen well, you can also sense when the interviewee is going off track or down too deep a hole about the subject. You can bring the conversation back to the topic at hand. First, use nonverbal cues, such as opening your mouth as if you’re about to speak, stop nodding in agreement, or shuffling your note cards.
If they don’t pick up on the cue, speak up to pivot the conversation. Say something like, “That’s so interesting. I realize we could go much longer on that, but I want to respect your time, so let me ask a different question.” If the interview is live, say something like, “That’s great information. I only wish we had all afternoon to talk more about it. But since we don’t, I’ll ask you this …”
As you conclude the interview, ask a form of these questions: “What haven’t I asked that you wished I did?” or “What else should our audience know about this?”
I find these closing answers often elicit responses that become the key quote or crux of the resulting content asset.
Repeat, repeat, repeat
With interviews, you never know what you’ll get — that’s both the fun and challenging part of talking with subject matter experts, executives, customers, etc. But you do know every interview is an opportunity to refine your process. You’ll be able to assess the subject’s style more quickly. You can discover what types of questions elicit the better responses. You can realize how much research you really need to do.
Fortunately, improving your interview style doesn’t require practice, practice, and more practice. It requires interview, interview, and more interviews — and all the time you’re creating publishable content.
Want more content marketing tips, insights, and examples? Subscribe to workday or weekly emails from CMI.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
I had two interesting discussions with marketing leaders recently. Both revolved around the same question: “Where do we start?”
One told me she’d road-mapped an entirely new content operation for her marketing department. She’d gotten the go-ahead from leadership, but everybody was so busy with other work that they weren’t sure how to move forward.
The second leader told me they were rethinking a project plan a large consulting firm delivered. It seemed logical and straightforward when the firm first recommended it. But now that it’s time to put people’s names in the project plan, it all seems overwhelming.
How did they do that?
Absorbing planned change can be incredibly difficult. You know it makes more sense to fix your (metaphorical) leaky plumbing, but it’s so much easier just to continue watering the lawn — even if it costs more.
One common reaction is to look at how other content and marketing teams handle similar situations. But looking through someone else’s lens rarely produces impressive results.
I’ve noticed that when people ask, “Can we do what they did?” they usually come up with one of these three answers:
1. If they did it, we surely can.
This response often comes with a hint of jealousy. It dismisses the person or team but applauds the map. I recently visited the Broad Museum in Los Angeles. While I stood before a Roy Lichtenstein painting made up of a series of rectangles, I heard a man behind me say, “I could do that — I should be a millionaire.”
Could he have done it? Maybe. But here’s the thing. He didn’t. Lichtenstein did – and became famous for it. That’s the lesson. Assuming you can do what someone else did (and get the same results) is the surest way to fail.
That brings me to the second typical response.
2. Give me the map to their content program, and I’ll be just as successful. I call this response the template model. People look for the prototypical case study, template, or “proven” best practices to follow. And they expect to get the same results.
I’ve rarely seen teams following this approach produce results that match or exceed the original template or case study. The map is never exactly right for where they’re going.
Why? Because it doesn’t allow for your team’s particular skills (or lack thereof), goals, or context. I recently interviewed the person who architected one of the most successful content marketing projects in 2014. Today, it’s regarded as one of the OGs of content marketing strategy. But he told me there’s NO way he could repeat what they did 10 years ago. “It’s just a different time,” he said.
You have to customize any template or map to suit your circumstances.
That brings me to the third (and most useful) response.
3. Does anything like what I want to achieve already exist?
The most helpful response involves looking for guidance in projects that reflect the essence of what you want to achieve.
You may find it helpful to look outside your industry and study what made those efforts successful.
Looking beyond the familiar pushes you to interpret the idea through your creative lens. Instead of duplicating the exact form of the projects you study, look to them to spark innovation.
One of the leaders I spoke with last week benefited from this approach as she considered the challenges of leading new people, creating new workflows, and producing new outputs to support a new content strategy.
I advised her to look for current projects involving a disruptive change at a company that’s nothing like where she works. She studied how a product designer had implemented an internal design team for a financial services company. The details differed, yet the example inspired her to discover new approaches.
Why the first step isn’t the doozy
OK, so you’ve bought into the plan. That’s the first step. But how do you get past the difficulty of getting started?
Do you know what tightrope walkers say is the most difficult step?
Most people believe it’s the first step out on the rope. But that’s not the case, according to the tightrope walker who narrates one of the short stories in the collection “Vigilantes of Love”:
“The hardest was the step after the first. That’s where you gained or lost your balance. That’s where it becomes a walk or a fall. After the second step, there is no going back.”
Taking that first step in a way that helps us feel confident about the essence we’re trying to achieve is critical. But it’s not the hardest one. When implementing a new content project, taking the second step is the hardest.
The second step involves committing to the vision. That’s when you walk or fall. That’s when there’s no going back. And, if you’re the leader, there’s no one to pin the success or failure on but yourself.
This three-step process will help you prepare whenever you need to introduce significant changes in your content strategy:
Step 1: Make the map yours
Start with your vision for what success with your new strategy looks like. Use the inspirational model that you identified as an example. Then, ask yourself, “What would need to be true for success?”
Write it all down. It sounds overwhelming, but you’ll be surprised at how settling it feels to create your visionary to-do list.
Explore the emotions you feel around the uncertainties involved. List all the things that scare you or could go wrong. List the things that could go right and that make you feel joy. Acknowledge that you can’t control how these things make you feel but can control how you react to them.
Then, of course, plan and map. Go back to your list of all the things that need to be true for the program to succeed, and then identify any “rocks” that might get in the way. Which ones need to be settled first? Second?
You’ve just imbued the plan with your vision. You’re ready to take that second step.
Step 2: Commit to the walk
The first step was challenging. But the most difficult part will be saying “yes” to the adventure you’ve designed.
One thing happens in almost every client consulting engagement I’ve ever had. Once we finish the approved business case and plan, I congratulate the client. Then comes a sigh and the inevitable words: “Yeah, but now we have to go do it.”
That’s step two. Commit.
You commit to walking. You tackle that first significant initiative. You go all in. You’re not following someone else’s template. You haven’t dismissed those who came before you because you felt you could do as good or better. You’ve developed your own recipe instead of trying to improve someone else’s.
The steps get easier
In the book I mentioned, the tightrope walker talks about more than just the first two steps. He says, “The third step is the beginning. It’s the complete motion forward on a new course.”
Completing that first initiative or overcoming your first challenge is the beginning. That’s when you start to see that things are working the way you thought they would. It’s much more satisfying than looking at the next step in a templated map.
From there, the book says, “The fourth step is an affirmation. And after the fifth step – it’s just walking.”
You’re on your way.
The journey of a thousand miles begins with a single step. But that most challenging second step gives you the confidence to keep moving ahead.
Updated from a March 2022 article.
Want Robert’s help figuring out the value of your audience? Drop him a line to set up a time to talk.
HANDPICKED RELATEDCONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
In 2023, total revenue for the 30 biggest agency companies in the world rose 5.6%. The forecast for this year? It’s between 2% and 3%.
The Too Big Five (as CMI’s Robert Rose calls them) — WPP, Publicis, Omnicom, Interpublic, and Dentsu — have collectively grown revenue by a whopping 2.7% to date.
What gives? Are agencies doing fewer projects? Do brands need agencies as much? Where is the agency world headed?
Since Robert is our chief strategy advisor, we posed those questions to him but not before wishing him a happy birthday. Watch this video or read on for what he had to say:
Revenue growth drops precipitously for big agencies
Ad Age’s 2024 Agency Report takes the marketing market’s temperature by looking at the performance of the largest agencies.
It’s been doing it for 79 years, and only four agencies from the first report remain, at least in name. BBDO, McCann, FCB, and Campbell Ewald are all now part of giant holding companies. It’s worth noting that some of the largest agencies, such as Accenture and Accenture Song, show up more than once on the list.
This health of the world’s giant agencies is a big “meh.”
The five biggest legacy firms saw organic revenue grow 1.3% in 2023, down from 7.5% in 2022. That’s a 6-percentage-point drop in revenue growth in one year. Talk about burying the lead. An almost 83% drop in revenue growth in one year is amazing.
The forecast for 2024? Somewhere between 2% and 2.8%.
Agencies’ budgets are growing, but barely, especially considering inflation was most recently 3.3%. The report also finds that the number of agency employees edged up 1.6%, which is in line with revenue growth.
The metrics all indicate a flat or slight decrease in agency value in the broader marketplace.
Small agencies aren’t exempt from difficulties
It’s also been a challenging year for small, independent agencies. They’re left struggling to compete with larger agencies on projects those bigger organizations would never have touched in better times.
Specialization of marketing at larger companies also has an impact on the agency marketplace. Demand generation, sales enablement, customer experience, and even customer-enablement programs increasingly lead to a greater need for niche specialists. Companies are more likely to engage with these specialists, from data to technology, content creation to influencer marketing, and measurement to media buying. It’s not unlike the medical industry, where general practitioners have given way to specialists.
I see agencies jettisoning their agency title and rebranding themselves (subscription required) as creative solutions companies, content studios, growth incubators, or accelerators.
Marketers should do this in 2024 and beyond
What should you make of all this?
The world of agencies is complicated. One reason for their slowdown is the absorption of all the change that was mapped out for companies over the last two years. Many of the bigger companies decided to pivot in a big way in 2021 and 2022. In 2023, they said, “Welp, we better stop strategizing and start executing against all this change.” And, in 2024, it continues.
That, too, will change. In the meantime, looking for agencies or consultancies that can help you accelerate the changes you have on your plate should be key in whatever specialized vertical challenge you may have.
That’s the pivot that’s real for me.
The next episode of What’s New? returns on July 12, after a one-week break for the U.S. holiday weekend.
Want more content marketing tips, insights, and examples? Subscribe to workday or weekly emails from CMI.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
Social media offers a volatile space for marketing.
The rules of engagement vary across platforms, as do the audiences and opportunities for brands. The platforms’ popularity ebbs and flows while new challengers emerge, hoping to disrupt the scene and steal the spotlight. Once seemingly stable and reliable, shared media outlets shift their business priorities and become inhospitable.
Nevertheless, social media remains an invaluable channel for delivering your stories, insights, and advice into the hands of content-hungry consumers. Success requires knowing how to approach those content conversations.
A content plan for social media gives you that understanding. It clarifies where to focus your efforts, how to create meaningful connections, and what results you can achieve.
Start by investigating platform options, auditing existing assets, and determining where they best align with the priority goals. Then, turn those insights into an actionable content plan for social media marketing that lets your team know where, when, and what to post.
This guide and content plan template for social media can make the planning process easier and the resulting efforts more impactful.
Make informed decisions
This social media content strategy planning process involves four steps:
Investigate your options: Evaluate prospective outlets to understand the user base, distinct engagement opportunities, and value proposition.
Audit existing assets: Identify distribution-ready conversations, assets that can be repurposed to enhance their appeal, and critical topic gaps to fill with new content.
Identify top opportunities: Map your use cases against prospective platforms to determine which ones best align with your marketing strategy, content goals, and brand values.
Establish procedures and guidelines: Ensure that your team is equipped to uphold your brand’s standards for quality conversations.
Let’s look closer at each step.
1. Investigate your channel options
Each platform’s unique characteristics and consumer preferences factor into its value proposition for content marketing. For example, your audience might be open to a dialogue with brands on X (formerly Twitter) but reserve Facebook for personal conversations.
Those distinct attributes affect the types of content conversations. Authoritative long-form content might play well on LinkedIn and Medium, while short-form videos, memes, and mashups get more play on Instagram and TikTok.
Critically evaluating the social landscape will prevent you from squandering resources on efforts unlikely to drive the desired results.
Use these questions to compare each platform’s audience makeup, profile types, conversation formats, and marketing potential.
Who uses this channel, and how do they use it?
Is it an essential channel for the target personas?
How much time, on average, do users spend here?
What are conversations and interactions like?
What content topics and formats get the most traction?
Do we already produce these types of conversations?
Do we have enough assets/resources to maintain a consistent presence?
Does the platform offer integrated creative tools to scale production?
How do brands engage and market here?
Do brands have different profile page options than other users?
Is there a verification system?
What options exist for boosting organic reach?
How does the platform treat backlinks and referral traffic?
What metrics does the platform provide?
Can we gain a competitive advantage?
Are our competitors active in this space?
What kinds of content/conversations do they share here?
Once you’ve analyzed the platform options, you’re ready to assess the available content.
2. Audit your social media assets
You’re likely familiar with the purpose of a content audit and how to conduct one. An audit in the content plan for the social media process clarifies the stories available and how to position them for optimal impact on the platforms. It can also help reveal topical gaps you can fill to gain a competitive advantage.
For an abbreviated content audit, Intero Digital’s Kelsey Raymond recommends focusing on these three components:
Inventory of existing assets and metrics relevant to your social media goals. These elements give a snapshot of the available content, current format, URLs, and performance.
Data analysis for each asset’s keyword ranking, organic traffic, calls to action, and bounce and conversion rates. Assets that performed well on your site are likely of interest to your audience and worth sharing with your social community.
Competitive and gap analyses. These assessments can pinpoint opportunities where your brand can lead the conversation or topical areas worthy of new asset creation.
3. Identify top social channel opportunities
With a short list of potential channels in hand, map your content assets to their most appropriate distribution channels. Remember to consider the content experiences expected by audiences, determine if you have the resources to meet those expectations, and evaluate the potential to deliver meaningful business results.
Answer these questions to prioritize the platforms. Your responses can also provide clues on how to position your content to compel the audience to act.
Will this channel help us meet our objectives?
Why does it make sense for our business to use it?
Does it offer something we’re struggling to achieve through other means?
What marketing goals will we pursue on this channel?
Does it fit with our editorial mission?
Do the platform’s policies and practices align with our brand vision and values?
Would our content be viewed as trustworthy and uniquely valuable or intrusive?
Is there potential to lead the conversation and/or fill an unmet audience need?
Do we have sufficient team resources to produce quality experiences?
Do our creative and community team members have the bandwidth and flexibility to manage our content activities on this channel?
Do we have the technical capabilities to produce content in the preferred content types and formats?
What results do we want to achieve?
What should we ask fans and followers to do after engaging with our content? Share it? Comment? Visit our site? Subscribe to our newsletter?
Does this channel support those calls to action?
Are community members likely to take those actions, or will we need to provide additional incentives?
Do we have the correct metrics, monitoring, and KPIs to quantify and report our results meaningfully to stakeholders?
If your responses don’t reveal a compelling opportunity to engage on that channel or if the platform’s environment isn’t suited to your brand’s distinct content vision, mission, and capabilities, reserve your team’s resources for channels that are a better fit.
4. Establish social media guidelines and procedures
Everybody responsible for posting the brand’s content on social media should understand and align with your social media guidelines. Documenting the rules of conduct and accepted procedures helps the team maintain consistent conversational, stylistic, and quality standards and deliver a trustworthy experience for your audience.
Refine your company style guide with your social personality and ensure its accuracy and precision. Include the correct use and spelling of unique terms, such as company trademarks, product names, and personnel.
B2B content marketing consultant Erika Heald recommends adding these details to your social media guidelines:
Brand’s social media purpose. Explain why your company exists on each channel and how your social content should support that purpose.
Asset locations. Give your team members shared, centralized access to the needed editorial assets and branding materials, includingcompany logos, article images, profile headers, and more. Keeping this information in one place increases production efficiency and the likelihood of staying on brand.
You should also outline sensitive topics or other issues to avoid discussing, as well as any legal or regulatory policies. You may include instructions for handling issues like:
Disclosures: Outline the required verbiage for promoting your content through sponsored posts or ad placements.
Rights management. Note the accepted processes for securing permission to publish copyrighted images on social and providing proper attribution for quoted source materials.
Use of proprietary insights and assets. Make it clear what materials are and are not approved for use in the brand’s social conversations.
Diversity and inclusivity. Provide details about your brand’s diversity, equity, and inclusion policies, such as using gender-neutral language or images that reflect the diversity of your audience.
Build your social media content strategy plan
Once you have the information to determine where, when, and how to distribute your social content, incorporating it into a plan is simple. Create a matrix of the channels that make the most sense for your brand and note engagement specifics. When all the fields are filled, you have a content plan for social media that can be easily referenced, updated, and shared throughout your organization.
In my experience, it can be helpful to outline as much information as possible in the initial plan so your team can reference it when new opportunities emerge or snap decisions need to be made. But it’s also OK to start simply and build on or refine the fields as you learn what’s working and what isn’t.
The recommended information in your content plan for social media includes:
Who we will reach: Persona(s) most active/engaged on this channel
Target goals/benefits: What this channel will accomplish; any unique opportunities that can’t be achieved elsewhere
Featured topics/content types: Subject areas and assets likely to resonate with this community
Ideal velocity: Frequency and time on this channel; how much time to monitor and contribute to relevant conversations
Formats: Content types proven successful or emerging formats that present a chance to own the conversation in that social space
Tone and rules of engagement: Conversation style and voice; special criteria or considerations to follow (e.g., “280 characters or less,” “avoid enabling videos to play automatically,” “emphasize visuals over text”)
Team resources: Roles/individual colleagues in charge of your brand’s social communities; other personnel authorized to post on the company’s behalf; whom to notify if questions arise or issues escalate
Call(s) to action: Messaging and link URLs for referral traffic
Key performance indicators: Metrics to gauge content performance against marketing goals
Consider adding this information as well:
Keywords and topic tags: Priority keywords in social posts for SEO purposes and relevant hashtags or topic tags to draw your target audience’s attention
Distribution partners: Relevant influencers, industry experts, and community members to mention (using the @ symbol) or hire to help amplify reach and engagement
Promotion opportunities: Paid advertising products and any other platform-specific offerings to strengthen a post’s performance
We created a customizable template you can use to make the process even easier. In the first column, list the platforms you’ve prioritized. Then, fill in the other columns with all the key details of your content plan (you’ll see a reference sample for Facebook is already filled in). Get your copy of the full spreadsheet (registration required).
Make your brand the life of the social media party
No matter how far and wide your business intends to extend its reach, successful content marketing distribution often comes down to having a strategic, systematic, and scalable approach. This model ensures that everyone works from the same social media blueprint, but it’s not the only way to get the job done. Let us know what processes you use to determine where, when, and how you share your content and spread your brand influence.
Updated from a February 2021 article.
Bring your team to Content Marketing World this October for inspiration, ideas, and actionable advice on developing and executing a strategy that drives profit for your business. Group rates are available. Register today.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
Stuart Butler is a trained rocket scientist turned content marketing rock star.
Though the career as a rocket scientist didn’t stick, he applied what he learned to a 20-plus-year career in marketing. Now, as chief marketing officer of Visit Myrtle Beach, Stuart wants to disrupt not only the destination marketing space but ALL of marketing.
And it seems to be working.
Stuart and his team created Traveling the Spectrum, a heartwarming, unscripted six-part video series following three families living with autism as they go on vacation (in Myrtle Beach, of course).
A deal with a well-known streaming service is expected to be announced soon. But for now, you can watch the trailer embedded here.
From the storytelling to the marketing strategy to the distribution plan, Stuart is doing something he believes few marketers are willing to do: Set their brand ego aside, stop controlling the message, and realize that great content always puts authenticity first.
You can watch my interview with Stuart here or read on to learn more about the project and his marketing philosophy.
Leaning into the media company model
“We want to try things that people haven’t tried before and do them in a new way,” Stuart says.
When Stuart started three years ago, he knew times were changing. Destination marketing organizations like Visit Myrtle Beach spent most of their budget on paid media. But, as he learned running a B2B agency in the hotel space, paid media was becoming less effective because consumers increasingly rejected advertising, starting with adding pop-up blockers to their browsers. On top of that, platforms like Google and Facebook had increasingly become the gatekeepers of content and raised their advertising prices.
But Stuart had a plan. He believed the best path forward was building their audiences through owned media — what he calls “branded entertainment.”
“Instead of selling to people, we wanted people to make their own decisions, have their own thoughts and feelings; to influence their behaviors so that they chose to come to Myrtle Beach as a destination instead of being told to [come],” Stuart says.
With that philosophy in mind, Stuart tackled the creation of a reality cooking competition show called “Chef Swap at the Beach” to highlight the 2,000 restaurants and amazing culinary scene in Myrtle Beach. The show featured two local chefs who swapped kitchens and created a surprise meal for a panel of judges. It now airs on the Cooking Channel and other streaming networks and has just released its second season.
Stuart says “Chef Swap at the Beach” was more successful at elevating the Visit Myrtle Beach brand in terms of media coverage and audience value than any of its paid marketing projects to date.
They also learned that by following two simple rules — entertain and help the audience — people will not only listen, but they will tell their friends and come back.
The success of Chef Swap helped Stuart get buy-in for other projects, but it still took a while. He spent the first six to 12 months on the job educating his co-workers and Visit Myrtle Beach’s board of directors on the changing media landscape. (This is where he says his background in physics helped, as he knew how to deconstruct a problem to the first principles.) He knew it was a big leap to convince them to rely less on paid media and invest in owned media projects.
“We really were very methodical in building the bricks and the scaffolding around the argument,” Stuart says. “We wanted to do it in a way that was comfortable for people, that was digestible.”
So, he started by asking them to commit 10% of the budget to a few test projects for owned media. It worked. And it helped Stuart get buy-in for his passion project, Traveling the Spectrum, which he calls the culmination of a three-year strategy to move from conventional marketing to a more progressive view.
Storytelling is the heart of marketing
Myrtle Beach is best known for its 60 miles of beautiful sunny beaches, amazing attractions, and award-winning restaurants. But people may not know that the area is a pioneer in autism-friendly travel.
In 2016, Champion Autism Network (CAN) declared its hometown of Myrtle Beach as the first autism-friendly certified destination in the United States. The Myrtle Beach International Airport, in conjunction with CAN, opened the Quiet Room, where families can soothe a child during a meltdown. It became a model for airports around the world.
With that groundwork laid, Stuart’s team set out to create awareness that Myrtle Beach is an inclusive, welcoming place to visit for autistic families and people with neurodiversity. Inspired by the reality show Love on the Spectrum, the Myrtle Beach marketers came up with the concept to highlight the good, the bad, and the meltdowns experienced by these families with members on the autism spectrum.
Stuart had a clear vision for the project. “We don’t want this show to be about Myrtle Beach. We want it to be about the challenges of traveling with autism. We don’t want to be saying to people, ‘Come to Myrtle Beach because we’re sensory-friendly.’
“We want to be spreading the message that 87% of families who have a kid on the spectrum don’t travel. And we think that’s an injustice that needs to be solved. We’re going to have more impact on the world if it doesn’t look to be a promotion from a destination.”
Stuart tapped the Philadelphia-based The Workshop Content Studios, which had worked on Chef Swap, to develop Traveling the Spectrum. The series takes viewers behind the scenes and showcases the unique experiences of exploring sensory-friendly travel at Myrtle Beach. The show includes three families — the Tilks, including Max, age 28, from Michigan; the Gielinks, including Brayden, age 14, from Ohio; and the Hills, including Mikko, age 2, from Texas.
“It’s going to change the world. It’s going to change the way people see autism. It’s going to show that there are degrees of the spectrum,” Stuart says. “It’s going to show that people can be a part of the solution by showing a little more empathy and a little more understanding to people who are different than themselves.
“And I think it’s something that the community in Myrtle Beach is going to be really proud of because it shows that we’re very welcoming and hospitable.”
Stuart’s team is also working on other innovative, non-promotional ways to tell the story that Myrtle Beach is an autism-friendly place. They worked with author Lynda Farrington Wilson on a children’s book — “Splish, Splash, Squawk! Finding Joy in a Sensory-Friendly Vacation.”
They also have a podcast, “Life’s a Beach … And Then You Die,” that tells stories of human experiences, including those on the autism spectrum. The multiplatform strategy ensures a consistent message. But to Stuart, it’s all about one thing.
“I believe that the marketers are storytellers. I believe that a job is to shine a light on the positive story that exists, whether it’s a business, a service, or whatever we’re trying to promote. And so, in this case, it’s really easy because we can tell real stories of real people.”
Measuring success
But how will Visit Myrtle Beach measure the impact of Traveling the Spectrum?
Stuart says he thinks Myrtle Beach will attract more than its fair share of travelers who will realize they can travel despite the challenges. And it seems to be working. Stuart says people are finding out organically that Myrtle Beach is behind the Traveling the Spectrum project and are spreading the word. The tight-knit autism community shares resources with each other.
“When you can sort of tap into an audience that is that communal, it sort of accelerates the adoption. And so, we’ve seen that word of mouth, which is always going to be the most powerful form of marketing,” Stuart says.
That word-of-mouth marketing appears on The Traveling Spectrum website, which shows that over 870,000 visitors support its message, just below its social-media share buttons.
Between YouTube, Facebook, and Instagram, the trailer for Traveling the Spectrum has been viewed more than 750,000 times. Media mentions have gone through the roof.
Stuart says looking at those core KPIs alone shows that the series is a home run even before it hits the streaming platform. And while he believes Traveling the Spectrum will result in a tangible increase in travel, especially for the most valuable first-time visitors, to Myrtle Beach, he thinks it will do something even better.
“It’s going to change the perception of who Myrtle Beach is. People are going to look at us in an entirely different light. It’s going to elevate our brand to this level that we’ve never seen before,” Stuart says.
“Some of that’s measurable, some of it’s not. But even before the show (has) launched, we’re very, very happy with the results we’ve gotten. And once it’s launched, I think it’s just going to be next level.”
If you’d like to help spread the word about the Traveling the Spectrum movement, visit the website, sign the pledge, and share across your social platforms (or through word of mouth).
Register to attend Content Marketing World in San Diego. Use the code BLOG100 to save $100. Can’t attend in person this year? Check out the Digital Pass for access to on-demand session recordings from the live event through the end of the year.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
A long time ago (so long ago that Nickelback still had hits), my marketing leader would ask me what value my brand-building programs added to the business.
My answer to him was always the same: “Good things.”
Halfway through 2024, brands are desperate to make every piece of content catch their audiences’ attention. That’s no easy task in the “For you” feed era.
But chasing short-term attention and performance too often comes at the expense of the long game — building and deepening brand trust.
Brands often default to the short-term view because they understand the associated metrics (pageviews, click-throughs, comments, etc.). Associating performance measures with brand-building is much more challenging.
I see this all the time with my clients. There’s the nonprofit that desperately wants to measure its brand impact on stakeholders. There’s the AI startup trying to measure how its content affects its audience share with its competitors’ buzzword-filled treatises. There’s the enterprise brand trying to maintain its relevance in an evolving industry.
Yet, despite the measurement difficulty, brand awareness remains the most common content marketing goal mentioned in CMI’s B2B Content Marketing Benchmarks, Budgets, and Trends research year after year.
In that way, brand awareness is like exercise. We know it’s good for long-term health. But the incremental changes that result are hard to spot.
And that makes brand-building programs difficult to justify in a performance-driven culture.
Everything’s a vanity metric
When you think about it, aren’t brand awareness metrics “vanity metrics” by definition? After all, we’re asking the world, “How attractive do you think we are?”
Anyway.
It’s not that brand-marketing metrics don’t exist. Myriad articles, classes, best-practice guides, and tech products claim to help you associate transactional data with brand value.
Most of these encourage marketers to look at the growth of direct traffic, earned media coverage, social media share, or even brand-recall surveys to measure the increase of our brand value.
But here’s the problem: Anyone who has argued for more money for brand marketing (or content marketing as a lever to build a brand) will tell you those metrics won’t get you far.
And the pushback is warranted. More traffic doesn’t prove the brand has more unaided or aided recall. It could mean a content piece suddenly ranked well for an unbranded search term.
Here’s an example: About three years ago, I noticed a significant bump on my consulting website (contentadvisory.net). “Ooh, my brand is growing!” I thought.
But when I investigated, I found that most of that traffic went to an 8-year-old blog post that suddenly ranked for the phrase “purple duck meaning.”
I still don’t know why that phrase suddenly went viral, but people searching for it weren’t interested in whatever that blog post was about or my consulting services. (Google it at your own risk.)
So, more traffic doesn’t always indicate that brand value or trust has grown. The traffic could have everything to do with a topic but nothing to do with your brand. It also could mean people are scrutinizing your digital content because they don’t trust your brand.
Put simply, many of those vanity metrics may have nothing to do with increasing or decreasing the brand’s value. And, ironically, some may run counter to it.
But if transactional metrics aren’t optimal, how do you build a better business case for brand marketing?
Transactions are easy; triggers are hard
Before we get too far, I should note that there are plenty of ways to measure whether brand-building with content is working.
The key is to put an objective behind the effort, get stakeholders to agree on the measurable objective, and then design for testable measurability.
In other words, you need to measure your fitness level first, then get everyone to agree on your fitness assessment and how much change would equal “good progress.” Then, you can design an exercise plan to improve your fitness level.
For example, an enterprise financial services organization client wanted to increase brand trust among its existing investors and financial advisors. To measure the increase, we first conducted a trust survey to compare trust in that brand with trust in the brand’s competitors and mainstream news media outlets that covered financial services.
One year later, we conducted the same study again. This time, we surveyed the same kind of audience but added a segment of the brand’s customer base — subscribers to their blog and thought leadership platform.
The organization performed better than its competitors, so its branding efforts (such as TV, print, and online ads) worked. And the subscriber segment ranked my client’s brand as more trusted than some mainstream financial news sources.
“Hold on,” I hear you saying. “You proved that brand-building with content was working, but the question may still be, ‘So what? What value does that provide for the business? What happens as a result?’”
That’s when you answer, “Good things.”
You might still frustrate that CFO. But it’s a meaningful answer.
By spending some percentage of your effort working on the brand, you will build trust. And trust is bankable goodness that may express itself in many ways. You may not capture every granular transaction that comes from it, but good things will happen.
Think of it this way. Could you measure precisely how much running on the treadmill, taking your vitamins, or getting enough sleep contributed to your fitness improvement in any given week? Probably not.
But what happened after you decided to invest a portion of your overall effort in your long-term health? Good things.
You can easily measure more traffic, more votes, more engagement, and more downloads. Measuring transactions isn’t hard. But, measuring the trigger that motivated the transaction is complex.
Accept ‘good things’
People have spent their careers building business systems for consistency. They’re trained to laser-focus on eliminating operational conflicts and anything that hinders consistent, predictable, harmonious processes.
And many view measurability as a foundation for that predictability. The old saying, “If you can’t measure it, you can’t manage it,” comes from this thinking. This trope sometimes morphs into the idea that if you can’t measure it, it doesn’t count. And that’s nonsense.
I’ve learned over 32 years of marriage that doing good things for my wife provides good things in return. I could easily measure the transactions, but I don’t. How could I connect them to the value of the good things I get in return?
Think for a moment about the love you have for someone special in your life. Maybe it’s your partner, mom, dad, children, or even a dog. How much love is there? Have you measured it lately? If you can’t measure it, it doesn’t count, right?
Sometimes, the most accurate answer to the question of what comes from brand-building activities is simply: “Good things.”
Yes, more revenue, more savings, better customers, more trust, more brand equity, and more profitability. But you’re just not going to try and quantify it.
So, how much brand-building should you do?
My answer? Enough. Do enough, and good things will happen.
Updated from a May 2022 article.
Want more content marketing tips, insights, and examples? Subscribe to workday or weekly emails from CMI.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
We didn’t get to the south of France this week, but we’ve been talking about Cannes Lions.
At the International Festival of Creativity, the most interesting thing happened. The early big prize winners weren’t great ads as much as they were classic content marketing.
In his most recent book and in his keynote presentation at Content Marketing World 2023, Robert Rose asked if marketing was simply becoming content marketing. Well, this year’s Cannes Lions Awards may indicate a tipping point.
What does Robert, CMI’s chief strategy advisor, think? Watch the video or read on.
Lesson from Cannes Lions
As a riffraff marketer, I never get invited to things like the Cannes Lions International Festival of Creativity. But marketing professionals, content creators, and a who’s who of creative folks flocked to the south of France and had a look at the more than 25,000 entries.
Seventy years ago, ad agency executives jealous of the Cannes Film Festival started the creativity festival. They wanted their work recognized, and one need only look at the south of France to realize it was never going to be the Florida International Festival of Creativity.
The festival has always been known for a celebration of pure advertising, specifically B2C advertising created by big companies that can afford big entry fees.
Fun fact: In 2013, McCann Australia made history, winning the most Grand Prix awards (five) for any entry. It won for what would today be called content marketing — the Metro Trains’ Dumb Ways To Die campaign.
This year’s early winners struck me.
Storytelling for the win
Siemens Healthineers won the Grand Prix Pharma for its Magnetic Stories campaign. The maker of MRI machines partnered with children’s authors to tell audio stories paired with the sound patterns of MRI scans, which can be loud and disconcerting for kids.
For example, a child can listen through headphones to a story called “The Flying Train” while getting a cranial bone scan. The chugging sound of the MRI fits in nicely with the narrative.
Is it an ad? No.
Is it a brand using content to create a more engaging, inspiring, and satisfying customer experience? Absolutely.
Chalk this winner up to the practice of content marketing.
The Health and Wellness Grand Prix went to Dramamine’s mini documentary about — of all things – barf bags. Agency FCB in Chicago created this 12-minute film exploring collectors of airplane barf bags. Yes, people collect everything you can imagine. They discuss the decline in the need for air sickness bags and the brand, with tongue firmly planted in cheek, takes credit for the drop.
Is it an ad? Not really.
It’s a wonderful piece of creative content that transforms what would be a not-very-compelling topic into something fun and engaging.
Finally, Pedigree won a Grand Prix Outdoor. Using dynamic technology for outdoor advertising, the campaign used an inventory of digital ads featuring real, adoptable animals. When a pet was adopted, its ad was removed from the inventory.
Is it an ad? Of course. But it’s just a wonderful piece of content — valuable to the audience even without the Pedigree brand behind it. It’s likely to create brand affinity because it doesn’t actively sell something.
Call the Pedigree campaign the spirit of content marketing coming through a traditional ad medium.
Content at the center of good advertising and marketing
The spirit of delivering value, trust, and extraordinary content seems to be the order of the week at Cannes. Is it part of a larger trend to evolve how people define brand advertising? Is it pushback to the programmatic, buy-now commodity of performance algorithm marketing?
I hope so.
Cannes presents a ton of lessons, even for those of us who don’t hobnob with the celebrities in the south of France.
Maybe when we get together in San Diego later this year at Content Marketing World, we can pop the champagne and talk about how your differentiated marketing has become just great content.
Want more content marketing tips, insights, and examples? Subscribe to workday or weekly emails from CMI.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
Brands’ words and actions — including yours — matter.
As politics, health care, and other cultural topics become more polarized, being authentic about your values and causes can build audience loyalty.
Over half of young U.S. adults (ages 18 to 29) want businesses to take a public stand on current events, while 35% of those 45 and older do, according to a 2023 Bentley-Gallup poll.
How to know when to weigh in
No organization needs to acknowledge every issue. To decide when to speak up, your leadership team should reflect on these questions:
Who are we as a brand? Does this issue intersect with our vision or brand mission statement? Is this an important topic, and do we have something meaningful to say? How will we demonstrate to our audience that we are accountable for our stance?
What do our customers and employees expect? Are consumers asking or commenting about our brand’s stance on the issue? Do our employees want us to take a position?
What do we stand for? What are our company’s core values? Does it make sense to say something or stay silent on this issue?
What will our silence say? Saying nothing can sometimes say more than a statement could.
Who should say something? In general, the CEO or leader of the organization should give voice to the position. But if individuals from marginalized communities or people personally affected by an issue work for your organization, consider encouraging them to share their stories or giving them a voice as well.
How to engage with your audience about social issues
When you want to weigh in on a social or political issue, follow these tips to connect with your audience and learn from brands that do it well.
1. Be unique in your messaging
When Martin Luther King Jr. Day rolls around every January, brands predictably trot out some version of his “I Have a Dream” speech on their social media accounts. Unfortunately, that messaging has become so overused that it barely resonates.
Avoid the predictable. Be thoughtful and share with vulnerability to deepen your connection with loyal customers.
Example: In 2024, Kaiser Permanente honored Martin Luther King Jr. Day by sharing its past, present, and future commitment to advancing equality and inclusion. In an Instagram post, the company wrote about its “Martin Luther King Jr. Days of Service” — a week-long event offering Kaiser Permanente employees and physicians the opportunity to volunteer in honor of King.
The company also highlighted lesser-known aspects of King’s advocacy for economic justice and health care equality in a blog post that reinforced Kaiser Permanente’s commitment to social justice and equity in health care. The company’s chair and chief executive officer, Greg Adams, received the Dreamer Award for advancing a more just, equitable world and health care system.
2. Make the message meaningful to your brand
Do you want to release a statement about a cause that aligns with your brand’s value? Stop. Take a step back. Figure out how to say something in the most meaningful way possible. How does this cause intersect with your brand? Acknowledging that connection makes a stronger impact.
Example: In the mid-1980s, Procter & Gamble found success with Peridex, a mouthwash used to treat thrush in patients with HIV/AIDS. But despite selling it to the LGBTQ+ community, P&G did not have protections for their LGBTQ+ employees.
Recognizing the importance of this brand alignment, P&G employee and activist Michael Chanak and his colleagues worked to change that. In 1992, P&G became one of the first Fortune 500 companies to add sexual orientation to its equal employment opportunity statement.
This 19-minute video celebrates the action’s 20th anniversary and P&G’s continued commitment to the communities it serves. The message aligns with its brand values and enhances its reputation.
3. Be accountable to your audience
It’s one thing to say your company fights for a cause, but it’s better to show how it’s doing it. And if your brand contributes to a societal problem, acknowledge how your organization is combatting it. Show your audience you care and are working toward change.
Boston Medical Center also developed aglossary of terms related to justice, equity, and belonging. Its DEI in Action webpage provides transparency about the brand’s work to advance the mission within the health system and local community.
4. Provide resources to support the causes
Go beyond statements. Providing resources or support to people affected by your cause makes your message more impactful.
Example: Johns Hopkins Medicine celebrated LGBTQ+ Pride Month by hosting discussion panels, workshops, and film screenings. It made the support statement and then took action. Its website links resources offered through an Employee Assistance Program to support LGBTQ+ students, staff, and faculty. It also includes a resource section for patients and families, emphasizing mental health and self-care.
5. Don’t think you have to be political to take a stand
In a polarized political landscape, some people equate standing up for a social cause with making a political statement. But that doesn’t have to be the case. Organizations can focus on making a difference in causes that don’t fall on any side of the political spectrum.
Example: More than 600 hospitals have partnered with Vot-ER, which helps people visiting emergency rooms or health care institutions register to vote. They don’t advocate how people should vote but encourage visitors to have a say in democracy.
6. Make statements your audience cares about
You don’t have to take a stand for every issue. Your leadership team likely determines which issues are important to your brand and audience. You can help them by using your personas to see if the issue resonates with your audience. Of course, you may consider some issues so critical that it’s worth adding your voice even if some consumers don’t agree with your position.
Example: Jed Foundation’s Love is Louder project speaks to its target audience through stories, messages, and opportunities to support mental-health challenges faced by youth. It published content on social media, partnering with media, brands, and individual storytellers to help its audience feel seen and connected.
In this Instagram post, the foundation uses a visual of someone spray-painting a heart above the phrase “Love is louder” on a brick wall. The caption reads: “Pause scrolling for just a moment. Close your eyes and take a deep breath in through your nose, exhaling completely before repeating several times. Gently repeat the phrase “love is louder than _____ ” — filling that blank with anything that is weighing you down. Releasing whatever you don’t need. Remember that you are love and loved as your day continues. #loveislouder”
7. Think long term
Don’t be one-and-done about a social cause. Before making a statement or posting about it on social media, know how you will support this cause in the long term. Consider:
Recurring donations to designated charities
Revamping your organization’s hiring and promotion practices
Conducting internal training
With ongoing action, consumers will better see the dedication and intentions behind your words.
Example: No short-term initiatives here. Nationwide Children’s Hospital doesn’t just make a statement about the importance of health care access. It provides health care services directly within schools.
The program highlights the hospital’s dedication to fostering healthier communities over time. The long-term plan will make a lasting impact on public health.
Implementing a good decision in a great way
Finding the right way to make a statement can feel like walking a fine line. But with deep thought, internal discussions, and an assessment of your organization’s unique contributions, your brand can help make the world a better place.
Updated from a March 2022 article.
Register to attend Content Marketing World in San Diego. Use the code BLOG100 to save $100. Can’t attend in person this year? Check out the Digital Pass for access to on-demand session recordings from the live event through the end of the year.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
All these scandals arose through the unintended disclosure of documents.
Well, this past week could be Google’s Panama Papers.
More than 2,000 pages of internal documents from Google shed light on how the most powerful — and most trade-secret protected — search engine in the world works.
Has Google been lying for years about how to optimize for search? Are these documents even relevant to the recent search algorithm change? Or will Google’s AI look to replace how people search for information altogether?
Does it matter who writes the content, not just the domain it sits on?
Or is it like Apple’s Antennagate, when people accused Apple of bad signal reception for iPhone 4 but ultimately said, “It’s probably Verizon’s fault.”
We wanted to know more, so we asked Robert Rose, CMI’s chief strategy advisor, for his take. Watch this video or read on to get it:
Google’s been less than honest
This week’s explosive leak of thousands of Google’s internal documents claims to reveal an unprecedented look into the inner workings of its search algorithm. It suggests the tech giant may have been a skosh less than truthful about its operations for years.
On Thursday, a Google spokesperson spoke about the matter for the first time, telling The Verge, “We would caution against making inaccurate assumptions about Search based on out-of-context, outdated, or incomplete information … We’ve shared extensive information about how Search works and the types of factors that our systems weigh, while also working to protect the integrity of our results from manipulation.” But it didn’t talk specifics about the leaked documents’ veracity.
Rand Fishkin, an OG in the SEO industry, wrote that a source provided 2,500 pages from Google to challenge the “lies” propagated by Google employees about the search algorithm’s functionality. According to Rand, the documents detail the Google Search API (application program interface) and the information accessible to its employees.
Unless you’re an SEO geek, the documents’ details are more technical than useful. So, let me explain. The documents don’t confirm Google does anything specifically for search rankings. However, they highlight the types of data that Google — at some point in its history — collects from websites, users, and other points to divine insight into prioritizing that information.
In other words, it’s like getting all the ingredients to make Coca-Cola — including the secret ones — but none of the amounts.
6 things to know from the Google Papers
So, what’s my take?
Well, the first thing I thought to do was to take the document, run it through Google’s Gemini, and have it tell me what the pages say.
It returned an underwhelming response. In a lot more words than this, it says the document appears to describe the Google Search API and the factors it considers.
However, in my human review of the analyses from Rand’s work, these interesting tidbits reveal themselves:
Long clicks vs. short clicks play a big role in ranking. Did the searcher click on your site and stay there, or did they bounce back to Google to search again?
User data from Google’s Chrome browser appears to be among the most powerful ranking signals. In other words, your search engine ranking pages are almost certainly different than mine.
Google employs site safelists for sensitive topics like COVID-19, elections, and travel. They’re manually editorializing results, which may cause them more problems than may first appear.
Google hires raters to assess the quality of content and uses their feedback in its ranking system, not just a training set.
Things like PageRank and anchor text — where you make sure the hyperlinked text is descriptive — are losing influence as opposed to more user-centric signals.
Building a brand and generating search demand are more critical than ever for SEO success.
I would be remiss if I didn’t pull out the cold water thrown at this. Hours after the news broke, some sanity-checking is happening. At Search Engine Journal, people caution people to keep an open mind about the data because a lot of it is unconfirmed.
It says the document could simply be the private version of a public-facing API document. In other words, it may not be about the secret ingredients of search but rather information for applications that need to talk to Google. They caution that it’s not a good idea to take anything from this data as actionable SEO advice.
I think the Google Papers will end up more like Apple’s Antennagate than the Pentagon Papers. In the coming days, perhaps by the time you watch this video, we will know if the information about Google Search is akin to Kentucky Fried Chicken’s secret original recipe or just the ingredients of New Coke — interesting but not very tasty.
Audience building is one of the hottest topics in marketing today. That’s why you hear so many software vendors claim their product will help you build, engage, measure, and convert “owned audiences.”
I prefer the term “addressable audiences,” as it indicates that the people in this group have given you permission to deliver content directly to them (without relying on a social media algorithm or media outlet).
You’ll hear many people say that audience building is the goal of content marketing.
If building an addressable audience is the goal, how do you measure it? You can count the number of people in it, but that tells you nothing about the value of the audience.
What is an audience member worth to the business in dollars and cents? Is an audience member worth the same as a lead or opportunity? Probably not. Are they worth more the longer they stay engaged? Probably. But how do we calculate that increased investment value?
I’ve developed a framework to help businesses answer these questions.
Let’s explore.
What is an audience in marketing (and why does it matter)?
Any dictionary provides a simple definition of audience: An audience is a group of people who gather to view or listen to performances or consume or admire content — a book, art, or other media.
Here’s an even simpler definition of what it means in marketing: Audience refers to the collection of people who want to consume the content you create.
Assigning a financial value to each person in your audience who wants to consume your content is anything but simple. But doing so will help you justify the expense of content initiatives.
Let’s be honest: If you measure content marketing only as a replacement for advertising, you’ll find that the content-driven approach costs more. However, the multiple lines of value content provides across the business justifies the added investment.
Here’s the thing, though: The business isn’t investing in content. It’s investing in what the content produces — a subscribed audience.
So, how do you show the business the value that investment created? You start with the basics.
What’s a subscriber worth?
What defines a subscriber? What makes that subscriber valuable?
A subscriber is someone who desires future content from you and has told you where to deliver it (that’s what makes them addressable). You know they want to consume your content because they asked to receive it.
Broadcast television audiences, social media followers, and even people who download your white papers aren’t addressable audiences. You might have someone’s email address (from the white paper download, for example). But you can’t assume they’ve given you that information to make sure they don’t miss your future content — you can only be sure they want that one piece.
A social media follower, on the other hand, might want future content from you. After all, they’ve followed you to have a reasonable chance of seeing what else you post. But you can’t deliver it directly to them, and you’ll have no idea whether the social platform shows it to them.
Still, it would be silly to think that only addressable audiences have value. There’s value in reaching people with your content, even if they don’t ask to receive it in their inbox or mailbox. Said another way, there’s value in creating content fans even if they don’t sign up to receive your content directly.
Let’s look at how to segment all these audiences and assign a value to each.
Understanding audience types
Don’t fall into the trap of measuring audience value only by conversions to customers. You can get value from audiences over time, even if they don’t buy from you.
First, you have to understand the different kinds of audiences.
The anticipated (or desired) audience is the entire audience you’re designing content for (i.e., the group of people your business goals identify as a priority to reach). In marketing speak, you’d call this the “total addressable market.” It includes the entire population of people that you’d love to attract with your content.
The actual audience includes people who engage with your content in some way. You can see that they visited an owned property or shared or downloaded something. But you don’t necessarily know who they are (beyond an IP address or a social media username). You hope this audience is relevant to your business goals, but you don’t know for sure. They may be fans you can’t identify or distractions that skew your measurement (e.g., competitors look at everything you publish). Over time, studying the trends in this audience provides insight into the possible value of other anticipated audiences you hadn’t counted on before. In other words, you might discover that your actual audience is much different than your anticipated audience. If so, you can then decide whether you’re creating the wrong content or whether your content attracted a valuable audience you hadn’t considered trying to get.
The addressable audience includes people you can identify and measure as subscribers because they’ve asked for your content. Just like in the actual audience, not everyone in this group will be helpful to your business. Just because you can identify someone doesn’t mean they’re part of your target. Some may be irrelevant to your goals. However, these audience members can help you identify new trends, opportunities, or changes (just as the unexpected people in your actual audience can).
Put these three audiences together in a Venn diagram, and the overlaps create four additional audience segments.
The audience asset (the sweet spot) is the overlap of all three segments, as shown in the diagram. They’re in your ideal group, they’ve engaged with your content (so you know you’ve reached them), and they’ve asked to get more of it (they’ve subscribed).
The modeled audience (the overlap of anticipated and addressable audiences) gives you the ability to forecast how changing the makeup of the audience, growth or churn rates, or even the amount of data you know about the audience affects the value. In turn, this can help you create the business case for strategies to increase the value of that audience.
The audited audience contains both your audience asset and other subscribers who might not fit your audience criteria. It provides the data and insight to evaluate your strategies for acquiring subscribers. After auditing your complete list of subscribers, you can better understand how well you’re attracting your target audience, increasing engagement, and improving the level and quality of data you’re amassing. It can even help you apply these values for lead scoring.
The targeted audience helps you understand the ratio of who you’re actually reaching vs. the universe of who you want (anticipated). These numbers help you determine whether you’re promoting your content in the right ways or places to attract the desired audience.
An audience valuation framework in action
So, the goal of this framework is to provide a tool for you to determine an estimated value of the various audiences that can show progress toward our content marketing business goals. We can begin to look at the current people in our audience asset vs. other audiences to help us understand how and when we start to assign them value.
Let’s look at an example:
I recently worked with a B2B technology company that sells solutions to marketers. Over the last four years, the company has built an addressable audience of over 8,500 subscribers to an email newsletter. The owned media property where they built this audience is an online resource center of white papers and research coupled with a blog.
However, not every one of those 8,500 people belongs to the audience asset category. Some of these are part of the audited audience — they’re actual and addressable audiences but aren’t part of the target. Many are, some are competitors keeping tabs, some are employees, etc. Some names came from trade show visits, and a few even came from purchased lists. So, even if they’re part of the target audience, they aren’t really subscribers.
After a complete audit of the names in the audience, a few things showed up:
The total anticipated audience for their content includes about 100,000 people.
The actual audience (those they consistently reach through content programs) numbers roughly 25,000 new people each year.
About 65% of the 8,500 subscribers (or ~ 5,500) qualified as part of the audience asset. By the team’s definitions, that means they added themselves to the list (organically or through paid campaigns) and are newer than 18 months. Those 5,000 are worth the most to the company.
The second phase of the audit involved measuring the audience asset against the business goals (net new opportunities), organic evangelism (high-level leads from influencers), and the cost of acquiring addressable audiences compared to acquiring leads.
I won’t belabor the details of the conversion rates, average sales price, and cost-per-lead here. Suffice it to say the team came up with these valuations (assumptions and generalizations are built in):
$150 per anticipated audience member (that’s the total ceiling of “perfect” value for new anticipated audience members given other marketing metrics such as how audience member value decays as the audience ages over time vs. their level of engagement)
$138 per current audience asset member (what they’re actually realizing in value — again taking into account the subscriber’s age and engagement levels)
$73 per addressable audience member (the value of the total addressable audience, including the audited audience members that are not part of the target)
If you do the calculation, this means that their current audience asset (in total) is worth approximately $759,000 (which is $138 x 5,500). To measure the health of that audience (meaning every member is new or engaging as frequently as a new member) — you’d multiply 8,500 by $150 to get a value of approximately $1.2 million.
If you calculate the total value of the anticipated audience, you’d get $15 million ($150 x 100,000). So the company’s audience asset “valuation” is about 57% of what it could be — and it’s attracted about half a percent of the total anticipated audience.
What does all that mean? These numbers help companies assign monetary goals for improving both the quantity and quality of the audience built through content marketing. The key is coming up with both the cost basis and the revenue basis of the audience asset.
In addition, having this valuation also gives the company a sense of:
How much they should spend to acquire new addressable people
How much the difference is between those that are simply addressable vs. those that are part of their audience asset
That gives them the ability to model for the future:
If the team can grow its audience asset by a net gain of 2.5% (or 125 true new audience asset members), it increases the value of the audience by a little more than $18,000 (125 x $150).
If the team focuses on getting the aging audience asset members to engage more frequently with the content — that will get them closer to the $150 per audience asset value.
As you can see, these scenarios make a case for various directions for this company.
Proving what audience building does for businesses
A television executive once said, “I can’t think of another business that makes one product but sells a different product. We make programs and put them on the air. We are not selling the programs; we are selling the people who watch the programs.”
But all businesses are in the audience business these days. You’re all working to build trust, generate valuable data to optimize business performance and monetize audience relationships (in ways that go beyond selling more products).
Audience building through content lets you bypass third parties (like media companies) by establishing direct relationships with proprietary audiences. You’re doing what marketers have done for 100 years.
You’re creating your own market.
It’s your story. Tell it (to your own audience) well.
Updated from an August 2017 article.
Want Robert’s help figuring out the value of your audience? Drop him a line to set up a time to talk.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
A mentor of mine used to drill the following into my head: “You are not your target market.”
He meant that it doesn’t matter if you think the headline is great, the ad design is impressive, or the copy is sublime. It only matters what the customer thinks.
As he would say, “Our job is to make marketing that our customers will find interesting, engaging, and persuasive. It doesn’t matter if you feel the same.” You are not your customer.
Except, of course, when you are.
Many B2B marketers focus on marketing products and services to other marketing professionals. And marketing to marketers is one of the more challenging assignments to take on – especially in today’s digital marketplace.
Capturing any buyer’s attention and trust is difficult these days. But marketers are savvier — and more cynical — than most. That’s because they’ve seen (and probably used) every kind of trick anyone can pull out of their hat.
So, what works when marketing to marketers these days?
Earlier this year, CMI asked more than 300 marketers about the content they value, the channels they use to learn about solutions, and the reasons why they ultimately choose a particular solution to work with.
I wasn’t surprised by the results. But how meta is that? Of course, I’m not surprised by the results. I’m part of the results.
OK – before it gets weirder – let’s look at some of the most interesting findings.
Marketers still read (and they don’t want to meet)
I know you hear a lot about using video and audio to engage buyers — I do, too. And those formats have their place. However, most marketers (55%) still prefer to consume work-related content by reading online. Far fewer say they prefer watching videos (26%), listening (11%), or reading print (8%) for work.
Email is still one of the most viable ways to reach marketers. Nearly all marketers (98%) subscribe to work-related email newsletters, and almost half (49%) subscribe to more than five.
Of the top five content types marketers use to research tools, technologies, or services, three involve the written word. Again, nearly all marketers (94%) read online articles when researching new solutions. Another 81% use product reviews, and 75% use case studies.
Video ranks second to online articles at 92%, and webinars round out the top five at 72%.
One finding did surprise me: Marketers prefer video over in-person meetings. Nearly half of marketers (45%) prefer to discuss solutions on a video call. Their second choice? A (text-based) email (27%). No contact (meaning they prefer to peruse the vendor’s digital content alone) came in third at 17%. A phone call came in fourth at 7%, and in-person meetings came dead last at 4%.
These findings confirm what you probably already know: Marketers don’t want to speak to someone in person as they move through the customer journey.
But they’re much more open to learning through digital and in-person events.
What marketers want from physical events and webinars
Events are back. But so are digital events.
Late last year, I wrote that marketers would have to up their game regarding digital and physical events. Attendee desire for in-person events remained strong despite headwinds such as inflation, health concerns, and the ongoing recovery of the hospitality industry.
CMI research backed up my position: Webinars trailed only in-person events among the tactics marketers said produced results for them.
So, we know marketers get results when they use events and webinars in their marketing strategies.
But do your marketing peers attend webinars and in-person events?
They do. Most marketers (51%) go to one or two in-person events per year (either marketing-focused or specific to their industry), and 98% attend digital webinars. However, their reasons for attending each differ.
Among marketers who visit a vendor’s booth at an event, 81% said they want information about a potential vendor’s product and services. More than half (59%) want a demonstration of the solution. Slightly less than half (49%) want to meet the people behind the product or service. And 26% want specific information to help them make a purchase decision.
Webinars are a different story. Nearly all marketers who attend webinars (92%) want in-depth learning on a particular topic they’re interested in. Most (86%) want a general learning opportunity. Only 30% want product information, and only 19% want a demo.
Put simply: Marketers go to in-person events to find answers, and they attend webinars to learn what questions they should ask.
Here’s proof. When asked about the most important things they want to get from attending webinars, most marketers (84%) said relevant and actionable content. Nearly three-quarters of marketers want content that addresses their current challenges and trends. Your peers also want on-demand access (55%) and speakers who have hands-on experience (53%). Very few named interactivity (8%), a user-friendly platform, or networking opportunities as the most important.
If you’re a marketer who markets to marketers, think hard about these findings. A couple of years ago, I wrote about how vendor-created information that lacks prescriptive, specific advice on what to do makes buyers want to avoid sales conversations. As I wrote, “The buyer’s goal is to learn how to play chess. And demand generation marketers are bombarding them with points of view on the history of chess and why it’s such an important game.”
If you’re trying to create value for your fellow marketers, have a specific point of view and create specific, actionable content.
You already know marketers will value it.
Marketers want what they request (no pitches, please)
One of the most validating things in the research? Marketers appreciate valuable content.
Almost all marketers (94%) said that the availability of extensive thought leadership content raises their perception of a brand as a valuable information resource.
But here’s the kick. The No. 1 factor that will get marketers to open an email is that they’ve requested the content. Nearly three-quarters (73%) said requesting the content is the primary factor that prompts them to open their email. The second most compelling factor is a relevant subject line (62%).
If all this sounds familiar, it should. As it turns out, marketers aren’t all that different from other business buyers. The difference is that the bar for quality, helpful content may be higher than with other business buyers.
Savvy marketers can sniff out a pitch a mile away. They understand that when they give their email address in exchange for an e-book, they’ll likely end up in a never-ending drip campaign. They’re not fooled when you show screenshots of your product and talk about the best practices for products your company happens to sell.
So — what can you do?
You can surprise them. My experience with marketing to marketers tells me that one of the best ways to attract marketers is to not sell to them. Inspire, educate, and engage. Help them as if they were your colleagues.
After all, in this case, you are the target market.
Join us on July 24 for The State of Marketing to Marketers webinar. Robert Rose and other marketing leaders will dive into CMI’s latest research, exploring what’s working and what’s not in B2B marketing today. Discover actionable insights to elevate your content marketing strategies for the second half of the year. Don’t miss out—register for free today!
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
Though most content is static, interactive content usually delivers better results.
Interactive content saw 52.6% more engagement than static content, according to an analysis of content engagement data by Mediafly. It also found that buyers, on average, spent 53% more time on interactive content (13 minutes) than static content (8.5 minutes).
And still, only 14% of marketers surveyed by HubSpot said they want to try interactive polls and games in 2024.
Maybe they (and you?) just need a little push — some inspiration to deliver those quizzes, polls, games, and more.
Creative agencies delivering interactive content for their clients offer examples, tools, and suggestions on how to do it well.
Give your audience a calculator or a game
Banish Media designed an interactive mortgage calculator that lets potential homebuyers estimate their monthly payments based on different scenarios. Quiz takers provided their email addresses to receive personalized reports and generate leads for real estate firms.
The agency’s Banish Anguralsays they used Outgrow to build the calculator for a real estate client.
Here’s an example of how it worked. (Client confidentiality prevents Banish Media from sharing the actual calculator.) Users answer several questions, including gross monthly income, amount paid in taxes, and cost of medical and insurance payments every month, and the dot moves to the appropriate place in the dollar range. In the column on the right, users can see the money available for total monthly income, expenses, and money available for savings.
Users can also submit their information if they want someone from the real estate company to contact them. Plus, they can share the results with someone else by email.
For a client in the wellness industry, Banish Media used Typeform to create a quiz. Visitors provided their preferences, health goals, and contact information in exchange for personalized recommendations.
Games also work well when they align with clients’ retail marketing strategies. Banish recently used Gamify to create a mix-and-match game where players could earn product discounts. Brands benefit from increased user engagement, time on site, lead generation, and sales.
“Incorporating these tools into a content strategy involves deeply understanding audience’s preferences and behaviors,” Banish says.
Just ask The New York Times, which bought Wordle, and LinkedIn’s recent foray into the power of games to attract and retain users on its site.
Poll your visitors and followers
David LaVine, founder of RocLogic Marketing, uses the WordPress plugin Forminator to create polls on his website to better understand the interests and needs of his potential customers.
In this poll example, he asks respondents what aspect of inbound marketing they need the most help with. He also gives them something in return — a glimpse at how their peers voted. Publicly displaying results can help poll takers see how their thoughts or actions measure up against others in the industry.
David also publishes the poll results in his content and gives his take, as he did in this article about the obstacles in selecting a niche. “It forces me to sharpen my thinking on the topic and allows me to provide my perspective,” he says.
Don’t forget about the embedded polling features on social media, too. Alexis Quintal, CEO of Rosarium PR & Marketing Collective, says the simplicity of LinkedIn’s polls lets users get immediate and actionable data.
Her client, Paul Muchowski, used it as a research tool for future content. The developer of a CBD supplement for sleep asked respondents which aspect of sleep they would like to improve. LinkedIn users could pick sleep quality (56%), sleep duration (17%), ease of falling asleep (17%), and energy upon waking (11%).
“These polls not only engage at a higher rate compared to standard text posts, but they also provide a quick and creative way to gather valuable insights from your network,” Alexis says.
Since LinkedIn polling lets the creator see how each person voted, you can look more closely at the voters’ profiles and better understand who engaged with your content.
Turn text into videos and games
LinkedIn polling and Typeform-created quizzes work for Michigan Creative. But their custom landing pages with videos work well, too, says agency CEO Brian Town.
In this example, Michigan Creative displays four videos — CHI Aviation brand video, Wieland core values, ICC interview video, and Sanctum House testimonial — of varying lengths.
Then, it asks the viewer for their favorite video, name, and email address.
Brian says once they submit their preference, Michigan Creative sends an email that starts with, “Great choice! We love that style, too …” and asks the recipient to schedule a meeting with the team.
“This interactive approach not only engaged viewers but also provided us with insights into their preferences and needs, enabling us to tailor our follow-up communications more effectively,” Brian says.
Tom Jauncey, self-proclaimed head nerd at Nautilus Marketing, says the agency finds that interactive videos perform well. Tools like Playbuzz and Wirewax (now part of Vimeo) let viewers make choices that influence the video’s outcome. For example, an educationally driven company could create multiple learning modules and let the viewers’ choices trigger which one is shown.
The augmented reality (AR) tool Zappar helps Nautilus Marketing take its retail clients to a new world. They create interactive experiences that allow virtual try-ons and give additional product information.
The agency also uses the Ceros platform to gamify content. For one client, it created fitness-related mini-games that encouraged users to achieve their daily exercise goals. Tom says that playing prompted a 60% increase in user engagement compared to non-interactive content and a 45% boost in retention over its non-game content.
Align interactive content with your marketing and distribution strategies
Lyn Collanto, marketing specialist at KBA Web, says whatever option you consider, be strategic. “The key is to choose the right tool for the job and ensure that the interactive elements align with the overall strategy and user journey,” she says.
KBA Web created a Typeform quiz for a marketing automation client called “What’s Your Digital Marketing Superpower?” Once marketers took the quiz, they received personalized recommendations for tools and strategies. It increased lead generation by 150% and boosted social media engagement by 30%.
Using Apester, KBA Web developed a series of interactive polls and quizzes that asked about users’ dream destinations, travel preferences, and bucket-list experiences. Embedding the quizzes and polls in its travel industry client’s blog posts and destination guides led to a 35% improvement in time on page and a 200% increase in social shares.
The distribution strategy for interactive content often determines its fate. Lyn explains the channels KBA Web uses:
Website and blog integration. Place a quiz within relevant content to provide users with an interactive experience that complements the topic.
Email. Promote quizzes through targeted email campaigns. Segment your email list based on relevant criteria, like interests, past behaviors, or stages in the buyer’s journey.
Content syndication. Promote the quizzes on other relevant websites and platforms. KBA reaches out to sites where the target audience requests and asks them to feature the quiz or other interactive content on their site.
Don’t forget to add social media channels into your distribution mix, says Rahul Vij, managing director of Webspero Solutions. The agency recently used Google Forms to create a quiz called “Discover Your Perfect Workout in 5 Minutes!” The social posts included a quiz link and an image of someone happily exercising.
Though he can’t share the specific results due to client confidentiality, Rahul says the quiz captured significant leads and provided valuable user data.
Engage in your content
You don’t need to say goodbye to static content in your marketing mix just yet. But you should start brainstorming how to turn visitors into active content participants.
Start simply: Use the embedded features on social media and see how your audience engages. If that goes well, invest in tools to create polls, quizzes, and games you can distribute on your websites, blogs, and social media channels.
Given that only 14% of marketers are thinking about interactive content this year, you will get out in front by actually doing it. Your analytics (and your audience) will thank you.
All tools mentioned in this article were suggested by a contributor to the article. If you’d like to suggest a tool, share the article on social media with a comment.
Bring your team to Content Marketing World this October for inspiration, ideas, and actionable advice on developing and executing a strategy that drives profit for your business. Group rates are available. Register today.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
Did you hear the one about the U.S. government agency that attracts millions to its social media accounts?
It takes puns to new heights.
Yes, it’s the Transportation Security Administration. That’s TSA for short, though the lines at airport security checkpoints don’t always seem to reflect that brevity. It’s also a serious business given TSA was created to thwart terrorist attacks and other nefarious actions after Sept. 11, 2001.
At Content Marketing World 2023, Emily Bonilla-Pieton took the audience behind the scenes of TSA’s social media strategy with her presentation, Travel Tips and Dad Joke Hits: How To Maximize Your Team To Produce Results While Staying Punny.
Injecting humor into content can surprise and delight an audience expecting staid, by-the-book content. Emily says that strategy has paid off for TSA, where she’s worked for 15 years and currently serves as the acting social media branch manager in the Office of Strategic Communications and Public Affairs at TSA in the Department of Homeland Security (evidently, TSA doesn’t like short titles either).
Squeezing the TSA dad-joke juice
Passenger to TSA: “Can I carry a suitcase full of fresh oranges?”
TSA: “Orange ya glad the answer is yes?!”
TSA uses that so-called dad joke to give a fresh squeeze to a standard reply on TSA’s Instagram AMA (ask me anything), which they operate in real time for about 10 hours every day.
But TSA goes beyond the easy joke and, in this Instagram post, crafts this well-written pun built on a video shared by a passenger. It’s received over 4 million likes in the past two years.
A ramp worker plays the children’s rock-paper-scissors game with a passenger on a plane. The caption artfully captures the essence of the video with a serious reminder about what’s allowed in carry-on luggage:
You’re in luck here. You can’t lose with this info!
It’s all fun and games until you pack your scissors over 4 inches. That’s right, if your scissors are too big, they won’t make the cut. Generally, rocks are good to go in a carry-on depending on size or weight, but your paper always wins there.
We want you to take trips, not chances! You can definitely do better than 2 out of 3 when packing for your next travel adventure. To be in the know before you go, check out our “What Can I Bring?” tool. Shoot on up to the link in our bio for all the deets.
These posts exemplify TSA’s strategy for Instagram, which boasts 1.4 million followers. “We entertained, we engaged, and then we did a shameless plug on top, all of that,” Emily says.
“Our method for the (rock-paper-scissors) post was actually let’s grab their attention with a catchy video, a catchy trending sound, and then catch the attention of the audience with our opening liner. And then of course, educate them,” Emily explains, noting the CTA to visit the link and bio.
Relatability is at the crux of TSA’s social media strategy.
“We like to speak to folks like you’re speaking to your best friend. So, it’s very personable. We’re encouraged to share our information and our content, and we’re truly authentic,” Emily says.
But the TSA team can’t also rest on that strategy alone. Though it follows a long-term strategy with evergreen content, it also reacts to trending topics. “We stay on top of the ever-changing algorithm,” Emily says. “Things can go viral, and we’re floating, and we’re like, ‘Yes!’ and the next day it could bomb.”
Keeping up with the comments — positive and negative — also keeps the team on its toes. “You have one whole hour (after posting) to demonstrate to Instagram that you are not a bot, that you are driving this account organically,” Emily says.
Singing different tunes
However, what works for Instagram doesn’t necessarily work for Facebook, X, YouTube, and LinkedIn. “It would be very easy to just cut and paste one content on each platform, but we don’t do that,” Emily says.
They tailor their voice and content to the age demographic and primary locations of their followers on each platform.
On Facebook, TSA has about 98,000 followers (less than 10% of its Instagram account) and they skew older. So, TSA tells stories, shares hiring events, and posts job descriptions to help Grandma get her grandson out of the basement and into a nice federal job.
TSA also uses Facebook to talk to people, usually 55 and older, about traveling with firearms in a non-critical way. “Our approach is, ‘Oops, you might have not traveled for a while. Let’s check your bags first because you don’t want to accidentally forget your firearm at the checkpoint.’”
Given TSA is a federal agency and the drama around X, they don’t devote a lot of budget to manage the account. About two employees are dedicated to over 258,000 followers and they focus heavily on TSA’s existing stories and news releases.
“We’re creating relationships with beat reporters because we do rely on them to tell our story (on X) because it doesn’t cost us any money.” Emily says.
TSA’s LinkedIn presence has grown significantly in recent years, with over 148,000 followers today. The target demographic is people between 25 and 34 years old. Though they use their page to highlight roles within TSA, Emily says LinkedIn offers another invaluable use — a place to feature agency initiatives that don’t fit on other social platforms, such as innovative technology news.
“I can’t tell you how many times someone’s like, ‘We want your 1.2 million followers on Instagram to know about our technology. Would you be interested in that on Instagram?’” Emily says.
“We politely say, ‘You know, where that would fit is on LinkedIn.’ We kind of use LinkedIn as our scapegoat, and when we show them our numbers. We end up having happy customers.”
TSA’sYouTube channel has about 95,000 subscribers. Over two dozen playlists with dozens of videos tell the TSA story, from employees on the job and their testimonials to travel tips and items people tried to bring through TSA. It also includes the TSA Kids series. “Kids are speaking to other kids on basic travel tips,” says Emily, whose children help voice some of the videos.
They also host town halls and other live events on YouTube. And since the federal government agency can’t be on TikTok, they plop in videos to YouTube Shorts the day after they find success on Instagram.
Peanut butter is a liquid and other team news
The TSA social media team is built on flexibility. Emily is the only team member based in Washington, D.C. Others on the remote team work from their home states, including California, Minnesota, and Florida.
It was a colleague in Idaho who texted Emily at 9 p.m. one night. He wanted to jump on a conversation on X about whether TSA considered peanut butter a liquid. She said yes, and he entered the debate with the definitive, “Yes, peanut butter is considered a liquid.”
“This was our opportunity to demonstrate that anything you can spill, pour, pump, or spread, is considered a liquid. It needs to be 3.4 ounces or less to be carried on (a plane) and anything greater should be checked in, (luggage),” she says.
They highlighted how people tried to hide their vapes and firearms inside peanut butter, and the conversation trended a bit for a few weeks. Now, every National Peanut Butter Day and other times of the year, they rehash it all. “It’s the gift that keeps on giving,” Emily says.
The award-winning social media team learned on the job about a lot more than peanut butter. Only one team member arrived with a social media background. All the others first worked in the field at their local airport. And they’re united in their work, trusting each other to step in when burnout becomes a reality. “After all, social media is designed to get us hooked. It’s like gambling, not always healthy,” Emily says.
But the social media team doesn’t operate in a silo. They act as social listening agents for the TSA media ops team and help distract the media with a better story when a negative one pops up.
Still, having all this fun with content doesn’t mean they don’t take the numbers seriously. One team member reports the numbers every week, detailing their key performance indicators as well as the dollar equivalent of the organic exposure their posts and interactions would have cost had they purchased them.
The social media team’s strategy is working in more than one way. “For some strange reason, our leadership, the administrator, the agency, they love this, and they’re like, ‘They know what they’re doing. We’re going to let them just continue on.’”
Now, that’s how you squeeze dry government information into sweet and tangy sips of content marketing.
Register to attend Content Marketing World in San Diego. Use the code BLOG100 to save $100. Can’t attend in person this year? Check out the Digital Pass for access to on-demand session recordings from the live event through the end of the year.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
So, what’s going on with content and marketing celebrating LGBTQ+ communities? Is this quieter Pride Month a broader shift in advertising and marketing creative? Or are politics playing a heavy hand?
We asked Robert Rose, CMI’s chief strategy advisor, for his take, and he reminded us we were talking about the same question this time last year. But he still had a take for 2024. Watch this video or read on to find out what Robert has to say:
Brands decrease big Pride Month campaigns
Is your company creating content or marketing campaigns to celebrate Pride Month?
If I believe the anecdotal evidence, more of you will say no than at any time in recent history. Recent marketing trade articles note that 2024 has seen a marked decrease in the number of brands planning big campaigns to celebrate Pride Month.
Target actually announced it’s scaling back, saying it would only sell its Pride Month collection in about half of its 2,000 stores and online.
Additionally, organizations such as GLSEN, a national nonprofit working to support LGBTQ+ youth in K through 12 schools, saw a marked decrease in brand support last year. It attributed the decline to the backlash brands received for their support and noted this year’s brand support was down again.
Last year, I covered some of the backlash that marketers received with my take. I mentioned that the 2023 public pushback made Pride Month feel different than 2022, but many brands were still doing something. Mastercard hosted Pride Plaza, which seems to begoing fine in 2024. Skittles announced its Pride site in 2023, and it is still going strong in 2024 but without the announcement fanfare.
Are brands publicizing their Pride efforts less?
So, are there fewer campaigns this year? Is it quieter from a content perspective? Or is it that brands aren’t publicizing their efforts as much? In other words, brands are just saying, “If you know, you know.”
I think it’s the latter. Big brands are trying to avoid backlash by quietly continuing or launching supporting initiatives for the target audience. They don’t want to make news with their marketing campaigns, preferring to rely on the communities and their allies, and social media and other influencers, to spread the word.
That said, some influencers say brands aren’t turning to them as much this year. In an article in Modern Retail, one influencer noted that they usually made one-third of their yearly income in June, but this year it’s more like “just another month.”
Is this reality for 2024?
Is this good? Is it right?
It’s neither good nor bad. It’s a recognition of the reality for most brands in today’s highly politicized environment.
Last year, I noted that succeeding with any campaign like this requires the realization that the celebration isn’t about your brand. The LGBTQ+ communities don’t need or want your permission to be themselves. In many ways, to avoid backlash from the celebrated communities themselves, you need to celebrate who the communities are and not that your brand is selling your way into being part of the communities.
I also noted that you shouldn’t even attempt to have that conversation about Pride or any other community-focused celebration by asking, “How will we defend this decision?” Having that discussion is a sure sign that you haven’t really explored whether the entirety of your organization — your brand — believes in what it’s doing.
That’s the lesson Bud Light learned the hard way last year.
Brands may take these cautions to heart. They may say to themselves, “We’re going to support the community and continue doing what we do. But we’re not going to scream that we’re doing it in some performative, virtue-signaling way.”
If you look at this from the positive perspective, brands are trying to do good work and create spaces for communities without drawing attention to themselves for doing it.
If you look at this from the negative side, brands aren’t willing to have hard discussions about what they’re willing to do in today’s climate.
What answer is right for your brand? For me, I tend to lean hard into doing the work and letting the work speak for itself. That creates trust over attention, but honestly, I value the former over the latter.
Want more content marketing tips, insights, and examples? Subscribe to workday or weekly emails from CMI.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
I’ve heard about more organizations kick-starting their content marketing strategy lately. That’s a welcome change from the past year when teams hunkered down to figure out generative AI and all the changes in social media and search.
But I too often hear these teams say they’re trying to rebuild their airplanes while flying them.
I don’t know where that phrase originated, but a 22-year-old advertising campaign from Fallon for digital consulting firm EDS helped popularize it. The comical TV and print ad showed people assembling an airliner in the air and professing how much they love their jobs.
The ad’s tagline explained that EDS could help you “build your digital business even while you’re up and running.”
Fallon created the ad as part of an integrated campaign with two other funny videos: Cat Herders, about managing the complexity of digital business, and Running With the Squirrels, which claimed EDS could help legacy businesses compete like disruptive startups.
Any one of these ads would be relevant in 2024.
But let’s explore why it’s time to ground the “build the plane while flying it” approach to new content marketing projects once and for all.
The frustration of in-flight construction
The to-do list for implementing a new (or rebooted) content marketing initiative includes:
It’s a lot. Frustration sets in quickly when team leads realize they can’t shut anything down while they work to implement all the new ideas. And everybody else is busy, too. They all still need to launch campaigns, write blog posts, craft event materials, and feed content to the website, all while trying to master technology they haven’t fully implemented.
I recently worked with a B2C e-commerce company that identified an exciting new project: a new physical event supported by a digital hub and newsletter that would build an addressable audience.
The problem: It required cross-functional support across several marketing and technology teams. No one on those teams had extra bandwidth or resources to devote to the new initiative. And no one wanted to give up on existing projects to make room for the new one.
They didn’t want to build a new plane while flying the existing one.
So, what’s the answer? It’s simple: Stop building planes for a bit.
New strategies, not new tactics
Whenever marketing teams cite the airplane cliché, I suggest a spin on the metaphor: Don’t try to build another airplane while flying the existing one. Instead, let the existing planes fly while you build an airplane factory.
Let me explain.
I recently worked with a client in the B2B technology space. Enabling content (educational content that helps customers improve at their jobs) is hot in that space.
My client initially planned to tap its digital and PR teams to modify the existing PR newsrooms on its website to create a new online learning platform. But neither the newsroom nor the website suited that content marketing strategy.
Everything from the website hierarchy to the audiences it attracted to the technology platform it ran on posed challenges to the new project’s success. The content team wanted to build a new learning destination using different technology.
However, the firm’s existing processes were built to focus all digital efforts — and paid and earned media — on its website. So business leaders resisted.
They said, “We already have this technology and that team with that skill set. Why don’t we just use what we have?”
It was as if the company said, “OK, you can bring us into the jetliner age — as long as you do it by repairing and upgrading our propeller plane while it’s in the air.”
Instead of pressing forward by explaining why the new project needed this or that, the content leads found a different answer. They pulled back and audited all the existing teams, workflows, technologies, and processes used for content marketing across the business. And they found that the company had room to do something new.
To tie into the metaphor, they found that by changing how they manufactured all airplanes, they could upgrade their factory to handle new projects without having to rebuild old ones while in the air.
When the article came out in 2000, businesses faced disruptions due to the growth of the internet and globalization. And its advice remains relevant as companies grapple with the disruption of generative AI.
The article explores how to respond to disruptive innovations, which create something entirely new (e.g., launching an online university), vs. sustaining innovations, which improve something already considered valuable (e.g., replacing stock photography with AI-generated imagery).
The authors advise against approaching disruptive innovation the way you would approach changing something existing. Instead, you should approach it as building something within a new organizational space.
That’s what my technology company client did.
I know – because I meet them every day – that content and marketing practitioners are scrappy, resourceful, and innovative. Requests to build the content equivalent of new airplanes come in all the time.
And I know content teams can hack planes together and manage some repairs and changes mid-flight. But when you’re rolling out a new content marketing project, it’s more productive to set up a new space.
Christensen and Overdorf outline three ways to create this new organizational space:
You can create a new team within the existing organizational structure.
You can spin out a new and independent organization from the structure.
You can acquire a different organization that becomes a new part of your existing structure.
Create a new space for new content projects
Every successful new content strategy follows one of those three options. Here are some examples of each approach.
A new content team within the existing organizational structure: When a new content team gets formalized, named, and documented, the chance for success immediately improves. Red Hat Linux offers a great example. At Red Hat, for example, Laura Barnes (2019 B2B Content Marketer of the Year) created a new strategic team to handle all the organization’s content marketing. Over the years, the team has grown, changed, and morphed as the organization has evolved. And it remains a core piece of the company’s strategy.
A new organization separate from the existing structure: Content as a strategic function in an enterprise is a powerful business model. When ServiceNow wanted to build an audience through thought leadership, for example, it didn’t add new e-books, videos, or white papers to the marketing team’s load. Instead, it built a dedicated content product team and launched Workflow, a digital publication, along with online learning, a print magazine, and an email newsletter.
A newly acquired group: Content brand acquisitions continue. For example, software company Pendo acquired Mind the Product, a product management community that provides content, training, and conferences that serve a global audience of more than 300,000 product managers, designers, and developers.
Regardless of which approach your organization takes, the first step on the road to content marketing success involves creating a factory that lets you build any kind of airplane you want.
Doing that won’t completely eliminate the need to build airplanes while flying them. But if you expect to stay in the air, you’ll occasionally have to come back to Earth to build something new from the ground up.
It’s your story. Tell it well.
Updated from a January 2022 post.
Robert Rose consults and hosts workshops on helping marketing teams align their marketing processes to all kinds of technologies – including generative AI. Contact him to learn about those programs.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
If you answered no, no, and no, you would be right.
According to the 2024 Edelman Trust Barometer Global Report, less than 60% of the global population trusts NGOs (59%), government (51%), or media (50%), putting them at the neutral trust level.
So, who do people trust? The answer might surprise you — 63% say business.
That’s an increase of 1 percentage point over the 2023 Edelman Trust Barometer.
This increased trust presents a great opportunity for businesses.
In a recent CMI post, Robert Rose wrote about brand trust as a more desired outcome than audience attention. “Your brand is probably more trusted than the media company you’re paying to advertise with. That might be the strongest argument for an owned media strategy in 2024,” he said.
Know the benefits of a B2B influencer marketing strategy
Influencers can play a critical part in that 2024 owned media strategy.
Here’s who responded yes to this statement: “I trust online influencers that I follow that talk about, review, and recommend brands and products,”
Ages 14 to 17: 75%
Ages 16 to 26: 63%
Ages 27 to 41: 70%
Ages 42 to 55: 67%
Ages 56 and older: 63%
That’s a high percentage of trust placed in influencers.
In addition, over three-fourths say they “have bought, started to trust, or talked about a brand in the last six months because of an influencer I follow.” While this statement focuses on consumer products, I think a parallel exists for B2B marketers to shape brand perception and affinity.
Ashley Zeckman might agree with this. The co-CEO of Onalytica presented “Cut the BS: B2B Influencer Marketing Strategies That Actually Work” at Content Marketing World 2023.
In the talk, she gives six marketing benefits for B2B partnerships with influencers:
Increase in awareness
Better demand generation results
Increase in quality content
Scalable and organic-led engagement
Cost-effective engagement
Increase in brand trust
Understand the B2B influencer types
Before diving into a B2B influencer marketing campaign, you should understand the types of influencers. Spoiler alert: Some may sit in the office, cubicle, or Slack channel next to you.
Ashley details the six B2B influencer categories:
Professional influencers — The “big names” in an industry who are beloved and have a high number of followers. They’re good for general authority but might not have the deep expertise for narrower, more niche topics. Ashley says it’s a good idea to partner with professional influencers to increase the reach of your content.
Content creators — They create large amounts of quality content. Ashley advises marketers to figure out where the content shines the most (e.g., video, social media posts, etc.)
Niche experts — They have a smaller audience size but are hyper-relevant. Think data scientists with deep domain expertise and knowledge. Ashley says marketers work with them to get their brand in front of more people and give them educational information.
Up-and-comers — Also called micro-influencers, they’re on the path to becoming professional influencers. Brands can benefit by getting in the door early so that by the time they hit professional influencer status, they have already built a good advocacy program with you.
SMEsand executives — Your team members, colleagues, and bosses are also B2B influencers. Executives and subject matter experts paired together can publish content and raise their visibility in tandem. This influencer type rates the highest for relevancy because they live and breathe your business.
Customers and prospects — By including prospects in your B2B marketing, you form a relationship and create credibility before engaging them in a sales-oriented discussion. It’s more valuable and organic than a cold outreach email, Ashley says. Customers are effective because they’re living the day-to-day existence of your target audience. Prospects can see themselves in your customers. Prospects will say things like, “Oh yeah, I’m experiencing that exact same thing. That is what keeps me up at night. This is the struggle I’m having within my organization.”
Decide on business goals before the influencers
You must first decide which benefit(s) your brand wants to achieve for a B2B influencer campaign. Is your goal awareness and thought leadership? Or is it demand generation?
Your answer dictates both the tactics and the influencers.
If your goal is awareness or thought leadership, consider:
Tactics: Blog posts, social content, LinkedIn Live, social video, and events
Influencer types: Professional influencers, content creators, up-and-comers, internal SMEs, and executives
Professional influencers work well for awareness because your goal is to reach more people, Ashley says. Then, you might look at the content creators, up-and-comers, and a few internal experts to build their credibility.
If your goal centers on demand or lead generation, consider:
Tactics: Webinars, white papers, original research, gated assets
Influencer types: Niche experts, customers and prospects, SMEs and executives
Invite influencers to sit in on a panel discussion. Ask the influencers to promote their webinar participation to their followers. “It’s a great way to increase numbers beyond having to invest a lot in paid advertising or trying organically to get people to register,” Ashley says. “Including influencers is almost guaranteed to help drum up excitement and get people to attend.”
Get the typical costs for influencer marketing
Ashley recommends combining multiple influencer types in your programs. “You want a mix. It’s going to depend on your program and what you want to achieve, but a mix of at least two to three types is always best,” she says.
Once you’ve identified your influencer types, you should understand the costs of their deliverables. This ballpark pricing from Ashley accounts for the spectrum of influencer types. Estimates based on the tactic include:
Short contribution/quote — free to $500
Podcast guest — $1,000 to $2,000
Blog post creation and publication — $1,200 to $3,000
LinkedIn Live guest — $2,500 to $7,000
In-person event — $5,000 to $17,000
Webinar — $3,000 to $12,000
Note: All these tactics include promotion.
These numbers and parameters aren’t set in stone, but they can help frame your conversations and negotiations.
Expect pricing to be both higher and lower. Ask for client references in a similar industry to understand their value. If you don’t have a budget, use no-cost influencer options like executives, SMEs, customers, and prospects.
Dispelling common influencer marketing myths
As with any emerging marketing discipline, myths emerge. Ashley dispels some of the most common:
Myth 1: B2B influencer marketing is an expensive, unproven tactic that your team cannot execute.
Dispelled: Influencer marketing is an extension of your content and social media marketing strategy. You don’t need a new team, tools, and processes. Think of influencer marketing as an extension of what you’re already doing.
Myth 2: Your desired tactics should lead the influencer marketing program.
Dispelled: Lead with your business objectives and the KPIs to measure those objectives. Then, define influencer types and tactics.
Myth 3: Influencer collaborations are like affiliate marketing.
Dispelled: Influencer partnerships are a relationship-based, long-term approach that builds affinity, trust, and advocacy. “That doesn’t happen overnight. Just because you pay someone to collaborate with you doesn’t mean that you have a lasting program … It’s the relationships that do,” Ashley says.
Are you ready to consider B2B influencer marketing?
Businesses are the only category today deemed trustworthy by the world. As Robert Rose says, “Your brand is probably more trusted than the media company you’re paying to advertise with. That might be the strongest argument for an owned media strategy in 2024.”
Here’s how you can get started adding an influencer component to your owned media strategy:
Document the business goals for the programs in which you’ll engage with B2B influencers.
Identify the influencer types you want to engage.
Map your goals into tactics and influencer types.
List the KPIs to measure influencer and overall program effectiveness.
Reach out to influencers, keeping the ballpark costs in mind.
Execute your programs.
Measure results and assess.
Use #CMWorld on social media to let us know how it goes (or how it’s already going).
Register to attend Content Marketing World in San Diego. Use the code BLOG100 to save $100. Can’t attend in person this year? Check out the Digital Pass for access to on-demand session recordings from the live event through the end of the year.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
Embracing the machine brain of technology as a partner with the human brains of content marketers lets you do things for your audience and brand that you could only imagine or considered too resource-intensive just a few years ago.
These examples of what’s possible with tech-human collaborations today and in the future — and what marketers should do about them — come from the experts who spoke at the recent ContentTECH Summit. You can still register (free) to go more in-depth and watch their sessions on demand.
Establish a single source of truth
“Your brand is your personality and your story. It’s how you stand out in that crowded marketplace,” says Ariana Keil, senior growth marketer at Canto.
But too often, that story gets jumbled across a customer’s journey. The prospect sees one personality on the brand’s social media and another in the deck a salesperson sent to them. That problem compounds itself each of the seven times a customer typically sees your messaging before taking the desired action.
“Your brand identity, your personality, your message has to be cohesive. It has to be consistent enough over those seven touch points so that the seed of your brand keeps getting watered,” Ariana says.
It’s a mistake that can cost your brand’s bottom line, Ariana says. Brand consistency across all platforms can increase ROI by 23%, according to a Lucidpress survey.
To ensure consistency, every company should have a brand management strategy, Ariana says.
A brand management strategy is a comprehensive plan to create, maintain, and enhance brand identity over time. It details the tactics, processes, workflows, and technology that make it happen. It also includes checkpoints to ensure you’re maintaining that consistency.
To create a brand management strategy, you must:
And you have to pull it all together into a centralized single source of truth. For enterprise organizations, that usually requires a digital asset management system (DAM).
As the content hub of your tech stack, a DAM should integrate with your project management, content creation, distribution, and analytics tools. It should also offer easy and accurate search features, otherwise employees will resort to their own devices to create and publish branded assets.
But integrating a DAM into your brand management strategy is not enough. Ariana advises treating the strategy as a dynamic concept. Measure how the brand narrative is being received through social media engagement, website traffic, conversion rates, etc. Then, take that knowledge, revise, and retool.
“Everything does change, and change is OK as long as your messaging consistently evolves along with your brand.”
Treat AI as the solution, not the challenge
Marketers have faced no greater change in recent years than the advent — and rapid adoption — of easily accessible generative artificial intelligence.
“[Without] a pragmatic or thoughtful approach to AI, organizations risk being overloaded with random point solutions,” says Ali Hart, senior product marketing manager at Optimizely.
If each team develops its own AI tech stack, they’re rebuilding silos you worked hard to tear down. Brand governance and compliance takes a hit. The AI tools may create biased or inaccurate content published by different teams, and it all can lead to the deterioration of brand and digital experiences.
But if you create a systematic approach to AI across the organization, AI tools can work with your human team members for the greater good. With this strategy, you can improve empathetic personalization.
Ali says you can customize marketing messages and experiences based on the individual’s preferences, behaviors, and needs. That personalization, though, should respect customers’ privacy and boundaries.
She also outlines other areas of impact of a positively embraced AI strategy, including:
Account-based marketing: AI-based analytics and lead scoring removes the manual work and better predicts the account’s interest or readiness to buy based on historical ad data and behavior patterns. It can also deliver more personalized and relevant content.
Dynamic ad targeting: Using AI technology, you can deliver ads with more relevant content at the best time based on real-time data.
Customer experiences: With a tailored strategy, AI can automate and personalize customer interactions, providing them with information and support.
You also can create your own large language model (LLM) based on your company’s guidelines, brand guidelines, etc., to inform your generative AI tools.
“Instead of just getting tools to say, ‘We are using AI,’ make sure they can help you do your jobs better,” Ali says.
Just don’t forget the human touch. Incorporate human oversight and intervention to ensure accuracy, fairness, and ethical considerations are addressed.
“AI should be your copilot,” Ali says. “It’s really essential to maintain a balance between automation and human insight to ensure that marketing still remains authentic and engaging and to ensure you’re still benefiting without compromising your brands.”
Also, let your audience know how AI is involved. Disclose how you collect data and provide clear explanations on how your AI algorithms work and benefit your customers. Add an AI disclaimer on your website. That transparency can go a long way in earning and maintaining your audience’s trust.
Deliver better for your customers
Given the benefits of generative AI for marketers, it only makes sense that your audiences will benefit, too.
“AI has allowed for really more nuanced and effective customer engagement,” says Sitecore’s Zach Escabedo.
Instead of offering only a handful of personalized experience options, you can use your metadata and AI tools to tailor thousands or millions (depending on your web traffic) of customized experiences.
Generative AI also can create a different search experience for consumers today. Instead of asking Google, they can just ask your brand, and they don’t need to limit themselves to inquiries for your products and services.
For example, visitors to a brand’s website or app could search for restaurants near the company’s bricks-and-mortar stores, even specifying the preferred type of food, and be served up a menu on the site.
“Your brand becomes an extension and leans out beyond what is traditionally known in the commerce world,” Zach says.
In a generative AI world, buyers won’t just search for a new pair of jeans. They can ask the brand to show them the popular fashion trends of the year. Then, they can ask about accessories to pair with those trending styles.
“It’s really starting to go beyond just a static experience with customers and really start to allow teams and organizations to lean into different tools and capabilities,” Zach says.
But don’t pursue generative AI possibilities without first establishing parameters. For example, you don’t want to allow someone at the last stage in the workflow to be able to create and publish a new paragraph or image that doesn’t match your branding. It disrupts the brand consistency you set up the system to enforce.
So, evaluate generative AI embedded in existing tools as well as any new tools to ensure you can establish the proper controls for your enterprise.
Understand AI’s role in SEO and more
Google Search is one tool you already know uses AI. It recently rolled out AI-generated overviews at the top of search results to the world. That prompted more questions on what marketers should do about AI.
Kelly Hungerford, director of digital strategy and services at SUNSTAR, a global oral health care brand, says Google’s generative AI move indicates search remains important. “As marketers, we need to be focusing on SEO,” she says.
Well-structured content for SEO will become even more important because that’s what AI tools will rely on, too.
Second, Kelly says, focus more on branded images and video, tactics that often don’t get the metadata attention they deserve. Google and other AI-integrated services are paying more attention to visuals.
“Start experimenting,” she says. “Image and video are really going to play … more than just text.”
Third, marketers operating websites across languages and markets should create SEO legs for each site. “You have to get that engine cranked up and running as soon as possible. If you have content that’s shared across multiple languages, multiple markets, you need to make sure you’re really localizing it and differentiating it,” Kelly says.
Ready for the future
Tech futurist Cathy Hackl, co-CEO of Spatial Dynamics, says people focus on AI, but you’re really seeing a convergence of different technologies moving really fast.
“They’re going to change human-computer interactions in ways that we’ve never seen before,” she says.
Spatial computing is evolving as a 3D-centric form that uses technologies to seamlessly blend virtual experiences into someone’s physical world.
With that advance comes new hardware, and Cathy says there will be more than just Apple’s Vision Pro or Meta’s new multimodal AI glasses. Expect Samsung, Google, Microsoft, and others to enter the marketplace. “That is going to force marketers to start to think about how they will play with these new devices … to think about new content types,” Cathy says.
It also will likely change the answers to questions every marketer asks: Where are people consuming content? What immersive experiences do audiences want to participate in?
But you don’t need to prepare by going out and buying an Apple Vision Pro, Cathy says. Just start paying attention to all the AI and tech announcements. For example, OpenAI’s GPT-4o’s assistant has vision.
Look to the gaming space to learn from the convergence of physical and virtual commerce. Cathy, a metaverse advisor-in-residence for Walmart, points to the retailer’s recent partnership that allows participants to buy physical things in Roblox and have them delivered to their houses.
Don’t be scared
With all the available technology and all the data collected from your audience’s digital experiences, the ability to ingest that information to help guide your strategy is huge. It also can be intimidating, especially for non-technical marketers. But don’t let it. AI and other tech opportunities aren’t going away. “It’s super important for us as marketers to invest our own time in learning how to use AI,” Ali says. “You may always feel a little step behind … but something is better than nothing.”
Missed ContentTECH Summit live but still want to learn how to manage, and scale great content experiences across all your platforms and channels? Register today to watch it on demand (it’s free).
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
In the movie Fast Times at Ridgemont High, Jeff Spicoli (Sean Penn) has a pizza delivered to his history class taught by Mr. Hand (Ray Walston), who isn’t pleased.
“Mr. Spicoli, you’re on dangerous ground here. You’re causing a major disturbance on my time.”
“I’ve been thinking about this, Mr. Hand. If I’m here, and you’re here, doesn’t that make this OUR time?”
“You’re absolutely right, Mr. Spicoli. It is OUR time.” Then, Mr. Hand invites the entire class to eat the pizza and takes a slice for himself.
It’s a perfect metaphor for where big technology seems to be headed with your content.
Marketers think, “If my content is here, and your content is here, doesn’t that make this OUR platform?”
And the tech companies say, “You’re absolutely right, Marketer. It is OUR platform.” Then, they proceed to take your content and feed it to their learning models for their generative AI tools.
In the past week, Adobe Creative Cloud customers grew outraged over a new policy that seemed to give it access and rights to any users’ content. Meta, the parent company of Facebook and Instagram, informed the U.K. and other European users that its new privacy policy allows their information to be used to develop and improve its AI products.
What should marketers make of all this? Should you sit back and watch your content pizza get distributed to the class? Do you even care about sharing it with the class if that’s what is necessary for it to become the best answer given by generative AI?
We asked Robert Rose, CMI’s chief strategy advisor, to answer the tough questions. Watch or read on for his take:
Social media has long benefited from your content
A long-learned lesson in social media is that your content helps build their audiences.
In the halcyon days of social media, marketers bet on organic reach. You could use social media to reach an aggregated audience without spending advertising dollars. You just needed to create engaging, wonderful, differentiated content that resonated with audiences on whatever platform you used.
Of course, as these things go, every marketer in every industry got that same memo and soon organic reach began to fall. So, you started paying for the privilege of making sure your content got in front of those audiences, and social media became just another media channel.
But you didn’t give up hope. You didn’t stop producing content for that organic reach and engagement. You put some of your most valuable thoughts in that content, thinking if it’s really good and really engages the audience, you would build enough interest that whatever organic reach it would get would be valuable to your marketing.
We could have a great debate about whether those days are still here, if they’re long gone, or if they ever really existed. But what is evident is that these platforms are now using your content in new ways to build value for themselves.
Do you even have a choice in the matter?
In the last month, Meta surprised many Facebook and Instagram users by revealing that content on the platforms trains the company’s AI image generator. Hundreds of thousands of Instagram users reshared a message on the platform telling the company they did not consent to using their data to train AI.
But that declaration is worth as little as that meme from your mom telling you to cut and paste the denial to use your information on Facebook. You signed away all those rights when you started using the platform.
The truth is more complicated. Technically, you or your employer owns a copyright on the original content you post on Facebook or Instagram. But the terms of service your company originally agreed to granted Meta licensing rights to use that work as it sees fit. It can duplicate, distribute, learn from, and modify it. In most cases, it can create derivative works from it. (Think about those year-in-review or memory posts it creates.)
In fact, get ready for a tasty slice of irony. Meta usually has more license to use your company’s imagery and content than you do as an employee.
Let that sink in a little bit.
Drama seems about a lot of nothing
But now, these platforms are going further. Just last week, Adobe found itself on the wrong end of the pitchforks and torches when it modified its terms of service. This phrasing most upset its users: “(W)e may access your content through both automated and manual methods, such as for content review … and using techniques such as machine learning in order to improve our Services and Software and the user experience.”
Well, that didn’t work out great for Adobe.
Social media users (irony duly noted), tired of their acquired role as epidemiologists and economists, decided they were now lawyers. They concluded that Adobe wanted to spy on customers’ content and use it to train its large language models.
Any sane review of the service term changes would likely think Adobe wanted to cover itself for using AI features to automate some services it provides to customers. To do that, it must know what the content is.
Anyway, I won’t pretend to be a lawyer, but this feels like a lot of drama about nothing. But the conversation does bring up a relevant point.
Should you be OK with your content on any platform – a proprietary one for private content development (e.g., Adobe Creative Suite, Microsoft Word, Google Docs) or a public one (e.g., Facebook, Instagram)?
The answer isn’t clear.
More than a handful of consulting clients have come to me in the last few months truly worried about allowing Google or Facebook to have their content. They fear their wonderful thought leadership content and inspiring customer stories will end up as fodder for the learning model and become the answer to a prompt on ChatGPT or Gemini.
That concern is legitimate.
They wonder if they should trust companies like Google, Microsoft, and Adobe that could access proprietary, private, and sometimes sensitive information to train LLMs.
Again, the concern is legitimate.
By the way, Apple just announced its new AI feature that will create actions based on everything you’ve done on your personal device, such as playing the podcast your wife mentioned in that email.
The only real conclusion for marketers
It all brings up the one lesson and only way for marketers to think about this.
There’s a big difference between the content you post publicly to reach and engage an audience and the content you keep private.
I can only see the benefit if your content signals AI to become the answer for a search or to become part of its derivative content for others. Creative marketing has always been a copycat business. Great campaigns, creative, copy, and thought leadership have always been unique and extraordinary until they aren’t.
As human marketers, you have always learned from and adapted your predecessors’ thought leadership, blatantly stolen your competitors’ copy, been inspired by someone else’s advertising copy or tag line, tweaked authors’ content to match your point of view and brand. The only thing AI does is speed up that process.
So, what do you do about platforms using your content to train their AI? Lean in. If you don’t want to play the game, stop using the toys. But, if you learn how to play the game, you can also win it.
As Spicoli might say, “That’s awesome. Totally awesome.”
Want more content marketing tips, insights, and examples? Subscribe to workday or weekly emails from CMI.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
You’d think that a new company with the resources of OpenAI would have a straightforward path to building trust. They had no legacy brand problems to unwind, no historical scandals to overcome, and no CEO constantly planting foot into mouth. Until recently.
OpenAI, the company behind ChatGPT, seems determined to avoid the straightforward path to trust. Sheesh — it’s almost as if they’re trying to sabotage the brand.
Here’s the latest example: When the company launched new voice models with GPT-4o last week, many people noted how much the one called Sky sounded like Scarlett Johansson, who voiced the AI assistant in the 2013 movie Her. Before the launch event, OpenAI CEO Sam Altman published a one-word post on X that said simply, “her.”
But that’s just one inconvenient event. Or is it? See also: The departure of several high-profile employees charged with protecting humanity, the restrictive clauses in OpenAI employment contracts, plus Altman’s claim he didn’t know about the clauses despite his signature on some of the documents.
Declining returns from the attention economy
The OpenAI vs. Scarlett Johansson beef is only the latest example of how the attention economy has reached peak valuation.
For years, marketers have tried a range of things to attract audience and buyer attention. On one end of the spectrum, you have the art and science of attempting to manipulate algorithms for visibility in search and social media. On the other end, you have “rage-baiting” — a tactic that involves stoking outrage to increase content engagement.
Some like attention to a currency. Now, its value is waning compared with a much more powerful rival — trust.
Brand trust rises in importance
As the old saying goes, trust is the hardest thing to find and the easiest thing to lose. And trust is in deep crisis worldwide.
The 2024 Edelman Trust Barometer intro highlights the challenge OpenAI and other tech companies face. The authors wrote:
“Rapid innovation offers the promise of a new era of prosperity, but instead risks exacerbating trust issues, leading to further societal instability and political polarization.”
Put simply: Trust in companies, media, and government erodes as leaders value attention over trust. Governmental politicians stoop to high-school-level insults; business leaders say outrageous things to stay in the press; and marketing departments bend over backward for that short-term sugar high of the click.
Ignore this decline of trust at your peril. Developing and demonstrating a trustworthy relationship with consumers is now one of the most important things marketers must do.
And that’s not new. But it’s clear that people no longer start out trusting and then become disappointed. The Edelman study points out that “most institutions are not trusted to introduce innovations to society.”
The media is actively distrusted. Governments and NGOs barely break 50% in terms of the number of people who trust them to integrate innovation into society (50% and 54%, respectively).
Yup. Distrust is democratized into everything.
Ick.
There is some good news. Edelman found that businesses have the highest level of trust (64%) among all institutions.
As a side note: Your brand is probably more trusted than the media company you’re paying to advertise with. That might be the strongest argument for an owned media strategy in 2024.
Attention is water, trust is the reservoir
What if your brand could become not only the most trusted on a topic among your competitors but the most trusted brand, period?
If that were the goal, would you trade some attention (say traffic or engagement) for fewer but more meaningful content interactions?
Historically, marketers looked at trusted information publishers and proclaimed, “There’s no way we can compete with that magazine (or nonprofit, association, or governmental agency).”
And you were right — those publications and organizations had all the attention.
But, if trust is the valued metric, you can compete now. And you must.
Trust as a metric
I worked with a B2B financial services company targeting investors and advisors a few years ago. The company asked a sample of its target audience to rank the institution and its competition on a level of trust. We also asked them to rank a sampling of the top media companies in the space.
At that time, comparing trust in financial services brands to trust in media brands was like comparing apples and oranges. But to reach its “increase brand trust” goal, the team set a goal for its new portfolio to become one of the most trusted content brands for financial advisors and investors.
When they repeated the ranking exercise a couple of years later, the team found wonderful results. The brand had risen in trust among both its competitors and media companies. That’s wonderful from a brand recall perspective.
But even more interesting were the results segmented from the brand’s subscribed audiences. Many of those who subscribed to the brand’s content trusted the company more than any other competitor and media companies.
These results provide a huge business case for the value of their content approach: Developing a deeper, more trusted relationship with audiences than even some of their media partners had.
It was a slower build and possibly more expensive to acquire a subscriber than a lead. But it paid off in a more valuable customer relationship — loyalty.
Playing the short, long game of trust
In the trust economy, value accrues when an audience trusts the brand and shares, evangelizes, and draws more people to that trust.
The short-term game of attention used to be the fastest way to show value in marketing. The goal was to distribute the most innovative thing, the most differentiated opinion, or the catchiest slogan to persuade potential buyers at the exact moment they need something.
But that game is only winnable when you start from a position of trust. Of course, you can’t earn trust without first having someone’s attention. The need for attention isn’t gone.
But now, you need to earn trust (by delivering value) in the first moments after you’ve earned the attention.
Yup. Marketing in the trust economy is harder.
You’ve got to demonstrate trustworthiness better, faster, and consistently. It’s the short, long game of a modern marketing strategy.
Gathering attention just doesn’t cut it anymore. Holding attention doesn’t work that well, either. You can hold someone’s attention for a bit without making them care.
The opportunity is here. The democratization of distrust can transform what’s possible. Your content can turn your brand into the most exciting and trusted resource for your customers.
It’s up to you to be worthy of the trust and the opportunity.
It’s your story. Tell it well.
Subscribe to workday or weekly CMI emails to get Rose-Colored Glasses in your inbox each week.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
Your job requires engaging and winning over distributors, resellers, retail outlets, brokers, and even influencers who promote and sell your products and services. It’s a core focus of great content marketing.
This month, one of the biggest brands in the world showed why that continues to be true.
Coca-Cola launched a new B2B content platform and newsletter called Coca-Cola Lens. It provides industry trends, data-backed insights, and other thought leadership to its network of current and prospective retailers, food service outlets, and other sellers of their beverage brands.
Why would a big brand like Coca-Cola launch a B2B content platform? What does it really mean?
We went to Robert Rose, CMI’s chief strategy advisor, for his take. Watch the video or read on. (Quick note: Robert has a newsletter called Lens. He isn’t saying Coca-Cola stole the name, but he’s not saying they didn’t either.)
Looking at Coca-Cola Lens
Coca-Cola fittingly announced its new content marketing platform at the National Restaurant Association Show. Coca-Cola Lens isn’t for consumers; it’s for the retailers and restaurant partners who sell Coca-Cola products in their establishments. It’s a great example of using content marketing to differentiate your brand for a specific audience.
Coca-Cola Lens features a library of thought leadership articles that examine shopper behavior and provide the economic context to help restaurants and retailers become better business managers.
It also publishes original and proprietary research, third-party resources, and news on topics such as multicultural consumers and the growth of products like premium water. And it provides tips on managing inventory and optimizing other elements of business.
Clearly, Coca-Cola designed the initiative to establish deeper levels of trust and give retailers and restaurants yet another reason to align with the global beverage brand.
3 things to notice
If you think I’m pitching Coca-Cola, I’m not. I haven’t spoken to anyone at the company, but I’m excited by a few ideas seemingly evident in this launch.
First, Coca-Cola, one of the more sophisticated marketers on the planet, made its B2B-enablement strategy a visible and notable piece of its brand and marketing approach. It publicized the site launch with a press release and a session at the National Restaurant Association Show. It’s not just some private project.
Second, with only 16 articles at launch and a basic site design, Coca-Cola doesn’t seem to break into anyone’s piggy bank to do it. The budget for this was likely the equivalent of a rounding error on the rounding error of the overall marketing budget.
People can subscribe to the content via email, so Coca-Cola seems intent on doing this long-term. And making it public indicates that they not only want existing customers to think they’re a good partner but also want to develop relationships with prospective retailers and restaurants. In fact, the subscription form includes calls to action for non-customers, indicating an awareness-building strategy for the platform.
Finally, I may be a bit overexcited about Coca-Cola Lens because it demonstrates an eagerness for new content marketing platforms. Even well-established brands can see value in doing something innovative that is small in scope but mighty in ambition.
In recent months, I’ve seen a decline in these kinds of experiments in small- to medium-sized campaigns. Brands frustrated with organic search efforts are not nurturing their blogs, resource centers, social strategies, and thought leadership programs as they might. Ideas for new content platforms get shot down because they aren’t big enough to make a dent or are too big and risky to execute. Given the availability of AI and paid ads, why bother with a hard and long-term initiative like an organic content marketing platform?
Whether Coca-Cola Lens succeeds remains to be seen. But that’s OK.
Coca-Cola didn’t over complicate it. They didn’t make it so huge that they would take a big risk if their restaurant and retail customers didn’t find it valuable. However, they also didn’t short-shrift the site and make it a landing page for the trade show presentation.
Be flexible and right-sized
As I’ve said many times, with today’s marketing technology and processes, launching a new content marketing platform like this one should be easy, quick, and right-sized.
I recently talked with a global technology company that failed to get buy-in for a thought leadership program. The rejection came because integrating it into their enterprise content management and marketing automation systems would skyrocket the cost to seven figures and eight months of technical development. Of course, it wasn’t worth that level of risk.
Your owned media platforms should be as flexible to deploy as anything else you want to do. The timeline should be mentioned in days, weeks, and maybe months, not quarters or years.
Yes, Coca-Cola may find the usefulness of Coca-Cola Lens limited to a few months, a few quarters, or many years. But by doing the interesting thing, they’ve demonstrated that even as big as they are, Coca-Cola is open to doing new things without guaranteed success.
When Joe Pulizzi and I wrote Killing Marketing, we made the premise about launching content platforms that could provide so much value as to become a profitable aspect of the business. We opened with a quote attributed to Mark Twain (though he probably never said it):
“It ain’t what you don’t know that gets you into trouble. It’s what you know for sure that just ain’t so.”
That’s why I like Coca-Cola’s launch so much. If Lens works, it will probably surprise them just as much as the rest of us. They don’t know what will happen, and honestly, that’s a more exciting way to work on marketing.
Like what you read here? Get yourself a subscription to daily or weekly updates. It’s free – and you can change your preferences or unsubscribe anytime.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
More content marketers should act like museum curators.
Museum curators pick an exhibit theme, carefully select the artifacts, and organize them into a story that visitors will want to consume.
By adopting a similar strategy, you — and, ultimately, your audience — will reap the rewards.
You will create more quality content without having to create new content.
You will tell unique stories shaped by others’ content.
You will position your brand as a thought leader without having to write draft after draft before the author-executive signs off.
You will become a trusted and helpful resource by digesting content from multiple sources.
Curation can take your content marketing further without an additional investment of resources.
What is a content curator vs. a content aggregator?
Being a successful curator requires first understanding the difference between a curator and an aggregator.
Think of it like this.
When people reshare or repost others’ content on social media without commenting, they are aggregators. Their audience assumes the “reposter” is interested in the content, but they don’t know what’s particularly interesting or helpful about it.
In this LinkedIn post, I was an aggregator, sharing a post from Christina Nicholson on the value of public relations. I didn’t help my audience understand the topic even though they couldn’t discern it from the opening line, “I’m handing over thousands of dollars to her … and she has no idea where I came from.”
When people comment on or write an introduction to the shared or reposted content, they act as curators. They let their audience know why they found the content valuable or how it might relate to them.
So be a curator, not an aggregator, and your audience (and brand) will thank you (or at least appreciate your content.)
Here’s how to be a content curator.
Pick a topic
Though curating allows you to develop more content with fewer resources, that doesn’t mean you can scrimp on quality.
First, identify a theme or topic about which you could curate content and that your audience will find valuable. It could be a synthesis of industry news. It could be takeaways from scholarly content. It could be a compilation of takeaways from your brand’s content. It could be a deep dive into a topic for which you don’t have subject matter experts on staff.
When you decide on the theme, fill in the blanks in this sentence:
We will curate content about _________________ to help our audience _______________.
Select the tactic
Now that you have your theme and general benefit, you’re ready to pick the tactic. You can create something new or select an existing vehicle that could benefit from curated content. It might be a podcast, newsletter, blog, video series, or social media post. You could also combine several formats.
In this edition, Navneet Kaushal highlights the key takeaways from 10 articles, including this one, A Comparison of the 10 Best Email Marketing Tools. The author gives credit and links to the original source while summarizing what readers can expect — the features, pricing, and performance of each tool.
Will you give your take on a single in-depth article or podcast episode? Nigel Brown did with the LinkedIn post mentioned earlier in this article.
Will you curate content your brand or a sister brand already published?
Marketing Brew’s newsletter includes content from elsewhere in the Morning Brew media world. In this May 13 newsletter, it gave its spin on an article about Taylor Swift’s impact on a $60 clothing item originally published by Retail Brew.
Will you create a newsletter with a roundup of interesting or news content?
The Daily Skimm curates entertainment, news, and more in its newsletter. In this edition, it curates a quote from Ryan Reynolds about Taylor Swift naming his children. Then, it digests the news topic of the day (Michael Cohen’s testimony in the Trump trial). In the first two paragraphs, it connects to content from AP News, Axios, Politico, and CNBC.
You also could curate more long-form content, such as an e-book combining content from your brand and third parties on the same topic. The possibilities are vast.
Once you know what the content will look like, you can better understand how much or little needs to be curated. For example, a weekly curated blog article of 1,500 words might require several sources and more time to create than a four-minute podcast segment (about 600 words) discussing a single curated source.
Also, decide how frequently the curated tactic will be distributed and set expectations on the timeliness of the incorporated pieces. If you write an industry newsletter or do a hot topic segment in your podcast, you’ll need to curate more timely pieces than if you curate an in-depth e-book about the topic.
Now, you can create a content curation calendar and list the total number of curated items needed and how frequently you’ll need it. It’s OK to use a range for the quantity, but don’t sway from the frequency.
Search for content
Now that you know the topic, you’re ready to set up the curation process.
Starting from scratch each time or hoping you’ll stumble upon some content to curate isn’t a strategy and will lead you to end the strategy quickly because it’s too time-consuming. You should establish a system that can easily scale. Start by documenting everything on a spreadsheet or other tracking system
Use SEO strategy
Pull the keywords from your SEO strategy. Given it’s likely a lengthy list, you’ll need to test and refine it. Pick five to 10 phrases that are more likely to consistently deliver good content for curation. If they don’t prove fruitful, swap them out for other keywords.
You want the curated content to feel fresh. Depending on your topic, that could be content from the last week, month, or year. It rarely means content from two, five, or 10 years ago. In Google searches, after you search for your keywords, click the “news” tab at the top of the search results page. It will display more recent newsier items.
TIP: Set up a Google Alert for your primary targeted words.
You also can follow a similar search process on YouTube to uncover relevant videos.
Make bookmarks your friend
When you find websites or other content resources that could provide a steady stream of articles worthy of curation, bookmark them and add them to your tracker. Sometimes, they may have relevant content that isn’t ranking well yet. If you don’t go directly to their URL, you will never find that content.
Don’t forget to use the search features on these go-to domains to discover content that may not be showing up on their front page anymore.
Sign up and follow
Subscribe to newsletters, podcasts, and videos that cover your topics. They can offer a plethora of resources that you could use or put you on a new path for further research.
TIP: Set up a separate email address for the subscriptions to avoid an overflowing inbox.
I like newsletters because I can quickly read the content and cut and paste it into my notes. But audio can work, too. In those cases, I use a free tool, like YouTubeTranscript, to get text so I can do it more easily.
Venture into social media, too. These platforms can be helpful in a couple of ways – finding people and hashtags relevant to your topics. Follow those go-to sources who share links and breaking news on your topic. Track the most relevant hashtags to see what content surfaces.
Use a tool
Generative AI can give you an assist, too. Enter prompts that use your key topics or questions into a tool like Gemini or another that provides real-time information. Ask for the original sources and verify those sources include the content.
Although I haven’t used paid tools in a while, many are available to expedite the curation process:
Curata allows for creation, curation, organization, annotation, and sharing content.
Feedly uses RSS feeds to track designated topics and trends.
Scoop.it lets businesses create hubs to create, curate, share and use content elsewhere.
TagBoard works for hashtag curation on social media.
If you curate content on more intellectual or researched topics, use tools like Google Scholar to find academic articles.
Give credit (it’s due)
As you go about curating content, make sure to track the sources. Giving the original sources proper credit is a must if you want to avoid plagiarism (or even the perception of plagiarism.) In your content, note the original source by name in your content and link to the curated article, podcast, or video whenever possible.
Tell a curated story
Third-party content can prove a valuable resource to broaden your content strategy and deliver more for your audience with fewer resources. But the content only serves as the building blocks. You, like a museum curator, still must figure out how to design it cohesively to craft a story that your brand wants to tell and your audience wants to consume.
All tools mentioned in this article were suggested by the author. If you’d like to suggest a tool, share the article on social media with a comment.
Register to attend Content Marketing World in San Diego. Use the code BLOG100 to save $100. Can’t attend in person this year? Check out the Digital Pass for access to on-demand session recordings from the live event through the end of the year.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
You’ve heard the expression, “Work smarter, not harder.”
Content marketing teams would do well to adopt that philosophy. Hard work alone can’t solve the struggle to meet the demands for more (and better) content. Smarter work, though, can remove the friction, confusion, and production inefficiencies that can hinder their success.
Smarter work requires clear operational workflows and well-defined processes. If your team lacks these foundational elements, important tasks fall through the cracks, and no one knows the next steps or who’s responsible for seeing them through. Eventually, chaos reigns, content quality suffers, and the team wastes time fixing production problems while your competitors solve your audience’s challenges.
With this streamlined, five-step process, you can map workflows for each content format and variation your team produces regularly. Then, you can build executable processes that make production more manageable. The templates and examples can guide you through each step.
Step 1: Audit your content formats
First, you need a high-level view of all the content deliverables and distribution for each format.
Create a template with these columns — content format, primary distribution platform, additional distribution platforms, and special circumstances and variation.
Content format: Do you create articles? E-books? Live presentations? Webinars? Visual content? Create a row for each format your team regularly produces.
Primary delivery platform: Where is each format published or shared first? Ideally, it is an owned-media platform, like your blog or via email. However, if it’s an external platform like social media, note the destination.
Additional distribution platforms. Do you use this content format on other channels? List them. This step helps surface overlooked tasks in the process, such as uploading assets to your brand’s social pages through an admin account or resizing images to platform specifications. It also accounts for post-publishing steps to provide a consistent multiplatform experience.
Special circumstances and variations. Do you gate some e-books as lead-gen magnets while other e-books remain ungated? Are videos added to your newsletters only when you’re promoting an event or special offer? Note any variations that require extra steps or a distinct production process.
TIP: If a content format is used significantly in multiple ways, list those uses in separate rows. For example, videos might have two rows, Video — YouTube and Video — Instagram Stories.
At this point, focus only on the high-level tasks in your operations workflow. Finer details like design needs, who creates the content, and who needs to approve it will come later (step three).
Here’s an example of how an audit might look:
Content Format
Primary Distribution Platform
Additional Distribution Platforms
Special Circumstances/Variations
Editorial article
Website (Blog)
· Newsletter · LinkedIn profile page/group · Social media
· Website blog · Event microsite · Website video page
· Sponsored webinars
Social media post
LinkedIn
· Facebook · LinkedIn · Instagram
· Paid promotions · Co-created with influencers
Live presentation
In-person event
· Virtual events platform · LinkedIn Live
· Video snippets on social media · Distribution partner site
Step 2: List all tasks required for each format
Next, detail all the editorial, collaborative, and technical production tasks to produce each content format for its primary platform.
You may want to start with the most frequently produced or the most critical to your content goals. Alternatively, begin with the most complex asset, which involves multiple teams or many steps to produce and distribute. You’ll see why in a minute.
Don’t worry about putting the tasks in order. Just list them as they come to mind. For example, an editorial article for your website’s blog might include this task list:
Determine topic.
Schedule publication in the editorial calendar.
Edit submitted copy.
Load copy and images to the content management system.
Format content for layout.
Send edited copy to author and stakeholders for revisions/approval.
Request sales/marketing feedback on the topic.
Set metadata details for SEO.
Send links/assets to the contact person for the daily email newsletter.
Design and develop visual images.
Gather author bio info/assets.
Brainstorm specific story angles.
Identify and interview subject matter expert(s).
Collect metrics/generate performance reports.
Assign author to write copy.
Proof and approve the final layout.
Share performance data with stakeholders.
Publish content to its primary platform.
Share links/assets with content partners for their usage.
Some of these tasks may have multiple sub-steps. For example, formatting the article could involve importing and resizing images, adding hyperlinks, setting category tags, etc. But for this exercise, stick to broad task categories.
Step 3: Organize tasks by production stage
Next, for each format, group the tasks in sequential order into pre-production, production, and post-production stages, as shown in the template below.
Feel free to add clarifying details to your task descriptions. They could help team members distinguish commonly confused actions, like editing for substance vs. final proofreading.
Stage of Content Format (editorial article)
Required Tasks
Pre-production stage
Determine the topic.
Brainstorm angle.
Identify sources/subject matter experts.
Request sales/marketing feedback on the topic and approach.
Assign a writer.
Facilitate governance requirements.
Create/gather author bio info/assets.
Production stage
Receive author submission.
Edit/revise copy for style and substance.
Design/develop visuals.
Send a final copy to the author and stakeholders for revisions/approval.
Load/format copy and visuals for layout.
Set metadata details for SEO.
Proof and approve the final layout.
Post-production stage
Schedule publication in the editorial calendar.
Publish content (including metadata) to its primary platform.
Send content to [contact] for email alert/newsletter inclusion.
Share links/assets with content partners for additional promotion, repurposing, and distribution efforts per the content plan.
Collect metrics data and generate reports.
Share performance data with stakeholders to inform potential adjustments or future content plans.
To help organize your tasks in logical order, also answer these questions:
Which tasks must happen before others can start?
Which tasks can happen concurrently?
What tasks denote a stage is complete and the next can begin?
Your processes must account for standards and requirements set at the enterprise level or that contribute to other organizational functions. For example, you may need to set metadata details according to your enterprise SEO strategy or comply with organizational procedures, like securing signed contributor agreements.
If these steps didn’t make it onto your initial task list, add them. (In the example above, I added “facilitate governance requirements” that wasn’t on the original task list. If you’re unsure what these tasks involve — or how to fulfill them — find out. It will only make your work harder if you need to plug in or reorder steps after you’ve mapped the operational workflow.
Step 4: Assign roles and map how work will flow
From here, you add a column to set roles and responsibilities for each task. With this information, you can create a map showing how production efforts flow from one role to the next.
The first part is relatively easy, especially if you have a small, centralized content marketing team and clearly outlined roles. For collaborative tasks, include all people (or the departments they represent) who must act before that task is complete. In this example, I slotted in some pre-production roles as a guide:
Stage of Content Format (editorial article)
Task To Do
Roles
Pre-production stage
Determine the topic.
· Team leader
Brainstorm angle.
· Team leader · Managing editor
Identify sources/subject matter experts.
· Managing editor · Story editor · Staff writers
Request sales/marketing feedback on the topic and approach.
· Managing editor
Assign a writer.
· Managing editor
Facilitate governance requirements.
· Managing editor
Create/gather author bio info/assets.
· Copy editor
Determining roles can be more complicated for larger enterprises or those with shared content responsibilities across departments. However, once you slot your content marketing team members into their standard areas of responsibility, you can see where gaps exist. That can help identify the internal teams to approach for collaborative assistance.
Additionally, it helps pinpoint areas where you lack adequate capabilities or coverage so you can proactively fill them by outsourcing talent or incorporating generative AI tools. You may discover unnecessary redundancies that can be eliminated.
The chart now provides all the information needed to understand the editorial article format workflow. However, transforming it into a shareable graphic or map can help stakeholders visualize how they fit in the production continuum and what still needs to happen.
Step 5: Operationalize and iterate
You listed the tasks and mapped the order of operations for a content format. Now, implement it as a repeatable process. Create a mechanism to track and manage the tasks as they get done and ensure everyone has what they need to do their part.
You can use the detailed dashboards provided in project management tools like Asana or Jira to build a sophisticated system. Another option is to create customized trackers and checklists using cloud-based work tools like Airtable, Trello, or Notion. However, the most straightforward approach may be to copy the information from the templated chart into a shareable Google spreadsheet or Excel document.
Now, you can adapt the process for variations of the content format. Here’s how that works:
Revisit the original table that notes exceptional circumstances and variations that require a different set of steps.
Walk through the tasks on the chart (step two). Delete unnecessary tasks for the variation and identify any to be added. For example, with a sponsored blog post (a variation of a blog article), you may need to integrate the client’s logo and boilerplate copy or facilitate their copy review and approval process.
Assign roles for newly added tasks.
With this model, you can repeat this process for each regularly used content format, so you have a comprehensive content operations tracker.
Build, revise, repeat, and achieve
Content marketing teams juggle many responsibilities. Why not make their jobs easier by working smarter? Map the operational workflows and build reliable processes that empower their performance.
If you decide to try this shortcut, I’d love to hear how it worked — or how you adapted it to work better for your team.
All tools mentioned in the article are identified by the author. If you have a tool to share, tag us on social media.
Want more content marketing tips, insights, and examples? Subscribe to workday or weekly emails from CMI.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
Did you follow the Apple iPad Pro content debacle?
Here’s a quick recap. A recent online ad for the new iPad Pro showed a large hydraulic press slowly crushing various symbols of creativity. A metronome, a piano, a record player, a video game, paints, books, and other creative tools splinter and smash as the Sonny and Cher song All I Ever Need Is You plays.
The ad’s title? “Crush!”
The point of the commercial — I think — is to show that Apple managed to smush (that’s the technical term) all this heretofore analog creativity into its new, very thin iPad Pro.
To say the ad received bad reviews is underselling the response. Judgment was swift and unrelenting. The creative world freaked out.
When fellow actor Justine Bateman shared the Tim Cook post, she simply wrote, “Truly, what is wrong with you?” Other critiques ranged from tone-challenged to wasteful to many worse things.
A couple of days later, Apple apologized and canceled plans to air the ad on television.
How not-so-great content ideas come to life
The level of anger surprises me. Look, the ad does show the eyeballs on an emoji-faced squishy ball popping under the plates’ pressure, but still. Calling the ad “actually psychotic” might be a skosh over the top.
Yes, the ad missed the mark. And the company’s subsequent decision to apologize makes sense.
But anyone who’s participated in creating a content misfire knows this truth: Mistakes look much more obvious in hindsight.
On paper, I bet this concept sounded great. The brainstorming meeting probably started with something like this: “We want to show how the iPad Pro metaphorically contains this huge mass of creative tools in a thin and cool package.”
Maybe someone suggested representing that exact thing with CGI (maybe a colorful tornado rising from the screen). Then someone else suggested showing the actual physical objects getting condensed would be more powerful.
Here’s my imagined version of the conversation that might have happened after someone pointed out the popular internet meme of things getting crushed in a hydraulic press.
“People love that!”
“If we add buckets of paint, it will be super colorful and cool.”
“It’ll be just like that ad where a bus driver kidnaps and subsequently crushes all the cute little Pokémon characters in a bus!” (Believe it or not, that was actually a thing.)
The resulting commercial suffers from the perfect creative storm: A not-great (copycat) idea at the absolutely wrong time.
None of us know what constraints Apple’s creative team worked under. How much time did they have to come up with a concept? Did they have time to test it with audiences? Maybe crushing physical objects fit into the budget better than CGI. All these factors affect the creative process and options (even at a giant company like Apple).
That’s not an excuse — it’s just reality.
Content failure or content mistake?
Many ad campaigns provoke a “What the hell were they thinking?” response (think Pepsi’s Kendall Jenner ad or those cringy brand tributes that follow celebrity deaths).
Does that mean they’re failures? Or are they mistakes? And what’s the difference?
As I wrote after Peloton’s holiday ad debacle (remember that?), people learn to fear mistakes early on. Most of us hear cautionary messages almost from day one.
Some are necessary and helpful (“Don’t stick a knife in a live toaster” or “Look both ways before you cross the street.”) Some aren’t (“Make that essay perfect” or “Don’t miss that goal.”)
As a result, many people grow up afraid to take risks — and that hampers creativity. The problem arises from conflating failure and mistakes. It helps to know the difference.
I moved to Los Angeles in 1987 to become a rock ‘n’ roll musician. I failed. But it wasn’t a mistake. I wasn’t wrong to try. My attempt just didn’t work.
Labeling a failed attempt a “mistake” feeds the fears that keep people from attempting anything creative.
The conflation of failure and mistakes happens all too often in creative marketing. Sure, people create content pieces (and let’s not forget that there are always people behind those ideas) that genuinely count as mistakes.
They also create content that simply fails.
Don’t let extreme reactions make you fear failures
Here’s the thing about failed content. You can do all the work to research your audience and take the time to develop and polish your ideas — and the content still might fail. The story, the platform, or the format might not resonate, or the audience simply might not care for it. That doesn’t mean it’s a mistake.
Was the Apple ad a mistake? Maybe, but I don’t think so.
Was it a failure? The vitriolic response indicates yes.
Still, the commercial generated an impressive amount of awareness (53 million views of the Tim Cook post on X, per Variety.) And, despite the apology, the company hasn’t taken the ad down from its YouTube page where it’s earned more than 1 million views.
The fictional Captain Jean Luc Picard once said, “It is possible to commit no mistakes and still lose. That is not weakness. That is life.” The Apple ad turns that statement on its head — Apple made many mistakes and still won a tremendous amount of attention.
I’m not suggesting that people shouldn’t criticize creative work. Constructive critiques help us learn from our own and others’ failures. You can even have a good laugh about content fails.
Just acknowledge, as the Roman philosopher Cicero once wrote, “Not every mistake is a foolish one.”
Creative teams take risks. They try things outside their comfort zone. Sometimes they fail (sometimes spectacularly).
But don’t let others’ expressions of anger over failures inhibit your willingness to try creative things.
Wouldn’t you love to get the whole world talking about the content you create? To get there, you have to risk that level of failure.
And taking that risk isn’t a mistake.
It’s your story. Tell it well.
Subscribe to workday or weekly CMI emails to get Rose-Colored Glasses in your inbox each week.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
OpenAI and Google made waves in the world of artificial intelligence this week.
In a studio set seemingly from the 1970s Merv Griffin Show, OpenAI brought the “magic” to improve the ChatGPT ecosystem. It built a model that can analyze images, video, and speech, added a new desktop app, and more.
Google got a bit cheeky with its news. During OpenAI’s event, Google was elsewhere previewing Gemini’s new features. They include using the camera to describe what’s going on in the frame and giving spoken feedback in real time (exactly what OpenAI was showing off.)
The next day, Google demonstrated the new features, including visualizations at Google I/O, though their demos weren’t as cute or done on a Merv Griffin set.
What does all this AI news mean for marketers and content? Will it create tsunami-like waves for marketers? Or will it be more like gentle ripples?
We asked Robert Rose, CMI’s chief strategy advisor, for his take. Watch the video or read on to find out what he has to say:
Listen to what wasn’t said
The most interesting thing in both OpenAI and Google’s announcements wasn’t the new features but what they didn’t say. But before I get to that, let’s dive into what they did say.
OpenAI launched GPT-4o. The “o” stands for “omni” — a nod to the new all-encompassing multi-modal application. The more efficient model will power both paid and free versions, which is good news for those who have free accounts.
GPT-4o gives power to more human-like voice activation. It can express emotions more effectively and even sings for users (watch the video above for a sample.) It also responds faster, allowing users to interrupt when it’s speaking.
OpenAI also announced a new ChatGPT desktop app with both voice and vision capabilities.
Google offered similar news, with updates to its AI ecosystem, Gemini. It now has a multi-modal capability and vision systems. It did some impressive demos, asking Gemini to locate things as they walked around a room.
But Google also did what Google does and added features that integrate with email, document creation, and its Android operating system.
All the news was interesting and different. It made it clearer where each company is going.
Should marketers care?
But what does all this new AI from OpenAI and Google mean for marketers?
Not much.
The most interesting thing wasn’t announced.
As late as four days before OpenAI’s announcement, reports swirled about a new web search feature for ChatGPT. They even said that’s why OpenAI scheduled its release the day before Google’s I/O conference. Well, OpenAI didn’t touch on any ideas of search and marketing.
Some could argue that OpenAI’s learning model update in December and making it free for everyone ostensibly allows for web search using AI. But the company never called it “web search” nor are they marketing it as such.
Google did comment on web search, announcing that it plans to roll out the AI Overviews feature at the top of search results to everybody by year’s end. Yes, that’s the same feature (formerly known as Search Generative Experience) that many of you have already seen. But the company didn’t reveal anything particularly new for search.
And neither company touched on how their announcements would affect how businesses and content are found online.
OpenAI and Google see AI as a personal service. It makes someone, not some business, more effective in engaging with information.
Now, as I mentioned, Gemini’s new features integrate with Google’s Office applications and will help people build mobile apps.
But they really focused on the individual and personal services. I’m intrigued by the two biggest AI players “consumerizing” AI and making it work for non-technical consumers rather than making it a martech tool for businesses.
Of course, smaller players are integrating AI features into their martech tools. Salesforce, HubSpot, Microsoft, and even Google (which talked about at the launch event and where they may have an edge) are doing it on their bigger platforms. However, all these features feel like personal productivity enhancements, not integrated team-focused tools.
Where does this latest wave of announcements from Google and OpenAI leave pure-play AI companies focused on making marketing teams better? Is it possible that AI is simply best served to individuals, NOT teams? Will these enterprise-level companies get stuck in a hard place between existing tools with AI features and the big AI companies with personal services?
It will be interesting to watch.
This is the path for marketing and AI
But the latest AI news also further convinces me of the best path for businesses wanting to integrate generative AI into their marketing. It won’t be an off-the-shelf tool or permission to let team members use ChatGPT.
It will require you to really understand your process, workflow, and use cases and then figure out what features best serve them.
That will be how you get your own Merv Griffin set – and demo to your bosses how AI will change the world of your marketing.
Want more content marketing tips, insights, and examples? Subscribe to workday or weekly emails from CMI.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
Wouldn’t it be great if the content your brand invests so much time and resources in could earn attention from the media?
More people would see your content, and your brand would get a credibility boost from a third-party source. That’s the magic of combining content and PR. Whether you wear the public relations hat or work with the PR team, you can create alchemy for your content and brand.
To do that, follow these dos and don’ts of media outreach (adapted and updated from my talk at Content Marketing World 2023).
Do understand what content works best for earned media
Not all content you create will work well for the media. Among the content that won’t work:
Sales-focused: Journalists and editorially focused media don’t want to become shills for your brand and products. Save sales content for other channels.
Undifferentiated: Media outlets also don’t want to publish the same content as everybody else.
Weak: If you don’t bring your content to life with data, statistics, or customer stories, don’t waste time pitching it to media outlets.
AI-generated: If the editors wanted bot-created content, they could do it themselves.
What content works well? I find these categories play well with third-party publications:
Thought leadership: Executive interviews offer great material. Every few months, I interview my client’s CEO and create a thought leadership piece for the company blog. I pitched one of those articles to the publication Food Industry Executive, and they published it. In fact, the article on industry trends became the outlet’s most-read story that month, garnering yet another piece of coverage. Then, an editor at Cheese Market News read it and asked to run it, too. We revised it for that publication and got more coverage based on something that otherwise would have gathered dust on the company blog.
Customer stories: Use your customers (once you have the necessary permissions from their organization.) Work with your sales team to identify prospects, then negotiate with the customer. Remind them that the publicity helps them, too, and look into what you could offer to encourage or thank them (a discount, for example).
Original data and research: Reporters and editors love original data. In Cision’s 2024 State of the Media report (registration required), 61% of journalists say they want to receive original research (trends, market data, etc.) from media relations professionals. That’s second only to press releases. I’ve had great success with original data.
For example, a client tested how long a hard drive lasts and published the results on the company website. We pitched it to tech publications, and 12 outlets, including Network World, Ars Technica, and Tom’s Hardware, picked it up.
Trend pieces: If you don’t have your own data, you can use publicly available data. I’ve seen companies successfully build a trend-story pitch around public data related to what the brand does and what the media outlet is interested in.
Do focus on the publications your audience reads
Instead of pitching a hundred journalists or publications, do a little research to determine where your audience spends time. Your list won’t be hundreds; it’ll probably be more like 10 or 20.
The C-suite often thinks everyone reads The Wall Street Journal. They believe a mention there will change everything for the company. However, trade publications may be far more relevant to your audience, and those publications are more likely to publish your content as their staffs shrink. If you send them a well-written (i.e., not salesy) success story along with high-resolution photos (and a video if you have it), they’ll probably be happy to consider publishing it.
Don’t include overused words, jargon, or acronyms
Continuing the non-salesy content strategy, avoid these words:
Urgent
Industry-leading
Breaking news
Groundbreaking
Innovative
Watch out for jargon and acronyms, too. Because you’re immersed in a topic every day, you may think everybody knows what you’re talking about. A lot of people won’t. As a rule of thumb, spell out acronyms on the first reference.
Don’t ignore publication guidelines
Most media websites publish guidelines for contributed content. Some don’t accept it, and some have strict guidelines. Craft pitches that show you’ve reviewed them. That will help you stand out because many people don’t bother to read them.
Sometimes, the publication will want to interview the people quoted in the content themselves. If that would be uncomfortable for customers or the sales teams or executives might hesitate to give reporters access to them, pick a different media outlet.
Do consider the publication’s audience
For example, a journalist told me she often receives pitches from companies based in cities like Denver. But she writes for a business journal in Columbus, Ohio. It seems like common sense, but you’d be surprised how many people don’t think before they pitch.
A journalist told me that she often receives pitches for stories companies in Denver. But she writes for a business journal in Columbus, Ohio. It seems like common sense, but you’d be surprised how many people don’t think before they pitch. In a recent Muck Rack study (registration required), nearly three-quarters of the surveyed journalists say the top reason for rejecting a pitch is irrelevance to their coverage area. Other contenders include lack of personalization (6%), bad timing (5%), too long (2%), confusing subject line (1%), and other (7%).
You’d think this is common sense. The bar is low.
Don’t overlook relationship-building
Make your media outreach work more than a one-off transaction. If you build good relationships with reporters and editors, they may come to you when they’re writing about your industry. Treat them well, prioritize their needs, and respect their time.
Here’s a relationship tip. If your brand is exhibiting at a trade show or sponsoring an event, you can often get the pre-registered media list in advance. A few weeks before the event, send reporters you’re interested in meeting a brief email to schedule an interview with your spokesperson. If they don’t want to schedule a time to meet, you can always invite them to stop by your booth at their convenience. These meetings help develop a relationship with a reporter so they’re more likely to remember the CEO or executive when they need a source. Sometimes, they’ll write stories right after the show, and they might call on them for quotes.
Remember, journalists don’t owe you anything. They can move on to the next source if you don’t meet their deadlines or ignore their questions. Be sure to list a media contact on your site that checks incoming messages. You don’t want to miss reporter queries. For example, I know of a company that missed an opportunity with Wired magazine because no one checked the email where the reporter sent the inquiry.
Social media helps a lot in connecting with reporters. Journalists update their digital profiles more often than a media database company does. They also post what they’re working on and what sources they’re looking for.
Journalists still use X more than other platforms, according to the Muck Rack research, but I’ve seen more and more using LinkedIn lately.
Thirty-six percent of journalists say they use X, 22% are on Facebook, 17% on LinkedIn, and 12% on Instagram. Few are on YouTube (4%), Reddit (2%), and TikTok (1%). Only 2% say they’re not on social media.
Do try these tips
Consider these nuts-and-bolts pitching tips:
Pitch in the morning when most reporters prefer to receive story ideas.
Avoid Mondays when everybody’s inbox is full.
Avoid Fridays before and Tuesdays after a three-day weekend.
Use email, as that’s what most reporters prefer.
Send one follow-up email about a week after the original pitch.
Don’t forget to make the most of the media you earn
If your content gets picked up or mentioned in a publication, share it on social media. Put it in your newsletter and post it on your site. Share it with your prospects, investors, partners, and internal teams.
You want everyone to know how you turned your owned media (content) into earned media through a PR approach. You didn’t have to create anything new — you used content that had already been created. And that’s a win for everyone when content and PR teams work together.
Bring your team to Content Marketing World this October for inspiration, ideas, and actionable advice on developing and executing a strategy that drives profit for your business. Group rates are available. Register today.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
So, how can you earn contextual links to give your content an edge over the competition? Adopt one, two, or all three of the strategies detailed in this article.
But first, let’s understand what contextual links are.
What are contextual links?
A contextual link appears in the body of a web page’s content. A hyperlink is added to a relevant word or phrase. They:
Link to other pages on the site.
Cite the source of a claim or statistic.
Indicate other relevant pages.
Provide readers with more in-depth information on the topic.
Guide readers to a product or service.
In this screenshot of an article with the header, Challenges of Productivity Tracking in Remote Workplaces, three phrases are hyperlinked — measure productivity, Microsoft, and research by Gartner.
Each contextual link serves a purpose:
“Measure productivity” goes to a Slack article about how to measure employee productivity.
“Microsoft” directs the reader to the original research for the cited statistic.
“Research by Gartner” links to the native source for the research cited in that paragraph.
With a contextual link-building strategy, you not only boost your content in the eyes of Google but also encourage other sites to use your valuable content to provide their readers with additional information or context.
Now, let me show you three strategies to grow your contextual links and improve your content’s rankings.
1. Help sites fix their broken links
Broken link building involves contacting a website, pointing out a broken external link on a page, and suggesting your content as its replacement.
Broken links could result from a 404 error, a blank page, or a redirect to an irrelevant page — any alteration that ruins the original link’s purpose.
Since broken links negatively affect the visitor experience, removing them is in the site’s best interest. Your replacement offer gives them a quick solution to their problem. Plus, people are more willing to help you after you’ve helped them.
To find broken links, use a tool like Free Backlink Checker extension. I also like to inspect links manually since most tools only pick up 404 errors. Rely solely on them, and you will miss relevant broken-link opportunities.
Ahrefs also has tools for finding broken links. Its free broken link checker is helpful, but the paid version is more robust.
Paid subscribers can go to Site Explorer, go to the Outgoing Links report, and click on “Broken Links” from the dropdown menu.
The report identifies the total number of broken links (3,136 in the example below), the referring pages (the URL for the content including the broken link), the anchor (the words hyperlinked in the content), and the link (the URL that no longer directs to a viable page).
Ahrefs subscribers can also compile a Best by Links report under the Pages option in the Site Explorer tool.
In this example, the report lists pages with 404 page-not-found errors for TheMuse.com. It has 6,230 pages with broken external links. Each page URL listed is accompanied by the number of referring domains and a number of links to the page.
This research can identify the topics with the biggest potential to become the fixes for a broken link. You can create content to address them or identify content you already published. Just make sure the content closely matches the intent of the anchor text’s original link.
For example, the same research report, which is now a broken link, is cited in articles from Oyster and TINYpulse. On Oyster, the anchor text reads, “44% of companies did not allow remote work.” On TINYpulse, the anchor text says, “only 33% are very satisfied with the level of trust in their organization.”
For a single article link to replace the broken link on Oyster and TINYpulse, the content would need to cite both a statistic about remote work and another stat about trust in organizations.
2. Guest posting
Like the broken-link replacement strategy, guest posting benefits both your and the recipient’s sites. You reach out to sites and offer to write content about a topic relevant to their audience that relates to your content subjects and includes a link to your site. This technique works well because you typically control where and how to add your link to make it as relevant as possible.
You can take multiple approaches to win guest-posting opportunities. No matter which tactics you use, track the sites and verify the site’s quality using Ahrefs, another tool, or a direct visit to the site.
First, you can use Ahrefs (or a similar tool) to examine your competitors’ backlinks and identify any links that come from guest posts. The anchor or surrounding text might hint at its status with phrases such as “contributed by,” “guest post by,” or the name of the brand or author. You also can check links manually to see if they’re contributed content.
In this example from Collegiate Parent, the headline reads “EFC Too High? Tips for Successful Aid Appeals” and includes a byline for “Billie Jo Weis.” At this point, you don’t know if it is a contributed article.
But scroll down to the end, and you can see the author’s bio. It confirms the article is a guest post because her bio says she is a client services advisor for My College Planning Team, not the publisher (Collegiate Parent).
You can also use Google search operators to identify sites open to guest contributions. You’ll want to do several searches using variations of your target keywords and topic accompanied by phrases, such as “guest post,” “contributed by,” “guest post by,” and “guest posting guidelines.”
The example in the screenshot below works for a brand targeting college prep topics. The search is “’college prep’ ‘guest post by’ -site.pinterest.com.” The results reveal four articles from four sites that use the words “college prep” and “guest post by.” You can add those sites to your outreach tracker.
Finally, you can list sites relevant to your niche that didn’t appear in the earlier searches.
TIP: Not all sites that accept guest articles say so on their website.
3. Niche edits
A niche edit, sometimes referred to as a link insert, is a technique that adds a link to existing content. The key to success is finding relevant articles on high-quality sites and pitching your content as a valuable addition to those articles.
You can use a similar process to the Google guest post search. Input a broad keyword for your targeted keyword, then tell it you don’t want the targeted keyword in the title. If the entire article is about your targeted keyword, your chances of getting the publisher to include a link to a similar article are low.
Here’s an example from one of our client’s that sought to make niche edits for the keyword “soft skills.”
“Organizational development” soft skills employee training -intitle:”soft skills”
Soft skills employee training -intitle:”soft skills” organizations
It led to an added link for “soft skills” in this article — “Employee Development,” which includes the header, “What are the benefits of employee development for an organization?”
You can do several searches, modifying your search operators each time to see what sites and content appears. Think of multiple angles to broaden the potential sites that publish content with your targeted or a related keyword.
After you’ve crafted a list of high-quality prospects, it’s time for outreach.
Niche edits might be the hardest of the three strategies to achieve because they’re not as clear of a win-win situation as the other two (repairing broken links and publishing new content).
Your email pitch can make or break your niche-edit campaign. It must convince the publisher that your content provides so much value that they will want to take an extra step with content they’ve already completed.
Here are some tips to craft a link-earning email pitch:
Start by mentioning something about them. It could be something you like about their website or the article you’re targeting. You want them to know you’ve explored their site and read the article. But don’t overdo it. A simple compliment or sentence about how you found the article helpful should suffice.
Introduce your content and mention how it can help their audience. Be concise and convincing, but don’t oversell it.
Go one step further and point to a section or sentence where you think your content might be a good fit. This will help them see where your content can add value and link to it.
Get linking
Though contextual link building may seem challenging to execute, it can bring great rewards. Follow these tips and strategies, and your valuable content will get more attention from external sites and eventually Google rankings where it deserves to be.
All tools mentioned in this article are identified by the author. If you have a tool to suggest, please tag CMI on social.
Want more content marketing tips, insights, and examples? Subscribe to workday or weekly emails from CMI.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
What the heck should you do with social media in marketing these days?
Content and marketing teams have been so wrapped around the AI axle for the last 18 months that many haven’t reacted to the fundamental changes in social media.
Those headlines and the more granular changes behind them should prompt marketers to shift how they use social media platforms for business success. Let’s look at what’s going on under the hood of social media.
Social media is growing differently
Social media platforms devalue general news of any kind. Instead, they try to keep their audiences engaged in walled gardens.
Similar Web data shows traffic to news sites from Facebook and X took a steep dive as of October 2023. Casual sharing, posting, and commenting are down as well. The reasons span the gamut from the “dismantling” of Twitter into X and concerns about misinformation to overall user fatigue.
Research shows people still spend at least two hours per day consuming social media. But among the top apps and websites, social media ranks behind direct messaging and text messaging.
Sharing no longer happens on public-facing social media channels. The “social” of social media now happens in communities where friends share content in private groups, texting groups, and one-to-one messaging.
Social media, as I’ve said before, is simply becoming media.
Followers matter less
To varying degrees, all the platforms have copied elements of the TikTok algorithm when displaying content to their audiences. These changes seem positive.
Instagram recently introduced substantial changes to its Reels algorithm that buck its longstanding embrace of accounts that aggregate content. It will now detect whether the post is original or aggregated (i.e., reposted) and favor the original content. It also may remove content from aggregators from the recommendations feature.
More interestingly, Instagram also changed its algorithm to surface smaller creators. That should be good news for social media marketers who operate accounts with smaller followings. Your content will surface more and pierce the noise of those with huge followings.
But more disruptive implications about the value of social media arrive with these changes. The biggest seismic shift happens around the importance of followers and community.
Many platforms have introduced more “for you” content in their feeds (a la TikTok). They no longer prioritize content from the people or brands someone follows. Instead, they optimize the content feed by the user’s actual behavior and content consumption, favoring content from “new” creators rather than those whom the user follows.
Put simply: Social media platforms now de-emphasize the value of a large following (or audience), which belies what brands have worked on for years. The new focus means every post must compete to be seen.
What does this mean for marketers?
All these social media platform changes can leave you feeling overwhelmed and confused about how to adjust your marketing and content strategy. Let’s walk through some of the biggest disruptions together.
Public communities are mostly dead
Many brands still attempt to use their social media marketing to create a public community with their customers. While some outlier brands could accomplish this, most will struggle. Instead, marketers can better create communities through more private distribution, such as a Slack channel, a proprietary community platform, or event-based programs.
Newsfeeds are completely dead
All the platforms de-emphasize the nature of articles and links, and audiences are decreasing their participation. If you fill your social media feed with content from your blog, a series of links to promote your latest news or links to your brand’s new products, you will struggle to find any value in this era of social media.
Feed your owned media strategy
“So, wait a minute,” you might ask. “If followers don’t matter and we’re supposed to entertain, engage, or educate within the platform itself, how do we build an audience on our owned media?”
A social media platform shift prompted the trend of a paid content network rather than an organic one. Consensus concluded organic reach had died. To help your content find the audience, you had to pay to promote posts or ads.
But there’s more opportunity now that algorithms offer possible organic discovery through “for you” recommendations (and there’s less competition from random pictures of breakfast, sunsets, and news sharing).
The strategic marketing goal remains the same: Pull social media audiences into your owned media ecosystem so that they can become addressable audiences to your brand.
You can accomplish that goal in creative ways. Look at your social media content as a means of creating value in that moment. Then, ask these audiences if they’d like to engage further to visit, contact, or subscribe.
‘Eventize’ your content
One of the biggest trends I see in gathering better traffic from social media is to “eventize” your content. Create content that is ephemeral or has a short half-life. Focus on enhancing the visitor’s opportunity to act the moment they see the post rather than banking on longer-term engagement.
Humanize your content
Audiences still value human faces and names more than brands and product names. Now, exceptions exist, but if you don’t know if your brand is an exception, it isn’t. Brands working with influencers and engaging their employees can more widely disseminate their social media content. In some cases, this strategy can beat the company’s channel on the social media platform.
Social media can remain an important piece of your integrated marketing mix. But to be successful in 2024, focus on creating engaging, ephemeral content that captures attention in the moment and drives users to owned media channels for further interaction.
It’s your story. Tell it well.
Subscribe to workday or weekly CMI emails to get Rose-Colored Glasses in your inbox each week.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
Your lack of social media guidelines could discourage employees from becoming brand advocates and even applicants from joining your company. I speak from personal experience.
When I first joined LinkedIn, my profile said I worked for a “Bay area Fortune 500 financial services company” instead of noting its name and linking to the company page. Soon, many of my colleagues’ profiles said the same thing.
You see, our organization was trying to figure out its social media policies within the confines of a highly regulated industry. It blocked access to any website with a social component — including YouTube. When employees were asked about using social media on their own time and devices, the company’s initial guidance was they didn’t want them using social media at all.
Well, that wasn’t going to happen. Instead, thanks to lengthy conversations with my legal and compliance colleagues, I hit upon a solution: I scrubbed any mention of my employer in all my public profiles.
Why employee social advocacy matters
Why do employee brand advocates matter? Because people are increasingly wary and distrustful of brand and government claims and prefer input from their peers.
The Edelman Trust Barometer underscored this message. In its 2024 iteration, it found people were concerned that the media (64%) and business leaders (61%) are purposely trying to mislead people by saying things they know are false or gross exaggerations.
This shift in trust becomes a competitive advantage for brands that cultivate thousands of eager brand ambassadors, but this requires documented employee social media guidelines to not only allow your team members to thrive on social but to protect your brand from legal risks.
Take a responsible approach to workplace social media policies
Whether you like it or not, employees will talk about your company on social media, and it’s their federally protected right to do so.
Many businesses react with fear and develop extensive restrictions around what employees can or cannot say online in their company social media guidelines. They require employees to agree to a list of don’ts and end the conversation.
However, innovative companies increasingly prioritize employee advocacy, seeing both employee retention and bottom-line advantages. A recent case study showed tech leader Salesforce activated about a third of its 73,000-person employee base as brand advocates, resulting in a 2,000% ROI on its social ambassador program.
Social media guidelines for employees serve as guardrails for online activity and show employees you want them to be engaged online, helping to build on your company’s social media success.
Follow the essentials for your guidelines
The length of your company’s social media guidelines is less important than their accessibility and quality. Ensure any employee can understand the guidelines. Create one-pagers or cheat sheets for specific activities, like training or unique campaigns.
At a minimum, all employee social media guidelines should include the following elements:
Brand’s purpose on social media — Document the brand’s purpose for each social platform. Whether for recruitment, content amplification, customer advocacy, etc., the guidelines should explain why the company exists on each channel and how employees can support that purpose.
Company style guide — List any trademark needs and spelling of company products and services so that employees correctly present the brand. You should also define your brand personality and any language considerations.
Access to shared brand asset folder — Create a central folder employees can access for company logos, how-to’s, shared FAQs, branded profile headers for social sites, and more. Consider creating a list of preferred hashtags and their purposes, especially with company hashtags such as Dell’s #IWorkForDell or IBM’s #ProudIBMer. Keeping this information in one place increases the likelihood that employees will stay on brand.
The stakes can be high for enterprises when employees use their social media channels in unapproved ways, and savvy companies know the importance of developing extensive social media guidelines.
Get ahead of potential issues and address these all-too-common social media pitfalls in your employee social media guidelines:
Legal concerns — Make it incredibly clear at the start of all projects what is and is not approved for social sharing. Also, while many people differ on the use of “views-are-my-own” disclaimers, large enterprises should discuss whether they want employees to have such a clause on their accounts.
Unsanctioned brand accounts — When your company spans your country or the globe, employees may create localized accounts. Address this by listing all official corporate accounts in your social guidelines and asking team members to use only those for brand-related matters.
Consider having a social media request form that allows employees to suggest new accounts or content. This way, their enthusiasm can be better harnessed with a conversation versus an email request to delete the rogue account.
Departed employees — As employees move on to different career opportunities, they may forget to update their profiles to note they are no longer with your company. This could cause confusion when they start posting content about their new companies or when customers search LinkedIn for staff. While you cannot force individuals to change their social account information, you can at least make the request a part of the exit or off-boarding process.
Enterprise social media guidelines examples
Many brands make their company’s social media guidelines public. These examples can serve as great models for your company’s guidelines. Keep in mind, though, that these are just public-facing documents. The organizations may have more expansive guides for internal audiences.
Each of these three examples has unique elements, but they boil down to address the same point — not everyone knows how to act online.
Stanford University: These extensive guidelines have a small yet informative section on an individual employee’s social media use. The main points cover how employees are responsible for what they say on social and how they should think about how their social engagement may affect the organization’s reputation. While this may seem general, the policy also links to the university’s information security and privacy policies. What truly sets this social policy apart is its thoroughness in discussing using social on behalf of the organization.
IBM: What stands out in this guide (no longer available on IBM’s public site) is that employees are clearly encouraged to engage in industry conversations online and have their own blogs. “Bring your own personality to the forefront” is part of the company’s guidelines, with the necessary caveat to not use offensive or harmful language.
Dell: This policy is distilled into five easy-to-digest bullet points for employees and directs them to the Dell social media team email for additional questions. It tackles the issue of rogue accounts, noting that an account created for Dell may be considered Dell property and that accounts cannot be created to ride on the success of Dell’s corporate accounts.
Educate employees on the social media guidelines
As part of every employee’s onboarding, a member of the social team should discuss the company’s social media policies and guidelines and help any new hires set up their channels in a brand-relevant way.
To maintain and grow awareness of the company’s social media policies, get creative:
Host lunch-and-learn conversations. These informational meetings allow employees to enjoy their food while you discuss topics relevant to your company’s social media channels. If your company has multiple offices, hold a video meeting. Record the conversation to provide a playback file for those who cannot attend.
Post social media office hours. If employees are hesitant to ask questions during meetings or regular day-to-day operations, give them a safe place for in-depth, one-on-one time by hosting regular social media office hours. This strategy establishes your social team as a helpful resource rather than the brand police.
Send social media amplification emails. Email employees regularly to share content you want them to amplify. Include suggested text for easy plug-and-play for busy employees. You cannot rely solely on email, though, as internal emails have an average open rate of 76%.
Create a social media Slack or Teams channel. If Slack or Microsoft Teams is where work happens in your organization, share all your social content there as well.
Hold employee meetings. Create regular update/reminder slides employees can include in presentation decks during company all-hands, all-team meetings, or individual group or office meetings.
Use the company intranet. An intranet can be a great resource for increasing productivity and distributing information to employees. Share updates to the social media policies and use it as a hub for all your social resources.
Develop training videos. With more internal resources available, enterprises can explore using video to educate employees on topics related to social. Research has found that viewers retain 95% of a message when they watch it in a video compared to just text, so the time commitment to create a video could pay off in message retention.
Continue success with employee social media guidelines
In addition to the core company social media guidelines, ensure that employees can access the brand voice so they can mirror your brand’s language and engage with content that you think best emulates what you want to see your employees doing on social media platforms.
Ongoing monitoring and education are the keys to getting the most out of your guidelines. But with an eager brand advocate base on your side, you’re more likely to see the social ROI you need to achieve your goals.
Updated from a January 2020 article.
Bring your team to Content Marketing World this October for inspiration, ideas, and actionable advice on developing and executing a strategy that drives profit for your business. Group rates are available. Register today.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
Content marketing teams rarely talk about efficiency.
You frequently discuss quality, conversions, and brand alignment. Your primary concerns center around the awesomeness of what you do and the results of that work. Any talk of systems and processes usually takes a back seat.
However, for more marketing teams, the system conversation is moving into the front seat because a system can direct you to do the right work at the right time with as little waste as possible.
We at AgileSherpas did a 2024 survey (registration required) that found huge growth in understanding the need for marketing process optimization and facilitating business agility in general. Eighty-six percent of marketing organizations say they plan to transition some or all their teams to Agile ways of working this year.
Note: CMI uses Agile (capital A) to describe the process and agile (lowercase a) to describe the general idea of moving quickly and easily.
Interest in Agile marketing is one thing, but a full-scale transformation can overwhelm. To help, consider these most popular Agile practices. You can apply them quickly together or separately and boost your marketing efficiency to maximize its awesomeness.
1. Plan in iterations
The planning process is often far from efficient, especially in larger organizations. Mapping content marketing execution in excruciating detail for the coming year is an old-school and still widely adopted approach. It’s one of the main culprits of inefficiency.
In theory, a year-long plan gives direction to your content marketing strategy, but in practicality, it breaks down under changing circumstances. When unplanned barriers appear, most (if not all) elements of the original plan must be changed to account for the new reality.
Not only does this create chaos and uncertainty within your team, but revising your plan documentation generates administrative overhead. It wastes time that could have been spent on execution.
Innovative marketing leaders experiment with an Agile approach to plan in short-term iterations. They create a shared understanding around the long-term goal while allowing the team to figure out the details along the way. Whereas traditional planning is done annually, rigid, and can become irrelevant, planning in iterations is short term, flexible, and relevant.
How an Agile-based plan works
To illustrate the difference between traditional and iterative approaches, let’s use a typical content marketing plan.
Traditionally, a content marketing plan would document 12 months of content assets to create and deliver, including titles, target keywords, campaigns to support, publishing dates, authors, and as many other details as you could collect.
In Agile planning, you start with the desired results from your content marketing strategy for the year (e.g., generate 2,000 marketing-qualified leads from the blog). Then, you anticipate the effort to achieve those results (e.g., publish three SEO-optimized blog posts per week and actively promote each for three weeks on social media).
In Agile, you don’t waste time detailing the blog posts and their titles, nor do you schedule posting dates on the social media calendar. Instead, after agreeing on the deliverables, you lay out the specifics for the next month’s blog posts and keep your social media calendar flexible. If something happens that makes the planned content irrelevant, you can respond swiftly and act decisively.
Repeat this process monthly to remain agile and account for changing circumstances.
2. Implement user stories
When embracing flexible planning, you should ensure that the content benefits your target audience and provides real value at the right time. Focus your efforts on creating impact, not just creating as much new content as possible.
Agile content marketers rely on user stories that capture the target audience, what they’re searching for, and what they intend to do with the information.
You can capture the key guidelines for creating impactful content by filling in the blanks in this single sentence:
As a __________, I would like ________ so I can _________.
If you targeted marketers, the user story might read like this:
As a marketer, I would like to read an article about global marketing successes so I can apply them to my own local marketing campaigns.
Applying user stories before working on any piece of content enables you to boost the quality of the work and save time by deprioritizing work that isn’t valuable at all or at that moment.
3. Improve estimation
Humans are terrible at realistically estimating the time and effort to complete a project.
Realistic estimates are foundational to content marketing efficiency and easily overlooked when teams focus on releasing new and more work to keep stakeholders satisfied.
However, consistently biting off more than you can chew leads to roadblocks and burnout that can plummet efficiency in the long term.
To avoid that and facilitate content marketing efficiency, you can follow some fun Agile ways of estimating work. These focus on effort rather than required time, as traditional estimates do.
For example, use T-shirt sizing as an analogy. It will identify a high-level, comparative estimate. Here’s a simple scale to illustrate how this approach can be applied:
XS: Write a social media post.
S: Prepare a newsletter.
M: Create a 500-word landing page.
L: Draft 2,000-word blog post.
XL: Create a downloadable e-book.
When you size up your work this way, it becomes easier to mind your capacity and be realistic about how much you can tackle within a time frame. It also lets you prioritize work more effectively and boost efficiency in delivering great content marketing.
4. Visualize your work process
Even flawless planning doesn’t guarantee perfect execution by the team to deliver the desired results. Unfortunately, ad-hoc tasks often derail the planned work and require marketers to multitask, increasing the time it takes to finish everything.
By visualizing the process step by step, you shed light on your team’s day-to-day activities and draw attention to undesired scope creep, which usually goes unnoticed or distracts from lower-priority ad hoc tasks.
Workflow visualization is fundamental in Agile methodology because it provides transparency and creates a bridge between your team and other marketing stakeholders.
You can put a Kanban board in an accessible place in your office or set up a digital project board with a tool like Trello. When work-in-progress and backlog assignments are visible to everyone in the company, prioritization becomes easier.
Frequently updating the visualization on your team board also gives an instant progress report. It eliminates the need to schedule unnecessary meetings with stakeholders or prepare long status updates. Also, if an ad-hoc request arrives, you can quickly compare its importance to current assignments and act accordingly to keep your efficiency high.
Visualizing the workflow also allows everyone to see the big picture, which helps them focus their efforts on where they have the most impact.
5. Limit work in progress
Humans are good at starting new work but not so good at pushing it past the finish line. That’s why marketers often find themselves working on five or more projects simultaneously. Despite everybody working like crazy, little gets done.
To put it simply, the more you try to do at the same time, the longer it all takes. This Kanban board without work-in-progress limits illustrates how projects get stuck in copy and design phases, with few making it to the publish stage and even fewer to the done stage.
To make matters worse, switching from one context to another frequently results in poorer quality work and requires additional time to rework the less-than-desirable deliverables.
To avoid these problems, marketing leaders embracing Agile have found a simple solution: Limit the amount of work in progress at the same time.
This answer might seem counterintuitive because of the cult of multitasking. However, limiting work in progress (WIP) allows individuals to boost productivity significantly by protecting their time. On the team level, it prevents distractions and allows members to quickly finish what was started. It forces the team to work to reduce the waiting time for tasks in the process.
In this Kanban board image, when work-in-progress limits are implemented, eight projects are in the done phase, with only five in the copy phase, three in design, and two in publish.
When you start a task, then put it on hold to work on another assignment, then go to another assignment — and repeat this several times — multiple work items are not progressing. As a result, they end up taking a lot more time to be delivered.
Applying WIP limits allows team members to deliver value more often at a higher quality because they can focus their efforts and avoid switching contexts frequently.
6. Keep your meetings short
Marketing professionals are prone to attend a lot of meetings even when they don’t provide much value. Their role’s importance is equated to the number of calendar invites. It leaves little time to sit down and focus on value-adding work.
In fact, long meetings without a clear agenda are among the biggest time wasters. They easily go off track and produce little to no value for the organization while hindering the efficiency of the team.
Forward-thinking marketing leaders host daily stand-up meetings. Forty-four percent of those surveyed in the 2024 report say they use this Agile practice. These gatherings are short, on point, and on foot … literally.
The stand-up meeting efficiently gathers your team to communicate progress and workflow impediments. As the name suggests, everybody stands, which contributes to the brevity of the conversation.
During the meeting, with the project board in view, everybody answers three questions:
What did I do yesterday?
What am I planning to do today?
Am I blocked by anything?
You can use different questions. At AgileSherpas, we focus more on collaboration and team spirit:
What’s my priority for the day?
Are there challenges that I’m facing and/or need help with?
Are there big wins that I want to share with the team?
Are there any dependencies that I need to flag?
What else does the team need to know?
The goal is to meet for less than 15 minutes. If further discussion is necessary, the affected team members can discuss it after the stand-up meeting. If the concern is a big issue that requires a dedicated meeting, it is scheduled for another time.
7. Do frequent retrospectives
You should dedicate a separate meeting to revisit your team’s work process frequently and identify room for improvement. This meeting is known as retrospective or retro.
The team members discuss only three fundamental topics:
What should you start doing?
What should you stop doing?
What should you keep doing?
Retrospectives are extremely important for continuously improving the performance of your team, sharing new knowledge, and encouraging innovation.
You can hold retros in cadences determined by how your team works. For example, if you’re practicing Scrum, the retrospective should happen after each sprint. If you’re working in a continuous delivery workflow, schedule a weekly or biweekly retro. The goal is to frequently how you work and inspire process ownership within your team.
TIP: Stakeholders and company leaders should not be invited to retros. To facilitate the desired spirit of innovation and participation, team members should feel safe to open up about problems they experience and propose creative solutions without worrying about ruffling anyone’s feathers outside the team.
Introduce other business departments to Agile
Marketing is a linchpin function in departments like sales, finance, and human resources. Even if you apply all the Agile practices in this article, you can’t expect efficient collaboration with other teams if they don’t understand how you work.
When marketing follows Agile practices, it can unlock the process for the entire organization. You can introduce other departments when you collaborate on projects. You can share the value you see from implementing practices like workflow visualization, limiting WIP, and others. Then, you will contribute not only to improving marketing efficiency but the efficiency of the whole business.
Putting marketing agility into action
Adopting Agile marketing doesn’t have to be an intimidating process. By planning differently, visualizing your work on a Kanban board, limiting the amount of work in progress, and managing the process with stand-ups and retrospectives, you stand to gain huge process efficiencies.
These straightforward steps can help you join the ranks of Agile marketers who already enjoy efficiency, quality, and business alignment.
Updated from a September 2022 article.
All tools mentioned in this article were suggested by the author. If you’d like to suggest a tool, share the article on social media with a comment.
Register to attend Content Marketing World in San Diego. Use the code BLOG100 to save $100. Can’t attend in person this year? Check out the Digital Pass for access to on-demand session recordings from the live event through the end of the year.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
An old saying goes that marketers only worry about two things — the logo and the Pantone color.
Well, the entry of digital technology 25 years ago certainly changed all that.
But has it gone too far?
New research indicates that in a few years, marketers will do only one thing — manage their technology. That’s right — no more ads, no more content — just 100% pushing buttons, reading dashboards, and automating everything.
Yikes! They said AI would put marketers into the matrix, but it might just be martech in general.
So, what are you supposed to do?
We asked Robert Rose, CMI’s chief strategy advisor, for his take. Watch this video or read on:
Marketers have been wrapped around the axle of marketing technology for the last two decades. More, more, and yet more technology has entered marketing operations. The average marketing department now resembles a NASA control room rather than a place to create powerful content that changes the behavior of your intended customer.
In fact, this week, Scott Brinker released his famous Marketing Technology Landscape report for 2024 (registration required). It contains over 14,000 providers — 27% more than last year’s 11,000 vendors.
The report says marketing departments use fewer apps — most average a reduction of 6% to 10%. But even with those decreases, the number of applications in use still boggles the mind. Small businesses average 162 apps, and companies with over 10,000 employees use 650 marketing technology applications in 2024.
Surprise from The CMO Survey
But The CMO Survey reveals more pointedly technology’s fundamental disruption of marketing.
The 32nd edition, released last month, looks at marketing spending, performance, leadership, and, of course, technology, especially the growth of generative AI.
Here’s what didn’t surprise me.
In most businesses, AI still isn’t a fundamental piece of martech. Only 10% of companies use large language models. Another 39% have never used these tools. The remaining half (51%) is either evaluating or piloting these tools.
Those findings reflect what I’ve observed over the last eight months or so: Most businesses don’t know how to integrate generative AI and remain in experimental mode.
This surprised me: Marketing as a percentage of the company budget is around 10%, which continues the downward trend seen over the last two years. However, the marketing budget as a percentage of revenue increased to 10.1% from 9.2% in fall 2023.
What does that mean? In most companies, marketing budgets grew more slowly than in other departments. They went up, but not as much as in other business functions.
But this really surprised me: Marketing technology now accounts for 20% of the entire marketing budget. And marketers expect that share to grow to 31% over the next five years.
Let that sink in.
Technology spending is expected to grow at a compound rate of 9%, yet budgets will grow at a compound rate of 8%.
CMOs seem to indicate that every dime (plus a few quarters) of marketing budget increases will go to marketing technology over the next five years.
Tech strategy mistake
Of course, this won’t turn out to be true. Still, the trend remains troubling.
Too often, marketing chases technology as a cure-all for a strategy. Marketing departments typically look to the newest technology to add capabilities that will become their strategic approach. They’re less likely to look at their strategic approach and then figure out if the newest technology can help them execute it.
The numbers from The CMO Survey are a clear warning sign for marketers.
But it’s not a warning to stop acquiring new technology. Marketing is changing and evolving, and technologies exist to help you scale better and work more efficiently and effectively. It’s a warning sign to reorient your marketing systems.
So, what do I mean by marketing systems?
Most marketing technology is designed for one job function in one specific part of marketing. The demand-gen team spends its time on the marketing automation system and analytics. The web team spends its time on CMS and web analytics. The email team spends its time on the email newsletter solution. The sales team spends its time on the CRM system, and on and on it goes.
Is it any wonder that when companies look at generative AI, they produce hundreds of use cases, all siloed into their siloed functional requirements?
Make this big ROI move
Take a moment to look at not what you are marketing but how you are marketing as a business. Are you all working in technology silos? Or are you collaborating across integrated processes and workflows that transcend the technology tools?
Think about it like this.
According to The CMO Survey, marketing teams use about half (56%) of the technology solutions they purchase. That means that 44% of marketing’s technology spend goes unused.
So, if you believe the finding that 20% of all marketing budgets go to technology, roughly 9% of the marketing budget is going down the proverbial toilet. What would you do with a 9% budget increase? You’d probably make good use of it.
These numbers serve as a warning — or a promise — that getting your marketing systems (operations) to collaborate is worth it.
It might just be the biggest ROI initiative you can do.
Join us for ContentTECH Summit, a free digital event on May 15-16, 2024, where industry leaders will share expertise to help you unlock the potential of content technology in your organization. Register today.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
We should rename generative AI. I suggest calling it “expressional AI.”
The dictionary defines “generative” as “having the ability to produce, originate, or reproduce something.” That’s an inaccurate description of generative AI because it suggests that it originates an idea.
“Expressional” is defined as “relating to or of expression, especially in language, the face, or the arts. Expressional can also mean embodying a conception or emotion.” This definition more accurately describes what AI does. It expresses an idea based on a prompt given by someone.
That distinction is crucial now as generative AI shifts expectations of people’s value.
Don’t get buried by mediocrity
The trope of generative AI becoming some Skynet evil overlord is stale. Generative AI is more likely to bury everyone in monetized content mediocrity.
Last year, Amazon instituted a three-per-day upload limit for self-publishing after an influx of AI-generated books. Think about that. Three books a day? It doesn’t seem Amazon takes the problem seriously. What author needs a daily limit on how many books can be published on the platform?
Some experts warn AI will generate 90% of all content on the internet within a couple of years. I don’t know if that number is valid, but even 10% is concerning.
And for those in marketing and content, you couldn’t pick a worse time for technology to enable everyone to express every idea they have.
You’re already dealing with too much commoditized content crowding your audiences and filling attention spans. You’re already facing more pressure from the leaders of your organizations to produce more content that gets more attention from persuaded buyers or engaged customers.
You’re exhausted.
And now, generative AI stands ready to help people express even more words and pictures.
Leading teams, guiding clients, and working with colleagues all feel different in a world where people think AI powers everything. It’s not all doom and gloom, but it’s not all unicorns and rainbows, either. So, it’s hard to get excited about AI when it feels like homework.
Let’s be clear. Right now, AI in content and marketing is the sexiest thing that most companies are not doing. Really.
Most businesses remain in experimental mode or have formed a skunkworks team to firm up use cases and figure out what “good enough” means.
But new products still emerge. And it seems like generative AI is integrated into every content creation tool.
Sometimes, it feels wrong to use it, but it also feels like you’re falling behind if you don’t.
The quality of ideas still matters
I’ve noticed a weird trend with AI. It’s as if everybody has lowered their expectations to match the capability of the latest tool.
I recently chatted over a beer with a talented and successful screenwriter friend. He told me his writers room uses AI tools to generate new ideas for shows or episodes.
“The ideas it generates aren’t great, but it gives us a great starting point,” he said.
I’ve heard that sentiment from marketing folks as well.
I told him, “It gets you faster to all the bad ideas you would have all had in a brainstorming meeting.”
He laughed and said, “Yeah, that’s kind of it.”
Is that valuable? Maybe. In a world where time is money, getting to the bad ideas more quickly could be valuable. But a comprehensive bad-idea board doesn’t sound like a particularly compelling result.
More troubling is that some marketing and content teams don’t distinguish the bad from the good. They equate generative AI’s speed with creativity — and they see one (or more) of those ideas as being “different” (because they hadn’t iterated it yet). They act on it immediately. Put simply, they value the time to the idea more than the idea itself.
You need to do the opposite.
You get what you expect
Consider the struggle a client shared with me recently regarding a writer on his team who continually produces work that “just isn’t good enough” in the client’s view. He told me, “I’m not sure what to do.”
I asked if he’d considered raising expectations. My client seemed incredulous. “No,” he said. “I’m just trying to get him to first base. If I can get a basic piece out of him, I’ll count it as a win.”
And then came the punchline.
“So, I’ve got him using ChatGPT. I’ve been trying to manage his expectations about where he fits in.”
The term “manage expectations” has been used for decades. Over the last 25 years, every firm I’ve worked with says it focuses on managing others’ expectations about delivering great work.
I’ve rarely seen that phrase mean raising expectations about what to deliver. It usually means lowering expectations (theirs or yours).
In other words, if you think you or a team member will surpass expectations, you stay silent. Then, when it’s done, you can surprise and delight others. Or if you expect to underwhelm, you don’t say you expect great things because you’ll disappoint others if you don’t deliver.
Search Google for best practices around managing expectations, and you’ll find some variation of this advice: “Communicate your intentions clearly.”
That’s all well and good. But before you manage expectations for your team, boss, client, or customer, ask: “Am I communicating my expectations, or am I trying to lower theirs?”
My client lowered expectations for his writer by suggesting generative AI would help him produce better articles.
Greater expectations
Think about when you’re excited about an innovative idea for you or the team to accomplish. Your expectations are off-the-chart high.
But what do you do when you take the idea to management? You dampen that excitement. You manage their expectations, so you’ll be sure to meet them. Have you ever said (even to yourself), “Let’s underpromise and overdeliver?”
Exceeding expectations is a flawed way to deliver a service. It’s likely to prompt a response like the one Nigel Tufnel received in Spinal Tap when he points out that his amplifier goes to 11: “Why don’t you just make 10 louder?”
If you need to exceed expectations, someone’s expectations aren’t high enough.
Aim for the home run
A psychological phenomenon is at work. The Pygmalion effect involves setting high expectations for people to propel them to better results.
Despite the challenges you face (and maybe because of them), you must adjust expectations for your and your team’s performance. With your team, you can:
Reprioritize projects and deadlines (delegate or extend due dates as needed).
Assess the quality of your work, especially the details needed for these projects.
Balance the work across the team to account for personal stress levels.
But the one thing you shouldn’t do? Lower your expectations.
Expressional AI is probably OK
That brings me back to why I want to rename generative AI as expressional AI.
Now and for the foreseeable future, generative AI is not generating ideas. It’s not expressing the best content based on your idea. It is expressing the most probable content based on your idea.
Generative (or rather expressional) AI is OK. Occasionally, it may be good. But don’t lower your expectations by rationalizing, “This is what state-of-the-art technology gives us now.”
It may help you express the most probable ideas faster. But it won’t generate or express the best ideas for you.
Is that client struggling with an underperforming writer? I advised him not to look at AI as the answer and challenged him to set the highest expectations.
I said, “Instead of telling this writer you’re trying to get him to first base, why not tell him you expect a home run — and you need him to come up with the best ideas?
“Maybe he only gets a base hit, but at least you both know that was his best.”
Align expectations with reality so everybody aims for 10. You don’t have to hit 11. But you should achieve the highest level you can.
Next time you find yourself managing expectations, check whether you’re communicating your expectations or lowering theirs.
When you raise expectations to match your own, I expect you’ll get more of what you want.
Subscribe to workday or weekly CMI emails to get Rose-Colored Glasses in your inbox each week.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
In the immortal words of Britney Spears, “Oops, they did it again.”
No, we’re not talking about the US government approving a TikTok divestiture. It’s possible, but so remote that it won’t stop people from investing every dime in it.
We’re talking about Google’s most recent oops. Last week, they delayed the deprecation of the third-party cookie for yet another year.
So, we turned to CMI’s chief strategy advisor, Robert Rose, who had fallen for Google’s proclamation that 2024 is the end of third-party cookies for his take. Watch this video or read on:
Yes, I fell for their nonsense. I thought they were serious when they launched cookie removal for some Chrome users in a trial. But Google seems determined to make me look dopey.
When I think of it, my relationship with Google is like Britney’s song. “They play with my heart … got lost in the game. They said, ‘You think I’m in love … I’m not that innocent.’”
Well, let’s get to their excuse this time and what it means for marketers.
Google postpones cookies’ demise
If you have been following along, the update on the “disappearing” third-party cookie is that it’s not really disappearing.
Last week, Google — for the third time in as many years — delayed the death of the third-party cookie in its Chrome browser. And once again, complicated the ad industry’s move away from surveillance-based programmatic advertising.
In The Privacy Sandbox, Google writes that it has “recognized that there are ongoing challenges related to reconciling divergent feedback from the industry, regulators, and developers, and will continue to engage closely with the entire ecosystem.”
In other words, everybody’s pissed because they think what Google produces is too self-serving. So — spoiler alert — Google hopes to do it in 2025.
Given where they are now, that’s very unlikely.
Complaints and revenue rise
Last Friday, the Competition and Markets Authority (CMA) let loose on the Google update efforts. The UK governmental organization acts as a watchdog of Google’s Privacy Sandbox. It tries to figure out how much of the third-party cookie deprecation will benefit Google more than anybody else. So, they’ve had lots and lots to say over the years of Google’s update efforts.
Most recently, the CMA update listed almost 80 concerns, about double the number it shared just a few months ago. Its concerns center primarily on what seems like Google’s finagling of third-party deprecation so it can keep the first-party data within its ecosystem and use it how it wants.
Keep in mind that Alphabet, Google’s parent company, also announced last week that it crushed its earnings. Revenue is up, and the company has distributed its first dividend. Advertising revenue across their ecosystem, especially from YouTube, drove that success.
So, Google wants to ensure that whatever they do with the third-party cookie doesn’t interfere with how they make their money.
The CMA is saying to put on the brakes. Other advertising groups say, “Hold up, let’s figure this out some more,” and advertisers are eager to stomp on the brakes, too. So, Google is more than willing to pull over to the side of the road and sort it out.
What’s next?
So, what happens? Nothing.
When I last wrote about this, I reported research that found 58% of advertising professionals believed cookie deprecation would be pushed to 2025, and many weren’t doing anything about the planned disappearance.
They were right about the first part.
We could see another two- or three-year delay by Google on third-party cookie deprecation and see surveillance-type advertising continue as a major player for the foreseeable future.
The IAB Tech Lab CEO Anthony Katsur has said, “This delay should not be an excuse for the digital advertising industry to be complacent.”
But it kind of does. It’s clear Google and the industry’s many hurdles mean they won’t be ready next year for the end of third-party cookies.
However, here’s the thing. Media companies aren’t waiting for Google to make the move. They’re quickly securing first-party data to build better data and monetization strategies. They’re moving to cookie-less solutions for advertising. Some brands are starting to adopt more first-party data solutions to ensure their own capabilities are clear.
I’m still a huge fan of getting ready with your own first-party data answers because that’s a smart strategy.
But for the moment, I can’t get the Brittany song out of my head, “It might seem like a crush, but it doesn’t mean that I’m serious, cuz to lose all my senses, that is just so typically me.”
Want more content marketing tips, insights, and examples? Subscribe to workday or weekly emails from CMI.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
The deadline pressure would lessen. The work volume wouldn’t overwhelm. The headache assignment would go away more quickly.
And generative AI only amplifies the stress. It just increases expectations — for both completion time and quality — for your human-written content.
But you can write faster. You can expeditiously deliver content that meets deadlines and delivers what your audience and brand want.
Here’s some help whether you’re writing articles, podcast scripts, or any other content asset:
1. Get organized
If you know where you need to go, you can get there more quickly. That’s why I like to create two Word files, one for the draft and one for the notes.
I label the first file “(TOPIC NAME) – DRAFT.”
At the top of the document, list and answer these questions:
Who will read this piece?
What will they get from this piece?
How will they consume this piece (e.g., company blog post, e-book, guest article)?
Where will they consume this piece (i.e., distribution channel)?
Why is the brand creating this piece?
How will the brand know if this piece is successful?
TIP: Create a template for your notes document so you can pull up the question format every time you start the content process.
By detailing the target audience, brand purpose, format, and metric, you can build your content on a solid foundation.
You also can speed up your writing by organizing the research as you go.
I label this document “(TOPIC NAME) – NOTES.” I typically use a single file, but if I have multiple interviews, I initially create a separate document for each and merge them later into the master notes file.
Label the top of each section (or document) with the source information. If it’s a person, include the name, title, and company. If it’s an online resource, include the URL. Use a format similar to what you’ll use in the article. For example, if you use a hyperlink in the text, list it that way in your notes. That way, you can just cut and paste the information into your draft.
TIP: Don’t forget to list any social handles, company sites, or bio links from the sources if you plan to include them in the content or need to provide them for promotional purposes.
Go through your notes and highlight key quotes or insights. Use the highlight feature, bold the words, or even type asterisks before the helpful quote so it stands out.
When tackling multiple sources or detailed information, I like to organize my notes by subheads or subtopics. Then, I put all the relevant content under each category. Just be sure to include the original source every time you shift the notes to a topical section.
AI assist: Use a generative AI tool to help you organize your notes. For example, input an interview transcript and ask it to give a summary. You could also ask it to break down the interview by topics.
When you record interviews using Zoom, it can create an AI-generated summary. Rev.com, the transcription service, offers a beta test of summary generation. I’ve used both, and they can be helpful in the preliminary stage of organizing my notes by hitting on the key themes and takeaways. I’m sure other AI tools can do this; these are just two I’ve used in my work.
With your research and notes all organized, you’re ready to write, right? Not quite.
2. Create the ‘write’ environment
Before you put your fingers on the keyboard or your voice to the writing recorder, you need to set yourself up for faster success.
Schedule time on your calendar (and schedule something immediately after)
Blocking out time to write not only prevents you from treating writing as an “I’ll-get-to-it-when-I-can” item. It also signals to co-workers and managers that you prioritize writing — and you’re not available for anything else during that time.
But don’t stop at scheduling a writing appointment. Also, schedule a call, meeting, or other must-do activity after your writing time. That creates a real deadline. If you know you must stop writing, you’re more likely to stop agonizing and get it done.
If you want to break down your scheduled time further, consider using a timer. The Marinara Timer (free) lets you do the Pomodoro technique (25-minute segments) or create custom times. The point is to write without stopping until the time is up.
I mix up my timer based on aspects of the writing project. For example, 10 minutes to create a lede or 25 minutes to craft the first section. I realize they’re artificial deadlines, but they help me shape my approach to writing and respect the time I’ve committed to getting the article done.
Minimize the distractions
Your computer screen can be a busy place. Don’t let it overwhelm you. Open only one browser window and add the tabs you need for writing. When I write, I create a tab with the AP Stylebook (paid), another tab for Thesaurus (free), another tab for ChatGPT (free), and an empty Google search screen.
If you need resources that live in your inbox, copy and paste them into a Word document and turn off your email. Otherwise, you’ll pop into your inbox for a file and find five new emails that you’ll just have to read.
Don’t forget to turn your phone to “do not disturb” so only those must-take calls or texts can get through. If you can’t give up your phone, at least turn it face down.
Close your door or put on headphones. If you need noise, pick music that blends with your work. I’m one who needs noise (after years of writing in a newsroom). When I really need to focus, I listen to classical music so I’m not distracted by the lyrics.
TIP: If you work in a space where co-workers or others might stop by, use headphones rather than earbuds. They’re a great visual indicator that will make potential visitors think twice about interrupting you.
3. Get writing
Revisit the answers to the questions added to the top of your DRAFT document to remind yourself about the audience and brand purpose.
Now you’re ready to write.
The key to writing faster? Don’t overthink it. You are not to edit. That is a separate stage in the process.
Not happy with a word choice? Move on. Waiting for creative inspiration to strike for the perfect lede? Realize perfect is impossible and better only happens when you’ve already written something. Unsure of a source’s title? Add six question marks so you make sure to revisit it later. The point? Don’t succumb to potential writing distractions.
Begin with the headline
Write three to five versions. Don’t stress about fitting the target keywords into it or whether it sufficiently grabs the reader’s attention. At this point, just write headlines that set the tone and focus of the article.
Move on to the introduction
Read through your notes to identify the most surprising, fascinating, helpful, or relevant aspect. Consider using that as your lede. Stuck for a great lede? Write “This article is about (TOPIC). You, the audience, will learn (XYZ)” as a placeholder. You can fix it later.
In the introduction, include a nut graph — a sentence or two describing the reason the story is being told now to this audience. This will set the stage for what the reader should expect.
AI assist: Struggling to write an intro and nut graph? Ask the AI tool to help. Share your primary interview or research and ask it to fill in the blanks in the sentence above. Ask it to craft a two-sentence paragraph about what story should be told. It could even help share something fascinating or surprising.
Write your subheads
Go back to your notes and pull your subtopic subheads, or create them now. Read through them a couple of times: (1) Are those the key topics this article should address? (2) Does their order make sense for the story being told?
AI assist: Once you complete the subhead organization, paste what you have into an AI tool and ask it to summarize the article. Also, ask it what topics are missing. Then, ask what, if anything, should be eliminated.
Take time to get this step right as it creates the structure for your content piece. Without a solid structure, you’ll spend a lot of time trying to shore up your argument so it doesn’t fall over.
Fill in below each subhead
Add the relevant details under each section head for each resource you collected. (If you did this in the notes organization stage, you likely just need to cut and paste it into the draft document.)
Write a conclusion or not
Similar to the lede advice, if you have a conclusion in mind based on the content and your call to action, write it. If not, wait to write the ending until you’ve revised the piece.
4. Move on to polishing
Now that your rough draft is complete, shift your mind to the polishing phase. Even if you have an editor, you want to submit content completed in a manner that you consider publishable.
To do that, go back to the beginning (well, almost the beginning).
Read through all the content that comes after the introduction
Take a couple of passes. Does it make sense as a whole? Does each section transition well to the next one?
AI assist: Put the draft into the generative AI tool and ask the same questions. It can help identify areas that you might not see because you’re too close to the material.
Delve into each subhead and the content below it
Does this section pack the biggest punch it can? Does each sentence lead into the next one? Could more specific or descriptive words be used to convey the thought, emotion, etc.? Are the verbs active? Is it easy to read?
Go back to the introduction and conclusion
With a well-executed main body, it’s time to craft a reader-enticing introduction that matches the article’s tone, flow, and narrative.
Now that you have an introduction, you can write (or edit) your conclusion. The best endings tie themselves to the beginning. They may summarize the article’s main points, lead the reader to the next logical step, or leave them inspired.
AI assist: In tandem with your human introduction and conclusion work, paste the original draft with the more generic lede into the AI tool. Ask it to write an introduction. Make sure to describe the kind of introduction you want. Should it be funny? Or should it be direct? What about creating a curiosity gap? Don’t limit yourself to one description. Ask for several variations.
Write a headline
With the article complete, it’s time to pick a headline. Make sure it grabs the reader’s attention AND accurately reflects what the article delivers. If none of the draft headlines fit those requirements, come up with a few more options. (A thesaurus comes in handy here.) Pick the best one for the reader.
AI assist: You can use a headline analyzer tool like CoSchedule (free and paid) to see if your potential headline delivers. You can also ask a generative AI tool like ChatGPT or Google’s Gemini to write a headline (after you paste the article onto the page). If it must include keywords, tell it that. In some cases, the headline results may deliver one that works perfectly. More likely, they can inspire you to create something even better.
You’ll still get writer’s block
I’m not naïve. Even when following these recommendations, you’ll run into writer’s block, delays, and missteps. But you don’t need to throw up your hands waiting for the writing gods to inspire and help you.
You need a plan of attack (i.e., a content marketing and research/resource plan) and a path to follow (i.e., a writing and editing process). Only then will you be in control of your content creation and be able to write effectively faster. And the more you do it, the better you’ll get and show the value of a human professional.
Updated from a March 2020 article.
All tools mentioned in this article were suggested by the author. If you’d like to suggest a tool, share the article on social media with a comment.
Need more guidance to hone your content marketing skills? Enroll in CMI University and get 12-month on-demand access to an extensive curriculum designed to help you do your job more effectively.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
Every editor knows what it feels like to sit exasperated in front of the computer, screaming internally, “It would have been easier if I’d done it myself.”
If your role involves commissioning and approving content, you know that sinking feeling: Ten seconds into reviewing a piece, it’s obvious the creator hasn’t understood (or never bothered to listen to) a damn thing you told them. As you go deeper, your fingertips switch gears from polite tapping to a digital Riverdance as your annoyance spews onto the keyboard. We’ve all been there. It’s why we drink. Or do yoga. Or practice voodoo.
In truth, even your best writer, designer, or audiovisual content creator can turn in a bad job. Maybe they had an off day. Perhaps they rushed to meet a deadline. Or maybe they just didn’t understand the brief.
The first two excuses go to the content creator’s professionalism. You’re allowed to get grumpy about that. But if your content creator didn’t understand the brief, then you, as the editor, are at least partly to blame.
Taking the time to create a thorough but concise brief is the single greatest investment you can make in your work efficiency and sanity. The contrast in emotions when a perfectly constructed piece of content lands in your inbox could not be starker. It’s like the sun has burst through the clouds, someone has released a dozen white doves, and that orchestra that follows you around has started playing the lovely bit from Madame Butterfly — all at once.
Here’s what a good brief does:
It clearly and concisely sets out your expectations (so be specific).
It focuses the content creator’s mind on the areas of most importance.
It encourages the content creator to do a thorough job rather than an “it’ll-do” job.
It results in more accurate and more effective content (content that hits the mark).
It saves hours of unnecessary labor and stress in the editing process.
It can make all the difference between profit and loss.
Arming content creators with a thorough brief gives them the best possible chance of at least creating something fit for purpose — even if it’s not quite how you would have done it. Give them too little information, and there’s almost no hope they’ll deliver what you need.
On the flip side, overloading your content creators with more information than they need can be counterproductive. I know a writer who was given a 65-page sales deck to read as background for a 500-word blog post. Do that, and you risk several things happening:
It’s not worth the content creator’s time reading it, so they don’t.
Even if they do read it, you risk them missing out on the key points.
They’ll charge you a fortune because they’re losing money doing that amount of preparation.
They’re never going to work with you again.
There’s a balance to strike.
There’s a balance to be struck.
Knowing how to give useful and concise briefs is something I’ve learned the hard way over 20 years as a journalist and editor. What follows is some of what I’ve found works well. Some of this might read like I’m teaching grandma to suck eggs, but I’m surprised how many of these points often get forgotten.
Who is the client?
Provide your content creator with a half- or one-page summary of the business:
Who it is
What it does
Whom it services
What its story is
Details about any relevant products and services
Include the elevator pitch and other key messaging so your content creator understands how the company positions itself and what kind of language to weave into the piece.
Who is the audience?
Include a paragraph or two about the intended audience. If a company has more than one audience (for example, a recruitment company might have job candidates and recruiters), then be specific. Even a sentence will do, but don’t leave your content creator guessing. They need to know who the content is for.
What needs to be known?
This is the bit where you tell your content creator what you want them to create. Be sure to include three things:
The purpose of the piece
The angle to lead with
The message the audience should leave with
I find it helps to provide links to relevant background information if you have it available, particularly if the information inspired or contributed to the content idea, rather than rely on content creators to find their own. It can be frustrating when their research doesn’t match or is inferior to your own.
How does the brand communicate?
Include any information the content creators need to ensure that they’re communicating in an authentic voice of the brand.
Tone of voice: The easiest way to provide guidance on tone of voice is to provide one or two examples that demonstrate it well. It’s much easier for your content creators to mimic a specific example they’ve seen, read, or heard than it is to interpret vague terms like “formal,” “casual,” or “informative but friendly.”
Style guide: Giving your content creator a style guide can save you a lot of tinkering. This is essential for visuals but also important for written content if you don’t want to spend a lot of time changing “%” to “percent” or uncapitalizing job titles. Summarize the key points or most common errors.
Examples: Examples aren’t just good for tone of voice; they’re also handy for layout and design to demonstrate how you expect a piece of content to be submitted. This is especially handy if your template includes social media posts, meta descriptions, and so on.
All the elements in a documented brief
Here are nine basic things every single brief requires:
Title: What are we calling this thing? (A working title is fine so that everyone knows how to refer to this project.)
Client: Who is it for, and what do they do?
Deadline: When is the final content due?
The brief itself: What is the angle, the message, and the editorial purpose of the content? Include here who the audience is.
Specifications: What is the word count, format, aspect ratio, or run time?
Submission: How and where should the content be filed? To whom?
Contact information: Who is the commissioning editor, the client (if appropriate), and the talent?
Resources: What blogging template, style guide, key messaging, access to image libraries, and other elements are required to create and deliver the content?
Fee: What is the agreed price/rate? Not everyone includes this in the brief, but it should be included if appropriate.
Depending on your business or the kind of content involved, you might have other important information to include here, too. Put it all in a template and make it the front page of your brief.
Prepare your briefs early
It’s entirely possible you’re reading this, screaming internally, “By the time I’ve done all that, I could have written the damn thing myself.”
But much of this information doesn’t change. Well in advance, you can document the background about a company, its audience, and how it speaks doesn’t change. You can pull all those resources into a one- or two-page document, add some high-quality previous examples, throw in the templates they’ll need, and bam! You’ve created a short, useful briefing package you can provide to any new content creator whenever it is needed. You can do this well ahead of time.
I expect these tips will save you a lot of internal screaming in the future. Not to mention drink, yoga, and voodoo.
This is an update of a January 2019 CCO article.
Get more advice from Chief Content Officer, a monthly publication for content leaders. Subscribe today to get it in your inbox.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
There’s something in the air. In the past week, I’ve been asked more questions about how to measure content marketing than I have in two years.
So, let me welcome you to the wonderful world of content marketing measurement.
I can already hear your response: “I went into content and marketing because there would be no math.”
Well, the good news is that all kinds of tools can help you do the math. The bad news? None of those tools will help you understand what content means for your business.
And here’s the secret to meaningful content marketing measurement: You must convince whoever receives the analysis that content requires specialized insight into the actual numbers.
Put simply, you have to measure things differently from how you’d measure traditional marketing.
Here’s what I mean.
Classic marketing measurement vs. content marketing measurement
Marketing is classically measured by how it shortens the time between a product’s availability and the customer’s purchase (i.e., the efficiency of the buyer’s journey). How many more buyers do you reach than average? What percentage of buyers move onto subsequent stages?
Any improvement in either or both metrics for the same effort and/or budget means you’re spending the budget more efficiently.
In growth companies (like startups), the emphasis may shift toward more customers. In value companies (legacy brands, for example), the focus shifts toward higher conversion.
Inevitably, business leaders want both success measurements.
However, measurement operates differently in content marketing. The objective is to use valuable content to develop a deeper relationship with a broader group of people than immediate buyers. Sometimes, you intentionally slow down the process so that a visitor becomes sufficiently educated to become a buyer. You’re playing the long game — developing a meaningful relationship so that when a person is ready to buy, they view you as a trusted provider.
This is the critical difference. Content marketing measurement assesses the depth and scale of a relationship that may influence the buying process. You measure what your content marketing audiences do that other audiences don’t, showing how these better relationships impact the overall marketing strategy.
And that means you must start your content marketing measurement journey with a shared and well-communicated objective.
Get everybody on the same page
Shared objectives without measurement analytics are visions without direction. Measurement analytics without shared objectives are like having a map but no agreement on where to go.
When you start with a shared objective and an understanding of how you know if you achieve it, you can then define that success with numbers that have a purpose and, more importantly, meaning.
Think of your company as a football team. Your shared goal is to win the game. Everybody knows that you need to score more points than your opponent. But unless you have a shared understanding of how many points result from a field goal or touchdown, no one knows if they’ve scored enough until someone declares the winner. If you’re the loser, it’s too late to change it. If you win, nobody understands why.
What’s the answer?
Align on an objective, not a measurement data point.
Recently, a marketing manager told me his team’s quarterly goal was a 30% increase in web traffic. “Why?” I asked. “Because more traffic equals better marketing,” he replied.
But that’s not necessarily true. If the objective is more high-impact leads, more traffic might be the worst thing to focus on.
That’s why you must design shared objectives in clear, unambiguous terms before selecting the key performance indicators to show what’s working (and what isn’t) on the path to reaching that shared objective.
Too often, marketing leaders set goals and objectives for their teams, while sales leaders establish goals for their teams. Meanwhile, executives set their objectives for the company. But no group has communicated or aligned these objectives with one another. So, the five most important things on marketing’s to-do list differ from the five most important things on sales’ to-do list.
As a marketing vice president recently shared, “The sales team is measured on the value of opportunities that turn into customers. Marketing is measured by the number of leads created. And content marketing is measured by traffic to the blog. That sounds like a match, but it’s not.”
If you don’t have a clearly defined and shared vision for what content marketing success looks like, you can’t measure anything meaningful.
Creating shared success measurement
Once you set a shared objective, you can set up the metrics to define its success.
Objectives and key results (OKRs) have emerged as a useful measurement architecture. OKRs are a fantastic method for measurement that matters because they center on a shared objective.
I prescribe a four-step OKR approach for my clients.
Let’s walk through each step.
Step 1: Set the objective
Once you have a shared objective, you should clearly express how content marketing will contribute to that objective and the time it will take to achieve success.
It might take a quarter, a year, or multiple years to realize the objective, so you might have short- and long-term goals within the larger objective.
TIP: Don’t shy away from setting long-term strategic objectives for fear of marketplace shifts or evolving assumptions. You’re just boxing objectives into a timeframe to understand how quickly you need to change.
Now that you have a shareable strategic objective, you can start defining success.
Step 2: Define success with your key results
Decide which metrics will unambiguously define success. Don’t be afraid to use more than numbers. In many instances, you may measure qualitative impact or capabilities, not just transactions.
For example, key results such as learning a skill or developing a capability might have graded (A, B, C, etc.) key results. Or you may have contextual key results. For example, the objective may be year-long, but the key results reflect quarterly progress.
Just remember the objective is change. These key results define the progress toward that change.
This graphic illustrates the concept of setting your objectives and key results, starting with the statement: “We will (objective) as measured by (key results).”
The objective completes this sentence, “We will accomplish (something).”
That sentence is supported by four types of key results:
Performance key results are unambiguous (i.e., agreed upon) and verifiable results that indicate the objective has been met.
Context key results are aligned by context. For time-based results, for example, you could note the objective is multi-year, and the key result is quarterly.
Learning key results may be enabling but not necessarily performance-based (e.g., learning a skill or developing capability).
Graded key results can also be based on a grade rather than performance (e.g., 50-plus equals an A, and 40 to 50 equals a B).
Keep in mind that OKRs are not KPIs (key performance indicators). The objective and the key results define the desired change, and KPIs equal progress toward that change.
Here’s an objective-setting example. Let’s say the strategic objective is to drive a 25% increase in net new sales in the next year. So, you might come up with an objective for the content marketing approach that says, “We will prompt 10% of all net new sales opportunities in the next year.”
That’s a shareable objective, but it doesn’t define how you’ll achieve that success. So, you need to support it with key results:
Increase new high-quality leads with content by 15%.
Increase conversion rates of free trials by 25%.
Decrease cost-per-thousand advertising rate by 20%.
Now, you’ve defined how the shared objective will relate to profit over cost. That’s the key.
Step 3: Design your KPI metrics
Your key results will most likely combine measurements. In the example above, the first key result specifies high-quality leads. Therefore, you wouldn’t measure the total number of leads; you’d measure the number of leads that matched the targeted opportunity persona.
You’ll have to combine a few metrics to derive that number. These aggregate measurements are the KPIs that indicate progress toward the key results.
That brings you to the final step.
Step 4: Design your analytics
Multiple key results and KPIs naturally require multiple single metrics. At this point, the more transactional nature of measurement — web analytics, conversions, SEO metrics, downloads — becomes important. These numbers (in combination) feed your KPIs, which assess whether your key results are on track.
Design the measurement pyramid
Think of all these steps as forming a pyramid showing what you need to measure and why.
In this image, the single block at the top represents the objective — the shared goal. Below are two key results blocks — the unambiguous investment values achieved from the shared purpose.
These rest on a row of three KPIs — the unique, aggregated measurements that inform progress toward the shared goal. A row of metrics — the detailed actions/conversions that help improve the efforts — forms the pyramid’s base.
If designed correctly, you’ll measure only things that matter to meeting an objective. Other measurements may be interesting or relate to what you’re tracking, but your focus should be on these four elements.
You will have one measurement pyramid for each strategic objective. Once you have all the strategic objectives and their measurement pyramids, you might roll them into the overall business objectives.
What would that look like? You could design it like an org chart, with the overall business mission segmented into strategic objectives. Each segment connects to the OKR pyramid and the source tool for each metric that goes into it.
Click to enlarge
Meaningful measurement
Now you’re measuring what’s meaningful, not just anything you can. If the game is won, everybody will know why.
I’ll admit it — measurement isn’t the most enjoyable part of anyone’s job. Many content marketers want to avoid thinking about it.
Have you heard the saying, “Create a life so good that you don’t need a vacation to escape from it”?
You can echo that sentiment in your approach to measurement: “Create an analytics and measurement strategy so good that you don’t have to do any math to support it.”
Tell us you don’t know anything about marketing without telling us you don’t know anything about marketing.
Last week, multibillionaire and marketing genius Elon Musk fired the newly formed content and marketing team one year after he begrudgingly said he would “try a little advertising and see how it goes.”
News of the dismissal came just after numerous reports of the bugs, failures, and limited sales of Tesla’s newest product — the bigger and fatter Back-To-The-Future DeLorean known as the Cybertruck. It also came just before Tesla’s latest earnings report.
Should you care that 40 people in Tesla’s marketing and content team were removed unceremoniously? Is that a good thing for the brand? What does it say about your prospects in marketing?
We went to Robert Rose, CMI’s chief strategy advisor, for his take. Watch this video or read on for his takeaways:
What a difference a year makes
Last week was tough for about 40 people in Tesla’s marketing department. However, I imagine many probably saw their leave coming in one way or another.
Their departure was part of an ongoing broader layoff at Tesla, which earlier announced plans to reduce its global workforce by 10%. Given that Tesla still counts more than 140,000 employees, the total layoff number could eventually hit 30,000 to 40,000. So, losing 40 marketing and content people who are more appropriately described as communications professionals isn’t the most meaningful part of the Tesla story.
But what resonates with me the most is Tesla’s sudden turnaround in its beliefs about marketing, advertising, and content as a modern company. Only a year ago, Elon Musk seemingly begrudgingly said he would try advertising. At that time, the content team already existed, but they got a new mandate to “try a little” advertising. A year into that experiment, Elon said the ads were “far too generic” on his X platform.
But were they? Maybe they were, and maybe they weren’t. Maybe his team wasn’t big enough or lacked the skills to produce amazing brand advertising. Maybe the team did magnificent work but couldn’t get it approved. Maybe they did but couldn’t get it promoted properly. Today’s modern marketer realizes so many things that get in the way of doing — and publishing — outstanding creative work.
No doubt, the former Tesla marketing and content teams should be proud of the work they did. In a LinkedIn post, the group’s leader, Alex Ingram, wrote about the demise and thanked his team for the amazing creative work they did over the years.
So, what’s the takeaway?
History doesn’t repeat, but it does rhyme
Back in January, which feels like ancient history, I wrote about Solo Brands throwing its brand marketing team under the bus after a disappointing sales quarter of its Solo Stove despite their amazing creative work. Its Snoop Dogg campaign went viral, but six weeks later, the company hadn’t achieved the desired sales, so it fired the CEO. I pointed out that something bigger was probably at play, but they felt compelled to make the marketing plan the scapegoat.
So here we go again, but this time it’s Tesla. As the famous quote says, “History doesn’t repeat itself, but it does often rhyme.”
Though most news reports say the 40-person team had only been around a year, my reading says the employees had been around a lot longer than that. In Alex’s LinkedIn post, he mentions they had been doing the work in comms, public relations, and social media since 2019. It was Elon’s quote to “try a little paid advertising” that was a year old.
On the surface, the valuable comms team was doing interesting things, but then they had to try advertising. It didn’t work to Elon’s liking, so Tesla got rid of the team.
That makes almost as much sense as tearing down a social media platform to its studs to see what will break and then being surprised when it does.
Unfortunately, as I mentioned during the Solo Stove challenge, marketers must be used to this. When things go amazingly well, marketing almost never gets the credit. It’s the genius CEO’s vision, the extraordinary sales team, or a superstar product that won the day. Then things fail, and it’s almost always marketing’s fault.
It’s a Faustian bargain that marketers have accepted since marketing has been around.
Don’t take any takeaways from Tesla on what to do
What annoys me the most is when a CEO, board, or leadership team feels the need to throw marketing under the bus when it’s assuredly not their fault. If things were going great for Tesla — and they are really, really not — would Elon take time out of his busy day to thank the marketing and content team that created the ads? Of course not.
So, why, in the face of laying off 10% of Tesla’s workforce, would he go out of his way to throw shade at a team that makes up 0.0002% of the company and say that their work was “generic”?
Because Elon thinks he knows better, and his insecurity requires him to say the quiet part out loud. More troublesome are the leadership teams across the industry who will hear this pronouncement and, as they did in Twitter’s dismantling, say, “Maybe we should do that too.”
Spoiler alert for those leaders: Don’t. Tesla always considered marketing and branding as an afterthought. Its noted absence is not laudable but one of the myriad symptoms of challenges the car company has. There are no lessons to be learned here for any leadership team other than what not to do.
To the former content growth team at Tesla, bon voyage. Let me know if I can do anything to help. Your work was fantastic. Your fellow marketing and communications practitioners are with you. You will all end up in a better place.
Want more content marketing tips, insights, and examples? Subscribe to workday or weekly emails from CMI.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:Does CEO-CMO Alignment Go Far Enough for Business Growth? Probably Not
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
With so many nuances to content, from distribution to format to the buyer’s journey, you must take a drill-down approach to your analytics. Assess performance from a bird’s eye view and then break it into multiple perspectives.
This process allows you to truly grasp the components of content and distribution that contribute to your overarching content goals.
You can do this in several ways, but one of the most effective is a real-time dashboard created through Google Looker, which integrates seamlessly with Google Analytics 4.
Let’s explore the building blocks of content measurement and walk through a Google Looker dashboard. The free template can help you measure, justify, and brag about the great impact content has on your business.
What metrics to analyze
Before you build an analytics dashboard, you must identify the key metrics that align with your content’s purpose. Your content’s breadth makes it a powerful tool to engage audiences at multiple touchpoints, nurture relationships, and motivate them to act. However, your specific goals depend on the nature of your products or services, the buying cycle of your customers, the relationship you seek with your audience and other factors.
Among the common objectives and corresponding metrics:
Objective
Key Performance Indicator
Brand awareness
Website visitors Sessions Page views
Brand engagement
Engaged sessions Active users Average session duration Average time on page Bounce rate Views/session Sessions/user
To evaluate your content’s effectiveness against its business purpose, you need to assess the two sides of the coin — the content and the distribution. Measuring the performance of content without considering the context of who saw it and under what circumstances would be like evaluating the quality of a car based solely on its top speed.
You also must assess who had the opportunity to see the content. For example, you may determine one blog post resonates stronger than another because it saw twice the traffic. But, upon further examination, you discover the blog post that performed better had better distribution. The CEO shared it on LinkedIn, but the poorer performing post wasn’t promoted at all. In that case, metrics, such as page views and average engagement time, do not serve as the best indicators to identify your strongest-performing content.
Alternatively, a piece of website content might have a high traffic count but low engagement. You may first assume the content missed the mark, causing people to leave your site at alarming rates. However, when you dig into the distribution, you see the bulk of that low-engagement traffic came from a digital ad with poor targeting. The content looked like a failure, but the distribution strategy is what failed.
Examining the content and distribution in tandem allows you to identify the true strengths and weaknesses of your strategy and avoid making erroneous assumptions based on incomplete information.
Armed with this holistic view, you’ll be well-equipped to build a robust measurement program that enables data-driven decision-making and continuous improvement.
Evaluate the available metrics
To pull together all the relevant data in one place, consider the free version of Google Looker. It lets you create multiple tabs in a single report and customize the look, feel, height, and width of your data views.
On the first tab, create a holistic view of your content. I’ll explain how to do it technically later. The main purpose of this section is to answer the question, “Is the brand’s content achieving what it is designed to do?”
To demonstrate that, pick metrics related to your content goals. If you take a full-funnel approach to content, you should include KPIs at different phases of the user journey. But if you focus on content for a single purpose, use those relevant metrics.
This list from Google encompasses dozens of available metrics. Some of the most common ones are included in this chart:
Metric name
Definition
Phase
Sessions
Any time a user arrives on your site
Awareness
Views
Number of pages visited
Awareness
Total users
Total number of people who visited your site
Awareness
New users
Total number of people who visited your site for the first time
Awareness
Returning users
Total number of people who initiated more than one session
Engagement
Engaged sessions
Number of sessions lasting at least 10 seconds, had at least one key event, or included at least two page or screen views
Engagement
Average session duration
Average seconds of users’ sessions before abandonment
Engagement
Bounce rate
Not engaged sessions divided by total sessions (percentage)
Engagement
Engagement rate
Engaged sessions divided by total sessions (percentage)
Engagement
Views per session
Total views divided by total Sessions
Engagement
Sessions per user
Average number of engaged sessions per user
Engagement
Active users
Number of users resulting in an engaged session
Engagement
Build a Google Looker dashboard
I’ve included a Google Looker template to help you get up and running with your content measurement program. To use this dashboard with your website data, click on the three dots in the upper right-hand corner and select “Make a copy.”
You will be prompted to replace the sample GA4 data source (original data source) with your analytics (new data source):
You now have a dashboard ready to populate.
As I walk through this example, please know that some metrics will not carry over into your version as they are shown below because the sample data is not necessarily set up as yours. To fix that, select each metric and chart and replace them with the desired dimensions on the right-hand menu. From here, you can also change the visualizations, display, and style of your data.
Create executive content dashboard
The first tab of the dashboard includes the template for the executive summary. It compares the selected KPIs (listed at the top) to the previous period. Stakeholders can easily see changes in key metrics that may be disrupting or enhancing your content performance.
In this sample content measurement dashboard, the KPIs include active users, sessions, engagement rate, bounce rate, average session duration, and conversions. Below each number is the change percentage in red (negative) or green (positive). It also includes a chart showing the comparative sessions over time.
The executive dashboard also includes charts and graphs for new vs. returning users, average views per session, views by page and channel, visitors by location, sessions by channel, and more.
This dashboard tracks the website. If you want to track only content pages, such as your blog, add a page- or report-level filter.
To add a filter that applies to all tabs on the dashboard, go to the top menu and select “File” then “Report Settings.” A column will open on the right side of the dashboard. Select “Add A Filter” at the bottom.
The process is similar for page-level filters, but they only apply to the current tab. To create a page-level filter, go to the top menu and choose “Page” then “Current Page Settings.” A column will appear on the right. Select “Add A Filter.”
From here, the page- or report-level filter process is the same. Select “Create A Filter.” A box will pop up at the bottom.
If your website uses a breadcrumb taxonomy or other way to distinguish among content types, create this filter by selecting “Page path.” Then, select “Include” in the first drop-down box and “Contains” in the second box. Add “blog” or whatever keyword appears in all the URLs designating that content type in the third box.
TIP: If the content type includes multiple keywords, select the “And” or “Or” that appear next to or below the criteria.
This 30,000-foot view paves the way for more focused visualizations to pinpoint the needle movers in your content. You are not only poised to communicate content efficacy to your stakeholders but also equip yourself with the information needed to meaningfully interpret more granular insights and translate them into actionable optimizations.
Drill down into channels
Now that you have established the big picture, it’s time to drill down into what drives that impact. By isolating content and traffic by channel, you can remove the ambiguity around audience origin and intent and understand the content’s performance within the context of its distribution.
Depending on how deep you want to go and how many channels drive your traffic, you may create individual channel sections within one tab or designate individual tabs to analyze each channel.
In the template, the “Channels” tab tracks how different channels contribute to content views and engagement. Under the label “Channels Over Time” appears a chart showing active users by channel (referral, direct, organic social, organic search, email, and unassigned) for the past four months. I chose the active users metric because it doesn’t count bot traffic, which typically lands on and abandons your site immediately.
It also shows a pie chart of channel contributions to show the percentage each channel contributes to active users.
Then, it includes a channel breakdown chart. It details active users, new users, sessions, and average session duration by channel. It also includes a top-pages-by-channel chart, identifying the most popular page titles visited by active users coming from each channel.
These data views provide a comprehensive understanding of how each distribution channel contributes to the content’s reach and engagement, allowing you to make informed decisions about where to focus your efforts for maximum impact.
Pinpoint granular content performance
You also can drill down to content page performance. The side-by-side comparisons can help you identify what messages, content types, and themes are working for your business.
In the template, the third tab is “Content Performance By Page.” It allows you to analyze the performance of individual content pieces, such as blog posts, articles, or landing pages. The visualization at the top of the page includes many of the same metrics as the executive dashboard, such as sessions over time, average views per user, and new vs. return users.
You can use the page-title control at the top (more on that in the next section) or a page-level filter to look exclusively at the content pages.
At the bottom of the tab, you can see two views — page performance by channel and content page breakdown. The former shows the most viewed pages, layering in the channels that drove traffic to them, while the latter breaks down the core metrics for each page, including active users, new users, views, and average session duration.
By examining the performance of individual content pieces and understanding which channels are driving traffic to them, you can gain valuable insights into what types of content resonate with your audience and where they are most likely to engage with it. This information can help you refine your content strategy, prioritize topics and formats that generate the most interest, and optimize your distribution efforts.
Slicing and dicing with data controls
Regardless of whether you choose to drill down by channel, content type, or something else, you can layer in more granularity by adding user-friendly drop-down controls to your dashboard.
These controls let dashboard viewers slice and dice the data by dimensions, such as date range, location, demographics, page title, page categorization, traffic source, and more. For example, if you created your Google Looker tabs to focus on the channel, you can add a content control to see how a specific channel contributes to the performance of specific pages. You can add these controls for any field available in Google Analytics.
To incorporate this feature, click on the “Add a control” icon in the editing menu at the top of the dashboard. Select “Drop-down list” from the menu.
You can place the control anywhere on the dashboard. Typically, they work well at the top.
Now, on the right, designate the field and metric from the menu. Click on the “Control field” to choose the filter dimension, such as “Page title,” “Landing page,” “Source/medium,” or “City.”
Then, in the drop-down control, choose the metric of your filter dimension to sort. Click on the “Metric” field in the properties panel. For example, if you’ve chosen “Page Title” as your dimension, you might choose metrics like “Sessions,” “Users,” or “Views.” The designated metric will be used to calculate and display the data in your visualizations based on the selected dimension. If your dimension is page title and the metric is sessions, the drop-down control will show the total number of sessions in descending order.
Alternatively, if you want the dimension to display alphabetically, don’t designate a metric for the control.
By providing this level of interactivity, you can cater to the diverse needs and questions of stakeholders while maintaining a clean and focused dashboard design.
Your content measurement journey: From insights to impact
Like anything else in digital marketing, content programs need to be highly dynamic and adaptable to drive real impact. What’s effective today may not be the best strategy tomorrow, but businesses that aren’t measuring their content performance tend to just chug along, none the wiser.
It’s time to get off that content choo-choo train. Arm yourself with data, sharpen your strategic instincts, and get ready to dominate the content game. The future belongs to those who not only create great content but also have the wisdom to measure its impact. Will you be among them?
Bring your team to Content Marketing World this October for inspiration, ideas, and actionable advice on developing and executing a strategy that drives profit for your business. Group rates are available. Register today.
You can learn so much more from the voices of experience in content marketing. To subscribe to the daily or weekly updates, visit www.News.ContentInstitute.com/Subscriptions or click the orange subscribe button at the top of any page.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
Content creation acts as the heart of effective content marketing. And, as a skilled creative practitioner, you pour your heart into your work every day.
It also takes a sharp mind to make effective decisions and helping hands to consistently transform fresh ideas and insights into resonant brand storytelling. Not to mention the stamina it requires to keep up with the ever-increasing demand for more and higher-quality output.
Sure, generative AI tools can assist with some tasks. Ultimately, it’s up to you to ensure your the elements are in place to engage audiences and convert them into customers.
These expert tips, tricks, and guidance can help make the creative aspects of your content marketing easier to manage and more likely to succeed.
I’ve organized this advice to answer the three most critical content creation questions:
Who will create/contribute to the content?
How will the content align with your strategic goals?
How will you craft compelling stories that your audience will love?
Before you proceed: If you need a refresher on how to build the proper strategic foundation and secure stakeholder support for content marketing, check out these guides:
1. Who will create the content?
To determine the best creation model, consider factors such as the nature of your business, content competition, expertise required, and team and budget resources.
Among the options:
Hiring writers for an in-house team: If your brand prioritizes original content creation, produces a high volume of assets, or needs content to fill multiple channels and platforms, full-time writing talent makes it easier to control the process.
Leveraging internal employees and subject matter experts (SMEs): If your brand’s conversations require specialized expertise or technical know-how, involve colleagues from other organizational functions. You can also tap into the insights of executive management, sales personnel, product managers, or other employees. As CMI’s chief strategy advisor Robert Rose, points out, training your content team to be subject matter experts may be more effective than teaching SMEs to excel at writing.
Outsourcing to consultants or specialists: Smaller businesses, startups, nonprofits, and other companies that aren’t ready to invest in full-scale editorial capabilities may work with paid contributors (including trained former journalists) or partner with a content agency or other creative service provider.
Soliciting external contributors: A B2B business with a strong, subscribed community can ask industry thought leaders to write guest articles for its owned media platforms. These writers often share their expertise in exchange for valuable backlinks and exposure to new audiences. If your business has a B2C focus, enable your ardent fans and followers or relevant influencers to create user-generated content on your brand’s behalf.
Exploring AI writing tools: More accessible technology has made artificial intelligence content creation a robust and affordable option for most brands. Even so, skilled (human) creators are still needed to ensure the content’s quality and relevance (and to maintain compliance with Google’s Search Essentials). But AI can be a huge time-saver for research, outlines, and first drafts or filling other productivity gaps in your creative workflow.
Shape your talent pool for marketing content creation
Get extra help determining a suitable creation model, skill sets, and operational structure with these talent-focused resources:
2. How will content align with your strategic goals?
Sharing compelling, valuable stories your audience will love is an admirable goal. Of course, a strategic marketing purpose must support that love fest.
Draw your target audience’s attention by creating content in the formats and types they prefer. Positioning your content to maximize engagement and conversion is also critical. Otherwise, you spin the content engine’s wheels without getting meaningful traction.
Achieving creative and strategic alignment is a top-down endeavor. Let’s start with the practical and tactical decision-making that should occur before creating a single word or image.
Evaluate format and content type options
According to CMI’s Benchmarks, Budgets, and Trends — Insights for 2024, short articles, videos, case studies, and virtual events still reign supreme among content formats and types.
But just because these content options are popular doesn’t mean they’re the best fit for your brand or audience. A less popular or more specialized tactic might help your content stand out from the competition.
Before you decide, understand the strengths and limitations of each option. The examples and insights shared in the articles on these formats can help inform your research and decision-making efforts:
Find your unique approach
Next, there’s the matter of differentiating your content from your competition. You could find a content niche — an industry topic or focal area where your brand can provide practical guidance and unique thought leadership your audience won’t find elsewhere.
Focusing your creative resources around a specialized topic reduces the paralysis that comes when trying to fill too many content buckets at once. It also ensures everything created under that theme organically ties into your strategic purpose.
To home in on a distinctly valuable niche, ask these questions:
Can we own the conversation in this area for our industry?
Does our audience have a pressing — and unmet — need for this kind of content?
Do we have the knowledge and production capabilities to create this content consistently?
Nail down your alignment plan
Need more help creating distinct content that dovetails with your strategy and delights your audience? Continue your journey with these resources:
3. How will you craft compelling stories that your audience will love?
Successful content creation in marketing takes more than the usual creative considerations — determining topics, generating story ideas, and maintaining high creativity and quality.
Your content must serve as a platform for communicating your brand’s unique perspectives, capabilities, and value proposition. It should also tell a story that resonates with your target audience and convinces them to act.
Identify worthwhile content topics
Kick off your creative ideation by determining which subjects to write about. Ignore any that don’t reflect your brand’s identity in the most meaningful and targeted way.
To approach this task, identify primary subjects on which your target audience actively searches for information. Keyword research or topic cluster modeling can deepen your understanding of their challenges and what content might help solve them.
However, as Google’s ongoing core updates remind us, you should focus on delivering a satisfying, high-quality experience for your audience. Answer your customers’ questions, demonstrate your brand’s subject-matter experience, expertise, authoritativeness, and trustworthiness (EEAT), and add value to existing conversations to get the most search impact from the content you create.
Generate creative article ideas
The content engine requires many creative ideas to keep it running smoothly. Team brainstorming sessions can help your content creators get their creative juices flowing and generate a high volume of powerful, original ideas. AI tools can also serve as helpful brainstorming buddies.
However, unstructured brainstorms often lead to unfocused ideas that lack originality, don’t align with your strategy, or may be too challenging to execute. Consider following the Perpetual Innovation Process developed by Re:Think Innovation author Carla Johnson. It sets a stage for purpose-driven ideation while allowing innovation to thrive. The ideas that make it through the process are more likely to be embraced by your brand stakeholders and audience.
Transform raw ideas into resonant stories
Regardless of your tactical and strategic decisions, content that never makes it off the drawing board won’t help your business. The physical act of creating your content is the true lynchpin for success.
Content creation in marketing requires focus, dedication, and craftsmanship. For assets that strike the right balance of creativity and impact, follow the advice in these top resources:
To widen the appeal and deepen the resonance of your content, don’t unintentionally (or intentionally) exclude anyone from the conversations. Avoid using gender-biased terms and language that fail to reflect your audience’s diverse experiences and perspectives. Better yet, seek underrepresented voices you can help amplify by including them in your content.
In addition, follow accessibility best practices to ensure everyone who discovers your content can consume and benefit from it. For example, write descriptive text to explain what’s shown in videos and visuals. Also, consider including transcripts and alt text so consumers who rely on screen readers can have the whole content experience.
Strengthen — but don’t strain — your creative muscles
Over time, the rigors of the process can wear down even the most talented and dedicated content creators. Look to helpful tech, like headline generators and AI content creation tools, to surface novel ideas and approaches you can expand and develop.
If you’re feeling low on creative inspiration, keep this in mind: Great content ideas don’t have to be wholly original. Try exploring efforts produced by award-winning content brands in other verticals or industries. You might find ways to iterate on their concepts and create something freshly appealing for your audience.
But don’t let the drive to do it all get in the way of your mental health. If you’re feeling burned out, your writing will naturally suffer.
When you experience content fatigue, explore opportunities to rebalance your workload or offload low-performing initiatives. It may free the mind space you need to refresh your creative energy and renew your focus. Working with a mentor can also help guide you through creative block and other stresses creators commonly experience.
Enhance your writing quality
Content riddled with typos, grammatical errors, tech issues, or factual inaccuracies can cost your brand the trust and respect of the audience and their patronage.
To avoid being mocked for producing lazy, low-quality assets or labeled as a purveyor of fake news, carefully proofread, test, and fact-check every piece of content.
Pay attention to the mechanics of skillful writing to craft click-worthy headlines, effective leads, intriguing meta descriptions, and engaging conclusions. These features determine whether readers will consume your content and or move on to someone else’s offerings.
Whether you have an in-house creative team or work with outsourced contributors, coaching your writers on your brand’s quality expectations can help avoid tiresome rewrites — or all-out rejections of their work.
Use your powers of persuasion
Even the best quality content won’t help meet your goals if it doesn’t resonate with your audience or spur them to take actions that impact your business. Decide what you’d like them to do, and then use your content powers to convince them to do it.
Try the ideas in these articles to foster emotional resonance, deepen engagement, and drive conversions:
Master the whole creative process
Want to learn more about any of the critical components of content creation? These tips, insights, and examples can guide your journey:
Go forth and create
Your content will achieve greater success with the power of a well-managed creative team, strategic and creative alignment, and uniquely valuable stories. If you find yourself stuck along the way — or have a content creation tip to share — tag CMI on social media.
Updated from a December 2022 article.
Register to attend Content Marketing World in San Diego. Use the code BLOG100 to save $100. Can’t attend in person this year? Check out the Digital Pass for access to on-demand session recordings from the live event through the end of the year.
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
My good friend and amazing consultant Jenny Magic wrote a whole book on the topic.
Undeniably, fewer businesses have worked on innovative or incremental marketing change over the last 12 months. I’ve seen it. Technology companies have seen it. Consulting firms have seen it. The number of new, active innovative marketing change projects has been fewer and farther between than at any time in recent memory.
A friend of mine, a CMO of a larger technology company, calls it “change absorption.” He uses the term for the sheer tsunami of change all businesses faced coming out of the pandemic. But, specific to marketing, it references digital marketing and customer experience transformation projects, work-from-home collaboration initiatives, paid media and social strategies, and online events. He says business leaders are just trying to absorb all that technology, new hires, and process change that the pandemic brought about.
But here’s the thing. All that change — including digital transformation, new collaboration systems, and pending integration of AI — remains hampered because so many businesses still haven’t evolved their content strategy.
And I see the need for incremental change is coming back.
Content strategy projects still aren’t the sexiest
Despite the state of change absorption, I see one challenge again and again at businesses, both large and small: Improvements in content strategy fail to excite people enough to motivate the big changes they will require.
When a company’s content strategy is suboptimal but not so broken as to undermine success, the anticipated pain of changing feels greater than the pain that might (or might not) arise if nothing changes.
It’s a Catch-22. No one wants to throw out the existing approach to the content strategy. Why? Because that’s the way it’s worked for years. People question whether any reinvention will prove as amazing as promised.
Inevitably, companies struggle to implement an incrementally better content strategy because it risks failing. On the other hand, they don’t give themselves the chance to make a change that could produce remarkable results.
“If you define success as getting closer and closer to a mythical perfection, an agreed-upon standard, it’s extremely difficult to become remarkable. Particularly if the field is competitive. Can’t get rounder than round.”
These days — almost in spite of the innovation of AI — I see content and marketing approaches stuck in a rut more than ever. Yes, marketers tried to initiate big changes coming out of the pandemic, and some of them worked, and some didn’t. But now, teams push harder for every single incremental improvement.
New approaches provide a much-needed shake-up. But you can’t sell them in a way that promises those “big evolutions of efficiency or productiveness” that everybody is still trying to absorb four years later. Rather, pitch them as new windows into what’s possible.
Selling change is hard when things ‘aren’t that bad’
I recently helped a client audit their marketing content development process and found the content team suffering. Despite implementing a “cool new collaborative workflow system in 2021,” siloed product groups still held all the marketing budget. So, the content team couldn’t control content requests. And because the workflow system was implemented using the same process that worked pre-pandemic, the product groups still lacked insight into other teams’ requests. They often asked for new content pieces without realizing something similar already existed.
We discussed how a new approach to content creation could help create a new possibility of insight and measurement capabilities. We would add a step for collaborative content planning to the initial development process.
Unfortunately, many of the product teams viewed the efficiency promise as an incremental improvement to an otherwise working model. They resisted adding “yet another step” to their content process.
For them, not changing anything was easier than changing the way they worked for a possible improvement for the content team (and thus the business).
Nothing changed. What happened?
Well, nothing. Nobody got fired. No massive failures occurred. Content development just kept going inefficiently and with no increases in content quality or performance.
But the ongoing stress and drudgery felt insidious. How long will members of the content team stay inspired and engaged before they start churning out pieces that fit the request but go no further? And worse, the company failed to gain any new perspective on how much better things (including content and employee satisfaction) could be.
Most people do things based on what you think you know today. But what if you’re wrong? What if you took the time to test something new, even if the change caused temporary discomfort? The only way to know if things could work better is to try something different.
No change gets you nowhere
Now, I know the idea of creating new content strategies and processes seems esoteric. Sometimes, even raising the suggestion raises hackles. People eye these conversations with suspicion based on their experiences with frustrating brand value discussions that didn’t move the needle.
But doing nothing new rarely leads to success.
I know a large B2B company where the global marketing team created incredible experiences for customers, partners, and even prospective employees. Over the last 10 years, though, the steady drip and monotony of not doing anything new reduced the team to doing almost nothing. They only send brand emails created by an agency, review and distribute internal sell sheets created by the design team, create content on the company’s sustainable practices, and ensure the correct use of the logo in press releases by the comms team.
Is it any wonder that much of this team ended up in the company’s recent bulk layoffs — all of which were blamed on (yup, you guessed it) generative AI. All the things they did were seen as easily replaceable.
When selling change feels hard, what can you do? Turn your maps upside down occasionally. Adopt a new perspective on what it takes to differentiate your business.
Here are some ideas.
Tell the change story the South Park way
Matt Stone and Trey Parker, who created the hit series South Park, have a clever technique for telling stories that hold people’s attention by creating tension and a sense that the outcome really matters. The technique seems remarkably simple: When they write a sequence, they follow all the “and then” phrases with “but,” which leads into a “therefore.” It changes the nature of the script.
What if you create a new way to deliver content to sales teams through training events rather than distributing it through the digital asset management (DAM) system? It might even be less efficient, but it might give the sales teams a new perspective on how to enable a better sales experience.
Explain the project using “but” and “therefore” phrases, such as: “You want to get the most relevant and up-to-date content to your customers. But finding it takes multiple searches through confusing file systems. Therefore, by the time you reach out to the prospect, they’ve already moved on. Wouldn’t it make sense to try a different way?”
Even if you don’t try this tip with your colleagues, experiment with it in your storytelling. You’ll be surprised how it energizes your work.
Do something new because you don’t know how
Even when teams say they’re open to changes in content management, distribution, structured content, or content platforms, I hear this: “But we don’t know how.”
Oddly, these responses usually don’t come from content practitioners but from senior leadership. Their reluctance to adopt a fundamentally new approach happens because the organization doesn’t understand it. It is unfortunate that “not knowing how” is the equivalent of “we can’t do it.”
Ultimately, you need to be comfortable with only one change — your desire to push for and attempt something new.
As you exercise the business muscle of content marketing, customer experience, and expanded customer touchpoints, understand all these goals depend on your ability to create new.
New what?
New ways of engaging audiences. New stories to move them and earn their trust. New reasons for them to engage with you again. New everything.
You have the power to develop these new maps. It’s a choice. You can continue to fix only those things in such disrepair as to qualify for demolition. Or you can look for things that could be better and try a new way of doing them.
You might fail. Or you might not. Either way, you’ll have a new perspective on what to try next.
It’s your story. Tell it well.
Updated from an August 2022 article.
Subscribe to workday or weekly CMI emails to get Rose-Colored Glasses in your inbox each week.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
Let’s hope things work out better for you than they did for Shakespeare’s mad Danish prince with daddy issues.
But let’s add a twist to that existential question.
CMI’s chief strategy officer, Robert Rose, shares what marketers should really contemplate. Watch the video or read on to discover what he says:
Should you not use AI and be proud of not using it? Dove Beauty did that last week.
Should you use it but keep it a secret? Sports Illustrated did that last year.
Should you use AI and be vocal about using it? Agency giant Brandtech Group picked up the all-in vibe.
Should you not use it but tell everybody you are? The new term “AI washing” is hitting everywhere.
What’s the best option? Let’s explore.
Dove tells all it won’t use AI
Last week, Dove, the beauty brand celebrating 20 years of its Campaign for Real Beauty, pledged it would NEVER use AI in visual communication to portray real people.
In the announcement, they said they will create “Real Beauty Prompt Guidelines” that people can use to create images representing all types of physical beauty through popular generative AI programs. The prompt they picked for the launch video? “The most beautiful woman in the world, according to Dove.”
I applaud them for the powerful ad. But I’m perplexed by Dove issuing a statement saying it won’t use AI for images of real beauty and then sharing a branded prompt for doing exactly that. Isn’t it like me saying, “Don’t think of a parrot eating pizza. Don’t think about a parrot eating pizza,” and you can’t help but think about a parrot eating pizza right now?
Brandtech Group says it’s all in on AI
Now, Brandtech Group, a conglomerate ad agency, is going the other way. It’s going all-in on AI and telling everybody.
This week, Ad Age featured a press release — oops, I mean an article (subscription required) — with the details of how Brandtech is leaning into the takeaway from OpenAI’s Sam Altman, who says 95% of marketing work today can be done by AI.
A Brandtech representative talked about how they pitch big brands with two people instead of 20. They boast about how proud they are that its lean 7,000 staffers compete with 100,000-person teams. (To be clear, showing up to a pitch with 20 people has never been a good thing, but I digress.)
OK, that’s a differentiated approach. They’re all in. Ad Age certainly seemed to like it enough to promote it. Oops, I mean report about it.
False claims of using AI and not using AI
Offshoots of the all-in and never-will approaches also exist.
The term “AI washing” is de rigueur to describe companies claiming to use AI for something that really isn’t AI. The US Securities and Exchange Commission just fined two companies for using misleading statements about their use of AI in their business model. I know one startup technology organization faced so much pressure from their board and investors to “do something with AI” that they put a simple chatbot on their website — a glorified search engine — while they figured out what they wanted to do.
Lastly and perhaps most interestingly, companies have and will use AI for much of what they create but remain quiet about it or desire to keep it a secret. A recent notable example is the deepfake ad of a woman in a car professing the need for people to use a particular body wipe to get rid of body odor. It was purported to be real, but sharp-eyed viewers suspected the fake and called out the company, which then admitted it. Or was that the brand’s intent all along — the AI-use outrage would bring more attention?
— Jon Elder | Amazon Growth | Private Label (@BlackLabelAdvsr) March 26, 2024
To yell or not to yell about your brand’s AI decision
Should a brand yell from a mountaintop that they use AI to differentiate themselves a la Brandtech? Or should a brand yell they’re never going to use AI to differentiate themselves a la Dove? Or should a brand use it and not yell anything? (I think it’s clear that a brand should not use AI and lie and say it is. That’s the worst of all choices.)
I lean far into not-yelling-from-mountaintop camp.
When I see a CEO proudly exclaim that they laid off 90% of their support workforce because of AI, I’m not surprised a little later when the value of their service is reduced, and the business is failing.
I’m not surprised when I hear “AI made us do it” to rationalize the latest big tech company latest rounds of layoffs. Or when a big consulting firm announces it’s going all-in on using AI to replace its creative and strategic resources.
I see all those things as desperate attempts for short-term attention or a distraction from the real challenge. They may get responses like, “Of course, you had to lay all those people off; AI is so disruptive,” or “Amazing. You’re so out in front of the rest of the pack by leveraging AI to create efficiency, let me cover your story.” Perhaps they get this response, “Your company deserves a bump in stock price because you’re already using this fancy new technology.”
But what happens if the AI doesn’t deliver as promoted? What happens the next time you need to lay off people? What happens the next time you need to prove your technologically forward-leaning?
Yelling out that you’re all in on a disruptive innovation, especially one the public doesn’t yet trust a lot is (at best) a business sugar high. That short-term burst of attention may or may not foul your long-term brand value.
Interestingly, the same scenarios can manifest when your brand proclaims loudly it is all out of AI, as Dove did. The sugar high may not last and now Dove has itself into a messaging box. One slip could cause distrust among its customers. And what if AI gets good at demonstrating diversity in beauty?
I tried Dove’s instructions and prompted ChatGPT for a picture of “the most beautiful woman in the world according to the Dove Real Beauty ad.”
It gave me this. Then this. And this. And finally, this.
She’s absolutely beautiful, but she doesn’t capture the many facets of diversity Dove has demonstrated in its Real Beauty campaigns. To be clear, Dove doesn’t have any control over generating the image. Maybe the prompt worked well for Dove, but it didn’t for me. Neither Dove nor you can know how the AI tool will behave.
To use AI or not to use AI?
When brands grab a microphone to answer that question, they work from an existential fear about the disruption’s meaning. They do not exhibit the confidence in their actions to deal with it.
Let’s return to Hamlet’s soliloquy:
Thus conscience doth make cowards of us all;
And thus the native hue of resolution
Is sicklied o’er with the pale cast of thought,
And enterprises of great pith and moment
With this regard their currents turn awry
And lose the name of action.
In other words, Hamlet says everybody is afraid to take real action because they fear the unknown outcome. You could act to mitigate or solve some challenges, but you don’t because you don’t trust yourself.
If I’m a brand marketer for any business (and I am), I’m going to take action on AI for my business. But until I see how I’m going to generate value with AI, I’m going to be circumspect about yelling or proselytizing how my business’ future is better.
Want more content marketing tips, insights, and examples? Subscribe to workday or weekly emails from CMI.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
I have a tough time putting aside my editor’s brain.
Editors and good writers know what I’m talking about. It’s the hazard of the job.
Sometimes, I marvel at an article’s great intro, packed with an interesting narrative and powerful verbs that speak directly to me or my interest.
But more often, I get sad, struggling to read ledes that get bogged down with so many words, forget they need to make a point or fail to remember their goal is to entice people to consume the rest of the content.
That’s not just sad; it’s a waste of content (and the resources that went into producing it.)
Next to the headline, the lede is everything. It determines whether someone will read the article. It has many tasks to complete — hook the reader, indicate the subject matter, set the tone, etc.
For the good of better ledes that can live up to those weighty responsibilities, let’s examine five intros. I picked ones that possess positive attributes but left room for a constructive critique.
Note: I use the journalistic form “lede,” which is “the introductory section of a news story to entice the reader to read the full story.” Technically, “lead” is also correct.
1. Set the scene
GE Lighting serves up a lot of content around its products. This article, How To Beat the Winter Blues and Boost Your Mood With Lighting, attracted my attention because it tackles a common non-lighting topic (winter blues) with a lighting solution (GE products).
How the lede reads
With longer nights, cloud-covered skies, and colder (dare we say, less enjoyable) weather, it’s no wonder why this time of year has a major impact on people’s moods. The absence of sun and light causes individuals to feel sadder and less motivated than their usual selves. For many, it may just be a case of the winter blues. But for a smaller percentage of people, it’s a more serious annual struggle called seasonal affective disorder (SAD).
Even though the symptoms of the winter blues are less severe, they’re not something to ignore. Fortunately, there are lighting solutions that help. That’s why today, we’re going to show you how to beat the winter blues with the help of a few of our products.
What works
It paints a picture for the reader (longer nights, cloud-covered skies, and colder weather). You can feel and likely relate to the scene.
What doesn’t work
The first paragraph could work for any article about winter blues or seasonal affective disorder.
“It’s no wonder this time of year has a major impact …” is just wrong. The article went live on Sept. 19, 2023 — fall hadn’t even officially arrived.
It’s a lot of words (122 in the first two paragraphs) that make the same point over and over. Readers probably understood it in the second (wordy) sentence: “The absence of sun and light causes individuals to feel sadder and less motivated than their usual selves.”
The tie to the brand’s products (lighting solutions) seems generic to the winter blues point.
What would be a better lede
Longer nights, cloud-covered skies, and colder weather can darken people’s moods and even prompt a more serious struggle known as seasonal affective disorder.
While you can’t change the weather, you can change the environment at home and work with better lighting. Get ahead of the game by beating the winter blues with the help of these products.
The revised lede is 57 words. The second paragraph ties the scene to the brand’s message. It also acknowledges the article goes live in September and not in the winter.
During the past year, the pace of AI adoption has accelerated significantly, ushering in groundbreaking advances, discoveries and solutions with the potential to help address humanity’s biggest problems. We see this as a massive platform shift, akin to the printing press, which was not just an invention, but a technology that shaped a new economy. Alongside the incredible promise and benefits of AI, we recognize the resource intensity of these applications and the need to address the environmental impact from every angle.
In line with our commitment to responsible AI and our ambitious sustainability commitments, we’re determined to tackle this challenge so the world can harness the full benefits of AI. There are three areas where we’re deeply invested and increasing our focus. The first is optimizing datacenter energy and water efficiency. The second is advancing low-carbon materials, creating global markets to help advance sustainability across industries. And the third is improving the energy efficiency of AI and cloud services, empowering our customers and partners with tools for collective progress.
What works
It uses a helpful analogy (akin to the printing press). It clearly introduces the article’s three topics using the words first, second, and third. Readers will know what to expect in the article.
What doesn’t work
With so many words (82 in the first graph, 88 in the second) explaining what most readers know, only the most committed will consume the rest of the article. (I liken it to “medicine content” — even though you don’t like the taste, you need to consume it.)
There are too many 50-cent words that say little (advances, discoveries, solutions, etc.)
First-person pronouns are overused (eight).
What would be a better lede
The modern adoption of AI is akin to the debut of the printing press. It is not about new inventions; it’s shaping a new economy. But ushering in groundbreaking advances with the potential to help address humanity’s biggest problems also impacts the environment from every angle.
Our commitment to responsible AI and sustainability crosses three areas of investment. The first is optimizing datacenter energy and water efficiency. The second is advancing low-carbon materials. And the third is improving the energy efficiency of AI and cloud services.
The revised introduction runs 85 words because it spends less time explaining the AI impact on the world. Readers interested in the niche topic of natural resources related to AI already know it’s a big deal.
The second paragraph retains the “first,” “second,” and “third” references, but it focuses solely on the what, not the how or why. That can be done in the rest of the article.
It also uses a single first-person pronoun because readers are visiting the brand’s blog (reinforced by the site’s URL and visual identity), so they know who’s making the commitment.
3. Speak to reader
Subaru sells cars. Yet, the Reliable Subaru dealership published this article, Tips To Keep Your Used Car Running Longer. The topic may sound counterintuitive. After all, if people don’t follow these tips, they’ll need a car sooner. But Reliable recognizes the value of building a long-term relationship.
Opting for a car can be a pragmatic and cost-effective choice, especially when paired with diligent maintenance practices to secure its long-term performance. With the appropriate level of care and attention, you can significantly extend the life of your pre-owned vehicle, all while enjoying dependable transportation without straining your finances. Here are some recommendations to help enhance the longevity of your used car.
What works
The lede quickly explains why the audience should be interested in the topic (“extend the life of your pre-owned vehicle,” “enjoying dependable transportation,” “without straining your finances.”) It also clearly explains what they will get from the article (recommendations to help enhance the longevity of your used car). In most cases, it also uses language that the reader would use (used car vs. pre-owned car).
What would make it better
A proofreader would have helped because the first sentence is missing a word. (It should have read, “Opting for a used car …,” but it forgot the word “used.”)
The Flesch-Kincaid reading score puts the text at a college-graduate reading level. Given the wide, general audience, it should be written at a grade-school level.
What would be a better lede
A used car is a good choice if you maintain it. Follow these tips. Your vehicle will be more reliable. Your bank account won’t take an unexpected hit.
The revised lede keeps the reliability and financial benefits in a more simplified explanation. It scores at a sixth-grade reading level. (Even college graduates don’t want to have to work to read a lede for a car maintenance article.)
4. Make it compelling
The American Lung Association knows the power of first-person stories. That’s why it told the story of Donna in its Breathe blog article, “It’s So Important To Never Miss a Scan.”
In 2015, Donna decided she needed to visit the emergency room after experiencing chest pains for a few days. About a year prior, Donna had been diagnosed with type two diabetes. She had still been learning how to manage this disease when her blood sugar spike to 300, which told Donna these were not symptoms she could ignore. At the hospital, they immediately gave her fluids to address her blood sugar problems. But the doctor also ordered a chest X-ray, which showed a mass on her lungs.
“Flash forward to 2022, it is a different world. This second diagnosis has given me the courage I needed to find my purpose in life and to grow. I am able to share my story with others. I am now a part of a group of Black women with lung cancer who began communicating online and formed a support group. It’s like a sisterhood,” Donna explained.
What works
A narrative telling the story of a real person connects with readers. It humanizes the point you want to make, allowing readers to identify shared characteristics or relatable scenarios. Even if they don’t have a similar story, readers will continue because they want to know what happens. They’re invested in the story.
What would make it better
Abbreviate the person’s story to focus on why you’ve included it in this article. As it reads now, so many details are included that readers may get lost quickly. If this story was about managing diabetes or the risks of that disease, the details in the ER scenario about her blood sugar level and “still learning to manage the disease” would make sense. But it’s a story about getting screened for lung cancer.
Limit the direct quote to what only the story’s subject can say better than the writer.
Match the headline to the intro. “It’s Important To Never Miss a Scan” is the headline, but the intro seems to indicate the story is about a woman whose multiple diagnoses of lung cancer have helped her find purpose and community.
What would be a better lede
The rewritten lede is based on the original intro rather than the headline.
In 2015, Donna went to the emergency room after experiencing chest pains. The doctor found a mass on her lungs.
In 2022, lung cancer returned. “This second diagnosis has given me the courage I needed to find my purpose in life and to grow,” she said. “I am now part of a group of Black women with lung cancer who began communicating online and formed a support group. It’s like a sisterhood.”
This lede could work with the original headline (“It’s Important To Never Miss a Scan”). Some of the details are culled from the full article.
In 2015, Donna had surgery to remove a tumor from her lung. Diagnosed with stage 2A lung cancer, doctors ordered chemotherapy as a precaution. But Donna’s body couldn’t tolerate chemo, so doctors advised her to stop and have follow-up scans every four to six months.
In 2022, one of those follow ups revealed the cancer had returned.
Both revised ledes focus directly on her lung cancer diagnoses rather than her other medical conditions. They also demonstrate how different a lede can be depending on the headline. If you write the intro, write a draft headline to indicate the focus of the piece. (Generative AI tools can help ensure you get this right. Add your lede to the prompt and ask it to write a headline. Ask a couple of times. If it doesn’t pick up the point, reconsider your lede.)
5. Help the reader
One more thing. Johnson & Johnson’s innovation blog publishes profiles, such as this SSF JLABS Company Spotlight. Unfortunately, the page design and generic headline make the content less attractive at first view.
SSF JLABS Company Spotlight
Tell us the story behind your company. What is the personal and scientific inspiration behind the founding of this company?
After talking to a J&J executive and watching the CNBC report on “The Da Vinci Debate” in 2014, I, Jay Kim, decided to investigate technical solutions to replace monopolar electrosurgical (ES) devices, which can cause tissue burn injuries. When I found out there has not been a technology developed to replace monopolar ES devices for more than 100 years after Dr. Bovie’s invention, I decided to develop a surgical laser system with our team of laser experts. We believe we have a conceptual solution with a prototype developed for this problem, but we need sufficient investment resources to develop the system.
I personally believe that the time is now for someone to introduce a safe surgical laser to replace monopolar ES devices in minimally invasive/robotic surgeries. If we don’t do it now, there may be no one to attempt it for another 100 years, and our laser technology knowledge will be lost. My team and I are determined to continue pursuing the development of this novel technology for humanity and the next generation. Our ultimate goal is to integrate Sharp Arrow’s surgical laser onto a surgical robot for telesurgery medical applications.
What works
Since the lede is nonexistent in this question-and-answer format, there’s nothing to work.
What would make it better
An intro. Even a Q-and-A format requires an intro to let the reader know what they can expect from the interview. Otherwise, they have to dig in to figure out the point, and if they have to work that hard, they’re not likely to consume it.
What would be a better lede
In 2014, Jay Kim discovered it had been more than 100 years since Dr. Bovie invented monopolar electrosurgical (ES) devices, which can cause tissue burn injuries. That’s when he and the Sharp Arrow team began investigating how to solve the burning problem. Now, he tells the story of their work and innovative solution.
A lede now exists and allows the reader to know what they’ll get if they read the Q-and-A.
Never forget the end
While ledes do their Herculean work at the beginning of the content, they also play a role at the end. When I read an article, I usually don’t remember the intro by time I reach the conclusion. (I can’t blame my editor’s brain, though; it’s the mind of a forgetful reader.)
However, the best writers remind me what the article was all about by tying the conclusion back to the beginning. That cohesive technique reminds the reader why they were interested in the content in the first place and delivers a more satisfying ending. And that’s worth everybody’s time.
Updated from a December 2018 article.
Like what you read here? Get yourself a subscription to daily or weekly updates. It’s free – and you can change your preferences or unsubscribe anytime.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
Are you motivating your audience to take action? How do you know which creative assets compel your audience to act?
Understanding how your audience interacts with your creative is crucial to generating leads, making sales, and keeping your readers coming back. But knowing which does better is not all about numbers. It’s an art and a science. It requires trial and error and lots of creative juices.
One of the best ways to approach these motivations is through A/B testing — comparing the performance of one creative against another.
This can be anything from calls to action, button color, images, tone … you name it, you can test it. Today, I’m going to focus on the power of CTAs and matching content to intent. Then, I’ll dig into the overall testing process — while testing can be intimidating, I have some tips for success.
Is one CTA better than another?
Can one CTA rule them all? Probably not, because motivation is not the same for everybody.
What motivates you to listen to a podcast? Is the host or guest someone you’ve heard of? Did someone recommend it to you?
Why did you provide your email to download that e-book? Did you want to get a statistic for your proposal? Does it tackle a topic that you know little about?
Motivations are many, but here’s the universal secret: The cost must be less than the benefit.
In content and marketing, forms and other conversion points (where people act) are the best places for testing the audience’s motivations. Some in the industry refer to this as conversion rate optimization (CRO) — a means to understand and improve the conversion rate for subscriptions, downloads, follows — anything you can measure as a rate as the number of people who took an action over the number who could have taken an action (i.e., page views, clicks, emails sent).
Finance can be scary – but Chime taps into user motivation
The financial services industry constantly tests all its content, landing pages, and ads because it knows motivation can change dramatically depending on a person’s financial situation. I have a few examples of how Chime approached testing for its debit card and savings account features.
They know that some people are looking for a free product that doesn’t have monthly fees. That’s who this ad targets, using the copy “no monthly fees” above the simple form requesting an email address.
However, they have also built a brand as a “popular” choice for banking — and here they use the power of peer pressure with the copy, “Join the millions using Chime,” above the email entry box.
You can start to see how there can be 100 variants of copy and imagery, each appealing to a different segment of the audience.
Chime leans into each of these concepts, with each ad matching a corresponding themed landing page. Here’s the landing page for the “Join millions using Chime” ad:
The ad’s landing page uses the same phrasing and image followed by more explanation: “Your account shouldn’t cost you money — no overdraft fees, no minimum balance, no monthly service fees, no foreign transaction fees, no transfer fees.” Below that, they show features of the Chime checking account and Visa debit card.
Chime has tested dozens of these variants — a recent AI-driven test even found different versions worked for different people at different times of day in different geographies. Isn’t that wild? Let’s take a look:
The first three versions include the same image — a picture of a person’s hand holding a Chime debit card on top of a restaurant bill.
In this home page version, the headline says, “Banking made awesome,” with the subtitle “Make the switch to the bank account that helps you save money automatically.” This version won in a straight A/B test.
But in this version, the headline reads: “Meet the bank account that has your back,” followed by the same subtitle as the first version. It earned a 30% performance lift over the best overall performer from people viewing it between 5 and 7 p.m.
The third version uses a different headline, “Save effortlessly and automatically,” and the subtitle, “Saving money is hard. Chime makes it easy.” This one worked best for people on mobile devices (a 23% lift in account openings compared to the overall best performer).
The final version includes a visual of the Chime app on two mobile phones with the headline to the left, “Banking that has your back,” and the subhead, “Signing up takes less than five minutes.” This one worked best for people in Illinois.
These examples illustrate that your audience doesn’t live in a bubble and is not all motivated by the same things. But you need good ideas before you can test.
How do you get ideas? The first step is to go out into the world and look at the work other people are doing! Write them down or save screenshots in a folder. Bring them up in a brainstorming session.
What should you not do? Don’t assume what worked for someone else will work for you. It might, but you won’t know until you test it. If it doesn’t, move on. Remember, there are no bad ideas in brainstorming. The only way you can be creative and come up with great ideas to test is to stop saying, “That won’t work.” Instead, give the team a chance to build on fun ideas and then figure out how it could work with certain changes.
All testing starts with data
The best testing programs start with data. What data do you see every day? How many subscribers did you get? How many clicked? How many people came to the website?
In Google’s Universal Analytics days, this device category was a favorite report of mine because it showed observable differences between the performance of desktop users versus mobile users.
Click to enlarge
As this report illustrates, mobile users converted at about half the rate of desktop users. Why? Is something broken, or is there something about how we talk to mobile users that doesn’t resonate? Should we just give up on trying to convert mobile users and stop paying for mobile ad traffic?
HOT TAKE: If you don’t look at the difference between desktop and mobile users, you are failing as a marketer. People on their phones are usually multitasking and see a much smaller screen. They are in a different headspace researching a product, going through a sales funnel, or dealing with a shopping cart than a desktop visitor. The latter has a bigger screen (and maybe more than one) and is less likely to be distracted.
Ask why, then test your hypotheses
Your team should brainstorm why there’s such a difference between mobile and desktop users. Next, take your observation and add some test ideas. For example:
Could we nudge mobile users toward a higher purchase?
Could we suggest things for them to add to their cart?
Could we reframe our benefits?
Remember those Chime examples? The ads that performed well for a mobile audience focused on easy and fast banking. The results make sense because when someone’s on their phone, they’re distracted, they’re on a train, etc.
Again, it’s all about what benefit(s) motivate your audience to act.
Once you have some ideas based on your observations and research, formulate your testing hypothesis around why something would work, such as:
This [change in approach] will result in [change in key metric(s)] because [theory as to why the change will have the specific effect.]
A well-crafted hypothesis can teach you something even if it doesn’t prove true. You’ve still learned something about your audience’s motivations. You can cross that idea off the list and move on to another idea about what might motivate them more.
A hypothesis also helps you stay focused. So many times, bosses say things like, “I want to change these 18 things. Let’s run it as a test, and let me know how it goes by the end of the week.”
Tell them, “No. If you change 18 things and the performance stays the same, we’ve learned nothing. Did one thing have a positive impact and another a negative impact, so they canceled each other out? That’s a lot of wasted time and energy.”
Consider this sample hypothesis:
Including customer reviews on our landing page [change] will increase conversions [metric] because potential customers will feel that their decision to purchase has been validated by their peers [motivation-based theory].
Simple, right?
How to run organized tests
To test that hypothesis, you would add customer reviews to the page and test their impact.
Before you start the test, set yourself up for success. Every test should have:
A unique name that makes clear what you tested
A judgment on the difficulty of implementing the changes (to help you prioritize)
Primary metric(s) for success, such as a click-through rate, conversion rate, or performance metric.
Spreadsheets work well for organizing your test. This example shows how I lay out a testing spreadsheet. (You can download the template from my website).
The columns and some of their corresponding lines include:
Test name — competitive rate comparison, headline order, interactive elements, etc.
Barrier to overcome — aggressive competition, make high interest rate more attractive, etc.
Test description — emphasize a competitive comparison, reorder the headline to show rate first, etc.
Hypothesis — emphasizing how competitive our rate is in the market, more users will view us as the most attractive option, improving applications and deposits
Audience/channel — all landing page visitors, display ads, search, etc.
Technical effort — low, medium, high
Expected impact — low, medium, high
Learning priority — low, medium, high
Total score — sum of technical effort, expected impact, and learning priority scores
The three columns before the total score are used to calculate an effort-benefit score. Here’s how to calculate it:
I give a high-impact test a rating of three. A low-impact test gets one (or a zero when I don’t think it will have any impact, but my boss wants to run it anyway). A medium impact gets a two. Here’s what it looks like with numbers:
High Impact (3) + Medium Priority (2) –Medium Effort (2) = Effort-benefit score (3)
Sort the spreadsheet by the effort-benefit score to help with testing prioritization.
Testing tips
Consider these three suggestions to help your testing run more smoothly:
Run only one test at a time. If you run multiple tests at the same time, you won’t have any idea which change created the impact.
Sample size calculators, such as this one from Optimizely, can help you understand how much traffic you need and at what conversion rate to determine if the test and its results are significant.
Don’t frequently check the numbers. I ran a test that had a clear winner early on. But two weeks later, the results were the opposite. So, let your test run for at least two weeks.
Bringing it together
Remember, you need ideas to test. Look out in the world for inspiration, gather examples, and take your screenshots. Next, do some research to help you understand what motivates your audience. Prioritize your ideas. Write a hypothesis about what would make a difference. Test that hypothesis. Evaluate it based on your success metric. Which thing did better? Validate your hypothesis or toss it out and try another one.
And then do it all again.
Register to attend Content Marketing World in San Diego. Use the code BLOG100 to save $100. Can’t attend in person this year? Check out the Digital Pass for access to on-demand session recordings from the live event through the end of the year.
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
I don’t, but I’m intrigued by one thing: The goal of golf is to play the least amount of golf.
Think about it. The winner is the person who swings their clubs the fewest times.
A smart content strategy should work in a similar way.
Last week, I talked with a B2B technology firm in a workshop. We discussed how the B2B buyer’s journey is more complicated these days. Four to five people (registration) make up a committee that does all their research independently. It’s not uncommon for these groups to end up with more than 50 pieces of content to inform their decision.
The interesting part is the question of differentiation. Increasingly, your goal as marketing practitioners is not to differentiate at the “Google Search state” and get the prospect to download your thought leadership. Your goal is to differentiate your company from that stack of content that the committee sifts through.
So, yeah, the content team’s standard operating procedure is, well, more. More content is the answer.
Is more content the answer?
My clients often tell me they feel the content marketing team creates too much content. They say things like: “Everyone wants more content, but so much of what we create is wasted.”
At first, that seems counterintuitive. If they’re wasting content, why don’t they just produce less?
Suggest that, and you’ll get this pushback: “If we produce less, we might waste a smaller amount. But everyone still wants more.”
But here’s what all that really means. When the team provides a fire hose of content, there’s too much waste, but everybody’s thirst is quenched. When the content team gives a garden hose of content, fewer assets go unused, but everybody still feels thirsty.
And now, with AI, you really have the ability to push more water through whatever size hose you have.
This challenge isn’t confined to content marketing. It happens in modern marketing planning, too. Everyone in B2B marketing and sales seems to think they need more. More content. More marketing. More leads. More opportunities. More sales.
More always seems better or at least less risky. So, many content and marketing teams build their strategies to answer the question: “How do we get more?”
But here’s the dirty little secret of content in business: “More” is never enough. It does not matter how big your team is; more will never be enough to win the game of content.
It took me a long time to figure out this content marketing conundrum. When I’d tell people more isn’t the answer, they’d ask, “Then how much content should we produce?”
My old answer was, “As much as you think you can be great at.”
I used to think you should deliver as much content as you can while maintaining the quality standards you’ve set (assuming you’ve set any.)
But that advice is wrong.
If the question of how to get more content drives your strategy, your strategy is doomed. You’ll never produce enough.
The better question comes from golf: How can you create more aces, eagles, and birdies?
In other words, how little is enough to win the game?
Do just enough
Any great concert, television series, movie, or novel makes the audience wish it would go on. They’re engaged, they’re moved, and they want more.
Many great experiences come in shorter packages. The Great Gatsby is just 180 pages long, and the film Casablanca lasts only 100 minutes. The amazing TV series Better Call Saul ended after six short seasons (13 episodes each).
Though the audience wanted more, the creators told stories exactly as long as they needed to be.
But how many times have you come away from a series saying, “That was pretty good, but it could have been three episodes instead of eight?” That’s a classic symptom of defaulting to more.
That’s not to say long content or a lot of content can’t be effective. War and Peace wouldn’t be War and Peace if it weren’t 1,200 pages.
However, I’ve found content and marketing teams feel most effective when the culture focuses on knowing how much is enough instead of chasing more.
Think about it like this. Whenever I talk to content marketing teams, they view it like this, “Oh, we need to produce four blog posts this month. That means we need to have four distinct ideas and write four articles of 1,500 words each. Let’s assign a resource to that.”
Perhaps they should look at it like this: “We have four stories to create, and each one will be as long as it needs to be. And the third story may be big enough that it would be better served as a two-parter, so we’ll really only have three blog posts to create this month.”
In a perfect world, creative content workers would spend less time assembling content and more time thinking of innovative and remarkable content to create.
In most businesses, though, it works the other way around. Content teams get stretched thin, fulfilling all the requests for too many projects. They can’t assemble digital assets fast enough to keep up with the firehose of requests.
Here’s the punchline: Nine out of 10 times, an audit reveals that my clients aren’t producing too much content but creating too many digital assets. I suggest they stop filling everyone’s days with assembling and producing assets.
Instead, I tell them to figure out which content will be enough.
Drive and putt for impact
Now when clients ask how much content they should produce, I tell them this: If you want to win at content marketing, produce as little as you need to get the impact you want.
Don’t aim to produce overwhelming amounts of content even if you can and even if it’s great. Instead, aim to produce just enough to deliver the intended value and create the behavioral change you seek.
Get through the course in as few swings as possible.
Don’t ask, “How do we create more?” Instead, ask, “What is enough?”
That question forces you to define an objective — an impact — to create and measure. It also forces you to define “enough.”
Enough to what? Enough content to create 10% more leads? Enough to acquire 1,000 subscribers? Enough to satisfy the sales enablement team with the budget you have?
Once you define “enough,” it’s game on for content golf. Play as little as you need to win. Focus on bringing your best game.
Let’s get to work on your swing.
It’s your story. Tell it well.
Subscribe to workday or weekly CMI emails to get Rose-Colored Glasses in your inbox each week.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
But is it likely? Is it even possible? What would it mean for marketers? What does the consideration even mean for marketers?
Well, we asked CMI’s chief strategy advisor, Robert Rose, for his take. Watch this video or read on:
Why Alphabet may want HubSpot
Alphabet, the parent company of Google, apparently is contemplating the acquisition of inbound marketing giant HubSpot.
The potential price could be in the range of $30 billion to $40 billion. That would make Alphabet’s largest acquisition by far. The current deal holding that title happened in 2011 when it acquired Motorola Mobility for more than $12 billion. It later sold it to Lenovo for less than $3 billion.
If the HubSpot deal happens, it would not be in character with what the classic evil villain has been doing for the past 20 years.
At first glance, you might think the deal would make no sense. Why would Google want to spend three times as much as it’s ever spent to get into the inbound marketing — the CRM and marketing automation business?
At a second glance, it makes a ton of sense.
I don’t know if you’ve noticed, but I and others at CMI spend a lot of time discussing privacy, owned media, and the deprecation of the third-party cookie. I just talked about it two weeks ago. It’s really happening.
All that oxygen being sucked out of the ad tech space presents a compelling case that Alphabet should diversify from third-party data and classic surveillance-based marketing.
Yes, this potential acquisition is about data. HubSpot would give Alphabet the keys to the kingdom of 205,000 business customers — and their customers’ data that almost certainly numbers in the tens of millions. Alphabet would also gain access to the content, marketing, and sales information those customers consumed.
Conversely, the deal would provide an immediate tip of the spear for HubSpot clients to create more targeted programs in the Alphabet ecosystem and upload their data to drive even more personalized experiences on their own properties and connect them to the Google Workspace infrastructure.
When you add in the idea of Gemini, you can start to see how Google might monetize its generative AI tool beyond figuring out how to use it on ads on search results pages.
What acquisition could mean for HubSpot customers
I may be stretching here but imagine this world. As a Hubspoogle customer, you can access an interface that prioritizes your owned media data (e.g., your website, your e-commerce catalog, blog) when Google’s Gemini answers a question).
Recent reports also say Google may put up a paywall around the new premium features of its artificial intelligence-powered Search Generative Experience. Imagine this as the new gating for marketing. In other words, users can subscribe to Google’s AI for free, but Hubspoogle customers can access that data and use it to create targeted offers.
The acquisition of HubSpot would immediately make Google Workspace a more robust competitor to Microsoft 365 Office for small- and medium-sized businesses as they would receive the ADDED capability of inbound marketing.
But in the world of rented land where Google is the landlord, the government will take notice of the acquisition. But — and it’s a big but, I cannot lie (yes, I just did that). The big but is whether this acquisition dance can happen without going afoul of regulatory issues.
Some analysts say it should be no problem. Others say, “Yeah, it wouldn’t go.” Either way, would anybody touch it in an election year? That’s a whole other story.
What marketers should realize
So, what’s my takeaway?
It’s a remote chance that Google will jump on this hard, but stranger things have happened. It would be an exciting disruption in the market.
The sure bet is this. The acquisition conversation — as if you needed more data points — says getting good at owned media to attract and build audiences and using that first-party data to provide better communication and collaboration with your customers are a must.
It’s just a matter of time until Google makes a move. They might just be testing the waters now, but they will move here. But no matter what they do, if you have your customer data house in order, you’ll be primed for success.
Want more content marketing tips, insights, and examples? Subscribe to workday or weekly emails from CMI.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
Creating content gets a lot of attention. But it can’t get an audience without a well-executed content publishing process.
Content production requires systems and easily repeatable processes to get the content ready for the publish button and everything that happens after that.
To accomplish that, your team needs an operations leader who oversees and often implements all those steps in the content publishing process. They typically work with the assistance of software tools to help organize content production, whether that’s project management systems like Trello and Asana or a simple shared spreadsheet.
If you’re new to the role, exploring how to improve your operations, or looking to set up a content publishing process, Lisa Dougherty, CMI’s blog operations and community director, can offer some help.
She explains how she organizes the editorial operations that make it possible for CMI to publish and promote fresh content every weekday on our primary website (www.contentmarketinginstitute.com).
The content publishing process Lisa honed over the decade helps us keep track of content from multiple authors through the many stages of editing and production. It also serves as the connecting point for CMI team members who promote the content through email and social media.
Here’s how Lisa does it:
Get organized to track content progress
The team member responsible for the content production operation must know the status of each asset. At the same time, they must create and maintain the post-production publication schedule. These two documents can be closely tied to your editorial planning.
In CMI’s case, the team uses separate sheets (tabs) within one shared master spreadsheet called the tracker. One sheet details the status of the content assets, and one serves as the weekday publication calendar. Lisa manages both sheets in the tracker.
Content development status tracker
The content development tracker shows the status of every editorial article in development. It lists the topic, the person responsible for creating it, due date, status (creating, editing, ready for production), along with any related notes, such as links to include, special calls to action, etc.
When a task is complete, the person responsible updates the status column.
Some tools trigger notifications to relevant team members when an asset’s status changes. At CMI, checking the status on the tracker is ingrained into each person’s workflow, so such notifications are rarely necessary. Other content marketing teams use the notification feature in their project management software when an asset moves to the next step on the dashboard.
Content publishing production tracker and calendar
A second sheet in the primary document acts as the publication production calendar. It shows each day’s content (CMI publishes five days a week) along with key information needed to publish the asset.
Your production tracker might look different depending on publication frequency, formats, channels, etc. CMI’s version includes these columns:
Publication date
Author
Production status (two options: loaded in WordPress or proofed in WordPress)
Notes (Lisa lists the date she requested the cover image, any not-yet-complete elements like video embeds or graphics, and the date she sends a preview to the author or featured sources.)
Headline
Category (primary topic based on CMI’s core categories)
Preview copy (what appears in daily email)
Excerpt copy
Call to action
URL
TIP: Don’t rely on the default URL your content management platform creates. Change the default to include appropriate keywords (use hyphens to separate words) and stay within 50 to 80 characters.
Manage content from multiple sources
Content operations managers often coordinate content as it comes in from internal and external sources.
Submissions, drafts, revisions, and updates from guest content submissions, internal subject matter experts, and members of the content marketing team add up to a lot of files to manage.
You can make this process more efficient with these tips:
First, the content should be saved in a centralized location that is accessible to everyone involved in the creation, review, and publishing process. CMI currently uses Microsoft OneDrive. Other teams might use Dropbox, Google Drive, or other cloud-based platforms.
Second, set up a standardized process for organizing files and naming conventions. This helps with version control. You never want to publish an outdated version of the content, and you don’t want to have to ask three people to figure out which version to use.
Here’s how CMI organizes the content on its server:
The master folder — CMI Editorial Team — includes all the content.
Under the master folder are individual folders for each asset in the content publishing process. It follows a standard naming convention:
Author First Name Last Name – Topic
Example: Jodi Harris – Customer Retention
Each asset folder includes:
Folder labeled “drafts” and contains the original and edited versions
Folder labeled “images”
Final version labeled “AUTHOR LAST NAME — Topic — editor initials CLEAN EDIT content manager initials date FINAL”
Example: HARRIS – Customer Retention – ag EDITS CLEAN ld 10-12-23 FINAL
Once an article is published, Lisa moves the asset folder to the Articles Published folder.
Some content teams label the asset folder with its publication date. Lisa prefers not to do that because the date may change, but the author and topic will not.
Finalizing the content for publication
With systems set up for tracking the content’s progress, the publication calendar, and the content production status, the operations person moves on to the more detailed work — readying the content to go live.
Since this process often involves only one person, you may be tempted to just do it and not take the time to document the process. Don’t. Standardizing the content publishing process and writing it down are essential so another team member can step in and execute it if the operations person isn’t available.
CMI uses a checklist to ensure the process is followed and no one forgets a step. It includes:
Conduct a post-editing review to ensure basic readability and understanding.
Check all names of people, companies, and tools mentioned in the content.
Identify internal linking opportunities, adding them to relevant words and phrases and the handpicked related content listing at the article’s end.
Find or create images and insert them into the document.
Add embed code for videos, GIFs, etc.
Review and update the headline and call to action as necessary.
Import Word document and add visual elements into WordPress.
Add audio, listen for mispronunciations, and correct them.
Schedule for publication.
TIP: Internal links and handpicked related content features in CMI articles are top-performing content on the site. Traditionally, CMI uses older popular posts for internal links attached to keywords and newer popular posts with their titles in handpicked related content listed at the end of each article.
After the content is loaded into WordPress, a proofreader gives it one last review while ensuring all the links point to the right source and open in the correct window (CMI links open in the same window, while outside links open in a new window).
Last steps before publishing
With everything ready to go live, communication is sent to all relevant stakeholders, from the creators and sources to the social media and email production team. You can do it automatically through your project management software or manually send an email or direct message to the stakeholders. The team should agree on the notification delivery method.
Click to enlarge
TIP: Lisa sends a standard email to all authors and sources for whom she has contact information. She attaches the Word document so they can review (approval is not required to publish), includes the URL where they can view the article once it’s live, and notes how they can help promote and share their work on social.
Get organized
It takes a lot of work to get your content ready for attention. By detailing a content publishing process, your content production will take less time, frustrations will be minimized, and mistakes and omissions will be rare occurrences. Your audience may not give thanks publicly, so just know all those content consumption statistics reflect your good operations work.
All tools are mentioned by the author. If you have a tool to suggest, tag Content Marketing Institute on social media.
Like what you read here? Get yourself a subscription to daily or weekly updates. It’s free – and you can change your preferences or unsubscribe anytime.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
As Google experiments with AI in its standard search results and its Search Generative Experience (SGE), marketers must understand how to adapt their content strategies for new AI-impacted search experiences.
Since 2023, Google has been prolific in its AI experimentation, changing the way content is represented in search results. Its content-led SGE recently moved out of its testing lab to show up in a small percentage of results in Google’s main search interface.
Brands that produce content experiences that align with new search behaviors and focus on conversion stand a better chance to survive the search change.
Google adds generative AI, first-person reviews, and anti-spam actions
Your news feed says all. Search and generative AI investments are everywhere. And it’s not just Google — new entrants, such as Perplexity AI and You.com, are on the search scene. Meanwhile, OpenAI is working on a search engine powered by Microsoft’s Bing.
Still, Google owns the biggest market share in search, so let’s focus on the ways AI is affecting Google SEO.
Reddit and new content sources
Google added new content sources to its traditional results and Search Generative Experience.
In traditional search results, adding more content sources helps fine-tune its AI technologies. The recent content licensing deal with Reddit is a prime example. You can already see its content appearing more often in traditional search results.
This screenshot shows the search engine results for “Is Volvo a good car?” A discussion from the Volvo subreddit appears as the third result on the page (or fourth if you count the people-also-ask module.)
Click to enlarge
SGE appearance
The image below shows the SGE for the Volvo query. The first paragraphs are an AI-generated summary drawing on ratings from RepairPal (after an alert explaining the experimental nature of the generative AI content.)
Below the SGE summary, a search box prompts the visitor to ask a follow-up question. After that element, the Reddit discussion on Volvo reliability appears.
Click to enlarge
Showing Reddit content in SERPs lets Google show more first-person reviews and opinions (the experience element of Google’s EEAT (experience, expertise, authoritativeness, and trustworthiness) for search ratings.
But how will Google distinguish between subjective, objective, and informative opinions? With Reddit content, which can include positive and negative opinions readily on display, brands will need to follow relevant discussions on Reddit.
Google goes after spam sites
You may have read about Google’s latest update, which aims to avoid sites with low-quality (often AI-generated) content and give helpful content more prominence in SERPs.
This hammers home the message to avoid relying on generative AI alone for content creation. Content needs a human touch to earn the experience, expertise, authoritativeness, and trustworthiness that Google and, more importantly, searchers want to see.
Expect more penalties from Google for content that’s just churned out from AI prompts.
SGE’s impact on brands
SGE is the rollout that will impact every industry and content marketer.
My company, BrightEdge, built a tool to detect how and where search engines experiment with AI and new content formats. The chart below shows an estimate of the percentage of queries by industry affected by SGE results once it’s fully rolled out.
Health care will see the biggest impact, with 76% of its searches affected by SGE. Finance will be the least affected, with only 17% of queries impacted by SGE. Here’s how SGE will affect other industries:
E-commerce (49%)
B2B technology (48%)
Insurance (45%)
Education (44%)
Restaurants (36%)
Entertainment (36%)
Travel (30%)
Click to enlarge
Once SGE rolls out completely, it will likely impact over $40 billion per year in ad revenue on Google for marketers per BrightEdge estimates.
How to prepare for SGE and changing search behavior
Google has always shown relevant sources and articles so searchers can make informed decisions. With the generative AI changes, Google’s engine now asserts an opinion. This represents a fundamental shift in how a search engine responds to queries.
Imagine you search the web to learn more about a BMW model you’re interested in. Previously, a Google search would display results with links such as BMW’s official site, Top Gear, Consumer Reports, and Carfax. The searcher then could choose the resources to explore and form an opinion about the vehicle.
In the generative AI world, Google’s primary result might not be a direct link to BMW’s website. Instead, it could be AI-generated content that provides an evaluative perspective. The AI content might include important factors to consider when looking at a BMW, such as the potential for high maintenance expenses or issues with parts availability due to supply chain challenges. This AI-curated summary will be presented before the searcher can see the resources with links for further exploration.
This shift may lead to reduced but higher-quality traffic. Brands are likely to experience better conversion rates. The reason? Consumers are more likely to act because they’ve been influenced by prior engagements and information provided by Google.
Still, you’ll need to adapt to the new search environment. Here are some tips on how to prepare.
Focus on the search basics
Solidify your foundation of SEO and website fundamentals. The essential elements will gain more significance as time progresses.
Make sure your website is optimized for user-friendliness and complies with Google’s guidelines regarding Core Web Vitals, Helpful Content, and EEAT (experience, expertise, authoritativeness, trustworthiness).
You may also want to review these tips for optimizing content for SGE.
Deepen your understanding of new search behaviors
Use data to grasp user and conversational intent, especially since these factors influence the AI-generated search results. Identifying high-value searches is essential.
Make sure that your content responds to the specific query and addresses its broader context to attract results for long-tail keyword searches.
Content generated by AI draws from reliable and credible sources. Ensure your brand’s content is considered an authoritative source.
The growing prominence of trusted sources and an increase in consumer reviews signal a pivotal change: Brands are likely to have less control over the customer journey.
Align content with other marketing disciplines
Search engine results now encompass an array of media types and formats, including social media, reviews, and news sources. So, teams in marketing, content creation, digital strategies, brand management, design, social media, and public relations must align closely.
Strategies for an AI-first future
According to BrightEdge research, 98% of enterprise organizations say they’ll prioritize SEO in 2024. And 94% of organizations are looking to integrate SEO into all marketing (omnichannel) strategies.
Strategies for adapting your content approach to new search experiences will vary by industry. Here are a few examples.
E-commerce: Google commonly presents content for e-commerce queries via product viewers. SGE replaces these with better, more visual, and informational (combined) content.
Google has experimented with several formats, including a general shopping result that details what a searcher would expect to see in a universal listing. However, as SGE results have evolved, so have the ways a user can view products.
This image shows an example of SGE’s integrated product viewer carousel with grouping for apparel, which displays multiple apparel options in a single display.
These tips will help you prepare for the various viewer modules (see viewer examples).
Optimize for trend relevance: Aligning category pages with current trends can increase your chance of being included in SGE dynamic displays.
Incorporate product reviews: Showing product reviews on your site boosts credibility.
Present clear pricing Information: Use schema markup to highlight pricing details.
Travel, restaurants, and local: Places have long been a key module for Google. Now, we’re seeing the places module showing up in about 45% of SGE queries. So, make sure to include location-based keywords.
You might also try these optimization suggestions:
Monitor and respond to reviews.
Tailor your local listings for location-specific queries.
Keep an eye on how and where SGE displays local modules. SGE displays local results even in queries without location-specific terms.
Entertainment: SGE entertainment results are primarily informational. But more reviews (and warnings for age-appropriate content) are appearing in both traditional search and SGE.
Get ready to shift your SEO thinking
Whoever provides the best experience for their target consumers will win in the new AI search experiences. Focus on third-party content reviews, social, PR, and brand authority. Expect your competitive landscape to change with new entrants that might eat into your market share.
Be aware, ready, and prepared to optimize for multiple AI search experiences.
All tools mentioned in this article were suggested by the author. If you’d like to suggest a tool, share the article on social media with a comment.
Want more content marketing tips, insights, and examples? Subscribe to workday or weekly emails from CMI.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
First, did you see the new movie Ghostbusters: Frozen Empire? If you didn’t, just think about the last movie you saw (for me, it was the remake of Road House — ugh). Did you like it?
I reference Ghostbusters only because it scored poorly among critics (44% on Rotten Tomatoes) vs. audiences (84%). Additionally, Ghostbusters scored well at the box office, hitting $45 million in revenue in its first weeks of release.
But here’s the thing: Whether you thought the movie was wonderful or awful — you’re right, and you’re wrong. Even the data can’t tell you if you’re correct. If you loved the recent action spy movie Argylle, the data — box office, critics, and audience reviews — would say you’re wrong. But if you respond with, “But Henry Cavill,” you’re not wrong.
Now, the second question: If you’re experimenting with generative AI to create your marketing content, do you believe you get consistently valuable results, decent but not great results, or poor results?
I’ve asked this question of a few audiences lately, and most people pick the middle — consistently decent but not great. However, independent of your answer, I know one thing. You’re all wrong. And you’re all right.
It’s all a matter of perspective. All marketing content is like a movie. What moves you may not move me. The data may say your content is successful, but whether an individual values or is motivated by it is subjective.
Stuck between uncertainty and doubt with generative AI
A recent talk included a conversation about a bank that approached an AI company with 500 use cases that it wanted to apply large language models to.
Yep, they’re stuck.
I find the trend pervasive. Companies of all sizes search for the right uses of generative AI. Leadership places extreme pressure on their teams to “find efficiency” and “usefulness” from generative AI. It’s so new and so innovative; there MUST be something you can do with it.
Every swipe of a social media feed, podcast episode, webinar, or industry event turns up uses of generative AI. It’s hard to keep up with all the possibilities because every day someone comes up with something you’re not doing.
But is generative AI serving marketers?
It’s not. That is why you feel stuck. It’s a classic paradox of choice. You think having so many use cases to choose from makes it easier to apply generative AI to your content and marketing. But it really makes it more difficult to decide which applications to use.
The most insidious part? You can’t know if the AI-generated content is better until you commit to one.
Here’s what I mean.
Generative AI’s response to a prompt is designed to be unpredictable. If you ask the tool to rewrite, edit, or create something, it never responds the same way twice. If you press and ask if that’s the best it can do, it typically responds with another variation. It doesn’t stop rewriting until you stop the process. It will never say, “Well, the third iteration was the best version, so stop asking.”
Generative AI doesn’t always give you the right content, nor does it give you the best content. It simply gives the most probable content. If you think that’s good enough, you’re right. And you’re wrong.
Newness and efficiency bring the necessary perspective
I’ve begun to help clients get unstuck by taking a more structured approach to the assembly of their use cases. In marketing, two spectrums can be applied to generative AI. The first involves a new or existing capability. Is the use case a job already being done where generative AI could make it more valuable? Or is it something that wasn’t possible or so difficult it wasn’t worth the human effort?
A real-time translation of customer service calls is an example of an existing capability made easier with AI. Rewriting a research paper into friendlier versions for different personas using AI is an example of a new capability.
The second spectrum centers around efficiency. Will this use of generative AI make you more efficient? Will it save time and resources? Or is it less efficient? Will it need more time and resources?
Using a generative AI tool to generate SEO keywords or fix grammar is an example of being more efficient. An AI tool scanning your CRM data as well as LinkedIn to assemble a content gap report is an example of being less efficient. You would add the task to someone’s to-do list because the result presents a valuable new use of their time.
With these spectrums in mind, you can assemble a four-quadrant chart to assess the generative AI uses. The vertical line goes from new capability at the top to existing capability at the bottom. It is intersected in the middle by the efficiency line, going from less efficient on the left to more efficient on the right.
The four quadrants fit into these categories:
Enhancement — a new capability that makes you more efficient. For example, a generative AI tool learns your brand guidelines, tone, and editorial jargon (new capability). It automatically points out these flaws (more efficiency) to help you create consistently well-branded content.
Refinement — an existing capability that makes you more efficient. For example, a generative AI tool can produce a real-time translation (more efficient) of content for customer service requests (existing capability).
Supplement — an existing capability that will be less efficient but more valuable. A great example is competitive research. By adding a bit more time and resources to it using AI, you can do comprehensive competitive analysis on an ongoing basis.
Complement — a new capability that makes you less efficient. These uses are true innovation. For example, you build a new chatbot using a custom learning model that scans all training documentation to provide an interactive helper application for customers. The amazing new experience will require greater attention to the quality and structure of your training manuals.
These categories may feel esoteric. As I noted, the cases can fall on a spectrum, so one use might be at the top of the upper right quadrant (very new capability and highly efficient), while another might be closer to the chart’s center point in that quadrant (somewhat new capability and generally efficient).
However, this categorizing chart is practical.
Use-case categories get you unstuck
One of the biggest tensions in generative AI planning arises when the use cases misalign with what you see as the priorities and what the senior leaders see as important.
Let me explain.
I’ve collected over 230 use cases for generative AI in content and marketing. Here’s how they break down into the four categories:
Enhancement (new capability, more efficient): 6%
Refinement (existing capability, more efficient): 31%
Supplement (existing capability, less efficient): 45%
Complement (new capability, less efficient): 18%
One-third of use cases fall under what you might characterize as the most common — the jobs done in everyday work made more efficient. But, interestingly, it’s only a third.
By far the most popular use cases (45%) are jobs once deprioritized because they took too much effort and are now worth doing because of generative AI. They actually add the need for more resources. This finding matches the early anecdotal evidence I gathered working with clients. Most generative AI integrations in marketing add new requirements for budget and resources, supplementing existing capabilities.
Also, unsurprising but nice to see is how few of the use cases fall in the enhancement category — things you couldn’t do before that also make you more efficient. Chalk this up to “We don’t know what we don’t know.” This generative AI adventure is still in its early days, and new capabilities are just starting to be discovered.
However, the most important takeaway is not about forcing some balance in the use cases in your work. Rather, it’s to understand where to prioritize so that you align with the leadership’s expectations. If you prioritize generative AI use in the supplement category but management expects AI to deliver a refinement use, for example, conflicts and tensions arise.
When you don’t pitch the use of generative AI correctly, you set yourself up for failure. I know a company recently proposed a new generative AI solution to create a set of content that would automatically create targeted/personalized content on their website. It was a true enhancement use case, but they pitched it as a refinement case — a way to save money. Of course, those two things didn’t align, and their pitch failed.
Only you can tell what’s good
As you assemble your teams and develop the use cases for generative AI in your marketing and content plan, remember to truly understand what value they will provide.
They will all look fantastic and produce good results. They will also all look awful, like big money and time pits. Only you and the team can determine which is which. But if you align on what challenge each will solve, at least you’ll know what’s most important—the critic’s score, the audience’s score, or the box office.
It’s your story. Tell it well.
Subscribe to workday or weekly CMI emails to get Rose-Colored Glasses in your inbox each week.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
What’s really going on with generative AI and marketing?
We wanted to know, so we went straight to the source and asked.
No surprise, generative AI said a lot is going on — 73% of companies use generative AI in their marketing campaigns, according to Statista. CapGemini says almost 60% of organizations are implementing or exploring the use of generative AI in marketing.
Last week, Accenture announced it’s working with Adobe to develop solutions to “help organizations create personalized content at scale and accelerate the transformation of their content supply chains.” Andreessen Horowitz released research that shocked them about changing attitudes around budgeting and planning for generative AI.
But all that doesn’t really tell us what’s going on with generative AI and marketing. So, instead of refining our prompt, we went to Robert Rose, CMI’s chief strategy advisor, for his take. Read on or watch this video:
Lots of generative AI equals lots of use cases
It can feel like everybody is moving a lot faster with generative AI than you and your brand. But is that the truth?
Well, take a breath. It seems that many use cases exist, but they are not very useful.
An enterprise going to a technology provider with over 500 use cases for the application of any technology is not just useless; it’s counterproductive.
Andreesen Horowitz, better known as A16z, has released research that amazed them — budgets for generative AI are skyrocketing. They found:
Promising results from generative AI experiments prompted enterprises to increase their budget two to five times higher this year than last.
Leaders are reallocating AI investments from last year’s “innovation budgets” into more permanent line items in IT, business units, and research and product development.
Top-down mandates to find and deploy generative AI solutions have been made in the last six months.
OK, let’s take a breath.
A16z is obviously doing some content marketing. It’s made at least 20 generative AI investments, including leading a $400-plus million Series A round for Mistral AI, OpenAI’s European competitor. Of course, A16z evangelizes for generative AI saving the world. They need enterprises to feel the push to spend millions of dollars.
Click on all the headlines, research reports, case studies, etc., and you’ll find a whole lot of “we believe” statements around generative AI: We believe we will spend more. We believe it will save headcount. We believe it will transform the marketing industry. We believe it can save the planet.
Generative AI has a lot of hype people. I don’t mind that. That’s at the heart of great marketing. But marketers who might use generative AI would do well to recall the words of Coach Taylor from Friday Night Lights, “Clear hearts, full hearts, can’t lose.”
Don’t believe all the hype
Consider a different hypothesis. Put a pause on all enterprise technology change initiatives.
I see more tech companies, consulting firms, and brands taking an overall slower approach in business. Growth in firms like Accenture and others has slowed quite a bit. Research shows IT-related budgets are also down.
Maybe the real story of generative AI’s integration is much slower.
Over the past six months, I’ve asked my network, clients, training attendees, and colleagues about how they’ve employed generative AI. So far, I have 235 unique use cases for generative AI and content and marketing. Most are creative and interesting. I can see the value. But some of them make me go, “You could do that. But is it that valuable?
As I’ve said, generative AI is not a strategy. It is an amazing, transformational innovation that can be applied to a strategy. In marketing, it’s a new ability to do something that you couldn’t do without huge human effort or something you can now do faster or more efficiently.
Why is that distinction important?
It explains why companies haven’t hurried to make enterprise-wide generative AI applications a priority. They talk like they are in a hurry, but the world doesn’t even know what “enterprise-level generative AI” looks like.
Realize the real lesson is this
Whether you’re a business of 100 or 10,000, generative AI takes time to figure it out. If your organization possesses a change-fatigue mindset or is still grappling with all the changes from the pandemic, nobody will rush to take on the BIG CHANGE project of generative AI.
The lesson is this. If senior leadership pressures you or your team about how generative AI can create efficiency, add capability, or futureproof your competitive advantage in marketing, don’t ask for the budget to acquire all the models so you can build 500 use cases.
Ask senior management for a budget for the change management necessary in marketing and content operations to create a new strategy. Then, you can assess the priorities for generative AI use cases and budget for the technology needed to do that.
Make the case for how you change with technology. Don’t compile a list of all the ways technology will change you.
Want more content marketing tips, insights, and examples? Subscribe to workday or weekly emails from CMI.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
As a kid, you probably learned the phrase, knowledge is power. As a marketer, you prove its validity every day through your content that educates, informs, and inspires your audience.
But knowledge isn’t a static construct.
Perceptions and attitudes change, innovations emerge, and new insights and ideas arrive to shake up everything you thought you knew. (Before 2016, did you know an alternative to “facts” existed?)
To excel in the current conditions and opportunities, make sure these content marketing terms and definitions are part of your knowledge base.
Note: I’ve organized these definitions into best-fit categories, though many span multiple areas.
Strategy terms
Audience
In a marketing context, audiences are targeted, clearly defined groups of individuals and/or organizations that willingly read, listen, view, or otherwise engage with your brand’s content, assuming they will benefit from it.
Pinpointing the target audience(s) your content will serve is one of the three pillars of a winning content strategy. But remember: Content marketing is about building a trusted relationship. Your content should have human resonance and reflect their needs, preferences, and priorities to earn their attention and loyalty.
Definitive resource: The Marketing Mandate: Build Stronger Bonds With Your Audience
Buy-in/business case
A business case captures the organization’s rationale for investing in content as a component of its marketing strategy. Typically delivered to executive management as a document or presentation, it’s a helpful tool for building stakeholder understanding and support to execute the program effectively.
At a minimum, your business case should address:
Why your company needs content marketing
How it can help your organization meet its marketing goals
Budget and resources
Expected outcomes and estimated times to achieve them
Executive management may struggle to understand how content drives the bottom-line business goals. A little education can go a long way toward winning over “content-clueless” business leaders.
Focus your buy-in conversation on the benefits they could gain and support your argument with data and proof-of-concept examples. You can use content to strengthen your pitch. Share relevant e-books, newsletters, and other sources of content industry expertise — the more they consume, the quicker they’ll experience those light-bulb moments of understanding.
Definitive resource: How To Snap Out of Strategic Malaise and Get Inspired for 2024 Content
Content marketing
The Content Marketing Institute defines content marketing as “a strategic marketing approach of creating and distributing valuable, relevant, and consistent content to attract and acquire a clearly defined audience — with the objective of driving profitable customer action.”
Content marketing can work best when used to complement other business strategies, including:
Account-based marketing
Branded content
Demand generation
Influencer marketing
Product marketing
Search engine optimization
Social media
Public relations
Definitive resource: Content Marketing Basics: How To Start (or Jumpstart) Your Content Practice
Content marketing strategy
Copyblogger defines content marketing strategy as a plan for attracting your ideal customers and moving them through your sales process by publishing and promoting useful content.
However, CMI lays it out more plainly: Your content marketing strategy is your why — why you are creating content (your business goal), whom it will serve (your audience), and how it will be unique (your mission).
Definitive resource: Developing a Content Marketing Strategy
Content strategy
Content strategy operates more broadly than a content marketing strategy. It is a plan for creating, managing, and distributing all content produced and shared across the enterprise — not just the content in a content marketing program or initiative. For example, the content’s development to deliver an optimal user experience would fall under a content strategy, not a content marketing strategy.
Content mission statement
A content mission statement is the centering principle of your brand’s unique content vision. Ideally, this statement reflects your business values, distinguishes your storytelling from competing content, and governs your content team’s creative and strategic decision-making. It includes:
What stories your brand will tell (e.g., topics)
How those stories take shape (e.g., core content formats and platforms)
How your content assets work collectively to create a desirable experience for your audience
Definitive resource: How To Write an Inspiring Content Marketing Mission Statement
Goals
Goals are the business outcomes your content marketing strategy will achieve. While the ultimate goal is profitable action, program goals should be more specific, such as sales growth, budget savings, or greater customer loyalty and brand satisfaction. Goals also must be measurable and include an achievement date.
Definitive resource: 4 Content Marketing Goals That Really Matter to the Business
Personas
A persona is a composite sketch of a target audience’s relevant characteristics based on validated commonalities. It informs your strategic plans for reaching, engaging, and driving your audience to take meaningful action on your content. Without well-researched personas, you can only guess what your audience wants, often reverting to creating content around what you know best (your products and company) instead of what your audience seeks.
Definitive resource: How To Build a Better Audience Persona
Planning and process terms
Channel and media planning
Media planning is the process of deciding where, when, and how often to deliver a message to an audience. The goal is to reach the biggest number of the right audience members with the right message as often as needed to achieve the desired effect (e.g., brand awareness, leads, sales).
Similarly, a channel plan — including social media planning — directs how your brand manages its content on the ever-evolving list of media platforms. It spells out the rationale and expectations for using each channel. Compiling this guidance ensures you don’t waste time and budget on distribution that can’t help your content marketing and business goals.
Definitive resource: How To Choose the Best Distribution Channels for Your Content
Content brief
Often provided to freelancers, consultants, and other outsourced writers assigned to create content, a content brief documents the guidelines and instructions to ensure a properly focused asset that meets the brand’s editorial standards and marketing expectations. A well-constructed brief should include an elevator-pitch description of the assignment, relevant branding details (e.g., tone, voice, and stylistic considerations), key messages, and target audience insights.
Content inventories and audits
Paula Land, author of Content Audits and Inventories: A Handbook, says a content inventory is a collection of data about your content. It’s a comprehensive, quantitative list — typically created in a spreadsheet — of all content assets, ideally across all content types, channels, and distribution formats. It enables marketers to make data-based content decisions.
In contrast, as Paula explains, a content audit is a qualitative evaluation of the inventoried content. It helps you see how your content helps (or hinders) your brand’s success. Assess your content against customer needs and business objectives to identify which assets are performing well (and which aren’t.)
Definitive resource: 4 Things To Ignore (and 3 Things To Do) in Your Next Content Audit
Content/editorial plan
A content or editorial plan details the operational, technical, tactical, and team resource decisions involved in executing your content strategy. This outlet helps ensure all the correct elements are in place to produce content efficiently and deliver the best possible experience for your audience.
Ideally, your plan should cover four key areas:
Governance and guidelines around the quality standards, preferred practices, and principles that define and distinguish your brand’s content
Processes and systems, such as the production tasks, workflows and routing practices, and technologies that facilitate the work
Team resources, including the roles and responsibilities and the skills required to fill them or address the gaps
Creative and distribution details, including key focal topics, content types and formats, calls to action, and priority channels and platforms.
Definitive resource: 4-Point Guide To Crafting a Winning Content Plan
Content operations
Content operations are the big-picture view of how all content-related organizational functions coordinate and manage their work. It covers all the components outlined in your content plan, from strategy and creative planning to governance, execution decision-making, measurement, and optimization.
Definitive resource: Don’t Avoid Content Operations; Use This Helpful Framework Now
Editorial calendar
An editorial calendar is a process tool for tracking and orchestrating the tactical execution of the content plan. It provides clear visibility on the critical details of the creative and production workflows, including topics, titles, authors, and images for each asset and the schedule for packaging, publishing, and promoting it.
Definitive resource: Editorial Calendar Tools and Templates To Help You Master Your Content To-Do List
Content workflow
Workflows are sets of tasks a team follows to complete a content asset. In her book Content Strategy for the Web, Kristina Halvorson says a content workflow determines “how content is requested, sourced, created, reviewed, approved, and delivered.”
At a minimum, they should outline critical tasks at each stage of the editorial process. Here’s a simple example:
Outline.
Write.
Review.
Edit.
Approve.
Publish.
Definitive resource: 5 Steps To Build a Content Operations Workflow That Helps Everybody
Creation terms
Copy editing, proofreading, and fact-checking
These editorial techniques ensure the content’s high quality, clarity, and accuracy. Each distinct approach serves a unique purpose.
Copy editing involves reviewing and editing content for mechanical errors or style inconsistencies that might impact quality or readability. Tasks include checking text for grammar, spelling, linguistic, or punctuation issues. A copy editor may also rewrite to fix problems with transitions, wordiness, jargon, and style.
Proofreading allows for scrutinizing the content in its almost-published state to catch any typographical or minor errors missed in editing or created during production.
Definitive resource: Master Content Proofreading and Editing With These Tips
Fact-checking verifies the content’s factual accuracy and sourcing. It ensures the content doesn’t spread disinformation, miscredit or misquote sources, get dinged for plagiarism or copyright infringement, or otherwise risk losing the audience’s trust. The importance of thorough fact-checking can’t be understated, especially when working with generative AI content tools.
Curation
Curation is the assembly, selection, categorization, commentary, and presentation of relevant content. The technique often involves your brand putting its spin on others’ content. It can also be applied to repackaging and repurposing your previously published content.
Definitive resource: 7 More Ways To Curate Content Like a Pro
Generative AI
As defined by IBM Research, generative artificial intelligence uses technologies built on large learning models (LLMs) to generate high-quality text, images, audio, video, and other content formats based on the data the models were trained on. These tools respond in real time to prompts posed in its interface — natural language text instructing the AI engine to perform a specific task.
Brands and tech providers have used this technology in back-end programming and chatbot applications for many years. The public launch of OpenAI’s ChatGPT in 2022 has made generative AI more accessible, affordable, and easy for brands and consumers to use in their content creation efforts.
Distribution and promotion terms
Accessibility
Accessibility involves creating a content experience that anyone can navigate, understand, and use. The term is often used in the context of the user, such as those who may have visual or auditory impairments. It also accounts for audiences who prefer to mute videos and read the captions.
Definitive resource: 5 Ideas To Make Your Content Accessible to All
Calls to action (CTAs)
Calls to action are statements or design elements highlighting actions you want the audience to take after engaging with the content, such as subscribing to your newsletter, attending an event, or exploring other relevant assets and offerings. The best CTAs are simple, straightforward, inviting, and easy to notice.
Channels
Channels are individual content distribution outlets, such as blogs, podcasts, newsletters, Facebook, Instagram, TikTok, YouTube, Vimeo, etc.
Formats
A content format refers to how the content is presented for distribution and engagement. It could be the text for a printed book, a digital magazine, or an SMS campaign. It could be the audio for a podcast. It might be the visuals for a video or infographic.
Keywords/key phrases
Keywords or key phrases describe the contents of an asset based on terms people use to search for that topic. They are the building blocks of a search engine optimization (SEO) strategy.
Owned media
Owned media distribution platforms operate under your brand’s control. You decide where and how the content appears, how it is accessed, and how it fits in with the audience’s experience. Your website is an example of owned media.
Shared/social media
Shared media, including social media, provides opportunities for marketers to post content, create and listen to conversations, and interact with people. These platforms are ultimately controlled by a third party, which can change its policies and procedures — or cease operations — and change the brand’s access to the audience on that platform.
Definitive resource: Is Social Media Even Worth It Anymore?
Native advertising
Native advertising is a paid third-party promotion format. The brand pays to publish content that matches the form, feel, function, and quality of the publishing outlet’s content.
Branded content
Wikipedia defines branded content as “content funded or outright produced by an advertiser.”Like native advertising, brands partner with relevant publishers that have the trust of their audience, which includes members of the brand’s target audience. This technique takes a more immersive, sensory-driven approach to storytelling, making the experience more entertaining, valuable, and memorable.
Definitive resource: Branded Content: Getting It Right
Paid search
These opportunities typically include relevant pay-per-click ads or other sponsored listings near the top of search engine results pages (SERP).
Influencer marketing
A growing marketing technique (and burgeoning industry on its own), influencer marketing programs enlist the assistance of people who have the ear of your target audience to bring attention to your content.
Content personalization
Personalization involves targeting content to individuals based on one or more of their characteristics — who they are, where they are, when, why, and how they access content, and what device they use to access it. Given the competition for online attention, marketers use this technique to make their content more findable, engaging, and personally resonant to their target audience and existing customers.
Definitive resource: How To Get Your Audience To Give Their Data for Personalized Content
Search engine optimization
SEO is a set of techniques and tactics to get content to rank as highly as possible on search engine results pages. The higher your content ranks, the more likely it is to be clicked on by the searcher.
Search engines continually fine-tune their technologies, algorithms, and ranking factors to provide users with a more satisfying experience. While these changes aren’t always transparent, familiarizing yourself with these SEO-related terms can help you focus your search strategy more precisely and enhance your content’s discoverability:
EEAT: Experience, expertise, trustworthiness, and authoritativeness are the four tenets of Google’s assessment for content quality and value. Aligning your content with these standards can improve your content’s rankings and discovery potential.
Search generative experience: SGE is Google’s latest experimental project and is likely to soon roll out for all searchers. It uses AI technology to provide detailed information snapshots at the top of its search engine results pages (SERPs). It’s designed to answer users’ queries without requiring them to click on links that would take them away from Google’s domain.
Retrieval augmented generation: To compile SGE snapshots, Google uses this AI-driven process to aggregate relevant source materials and serve the most contextually relevant answers to a user’s query.
Definitive resource: Update Your SEO Strategy for the AI Era
Content segmentation
Segmentation refers to categorizing content based on the target audience niche (similar to a buyer persona). Often affecting design, messaging, and presentation, content segmentation can improve engagement, better differentiate your brand from competitors, and improve content marketing’s effectiveness.
Sales terms
Account
Account is a sales target, opportunity, or customer group within the total addressable market.
Account-based marketing (ABM)
ABM is a B2B marketing approach where the brand identifies specific high-value (typically enterprise-level) organizations and creates content that targets employees at that company as a unit rather than individual members of the organization.
Buyers
Buyers are prospects — people who need or have an active interest in purchasing a service or product.
Consumers
In marketing, “consumers” are likely or intended customers for a business. “Buyers” also may be used.
Customers
While buyers and consumers are terms used to indicate interest or intent, customers are the individuals or organizations who have purchased from the business or brand.
Conversion
A conversion occurs when a consumer takes an action your organization designates as meaningful — purchasing a product, registering for an event or a gated asset, subscribing to a blog or newsletter, or joining a social media community — after engaging with the brand’s content.
Demand generation
Demand generation involves targeted, sales-centric marketing programs to drive awareness and interest in a company’s products and services. The greater the demand, the easier it is for sales to nurture that interest to convert.
Definitive resource: Demand Generation: Follow These Content Tips
Ideal customer profile
An ICP describes a targeted buyer (person or company) that most needs and is likely to buy your brand’s solution.
Journey map
This method involves identifying the information and assistance needed at each possible consumer interaction. It helps marketers deliver the most effective content to nurture them toward conversion.
Definitive resource: A 4-Step Customer Journey Map Process for Better Content Results
Lead
A lead is a person or business in your company’s sales or marketing database typically because they engaged with a branded asset or communication platform.
Lead scoring
Scoring is a marketing method of objectively and comparatively evaluating the quality and conversion potential of a prospect based on predetermined sales criteria.
Marketing-qualified lead
MQLs are potential customers whom the marketing team deems worthy of passing along to the sales team.
Sales funnel/funnel stage
The sales funnel defines a customer’s decision-making process from the time they enter the marketplace through the purchase (or decision not to buy). It’s commonly used to determine the most effective outreach approach to nurture conversions. (While marketers may also use funnel stages to define customer decision-making, content marketers are more likely to characterize these stages as progressions in a journey.)
Sales-qualified lead
An SQL occurs when the sales team determines the lead to be an active prospect. These leads are more likely to become customers than MQL.
Total addressable market
TAM refers to the total number of prospective buyers and/or potential revenue opportunities for a product or service.
Measurement terms
A/B testing
This method pits two pieces of content against each other to gauge comparative performance. Also known as split testing, it’s a randomized experiment where two possible version options — two web pages, two subject lines, two design strategies, two content angles, etc. — are presented on equal scale to different viewers.
Analytics
Marketo defines analytics as managing and studying metrics data to determine the ROI of marketing efforts like calls to action, blog posts, channel performance, and thought leadership pieces, as well as to identify opportunities for improvement.
Key performance indicators
KPIs are standard, agreed-on measurements for assessing progress against your goals. KPIs include average conversion rates, number of leads, quality of leads, revenue per new customer, etc.
Metrics
In contrast to KPIs, metrics are the business-as-usual measurements that quantify things that add value, such as page views or likes on a social media post. They don’t focus on the most critical goals. Think of these as the what-needs-to-be-true numbers so the KPIs can be achieved.
Definitive resource: 23 Measurement Definitions Every Content Marketer Should Know
Return on investment
ROI broadly describes the profitable actions and business growth derived from the company’s marketing initiatives. Knowing the expected ROI for content campaigns enables marketers to determine appropriate budget allocations, maximize the efficiency of each expense, and demonstrate the impact to executive stakeholders. However, though it’s (arguably) the most critical measurement of a content program’s effectiveness, it can be difficult to calculate and quantify, let alone prove definitively.
Definitive resource: Why You Struggle To Prove Content ROI — and How To Settle Up (or Down)
Subscribers
In content marketing, subscribers are audience members who provide personal data to receive valuable content ongoing. It’s a core metric to assess content marketing’s value.
Definitive resource: How a Subscribed Audience Can Draw a Crowd for Your Next Content Product
Understanding the language is the first step to success
While this glossary is not a comprehensive list, it should clarify commonly confused or misunderstood industry terms and concepts. If you would like us to add other content marketing constructs, let us know on social.
Want more content marketing tips, insights, and examples? Subscribe to workday or weekly emails from CMI.
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
The study aggregates and compares referral traffic from a massive dataset from an opt-in panel of people who shared their URLs between January 2023 and January 2024.
The results reveal opportunities for your brand to gain more traffic without requiring a blessing from the Google gods.
Focus on referral traffic to long-tail websites
SparkToro explored two categories of referral traffic:
The 170 most visited sites in the United States
“Long-tail” sites (i.e., all the rest)
Since most of your websites aren’t in the top 170, I’ll stick to the findings about long-tail sites. (Note: Don’t confuse the term “long-tail sites” with “long-tail keywords.” While the phrasing is similar, they aren’t related.)
Keep in mind that SparkToro’s definition of referrals goes beyond clicks on links or ads. It includes any visits that occurred during a browsing session — a period of active use. If someone listened to a brand’s podcast and typed the company’s URL into their browser, for example, the SparkToro research counts that as a referral.
Which sites send referrals to long-tail sites?
Google dominates referrals to long-tail sites, sending 72.48% of all referral traffic. So, making Google the center of your SEO strategy still makes the most sense.
But don’t stop there. If you do, you’ll miss out on lower-competition traffic opportunities.
Consider the next most popular referring sites:
Bing and Microsoft sites (5.20%)
Facebook (3.36%)
Reddit (2.39%)
YouTube (2.18%)
DuckDuckGo (2.06%)
Yahoo (1.99%)
Cisco Duo and Okta (1.01%)
LinkedIn (0.62%)
Amazon (0.48%)
Instagram (0.43%)
Instructure (0.33%)
Pinterest (0.32%)
GitHub (0.29%)
Discord (0.24%)
Wikipedia (0.18%)
Twitch (0.17%)
MSN (0.16%)
Fandom (0.12%)
eBay (0.10%)
OpenAI (0.10%).
But don’t stop there. The SparkToro report details the most generous referral sites for long tails. These domains send the most visitors to the long tail sites per 1,000 unique visitors to their own site. (In contrast, some sites that get a lot of traffic hardly send any referrals to other sites. WikiHow.com, for example, sends only 73 out of 1,000 users to other sites.)
Google remains the top referrer, followed by:
DuckDuckGo
Bing
Yahoo
Facebook
Instructure
Twitter sites
Shopify
Reddit
YouTube
LinkedIn
DeviantArt
Syf
FoxNews
Pinterest
Tumblr
Patreon
GitHub
You can use this data to update your search strategy by focusing on the most relevant referring sites. For example, unless you’re an educational brand, optimizing your content to get linked on Instructure.com wouldn’t offer any value.
Let’s explore some tips to help your content surface in the most generous referral sites.
Optimize for referrals from Bing and Yahoo
Bing doesn’t follow the Google ranking model. (You can test this by putting the same search phrase into both search engines). Its algorithm relies on different factors, or at least different nuances of the same factors.
This Semrush article explains what Bing considers when surfacing content for searchers. Bing doesn’t use semantic search to understand queries. Instead, it uses OpenAI technology to understand the context and user intent. Backlinks, both the quantity and anchor text, matter to Bing. It also favors links from .edu and .gov domains.
Bing emphasizes on-site optimization elements, including title tags, meta descriptions, headings, etc., and prefers exact-match domains. Social media performance also affects rankings.
Optimize for Bing by using those preferences. Focus on using exact keywords, not variations of the keyword, in your content, titles, meta descriptions, etc. Use an OpenAI tool like ChatGPT to assess whether your content hits the mark. (Paste in a copy of your content and ask ChatGPT to identify the keywords.)
These tips also work for discovery in Yahoo, which uses Bing’s search engine.
Get moving with DuckDuckGo
DuckDuckGo is a free search engine that protects the privacy of its users. Unlike Google, it doesn’t track a user’s data to deliver a more personalized experience. Its algorithm is simpler, and its results and referral links are more straightforward. It shows ads based on the searcher’s keywords, not their personal data.
Elegant Themes shares several tips to optimize your content for DuckDuckGo:
Add location data to your website.
Claim Apple Maps listings.
Submit your sitemap to multiple search engines.
Location data indicates whether your business is relevant to the searcher’s location based on their device. Ensure your site includes your relevant business addresses. Also, make sure to claim your spot(s) on the Apple Map.
Like Yahoo, DuckDuckGo indexes websites using data from Bing and other search engines, along with its DuckDuckBot crawler.
Don’t forget about Facebook
Last year, Facebook made headlines when it changed its algorithm, causing referral traffic to top news sites to plunge (a 62% drop between August 2022 and August 2023).
Yet Facebook remains a viable source of referral traffic. SparkToro’s research ranks the platform’s referrals per 1,000 unique users higher than any other social media platform.
To make the most of Facebook, share links to your relevant content. Customize the title, description, and thumbnail for your target audience and purpose.
Go all in on OpenAI
Though OpenAI.com — the parent site of ChatGPT — ranks No. 22 on the referral traffic list, the growth of generative AI likely means its impact will be higher in the coming year and beyond.
So, how do you get your site’s links to appear in a ChatGPT reply? I went straight to the source to find out. Here’s some of what ChatGPT shared:
Incorporate relevant keywords naturally into your content.
Develop comprehensive resources, such as guides, tutorials, or in-depth articles.
Include internal links to your other relevant content.
Ask the audience to share and link, as these signals increase the chance of your content being referenced in ChatGPT.
Encourage user engagement through comments, questions, and discussions, as ChatGPT may reference those responses.
You can pare its advice to this — the mantra for all good content marketing: Write quality, in-depth content that provides value to an audience and motivates them to share it with their networks.
Monitor the impact
I’ve only scratched the surface of expansion strategies for your referral traffic strategy. Look closely at the list to see if any of the top referring sites (LinkedIn and YouTube) already relate to your distribution priorities. Double down on the work you’re doing there. If you’re growing a community around your brand, pay attention to Reddit, Discord, and Patreon.
Three months after implementing the changes in your referral strategy, look closely at your site’s analytics. Did your referral sources change in that quarter? Which platforms deliver more traffic than they did three months ago? Does one platform deliver a higher percentage of traffic?
If referral traffic sources haven’t changed significantly, don’t give up. It can take time to move up in rankings and earn links. Wait another six months — if you still don’t see an impact, consider bigger changes.
Want more content marketing tips, insights, and examples? Subscribe to workday or weekly emails from CMI.
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute
One of the more exciting trends in marketing is the rise in interest in engaging employees as influencers and content creators.
Recent research from agency giant Ogilvy finds that 89% of C-suite B2B marketers recognize that tapping employees as influencers “holds immense value for their businesses.”
As a result, I see just about everyone rushing to create content to help the business.
That small earthquake you just felt was the collective shudder of marketing practitioners in B2B businesses across the planet. They’re worried about little things like consistency, tone, story, and quality. You know, everything that makes your content and marketing strategy work.
Is it possible to scale your efforts in a way that enables more content creators across the organization without sacrificing the “little” things? I think there is — and the model comes from the entertainment industry.
Think like a movie director
If you ask an actor or screenwriter about their career goals, they’ll almost always say, “But what I really want to do is direct.” This Hollywood trope is so prevalent that someone put it on a T-shirt.
Ironically, the director may participate the least in the creative work. A director’s role isn’t to write, act, play music, edit, or even point a camera. The director’s job is to direct and enable the individual artists’ contributions to the film product.
Yes, some directors do double duty by writing or acting. But the director’s function remains clear: Guide, enable, and manage a team of storytellers to produce a powerful and engaging work.
In a great film, the words, pictures, actors, costumes, music, and editing mesh so completely that removing any of them would pull the piece apart. Transcendent directors do this so successfully that their signature style shines through even when they use different contributors for each project.
Why content teams should direct
B2B content and marketing teams would benefit from embracing the director role.
Take this example from a B2B company I worked with recently. The company’s content leader told me her team — a content studio — had finally earned enough internal respect that it became the go-to team for content and design.
But that achievement came with a frustrating new responsibility. More and more people saw them as a bottleneck preventing the release of more content. While the content leader wanted her team to play a more important role, she grew concerned that the landslide of content requests would lead the team to produce unremarkable content.
She asked me, “How do we become more strategic to the business without adding more headcount? How can we take on more content without sacrificing quality?”
Without a doubt, scalability is the biggest challenge in content marketing. The ability to “create enough content” gets mentioned as one of the top challenges in CMI’s content marketing research year after year. Adding more writers, designers, podcasters, and other skilled staff never solves that challenge.
Here’s the thing: The ability to grow doesn’t lie in the capability to produce enough content.
The ability to grow lies in turning the content strategy team into more than a collection of creators skilled at words or pictures who create content assets.
To scale, the content team must enable every other part of the business to do the same. You need a team that wants to direct.
The content team’s remit must expand into the role of director. That means it:
Sets the standard
Prioritizes the content
Guides and enables the organization to tell a consistent story.
“Now wait just a doggone second,” you say. “How can a team of people all act as a director? Isn’t the director one person?”
Yes, that’s true in the movie business, and it might be true in smaller organizations. But in a larger, more siloed business, the function of the content team must expand to include acting as a movie director.
In this scenario, the team doesn’t exist to create content on demand. It enables the broader organization to develop and integrate its messages into a common voice.
Content team members may do double duty as writers, editors, or designers. But that’s not their primary purpose.
They don’t simply provide words and pictures for a sales professional to copy and paste into a document that gets attached to a customer email.
The content team’s new remit should include guiding, shaping, and developing the sales professional’s ability to deliver their best story. Occasionally, that creator might be someone on the content strategy team. But in most cases, it will be the salesperson working from a common script.
My advice to any content leader looking to scale a team and become more strategic is to buy every content team member a T-shirt that says, “But what we really want to do is direct.”
Then, coach the team to stop acting as an internal content production studio and start directing all enterprise content regardless of who creates it.
Scale to director level with these 6 responsibilities
To facilitate this evolution, you must redefine the team charter to direct others in creating content by setting common standards, guidelines, and playbooks. And the new charter requires the content team to take on new roles, responsibilities, and functions.
I see six primary areas of responsibility for the team. Each balances individual contribution with skills to foster in the broader organization.
What do those responsibilities look like?
This graphic summarizes the six responsibilities and processes the content team should handle.
1. Strategy: Planning and prioritization
A movie director first works with department heads to create a charter, purpose, goals, and focus for the production. Similarly, the content team needs to define a charter for how content will be created, managed, promoted, and measured (in other words, a content plan). What does collaboration look like, and how will it happen? A great director provides a consistent storyboard, shot calendar, timeline, and plan so everybody knows what gets created and when.
Likewise, a content team must help the business set content objectives, distribute resources, and balance priorities and business needs.
2. Creation: Raw creation and management
Once you have prioritization, scheduling, and resource planning under control, the process becomes less linear yet more efficient.
Does that seem confusing? Think of it this way: A movie director might send one team off to shoot what’s called b-roll. (Think establishing shots, crowd shots, or filler shots that establish context.)
This kind of filming can happen at any time (not just when it’s needed) because everything is planned. The director describes what’s required but doesn’t have to provide it or even be present when these scenes are filmed.
Likewise, a great content manager might lead (but not create) content captured by someone in account services. The content team can remix the assets the account services staff captures into case studies, marketing pieces, advertising, or thought leadership.
The person in account services knows what to do because the content team member provided a complete “shot list,” set of interview questions, etc.
All this planning, scheduling, and architecting allows more people to create raw content — the components of many content experiences.
3. Production: Asset assembly and packaging
A centralized method of organizing, prioritizing, and scheduling allows for a detailed bill of materials for the designers, production artists, and other creative teams who will put the assets together for the finished experiences. Filmmakers make great use of technology to organize, approve, and move raw content elements into finished pieces.
Content strategy teams can do the same. I see successful teams using digital asset management and calendaring/collaboration tools to organize raw content elements into a “single source of the truth” for assembling customer experiences.
When all the elements come together, it becomes faster and easier for anyone creating content to know what’s available and approved and how it can be made available to broader audiences across the organization. Decisions can be made to direct people to share the content in their own words or exactly as requested.
It allows internal and external teams to maintain consistency, creativity, and quality when working from a consistent supply of raw content.
4. Merchandising: Scheduling and distribution
Most companies mistakenly equate the number of content assets with the number of digital assets. They waste time having to “undo” digital assets to retrieve content for repurposing.
In a film, a product asset manager plays a critical role. They ensure every asset (film, audio, video, photos, and so on) gets tagged and routed to the artists who need to create content with it.
Likewise, a great content team ensures both raw content and the resulting digital assets are easily findable, routed correctly, and available for reuse, repurposing, and activation.
5. Activation: Publishing and promotion
The movie director’s job doesn’t stop when the film is “in the can.”
While the studios typically handle a film’s distribution and promotion, directors often have creative input into the marketing, trailer preview, and even release date.
For example, Academy Award-winning director Christopher Nolan’s strong commitment to IMAX film and cameras means IMAX theaters get prioritized for his movies.
Likewise, great content teams work to ensure a strategic marketing effort to promote the content. For example, the team shouldn’t stop producing a thought leadership presentation. It should also create a how-to-deliver guide so the sales teams, executives, and other employees can use the presentation to its fullest potential.
6. Measurement: Insight and improvement
This final responsibility may seem, at first, to be the furthest from the film metaphor. Content should be evaluated on how well it was activated, promoted, and used to benefit the business. That responsibility usually lies within whichever business function was responsible for distributing and using the content created.
You might be surprised to learn how much technology and data are used in film productions to create more efficient scheduling, creation, and post-production efforts.
Similarly, the content team should analyze data to find ways to create a more efficient content creation, management, production, and distribution process.
Content strategy as artful, efficient production
These six areas of responsibility form the core of a content operation that can empower many people to create, distribute, and leverage content at scale. The content team acting as director sets standards, develops playbooks, molds the scripts, chooses the lenses, fosters the talent, guides the process, and helps structure the output.
Like movie, television, or stage directors, your content team may sometimes serve as the storyteller. But it should always enable people throughout the organization to tell the business’ stories.
By directing enterprise content, your team can influence the vision, words, story, and experience to deliver a business strategy poised for box office success.
It’s your story. Tell it well.
Subscribe to workday or weekly CMI emails to get Rose-Colored Glasses in your inbox each week.
HANDPICKED RELATED CONTENT:
Cover image by Joseph Kalinowski/Content Marketing Institute